Leica Viva Tech Ref_en Ref En

User Manual: Leica Viva TechRef_en

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 1641 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Leica Viva Series
Technical Reference Manual
Version 1.0
English
Viva Series, Introduction 2
Introduction
Purchase Congratulations on the purchase of a Leica SmartWorx Viva instrument.
)To use the product in a permitted manner, please refer to the detailed safety directions in
the CS10/CS15 User Manual and the GS10/GS15 User Manual.
Product identification The type and serial number of your product are indicated on the type plate.
Enter the type and serial number in your manual and always refer to this information when
you need to contact your agency or Leica Geosystems authorised service workshop.
Symbols The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings:
Trademarks • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and
other countries
• CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation
• Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• SD is a trademark of the SD Card Association
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Type: _______________
Serial No.: _______________
Type Description
)Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable
the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient manner.
Viva Series, Introduction 3
Validity of this manual • This manual applies to SmartWorx Viva. For the Lite version of SmartWorx Viva, some
functionality described in this manual is not available.
• This manual applies to the Leica Viva Series. Differences between GPS and TPS are
marked and described.
Available
documentation Name Description/Format
CS10/CS15 User
Manual
All instructions required to operate the product to a basic
level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview
of the product together with technical data and safety direc-
tions.
99
GS10/GS15 User
Manual
All instructions required to operate the product to a basic
level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview
of the product together with technical data and safety direc-
tions.
99
Name Description/Format
Viva GNSS Getting
Started Guide
Describes the general working of the product in standard use.
Intended as a quick reference field guide.
99
Viva TPS Getting
Started Guide
Describes the general working of the product in standard use.
Intended as a quick reference field guide.
99
Viva Series Tech-
nical Reference
Manual
Overall comprehensive guide to the product and application
functions. Included are detailed descriptions of special soft-
ware/hardware settings and software/hardware functions
intended for technical specialists.
9
Viva Series, Introduction 4
Refer to the following resources for all CS10/CS15 documentation/software:
•the SmartWorx Viva DVD
• https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com
Viva Series, Table of Contents 5
Table of Contents
In this manual Chapter Page
1 Configurable Keys 30
1.1 Hot Keys 30
1.2 Favourites Key 32
2 TPS Settings 34
2.1 Leica TPS Favourites 34
2.2 Check Point 37
2.3 Joystick 40
2.4 Turn Instrument to Hz/V 42
2.5 Orientation With Compass 44
3Main Menu 46
3.1 Main Menu Functions 46
3.2 Go to Work! 48
3.3 Jobs & Data 49
3.4 Instrument 50
3.5 User 52
4 Jobs & Data - Jobs 53
4.1 Overview 53
4.2 Creating a New Job 54
4.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job 63
4.4 Choosing a Job 67
4.5 Managing Job Codes 68
Viva Series, Table of Contents 6
5 Jobs & Data - Data 72
5.1 Overview 72
5.2 Accessing Data Management 73
5.3 Point Management 77
5.3.1 Creating a New Point 77
5.3.2 Editing a Point 82
5.3.3 Mean Page 86
5.4 Line/Area Management 92
5.4.1 Overview 92
5.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area 93
5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area 98
5.5 Data Log 102
5.6 Point Sorting and Filters 104
5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas 104
5.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter 111
5.6.3 Stakeout Filter 113
6 Codelists 114
6.1 Overview 114
6.2 Accessing Codelist Management 115
6.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist 116
6.4 Managing Codes 117
6.4.1 Accessing Codes 117
6.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code 119
6.5 Managing Code Groups 122
Viva Series, Table of Contents 7
7 Coordinate Systems 124
7.1 Overview 124
7.2 Accessing Coordinate System Management 126
7.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing 128
7.4 Transformations 131
7.4.1 Accessing Transformation Management 131
7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation 133
7.5 Ellipsoids 135
7.5.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management 135
7.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid 137
7.6 Projections 138
7.6.1 Accessing Projection Management 138
7.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection 141
7.7 Geoid Models 143
7.7.1 Overview 143
7.7.2 Accessing Geoid Model Management 144
7.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage
Device / Internal Memory 146
7.8 CSCS Models 147
8 Jobs & Data - Import data 148
8.1 Overview 148
8.2 Importing Data in ASCII/GSI Format 151
8.3 Importing Data in DXF Format 156
9 Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 158
9.1 Overview 158
Viva Series, Table of Contents 8
9.2 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format 160
9.3 Exporting Data in DXF Format 162
9.4 Exporting Data in LandXML Format 167
9.5 Exporting Data in FBK/RW5/RAW Format 170
9.6 Copy Data Between Jobs 175
10 Instrument - TPS settings 177
10.1 Measure mode & target 177
10.1.1 Measure & Target Settings 177
10.1.2 Targets 181
10.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target 183
10.2 Prism search settings 185
10.3 Atmospheric corrections 189
10.4 Level bubble & compensator 192
10.5 Quality control & offsets 194
10.6 Lights 199
11 Instrument - GPS settings 201
11.1 RTK rover wizard 201
11.1.1 Overview 201
11.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile 203
11.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile 204
11.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile 205
11.2 Satellite tracking 206
11.3 Antenna heights 211
11.3.1 Rover Antenna Heights 211
11.3.2 Antennas 213
11.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna 214
Viva Series, Table of Contents 9
11.4 Quality control 216
11.5 Raw data logging 226
12 Antenna Heights 229
12.1 Overview 229
12.2 Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP 231
12.3 Determining Antenna Heights 233
12.3.1 Pillar Setup 233
12.3.2 Tripod Setup 238
12.3.3 Pole Setup 240
12.4 SmartStation Setup 242
13 Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 244
13.1 Starting the TPS Connection Wizard 244
13.2 Connection Using Cable 246
13.3 Connection Using Bluetooth 248
13.4 Connection Using Internal Radio 250
14 Instrument connections - All other connections 251
14.1 Accessing Configuration Connections 251
14.2 CS Internet / GS Internet 253
14.3 GPS Rover / Base Sensor 258
14.4 ASCII Input 260
14.4.1 Configuration of an ASCII Input Connection 260
14.4.2 Configuration of a Command to the Device 264
14.5 GPS Hidden Pt 265
14.6 Export Job 273
14.7 RTK Rover 275
Viva Series, Table of Contents 10
14.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection 275
14.7.2 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio 292
14.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference
Network Applications 293
14.8 Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2 296
14.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection 296
14.9 NMEA 1 / NMEA 2 302
14.10 Remote (OWI) 310
14.11 Total Station 313
14.12 GSI Output 315
15 Instrument connections - All other connections , Cntrl.. Key 324
15.1 Digital Cellular Phones 324
15.1.1 Overview 324
15.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection 325
15.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection 329
15.2 Modems 333
15.3 Radios for GPS Real-Time 336
15.4 Radios for Remote Control 340
15.5 RS232 342
15.6 Internet 343
15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial 348
15.7.1 Accessing Dial-up Connection List 348
15.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial 350
15.8 Configuring the Server to Connect 352
15.8.1 Accessing Server to Connect 352
15.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server 354
Viva Series, Table of Contents 11
16 Configuration of Devices 356
16.1 Devices 356
16.1.1 Overview 356
16.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones 357
16.1.3 Modems 359
16.1.4 Radios for Real-Time 360
16.1.5 Radios for Remote Control 362
16.1.6 RS232 363
16.1.7 Hidden Point Measurement Devices 364
16.1.8 GPRS / Internet Devices 366
16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices 368
16.3 Creating/Editing a Device 371
17 Instrument - Instrument status info 375
17.1 Status Functions 375
17.2 Battery & memory 378
17.3 Satellite tracking 380
17.4 RTK data link status 385
17.5 Current GPS position 394
17.6 Raw data logging 397
17.7 Connection status 401
17.7.1 Connection Status 401
17.7.2 Internet 402
17.7.3 ASCII Input 403
17.7.4 RTK Data Link Status 404
17.7.5 Remote (OWI) 405
17.8 TPS current station info 407
Viva Series, Table of Contents 12
18 Instrument - Base settings 409
18.1 Satellite tracking 409
18.2 Base raw data logging 415
19 User - Work settings 418
19.1 ID templates 418
19.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration 418
19.1.2 Creating/Editing an ID Template 422
19.2 Coding & linework 426
19.3 My Survey Screen 431
19.4 Hot keys & favourites 439
20 Coding 442
20.1 Overview 442
20.2 Thematical Coding 446
20.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist 446
20.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist 451
20.3 Free Coding 452
20.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist 452
20.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input 455
20.4 Quick Coding 456
20.5 SmartCodes 458
20.5.1 Overview 458
20.5.2 Configuring SmartCodes 459
20.5.3 Code Block 464
20.6 Code and Attribute Mismatch 468
Viva Series, Table of Contents 13
20.6.1 Code Mismatch 468
20.6.2 Attribute Mismatch 469
21 Linework 471
21.1 Overview 471
21.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field 472
21.3 Performing Linework with Thematical Coding 473
22 User - Working style wizard 479
22.1 Overview 479
22.2 Accessing the Working Style Wizard 480
22.3 Choosing a Different Working Style 481
22.4 Creating a New Working Style 482
22.5 Editing a Working Style 483
23 User - System settings 484
23.1 Regional settings 484
23.2 SmartWorx options 494
23.3 Screen & audio 496
24 User - Tools & other utilities 499
24.1 Transfer user objects 499
24.2 Uploading System Files 502
24.3 Load licence keys 504
24.4 Format memory devices 506
24.5 View contents of ASCII files 508
24.6 About Leica Viva 509
Viva Series, Table of Contents 14
25 TPS Functions 511
25.1 EDM 511
25.2 Prism Search Methods 512
25.2.1 Automatic aiming 512
25.2.2 PowerSearch 515
25.3 Follow Moving Prisms - Lock 517
25.4 RCS 519
25.5 EGL 520
25.6 Illumination 522
26 Calculator 523
26.1 Accessing the Calculator 523
26.2 Configuring the Calculator 524
26.3 Using the Calculator 526
26.3.1 RPN Mode 526
26.3.2 Standard Mode 528
26.3.3 Description of Softkeys 530
27 NTRIP via Internet 535
27.1 Configuring Access to the Internet 535
27.2 Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover 538
28 MapView Interactive Display Feature 542
28.1 Overview 542
28.2 Accessing MapView 543
28.3 Configuring MapView 544
28.4 MapView Components 549
28.4.1 Screen Area 549
Viva Series, Table of Contents 15
28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar 552
28.4.3 Point Symbols 555
28.5 Selecting Points, Lines and Areas 556
28.6 Viewing Results 558
29 Applications - General 561
30 COGO 563
30.1 Overview 563
30.2 Accessing COGO 565
30.3 Configuring COGO 568
30.4 COGO Calculation - Inverse Method 575
30.4.1 Selecting the Inverse Method 575
30.4.2 Point to Point and Current Position to Point 579
30.4.3 Point to Line and Current Position to Line 582
30.4.4 Point to Arc and Current Position to Arc 587
30.5 COGO Calculation - Traverse Method 593
30.6 COGO Calculation - Intersection Method 600
30.6.1 Selecting the Intersection Method 600
30.6.2 Intersection with Double Bearing 606
30.6.3 Intersection with Double Distance 611
30.6.4 Intersection with Bearing - Distance 616
30.6.5 Intersection with By Points 621
30.6.6 Intersection with TPS Observation - TPS Observation 626
30.7 COGO Calculation - Line/Arc Calculations Method 629
30.7.1 Selecting the Line/Arc Method 629
30.7.2 Arc Calculation 636
30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point 643
Viva Series, Table of Contents 16
30.7.4 Segment an Arc 649
30.7.5 Segment a Line 650
30.8 COGO Calculation - Area Division 652
30.8.1 Selecting the Division Method 652
30.8.2 Choosing an Area to be Divided 660
30.8.3 Dividing an Area 662
30.8.4 Results of the Area Division 665
30.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale 668
30.9.1 Selecting the Shift, Rotate & Scale Method and the Points
to be Moved 668
30.9.2 Manually Entered 677
30.9.3 Matching Points 685
30.10 Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations 692
30.11 Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets 694
31 Determine Coordinate System 698
31.1 Overview 698
31.2 Selecting the Transformation Method 700
31.3 The Normal Method 705
31.3.1 Configuring the Normal Method 705
31.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System 708
31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System 722
31.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching
Points 723
31.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep 725
31.3.6 Transformation Results for Classic 3D 727
31.4 The One Point Localisation Method 730
31.4.1 Determining a New Coordinate System 730
Viva Series, Table of Contents 17
31.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth 745
31.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor 747
31.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor 749
32 QuickGrid 751
32.1 Selecting the Transformation Method 751
32.2 Determining a New Coordinate System 757
33 Reference Line 763
33.1 Overview 763
33.2 Accessing Reference Line 770
33.3 Configuring Reference Line 773
33.4 Choosing Reference Lines/Arcs 782
33.4.1 Overview 782
33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc 783
33.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job 787
33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Slopes 790
33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts 794
33.5 Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc 799
33.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc 812
33.7 Gridstaking to a Reference Line/Arc 819
33.8 Staking to Alignment 828
33.8.1 Overview 828
33.8.2 Accessing Staking an Alignment & Choosing an Alignment 830
33.8.3 Stake Parameters 832
33.8.4 Staking Operation 835
33.8.5 Results of Stakeout 840
Viva Series, Table of Contents 18
34 Reference Plane 842
34.1 Overview 842
34.2 Accessing Reference Plane 850
34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference Plane 853
34.4 Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job 859
34.5 Configuring Reference Plane 860
34.6 Measuring Points to a Reference Plane 864
34.7 Scanning a Plane 867
35 Roads - General 871
35.1 Overview 871
35.2 Accessing Roads Applications 875
35.3 Configuring Roads Applications 879
35.3.1 Configuration Settings 879
35.3.2 Road Stringline - Info Page 904
35.3.3 Road Individual Stringline - Info Page 909
35.3.4 Road Cross Slope - Info Page 914
35.3.5 Road Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page 920
35.3.6 Road Crown - Info Page 926
35.3.7 Road Layer - Info Page 931
35.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page 936
35.3.9 Rail - Info Page 938
35.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page 941
35.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht) 944
35.4 Jobs & Design Data 946
35.4.1 Choosing a Job 946
35.4.2 Working with a DTM Job 947
Viva Series, Table of Contents 19
35.4.3 Design Data 948
35.4.4 Viewing and Editing the Design Data 953
35.5 Working with Shifts 963
35.6 Tasks 972
35.7 Understanding Terms and Expressions 974
35.7.1 Road - Basic Terms 974
35.7.2 Road - Horizontal and Vertical Geometry Elements 976
35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements 977
35.7.4 Road - Stake Offset and Stake Height Difference 981
35.7.5 Road - Chainage or Station Equations 983
35.7.6 Road - Working Corridor 986
35.7.7 Road - Extension of the Centreline 988
35.7.8 Road/Rail - Working with Heights 989
35.7.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track 990
35.7.10 Rail - Working with Multiple Tracks 994
35.7.11 Rail - Check Elements and Stakeout Elements 996
35.7.12 Rail - Working with Offsets 998
35.7.13 Tunnel - Basic Terms 999
35.7.14 Tunnel - Elements for Stake Out and Check Measurements 1002
35.7.15 Tunnel - Shifts 1007
36 Roads - Alignment Editor 1010
36.1 Basic Terms 1010
36.2 Starting Alignment Editor 1012
36.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor 1012
36.2.2 Creating a New Alignment 1013
36.2.3 Modifying an Existing Alignment 1015
Viva Series, Table of Contents 20
36.2.4 Importing Alignment Data 1017
36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu 1019
36.3 Configuring Alignment Editor 1020
36.4 Edit Horizontal Alignments 1023
36.4.1 Overview 1023
36.4.2 Editing the Start Point 1025
36.4.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Horizontal Alignment 1027
36.5 Edit Vertical Alignments 1038
36.5.1 Overview 1038
36.5.2 Editing the Start Point 1039
36.5.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Vertical Alignment 1040
36.6 Edit Cross Section Templates 1048
36.6.1 Overview 1048
36.6.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template 1049
36.6.3 Add/Edit a Layer 1051
36.7 Edit Cross Section Assignments 1056
36.7.1 Overview 1056
36.7.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Assignment 1057
36.8 Edit Chainage Equation 1059
36.8.1 Overview 1059
36.8.2 Creating/editing a Chainage Equation 1060
36.9 Convert to RoadRunner Job 1061
37 Roads - Road 1063
37.1 Creating a New Road Job 1063
37.2 Defining the Work 1065
37.2.1 Defining the Method and the Task 1065
Viva Series, Table of Contents 21
37.2.2 Selecting a Line 1077
37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings 1080
37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left 1091
37.3 Staking/Checking the Road 1093
37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen 1093
37.3.2 Measuring Points by Chainage and Offset 1102
37.3.3 Measuring Stringlines Relative to a Centreline 1104
37.3.4 Measuring Individual Stringlines without Centrelines 1106
37.3.5 Measuring Cross Slopes 1109
37.3.6 Measuring Manual Slopes and Design Slopes 1111
37.3.7 Measuring Road Crowns 1113
37.3.8 Measuring Road Layers 1115
37.3.9 Measuring Digital Terrain Models (DTM) 1116
37.4 The Tools Menu 1117
37.4.1 Overview 1117
37.4.2 Use heights from DTM 1118
37.4.3 Apply current chainage 1120
37.4.4 Get current angle to alignment 1121
37.4.5 Individual point 1123
37.4.6 Additional layer information 1124
37.4.7 Box / base definition 1125
37.4.8 Get current slope 1130
37.4.9 Reset slope to design 1134
37.4.10 Shift reference line 1135
37.4.11 Re-initialise search 1139
Viva Series, Table of Contents 22
38 Roads - Rail 1141
38.1 Creating a New Rail Job 1141
38.1.1 Overview 1141
38.1.2 Installing all necessary Software 1143
38.1.3 Importing the Track Design with LEICA Geo Office 1144
38.1.4 Loading the Track Design onto the Instrument 1159
38.2 Defining the Work 1160
38.3 Staking/Checking the Track 1163
38.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen 1163
38.3.2 Offset Library 1177
38.3.3 Working with Pendular Displacements 1179
38.4 The Tools Menu 1180
38.4.1 Overview 1180
38.4.2 Use heights from DTM 1181
38.4.3 Apply current chainage 1183
38.4.4 Individual point 1184
38.4.5 Second point of cant 1185
39 Roads - Tunnel 1187
39.1 Creating a New Tunnel Job 1187
39.1.1 Preparing Design Data 1187
39.1.2 Tunnel Centreline 1188
39.1.3 Design Profiles 1189
39.1.4 Data Transfer to Instrument 1192
39.2 Defining the Work 1193
39.3 Staking/Checking the Tunnel 1199
39.3.1 Overview 1199
Viva Series, Table of Contents 23
39.3.2 Stake face 1214
39.3.3 Stake profile and Check profile 1219
39.3.4 Scan profile 1221
40 Sets of Angles 1229
40.1 Overview 1229
40.2 Sets of Angles 1232
40.2.1 Accessing Sets of Angles 1232
40.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles 1235
40.2.3 Managing the Points List 1237
40.2.4 Measuring the New Points 1240
40.2.5 Measuring the Sets 1244
40.2.6 Calculations - Calculating Angles and Distances in Two
Faces 1247
40.2.7 Calculations - Viewing Angle and Distance Results in Two
Faces 1249
40.2.8 Calculations - Viewing Results in One Face 1253
40.3 Monitoring 1255
41 Setup 1259
41.1 Overview 1259
41.2 Accessing Setup 1262
41.3 Configuring Setup 1263
41.4 Set Station Point 1269
41.5 Enter Station Information 1272
41.6 Setup Reminder 1273
41.7 Setup Methods 1275
41.7.1 Set orientation and Known backsight 1275
Viva Series, Table of Contents 24
41.7.2 Multiple backsights 1282
41.7.3 Transfer height 1286
41.7.4 Resection 1287
41.7.5 Orientate to line 1288
41.8 Setup Results 1291
41.9 Finding a Target Point 1300
42 Stakeout 1301
42.1 Overview 1301
42.2 Accessing Stakeout 1305
42.3 Configuring Stakeout 1307
42.4 Staking Out 1316
42.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded 1325
42.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM 1328
43 Base Menu - Start base 1331
43.1 Start base over known point 1331
43.2 Start base over last setup 1334
43.3 Start base over any point 1335
44 Survey - General 1336
44.1 Surveying Points 1336
44.1.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations 1336
44.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations 1340
44.2 Adding Annotations 1344
44.3 Timed Measurements 1346
44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 1348
44.4.1 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 1348
Viva Series, Table of Contents 25
44.4.2 Initialise while Moving 1349
44.4.3 Initialise while Static 1350
44.4.4 Initialise on Known Point 1351
45 Survey - General 1353
46 Survey - Auto Points 1357
46.1 Overview 1357
46.2 Configuring Auto Points 1359
46.3 Measuring Auto Points 1370
46.4 Offset Points of Auto Points 1375
46.4.1 Overview 1375
46.4.2 Configuring Offset Points 1379
47 Survey Cross Section 1384
47.1 Overview 1384
47.2 Accessing Survey Cross Section 1387
47.3 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template 1389
47.4 Surveying Cross Sections 1393
47.5 Configuring Survey Cross Section 1398
48 Survey - Hidden Points 1401
48.1 Overview 1401
48.2 Hidden Point Methods 1404
48.2.1 Bearing & Distance 1404
48.2.2 Using 2 Bearings 1405
48.2.3 Using 2 Distances 1406
48.2.4 Chainage & Offset 1407
48.2.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance 1408
Viva Series, Table of Contents 26
48.3 Hidden Point Measurements 1409
48.4 Hidden Point Results 1413
48.5 Computing an Azimuth 1416
48.5.1 Using the Sun 1416
48.5.2 Using Auxiliary Point 1418
48.6 Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances 1421
48.7 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights 1424
49 Hidden Point 1427
49.1 Overview 1427
49.2 Accessing Hidden Point and Measuring 1429
49.3 Configuring Hidden Point 1433
50 Survey - Remote Point 1436
50.1 Overview 1436
50.2 Accessing Remote Point 1438
50.3 Configuring Remote Point 1440
51 Traverse 1442
51.1 Overview 1442
51.2 Accessing Traverse 1444
51.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse 1445
51.4 Selecting an Existing Traverse 1447
51.5 Traverse Data 1449
51.6 Configuring Traverse 1451
51.7 Traverse Methods 1455
51.7.1 Starting Traverse 1455
51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse 1457
Viva Series, Table of Contents 27
51.7.3 Closing Traverse 1459
51.7.4 Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth 1463
51.8 Traverse Point Results 1464
51.9 Traverse Results 1469
51.10 Traverse Adjustment 1472
51.10.1 Accessing Traverse Adjustment 1472
51.10.2 Adjustment Results 1475
52 Volume Calculations 1479
52.1 Overview 1479
52.2 Accessing Volumes Calculations 1481
52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations 1482
52.4 Calculating Volumes 1484
52.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points 1484
52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points 1490
52.4.3 Choosing an Existing Surface 1493
52.4.4 Selecting the Surface Task 1494
52.4.5 Boundary Definition 1495
52.4.6 Compute Volumes 1498
Appendix A Menu Tree 1502
Appendix B Internal Memory 1511
Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device 1512
Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets 1514
D.1 GS10 1514
D.2 GS15 1517
Viva Series, Table of Contents 28
D.3 CS10 /CS15 1520
D.4 TPS1200+ 1522
Appendix E Cables 1523
E.1 GPS Cables 1523
E.2 TPS Cables 1529
Appendix F NMEA Message Formats 1531
F.1 Overview 1531
F.2 Symbols Used for Describing the NMEA Formats 1532
F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data 1536
F.4 GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP 1538
F.5 GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary 1540
F.6 GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ 1542
F.7 GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude 1544
F.8 GNS - GNSS Fix Data 1546
F.9 GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites 1548
F.10 GSV - GNSS Satellites in View 1550
F.11 LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP 1552
F.12 LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality 1554
F.13 RMC - Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data 1556
F.14 VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed 1558
F.15 ZDA - Time and Date 1560
Appendix G AT Commands 1561
Appendix H Glossary 1565
H.1 A 1565
H.2 C 1569
Viva Series, Table of Contents 29
H.3 D 1584
H.4 G 1585
H.5 H 1590
H.6 I 1591
H.7 N 1593
H.8 O 1596
H.9 P 1597
H.10 S 1598
H.11 T 1603
H.12 V 1612
H.13 W 1613
Index 1614
Viva Series, Configurable Keys 30
1 Configurable Keys
1.1 Hot Keys
)Hot keys are found on the CS15 model only. The CS10 model does not have any hotkeys.
Description Two levels of hot keys exist:
• The first level is the keys F7, F8, ..., F12.
• The second level is the combination of Fn and F7, F8, ..., F12.
Functionality Hot keys provide a shortcut for quickly and directly carrying out functions or starting appli-
cations assigned to the keys. The assignment of functions and applications to hot keys is
user configurable.
Use • The first level is accessed by pressing F7, F8, ..., F12 directly.
• The second level is accessed by pressing Fn first followed by F7, F8, ..., F12.
• Hot keys can be pressed at any time. It is possible that a function or application assigned
to a hot key cannot be executed in certain situations.
Define hot key step-by-
step
This step-by-step description shows how to assign the Coding & linework settings screen
to the F7 key and to the first line of the My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites menu.
Step Description
1. Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites.
2. Hot Keys & Favourites
For hot keys/Fn hot keys select F7: User - Coding & linework settings.
For favourites select 1: User - Coding & linework settings.
3. OK
Viva Series, Configurable Keys 31
4. OK
5. Press F7 to access Coding & linework settings.
OR
Press the favourites key and 1 to access Coding & linework settings.
Press Fn, the favourites key and 1 to access Coding & linework
settings.
Step Description
Viva Series, Configurable Keys 32
1.2 Favourites Key
Description
• The key opens the My GPS Favourites menu.
•Fn opens the My TPS Favourites menu.
• The key alone opens Leica TPS Favourites.
)The following chapter is about the My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus only.
Refer to Leica TPS Favourites for more information about Leica TPS Favourites.
Functionality of the
favourites menu
The My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus can be configured to contain the
most used functions or applications. The favourites menu cannot be accessed while in a
configuration screen.
Selecting an option in the menu carries out the function or starts the application assigned
to the option.
My favourites menu The following screen is an example of what a My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites
menu can look like. The softkeys and their order is fixed. The functions and applications
Viva Series, Configurable Keys 33
which are assigned to the individual places in the menu can differ depending on the config-
uration.
Define favourites menu
step-by-step
Defining the favourites menu is the same process as for defining the hot keys. Refer to "1.1
Hot Keys".
OK
To execute the selected function.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 34
2 TPS Settings
2.1 Leica TPS Favourites
Description Frequently used settings can be accessed and changed quickly. The change is applied imme-
diately. The workflow is not interrupted.
This screen displays the possible settings to change to. All possible settings have two states.
)Changes made on the Leica TPS Favourites screen are stored in the active working style.
Access Tap the target aiming icon or select .
Leica TPS Favourites The appearance of the screen changes, depending on whether the instrument is equipped
with motorisation, ATR, reflectorless EDM or PowerSearch.
To change to the displayed setting do one of the following:
• Tap on the icon on the touch screen.
• Highlight a field and press .
• Highlight a field and press .
• Highlight a field and press OK.
• Press the number next to the function.
OK
Viva Series, TPS Settings 35
Description of options
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Comps
To turn the instrument using compass read-
ings. Refer to Orientation With Compass.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
No. Icon Description
1Measure any
surface To measure to any surface (reflectorless). Automatically sets
Target aiming: Manual.
Measure to prism To measure to prisms.
2Continuous meas
on To set the measure mode to continuous.
Continuous meas
off To set the measure mode to the previous non-continuous
mode.
3Check point To check a point or the instrument orientation. Refer to
Check Point.
4Change face To change the face of the telescope.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 36
5Joystick To turn the instrument using the arrow keys. Refer to
Joystick.
6Turn to Hz/V To turn the instrument to a specific entered position. Refer to
Turn Instrument to Hz/V.
7Auto aiming To set Target aiming: Automatic.
Manual aiming To set Target aiming: Manual.
8Target lock on To set Target aiming: LOCK.
Target lock off To set Target aiming to the previous non-lock setting.
9PowerSearch Prisms are searched for with PowerSearch in the PS window
when this icon is used.
)If this icon is selected and reflectorless measurements
is still set, then this setting is changed to measure-
ments to prisms.
No. Icon Description
Viva Series, TPS Settings 37
2.2 Check Point
Description This screen is used to check if a measured point is identical to a point already stored in the
job, or if the instruments orientation to a backsight point is still correct.
Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Check point.
Check Point
Store
To store the point and return to Main Menu.
Dist
To measure a distance.
More
To display additional information.
Last
To recall the point ID of the last checked
point.
Fn Positn
To position to the selected point.
For Target aiming: Automatic the instru-
ment does an ATR search.
For Target aiming: LOCK the instrument
tries to lock on to a prism.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 38
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point ID Selectable list Point ID to be checked.
If a stored point was checked, the point ID for that
point is remembered and recalled when Last is
pressed.
Target height Editable field The last used prism height is suggested. An individual
prism height can be typed in.
Target Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets screen.
Δ azimuth Display only Difference between calculated azimuth and current
orientation.
Δ hz dist Display only Difference between calculated and current distance.
Δ height Display only Difference between calculated and current height.
Current
azimuth Display only Current orientation.
Horiz distance Display only Current distance between station and backsight
point.
Height differ-
ence Display only Current height difference between station and back-
sight point.
Calc'd azimuth Display only Calculated azimuth between station and backsight
point.
Calc'd hz dist Display only Calculated horizontal distance between station and
backsight point.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 39
Calc'd Δheight Display only Calculated height difference between station and
backsight point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, TPS Settings 40
2.3 Joystick
Description The instrument can be turned using the keyboard arrow keys on the instrument or field
controller, or the arrow keys displayed on the touch screen.
When this screen is accessed, the EGL is turned on automatically. When leaving the screen,
the EGL is turned off.
Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Joystick.
Move by Joystick Use the arrow keys to start the telescope movement.
Press an arrow key again to speed up the movement. Press any of the other arrow keys
while the instrument turns to stop the movement.
Press OK to stop the instrument movement.
OK
To return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 41
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Speed -----, Slow,
Medium and
Fast
Displays the rotating speed of the instrument. Press
the same arrow key to change the speed.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 42
2.4 Turn Instrument to Hz/V
Description This screen is used when the instrument is remote controlled and the telescope is to be
turned to a certain direction.
Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Turn to Hz/V.
Turn Instrument to Hz/V,
Absolute page
Description of fields
OK
To return to Main Menu. The instrument
turns to the prism.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Azimuth Editable field Oriented horizontal direction for the instrument to
turn to.
V angle Editable field Vertical direction for the instrument to turn to.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 43
Next step
Page changes to the Relative page.
Turn Instrument to Hz/V,
Relative page
The values are added to the current telescope position to calculate the new direction for the
telescope to turn to.
Description of fields
Next step
Press OK. The instrument turns to the prism.
For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism was found, the
instrument turns to the position typed in.
For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon is displayed.
If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in.
Field Option Description
?Hz Editable field Angular difference for the horizontal angle to turn
to.
?V Editable field Angular difference for the vertical angle to turn to.
Viva Series, TPS Settings 44
2.5 Orientation With Compass
Description Using a conventional magnetic compass while remotely controlling the instrument, it is
possible to determine the direction towards which the instrument should turn to perform a
target search to locate the prism.
Access In Leica TPS Favourites press Comps.
)The instrument must be connected to a radio to be remote controlled with the field
controller.
Orientation with
compass step-by-step Step Description
1. Set up the instrument.
2. Start the Survey application.
3. Turn the telescope until Hz: 0.0000.
4. Look through the telescope with Hz: 0.0000 to select an object which is easily
recognisable.
5. Standing at the instrument, point the compass to the selected object. Turn the
rotating dial until the "N" lines up with the north end of the compass needle.
)The compass dial must not be turned once the "N" is lined up with the north
end of the compass needle.
6. Go to the prism. From the prism aim the "N" of the compass towards the instru-
ment. Read the horizontal angle as pointed to by the north end of the compass
needle.
7. In Leica TPS Favourites press Comps.
8. Orientation With Compass
Viva Series, TPS Settings 45
Compass reading: The horizontal angle read from the compass while aiming to
the instrument.
V angle: If the compass works as a clinometer, those values can also be used.
)The horizontal and vertical angle reads from the compass are always
displayed in degree regardless of the system settings.
9. OK to return to the survey screen. The instrument turns to the prism.
For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism was
found, the instrument turns to the position typed in.
For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon is
displayed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in.
Step Description
Viva Series, Main Menu 46
3 Main Menu
3.1 Main Menu Functions
Main Menu
Description of the main
menu functions
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Mode
To switch between GPS and TPS mode.
Fn Exit
To close Leica SmartWorx Viva software.
Main menu function Description Refer to
chapter
Go to Work! To select and start an application. "3.2 Go to
Work!"
Jobs & Data To manage jobs and data, as well as import and
export. Available for RTK rover and TPS.
"3.3 Jobs &
Data"
Instrument To access settings regarding GPS and instrument
connections as well as status information.
"3.4 Instru-
ment"
Viva Series, Main Menu 47
User To make settings regarding the software and the
display as well as other useful tools. Available for
RTK rover and TPS.
"3.5 User"
Main menu function Description Refer to
chapter
Viva Series, Main Menu 48
3.2 Go to Work!
Description The Go to Work! drop-down menu contains all loaded applications. Selecting an option in
the menu starts the application. Configurations and measurements that can be performed
depend on the application.
Go to Work!
Next step Refer to Applications - General for information on the applications.
OK
To start the highlighted application or to
open a submenu.
Viva Series, Main Menu 49
3.3 Jobs & Data
Description Jobs & Data is available for RTK rover and TPS. It is used to:
Jobs & Data
Next step
• Create a new job. • View and edit data.
• Select a job. • Import data.
• View job properties. • Export and copy data.
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
New job Refer to chapter 4.2.
View & edit data Refer to chapter 5.
Job properties Refer to chapter 4.3.
Choose working job Refer to chapter 4.4.
Choose control job Refer to chapter 4.4.
Import data Refer to chapter 8.
Export & copy data Refer to chapter 9.
Viva Series, Main Menu 50
3.4 Instrument
Description Instrument is used to:
• Configure parameters related to the instrument.
• Configure parameters related to the interfaces.
• Check status information.
Instrument
Next step
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
GPS settings Refer to chapter 11.
TPS settings Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 11.
Base settings Available for RTK base. Refer to chapter 17.
Instrument connections
•GPS connection Refer to chapter 11.1.
•TPS connection wizard Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 11.
•All other connections Refer to chapter 14.
Base connections Available for RTK base. Refer to chapter 17.
Viva Series, Main Menu 51
Instrument status info Available for RTK rover and TPS. Refer to
chapter 17.
Base status info Available for RTK base. Refer to chapter 17.
Viva Series, Main Menu 52
3.5 User
Description User is available for RTK rover and TPS. It is used:
• To configure user favourite settings for the survey and the instrument.
• For functionality which is not directly related to surveying data, such as loading firmware
or licence keys, format data storage devices and viewing ASCII files.
User
Next step
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Work settings Refer to chapter 19.
Working style wizard Refer to chapter 22.
System settings Refer to chapter 23.
Tools & other utilities Refer to chapter 24.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 53
4Jobs & Data - Jobs
4.1 Overview
Description Jobs
• structure surveying projects.
• contain all points, lines, areas and codes that are recorded and stored.
• can be downloaded to LGO for post-processing or for data transfer to a further program.
• can be uploaded from LGO, for example, for real-time stakeout operations.
• can be stored on the data storage device or, if fitted, the internal memory.
Type of jobs • Data jobs. Explained in this chapter.
• DTM files. Refer to "42.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM".
•Road alignment files.
Default job A job called Default is available on the instrument after: formatting the memory device,
inserting a previously formatted data storage device or deleting all jobs from Job properties.
Working job The working job is the one data is stored to. One job is always considered the working job.
After formatting the memory device, the job Default is used until a user-defined job is
created and selected.
When a job becomes the working job, then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved
in the SystemRAM. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used sort and filter
settings are used for the job Default.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 54
4.2 Creating a New Job
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job.
New Job,
General
Description of fields
Store
To store the settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new job. The name can be up
to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input
required.
Description Editable field Two lines for a detailed description of the job, for
example, work to be performed or the classes
contained in the job. Input optional.
Creator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the job. Input
optional.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 55
Next step
Page changes to the Codelist page.
New Job,
Codelist page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the CAD files page.
Device Selectable list The device on which the new job will be stored.
Depending on the instrument options, this may be a
display only field.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Codelist Selectable list Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 56
New Job,
CAD files page
Description of columns
Next step
Page changes to the Coord system page.
Store
To store the settings. Selected and attached
CAD files will be available in the job as back-
ground maps.
Attach
To attach a CAD file found in the same loca-
tion to which the new job is to be stored.
The setting in the Use column will be
updated.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
File The name of the CAD files available on the data storage device in the
\DATA directory.
Size (MB) The size of the CAD file in megabites.
Use If set to Yes, the file is attached to the job when Store is pressed.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 57
New Job,
Coord system page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Averaging page.
Page changes to the Scale page.
New Job,
Averaging page
In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once. If acti-
vated, an average or an absolute difference is calculated.
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Coord system Selectable list Choosing a coordinate system attaches it to the job.
If it is not known which coordinate system to use,
select Coord system: WGS 1984.
All other fields on this screen are display only fields. They depend on the transformation
type of the selected coordinate system.
Field Option Description
Mode Defines the averaging principles for multiple meas-
ured points. The selection determines the availability
of the subsequent fields for setting the acceptable
averaging limits or absolute differences.
Average Computes the average for the position and the
height. Points exceeding the defined limits are
marked with ! in Edit Point:, Mean page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 58
Next step
Store creates a new job.
New Job,
Scale page
The geometric distance correction (geometric ppm) is derived from the map projection
distortion (map projection ppm), the height above reference datum correction (height ppm)
and an individual correction (individual ppm).
Absolute differ-
ences Computes the absolute differences between two
points selected from a list of measured points which
are all stored with the same point ID.
Off Averaging is turned off. No other fields are available.
Method The method used for computing the average. Avail-
able for Mode: Average.
Weighted Calculates a weighted average
No weighting Calculates an arithmetic average.
Points to use Selectable list The type of points which will be taken into account
for averaging or absolute differences. Available for
Mode: Average and Mode: Absolute differences.
Limit in posi-
tion and Limit
in height
Editable field The acceptable difference for the position and height
components. Available for Mode: Average.
From Easting to
Cartesian Z Editable fields The acceptable absolute differences for each coordi-
nate component. Available for Mode: Absolute differ-
ences.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 59
The calculation of the map projection ppm follows the formula for the Transversal Mercator
Projection. The individual factors are: the scale factor of the line of projection central
meridian, Gauss-Krüger = 1.0, UTM = 0.9996, etc. and the offset from the line of projection.
The calculation of the height ppm is derived from the height of the instrument station above
the reference datum. Normally this is the height above mean sea level MSL.
Description of fields
Store
To store the settings.
SF/ppm
To change between entering the scale factor
or the ppm. Only available for Compute
scale using:SF/GeoPPM.
ppm=0
To set Geometric ppm:0.0.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Compute scale
using Projection & ht
info To enter all values for determining the geometric
ppm.
SF/GeoPPM To enter only the scale factor or the geometric ppm
value.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 60
Stn & coord
system To automatically calculate the ppm/scale factor from
the coordinate system and station position.
Scale at CM Editable field The scale at the central meridian.
Available for Compute scale using:Projection & ht
info
Offset to CM Editable field The offset to the central meridian.
Available for Compute scale using:Projection & ht
info
Map proj ppm Display only The map projection ppm value. If this value cannot be
calculated, then ----- is displayed and is also ignored
in the calculation of the geometric ppm value.
Available for Compute scale using:Projection & ht
info and Compute scale using:Stn & coord system
Ground height Editable field The height of the instrument station above the
reference datum.
Available for Compute scale using:Projection & ht
info
Height ppm Display only The height ppm value calculated from the height
coordinates of the current station stored in the
internal memory. If this value cannot be calculated,
then ----- is displayed and is also ignored in the calcu-
lation of the geometric ppm value.
Available for Compute scale using:Projection & ht
info and Compute scale using:Stn & coord system
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 61
Additional calculation method for the geometric ppm value
The geometric ppm value can also be calculated by a resection calculation. The scale factor
from the resection is used for User entered ppm.
Individual ppm=(s-1)*106.s=1+ppm*10-6. The Geometric ppm value is calculated with the
following:
•Scale at CM: 1,
•Offset to CM: 0,
•Map proj ppm: 0 and
•Ground height: 0.
User entered ppm Editable field The individual ppm value.
Available for Compute scale using:Projection & ht
info and Compute scale using:SF/GeoPPM
Geometric ppm Display only For Projection & ht info:
Geometric ppm =
Map proj ppm + User entered ppm + height ppm
value calculated fromGround height.
For Stn & coord system:
Geometric ppm =
Map proj ppm + Height ppm.
User entered scale
factor Editable field The user entered scale factor.
Compute scale using:SF/GeoPPM
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 62
Automatic calculation of the geometric ppm value
When Compute scale using:Stn & coord system:
• the ppm values for Map Proj ppm, Height ppm and Geometric ppm are automatically
calculated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the internal
memory are used, which are based on the currently active coordinate system.
• each time an application is accessed, the geometric ppm value is automatically calcu-
lated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the internal
memory are used (these coordinates may have been updated), which are based on
the currently active coordinate system (this coordinate system may have changed).
This way, the user is always working with the correct geometric ppm value.
• when the <None> coordinate system is chosen, then the geometric ppm value cannot
be automatically calculated. A message will appear, allowing the user to either manu-
ally enter the ppm values or accept ppm values of 0.
Next step
Page changes to the Averaging page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 63
4.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job
Description In the Job Properties:, the settings for a job can be viewed and changed.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties.
Job Properties:,
General page
The fields on this page are identical with the fields in New Job, General. Refer to "4.2
Creating a New Job".
Next step
Page changes to the Codelist page.
Store
To store the settings.
Data..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and
areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are shown on separate pages.
Selected sort and filter settings apply.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Log..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and
areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are sorted by time in one list.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 64
Job Properties:,
Codelist page
Store
To store the settings.
Import
To add additional codes from a new codelist
to the job. The name of this codelist is
copied to the job.
Codes..
To view codes currently stored in the job.
Refer to "4.5 Managing Job Codes"
Data..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and
areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are shown on separate pages.
Selected sort and filter settings apply.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Log..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and
areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are sorted by time in one list.
Fn Export
To copy codes from the job to an existing or
new codelist.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 65
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the CAD files page.
Job Properties:,
CAD files page
Field Option Description
Codelist <None> No codes are stored in the job.
This default setting can be changed. Choosing a
codelist copies the codes to the job.
Display only Codes are stored in the job.
If codes had been copied from a codelist in the
internal memory, the name of the codelist is
displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the
name of the working job is displayed.
Store
To store the settings.
Add
To select a CAD file that is added to the job
properties. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job"
for a description of the screen.
Rmove
To delete a CAD file from the job properties.
View
To change the setting in the View column.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 66
Description of columns
Next step
Page changes to the Coord system page and the Averaging page and for also to the
Scale page. The functionality on all pages is identical with the creation of a new job. Refer
to "4.2 Creating a New Job"
If the coordinate system of the working job is edited, and Use auto coordinate system has
been selected in the RTK Rover Wizard, a message will display requesting confirmation to
deactivate auto coordinate system.
Fn Layrs..
To change to the CAD layers screen. In this
screen, it is possible to make layers from the
CAD file visible or invisible for MapView.
Fn Log..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and
areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are sorted by time in one list.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Maps The name of the CAD files that can be used.
View If set to Yes, the map is visible as background maps in MapView.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 67
4.4 Choosing a Job
Access • For a working job, where measured points are stored to, select Main Menu: Jobs &
Data\Choose working job.
• For a control job with control points, select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose control job.
Choose working job Listed are all data jobs stored on the data storage device or in the internal memory
depending on the current device.
OK
To select the highlighted job and to return to
the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
New..
To create a job. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New
Job".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted job. Refer to "4.3 Job
Properties and Editing a Job".
Delete
To delete the highlighted job.
CF card, SD card or Intrnl
To change between viewing jobs stored on
another data storage device or internal
memory.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 68
4.5 Managing Job Codes
Description Available for jobs which have a codelist attached. To view, edit, group and sort all codes
currently stored in the job. The functionality of this screen is mainly the same as for Main
Menu: Jobs & Data\New job, Codelist. For simplicity, the functionality which is different for
Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties, Codelist is explained here. Refer to "6.4 Managing
Codes" for information on Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job, Codelist.
Access step-by-step Step Description
1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties.
OR
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job or Choose control job.
Edit.. to access Job Properties:.
2. Page until the Codelist page is active.
3. Codes.. to access Job Codes.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 69
Job Codes
OK
To return to the previous screen.
New..
To create a new code. Refer to "6.4.2
Creating/Editing a Code".
Info
To edit the highlighted code. Accesses Edit
Code where new attributes can be added to
a code and line styles can be changed.
More
To display information about the code
group, the code type, the code description
and the quick codes if available.
Fn Group
To access Code Groups. To view, create,
activate and deactivate code groups. Refer
to "6.5 Managing Code Groups".
Fn Sort
To access Sort Codes. To sort codes by code
name, code description, quick code or last
used.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 70
Next step
Edit Code
The behaviour of this screen varies with the type of code to be edited. The differences are
explained in the table.
IF THEN
the job codes do not need to be changed OK closes the screen.
a new job code is to be created New... Refer to "6.4.2 Creating/Editing a
Code".
an existing job code is to be edited highlight the job code and Info.
Store
To store the code including any newly
created attributes.
+Attrib
To add a new attribute to a code.
Name or Value
Available for attributes for which an
attribute name can be typed in. To highlight
the field of the attribute name or the field
for the attribute value. The name of the
attribute can be edited and an attribute
value can be typed in.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 71
Type of code Description
Point codes
and
Free codes
New attributes can be added with +Attrib.
Line codes
and
Area codes
• New attributes can be added with +Attrib.
• The line style can be changed. This new line style is stored to the
code. It can be decided whether to update the line style of all
previously stored lines/areas with this code in this job.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 72
5Jobs & Data - Data
5.1 Overview
Description Data management is the administration of data stored in the working job, including
• viewing data and related information.
• editing data.
•creating new data.
• deleting existing data.
• filtering existing data.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 73
5.2 Accessing Data Management
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data.
)The objects listed on the pages belong to the working job. The objects listed and their order
depend on the active sort and filter settings. An active filter for a page is indicated by * to
the right of the name of the page. Refer to "5.6 Point Sorting and Filters" for information
about sort and filter settings.
Data:,
Points page
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a point.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted point.
Delete
To delete the highlighted point.
More
To display information about the codes if
stored with any point, the time and the date
of when the point was stored, the 3D coor-
dinate quality, the class and the flag for
Linework.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Log..
To view points, lines, areas and free codes
stored with the job sorted by time. Refer to
"5.5 Data Log".
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 74
Next step
Page changes to the Lines and Areas page.
Data:,
Lines and Areas page
The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for both pages.
The number in brackets next to the name of the page indicate the number of open
lines/areas. Example: Lines (2)/Areas (2) means that two lines/areas are open.
Fn Filter..
To define sort and filter settings. Refer to
"5.6 Point Sorting and Filters".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a line/area. After storing the new
line/area, all existing lines and areas which
are open are closed. Refer to "5.3.1 Creating
a New Point".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted line/area.
Close and Open
To change between the options in the Open
column of the highlighted line/area. Only
available for the current working job.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 75
Description of columns
More
To display information about the codes if
stored with any line/area, the start time, the
end time of when the last point was added
to the line/area, the length of the line, the
perimeter and the area of the area.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Delete
To delete the highlighted line/area.
Fn Filter..
To define sort and filter settings. Refer to
"5.6 Point Sorting and Filters".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Line or Area The listed lines/areas already stored in the working job.
Open The status of a line/area.
•Yes
The line/area is open. Measured points are assigned to the line/area.
•No
The line/area is closed. Measured points are not assigned to the
line/area.
Close and Open change between the options.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 76
Next step
IF the line/area THEN
which was last used is
to be opened
press a hot key configured to reopen last used line/area. This hot
key can be used at any time. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information
on hot keys.
is to be viewed Page until the Map page is active.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 77
5.3 Point Management
5.3.1 Creating a New Point
Access In Data:, Points page, press New...
New Point,
Coords page
Store
To store the new point entered and all asso-
ciated information.
Coord
To view other coordinate properties.
North or South
Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984
geodetic coordinates when Local latitude or
WGS84 latitude is highlighted. Changes
between North and South latitude.
East or West
Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984
geodetic coordinates when Local longitude
or WGS84 longitude is highlighted. Changes
between East and West longitude.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht or Fn Elev
Available for local coordinates. Changes
between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric
height.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 78
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Code page.
Fn IndivID or Fn Run
For an individual name independent of the
ID template or to change back to the next ID
from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The name of the new point. The configured point ID
template is used. The ID can be changed in the
following ways:
• To start a new sequence of point IDs, type over
the point ID.
• For an individual name independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Coordinate
fields
Editable field Negative geodetic coordinates are interpreted as
being of the opposite hemisphere or other side of
the central meridian. For example, entering -25 °N
will be stored as 25 °S, entering -33 °E will be stored
as 33 °W.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 79
New Point,
Code page
The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework
determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys.
Store
To store the new point entered and all asso-
ciated information.
+Attrib
To create additional attributes for this point
code.
Name or Value
Available for attributes for which an
attribute name can be typed in. To highlight
the field of the attribute name or the field
for the attribute value. The name of the
attribute can be edited and an attribute
value can be typed in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values which
were stored with this point code.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the
selected code.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 80
Description of fields
Next step
Store stores the new point entered and all associated information.
Field Option Description
Point code Selectable list When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
The codes from the job codelist are used.
All point codes of the job codelist can be selected.
The description of the code is shown as a display only
field. The attributes are shown as display only, edit-
able fields or selectable lists depending on their defi-
nition.
Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
not checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
Codes for points can be typed in but not selected
from a codelist.
A check is performed to see if a point code of this
name already exists in the job. If so, an information
message is displayed. If Suggested attributes: Last
used in Coding & Linework Settings, the according
attributes are also shown.
Attribute Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
checked: Up to 20 attribute values are available.
When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
not checked: Up to eight attribute values are avail-
able.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 81
The properties stored with the point are:
• Class: Ctrl
• Sub class: Fixed (Pos & Ht)
•Source: User entered
• Instrument source: GPS
)It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or
attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where they
can be corrected.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 82
5.3.2 Editing a Point
Access In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited. Press Edit...
Edit Point:,
Coords page
The visible pages on this screen depend on the properties of the point being edited.
It is possible to edit the point ID and for points of Class: Ctrl and Class: Est also the coor-
dinates. Other point-related data is shown in display only fields.
)Changing the point ID of a point, applies this new point ID to all other points with the
same original name, regardless of their class.
)Points of Class: Ref cannot be renamed.
)Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in other applications,
for example COGO, or hidden point measurements does not update the application
results.
)An edited point retains the creation value for Time.
Store
To store the changes.
Coord
To view other coordinate properties.
More
To display information about class, sub
class, 3D coordinate quality, time and date
of when point was stored, instrument
source, source and the flag for Linework if
available.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 83
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Edit Point:,
Obs page
Available when the edited point is Class: Meas.
For GPS points
The name of the real-time base station from where the GPS/GNSS point was measured, the
name of antenna used to measure the point and the baseline values, are shown in display
only/observations fields.
For TPS points
It is possible to edit the reflector height. The name of the station from where the point was
measured is shown in a display only field.
)Changing the reflector height recalculates the point height.
The distance variables ?Hz, ?V, ?slope dist are shown in a display only field, whenever a
measurement has been taken in both faces.
More displays the horizontal angle or the azimuth from the point to the instrument.
Fn Ell Ht or Fn Elev
Available for local coordinates. Changes
between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric
height. Changing the height type does not
edit the point.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 84
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Edit Point:,
Code page
Available when the edited point is Class: Meas.
The point code can be edited. All point codes in the job can be selected.
The description of the code is shown as a display only field.
The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on
their definition.
The attribute values shown depend on the setting in Coding & Linework Settings.
Suggested attributes: Last used shows the last used attribute values which are stored for
this point code in the active codelist. Suggested attributes: Default values shows the
default attribute values for this point code if existing.
)It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or
attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens
where they can be corrected.
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Edit Point:,
Annots page
Available when the edited point is Class: Nav or Class: Meas and no offset point.
The comments to be stored with the point can be edited.
Next step
Page changes to the next page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 85
Edit Point:,
Mean page
Available when the edited point is Class: Avge.
Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page" for a detailed description.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 86
5.3.3 Mean Page
Description In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once.
These measured points are assigned the class Meas. The various measured coordinate
triplets for one point can be recorded using the same point ID. If the averaging mode is acti-
vated, an average is calculated when more than one measured coordinate triplet is available
for the same point ID.
The averaged point is given the class Avge. It is checked if the deviations of each single point
are within the limits configured in Job Properties:,Averaging page.
After averaging, the Mean page becomes available in Edit Point: and accessible from the
Survey application. Available functionality on the Mean page depends on the selected aver-
aging mode.
Averaging Defining the averaging mode and configuring the limits
The averaging mode and the limits are configured in Job Properties:,Averaging page. Refer
to "4.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job".
Description of averaging modes
Averaging
mode
Description
Average When more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the
same point, the average for the position and the height is computed.
Depending on the selected averaging method, the average will be
computed weighted or arithmetic (no weighting). The class Avge is
assigned to the averaged point.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 87
Averaging with position only or height only points
Position only points, height only points and points with full coordinate triplets are handled
in the averaging.
Access step-by-step The Mean page can be accessed if
Mode: Average or Mode: Absolute differences is configured in Job
Properties:,Averaging page.
AND
more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point using the
same point ID.
The horizontal and height distances from the measured points to the
average are computed and displayed on the Mean page.
A check is performed that the differences in position and height, between
the averaged point and the point being stored, do not exceed the
defined limits.
Absolute differ-
ences What is described for Average also applies for Absolute differences.
Additionally, the absolute difference between two points selected from
a list of measured points with the same point ID, is checked to be within
the defined limits.
Off Averaging functionality is turned off. With more than one measured coor-
dinate triplet recorded for the same point, no average for the position and
the height is computed.
Averaging
mode
Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 88
Access within data management
Access within Survey
From within the Survey application, the Mean page is accessible when the RTK Rover inter-
face is active.
In Survey, Points page, press Fn Avg or Fn Abs to access Edit Point:, Mean page.
Edit Point:,
Mean page
All measured coordinate triplets recorded using the same point ID are shown.
Step Description
1. In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited.
2. Edit.. to access Edit Point:, Mean page.
Store
To store the changes.
Use
To change between the options in the Use
column for the highlighted coordinate
triplet. To include or exclude this triplet in or
from the calculation of the average.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 89
Edit..
To view and edit the highlighted measured
coordinate triplet. It is possible to edit the
point ID and the antenna height without
impact on all other classes of the point with
the same original name. The coordinates are
updated. Codes cannot be changed. The
average point has the higher priority. A
change in codes must be an overall change
for the average point.
Example: One of the measured coordinate
triplets has a wrong point ID and should not
be included in the average. By editing the
point ID, the point is renamed and no longer
contributes to the average.
Delete
To delete the highlighted coordinate triplet.
The average is recomputed.
More
To change between time and date of when
the point was stored and the 3D coordinate
quality.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Diffs
Available for Mode: Absolute differences
and Yes is set in the Use column for exactly
two measurements. To display the absolute
coordinate differences when a local coordi-
nate system is active. Differences exceeding
the defined limit are indicated by !.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 90
Description of columns
Column Description
Use The use of a measured coordinate triplet in the averaging.
•Auto
The coordinate triplet is included in the averaging computation if
within the averaging limit defined in Job Properties::Averaging page.
•Yes
The coordinate triplet is always included in the averaging computation
even if it would fall outside the averaging limit defined in Job Proper-
ties::Averaging page.
•No
The coordinate triplet is never included in the averaging computation.
•-----
The coordinate triplet cannot be included in the averaging computa-
tion. Automatically set by the system.
Use changes between the options.
Time The time the measured coordinate triplet was stored.
Date The date the measured coordinate triplet was stored. The format is as
defined in Regional Settings, Time page.
dPos The horizontal distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the
average. dPos :----- indicates unavailable information, for example for a
height only point.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 91
Next step
Store stores the changes.
dHt The height distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average.
dHt:----- indicates unavailable information, for example for a position only
point.
!Available for measured coordinate triplets with Auto or Yes in the Use
column if Mode: Average. Indicates an exceeding of the limits.
Column Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 92
5.4 Line/Area Management
5.4.1 Overview
Description A line/area consists of points and can be created/edited in Data:, Lines and Areas page. The
individual points are measured within any application. All points can be used except auxiliary
points. Points can be simultaneously assigned to one or more lines and/or areas.
A line/area can have
• a style for display in MapView.
• a code independent of the point code of the points comprising the line/area.
)Points are assigned to a line/area when the line/area is open. Refer to "5.2 Accessing Data
Management" for information on how to open a line/area.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 93
5.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area
)The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas.
The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas.
Access In Data:, Lines page, press New...
New Line,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To store the new line entered and all associ-
ated information.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn IndivID or Fn Run
For an individual name independent of the
ID template or to change back to the next ID
from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Line ID Editable field The name of the new line. The configured ID
template for lines is used. The ID can be changed in
the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over the
line ID.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 94
Next step
Page changes to the Code page.
New Line,
Code page
The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework
determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys.
• For an individual name independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Points to store Selectable list The type of points which are used to form the line
during a survey.
Style Selectable list The line style in which lines/areas are represented in
MapView and LGO. For Line code: <None> on the
Code page a line style can be selected from a
selectable list. Otherwise the line style as defined for
the selected line code is shown.
Colour Selectable list A colour in which the line will be displayed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 95
)The value for Start time with which the line is stored is the time when Store was
pressed. The same value is assigned to the value for End time until a point is added
to the line.
Store
To store the new line entered and all associ-
ated information. Any existing lines and
areas which are open are closed.
+Attrib
To create additional attributes for this line
code.
Name or Value
Available for attributes for which an
attribute name can be typed in. To highlight
the field of the attribute name or the field
for the attribute value. The name of the
attribute can be edited and an attribute
value can be typed in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values which
were stored with this line code.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the
selected code.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 96
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Line code The line code to be stored with the point.
Selectable list When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
All line codes of the job codelist can be selected.
The description of the code is shown as a display only
field.
The line style is shown as defined for the selected
line code. It is the style in which lines/areas are repre-
sented in MapView and LGO. For Line code: <None>,
it can be changed.
The attributes are shown as display only, editable
fields or selectable lists depending on their defini-
tion.
Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
not checked in Coding & Linework Settings:
Codes for lines can be typed in but not selected from
a codelist.
A check is performed to see if a line code of this
name already exists in the job. If so, the line style and
colour are copied from the existing code and shown
as display only. If Suggested attributes: Last used in
Coding & Linework Settings, the according
attributes are also shown.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 97
Next step
Store stores the new line entered and all associated information.
Creating lines/areas
most efficiently
Attribute Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
checked: up to 20 attribute values are available.
When the check box Use a list box to view codes is
not checked: up to eight attribute values are avail-
able.
Field Option Description
IF the task is to
create
THEN
multiple lines/areas
with subsequent
line/area IDs
use the hot key/favourites menu function Linework - Create new
line (quick)/Linework - Create new area (quick). Pressing the hot
key or selecting the function from the My GPS Favourites
menu creates and immediately stores the new line/area. For the
line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is
used. The code and attributes are taken over from the last created
line/area.
lines/areas with
certain codes
use quick coding. The job codelist must contain quick codes for
lines/areas. By tying the quick code a new line/area is created and
immediately stored with that line/area code and attributes. For the
line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is
used.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 98
5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area
)The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas.
The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas.
Access In Data:, Lines page, press Edit...
Edit Line,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To store the changes.
More
To display End time and End date.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Line ID Editable field The name of the line can be edited.
)A line cannot be renamed to an already
existing line ID.
Points to store Selectable list The type of points which are used to form the line
during a survey can be edited.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 99
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Style Display only The line style in which lines/areas are represented in
MapView and LGO.
Colour Display only A colour in which the line will be displayed.
Number of
points Display only The number of points contained within the line.
Length Display only The sum of the distances between the points in the
sequential order in which they are stored for the line.
This length can be a horizontal grid distance or a
geodetic distance on the WGS 1984 ellipsoid.
Start date and
Start time Display only The time/date when the line was created.
)An edited line retains the creation value for
Start time.
End date and
End time Display only The time/date when the last point was added to the
line. This can be different to the time the point was
created. The values do not change after deleting the
last added point or after editing unless an additional
point is added to the line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 100
Edit Line,
Points page
All points belonging to the line are listed. The point that was added last to the line is at the
top of the list.
Store
To store the changes.
Add
To add an existing point from the working
job to the line. A new point is added above
the point which was highlighted when the
key was pressed. The value for End time on
the General page changes when a point was
added to the line.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted point.
Remov
To remove the highlighted point from the
line. The point itself is not deleted.
More
To display information about the point
codes if stored with the line, the time and
the date of when the line was stored, the 3D
coordinate quality, the class and the flag for
Linework.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 101
Next step
Page changes to the Code page.
Edit Line,
Code page
The line code can be edited. All line codes can be selected. For Line code:None, the line style
can be changed.
The description of the code is shown as a display only field.
The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on
their definition.
Next step
Store stores the changes.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 102
5.5 Data Log
Description A list of all objects and free codes in the working job is displayed in order of time.
Access step-by-step Access within data management
In Data:, Points page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log.
Access within job management
In Job Properties:, General page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log.
Data Log In the column Data record, all points, lines and areas as well as free codes stored within the
working job are displayed. They are always sorted by time with the most recent record at
the top. For lines and areas, the value for Start time is relevant.
OK
To close the screen.
New..
To insert a free code below/before the
currently highlighted object or record. The
functionality of inserting a free code is iden-
tical to the functionality of entering a free
code during a survey.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 103
Next step
OK returns to the screen from where Data Log was accessed.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted object or free code.
The functionality of editing a free code is
identical to the functionality of entering a
free code during a survey. Refer to "20.3
Free Coding".
Delete
To delete the highlighted object or free
code.
More
To display information about the type of
data recorded, the time and the date of
when it was stored or for lines and areas
when they were created and the codes if
stored with any object.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 104
5.6 Point Sorting and Filters
5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas
Description The sort settings define the order of the objects in the working job. The filter settings define
the objects to be viewed.
Three types of filters are available:
)The sort and filter settings are stored in the job. They are remembered after turning off the
instrument.
When a job becomes active, then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in the
internal memory. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used sort and filter
settings are used for the job Default.
When a new job is created, the sort and filter settings from what was the working job are
copied to the new job.
)Changing the working job influences the sort and filter settings for the objects. The settings
are changed to those of the selected job.
)An active filter for an object is indicated in Data: by * located on the right side of the page
name.
Access In Data: on the Points, Lines or Areas page, press Fn Filter.. to access Sorts & Filters.
Point filter: An active point filter shows selected points in Data:, Points page.
Line filter: An active line filter shows selected lines in Data:, Lines page.
Area filter: An active area filter shows selected areas in Data:, Areas page.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 105
Sorts & Filters,
Points page
The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for Filter by.
Description of fields
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed. The
selected sort and filter settings are applied.
Codes..
Available for Filter by: Point code. To define
the code filters. Refer to "5.6.2 Point, Line
and Area Code Filter".
Stake..
To filter points for the Stakeout application.
Refer to "5.6.3 Stakeout Filter".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Sort by Ascending point ID,
Descending point ID,
Forward time or
Backward time
Always available. The method points are sorted
by.
Filter by Always available. The method the points are
filtered by.
No filter Shows all points.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 106
Highest class Shows points of highest class.
Range of point IDs Shows points with point IDs between the
entered start and end ID. The points are left
aligned and sorted by the first digit.
Pt ID wildcard Shows points with point IDs matching the wild-
card.
Time Shows points which were recorded within a
defined time window.
Class Shows points of the selected class.
Instrument Shows points originating from the selected
instrument or software program type.
Coordinate type Shows points of the selected type of coordi-
nates.
Point code Shows points with selected codes attached.
Radius from pt Shows points within the defined radius from a
particular point. The radius is the horizontal
distance.
Individual line Shows points forming a selected line. This can be
useful, for example, during stakeout.
Individual area Shows points forming a selected area. This can
be useful, for example, during stakeout.
Start ID Editable field Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs. The
first point to be displayed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 107
End ID Editable field Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs. The
last point to be displayed.
Wildcard Editable field Available for Filter by: Pt ID wildcard. * and ? are
supported. * indicates an undefined number of
unknown characters. ? indicates a single
unknown character.
Start date Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the first
point to be displayed.
Start time Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the first
point to be displayed.
End date Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the last
point to be displayed.
End time Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the last
point to be displayed.
Control (Ctrl),
Adjusted (Adj),
Reference (Ref),
Average (Avge),
Measured (Meas),
Navigated (Nav),
Estimated (Est),
None
Show or Hide Available for Filter by: Class. Defined classes are
shown or hidden.
View Available for Filter by: Class.
Highest triplet The coordinate triplets of the highest class are
shown.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 108
Next step
Page changes to the Lines page.
All triplets All classes for one coordinate triplet are shown.
Instrument All, TPS, GPS, LEICA
Geo Office, Level,
Controller, Third
party SW or
Unknown
Available for Filter by: Instrument. Points origi-
nating from this instrument type are shown.
Type WGS84 only or Local
only Available for Filter by: Coordinate type. Points
from the chosen coordinate type are shown.
Point ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Radius from pt. The point
to which the radius is applied. Opening the
selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "5.2
Accessing Data Management".
Radius Editable field Available for Filter by: Radius from pt. The radius
of the circle within which the points are shown.
Line ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Individual line. Opening
the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "5.2
Accessing Data Management".
Area ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Individual area. Opening
the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "5.2
Accessing Data Management".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 109
Sorts & Filters,
Lines and Areas page
Description of fields
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed. The
selected sort and filter settings are applied.
Codes..
Available for Filter by: Code / code group.
To select the line codes to be used.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Sort by Ascending line ID, Descending
line ID, Forward start time,
Backward start time, Forward
end time, Backward end time
Always available. The method the lines are
sorted by.
Filter by Always available. The method by which the
lines are filtered.
No filter Shows all lines.
Code / code group Shows lines with selected codes attached.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 110
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 111
5.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter
)For each object, a code filter exists. The point, line and area code filters are independent
from each other. The functionality is identical. For simplicity, the point code filter is
explained.
Access step-by-step
Point Code Filter This screen shows the point codes from the working job and codes currently used as filter.
Point codes are sorted according to the settings in Sort Codes.
Step Description
1. In Sorts & Filters select Filter by: Point code.
2. Codes.. to access Point Code Filter.
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Group
To activate and deactivate code groups.
Accesses Code Groups. Any code group that
has been previously deactivated are
displayed as deactivated here. Codes
belonging to a deactivated code group are
not displayed in Point Code Filter.
Use
To activate and deactivate the filter for the
highlighted code.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 112
None or All
To deactivate or activate all point codes.
Fn Sort
To define the order of the codes. Accesses
Sort Codes.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 113
5.6.3 Stakeout Filter
Description The settings on this screen define a filter for the Stakeout application. The Stakeout filter
can be applied to show points which are already staked or points that are still to be staked.
)The stakeout filter acts in addition to any other filter set in Sorts & Filters. For example,
points still to be staked out with a particular code can be filtered.
Access In Sorts & Filters, Points page, press Stake.. to access Stakeout Filter.
Stakeout Filter
Description of fields
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Reset
To reset the staked flag for all points of the
currently working job.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
View All points Shows all points.
Points to stake Shows points not yet staked out.
Staked points Shows points which are already staked out.
Viva Series, Codelists 114
6 Codelists
6.1 Overview
)It is recommended to create a codelist in LGO. A codelist can be transferred from LGO to the
internal memory of the instrument using the data storage device.
Steps from creating to
using a codelist
The creating, editing and managing of codelists is explained in this chapter. In order to use
a codelist on the instrument, it must be transferred from the data storage device to the
internal memory.
Instrument Codelist Management:
Create codelist LGO Tools:
Transfer
Serial
upload Data storage
device
System RAM: System RAM codelist
Selecting codelist(s) for a job:
Copy of codes
Job: Job codelist
Viva Series, Codelists 115
6.2 Accessing Codelist Management
Access
Codelists Listed are all codelists stored in the internal memory.
Step Description
1. Go to Job Properties:, Codelist page when creating a new job or editing an
existing working or control job.
2. Open the selectable list for Codelist.
OK
To return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed. The codes from the
highlighted codelist are copied to the
working job.
New..
To create a codelist. Refer to "6.3
Creating/Editing a Codelist".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted codelist. Refer to
"6.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist".
Delete
To delete the highlighted codelist.
More
To display information about the creator and
the date of when the codelist was created.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Codelists 116
6.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist
Access In Codelists press New.. or Edit...
New Codelist or Edit
Codelist
Description of fields
Store
To store the codelist.
Codes..
To access Codes where codes can be
created, edited or deleted and code groups
can be accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the codelist. The name can be up to 16
characters long and include spaces. Input required.
Description Editable field A detailed description of the codelist. This description can
be, for example, work to be performed. Input optional.
Creator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the codelist. Input
optional.
Viva Series, Codelists 117
6.4 Managing Codes
6.4.1 Accessing Codes
Description Managing codes includes
•creating new codes
• viewing codes with their related information
•editing codes
• deleting existing codes.
Access step-by-step
Codes Codes from currently active code groups are shown.
The listed codes belong to
the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed through
New job \ Codelist
OR
to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties \ Codelist.
The * indicates codes which have attributes attached.
Step Description
1. In Codelists, highlight the codelist of the codes which are to be managed.
2. Edit.. to access Edit Codelist.
3. Codes.. to access Codes.
Viva Series, Codelists 118
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new code. Refer to "6.4.2
Creating/Editing a Code".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted code. Refer to "6.4.2
Creating/Editing a Code".
Delete
To delete the highlighted code.
More
To display information about the code
description, the quick codes if available, the
code groups and the code type.
Fn Group
To view, create, delete, activate and deacti-
vate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing
Code Groups".
Fn Sort
To sort codes by code name, code descrip-
tion, quick code or the last use.
Viva Series, Codelists 119
6.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code
)The values for code groups, codes and attributes are case sensitive. For example, the code
group Tree is not the same as the code group TREE.
)Attribute names that have already been typed in cannot be edited in a job codelist.
)A new code can also be created within an application. In this case, the new code is added
to the job codelist.
New Code or Edit Code Store
To add the new code and any associated
attributes to the codelist in the internal
memory.
+Attrib
To add a new editable field for an attribute
of attribute type normal and of value type
text.
Name or Value
Available for attributes for which an
attribute name can be typed in. To highlight
the field of the attribute name or the field
for the attribute value. The name of the
attribute can be edited and the attribute
value to be used as the default attribute
value can be typed in.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Codelists 120
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Code Editable field A unique name for the new code. The name can be
up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input
required.
Description Editable field A detailed description of the code. This description
can be, for example, the full designation if Code is an
abbreviation. Input optional.
Code group Selectable list The code group to which the code is to be assigned.
Code type Selectable list Defines the use of the code. It can be used as
thematical code for points, lines or areas or as a free
code.
Makes a code unique. A code can have the same
value with different types within the same codelist.
For example a code OAK can be of type Point, Line,
Area and/or Free.
Linework Selectable list Only available for Code type: Point. To allow a new
line or new area to be opened whenever the point
code is newly selected. This functionality is also avail-
able when creating codelists with LGO Codelist
Management.
None Select this option to disable the functionality. All
other code settings on the instrument are not
affected when this option is set.
Viva Series, Codelists 121
Begin line When a point code is newly selected, a new line is
opened and the point being stored is added to the
line. When the same point code remains selected, a
new line is not opened. The point being stored is
added to the current line.
Begin area The behaviour for opening a new area is the same as
the behaviour for opening a new line.
Style Selectable list Available for Code type: Line and Code type: Area.
The style in which lines/areas are represented in
MapView and LGO.
Attribute Editable field Up to twenty attributes can be created.
)Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed
and of value type real or integer must be
created in LGO.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Codelists 122
6.5 Managing Code Groups
Access In Codes, press Fn Group.
Code Groups The listed code groups belong to
the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed through
New job \ Codelist
OR
to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties \ Codelist.
Codes from currently active code groups are shown.
OK
To close the screen and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new code group. In New Code
Group type in a unique name for Name.
Store stores the new code group typed in
and returns to Code Groups.
Viva Series, Codelists 123
Description of columns
Edit..
Available for codelists in the internal
memory. To edit the highlighted code group.
In Edit Code Group type in the changes for
Name. Store stores the changes and returns
to Code Groups.
Use
To activate and deactivate the highlighted
code group. Codes belonging to a deacti-
vated code group are not displayed in
Codes.
None or All
To deactivate or activate all code groups.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Code group The name of the code group.
Activated Use code group or not. The codes belonging to a deactivated code group
cannot be selected from the selectable list for code selection. Use
changes between the options.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 124
7 Coordinate Systems
7.1 Overview
Description A coordinate system
• consists of up to five elements.
• allows the conversion from WGS 1984 geodetic or cartesian coordinates to, local carte-
sian, geodetic or grid coordinates and back.
• can be attached to jobs.
• can be manually defined.
• can be computed in the field.
• can be directly received from a reference network. Refer to "14.7.1 Configuration of a
Rover Real-Time Connection".
• can be downloaded to LGO.
• can be uploaded from LGO.
Using coordinate
systems on TPS
Coordinate systems are used on TPS instruments to combine GPS data with TPS data.
)An attached coordinate system is not used to reduce any measured distance on a TPS
instrument.
)All GPS surveyed points are always stored as WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates regardless of
the coordinate system being used. Using a different coordinate system converts the coor-
dinates displayed on the screen, but does not convert and restore the coordinate values in
the database DB-X.
) Points surveyed with a TPS instrument are always stored in local GRID coordinates
regardless of the coordinate system being used.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 125
GPS surveyed points are always stored as WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates regardless of the
coordinate system being used.
Using a different coordinate system converts the coordinates displayed on the screen, but
does not convert and restore the coordinate values in the database DBX.
)One coordinate system can be attached to a job at one time. This coordinate system remains
attached to the job unless it is changed.
Default coordinate
systems
The default coordinate system is WGS 1984. It cannot be deleted. It is not possible to create
a coordinate system called WGS 1984.
Additional default coordinate systems may be available for certain countries.
Active coordinate
system
The active coordinate system is the one attached to the working job. One coordinate system
is always considered as the active coordinate system.
Automatic coordinate
system
When Use auto coordinate system is checked in the RTK Rover Wizard, the coordinate
system is directly received from the reference network. Refer to "14.7.1 Configuration of a
Rover Real-Time Connection".
Coordinate systems
when transferring jobs
between GPS and TPS
When transferring a job from GPS to TPS, or vice versa, the coordinate system stays attached
to the job. It then appears like any other coordinate system on the instrument.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 126
7.2 Accessing Coordinate System Management
Access
Coordinate Systems Listed are all coordinate systems stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information
is shown as -----.
Step Description
1. Go to Job Properties:, Coord system page when creating a new job or editing an
existing working or control job.
2. Open the selectable list for Coord system.
OK
To select the highlighted coordinate system
and to return to the previous screen. With a
data storage device inserted, the selected
coordinate system will be attached to the
working job.
New..
To create a coordinate system manually.
Refer to "7.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating
and Editing".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted coordinate system.
Refer to "7.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating
and Editing".
Delete
To delete the highlighted coordinate system.
Deletion is not possible if the highlighted
coordinate system is active and its source is
RTCM.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 127
More
To display information about the type of
transformation used, the type of heights
computed, the number of control points
used for the determination and the date of
when the coordinate system was created.
Fn Set-D
Available unless a default coordinate system
is highlighted. To turn the highlighted coor-
dinate system into a user defined default
coordinate system stored in the instrument.
Fn Default
To recall the deleted default coordinate
systems.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 128
7.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing
)Coordinate systems can be defined by manual creation or determined by calculation.
In this chapter, the manual creation of coordinate systems is explained. Refer to "31 Deter-
mine Coordinate System" for information on the determination by calculation.
)Coordinate systems with a Classic 3D transformation can be defined by manual creation.
)The type of transformation of the selected coordinate system determines which elements
of a coordinate system can be edited. The name of the coordinate system, the method of
residual distribution and the geoid model in use are always editable.
)For coordinate systems with source RTCM, only the geoid model in use can be changed.
However, if no projection is received with the automatic coordinate system, then the projec-
tion can also be defined.
Access In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. A copy of this coordinate system is
taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit...
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 129
New Coordinate System
or Edit Coordinate
System
Description of fields
Store
To store the coordinate system.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new coordinate system. The
name can be up to 16 characters long and include
spaces.
Residuals Available for transformations with control points.
Manually entered transformations do not have
control points. The method by which residuals are
distributed throughout the transformation area. The
transformation results become more realistic and any
strain is dispersed in the transformation.
1/distance,
1/distance²,
1/distance³/²
Distribute the residuals of the control points
according to the distance between each control point
and the newly transformed point.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 130
Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic inter-
polation approach.
Transformation Selectable list The type of transformation.
Pre Transform Selectable list Available when editing a coordinate system and for
Twostep transformations. The name of a preliminary
3D transformation, which, together with the selected
projection, is used to obtain preliminary grid coordi-
nates for a final 2D transformation.
Ellipsoid Selectable list Available unless projection Type: Customised. The
local coordinates are based on this ellipsoid.
Projection Selectable list The map projection.
Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model.
CSCS model Selectable list The Country Specific Coordinate System model.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 131
7.4 Transformations
7.4.1 Accessing Transformation Management
)Transformations cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to
"Automatic coordinate system".
Access step-by-step
Transformations Listed are all Classic 3D transformations stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable infor-
mation is shown as -----.
Step Description
1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2. Press New.. or Edit...
3. Highlight Transformation.
4. ENTER to access Transformations.
OK
To select the highlighted transformation and
to return to the previous screen.
New..
To create a new transformation. Refer to
"7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted transformation.
Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transfor-
mation".
Delete
To delete the highlighted transformation.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 132
More
To display information about the type of
heights computed and the number of
control points used for the determination of
the transformation.
Fn Set-D
To turn the highlighted transformation into
a user-defined default transformation
stored in the instrument.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 133
7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation
)Classic 3D transformations can be created.
Access In Transformations, highlight a transformation. A copy of this transformation is taken for
further configurations. Press New.. or Edit...
New Transformation or
Edit Transformation,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To store the transformation.
Clear
To set the editable fields to 0. Available on
the Parameters and the Advanced page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new transformation. The
name can be up to 16 characters long and include
spaces.
Type Display only No other transformations than Classic 3D can be
created.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 134
Next step
Page changes to the Parameters page.
New Transformation or
Edit Transformation,
Parameters page
Enter the known values of the transformation parameters.
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
New Transformation or
Edit Transformation,
Advanced page
Select at least a height mode and a transformation model.
Description of fields
Next step
Store stores the transformation.
Field Option Description
Height mode Selectable list The type of heights to be computed.
Model Selectable list The transformation model to be used. For
Model:Molodensky-Badakus, additional editable
fields are available.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 135
7.5 Ellipsoids
7.5.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management
)Ellipsoids cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Auto-
matic coordinate system".
Access step-by-step
Ellipsoids Listed are all ellipsoids stored in the database DBX.
Step Description
1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2. Press New.. or Edit...
3. Highlight Ellipsoid.
4. ENTER to access Ellipsoids.
OK
To select the highlighted ellipsoid and to
return to the previous screen.
New..
To create a new ellipsoid. Refer to "7.5.2
Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted ellipsoid. Refer to
"7.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid".
Delete
To delete the highlighted ellipsoid.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 136
Fn Set-D
To turn the highlighted ellipsoid into a user-
defined default ellipsoid stored in the instru-
ment.
Fn Default
To recall the deleted default ellipsoids.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 137
7.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid
Access In Ellipsoids, highlight an ellipsoid. A copy of this ellipsoid is taken for further configura-
tions. Press New.. or Edit...
New Ellipsoid or Edit
Ellipsoid
Description of fields
Store
To store the ellipsoid.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new ellipsoid. A name is
mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces.
Axis a Editable field The semi-major axis a.
1/f Editable field The reciprocal value of flattening f.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 138
7.6 Projections
7.6.1 Accessing Projection Management
)Projections cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Auto-
matic coordinate system".
Access step-by-step
Projections Listed are all projections stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown
as -----.
Step Description
1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2. Press New.. or Edit...
3. Highlight Projection.
4. ENTER to access Projections.
OK
To select the highlighted projection and to
return to the previous screen.
New..
To create a new projection. Refer to "7.6.2
Creating/Editing a Projection".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted projection. Refer to
"7.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection".
Delete
To delete the highlighted projection.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 139
Description of columns
Fn Set-D
Available unless a default projection is high-
lighted. To turn the highlighted projection
into a user-defined default projection stored
in the instrument.
Fn Default
To recall the deleted default projections.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Option Description
Type The projection type. Refer to standard surveying literature
for details on projections.
Customised Customised projection. Certain fixed projections which
cannot be defined by any of the following options.
Transverse
Mercator Transverse Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder
with its axis lying on the equatorial plane. The cylinder is
tangential to a meridian.
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator. Transverse Mercator
Projection with fixed zone-defining constants. The central
meridian is selected automatically according to the
selected zone number.
Oblique
Mercator Oblique Mercator. Oblique Mercator Conformal projection
onto a cylinder. The cylinder is tangent to any circle other
than the equator or a meridian.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 140
Mercator Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder with its
axis lying on a meridian plane. The cylinder is tangent to
the sphere along the equator.
Lambert 1
parallel Lambert 1 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone, with
its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid.
Lambert 2
parallel Lambert 2 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone, with
its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid. The cone
is secant to the sphere.
Cassini Soldner-Cassini. Projection onto a cylinder. It is not an
equal area or conformal. The scale is true along the central
meridian and along lines perpendicular to central meridian.
Polar stereo Polar Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection onto
a plane. The point of projection is on the surface of the
ellipsoid diametrically opposite of the origin which is the
centre of the projection.
Double stereo Double Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection
onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface of
the sphere diametrically opposite of the centre of the
projection.
RSO Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic. This is a special type of
Oblique Mercator projection.
Column Option Description
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 141
7.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection
Access In Projections, highlight a projection. A copy of this projection is taken for further configu-
rations. Press New.. or Edit...
New Projection or Edit
Projection
Description of fields
Store
To store the projection.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new projection. A name is
mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 142
Type Selectable list The projection type. The setting for determines the
availability of the subsequent fields for the parame-
ters of the projection. Refer to "7.6.1 Accessing
Projection Management" for a description of the
projection types.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 143
7.7 Geoid Models
7.7.1 Overview
Use in the field For use on the instrument in the field, geoid field files are created from the geoid model.
Create geoid models on
the instrument
Geoid models can be created on the instrument in one of three ways:
1. The geoid field file is stored on a data storage device and can be used when the data
storage device is inserted in the instrument. It is recommended for large geoid field
files. This method is explained in this chapter.
2. The geoid field file is stored in the internal memory of the instrument. It is recom-
mended for large geoid field files. This method is also explained in this chapter.
3. The geoid field file is transferred to the internal memory and can be used at any time.
Refer to "24.1 Transfer user objects"for information on how to transfer geoid field
files to the internal memory on the instrument.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 144
7.7.2 Accessing Geoid Model Management
Access step-by-step
Geoid Models Listed are all geoid models stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown
as -----. For example, ----- would be shown if the geoid field file associated to the geoid
model is not available on the data storage device / internal memory.
Step Description
1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system.
2. Press New.. or Edit...
3. Highlight Geoid model.
4. ENTER to access Geoid Models.
OK
To select the highlighted geoid model and to
return to the previous screen.
CF card
To create a new geoid model. The
\DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data
storage device is automatically scanned for
geoid field files. Refer to "7.7.3 Creating a
New Geoid Model from the Data Storage
Device / Internal Memory".
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 145
Edit..
To view the highlighted geoid model. None
of the fields can be edited. The geoid field
file from which the geoid model was created
must be stored in the internal memory or in
the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data
storage device.
Delete
To delete the highlighted geoid model. The
geoid field file which was associated with
this geoid model is then also deleted.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 146
7.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal Memory
Requirement At least one geoid field file with the extension *.gem is in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory
on the data storage device / internal memory.
Create geoid model
step-by-step Step Description
1. Listed in Geoid Models are all geoid models stored in the internal memory.
OR
Press CF card to scan the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage
device.
2. For each geoid field file on the data storage device or in the internal memory, one
geoid model is automatically created. The names given to the geoid models are
those names which were entered in LGO.
)Existing geoid models are automatically overwritten by new models with the
same name.
3. The creation of a geoid model is finished.
Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 147
7.8 CSCS Models
Use in the field For use on the instrument in the field, CSCS field files are created from the CSCS model.
)The creation of CSCS models on the instrument and the functionality of all screens and fields
are similar to those for geoid models. Refer to " Requirement".
The directory on the data storage device / internal memory for CSCS field files with the
extension *.csc is \DATA\GPS\CSCS.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 148
8Jobs & Data - Import data
8.1 Overview
Description The data to import must be stored on the data storage device or in the internal memory.
Data can be imported to a job
• on the data storage device.
• on the internal memory.
Import formats Format Characteristic Description
ASCII Import variables Point ID, grid coordinates, thematical codes.
No free codes, no attributes.
Format definition Free format. Use and order of variables and
delimiter can be defined during import.
Units As currently configured on the instrument
Height Orthometric or ellipsoidal
Specialities
Local heights but no coordi-
nates in file
Points are imported without coordinates but
with local height and code if available.
Coordinates but no heights in
file
Points are imported without height but with
coordinates and code if available.
No coordinates or heights in
file
No import
No point IDs in file No import
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 149
GSI8
GSI16
Import variables Point ID (WI 11), local coordinates (WI 81,
WI 82, WI 83), thematical codes (WI 71). No
free codes, no attributes. Example for GSI8:
110014+00001448 81..01+00001363
82..01-00007748 83..01-00000000
71....+000sheep
Format definition Fixed format. Easting and Northing can be
switched during import.
Units As defined in the GSI file
Heights Orthometric or ellipsoidal
Specialities
Local heights but no coordi-
nates in file
Points are imported without coordinates but
with local height and code if available.
Coordinates but no heights in
file
Points are imported without height but with
coordinates and code if available.
No coordinates or heights in
file
No import
No point IDs in file No import
DXF Import variables Block, point, line, arc, polyline. Local coordi-
nates. No free codes, no attributes.
Format definition Fixed format (X/Y/Z).
Units Not predefined.
Heights Z value imported as orthometric.
Format Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 150
Checks Points are always imported with the class Ctrl and a coordinate quality of -----. Refer to
"Appendix H Glossary".
While importing points to a job, checks are performed against point ID, class and coding of
points already existing in the job.
Specialities
No coordinates or heights in
file
No import
Format Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 151
8.2 Importing Data in ASCII/GSI Format
Requirements At least one ASCII file with any file extension, is stored in the \DATA or \GSI directory of the
data storage device.
)Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import ASCII data.
Import ASCII Data
Description of fields
OK
To import the data.
Config..
To define the format of the data to be
imported.
Edit..
To view the file from which data will be
imported.
Fn Hts..
To define how heights and the Easting are
imported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are
imported.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 152
Next step
Config.. accesses, depending on selection for Data type to import, either Configuration or
Configuration (GSI).
Data type to
import Selectable list Defines if ASCII or GSI data are imported.
From file Selectable list For Data type to import:ASCII data: All files in the
\DATA directory on the data storage device can be
selected.
For Data type to import:GSI data: All files with exten-
sion *.gsi in the \GSI directory on the data storage
device can be selected.
To job Selectable list Choosing a job as destination for import makes this
job the working job.
Header lines Selectable list This option allows up to ten header lines which can
exist in an ASCII file to be skipped. Select the number
of header lines.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 153
Configuration
Description of fields
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Default
To recall the default import settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Delimiter Selectable list The separator between the import variables.
Point ID posi-
tion, Easting
position,
Northing posi-
tion, Height
position and
Code position
Selectable list Select the positions of the particular variables. An
example is shown at the bottom of the screen.
Multi Spaces Available for Delimiter:Space.
Yes For space delimited data having one space between
the variables.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 154
Next step
Configuration (GSI) Description of fields
No For space delimited data having multiple spaces
between the variables.
Number of
lines/pt Selectable list Available for Delimiter:Line feed. The number of
lines used to describe each point.
Step Description
1. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data.
2. Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Switch
WI81/WI82 Yes or No All WI 81 data, normally Easting, is imported as
Northing and all WI 82 data, normally Northing, is
imported as Easting. This coordinate switch is neces-
sary for “left handed” coordinate systems.
Definition of
feet Selectable list The type of feet used in the GSI file.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 155
Next step
Define Ht Type & Easting
Import Description of fields
OK leads back to Import ASCII Data.
Step Description
1. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data.
2. Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import.
Field Option Description
Delimiter Selectable list The height type for the imported data.
Multi Spaces Selectable list The Easting can be imported as written in the ASCII
file or it can be multiplied by -1. This change is
required by some coordinate systems.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 156
8.3 Importing Data in DXF Format
Requirements At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf has to be stored in the \DATA
directory of the data storage device.
)Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import DXF Data.
Import DXF Data
Description of fields
OK
To import the data.
Config..
To define the format of the data to be
imported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are
imported.
From file Selectable list All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory
on the data storage device can be selected.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 157
Next step
Config.. accesses Configuration.
Configuration Description of fields
Next step
OK leads back to Import DXF Data.
To job Selectable list Choosing a job as destination for import makes this
job the working job.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Block prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported blocks.
Point prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported points.
Line prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported lines.
File units Selectable list Choosing the unit for the DXF data to be imported.
Create points at
the vertices of
lines
Selectable list Option if points will be created at vertices of the
imported line/arc/polyline elements.
Convert white
elements Selectable list Option if white coloured elements will be converted
to black coloured elements.
Height to
exclude Selectable list Height values inside the DXF file are considered
invalid and will not be converted.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 158
9Jobs & Data - Export & copy data
9.1 Overview
Description Data can be exported
• to a file on the data storage device.
• to a file on the internal memory.
Export format Format Characteristic Description
ASCII Export variables Refer to the online help of LGO.
Format definition Composed individually as format file using
LGO. Refer to the online help of LGO for
information on creating format files.
Units Defined within the format file.
Coordinate conversion All coordinate types are supported.
Height All height types are supported. If the desired
height cannot be computed, the default
value for the missing variable is output.
Specialities:
Points in file outside of CSCS
model
If the variable is missing, the default value is
output.
Points in file outside of geoid
model
If the variable is missing, or a geoid separa-
tion is available, the default value is output.
DXF Coordinate conversion All points are converted to local grid position
using the coordinate system.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 159
Height Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height are
supported.
Specialities:
Points in file outside of CSCS
model
Points outside of CSCS model are not
exported.
Points in file outside of geoid
model
The ellipsoidal height is exported.
LandXML Coordinate conversion All points are converted to local grid position
using the coordinate system.
Height Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height are
supported.
Specialities:
Points in file outside of CSCS
model
LocalGrid position of the points outside of
CSCS model is not exported.
Points in file outside of geoid
model
The ellipsoidal height is exported.
FBK/RAW5/
RAW
Coordinate conversion All points are converted to local grid position
using the coordinate system.
Height If a geoid model exists, then orthometric
height is supported, otherwise ellipsoidal
height is exported.
Units Metre, US Ft or Int Feet, Gons, Dec Deg, DMS
Format Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 160
9.2 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format
Description The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what format
is used.
Data is exported from the selected job. Currently active view, filter and sort settings are
applied.
Requirements At least one format file was created using LGO and transferred to the internal memory.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export ASCII data.
Export ASCII Data OK
To select the highlighted format file.
Config..
To configure the default extension to be
used.
Filter..
To define the order in which points, lines
and areas are exported as well as which
points are exported.
CrdSys.
To update the coordinate system in which
the coordinates are exported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 161
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to.
)For Export to: Internal memory the data is
always exported to the \DATA directory.
Folder Selectable list Available for Export to: CF card, Export to: SD card
and Export to: USB. The data can be exported to the
\DATA, the \GSI or the root directory. Data must be
stored to the \GSI directory to be read in a TPS instru-
ment.
Job Selectable list To select the job to export.
Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
Format file to
use Selectable list The format files currently available in the internal
memory.
Report sheet Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be
exported.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 162
9.3 Exporting Data in DXF Format
General Data can be exported to a DXF file in the \DATA directory of the data storage device or the
internal memory.
)Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export DXF Data.
Export DXF data
Description of fields
OK
To export the data.
Config..
To define what is exported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to.
Folder Selectable list )The data is always exported to the \DATA
directory.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 163
Next step
Config.. goes to Configuration, Objects page.
Configuration,
Objects page
Description of fields
Job Selectable list To select the job to export.
Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
Report sheet Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be
exported.
Field Option Description
OK
To export the data.
Filter..
To define the order in which points, lines
and areas are exported as well as which
points are exported. Refer to "5.6.1 Sorting
and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Points Check box When this box is checked, points are exported.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 164
Next step
Page changes to the DXF page.
Configuration,
DXF page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Labels page.
Lines Check box When this box is checked, lines are exported.
Areas Check box When this box is checked, areas are exported.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Export lines &
areas Selectable list Defines if lines and areas are exported as Line or
Polyline entities.
Export LGO
symbols Editable field Defines if a block is created for each point with the
same icons used in LGO.
Symbol size Selectable list Defines the size used for creation of the LGO
symbols.
Dimensions Selectable list Defines the dimension of the DXF file.
Export to DXF
layer Selectable list Defines the DXF layer.
Export LGO
symbols Check box When this box is checked, the relevant symbols for
LGO are also exported.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 165
Configuration,
Labels page
Description of columns
Next step
Edit.. access Labels.
OK
To accept the settings.
Edit..
To define the colour for each label and also
the DXF layer name for user-defined labels.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Label The name of the label.
Export Shows if the label is exported or not.
Layer name The name of the layer that is exported. The information that is exported
can be the point ID, the coordinates, the height or the point code.
Colour The colour of the label.
Decimals The number of decimals used.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 166
The settings on this page define which labels with information (Point ID, Coords, Height and
Pt Code) for each point are exported. Each label can be exported as separate layer or in the
same layer as the point is exported. Additionally the decimals can be defined for the Coords
and Height label.
Labels Description of fields
Next step
OK returns to Configuration.
Field Option Description
First field on
screen
Check box When this box is checked, labels for the point IDs,
coordinates, heights or point codes are exported.
Colour Selectable list Available when the check box in the first row is
checked. Defines the colour for the label.
Layer Selectable list When this box is checked, the label is exported as
separate layer.
Layer name Selectable list Available when Layer is checked. The name of the
separate layer.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 167
9.4 Exporting Data in LandXML Format
General Data can be exported to a LandXML file in the \DATA directory of the data storage device or
the internal memory.
)Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export LandXML Data.
Export LandXML Data
Description of fields
OK
To export the data.
Config..
To define what is exported.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to.
)The data is always exported to the \DATA
directory.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 168
Next step
Config.. accesses Configuration, Export page.
Configuration,
Export page
Description of fields
Job Selectable list To select the job to export.
Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
Report sheet Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be
exported.
Field Option Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Filter..
To set the sort and filter settings for export.
Refer to "5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points,
Lines and Areas".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Points Check box When this box is checked, points are exported.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 169
Next step
Page changes to the LandXML page.
Configuration,
LandXML page
Description of fields
Lines Check box When this box is checked, lines are exported.
Areas Check box When this box is checked, areas are exported.
TPS measure-
ments Check box When this box is checked, TPS observations are
exported.
GPS measure-
ments Check box When this box is checked, GPS observations are
exported.
Codes Check box When this box is checked, point codes, line codes and
area codes are exported.
Free codes Check box When this box is checked, the free code, free code
description, free code group and the free code
attributes, are all exported to the LandXML file asso-
ciated to each exported point.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Dimensions Selectable list Defines the dimension of the exported entities.
LandXML
version Selectable list Defines the LandXML version of the file exported file.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 170
9.5 Exporting Data in FBK/RW5/RAW Format
General Data can be exported to an AutoDesk FBK, TDS RAW, TDS RW5, Carlson RW5 or MicroSurvey
RW5 file. The newly created file is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device
or the internal memory.
The formatted FBK files can be imported directly into Autodesk products.
The created RW5 and RAW files can be processed with various survey office packages.
Although the export operation converts any job to an FBK/RW5/RAW file, the figure creation
is based on existing lines and areas present in the job.
Point codes
Each point collected should have a point code.
Line/Area ID
IF you are creating THEN
Autodesk FBK file Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in
Autodesk LDT and Civil 3D to each position located.
TDS RW5 file Point codes are used to generate raw linework in TDS
Foresight.
MicroSurvey RW5 file Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in
MicroSurvey CAD to each position located.
IF you are creating THEN
Autodesk FBK file The figure ID follows the user selection as defined in the
configuration menu.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 171
)Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export FBK/RW5/RAW data.
Export FBK/RW5/RAW
data
TDS RW5 file The line and area IDs are not used when importing data
into TDS Foresight.
MicroSurvey RW5 file The line and area IDs are not used when importing data
into MicroSurvey CAD 2005.
IF you are creating THEN
OK
To export the data.
Config..
To configure some format-specific options.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 172
Description of fields
Next step
Config.. to access the configuration screen.
Configuration,
General page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to.
Folder Display only The data is always exported to the \DATA directory.
Job Selectable list To select the job to export.
Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected job.
Data format Autodesk FBK,
TDS RW5, TDS
RAW, Carlson
RW5 or Micro-
Survey RW5
Ensure that this field is set properly.
File name Editable field Default is the name of the selected Job. It can be
changed.
)The extension designation (.FBK, .RW5 or
.RAW) is added automatically.
Field Option Description
Use numerical
pt ID Check box Available unless Data format: TDS RW5.
Pt ID offset Editable field The point IDs are offset by this value.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 173
Next step
Page changes to the Objects page.
Configuration,
Objects page
Use angle right Check box Define if angle right values are exported.
Figure ID Selectable list Available for Data format: Autodesk FBK. For all
other formats, the figure ID is set to point code only
automatically.
Field Option Description
OK
To return to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data.
All
To check all boxes at once.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 174
Description of fields
Next step
OK returns to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data.
Field Option Description
All fields Check box To include points from an application, check a box.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 175
9.6 Copy Data Between Jobs
Description This chapter explains the process of copying data from one job to another.
)Important features:
• Points are copied as defined by the point filter settings.
• Points selected for copying can be viewed in a points listing. The point sort settings
define the order of the points in the listing. The point filter settings define the points to
be viewed in the listing.
• Only points are copied - observation data is not copied.
• When points are copied from one job to another:
• the point codes and attached attributes are also copied.
•the Class is retained.
•the Sub class is retained.
•the Source is changed to Copied Point.
• the point coordinate quality is retained.
•the Instrument Flag is retained.
•the Date and Time is retained.
Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Copy data between jobs.
Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 176
Copy Data Between Jobs
Description of fields
OK
To copy a selection of points.
Filter..
To define the point sort and/or point filter
settings of points from the job. Refer to
"5.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines
and Areas".
Data..
To view, edit and delete points, lines and
areas stored with the job. Points, lines and
areas are shown on separate pages.
Selected sort and filter settings apply. Refer
to "5 Jobs & Data - Data".
CrdSys.
To select a different coordinate system.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
From job Selectable list Describes where the points are to be copied from.
Coord system Display only The coordinate system which is currently attached to
the job.
To job Selectable list Describes where the points are to be copied to.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 177
10 Instrument - TPS settings
10.1 Measure mode & target
10.1.1 Measure & Target Settings
Description The settings on this screen define the active EDM Electronic Distance Measurement and ATR
Automatic Target Recognition settings.
)Available options depend on the purchased model, for example with or without ATR.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Measure mode & target.
Measure & Target
Settings Description
• This screen has two pages - the Survey page and the Setup page.
•The Survey page and Setup page contain identical fields.
• The settings made in the Survey page are used by all applications and all measurements
taken outside of the Setup application.
• The settings made in the Setup page are only used inside the Setup application.
• Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or hotkeys,
while the Setup application is active, only affect the Setup Measure & Target Settings.
• Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or hotkeys,
while the Setup application is not active, only affect the Survey Measure & Target
Settings.
• When entering the Setup application, the Setup Measure & Target Settings are active.
• When leaving the Setup application, the Survey Measure & Target Settings are active.
• Both Survey and Setup Measure & Target Settings are part of the working styles.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 178
Diagram
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Test
To access the EDM Test Signal/Frequency
screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Measure Prism All fields are set to the last used options.
The infrared EDM exists for all instrument types and
allows to measure the distance to a prism or a tape.
For Target aiming: Automatic or Target aiming: Lock
this option is automatically set.
Any surface To measure without reflector.
Measure mode Standard Available for Measure:Prism. Standard single
distance measurement.
Single (fast) Available only for Measure:Prism. Fast single
distance measurement.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 179
Continuous Continuous distance measurement.
Long range
(>4km) Available only for Measure:Any surface. Distance
measurement over long distances.
Single Available for Measure:Prism. Standard single
distance measurement.
Target Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets screen.
Leica constant Display only The additive constant as stored for the selected
prism in the SmartWorx Viva software.
Absolute constant Display only The true additive constant.
Target aiming Manual Measurements are done without any automation.
ATR search and/or ATR measurement are not
performed.
Automatic Positioning to static prisms. The ATR sensor is used
for measurements to static prisms. If needed an ATR
measurement or ATR search is performed after
pressing Meas or Dist.
Lock Unavailable for SmartStation. The instrument locks
onto and follows the moving prism. The ATR sensor
is used to follow moving prisms and to find prisms
after loss of lock. Depending on Measure single or
continuous measurements are performed pressing
Meas or Dist.
Visibility Good If weather conditions are normal, then select this
mode.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 180
Rain & fog To increase the instrument measuring ability during
suboptimal weather conditions. This mode has a
considerable influence on the range (restriction to
100-150 m). This mode is automatically deactivated
when the instrument is turned off.
Rain & fog
always As for Rain & fog, however this mode stays active
when the instrument is turned off.
Sun & reflec-
tions To increase the instrument measuring ability during
incident solar radiation and reflections. This mode is
automatically deactivated when the instrument is
turned off.
Sun & rflctns
always As for Sun & reflections, however this mode stays
active when the instrument is turned off.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 181
10.1.2 Targets
Description Each prism type has an absolute constant.
Leica Geosystems prisms are predefined as defaults and can be selected. Additional prisms
can be defined.
Default targets Following default prisms are always available on the instrument:
Access Open the selectable list for Target in Measure & Target Settings.
Product Name Name in list Type Leica constant Absolute
constant
GRZ4, GRZ122 Leica 360° Prism Prism +23.1 mm -11.3 mm
GMP111-0 Leica Mini 0 Prism 0.0 mm -34.4 mm
GRZ101 Leica Mini 360° Prism +30.0 mm -4.4 mm
GMP101, GMP111 Leica Mini Prism Prism +17.5 mm -16.9 mm
GZM29, GZM30, GZM31,
CPR105
Leica Reflectve
Tape Tape +34.4 mm 0.0 mm
GPR1, GPR111, GPR113,
GPR121, GPH1P
Leica Round
Prism Prism 0.0 mm -34.4 mm
-Reflectorless RL +34.4 mm 0.0 mm
MPR122
)For Machine
Control purposes
only!
Leica HDS Target Prism +34.4 mm 0.0 mm
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 182
Targets
OK
To select the highlighted target and to
return to the previous screen.
New..
To define a new target. Refer to "10.1.3
Creating/Editing a Target".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted target. It is not
possible to edit default targets. Refer to
"10.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target".
Delete
To delete the highlighted target. It is not
possible to delete default targets.
More
To display information about the additive
constant, the target type and the creator of
the target.
Fn Default
To recall previously deleted default targets
and to reset default targets to the default
settings. User-defined targets are not
affected.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 183
10.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target
Access In Targets, highlight a target. All constants are copied from this target. Press New.. or Edit...
New Target
Description of fields
Store
To store the target.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A significant name for the new target.
Type Prism, Tape or
Undefined The type of target to be defined.
Leica constant Editable field The additive constant as stored for the selected
prism in the SmartWorx Viva software.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 184
)An additive constant of 0.0 mm has been
defined for the Leica Geosystems standard
targets GPR1, GPR111, etc. All entered or
selected additive constant values are differ-
ences to this 0.0 mm based Leica Geosystems
TPS prism system.
Absolute
constant Editable field The true additive constant. The additive constant is
always in mm.
)The additive constants of non-Leica Geosys-
tems prisms are often given in the true zero
prism system. Use the following formula to
convert the additive constant to the Leica
Geosystems TPS prism system. This Leica
constant must be entered into the Leica
instrument.
Formula: True zero constant - 34.4 mm = Leica
constant.
It is highly recommended to check the additive
constant for non-Leica Geosystems prisms on
a baseline with an appropriate procedure.
Creator Editable field A name of the creator or other comments can be
entered.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 185
10.2 Prism search settings
Description The settings on this screen define
• the size of search windows for prisms to be searched in. The prisms can be searched with
PowerSearch in the PowerSearch window or with ATR in the Fine search window.
• the behaviour of automatic prism search after the target is lost in lock mode.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Prism search settings.
Prism Search Settings,
Target prediction page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Time limit for
predicting target
location
From 1s to 5s If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock the
path of the prism is predicted for the selected
number of seconds.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 186
Next step
Page changes to the PowerSearch window page.
If no target found
after prediction then Stop
searching Perform no search after prediction.
Start fine
search Perform search after prediction with ATR in a
dynamic Fine search window.
Start Power-
Search Perform search after prediction with PowerSearch.
Activate PowerSearch on the PowerSearch window
page.
Turn to last
msd pt If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock, then
the instrument turns back to the last stored point.
The field of view is disabled while the instrument is
repositioning.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 187
Prism Search Settings,
PowerSearch window
page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
New..
To define new PowerSearch window.
Centre
To centre the PowerSearch window to the
current position of the telescope.
Show
To position the telescope to corners of
PowerSearch window.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use PowerSearch
window Check box If checked, PowerSearch searches in the
defined window.
Hz angle left, Hz angle
right, V angle up and V
angle down
Display only The left, right, upper and lower boundaries
of the PowerSearch window.
Minimum range No limit and from
25 m to 175 m
Minimum distance of the search range for
the PS window to be defined.
Maximum range From 25 m to
175 m and No
limit
Maximum distance of the search range for
the PS window to be defined.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 188
Next step
Page changes to the Fine search window page.
Prism Search Settings,
Fine search window
page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Width of Hz search Editable field Horizontal extent of window.
Height of V search Editable field Vertical extent of window.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 189
10.3 Atmospheric corrections
Description The settings on this screen define the atmospheric ppm and the refraction.
For standard applications, the distance is corrected due to atmospheric influences. The
geometrical correction and the projection distortions are set to 0.00. Heights are reduced
with the standard refraction coefficient.
Refer to TPS1200+ User Manual for information on calculations.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Atmospheric corrections.
Atmospheric Correc-
tions,
Atmospheric ppm page
The atmospheric distance corrections are derived from the dry air temperature, air pressure
or elevation above mean sea level MSL, and the relative air humidity or wet bulb tempera-
ture.
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn P<>E
To change Pressure to Elev above MSL and
back.
Fn %<>T'
To change Humidity to Temp wet-bulb and
back.
Fn ppm=0
To set Atmospheric ppm:0.0.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 190
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Refraction page.
Field Option Description
Temperature Editable field Sets the temperature.
Pressure or Elev
above MSL Editable field Sets the atmospheric pressure or the elevation
above mean sea level dependent on selection.
Humidity or Temp
wet-bulb Editable field Sets the relative air humidity or the wet bulb temper-
ature dependent on selection.
Atmospheric ppm Editable field
or display only
The atmospheric ppm is either set or calculated from
the values in the previous fields.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 191
Atmospheric Correc-
tions,
Refraction page
The refraction correction is taken into account during the calculation of the height differ-
ence.
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to another page.
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use refraction coef-
ficient correction Check box If checked, refraction correction is applied to meas-
urements.
Coefficient (k) Editable field Refraction coefficient to be used for calculation.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 192
10.4 Level bubble & compensator
Description If raw data is to be displayed and recorded, the compensator and the horizontal correction
can be deactivated.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator.
OR
Tap / .
Level Bubble & Compen-
sator
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Intensity Scroll bar To adjust the intensity of the laser plummet.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 193
Tilt compensator On Vertical angles are relative to plumb line. The hori-
zontal angle is corrected for the transversal tilt
errors.
Off The correction is turned off temporarily.
Always off The mode stays always deactivated.
Hz correction On The horizontal angles are corrected for the line of
sight and tilting axis.
Off The correction is turned off temporarily.
Always off The mode stays always deactivated.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 194
10.5 Quality control & offsets
Description Quality control
The instrument can be configured to monitor sequentially stored measurements and to
notify the user if the coordinates lie within a defined range of each other.
If configured, the X,Y coordinates of a point being stored can be compared to the coordi-
nates of the last previously stored point. If the difference is less than the defined position
tolerance then a warning is shown. It can now be decided whether to store the point or not.
If configured, backsight target points and resection target points which were measured
during the setup procedure are then also checked in this manner.
Offsets
The offset values are applied to measured points. The Offset function allows offset points
to be determined, for instance when the reflector cannot be set up directly on a point.
Transverse, longitudinal and/or elevation offsets can be defined from the reflector position
to the offset point. All of the displayed and recorded measurement data is in relation to the
offset point.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 195
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Quality control & offsets.
P0 Station
P1 Current position
P2 Offset point
P3 Offset point
d1 Offset cross left
d2 Offset cross right
d3 Offset length towards instrument
d4 Offset length away from instrument
d5 Offset height down
d6 Offset height up
TS_003
d3
d5
d6
d1 d2 d4
P1
P3
P0
P2
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 196
Quality Control &
Offsets,
Target QC page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Target offsets page.
)If configured in a survey screen page, the offset values appear also in the survey screen page
in Survey.
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Check for repeated meas-
urements to same target Check box If checked, target checking is activated.
Target tolerance Editable field The position tolerance. The units are defined by
User\System settings\Regional settings.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 197
Quality Control &
Offsets,
Target offsets page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Offst=0
To set all offsets to 0.000.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Offset mode Reset after
storing The offset values are reset to 0.000 after a point is
measured with Store or Meas.
Permanent The offset values are applied to every measured
point until reset or changed.
Offset left/right Editable field Sets cross offset of target point, perpendicular to the
line of sight.
Offset in/out Editable field Sets length offset of target point, in the direction of
the line of sight.
Offset height Editable field Sets height offset of target point.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 198
Next step
Page changes to another page.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 199
10.6 Lights
Description The settings on this screen allow the lights on the instrument to be configured.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Lights.
Instrument Lights
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use the red laser
pointer Check box If checked, the red laser of the reflectorless EDM is
turned on.
Use the instrument
guide lights (EGL) Checkbox If checked, the Emitting Guide Light (EGL) is turned
on.
This field is only available if EGL is fitted.
Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 200
Intensity From 0 % to
100 %
To adjust the EGL/Laser Guide intensity using the left
and right arrow keys.
Use the reticule light Check box If checked, the reticule illumination is turned on.
Intensity From 0 % to
100 %
To adjust the reticule illumination intensity using the
left and right arrow keys.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 201
11 Instrument - GPS settings
11.1 RTK rover wizard
11.1.1 Overview
Description Using this wizard, the settings for a real-time rover behaviour are defined at one glance.
These settings are stored in an RTK profile.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard.
)If RTK profiles exist, the wizard starts with the screen shown in this section. Otherwise, the
wizard starts the process of creating a new RTK profile. In this case refer to "11.1.2 Creating
a New RTK Profile".
RTK rover wizard
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 202
Next step
IF you want to THEN
create a new set of
settings
select Create a new profile, press Next and continue with "11.1.2
Creating a New RTK Profile".
select a different set
of settings
select Load an existing profile, press Next and continue with
"11.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile".
edit an existing set of
settings
select Edit an existing profile, press Next and continue with "11.1.4
Editing an Existing RTK Profile".
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 203
11.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile
RTK rover wizard,
Enter the RTK profile
details
Type in the name and a description for the new set of settings.
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 204
11.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile
RTK rover wizard,
Choose an RTK Profile Select an existing RTK profile from the selectable list.
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Delete
Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile
currently shown in the selectable list.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 205
11.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile
RTK rover wizard,
Choose an RTK Profile Select the RTK profile to be edited from the selectable list.
Description of fields
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Delete
Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile
currently shown in the selectable list.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Field Option Description
Create a copy Check box Creates a copy before the editing process starts.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 206
11.2 Satellite tracking
Description The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite signals are
used by the instrument.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Satellite tracking.
Satellite Tracking Status,
Tracking page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
GPS L5 Check box Defines if the GPS L5 signal will be tracked.
GLONASS Check box Defines if GLONASS satellite signals are accepted by
the instrument when tracking satellites.
GALILEO Check box Defines if Galileo satellite signals are accepted by the
instrument when tracking satellites.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 207
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Satellite Tracking Status,
Advanced page
COMPASS Check box Defines if Compass satellite signals are accepted by
the instrument when tracking satellites.
Show message &
audio warning,
when loss of lock
occurs
Check box Activates an acoustic warning signal and a message
given by the instrument when satellites are lost.
Field Option Description
OK
To accept changes.
Hlth..
Available for Satellite health: User defined.
To configure the satellites used in the
survey.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 208
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Cut-off angle Editable field Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite
signals are not recorded and are not shown to be
tracked. Recommended settings:
• For real-time: 10°.
• For purely post-processing applications: 15°.
DOP limit None, GDOP,
HDOP, PDOP or
VDOP
If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is
checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the limit
is exceeded.
Limiting value Editable field The maximum acceptable DOP value.
Available unless DOP limit: None.
Satellite health Sets the satellite tracking behaviour.
)This setting is remembered when the instru-
ment is turned off. It is stored as part of the
configuration set.
Automatic Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the
instrument. Data from signals which are flagged as
unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time
computations.
User defined Satellites must manually be included/excluded from
data recording and real-time computations with
Hlth...
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 209
Next step
Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health.
Satellite Health This screen consists of the GPS page, Glonass page and the Galileo page. The explanations
given for the softkeys are valid for all pages.
Description of columns
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Use
To change between the options in the
column User.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Option Description
Satellite 01 to 32 The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32), the
Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle
number (Galileo, 1 to 30) of the satellites.
There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for
GLONASS satellites and a prefix E for Galileo satellites.
System OK, N/A or
Unhealthy Information on the satellite health taken from the
almanac. N/A stands for not available.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 210
Next steps
User Bad Excludes satellite from tracking.
OK Includes satellite in tracking.
Auto Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is healthy.
Step Description
1. Page changes to the Glonass page and to the Galileo page, where GLONASS
satellites and Galileo satellites used in the survey can be configured.
2. OK returns to Satellite Tracking Status.
3. OK returns to Main Menu.
Column Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 211
11.3 Antenna heights
11.3.1 Rover Antenna Heights
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Antenna heights.
Rover Antenna Heights
Description of fields
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Rover antenna Selectable list Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as default
and can be selected from the list. Default antennas
contain an elevation dependent correction model.
New antenna correction models can be set up and
transferred to the instrument using LGO. Open the
list to define or edit additional antennas.
Refer to "12 Antenna Heights".
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 212
Vertical offset Display only The vertical antenna offset for the selected antenna.
Antenna height
when meas-
uring points
Editable field Sets the default antenna height for the current
working style. This height is then also the default
antenna height during the use of applications. The
antenna height can still be changed during a survey.
The change will not update this default height. The
initial value depends on the selected antenna.
Antenna height
when moving Editable field Sets the default antenna height for auto points and
for the moving part of a track when logging raw
observations.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 213
11.3.2 Antennas
Description Listed are antennas in the instrument’s System RAM.
Access Open the selectable list for Rover antenna in Rover Antenna Heights.
Antennas
OK
To select the highlighted antenna and to
return to the previous screen.
New..
To define a new antenna. Refer to "11.3.3
Creating/Editing an Antenna".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted antenna. It is not
possible to edit default antennas. Refer to
"11.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna".
Delete
To delete the highlighted antenna. It is not
possible to delete default antennas.
Fn Default
To recall previously deleted default antennas
and to reset default antennas to the default
settings. User-defined antennas are not
affected.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 214
11.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna
Access In Antennas, highlight an antenna. All offsets are copied from this antenna. Press New.. or
Edit...
New Antenna or Edit
Antenna,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To store the antenna.
Clear
To set the editable fields to 0. Available on
the Parameters and the Advanced page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new antenna.
Hz offset Editable field Horizontal offset of measurement reference point.
Vertical offset Editable field Vertical offset of measurement reference point.
L1 phase offset Editable field Offset of L1 phase centre.
L2 phase offset Editable field Offset of L2 phase centre.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 215
Next step
Page changes to the IGS page.
New Antenna or Edit
Antenna,
IGS page
The combination of values typed in here provides a unique standardised ID for the antenna
being used.
Description of fields
Next step
Store stores the new antenna.
Copy additional
corrections Check box Allows additional corrections to be copied from the
antenna which was highlighted before this screen
was accessed.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
IGS name Editable field The International GPS/GNSS Service name of the
antenna.
Serial number Editable field The serial number of the antenna.
Setup number Editable field The setup number of the antenna. Identifies the
version number of the current calibration.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 216
11.4 Quality control
Description The settings on this screen define the limits for coordinate quality accepted for point occu-
pations.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control.
Quality Control,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes.
Param..
To configure the time interval after which a
point occupation can be stopped automati-
cally.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Automatically
stop point
measurement
Check box Activates a selectable list for the stop criteria.
Stops the measurements automatically when the
parameter defined for Stop criteria reaches 100 %.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 217
Stop criteria Defines the method used for Automatically stop
point measurement. The setting determines the
computation and value to be shown in the survey
screen mask and in the status screen. Parameters for
the selected method are defined with Param...
Accuracy or Posi-
tions Available when working with real-time device.
Records observations between pressing Meas and
Stop. Recommended for normal real-time applica-
tions. Refer to the diagram below.
Immediately Records the time tag when Meas is pressed. A coor-
dinate is interpolated between the positions at the
neighbouring two epochs to filter out effects of
slight movement. Recommended when measuring
positions of objects while the antenna is moving.
Example: Measuring the position of lampposts by
driving in a car along the road and pressing Meas
when the car is next to the lamppost. Refer to the
diagram below.
Time, Observa-
tions or Number of
satellites
Available when working without real-time device.
Automatically
store point Check box Stores points automatically after stopping the point
occupation.
Check quality
before storing Check box If activated, the limit defined in Tolerance is checked
before storing a point. A warning signal is given when
the limit is exceeded.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 218
Stop criteria: Accuracy or Positions
Check Position only,
Height only or
Position & height
The type of coordinate quality to be checked before
storing a point.
Tolerance Editable field The maximum acceptable coordinate quality.
a) Time in epochs
b) Meas pressed
c) Stop pressed
d) Post-processed coordinates computed by
averaging resulting positions of epochs 2
and 3
Field Option Description
12345
a
cb
d
GS_046
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 219
Stop criteria: Immediately
Next step
a) Time in epochs
b) Meas pressed and point coordinates inter-
polated based on epochs 2 and 3
c) Meas pressed and point coordinates inter-
polated based on epochs 4 and 5
d) Plan view
e) Meas pressed and point coordinates inter-
polated based on epochs 2 and 3
f) Meas pressed and point coordinates inter-
polated based on epochs 4 and 5
IF parameters for
Stop criteria THEN
are not to be config-
ured
Page changes to the Advanced page.
are to be configured Param.. changes to Parameters for Auto Stop or Real-Time Stop
Criteria.
GS_047
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
a
d
f
e
bc
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 220
Quality Control,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Parameters for Auto Stop The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria.
Field Option Description
Automatically start measuring
point on entering survey No Starts point occupation when pressing
Meas.
Yes Starts point occupation automatically when
entering the survey screen. All subsequent
points must be occupied by pressing Meas.
Timed Starts point occupation automatically at a
certain time.
OK
To accept changes.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 221
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Time at point Editable fields Sets the required observation time for each point.
Counting time starts when Meas is pressed. The
instrument stops measuring when the set length of
time is reached.
Number of obs Editable fields Sets the required number of observations that are to
be recorded at each point. Counting observations
starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops
measuring when the set number of observations is
reached.
At logging rate Display only Displays the rate at which static raw observations are
logged as configured.
8+ satellites for, 7
satellites for, 6
satellites for, 5
satellites for and 4
satellites for
Editable field Sets the required observation time depending on the
number of satellites available. Counting time starts
when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops meas-
uring when the set length of time for a certain
number of satellites is reached.
Should the number of available satellites change
during observation, the observations already
recorded will be taken into account.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 222
Next step
Observation time
depending on the
number of satellites
available
Thin line represents 6 satellites for: 3 min.
Bold line represents 5 satellites for: 5 min.
Dashed line represents 4 satellites for: 7 min.
Step Description
1. OK closes the screen.
2. OK returns to the screen from where Parameters for Auto Stop was accessed.
a) Meas is pressed. Counting time starts.
b) Observation is stopped.
c) 40 % for five satellites.
d) 30 % for five satellites.
e) 30 % for four satellites.
1234
4
5
6
5678
abc
e
dbb
GS_048
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 223
Thin line represents 6 satellites for: 3 min.
Bold line represents 5 satellites for: 5 min.
Dashed line represents 4 satellites for: 7 min.
a) Meas is pressed. Counting time starts.
b) Observation is stopped.
c) 40 % for five satellites
d) 30 % for five satellites
e) 30 % for four satellites
1234
4
5
6
5678
abc
e
dbb
GS_048
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 224
Real-Time Stop Criteria The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria.
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Pos quality
better than and
Ht quality better
than
Editable field Sets the maximum position and height qualities for
each point occupation. Calculating the qualities starts
when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops meas-
uring when the position and height qualities are both
less than the configured values.
Positions Editable field Raw data is logged for a minimum number of posi-
tions even when the Pos quality better than and Ht
quality better than is already less than the specified
maximum.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 225
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Position update Display only Displays the value for GPS postion update rate as
configured in Instrument\Instrument status info:
Position.
No. of positions Editable field Sets the number the positions which must be
observed before the instrument stops measuring.
Counting the number of positions starts when Meas
is pressed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 226
11.5 Raw data logging
Description Logged raw observations are used for
• static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always post-proc-
essed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover instru-
ments.
• real-time operations
to check the work in the office by post-processing.
OR
to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for
example, due to problems with the real-time data reception.
Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for post-processing.
The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations.
Access To log raw data, a licence key is required. The licence key can only be loaded from an SD
card using the Webserver or myWorld@Leica Geosystems.
The licence for raw data logging is required to log GNSS raw data on the GS10/GS15 or on
a field controller.
The licence for RINEX logging is required to log RINEX data on the GS10/GS15.
Select Main Menu:Instrument\GPS settings\Raw data logging.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 227
Raw data logging
settings
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Log data for
post-
processing
Check box Activates raw data logging.
Log data to Controller or GS
sensor Data can either be logged to the field controller or to
the antenna.
Logging starts Selectable list Available for Log data to:GS sensor. Data logging
can start as soon as the instrument is turned on or
only while in the Survey application.
Log data when Static Raw observation logging during static intervals when
occupying a point. The instrument has to be
stationary.
Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 228
Static & kinematic Raw observation logging during static and moving
intervals. For post-processed kinematic rover opera-
tions.
Kinematic Raw observation logging during moving intervals. For
post-processed kinematic antenna operations.
Rate From 0.05s to
300.0s Rate at which raw observations are logged.
Recommendations:
• The maximum logging rate using Bluetooth on the
field controller is 0.2 s.
• For static operations with long baselines and over
long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s.
• For base stations for post-processed and real-
time kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should be
the same rate as at the rover.
• For initialisation while static and occupying
distinct points in kinematic chains Rate between
0.1s and 2.0s.
Data type Selectable list Available for Log data to:GS sensor. Data can be
logged in the Leica proprietary MDB format or in
RINEX.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 229
12 Antenna Heights
12.1 Overview
Description The height of the GNSS antenna above a point consists of three components:
• the vertical or slope height reading,
• the vertical offset,
• the vertical phase centre variations.
For most operations, pre-configured standard settings in the instrument can be used. They
automatically take the vertical phase centre variations into account.
Vertical or slope height Only vertical antenna heights measured to the Mechanical Reference Plane are accepted.
Measurements
required
This table is an overview of required measurements depending on antennas, setup and
accessories. All former Leica antenna types are supported.
IF the antenna is AND the accesso-
ries are
AND the setup is THEN the measure-
ments required are
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
standard Leica tripod vertical height from
height hook
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
standard Leica pole none.
Value is 2.00 m.
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
standard Leica pillar vertical height to the
MRP.
Leica antenna, for
example GS15
non-Leica any • vertical height to
the MRP.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 230
Vertical phase centre
variations
The antenna calibrations to determine the phase centre variations were executed by
Geo++® GmbH.
• possibly vertical
offset.
non-Leica antenna standard Leica
OR
non-Leica
any • vertical height to
the MRP.
• possibly vertical
offset.
• phase centre vari-
ations.
• horizontal offset if
a slope height
reading.
IF the antenna is AND the accesso-
ries are
AND the setup is THEN the measure-
ments required are
For Leica antennas: Are handled automatically in the standard antenna records.
For non-Leica antennas: Can be stored in a newly created antenna record.
OR
Antenna records including azimuth and elevation-dependent
corrections must be created using LGO.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 231
12.2 Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP
General The Mechanical Reference Plane
• is where the antenna heights are measured to.
• is where the phase centre variations refer to.
• varies for different antennas.
GS15
a) The mechanical reference plane is the
underside of the threaded metal insert.
GS_031 a
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 232
AX1201/AX1203+ GNSS
a) The mechanical reference plane is the
underside of the threaded metal insert.
GS_032 a
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 233
12.3 Determining Antenna Heights
12.3.1 Pillar Setup
)• One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna
types are supported.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
Pillar setup
a) Mechanical reference plane
b) Vertical phase centre offset for L1
c) Vertical phase centre offset for L2
d) Vertical height reading
Vertical offset = 0
GS_033
d
a
bc
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 234
Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the pillar benchmark and the
mechanical reference plane of the antenna. Normally, it is determined indirectly by levelling.
Determine the antenna
height step-by-step
Sometimes, it is difficult to measure to the MRP directly.
Step Description
1. Determine the height difference between the pillar benchmark and a surface on
the carrier.
2. Look up the height difference between this surface on the carrier and where the
MRP of the antenna sits on the carrier.
3. Add the values determined in step 1. and 2., to get the vertical height reading.
4. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.00 m.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 235
Carrier and adapter
dimensions
GRT247 carrier, preferred for GS15 GRT146 carrier.
GS_038
40 mm
GS_036
36.5 mm
145.5 mm
109 mm
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 236
GRT144 carrier with GAD31 screw-to-stub
adapter.
GS_037
36.5 mm
145.5 mm
99.7 mm
9.3 mm
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 237
Next step • At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument.
• The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pillar setup and
will automatically be taken into account.
•Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations.
)For carriers other than those carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be
determined.
)Except for Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset must be measured.
This value must be entered in the antenna setup record.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 238
12.3.2 Tripod Setup
)• One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna
types are supported.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
Tripod setup
a) Mechanical reference plane
b) Vertical phase centre offset for L1
c) Vertical phase centre offset for L2
d) Vertical offset
e) Vertical height reading
GS_034
d
e
b
c
a
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 239
Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the ground mark and the
bottom end of the height hook. It is determined using the height hook.
Determine the antenna
height step-by-step
Next step • At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument.
• The vertical offset of 0.36 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a tripod setup and
will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered.
•Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations.
)For other than the carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be deter-
mined, the vertical offset must be adapted and entered into a new antenna record.
)For other height measurement devices than the height hook, the dimensions must be deter-
mined and the vertical offset must be adapted.
)For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be
entered in the antenna setup record.
Step Description
1. Determine the vertical height reading using the height hook.
2. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.36 m.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 240
12.3.3 Pole Setup
)• One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna
types are supported.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
Pole setup
a) Mechanical reference plane
b) Vertical phase centre offset for L1
c) Vertical phase centre offset for L2
d) Vertical height reading
Vertical offset = 0
GS_035
d
b
c
a
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 241
Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the bottom end and the top end
of the pole. Usually, this height difference is a fixed value.
Determine the antenna
height step-by-step
Next step • At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument. A
standard rover configuration with a standard antenna setup record for a pole setup uses
the value of 2.00 m already as default.
• The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pole setup and
will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered.
•Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations.
)For other than the Leica standard poles, the dimensions must be determined.
)For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be
entered in the antenna setup record.
Step Description
1. The vertical height reading for
• the Leica standard pole consisting of an upper and a lower half is 2.00 m.
• the Leica standard pole consisting of an upper and a lower half with an addi-
tional 1.00 m pole section added is 3.00 m.
• the lower half of the pole alone is 1.00 m.
2. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.00 m.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 242
12.4 SmartStation Setup
)• A SmartStation setup requires that the user configures Rover antenna: GS15SmartStn
in Rover Antenna Heights. This configuration will ensure the correct vertical offset is
applied to the antenna heights.
• For a SmartStation setup, the antenna height value in the GPS survey screen must equal
the value for Instrument height. Instrument height is seen in the preceding Set Station
Point.
• Leica standard accessories are used.
Viva Series, Antenna Heights 243
SmartStation setup
a) Mechanical reference plane
b) Vertical phase centre offset for L1
c) Vertical phase centre offset for L2
d) Vertical offset
e) Instrument height reading
GS_078
e
bc
d
a
Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 244
13 Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard
13.1 Starting the TPS Connection Wizard
Description This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected with a total station using a
wizard.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument connections\TPS connection wizard.
TPS Connection Wizard -
Step 1
Description of fields
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to
the next screen.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Manufacturer Selectable list The brand of the instrument.
Model Selectable list The instrument model.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 245
Next step
Next changes to the next screen.
Connect using Cable, Bluetooth
or Internal radio How the instrument is connected. The options avail-
able depend on the selection for Model.
IF THEN
connected via cable refer to Connection Using Cable.
connected via Bluetooth refer to Connection Using Bluetooth.
connected via internal
radio
refer to Connection Using Internal Radio.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 246
13.2 Connection Using Cable
Description The connection settings must be specified.
TPS Connection Wizard -
Step 2
Description of fields
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to
the next screen.
Default
To return the fields back to their default
values.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Baud rate From 1200 to
115200
Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device
in bits per second.
Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data.
Data bits 6, 7 or 8Number of bits in a block of digital data.
Stop bit 1 or 2Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 247
Next step
Next and follow the instructions on the screen.
Flow control None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake.
When the instrument/device is ready for data, it
asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready
to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the
Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the
data.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 248
13.3 Connection Using Bluetooth
Description The screen shown depends on whether a last used Bluetooth ID is available for the chosen
instrument model.
TPS Connection Wizard -
Step 2
This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has a previously used Bluetooth ID
already stored.
Next step
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Next
To confirm the settings and to continue to
the next screen.
Search
To search for a different total station.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 249
Total Station Connec-
tions - Step 2
This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has NO previous used Bluetooth ID
already stored.
Move the focus using the arrow keys or the stylus to select a Bluetooth device.
Next step
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Next
To connect to the selected device and
continue to the next screen.
Search
To search for a different total station.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - TPS connection wizard 250
13.4 Connection Using Internal Radio
TPS Connection Wizard -
Step 2
Description of fields
Next step
Next and follow the instructions on the screen.
Field Option Description
Link number Editable field The assigned channel number.
Set as Remote or Base )The radio modules inside the field controller
and the TPS instrument must be set to oppo-
site settings. It is recommended to set the
field controller to Remote and TPS instrument
to Base.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 251
14 Instrument connections - All other connections
14.1 Accessing Configuration Connections
Description The instrument has various connections which can be configured to be used with different
ports and devices. The configuration varies depending on the individual application.
Access For RTK rover and TPS:
•Select Main Menu:Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connections.
For RTK base:
•Select Main Menu:Base connections\Instrument connections\All other connec-
tions.
Connection Settings The screen gives an overview of all connections with the currently assigned port and device.
For an RTK rover, this screen consists of the CS connections and the GS connections page.
OK
To return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Edit..
To configure the parameters related to the
highlighted connection. Refer to the
sections on each individual connection in
this chapter.
Cntrl..
Available for certain devices connected to
certain connections. To configure additional
parameters related to the highlighted
device.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 252
Fn Conect and Fn Disco
Available for a real-time connection config-
ured to use an Internet connection. To dial
the number of another station configured in
the active working style and to hang up
again.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 253
14.2 CS Internet / GS Internet
Description The Internet connection
• allows accessing the Internet using the field controller or the instrument plus normally a
GPRS device.
• can be used together with the real-time connection to receive real-time data from, for
example, an Ntrip Caster via Internet communication.
Refer to "27 NTRIP via Internet" for information about Ntrip.
The settings on this screen define the port and parameters required for accessing the
Internet.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet. Edit...
•In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Edit...
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, select GS Internet. Edit...
For TPS:
•In Connection Settings, highlight CS Internet. Edit...
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 254
Internet Connection,
Internet page
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Search
To search for all available Bluetooth devices.
If more than one Bluetooth device is found a
list of available devices is provided. Available
if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are
selected.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS
Internet Devices". Available if the Internet
connection is activated.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Available if the Internet connection is acti-
vated.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 255
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Use Internet
connection on
CS or Use
Internet
connection on
GS
Check box Activates the Internet connection.
Connect using The ports available for connection to the Internet.
CS Internal GSM An internal port in the field controller. This port has
a “fixed” device.
CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller.
CS Bluetooth 1 and
CS Bluetooth 2 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will
be used for the connection functionality.
GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS15: The red LEMO port.
GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15: The port for the slot devices.
Device Display only The name of the selected device.
Use user ID &
password for
Internet
connection
Check box If checked, a user ID and a password can be typed in.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 256
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Internet Connection,
Advanced page
Description of fields
User ID Editable field Some providers ask for a user ID to allow connecting
to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a
user ID must be used.
It is possible to show/hide the User ID.
Password Editable field Some providers ask for a password to allow
connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your
provider if a password is required.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Use static IP
address Check box In order to get access to the Internet, an IP address
is required. This IP address identifies the instrument
in the Internet. This option should only be checked if
a static IP address is available for the instrument.
The IP address to get access to the Internet is
provided by the network provider permanently. Each
time the instrument wants to access the Internet via
the device the same IP address identifies the instru-
ment. This behaviour is important if the instrument is
used as a TCP/IP server.
IP address Editable field Available if Use static IP address is checked. To set
the IP address.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 257
Next step
OK returns to the screen from where Internet Connection was accessed.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 258
14.3 GPS Rover / Base Sensor
Description To connect the field controller to the sensor (antenna) either on the base or on the rover
side.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Rover. Edit...
•Select Instrument\Instrument connections\GPS connection.
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, select Base Sensor. Edit...
•Select Instrument\Base connections\Connect to base sensor.
GPS Connection /
Connect to Base Sensor
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Search
To search for all available Bluetooth devices.
If more than one Bluetooth device is found a
list of available devices is provided. Available
if Use Bluetooth is activated.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 259
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Use Bluetooth Check box Activates the Bluetooth connection.
Last used rover Display only Available for RTK rover.
The name of the selected Bluetooth device.
Last used base Display only Available for RTK base.
The name of the selected Bluetooth device.
Bluetooth ID Display only The ID of the selected Bluetooth device.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 260
14.4 ASCII Input
14.4.1 Configuration of an ASCII Input Connection
Description The ASCII Input connection receives ASCII messages from third-party devices such as depth
sounders, barometers, digital cameras, pipe detectors, Geiger counters, etc. The ASCII
messages are stored as annotations together with the next manually measured point and/or
auto point. After receiving the ASCII message, a reply can be sent back to the device as
confirmation.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used and the type of ASCII
messages to be written to individual annotations.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input. Edit...
ASCII Input,
ASCII input page
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Devce..
Available when Receive ASCII data via a
device is checked. To create, select, edit or
delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing
Devices / GPRS Internet Devices".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 261
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Annotation 1/Annotation 2/Annotation 3/Annotation 4 page.
Fn Cmnd..
To configure a message to be sent through
the configured port to the device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Receive ASCII
data via a
device
Check box Activates the ASCII input connection.
Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 and
CS Bluetooth 2 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will
be used for the connection functionality.
CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller.
Device Display only The name of the device selected for ASCII input.
End of
message CR, LF or CR/LF The character to be used to identify the end of the
incoming ASCII message.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 262
ASCII Input,
Annotation 1/Annotation
2/Annotation 3/Annota-
tion 4 page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Store ASCII
data to this
annotation
Check box If checked, ASCII messages are recorded with the
selected annotation.
Message desc Editable field The description for the ASCII message being received.
This description is then displayed in other screens,
for example in the status screen.
Message ID Display only The message ID to identify a particular ASCII message
coming from the device. The message is then saved
to the annotation. The following characters can be
used as filter:
^ To accept strings starting with the subsequent
characters. For example, ^1 accepts 12 but not 21.
$ To accept strings ending with the preceding char-
acters. For example, 1$ accepts 21 but not 12.
. To accept any character except newline.
[ ] To accept a set of characters. For example, [0-9]
accepts all numbers.
Any characters to accept strings that include the
characters at any position. For example 1 accepts
1234, 4321 or 2134 but not 2345.
Prefix
'@<Desc>@'
when writing
Check box Stores the description in Message desc as prefix to
the ASCII message. This prefix helps to more easily
identify the annotations registered with a point.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 263
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 264
14.4.2 Configuration of a Command to the Device
Access For RTK rover:
•In ASCII Input, ASCII input page, Fn Cmnd...
Send Command to
Device
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Send
To send the command to the device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Command Editable field A message to be sent to the device through the
configured port when the survey or stakeout applica-
tion is accessed. This functionality, for example,
allows the device to be started remotely. The last
used command that was entered is remembered as
part of the active working style.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 265
14.5 GPS Hidden Pt
Description Hidden point measurement devices are used for measuring to points which cannot be
directly measured with GPS, for example house corners or trees. The measurements made
with a hidden point measurement device are directly transferred to the instrument for the
calculation of the coordinates of the hidden point. They can also be entered manually.
The settings on this screen define the port, the device and estimated qualities to be used
for the hidden point connection.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Hidden Pt. Edit...
Hidden Point Connection OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Offset..
To configure the height and external angle
offsets.
Search
Available when a Bluetooth port and device
is selected. To search for all available Blue-
tooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth
device is found a list of available devices is
provided.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS
Internet Devices".
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 266
Description of fields
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use a device to
measure
hidden points
Check box To compute a hidden point with height. Activates the
hidden point connection. If not checked, the meas-
ured values must be entered manually.
Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 and
CS Bluetooth 2 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will
be used for the connection functionality.
CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller.
Device Display only The name of the selected hidden point device.
Bluetooth ID Display only Available if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are
selected. The Bluetooth ID of the hidden point
device.
Default method The method which is suggested first when starting
the Survey Hidden Points application.
Bearing & distance The distance and bearing from the known point to
the hidden point are to be determined. An auxiliary
point helps compute the bearing which might not be
known. The auxiliary point can be measured in the
direction from the known point to the hidden point.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 267
Using 2 bearings The bearings from the known points to the hidden
point are to be determined. Auxiliary points help
compute the bearings which might not be known.
Auxiliary points can be measured in the direction
from the known points to the hidden point.
Using 2 distances The distances from the known points to the hidden
points are to be determined. The location of the
hidden point relative to the line between the two
known points is to be defined.
Chainage & offset The chainage from one known point along the line
between the two known points must be determined.
The offset of the hidden point to the line between
the two known points must be determined.
Back brng &
distance The distance and the bearing from the hidden point
to the known point are to be determined. An auxiliary
point helps compute the bearing which might not be
known. An auxiliary point can be measured in the
direction from the hidden point to the known point.
Set 2DCQ to Editable field The estimated value for the position quality assigned
to all hidden points. This value must be estimated
because hidden point measurement devices do not
output position qualities.
Compute
height for
hidden points
Check box Select to compute a hidden point with height.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 268
Next step
Hidden Point Device
Offsets
Set 1DCQ to Editable field Available when Compute height for hidden points is
checked. The estimated value for the height quality
assigned to all hidden points.
IF height and external
angle/distance offsets
THEN
are not to be configured OK closes the screen and returns to the screen from where
Hidden Point Connection was accessed.
are to be configured Offset...
Field Option Description
OK
To accept changes and to return to Hidden
Point Connection.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 269
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Distance offset Editable field The offset is automatically added to the measured
distance.
Height offset Available when Compute height for hidden points is
checked in Hidden Point Connection.
None No height offsets are used. The result is the delta
height between the centre of the device and the
aimed point.
Device height When measuring hidden points, the height of the
hidden point measurement device can be typed in.
This option should be used when the hidden point
can be directly measured using the hidden point
device.
Device & target ht When measuring hidden points, the height of the
hidden point measurement device as well as the
target height can be typed in. This option should be
used when the hidden point cannot be directly meas-
ured with a hidden point device, but a target point
can be used to calculate the position.
Device height Editable field The height of the hidden point measurement device.
This height is the distance from the ground to the
centre of the device.
Target height Editable field The distance from the hidden point to the aimed
point.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 270
Next step
Angle offset Sets the default method for entering an angle offset.
EAO is an offset angle between the North of the
device being used and WGS 1984 geodetic North.
EAOs are applied when measuring hidden points
using a device capable of measuring azimuths.
None No EAO value is applied to the azimuth measurement
received from the hidden point measurement device.
Permanent Applies a default value for the offset angle. The value
is changeable.
New for each point Offset angle values must be entered for each new
hidden point.
Offset Editable field Available for Angle offset:Permanent.
The default value for the offset angle.
Step Description
1. OK returns to Hidden Point Connection.
2. OK returns to the screen from where Hidden Point Connection was accessed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 271
Diagram
P0 Known point
P1 Target point
P2 Hidden point
aHeight of P0
b Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3
d1 Device height: height of hidden point
measurement device above P0
d2 Slope distance
d3 Device height: height of P1 above P2
d4 Height difference between hidden point
measurement device and P1
d5 Horizontal distance
a
d1
d2
d5
d3
b
P1
P2
P0
d4
GS_052
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 272
Distance offsets at
hidden point measure-
ment devices
A Leica DISTO is shown as an example
a) Negative Distance offset
b) Positive Distance offset
c) Pole
d) DISTO
P0 Hidden point
a
b
c
d
P0
GS_053
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 273
14.6 Export Job
Description The Export Job connection allows data from a job to be exported from the instrument to
another instrument.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to which the data will be exported.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight Export Job. Edit...
For TPS:
•In Connection Settings highlight Export Job. Edit...
Export Job Connection OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Search
Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Blue-
tooth 2 are selected. To search for all avail-
able Bluetooth devices. If more than one
Bluetooth device is found a list of available
devices is provided.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS
Internet Devices".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 274
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Export job to
external device Check box Activates the connection.
Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 and
CS Bluetooth 2 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will
be used for the connection functionality.
CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller.
Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active working style. The device which is
selected determines the availability of the next fields.
Job Number Selectable list Available if the Device is a Leica instrument. Select a
job number to assign to the job.
Name Editable field Available if the Device is a Leica instrument. The
name of the job.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 275
14.7 RTK Rover
14.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection
Description The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These
parameters include defining the real-time messages and the base to be used.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover. Edit...
RTK Rover Settings,
General page
The available fields and keys on this screen depend on the selected settings.
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Search
Available when connecting via Bluetooth. To
search for all available Bluetooth devices. If
more than one Bluetooth device is found a
list of available devices is provided.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS
Internet Devices".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 276
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Receive RTK
data Check box If checked, the rover real-time connection is acti-
vated.
Connect using CS Internal GSM An internal port in the field controller. This port has
a “fixed” device.
CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller.
CS Bluetooth 1 and
CS Bluetooth 2 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will
be used for the connection functionality.
CS Internet 1, CS
Internet 1 and CS
Internet 3
The Internet ports on the field controller. If these
ports are not assigned to a specific connection, then
these ports are additional remote ports.
GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS15: The red LEMO port.
GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15: The slot for a device.
GS Internet 1, GS
Internet 2 and GS
Internet 3
The Internet ports on the GS10 or GS15. If these
ports are not assigned to a specific connection, then
these ports are additional remote ports.
Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active working style. The device which is
selected determines the availability of the next fields.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 277
RTK data
format Leica The proprietary Leica real-time GPS data format
supporting GPS L1/L2 and GLONASS L1/ L2. This
format is recommended when working exclusively
with Leica instruments.
Leica 4G The proprietary Leica real-time GNSS data format
supporting GPS L1/ L2/ L5, GLONASS L1/ L2 and
Galileo E1/E5a/E5b/Alt-BOC. This format is recom-
mended when working exclusively with Leica instru-
ments.
CMR/CMR+ CMR and CMR+ are compacted formats used to
broadcast data for third-party instruments.
RTCM 18,19 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Uncorrected
carrier phase and pseudorange. Message 3 is also
generated. Use for real-time operations where the
ambiguities will be resolved at the rover. Accuracy at
the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity
resolution.
RTCM v3 Use RTCM when rover units from a different manu-
facturer are to be used.
Message according to RTCM version 3. A new
standard format for transmission of Global Naviga-
tion Satellite System correction information. Higher
efficiency than RTCM v2.x. Supports real-time serv-
ices with significantly reduced bandwidth.
Message types for real-time GNSS operation:
• 1001: L1-only GPS real-time observables
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 278
• 1002: Extended L1-only GPS real-time observa-
bles
• 1003: L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables
• 1004: Extended L1 & L2 GPS real-time observa-
bles
• 1005: Stationary real-time base station Antenna
Reference Point
• 1006: Stationary real-time base station ARP with
antenna height
• 1007: Antenna descriptor
• 1008: Antenna descriptor and serial number
• 1009: L1-only GLONASS real-time observables
• 1010: Extended L1-only GLONASS real-time
observables
• 1011: L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time observables
• 1012: Extended L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time
observables
Network RTK Messages according to Master-
Auxiliary Concept:
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 279
• 1014: Network Auxiliary Station Data message.
This message contains details of the base stations
in the network. For example, the master station
and its coordinates, and the coordinate differ-
ences between the master and its auxiliaries.
• 1015: Ionospheric Correction Differences
message
• 1016: Geometric Correction Differences message
• 1029: Unicode Text String message
• 1033: Receiver and Antenna Descriptor message
Pseudorange and phase range values for L1 and L2.
Depending on the type of instrument, the data for
L1-only or for L1 and L2 are sent out.
Accuracy at the rover:
• For L1-only: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
• For L1 and L2: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful
ambiguity resolution.
RTCM 1,2 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Differential
and delta differential GPS corrections. Message 3 is
also generated. Use for DGPS applications. Accuracy
at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 280
RTCM 9,2 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. GPS partial
correction set and delta differential GPS corrections.
Message 3 is also generated. Use for DGPS applica-
tions with a slow data channel in the presence of
interference. Accuracy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms.
RTCM 20,21 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Real-time
carrier phase corrections and high accuracy pseudor-
ange corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use
for real-time operations. Accuracy at the rover:
1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution.
RTCM 1,2,18,19 v2 Available for RTK base. Message according to RTCM
version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM
18,19 v2.
RTCM 1,2,20,21 v2 Available for RTK base. Message according to RTCM
version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM
20,21 v2.
The availability of the following options, depends on the selection made
for SBAS tracking on the Advanced page.
Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service
used will be automatically selected.
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be
tracked.
WAAS (test) To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites
while the system is still in test mode.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 281
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System
satellites will be tracked.
EGNOS (test) To track European Geostationary Navigation Overlay
System satellites while the system is still in test
mode.
MSAS MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System where
MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATel-
lite
GAGAN GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites
will be tracked.
RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Available when the selected RTK data format is an
RTCM version 2 format. The same version must be
used at the reference and the rover.
Bits per byte 6 or 8Defines the number of bits/byte in the RTCM
message being received.
Use auto coor-
dinate system Check box Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. To set an
RTCM coordinate system received by a reference
network as active coordinate system.
Receive RTK
network infor-
mation
Check box Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. Activates an
info message (RTCM message 1029).
Behaviour Selectable list Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3.
Log only The info message will only be logged to a text file.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 282
Next step
Page changes to the RTK base page.
RTK Rover Settings,
RTK base page
Description of fields
Show only The info message will only be shown by the instru-
ment.
Show & log The info message will be shown by the instrument
and logged to a text file.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Sensor at base Selectable list The instrument type used at the base. If the real-time
data format contains information of the instrument
type, certain corrections based on this information are
applied in order to provide correct results. The real-
time data formats Leica, Leica 4G, CMR/CMR+ and
RTCM v3 contain this information. These corrections
are important when a System300 instrument or an
instrument from a different manufacturer is used as
reference.
Antenna at
base Selectable list The antenna used at the base. If the real-time data
format contains information of the antenna, certain
corrections based on this information are applied in
order to provide correct results. The real-time data
formats Leica, Leica 4G, CMR/CMR+ and RTCM v3
contain this information.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 283
Next step
Page changes to the RTK network page.
)If the reference data is corrected by absolute
antenna calibration values and a Leica standard
antenna is being used on the rover, select
ADVNULLANTENNA as base antenna.
RTK base is
sending unique
ID
Check box If checked, an ID can be typed in.
RTK base ID Editable field The special ID of the base station from which real-time
data is to be received. The allowed minimum and
maximum values vary.
From 0 to 31 For RTK data format: Leica and RTK data format:
CMR/CMR+.
From 0 to 1023 For RTCM version: 2.x.
From 0 to 4095 For RTK data format: Leica 4G and RTK data format:
RTCM v3.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 284
RTK Rover Settings,
RTK network page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Fn GGA..
To activate the sending of a GGA message
for RTK network applications. Refer to
"14.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message
Sending for Reference Network Applica-
tions".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use RTK
network Check box If checked, an RTK network can be used.
Network type Defines the type of reference network to be used.
Refer to Leica GNSS Spider documentation for more
detailed descriptions.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 285
Nearest The rover sends its position via NMEA GGA message to
Leica GNSS Spider. From this position, Leica GNSS
Spider determines the reference in a reference
network that is closest to the rover. The corrections
from that reference are sent to the rover. Supported
for all real-time data formats.
If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message must
be activated using Fn GGA...
i-MAX individualised Master-AuXiliary corrections. The rover
sends its position via NMEA GGA message to Leica
GNSS Spider where the Master-Auxiliary corrections
are calculated. The corrections are also individualised
by Leica GNSS Spider, which means it determines the
best suitable corrections for that rover.
If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message can
be activated using Fn GGA...
MAX Master-AuXiliary corrections
The rover typically does not send its position to Leica
GNSS Spider. Leica GNSS Spider calculates and sends
Master-Auxiliary corrections to the rover.
The rover individualises the corrections for its posi-
tion, which means it determines the best suitable
corrections. The corrections are sent in RTCM v3 with
message types 1015/1016.
If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message can
be activated using Fn GGA...
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 286
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
RTK Rover Settings,
Advanced page
Description of fields
VRS Virtual Reference Station. If this option is selected, an
NMEA GGA message must be activated using Fn GGA...
Refer to "14.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message
Sending for Reference Network Applications".
FKP Area correction parameters. Derived from German:
FlächenKorrektur Parameter
Send user ID Check box Activates the sending of a Leica proprietary NMEA
message defining the user.
User ID 1 and
User ID 2 Editable field The specific user IDs to be sent as part of the Leica
proprietary NMEA message. By default the serial
number of the instrument is displayed.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Use prediction Check box To activate and deactivate the prediction of real-time
observations between the data rate of the base. Avail-
able unless RTK data format:RTCM 1,2 v2 or RTK
data format:RTCM 9,2 v2.
Use height filter Check box To activate and deactivate the height filter for height
smoothing.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 287
Glonass mode Automatic The instrument decides automatically if GLONASS
observations are fixed or not (only GLONASS instru-
ments).
Glonass fix The GLONASS observations are fixed in an RTK solu-
tion.
Glonass float The GLONASS observations are not fixed in an RTK
solution.
SBAS tracking Allows a Space-Based Augmentation System to be
configured to provide additional corrections in
conjunction with GPS signals. Also commonly referred
to as Satellite-Based Augmentation System, SBAS
provides corrected time and distance measurements
calculated by a network of ground relay stations and
geostatic satellites. An SBAS can correct for problems
such as atmospheric delays, poor satellite geometry
and incorrect satellite positioning.
Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service
used will be automatically selected.
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be
tracked.
WAAS (test) To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites
while the system is still in test mode.
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System
satellites will be tracked.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 288
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Prediction The following provides additional information on the prediction of real-time positions
between the data rate of the base.
Access
In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page.
Description
Prediction is the interpolation of real-time corrections between those corrections regularly
transmitted by a reference at a defined data rate.
Advantages in using prediction
• Computation of real-time positions on the rover is independent from the transmission
rate of the data from the base station.
• Positions computed with prediction have a reduced latency of around 20 ms.
EGNOS (test) To track European Geostationary Navigation Overlay
System satellites while the system is still in test mode.
MSAS MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System where
MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATellite
GAGAN GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites will
be tracked.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 289
Recommended settings for using prediction
The slower the data rate the more important it is to activate prediction.
Height smoothing The following provides additional information on the height filter for height smoothing.
Access
In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page.
Description
Height smoothing is a filter applied to all heights measured in the WGS84 or a local coordi-
nate system or output via NMEA. The filter defaults are best suited for high dynamic varia-
tions in height up to 1 m/s as carried out by graders.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 290
Height Smoothing with high dynamic GPS operations
All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the posi-
tion determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height determination,
satellites can appear in two quadrants. Having fewer quadrants, weakens the height posi-
tion compared to the plan position.
Position determination with satellites
appearing in all four quadrants.
Height determination with satellites
appearing in two quadrants.
GS12_041
N
H
N
E
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 291
In high dynamic GPS operations, this fact results in height variations of a few centimetres
as shown in the blue curve in the following diagram. Some GPS monitoring applications
require a stabilised height. By applying the filter, the height variations are smoothed and
most of the noise in the height component is eliminated.
a) Height
b) Height variations
c) Smoothed height
20 40 60 80 100 1200
201.15
201.16
201.17
201.18
201.19
201.2
201.14
c
b
[sec]
a [m]
GS_050
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 292
14.7.2 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio
Description An ideal real-time setup is to combine a radio and a digital cellular phone to get the best of
both technologies. The radio can be used where the radio signals can be received, the
advantage being that the radio data transmission is free. If the radio channel is broken,
when the rover goes out of range or due to an obstruction, change to the digital cellular
phone to complete the survey. This switch allows maximum productivity and minimal costs
with real-time GPS.
Field procedure step-
by-step Step Description
1. Set up a base.
2. On the base, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another
port.
3. Configure both connections on the base.
4. Start the base. Real-time data is transmitted on two ports simultaneously - using
different devices.
5. Set up a rover.
6. On the rover, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another
port.
7. Use two working styles to configure both connections on the rover.
8. Start the rover using either the digital cellular phone connection or the radio
connection.
9. On the rover, change the working style in use in order to change between using
digital cellular phone and radio. There is no need to return to the base.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 293
14.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications
Description Most reference networks require an approximate position of the rover. For reference
network applications, a rover dials into the reference network and submits its approximate
position in form of an NMEA GGA message.
By default, the instrument sends GGA messages with updated current positions automati-
cally when a reference network is selected.
Surveying regulations in some countries require that one certain position can be selected.
This position is then sent to the reference network as GGA message through the real-time
connection every five seconds.
Refer to "F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data" for information on GGA message
format.
Access step-by-step In RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page, press Fn GGA...
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 294
Send GGA NMEA OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Coord
Available for GGA position:From job and
GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To view
other coordinate types. Local coordinates
are available when a local coordinate system
is active.
Last
Available for GGA position:LAST/HERE
Posn. To use the same coordinates in the
GGA message as when the instrument was
last used in a reference network application.
This functionality is possible when position
coordinates from a previous reference
network application are still stored in the
internal memory.
Here
Available for GGA position:LAST/HERE
Posn. To use the coordinates of the current
navigation position in the GGA message.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height. Available for local coor-
dinates.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 295
Description of fields
Field Option Description
GGA position Automatic The current rover position is sent to the reference
network. The position is updated and sent every five
seconds.
From job A point from the working job can be selected in Point
ID. The position of this point is sent to the reference
network every five seconds.
LAST/HERE Posn The position last used in a reference network appli-
cation or the current navigation position can be
selected using Last or Here. The selected position is
sent every five seconds.
None No GGA message is sent to the reference network.
Point ID Selectable list Available for GGA position:From job.
The coordinates of this point are sent out in the GGA
message.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 296
14.8 Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2
14.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection
Description The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These
parameters include defining the real-time messages, data rates and time slicing. Up to two
real-time connections can be configured on the instrument.
Access For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings highlight Base RTK 1. Edit...
)Two real-time devices can be attached to two different ports, for example a radio and
a digital cellular phone. On the reference, the two devices can operate simultane-
ously. Highlight Base RTK 2 and press Edit.. to configure a second real-time connec-
tion.
RTK base settings
(RTK1)/RTK base
settings (RTK2),
General page
The available fields and pages on this screen depend on the selected settings.
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Devce..
Available for Connect using:GS Port 1/GS
Port 2/GS Port 3. To create, select, edit or
delete a device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing
Devices / GPRS Internet Devices".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 297
Description of fields
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Transmit RTK
base info Check box Activates the base real-time connection.
Connect using GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS15: The red LEMO port.
GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15: The slot for a device.
GS Internet 1, GS
Internet 2 and GS
Internet 3
The internet ports on the GS10 or GS15. If these
ports are not assigned to a specific connection, then
these ports are additional remote ports.
Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port
within the active working style.
RTK data
format Leica, Leica 4G,
CMR/CMR+, RTCM
18,19 v2, RTCM v3,
RTCM 1,2 v2,
RTCM 9,2 v2,
RTCM 20,21 v2,
RTCM 1,2,18,19 v2
Refer to "14.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time
Connection" for information about these real-time
data formats.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 298
Next step
Page changes to the Data rates page.
RTK base settings
(RTK1)/RTK base
settings (RTK2),
Data rates page
Description
For all real-time data formats, parts of the message can be output at different rates.
The settings on this screen define the output rates for the various parts of the selected real-
time data format. The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for RTK
data format in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2).
Description of fields
RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Available when the selected RTK data format is an
RTCM version 2 format. The same version must be
used at the reference and the rover.
Use external
antenna on
GS15
Check box Available for Connect using:GS Port 3. Allows
external radio / GSM antenna on the GS15 to be used
for slot devices.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
RTK data
format Display only The selected data format.
Data From 0.1s to 60.0s Rates for the transmission of raw observations. The
default settings are suitable for standard applica-
tions. They can be changed for special applications. A
check is performed for permissible combinations.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 299
Message type Selectable list The message type of RTCM v3 and Leica 4G.
Compact is suitable for standard applications.
Coords From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of reference coordinates.
Info From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of base station information
such as point ID.
End of
message Nothing or CR To add a Carriage Return at the end of the real-time
message.
Messages
(coordinates
are computed
using the coord
system on the
GS sensor)
Selectable list Available for RTCM version: 2.3. The messages sent
within the coordinate message.
RTK base ID Editable field An identification for a base station. It is converted
into a compact format and sent out with real-time
data in all real-time data formats. It is different from
the point ID of the base station.
An ID of the base station is required if working with
several base stations in time slicing mode on the
same frequency. In this case, the ID of the base
station from which data is to be accepted must be
typed in at the rover.
The allowed minimum and maximum values vary.
From 0 to 31 For Leica and CMR/CMR+.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 300
Next step
Page changes to the Time slicing page.
RTK base settings
(RTK1)/RTK base
settings (RTK2),
Time slicing page
Description of fields
From 0 to 1023 For any RTCM version 2 format.
From 0 to 4095 For Leica 4G and RTCM v3.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Use time slicing Check box The possibility to send delayed real-time messages.
This functionality is required when real-time
messages from different base stations are sent on
the same radio channel. Time slicing works for all
device types.
Total base
stations being
used
2, 3 or 4The number of base stations in use from where real-
time messages are sent.
Time slot for
this base 2, 3 or 4
The contents of the
selectable list
depend on the
settings for Total
base stations
being used.
The time slot represents the actual time delay. The
number of possible time slots is the number of base
stations in use. The time delay equals 1 s divided by
the total number of base stations. If two base
stations are used, the time delay is 0.50 s. Therefore,
the time slots are at 0.00 s and at 0.50 s. With three
base stations, the time delay is 0.33 s. The time slots
are at 0.00 s, 0.33 s and 0.66 s.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 301
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 302
14.9 NMEA 1 / NMEA 2
Description National Marine Electronics Association has developed a message standard related to the
marine electronics industry. NMEA messages have been accepted as the standard for
sharing specific data information between companies since the late 1970s. Refer to
"Appendix F NMEA Message Formats" for a comprehensive description of each NMEA
message.
The settings on this screen define the port, the device and the type of NMEA message to be
used for the NMEA Out connection.
Up to two NMEA Out connections can be configured. Each NMEA Out connection can output
different messages at different rates with different talker IDs. The output of NMEA
messages on both ports is simultaneous.
The screens for the configuration of both NMEA connections are identical except for the title
- NMEA Output 1 and NMEA Output 2. For simplicity, the title NMEA Output 1 is used in the
following.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight NMEA 1 or NMEA 2. Edit...
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 303
NMEA Output 1
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Mesgs
To configure what NMEA messages are
output, the rates and the output timing
method. Refer to paragraph "NMEA
Messages".
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Stream NMEA
messages from
the GS
Check box Activates the output of NMEA.
Connect using GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box.
For GS15: The red LEMO port.
GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box.
For GS15: The black LEMO port.
GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box.
For GS15: The slot for a device.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 304
Next step
GS BT The Bluetooth port on the GS10/GS15.
Device Display only Usually, RS232 is used to transfer NMEA messages.
Use a defined
talker ID Check box When this box is checked, a user-defined talker ID
can be typed in. Otherwise, the NMEA Talker ID based
on the NMEA standards v3.0 is used (default GP for
GPS.)
Talker ID Editable field Available when Use a defined talker ID is checked.
Appears at the beginning of each NMEA message.
Messages
(coordinates
are computed
using the coord
system on the
GS sensor)
Display only The NMEA messages currently selected for output.
IF NMEA messages THEN
are not configured OK closes the screen.
are to be configured Mesgs.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 305
NMEA Messages This screen shows the messages that can be output, which messages are currently output,
the output rates and the output timing method.
Next step
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Edit..
To configure how the currently highlighted
message is output. Refer to paragraph
"NMEA Message to Send".
All and None
To activate and deactivate the output for all
messages.
Use
To activate and deactivate the output for
the highlighted message.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
IF an NMEA
message
THEN
is not to be config-
ured
OK closes the screen.
is to be configured highlight the message and Edit...
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 306
NMEA Message to Send
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Stream the
NMEA
message
Check box When this box is checked, the selected NMEA
message is output.
Output At each epoch The NMEA message is created at the exact epoch of
the screen update rate. It is sent out in the time
interval as defined in Rate. With Output Delay, the
output can also be delayed by a time after this epoch.
Refer to paragraph "Diagram".
Immediately The NMEA message is created as soon as the infor-
mation is available. It is sent out in the time interval
as defined in Rate.
On Point Stored The NMEA message is sent on point storage.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 307
)If the time interval defined in Rate is shorter
than the epochs of the screen update, then
the internal computation of positions is
changed to allow the specified rate of NMEA
positions. The screen update remains
unchanged.
Output Delay Editable field Available for Output:At each epoch.
Delays the output of the NMEA message. The delay is
applied from the epoch as defined in Rate. The time
of delay can be a value up to Rate.
This option is required if two or more instruments are
being used to monitor the position of an object. The
position of each instrument is being output as NMEA
message back to a control station. If all instruments
sent their position message at the same time, as
would be the case with Output:Immediately, then
the control station may not be able to cope with all
the positional data messages. In this case, the output
of the second instrument could be delayed. The
control station would then receive the message from
each instrument at a slightly different time.
Point Type Available for Output:On Point Stored.
Defines the type of points for which the NMEA
message is sent.
All points The NMEA message is sent when any type of point is
stored.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 308
Next step
Occupy Pts Only The NMEA message is sent when a manually meas-
ured point is stored.
Auto pts only The NMEA message is sent when auto points are
stored.
Rate From 0.05s to
3600.0s
Available unless Output:On Point Stored.
Defines the time intervals at which the NMEA
messages are created.
Monitor CQ
values Check box When this box is checked the CQ control can be
defined.
CQ Control Position only,
Height only or
Position & height
Available when Monitor CQ values is checked.
Activates a control over the coordinate quality. If the
coordinate quality of the position and/or height
component exceeds the limit as defined in Maximum
CQ, then NMEA messages are not output,
Maximum CQ Editable field Available when Monitor CQ values is checked.
The limit for the coordinate quality up to which NMEA
messages are output.
Step Description
1. OK returns to NMEA Messages.
2. OK returns to the screen from where NMEA Messages.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 309
Diagram For Output:At each epoch with Rate: 1.0s
a1 Data 1 available
b1 NMEA message for data 1 composed
c1 NMEA message for data 1 sent
a2 Data 2 available
b2 NMEA message for data 2 composed
c2 NMEA message for data 2 sent
For Output:Immediately with Rate: 1.0s
A1 Data 1 available
B1 NMEA message for data 1 composed and
sent
A2 Data 2 available
B2 NMEA message for data 2 composed and
sent
0123 4
a1 A1
b1 B1
b2 B2
c1,a2 A2
c2
GS_051
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 310
14.10 Remote (OWI)
Description The remote connection allows:
• the instrument to be controlled using a device other than the field controller, for example
a computer. Outside World Interface or Leica Binary 2 commands can be used to control
the instrument through the remote port. Documentation for OWI and LB2 is available on
request from the Leica Geosystems representative.
• a message log to be requested from a remote client via an OWI message. A message log
contains a history of warning messages and message lines.
• the downloading of data directly from the instrument’s memory device to LGO through
a serial port on the computer. The CS does not need to be removed from the instrument.
The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used for the remote control.
)A port configured as a remote port can be used to output event input, meteo or tilt notifi-
cation messages.
)The OWI commands listed here are protected by a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load licence
keys" for information on how to type in the licence key. The corresponding LB2 commands
are also protected. If these OWI commands have been activated by a licence key, it is indi-
cated in User About Leica Viva, Instrument page.
•AHT •DPM •GLL •POB •RTK
•ANT •GGA •GNS •POE •TPV
•CNF •GGK •LLK •POQ •USR
•DCF •GGK(PT) •LLQ •POS
•DCT •GGQ •NET •RMC
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 311
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI). Edit...
Remote (OWI) Connec-
tions
Description of columns
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Cntrl..
To configure additional parameters.
Devce..
Available unless an internet connection is
used. To create, select, edit or delete a
device. Refer to "16.2 Accessing Devices /
GPRS Internet Devices".
Use
Available unless a connection is NMEA 1,
NMEA 2 or Remote (OWI). To use the high-
lighted connection by Remote (OWI).
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Port The physical port on the instrument which will be used for the connection
functionality.
Connection The connection configured for the ports. Any port which is not configured
is automatically assigned the remote connection.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 312
Device The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Column Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 313
14.11 Total Station
Description The settings on this screen define the communication of the field controller with total
stations, for example TPS1200, TS09 / TS06 / TS02 and third-party instruments.
Access For TPS:
•In Connection Settings highlight Total Station. Edit...
Total Station Connec-
tions
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Search
To search for all available Bluetooth devices.
If more than one Bluetooth device is found a
list of available devices is provided. Available
if Connect using:Bluetooth is selected.
Cntrl..
Available for certain devices connected to
certain connections. To configure additional
parameters, for example changing the radio
channel.
Default
To return the fields back to their default
values.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 314
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Manufacturer Selectable list The brand of the instrument.
Model Selectable list The instrument model.
Connect using Cable, Bluetooth,
Internal radio or
External radio
How the instrument is connected. The options avail-
able depend on the selection for Model. The availa-
bility of the other fields depends on the selection
made here.
Baud rate From 1200 to
115200
Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device
in bits per second.
Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data.
Data bits 6, 7 or 8Number of bits in a block of digital data.
Stop bit 1 or 2Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data.
Flow control None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake.
When the instrument/device is ready for data, it
asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready
to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the
Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the
data.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 315
14.12 GSI Output
Description Each time a measured point is stored to the working job, GSI data is streamed through the
configured port of the field controller.
Access In Connection Settings highlight GSI Output. Edit...
GSI Output Connection
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Search
Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Blue-
tooth 2 are selected. To search for all avail-
able Bluetooth devices. If more than one
Bluetooth device is found a list of available
devices is provided.
Devce..
To create, select, edit or delete a device.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Output GSI data to
device Check box Activates the connection.
Connect using CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 316
CS Bluetooth 1
and CS Blue-
tooth 2
The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will
be used.
Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port.
GSI Format GSI8 polar &
crtsn GSI Polar and Cartesian (8 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, E, N, Elev.)
GSI16 polar GSI Polar (16 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, reflector height)
GSI16 carte-
sian GSI Cartesian (16 data characters)
(E, N, Elev, Reflector Height)
Pt,N,E,Ht,Date Coordinate data
(Northing BEFORE Easting)
Pt,E,N,Ht,Date Coordinate data
(Easting BEFORE Northing)
Pseudo NMEA
GGA Based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics Associ-
ation), which is a standard for interfacing marine
electronic devices.
GSI8 polar GSI Polar (8 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM)
GSI16 polar 2 GSI Polar (16 data characters)
(Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM)
Use RS232 GSI
protocol Check box A protocol defines if the system expects a hand-
shake or no handshake.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 317
Output format - GSI
Format
GSI data is transmitted in blocks. Every block consists of several data words, refer to the
examples in the following table. Every data word begins with a two character Word Index,
the WI code, specifying the data type within this block. Each GSI8 word has in total 16 char-
acters, consisting of 7 information characters followed by 8 data characters and finally the
blank character ASCII code 32. The GSI16 block is like the GSI8 block, but begins with * and
the data word contains 16 characters for large values such as UTM coordinates, alphanu-
meric codes, attributes or point IDs.
Example 1 shows a GSI8 block sequence with the words for point ID (11), Easting coordinate
(81) and Northing coordinate (82). Example 2 shows a GSI16 block sequence with the words
for point ID (11), horizontal (21) and vertical angle (22).
If checked, a handshake is required.
A data block is sent out from the instrument and a
receipt confirmation is expected. This handshake
requires that GeoCom Mode is activated.
Field Option Description
Type GSI8 Polar&Cart GSI16 Polar GSI16 Cartesian
WI 11 Point ID Point ID Point ID
WI 21 Hz Hz -
WI 22VV-
WI 31 SlopeDist SlopeDist -
WI 51 PPM Total/mm PPM Total/mm -
WI 81 East - East
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 318
Example 1: GSI8
Each word has 16 characters of which 8 characters are used for the data block.
Example 2: GSI16
Each word has 24 characters of which 16 characters are used for the data block.
WI 82 North - North
WI 83 Elev. - Elev.
WI 87 Refl. Ht - Refl. Ht
Word 1 Word 2 Word 3
110001+0000A110 81..00+00005387 82..00-00000992
110002+0000A111 81..00+00007586 82..00-00003031
110003+0000A112 81..00+00007536 82..00-00003080
110004+0000A113 81..00+00003839 82..00-00003080
110005+0000A114 81..00+00001241 82..00-00001344
Word 1 Word 2 Word 3
*110001+000000000PNC0055 21.002+000000001338465022.002+0000000005371500
*110002+000000000PNC0056 21.002+000000001280253022.002+0000000005255000
*110003+000000000PNC0057 21.002+000000001122236022.002+0000000005433800
*110004+000000000PNC0058 21.002+000000001057355022.002+0000000005817600
*110005+000000000PNC0059 21.002+000000000998361022.002+0000000005171400
Type GSI8 Polar&Cart GSI16 Polar GSI16 Cartesian
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 319
GSI Word information
Pos. Name Description of values Applicable for
1-2 Word Index (WI)
3 No signifi-
cance
.: No information. WI 11, WI 21, WI 22,
WI 31, WI 51, WI 81,
WI 82, WI 83, WI 87
4Automatic
index
informa-
tion
.: No information.
0: Tilt compensator:Off
3: Tilt compensator:On
WI 21, WI 22
5Input
mode
.: No information.
0: Measured values transferred from instrument
1: Manual input from keyboard
2: Measured value, Hz correction:Off.
3: Measured value, Hz correction:On.
4: Result calculated from functions
WI 21, WI 22, WI 31,
WI 51, WI 81, WI 82,
WI 83, WI 87
6 Units .: No information.
0: Distance:Metre (m), last digit 1 / 1000 m
1: Distance:US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 1000 ft
2: Angle:400 gon
3: Angle:360° dec
4: Angle:360°'"
5: Angle:6400 mil
6: Distance:Metre (m), last digit 1 / 10000 m
7: Distance:US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 10000 ft
WI 21, WI 22, WI 31,
WI 81, WI 82, WI 83,
WI 87
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 320
Output format -
Pt,N,E,Ht,Date Format
Point ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Date, Time <CR/LF>
Description of fields
The format settings are defined in Regional Settings.
7 Sign +: Positive value
-: Negative value
WI 21, WI 22, WI 31,
WI 51, WI 81, WI 82,
WI 83, WI 87
8-15
8-23
Data Data includes a sequence of 8 (16) numerical or
alphanumerical characters.
)Certain data blocks are allowed to carry
more than one value for example
ppm/mm. This data is automatically trans-
ferred with the according sign before each
single value.
WI 11, WI 21, WI 22,
WI 31, WI 51, WI 81,
WI 82, WI 83, WI 87
16
24
Separating
character
: Blank WI 11, WI 21, WI 22,
WI 31, WI 51, WI 81,
WI 82, WI 83, WI 87
Pos. Name Description of values Applicable for
Field Description
Point ID Text describing the point identification
Northing The Northing coordinate.
Easting The Easting coordinate.
Elevation The height coordinate.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 321
Example
2004,4997.635,6010.784,393.173,09/10/2001,16:34:12.2
2005,4997.647,6010.765,393.167,09/10/2001,16:34:12.4
2006,4997.657,6010.755,393.165,09/10/2001,16:34:12.7
Output format -
Pt,E,N,Ht,Date Format
This output format is identical to the Pt,N,E,Ht,Date format except the order of the Easting
and Northing variables are reversed.
Output format - Pseudo
NMEA GGA Description
This output format is based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association), which is a
standard for interfacing marine electronic devices.
Format
$GPGGA,Time,Northing,N,Easting,E,1,05,1.0,Elevation,M,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 <CR/LF>
Description of Fields
Date The measurement/origination date.
Time The measurement/origination time.
<CR/LF> Carriage Return Line Feed
Field Description
Field Description
$GPGGA Sentence identification (header including talker identification). A
Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA
message.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 322
Time UTC time of position (hhmmss.ss)
Northing The Northing coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places)
N Fixed text (N)
Easting The Easting coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places)
E Fixed text (E)
GPS Quality Indicator Fixed number (1=no real-time position, navigation fix)
Number of satellites Number of satellites in use (00 to 12)
HDOP Fixed number (1.0)
Elevation The height coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places)
Elevation units Elevation units (F or M). The format settings are defined in Regional
Settings.
Height Geoid Fixed number (0.0)
Height units Fixed text (M)
Time since last DGPS
update
Fixed number (0.0)
DGPS
Base station ID
Fixed number (0.0001)
Checksum Fixed number (*99)
<CR/LF> Carriage Return Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections 323
Example
$GPGGA,171933.97,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99
$GPGGA,171934.20,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99
$GPGGA,171934.45,7290747.03,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99
)Fields are always separated by a comma. A comma is never placed before the Checksum
field. When information for a field is not available, the position in the data string is empty.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 324
15 Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key
15.1 Digital Cellular Phones
15.1.1 Overview
Description For digital cellular phones, information such as
• the base stations that can be contacted
• the phone numbers of the base stations and
• the type of protocol to be used
can be defined.
Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases.
Technologies
Case 1: Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone, are
set up at two locations belonging to different network providers.
When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the
other base can be called.
Case 2: Set up as in case 1.
Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained, providing
redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations.
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access is a high speed data transmission for effective
and flexible use of available resources such as bandwidth. Users of a cellular
phone network occupy the same frequency band. The signal is especially
coded for each user.
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications is a more efficient version of
CDMA technology that uses smaller time slots but faster data transfer rates.
It is the world’s most commonly used digital network.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 325
15.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection
Access For RTK rover and TPS:
•In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of
GSM technology attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone
of GSM technology attached. Cntrl...
GSM Dial-Up Connec-
tion,
Dial-up details page OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Near
To find the nearest base station with a
digital cellular phone of GSM technology.
Available when base stations to dial are
already created in Dial-up Connection List.
Coordinates of these stations must be
known.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Available if the Internet connection is acti-
vated.
Fn Cmnd..
To send AT commands to the digital cellular
phone.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 326
Description of fields
Fn Clear
Available on the Sim codes page. To set the
additional editable fields to 0.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
GSM device Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The type of digital
cellular phone highlighted when this screen was
accessed.
Dial-up connec-
tion Selectable list Available for RTK rover and TPS. The digital cellular
phone base station to be dialled. Opening the
selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List
where new base stations can be created and existing
base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to
"15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial".
Number Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The number of the
digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connec-
tion as configured in Dial-up Connection List.
Protocol Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The configured
protocol of the digital cellular phone at the selected
Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connec-
tion List.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 327
Next step
Page changes to the Sim codes page.
GSM Dial-Up Connec-
tion,
Sim codes page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
GSM Dial-Up Connec-
tion,
Advanced page
Description of fields
APN Editable field Available for RTK base with Internet capable devices.
The Access Point Name of a server from the network
provider, which allows access to data services.
Contact your provider to get the correct APN.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
PIN code Editable field To enter the Personal Identification Number of the
SIM card.
PUK code Editable field If the PIN is locked for any reason, for example the
wrong PIN was entered, input the Personal
UnblocKing code for access to the PIN.
Field Option Description
Network data
rate The network baud rate.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 328
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Selectable list For digital cellular phones of GSM technology that do
not support autobauding choose the baud rate from
the selectable list.
Autobauding Select this option for an automatic search of the
network baud rate.
Use trans-
parent mode Check box Define if the digital cellular phone uses Radio channel
Protocol. Check for digital cellular phones that do use
transparent mode. Uncheck for digital cellular phones
that use RLP. Check with the network provider if the
digital cellular phone uses transparent mode or not.
Manually select
cellphone
network
Check box To select a network provider from a list. This function
is helpful when working close to boarders. By default,
the strongest network is used. Using this option, a
network other than the strongest can be selected.
Press Search for a list of all available networks.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 329
15.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection
Access For RTK rover and TPS:
•In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of
CDMA technology attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone
of CDMA technology attached. Cntrl...
CDMA Connection
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Near
To find the nearest base station with a
digital cellular phone of CDMA technology.
Available when base stations to dial are
already created in Dial-up Connection List.
Coordinates of these stations must be
known.
Fn Info
To provide information about the CDMA
device being used, such as the manufac-
turer, the model and the electronic serial
number.
Fn Reg
To register the settings of the CDMA digital
cellular phone over the air. For US and
Canada only.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 330
Description of fields
Next step
Fn Info changes to CDMA Information.
Fn Cmnd..
To send AT commands to the digital cellular
phone.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
CDMA Type Display only The type of digital cellular phone highlighted when
this screen was accessed.
Dial-up connec-
tion Selectable list The digital cellular phone base station to be dialled.
Opening the selectable list accesses Dial-up Connec-
tion List where new base stations can be created and
existing base stations can be selected or edited.
Refer to "15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial".
Number Display only The number of the digital cellular phone at the
selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up
Connection List.
Protocol Display only The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone
at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in
Dial-up Connection List.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 331
CDMA Information Description of fields
Next step
CDMA Registration The settings allow the CDMA digital cellular phone to be registered over the air.
Field Option Description
Manufact Display only The manufacturer of the CDMA device being used.
Model Display only The model of the CDMA device being used.
ESN No. Display only Electronic Serial Number
For registration purposes, send the electronic serial
number to the network provider in order to receive
the service programming code and the mobile direc-
tory number. These numbers must be typed in CDMA
Registration.
Step Description
1. Press Print to print all information to a file CDMA Info.log in the \DATA directory
on the data storage device.
2. Press OK to return to CDMA Connection.
3. For US and Canada only: Press Reg to access CDMA Registration.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 332
Description of fields
Next step
OK to return to CDMA Connection.
Field Option Description
MSL/SPC Display only The Service Program Code provided by the network
provider.
MDN Display only The Mobile Directory Number provided by the
network provider
MSID/MIN Display only Mobile Station Identity Number and Mobile Identifi-
cationNumber. Another 10-digit number to identify
the mobile phone. Sometimes identical with the
MDN.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 333
15.2 Modems
Description For modems, information such as
• the base stations that can be contacted and
• the phone numbers of the base stations
can be controlled.
Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases.
Access For RTK rover and TPS:
•In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem attached.
Cntrl...
Case 1: Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone, are
set up at two locations belonging to different network providers.
When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the
other base can be called.
Case 2: Set up as in case 1.
Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained, providing
redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 334
Modem Dial-up Connec-
tion
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Near
To find the nearest base station with a
modem. Available when base stations to dial
are already created in Dial-up Connection
List. Coordinates of these stations must be
known.
Fn Cmnd..
To send AT commands to the modem.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Modem Display only The type of modem highlighted when this screen was
accessed.
Dial-up connec-
tion Selectable list The modem base station to be dialled. Opening the
selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List
where new base stations can be created and existing
base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to
"15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial".
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 335
Number Display only The number of the modem at the selected Dial-up
connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List.
Protocol Display only The configured protocol of the modem at the
selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up
Connection List.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 336
15.3 Radios for GPS Real-Time
Description For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels
changes the frequency at which the radio operates. Not all radios support channel changing.
Changing radio channels is of interest in three cases.
Requirements for
channel changing
)Channel changing may contravene radio broadcasting regulations in certain countries.
Before operating with radios, check the regulations in force in the working area.
)The number of channels available and the frequency spacing between channels depends on
the radio used.
Case 1: Two real-time base stations are set up at two locations, each broadcasting
on a different channel.
If the signal from one base station is jammed, the channel can be changed
and the other base can be used.
Case 2: Set up as in case 1.
Two separate fixes for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for
future least squares adjustment operations.
Case 3: One real-time base and one real-time rover are being used.
If the signal is blocked due to radio interference, the channel at the base and
the rover can be changed in order to work on a different frequency.
Pacific Crest radios: • channel changing must be activated by a Pacific Crest dealer.
• A special licence might be required.
Satelline radios: The radio must be in programming mode. This mode can be set by
a Satelline dealer.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 337
)If channel changing is to be used, when configuring the base real-time connection, set RTK
base ID in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Data rates page to a
different ID for each base site. By doing so, the rover can recognise if the incoming real-time
data after channel changing is being received from a different base station or if the original
base station is using a new frequency. In the first case, the ambiguities are recomputed.
Access For RTK rover and TPS:
•In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached. Cntrl...
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached.
Cntrl...
Radio Channel
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Scan
To provide information such as the station
ID, latency and the data format of incoming
signals from base stations broadcasting on
the same radio channel. This information
can be used to select appropriate base
stations to dial.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 338
Description of fields
Next step
Scan to access Scan for Base Station.
Scan for Base Station This screen provides information about the base stations, with specific types of devices
attached, for example a radio, from which real-time corrections are being received. This
information can also be useful for finding out if anyone else in the area is using a particular
radio channel.
Field Option Description
Radio type Display only The type of radio highlighted when this screen was
accessed.
Channel Editable field The radio channel. The channel used must be within
minimum and maximum allowed input values. The
minimum and maximum allowed input values for a
radio depend on the number of channel supported by
the radio and the spacing between the channels.
Actual
frequency Display only Available for Radio type: Satelline 3AS. Displays the
actual frequency of the radio.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 339
Description of columns
OK
To select the highlighted base station and
to continue with the subsequent screen.
Chnl-1 and Chnl+1
Available for scanning base stations with
radios attached. To switch the radio to one
channel lower/higher than the current
channel. The base stations displayed
change to those broadcasting on the new
channel.
Column Description
Station ID Station ID of available base stations from which a signal is being received.
For radios, the base station radios transmitting on the same channel will
be listed.
Latency(s) Time delay, in seconds and configured on the base, from when the base
collects the data to when the data is transmitted.
RTK format Format of the data from the base station. Refer to "14.8.1 Configuration
of a Reference Real-Time Connection" for more information about data
formats.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 340
15.4 Radios for Remote Control
Description For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels
changes the frequency at which the radio operates. This change in frequency can be neces-
sary to enable multiple pairs of radios to work simultaneously in the same area without
interfering with each other.
Access For TPS:
•In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an internal radio, a TCPS or
a GFU attached. Cntrl...
Internal radio
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Default
To change to the default radio settings.
Fn Save
To save the radio settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 341
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Radio type Display only The type of radio device selected for the connection.
Link number Editable field The assigned channel number.
)The channel number for the field controller
and the radio must be the same. The commu-
nication settings for the field controller and
the radio must also be same.
Set as Remote or Base )The radio modules inside the field controller
and the radio must be set to opposite settings.
It is recommended to set the field controller to
Remote and the radio to Base.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 342
15.5 RS232
Description RS232 is a standard serial communication method that is able to transfer data without the
need for predefined time slots.
Access For RTK rover and TPS:
•In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device attached.
Cntrl...
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device
attached. Cntrl...
RS232 Connection Displayed is the type of device highlighted when this screen was accessed.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 343
15.6 Internet
Description Internet
The Internet connection allows connection to the Internet to receive real-time data. A GPRS
/ Internet device must be attached to the instrument.
Requirements For Internet
•Check Use Internet connection on GS in Internet Connection.
• An Internet port must be selected in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings
(RTK2) or RTK Rover Settings.
Access For RTK rover:
•In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet device attached.
Cntrl...
For RTK base:
•In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet device
attached. Cntrl...
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 344
Internet Port Connection
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Internet port Display only The name of the Internet port attached to the
connection that was highlighted when this page was
accessed.
User type Selectable list How the instrument will operate in the Internet.
Available for RTK base.
Client Must be selected when using Ntrip as Internet appli-
cation. Inside the Internet, Ntrip Clients and Ntrip
Servers are considered as clients.
Server to use Selectable list The server to be accessed in the Internet. Opening
the selectable list accesses Server to Connect where
new servers can be created and existing servers can
be selected or edited.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 345
Next step
Select Source to access NTRIP Source Table.
Highlight a mountpoint about which more information is required. This information helps to
configure the instrument to use the selected mountpoint as a base. Press Info to access
Mountpoint.
Mountpoint,
General page
Description of fields
NTRIP mount-
point Editable field Mountpoints are the Ntrip servers sending out real-
time data.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Identifier Display only The name of the selected Mountpoint.
Format Display only The real-time data format sent out by the Mount-
point.
Format details Display only Details about Format, for example the RTCM message
types including update rates in seconds displayed in
brackets.
Authentic The type of password protection required for the
authorisation to the Ntrip server.
None If no password is required
Basic If the password does not require encryption.
Digest If the password must be encrypted.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 346
Next step
Page changes to the Location page.
Mountpoint,
Location page
Detailed information about the location of the Mountpoint is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Miscell page.
Mountpoint,
Miscell page
Description of fields
NMEA Display only Indicates if the Mountpoint must receive GGA NMEA
data from the rover in order to compute VRS informa-
tion.
Charges Display only Indicates if charges are currently made for the
connection.
Carrier Display only The type of carrier message sent out.
System Display only The type of satellite system supported by the Mount-
point.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Generator Display only The hard- or software generating the data stream.
Compress Display only The name of the compression / encryption algorithm.
Bitrate Display only The data speed in bits per second.
Info Display only Miscellaneous information if available.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 347
Next step
OK to return to the previous screen.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 348
15.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial
15.7.1 Accessing Dial-up Connection List
Description Dial-up Connection List allows new stations to be created, provides a list of base stations
that can be dialled and allows existing stations to be edited.
For digital cellular phones of any technology and for modems, the phone numbers of the
device at the base station must be known. For a base station to be dialled, a name, the
phone number and, if available, the coordinates can be configured.
The configuration is possible for rover and base digital cellular phones and modems.
Access step-by-step Step Description
1. In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone
of any technology or modem attached.
2. Cntrl...
3. Open the selectable list for Dial-up connection.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 349
Dial-up Connection List
Description of columns
OK
To select the highlighted station and to
return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
New..
To create a new station. Refer to "15.7.2
Creating / Editing a Station to Dial".
Edit..
To edit a station. Refer to "15.7.2 Creating
/ Editing a Station to Dial".
Delete
To delete the highlighted station.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Name Name of all available base stations.
Number Phone number of the station to dial.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 350
15.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial
Access In Dial-up Connection List press New.. or Edit...
New Dial-up Connection
Description of fields
Store
To return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new base station to be dialled.
The name can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces. Input optional.
Number Editable field The number of the base station to dial. If the survey
is to be undertaken across country borders it is
necessary to input the phone number using standard
international dialling codes. For example,
+41123456789. Otherwise it can be input as a
standard digital cellular phone number.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 351
Protocol Available for digital cellular phones of GSM tech-
nology. The configured protocol of the digital cellular
phone of GSM technology.
Analog For conventional phone networks.
ISDN v.110 or ISDN
v.120 For GSM networks.
Use coordi-
nates Selectable list Select Yes to type in the approximate coordinates of
the base station.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 352
15.8 Configuring the Server to Connect
15.8.1 Accessing Server to Connect
Description Server to Connect allows new servers to be created, provides a list of servers that can be
accessed in the Internet and allows existing servers to be edited.
Access step-by-step
Server to Connect
Step Description
1. In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet connection
attached.
2. Cntrl...
3. Open the selectable list for Server name.
OK
To select the highlighted server and to
return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
New..
To create a new server. Refer to "15.8.2
Creating / Editing a Server".
Edit..
To edit a server. Refer to "15.8.2 Creating /
Editing a Server".
Delete
To delete the highlighted server.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 353
Description of columns
More
To change between the IP Address and the
TCP/IP Port of the server.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Name Name of all available servers.
IP address IP addresses of all available servers.
TCP/IP port TCP/IP Port numbers of all available servers.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 354
15.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server
Access In Server to Connect press New.. or Edit...
New Server,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the new server to be accessed.
The name can be up to 16 characters long and
include spaces.
Address Editable field Type in the host name or the IP address of the server
to be accessed in the Internet.of the server to be
accessed in the Internet.
Viva Series, Instrument connections - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 355
Next step
Page changes to the NTRIP page.
New Server,
NTRIP page
Description of fields
Next step
Store to store the settings.
Port Editable field The port of the Internet server through which the
data is provided. Each server has several ports for
various services.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Use NTRIP Check box Check to activate Ntrip.
User ID Editable field A user ID is required to receive data from to the Ntrip
Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for informa-
tion.
Password Editable field A password is required to receive data from the Ntrip
Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for informa-
tion.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 356
16 Configuration of Devices
16.1 Devices
16.1.1 Overview
Description Before using any device, it is necessary to configure the interface with which it will be used.
Refer to "14.1 Accessing Configuration Connections" for information on how to configure
the interfaces.
Some devices can be used with different interfaces for different applications. For example:
• A radio can be used to receive real-time base data but a second radio could also
be used to output simultaneous NMEA messages.
• A radio can be used for remote control with a TPS but also to send GeoCOM
commands from a computer to a TPS.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 357
16.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones
Description Digital cellular phones comprise of the technologies CDMA and GSM.
Typical uses • To transmit real-time data.
• To receive real-time data.
• To download raw observations from a remote location.
• To steer an instrument.
Example use
Requirements for using
digital cellular phones
Step Description
1. Base and rover must both be equipped with a digital cellular phone.
2. Ensure that the digital cellular phone at the base is on.
3. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the phone
number was pre-defined. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
4. One rover can dial in to the base digital cellular phone at a time.
5. As soon as the base digital cellular phone is contacted, real-time data is sent to
the rover digital cellular phone that has called.
)Several digital cellular phone numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a
different number dials that particular base station.
Always required: • AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular
phone.
• Working area must be covered by a digital cellular phone
network.
• The network operator must support data transmission.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 358
Supported digital
cellular phones
Some digital cellular phones are predefined.
Other digital cellular phones can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new
digital cellular phone configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These digital
cellular phones must be connected with a cable or Bluetooth. Refer to "Appendix E Cables"
for information on cables. Please contact the local selling unit or dealer for further informa-
tion.
Advantages • Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover.
• Free of jamming from other users.
• Cheaper in price in the initial costs of buying.
Disadvantages Fees are charged for the time that the digital cellular phone network is being used.
)Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the base,
they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range of the
base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible.
Sometimes required: • SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in mobile
phones. The SIM card must be enabled to transmit data. Contact
the service provider to enable the SIM card.
•Personal Identification Number
• Registration
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 359
16.1.3 Modems
Typical uses • To transmit NMEA messages.
• To download raw observations from a remote location.
• To transmit real-time data.
Example of use
Requirements for using
modem
AT command language must be supported by the modem.
Supported modems Some modems are predefined. Modems must be connected with a cable.
Other modems can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new modem
configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
Step Description
1. The base is equipped with a modem.
2. The rover is equipped with a digital cellular phone.
3. Ensure that the modem is switched on.
4. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the phone
number was pre-defined. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
5. One rover can dial in to the base modem at a time.
6. As soon as the base modem is contacted, it sends its data to the rover digital
cellular phone that has called.
)Several modem numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a different
number changes the base station.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 360
16.1.4 Radios for Real-Time
Typical uses • To transmit real-time data.
• To receive real-time data.
• To steer an instrument.
Example of use
Supported radios Some radios are predefined.
Other radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new radio configu-
ration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These radios must be connected with a
cable.
Step Description
1. Base and rover must both be equipped with radios using the same frequency
range and the same data format.
2. The base radio continuously sends out real-time data until the instrument is
turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached.
3. The rover radio continuously receives real-time data until the instrument is turned
off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached.
4. Several rovers can receive data from the same base at the same time.
)Several base radios can transmit real-time data simultaneously using different
radio channels. Changing to a different radio channel on the rover changes the
base from which real-time data is received.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 361
)Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the base,
they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range of the
base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 362
16.1.5 Radios for Remote Control
Typical uses • To remote control the TPS.
• To transmit data between a TPS and computer.
Supported radios • The default radios used with TPS for remote control are the internal radio RadioHandle
and the external radio TCPS28. The TPS has to be set to the correct communication mode
to send and receive data and commands via the radio. A radio is also integrated in the
field controller to allow communication.
• A Communication side cover must be fitted to the TPS when operating with the Radio-
Handle.
User defined radios Other radios than the default radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating
a new radio configuration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These radios must be
connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 363
16.1.6 RS232
Standard RS232 Standard RS232 is supported by default. The settings are:
Baud rate: 115200 Stop bits: 1
Parity: None Flow control: None
Data bits: 8
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 364
16.1.7 Hidden Point Measurement Devices
Typical uses To measure
• distances (reflectorless distance measurements using laser technology)
•angles
• azimuths
to points which are not directly accessible with GPS, for example house corners or trees. If
the device is connected to the instrument, the measurements taken with hidden point
measurement devices are directly transferred. If the device is not connected, measurement
can be typed in manually to calculate the coordinates of a hidden point.
Example of use
Step Description
1. An instrument must be a rover with or without real-time configuration.
2. A hidden point measurement device is connected to the instrument via cable or
Bluetooth.
3. Hidden point measurements are configured and activated.
4. Distances, angles and azimuths are measured to the hidden point with the hidden
point measurement device.
5. The measurements are directly transferred to the instrument and displayed in the
appropriate fields.
)Hidden point measurement devices can be connected in addition to any of the
other devices. They can be active at the same time. Changing of ports is not
required.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 365
Supported hidden
point measurement
devices
Some devices are predefined.
Hidden point measurement devices of the same type but with different settings must be
defined by creating a new hidden point measurement device. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing
a Device".
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 366
16.1.8 GPRS / Internet Devices
Description GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages using the Internet
Protocol.
When using GPRS technology, charges are made based on the amount of transferred data
and not, as per normal digital cellular phones, for the connection time.
Typical uses To access the Internet with an instrument in order to receive real-time data from the
Internet.
Example use
Requirements for using
GPRS / Internet devices
Step Description
)The following is an example use for receiving data from the Internet.
1Rover must be equipped with a GPRS / Internet device.
2The GPRS / Internet device accesses the Internet where the rover connects for
example to Ntrip.
3The rover receives real-time corrections via the Internet.
• AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular phone.
•Access Point Name of a server from the network provider. The APN can be thought of as
the home page of a provider supporting GPRS data transfer.
• SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in mobile phones. The SIM card
must be enabled to transmit data. Contact the service provider to enable the SIM card.
•Personal Identification Number
• Registration
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 367
Supported GPRS /
Internet devices
Some GPRS/Internet devices are predefined. Other GPRS capable devices can be used as long
as they use AT commands. Their settings must be defined by creating a new device config-
uration. Refer to "16.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Please contact the local selling unit or
dealer for further information.
Advantages • Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover.
• Free of jamming from other users.
• Fees are charged for the amount of data being transferred.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 368
16.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices
Description Allows devices to be created, edited, selected and deleted.
Access step-by-step Step Description
1. For RTK rover and TPS:
• Select Main Menu:Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connec-
tions.
For RTK base:
• Select Main Menu:Base connections\Instrument connections\All other
connections.
2. Highlight the appropriate interface based on the type of device to be configured.
For example, highlight RTK Rover when a radio is to be configured.
3. Edit...
4. Activate the interface by checking the check box.
5. Devce.. to access Devices.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 369
Devices This screen may consist of several pages and provides different devices for selection
depending on which interface the screen was accessed from. The functionality described
here is always the same.
OK
To select the highlighted device and return
to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
New..
To create a new device. Refer to "16.3
Creating/Editing a Device".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted device. Refer to
"16.3 Creating/Editing a Device".
Delete
To delete the highlighted device.
More
To display information about the type of
device and the creator of the device.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn All or Fn Filter..
Available for Internet and Bluetooth devices.
To list all devices or to hide devices which
are not Internet or Bluetooth capable.
Fn Default
To recall previously deleted default devices
and to reset default devices to the default
settings.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 370
Description of columns
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Name Names of available devices.
Type Type of device defined when creating the device.
Creator The creator of the device. The creator can be either Default if the device
is a default, or User if the device has been created.
)If a Default device is edited by using Edit.. then its creator is still
displayed as Default.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 371
16.3 Creating/Editing a Device
Description Allows a new device to be configured or an existing device to be edited.
Access In Devices, highlight a device of the same type as the device to be created, from the list.
Press New.. or Edit...
New Device or Edit
Device
Description of fields
Store
To store the new device and to return to the
screen from where this screen was
accessed.
AT Msg
Available for digital cellular phones and
modems. To configure communication
commands.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field Name of new device.
Type Display only Same device type as was highlighted when New.. or
Edit.. was used.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 372
Next step
Use this device
for internet Check box Available for digital cellular phones and modems.
Defines the device as an Internet capable device and
adds it to the list in GPRS Internet Devices.
Baud rate From 2400 to
115200
Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device
in bits per second.
Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data.
Data bits 6, 7 or 8Number of bits in a block of digital data.
Stop bit 1 or 2Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data.
Flow control None or Flow
control Activates hardware handshake.
When the instrument/device is ready for data, it
asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready
to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the
Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the
data.
IF the device is a THEN
radio or device other
than digital cellular
phone or modem
Store to close the screen and to return to the screen from where
this screen was accessed.
digital cellular phone
or modem
AT Msg.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 373
AT Msg For Use this device for internet checked in New Device or Edit Device, this screen consists
of two pages:
The following table lists the fields of both pages.
Description of fields
GSM/CSD page: The AT commands configure the devices for normal digital cellular
phone/modem mode.
GPRS/Internet page The AT commands configure the devices for GPRS/Internet mode.
Please refer to the manual of the GPRS / Internet device for informa-
tion about which AT commands must be entered or contact the
supplier.
Field Option Description
Initialisation 1 Editable field Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular
phone/modem.
When the device is used, between Initialisation 1 and
Initialisation 2, a check for the PIN is performed.
(continued) Editable field Allows the Initialisation 1, Initialisation 2 or the
Connect string to continue onto a new line.
Initialisation 2 Editable field Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular
phone/modem.
Dial Editable field Dialling string used to dial the phone number of the
real-time base.
Hang-up Editable field Hangup sequence used to end the network connec-
tion.
Escape Editable field Escape sequence used to switch to the command
mode before using the hangup sequence.
Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 374
Next step
Store returns to New Device or Edit Device.
Connect Editable field Dialling string used to dial into the Internet.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 375
17 Instrument - Instrument status info
17.1 Status Functions
)The Status functions for the GPS RTK base menu, the GPS rover menu and for TPS are similar.
The functions are described in the same chapters, differences are outlined.
Description The STATUS functions help using the instrument by showing the state of many instrument
functions. All fields are display only fields. Unavailable information is indicated by -----.
Access • For RTK base:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base status info.
•For RTK rover and TPS:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument status info.
Status Menu
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 376
Description of the
Status functions STATUS function Description Refer to chapter
Battery & memory Information related to usage and status of
battery and memory.
"17.2 Battery &
memory"
Satellite tracking • Information related to the satellites ordered
by the elevation angle.
"17.3 Satellite
tracking"
• A skyplot shows satellite information in a
graphical way.
• Another page shows the date of the used
almanacs, and, as shown on the skyplot, the
number of satellites tracked and the number
of satellites available above the cut-off
elevation mask.
RTK data link status Information related to real-time data, for
example the data link and the device used to
transfer real-time data.
"17.4 RTK data
link status"
Current GPS position Information related to the current antenna
position and the speed of the antenna.
"17.5 Current GPS
position"
Raw data logging Information related to logging of raw observa-
tions.
"17.6 Raw data
logging"
Connection status • Information related to the configuration and
use of interfaces, ports and devices.
"17.7 Connection
status"
• Information related to the incoming data
from active devices.
TPS current
station info
Information related to the current station set
on the instrument.
"17.8 TPS current
station info"
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 377
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 378
17.2 Battery & memory
Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access
is also possible by:
• Tapping the battery icon.
• Tapping the data storage device/internal memory icon.
Battery & Memory This description is valid for all pages of the screen. For the GPS base page, the information
that is displayed depends on the real-time message.
Leica/ Leica 4G: Transfers precise values for all fields.
RTCM: Transfer of any of the information not part of the message.
CMR/CMR+: Transfers general status information such as O.K. and Low.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 379
Description of fields
Field Description
Battery, Battery
1 or Battery 2 The percentage of remaining power capacity for the battery is displayed
numerically. If no information for a field is available, for example no
battery is inserted, then 0% is displayed.
External power Shows if an external power supply is connected.
Internal
memory, CF
card, SD card
or USB stick
The total/free memory for data storage on the data storage device. If no
information for a field is available, for example no data storage device is
inserted, then ----- is displayed.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 380
17.3 Satellite tracking
Description This screen shows information related to the satellites ordered by the elevation angle.
Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access
is also possible by tapping the number of visible satellites icon.
Satellite Tracking Status:
GPS,
GPS/GLO/GAL page
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Base / Rover
To change between the SNR values of rover
and base.
Hlth..
To view the numbers of satellites catego-
rised in good, bad and unavailable.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
More
To display information about the SNR values
for GPS satellites (if GPS L5 is checked in
GPS settings\Satellite tracking) and Galileo
satellites. Available on the Satellite tracking
and GAL page.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 381
Description of columns
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Column Description
Sat The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS), the Slot number (GLONASS) or
the Space Vehicle number (Galileo) of the satellites.
Elev The elevation angle in degrees. The arrows indicate if the satellite is rising
or falling.
Azmth The azimuth of the satellite.
S/N 1, S/N 2 and
S/N L5 The SNR on L1, L2 and L5 for GPS, on L1 and L2 for GLONASS and on E1,
E5a, E5b and Alt-Boc for Galileo. If the signal is currently not being used
in the position calculations, the number is shown in brackets.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 382
Satellite Tracking Status:
GPS,
Skyplot page
Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking Status are marked grey.
The part of the skyplot between the 0° elevation and the cut-off angle is marked grey.
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
GPS ? / GPS ?
To hide or show the GPS satellites (shown by
the prefix G).
GLO ? / GLO ?
To hide or show the GLONASS satellites
(shown by the prefix R).
Available when Glonass is activated in Satel-
lite Tracking Status.
GAL ? / GAL ?
To hide or show the Galileo satellites (shown
by the prefix E).
Available when Galileo is activated in Satel-
lite Tracking Status.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 383
Description of symbols
Next step
Page changes to the Almanac page.
Satellite Tracking Status:
GPS,
Almanac page
The almanac page shows the date of the used almanacs, and, as shown on the skyplot, the
number of satellites tracked and the number of satellites available above the cut-off eleva-
tion mask.
Symbol Description
Satellites above the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking Status.
Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking Status.
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 384
Next step
OK exits Satellite Tracking Status.
Satellite Tracking Status,
RTK rover page
The information about the satellites at the base shown on this page is identical with the
information shown for the rover.
Next step
OK exits Satellite Tracking Status.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 385
17.4 RTK data link status
Description This screen shows information related to real-time data, for example the data link and the
device used to transfer real-time data.
Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access
is also possible by tapping the number of RTK status icon.
RTK Data Link Status,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To exit the screen.
Data..
To view the data being received. Depending
on the RTK data format, the shown data
differ.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Description
RTK data format The received real-time data format message type.
GPS used L1/L2 The number of satellites on L1, L2 and L5 (when GPS L5 is activated in
Satellite Tracking Status) being used in the current position solution.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 386
Next step
Page changes to the Device page.
GLO used L1/L2 Available if Glonass is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. The
number of satellites on L1 and L2 being used in the current position
solution.
GAL used E1/E5a Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. The number
of satellites on E1 and E5a being used in the current position solution.
GAL used
E5b/ABOC Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking Status. The number
of satellites on E5b and Alt-BOC being used in the current position solu-
tion.
Last data sent Available for an RTK base. Seconds since the last message from the
base was sent.
Last received Available for an RTK rover. Seconds since the last message from the
base was received.
In last minute Available for an RTK rover. The percentage of real-time data received
from the base compared with the data received from the antenna within
the last minute. This percentage indicates how well the data link is
working.
RTK network Available for an RTK rover. The type of base network in use.
Stream NMEA
messages from
the GS
Available for an RTK rover in a base network. NMEA positions must be
send to a network. The type of NMEA message sent to the base
network. If more than one message is sent at a time, then all types are
shown separated by comma.
Field Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 387
RTK Data Link Status,
Device page
The content of this page differs for each type of device in use.
For all devices available
Description of fields
For RS232
Description of fields
OK
To exit the screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Field Description
Name The name of the device.
Field Description
Type The type of device.
Port The port to which the device is connected.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 388
For digital cellular phones and modems
Description of fields
For radios
Description of fields
The available fields depend on the radio type.
Bluetooth Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of the
connection.
Field Description
Type The type of device.
Port The port to which the device is connected.
Firmware The software version of the attached digital cellular phone.
Operator The name of the network operator in which the digital cellular phone is
operating.
Status The current mode of the digital cellular phone. The options are Unknown,
Detection and Registered.
Bluetooth Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of the
connection.
Signal Indication of received signal strength of the digital cellular phone network.
Field Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 389
Next step
Page changes to the RTK base page.
RTK Data Link Status,
RTK base page
As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base being used.
Field Description
Port The port to which the device is connected.
Type The type of device.
Channel The radio channel.
Actual frequency The current set frequency of the radio.
Central freq The defined central frequency of the radio.
Firmware The software version of the attached radio.
Signal Indication of strength of received radio signal.
Name of page Description
RTK base page Base is a real base station.
Base (Nearest) page Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example Leica
GNSS Spider.
Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections deter-
mined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider.
Base (MAX) page Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent
by for example Leica GNSS Spider.
Base (VRS) page Base is a virtual base station.
Base (FKP) page Base information is area correction parameters.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 390
Description of fields
Field Description
RTK base ID An identification for a base station. The ID can be converted into a
compact format to be sent out with real-time data in all real-time data
formats. It is different from the point ID of the base station.
Antenna height •For RTK data format: Leica, RTK data format: Leica 4G, RTK data
format: RTCM v3 or RTK data format: RTCM 9,2 v2/RTCM 1,2 v2 with
RTCM version: 2.3:
The antenna height at the base from the marker to the MRP.
•For RTK data format: CMR/CMR+ and RTK data format: RTCM 18,19
v2 or RTK data format: RTCM 18,19 v2 with RTCM version: 2.2:
The antenna height at the base from the marker to the phase centre.
• For all other RTK data format:
----- is displayed because the data format does not include information
about the antenna height.
Coords of The coordinates for the base station which are transferred depend on the
active real-time data format.
• For real-time messages which include antenna height and antenna
type: Marker.
• For real-time messages which do not include antenna information:
Phase Centre of L1.
Number of aux
ref The number of active auxiliary base stations from which data is received.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 391
Next step
RTK Data Link Status,
Connectivity page
This screen shows the status real-time connectivity as dynamic troubleshooting screen. It
shows the success of each of the steps in the connectivity to receive real-time corrections.
If one step fails, the check box is unchecked.
As each step is successfully completed, the check box will be checked.
Real-Time Input Data The following provides additional information on the satellite data received via real-time
message. Information of those satellites is displayed, which are used on both base and
rover.
Access
Data.. on RTK Data Link Status, General page.
Antenna at
base The antenna used at the base.
Sensor type at
base The instrument type used at the base.
IF THEN
other coordinate types are to be viewed Coord. Local coordinates are available when
a local coordinate system is active.
another page is to be accessed Page.
this screen is to be quit OK exits the screen.
Field Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 392
Description of fields
The data being received from the satellites and the layout of the screen depend on the
active real-time data format.
OK
To return to RTK Data Link Status.
Sat -
To display information about the satellite
with the next smaller PRN.
Sat +
To display information about the satellite
with the next larger PRN.
Field Description
Sat PRN The PRN number (GPS), the Slot number (GLONASS) or
the Space Vehicle number (Galileo) of the satellites
shown with the prefix G (GPS), R (GLONASS) or E
(Galileo).
Sat Time The GPS time of the satellite.
Phase L1, Phase L2, Phase L5 The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the GPS
satellite on L1, L2 and L5.
Phase L1, Phase L2 The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the
GLONASS satellite on L1 and L2.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 393
Phase E1, Phase E5a, Phase
E5b, Phase AltBOC The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the
Galileo satellite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC.
Msg 18 L1, Msg 18 L2 The uncorrected carrier phases for L1 and L2.
Msg 20 L1, Msg 20 L2 The carrier phase corrections for L1 and L2.
Code L1, Code L2, Code L5 The pseudorange from the antenna to the GPS satellite
for L1, L2 and L5.
Code L1, Code L2 The pseudorange from the antenna to the GLONASS
satellite on L1 and L2.
Code E1, Code E5a, Code E5b,
Code AltBOC The pseudorange from the antenna to the Galileo satel-
lite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC.
Msg 19 L1, Msg 19 L2 The uncorrected pseudoranges for L1 and L2.
Msg 21 L1, Msg 21 L2 The pseudorange corrections for L1 and L2.
PRC Pseudorange corrections.
RRC Rate of change of the corrections.
IODE Issue Of Data Ephemeris. The identification number of
the ephemeris for a satellite.
Field Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 394
17.5 Current GPS position
Description This screen shows information related to the current antenna position and the speed of the
antenna. For real-time rover configurations, the baseline vector is also shown. MapView
shows the current position in a graphical format.
Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access
is also possible by:
• Tapping the position Status icon.
Current GPS Position,
Position page OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Coord
To see other coordinate types. Local coordi-
nates are available when a local coordinate
system is active.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To determine how often positions are
computed and the screen display is updated.
Fn Elev
To see height as elevation. Available when
local grid coordinates are displayed.
Fn Ell Ht
To see height as ellipsoidal height. Available
when local grid coordinates are displayed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 395
Description of fields
Next step
Current GPS Position,
Baseline page
Information on the baseline vector is displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Speed page.
Field Description
Position latency The latency of the computed position. Latency is mostly due to time
required for data transfer and computation of position. Depends on
the use of the prediction mode.
Position quality and
Height quality Available for phase fixed and code only solutions. The 2D coordinate
and height quality of the computed position.
HDOP and VDOP Available for navigated solutions.
IF THEN
the instrument is a real-time rover Page changes to the Baseline page.
the instrument is not configured for real-
time
Page changes to the Speed page.
the instrument is a real-time base OK exits Current GPS Position.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 396
Current GPS Position,
Speed page
Description of fields
Next step
OK exits Current GPS Position.
Field Description
Horizontal
speed The speed over ground in the horizontal direction.
On bearing Available for local coordinate systems.
The bearing for the horizontal direction related to the North direction of
the active coordinate system.
Vertical speed The vertical component of the current velocity.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 397
17.6 Raw data logging
Description This screen shows information related to logging of raw observations.
Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access
is also possible by tapping the number of RTK status icon.
Raw Data Logging
Status,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Description
Logging raw
data Shows if raw data is saved and if so in which format.
Logging to Shows where the data is saved.
Current interval The type of current interval.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 398
Next step
Page changes to the Point occupation page.
Raw Data Logging
Status,
Point occupation page
Description of fields
Obs logged in
current interval The number of observations logged in current interval.
Total no. of
static obs. The number of static epochs recorded in the current job.
Total no. of
moving obs. The number of moving epochs recorded in the current job.
Field Description
Field Description
Current Status Shows if the instrument is moving or not.
GDOP Current GDOP.
Logging rate Rate at which raw observations are being recorded.
No. of moving
obs The number of logged moving raw observations. Reset as soon a new
moving interval starts.
Logging data
from >5 sats
since
The time for how long five or more satellites are tracked on L1 and L2
without interruption. If less than five satellites were tracked, the counter
is reset. The counter is not reset after Meas, Stop or Store.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 399
Next step
Page changes to the RTK base page.
Raw Data Logging
Status,
RTK base page
As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base used.
Obs Completed The percentage of collected data required for successful processing. It is
a conservative estimate based on a 10 - 15 km baseline. The criteria used
to display this value depend on the settings for Automatically stop point
measurement, Stop criteria and Auto STOP/%Indicator based on in Main
Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control.
Time to go The estimated time in hours, minutes and seconds until the configured
criteria for Stop criteria or Auto STOP/%Indicator based on is reached.
The criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for Automat-
ically stop point measurement, Stop criteria and Auto STOP/%Indicator
based on in Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control.
Field Description
Name of page Description
RTK base page Base is a real base station.
Base (Nearest) page Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example Leica
GNSS Spider.
Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections deter-
mined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider.
Base (MAX) page Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent
by for example Leica GNSS Spider.
Base (VRS) page Base is a virtual base station.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 400
Description of fields
Next step
OK exits Raw Data Logging Status.
Base (FKP) page Base information is area correction parameters.
Field Option Description
Logging static
obs A time in sec The logging rate at the base. This information is
shown if the real-time message format supports this
information and raw observations are being logged
at the base.
----- Raw observations are not being logged, or status
information is not supported by RTK format.
Name of page Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 401
17.7 Connection status
17.7.1 Connection Status
Description This screen gives an overview of all interfaces with the port and the devices currently
assigned.
Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access
is also possible by tapping the number of RTK status icon.
Connection Status This screen consists of two pages, one for the field controller interfaces and one for the
rover interfaces.
OK
To return to the Main Menu.
Intfce
Available for configured interfaces being
highlighted. To view information related to
real-time data or the internet connection.
Devce..
To view the status of the attached device.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 402
17.7.2 Internet
Description This screen shows
• if the instrument is online on the Internet.
• for how long the instrument is online.
• the technology of data transfer.
• the amount of data received or sent since the instrument is online.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated Internet interface.
•On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet.Intfce.
•On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Intfce.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 403
17.7.3 ASCII Input
Description This screen shows the
• incoming ASCII data which is stored as an annotation.
• description of the incoming ASCII data for each annotation field.
Not used is shown for annotation fields which are not configured to receive incoming ASCII
data.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated ASCII Input interface.
On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input.Intfce.
ASCII Input - Data
OK
To exit the screen.
Data.. and Descr
To change between the given description for
the incoming ASCII data or the last received
ASCII data.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 404
17.7.4 RTK Data Link Status
Description For information about this screen, refer to "17.4 RTK data link status".
Access This screen is accessible for a configured RTK rover interface.
On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover.Intfce.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 405
17.7.5 Remote (OWI)
Description This screen shows all available ports and the interfaces and devices configured to these
ports.
Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated remote interface.
On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI) Connections.
Remote (OWI)
Description of fields
OK
To exit the screen.
Devce..
Available for some devices. To view status
information about the devices.
Column Description
Port The physical port on the instrument which is being used for the interface
functionality.
Connection The interface configured for the ports.
Device The hardware connected to the chosen port.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 406
Next step
OK exits the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 407
17.8 TPS current station info
Access Standard access from the Instrument status info menu.
TPS Current Station Info
Description of fields
OK
To exit the screen.
Coord
To display other coordinate types.
ppm/SF
To switch between displaying the station
scale factor and the station ppm.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Description
Station ID Station ID of the current station setup.
Instrument height Instrument height of the current station setup.
Easting Easting value of the instrument position.
Northing Northing value of the instrument position.
Local ellipsoid ht or
Elevation For a selected coordinate system, ellipsoidal height and elevation can
be displayed.
Temperature Temperature set on the instrument.
Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 408
Pressure Pressure set on the instrument.
Atmospheric ppm Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument.
Station ppm Ppm of the current station set up.
Station scale Scale factor of the current station set up.
Field Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 409
18 Instrument - Base settings
18.1 Satellite tracking
Description The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite signals are
used by the instrument.
)This screen contains the same settings as the RTK Rover Satellite Tracking Status screen.
Changes made to the settings here in RTK Base mode, will be reflected in the RTK Rover
mode and vice versa.
Access For RTK base:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Satellite tracking.
Satellite Tracking Status,
Tracking page
OK
To accept changes.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 410
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Field Option Description
GPS L5 Check box Defines if the GPS L5 signal will be tracked.
GLONASS Check box Defines if GLONASS satellite signals are accepted by
the instrument when tracking satellites.
GALILEO Check box Defines if Galileo satellite signals are accepted by the
instrument when tracking satellites.
COMPASS Check box Defines if Compass satellite signals are accepted by
the instrument when tracking satellites.
Show message &
audio warning,
when loss of lock
occurs
Check box Activates an acoustic warning signal and a message
given by the instrument when satellites are lost.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 411
Satellite Tracking Status,
Advanced page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes.
Hlth..
Available for Satellite health: User defined.
To configure the satellites used in the
survey.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Cut-off angle Editable field Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite
signals are not recorded and are not shown to be
tracked. Recommended settings:
• For real-time: 10°.
• For purely post-processing applications: 15°.
DOP limit None, GDOP,
HDOP, PDOP or
VDOP
If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is
checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the limit
is exceeded.
Limiting value Editable field The maximum acceptable DOP value.
Available unless DOP limit: None.
Satellite health Sets the satellite tracking behaviour.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 412
Next step
Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health.
)This setting is remembered when the instru-
ment is turned off. It is stored as part of the
configuration set.
Automatic Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the
instrument. Data from signals which are flagged as
unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time
computations.
User defined Satellites must manually be included/excluded from
data recording and real-time computations with
Hlth...
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 413
Satellite Health This screen consists of the GPS page, Glonass page and the Galileo page. The explanations
given for the softkeys are valid for all pages.
Description of columns
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Use
To change between the options in the
column User.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Option Description
Satellite 01 to 32 The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32), the
Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle
number (Galileo, 1 to 30) of the satellites.
There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for
GLONASS satellites and a prefix E for Galileo satellites.
System OK, N/A or
Unhealthy Information on the satellite health taken from the
almanac. N/A stands for not available.
User Bad Excludes satellite from tracking.
OK Includes satellite in tracking.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 414
Next steps
Auto Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is healthy.
Step Description
1. Page changes to the Glonass page and to the Galileo page, where GLONASS
satellites and Galileo satellites used in the survey can be configured.
2. OK returns to Satellite Tracking Status.
3. OK returns to Main Menu.
Column Option Description
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 415
18.2 Base raw data logging
Description Logged raw observations are used for
• static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always post-proc-
essed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover instru-
ments.
• real-time operations
to check the work in the office by post-processing.
OR
to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for
example, due to problems with the real-time data reception.
Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for post-processing.
The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations.
Access For RTK base:
Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Base raw data logging.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 416
Logging GPS Base Data
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Log base data
for post
processing
Check box Activates raw data logging.
Rate From 0.05s to
300.0s Rate at which raw observations are logged.
Recommendations:
• For static operations with long baselines and over
long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s.
• For base stations for post-processed and real-
time kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should be
the same rate as at the rover.
Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 417
Data type Selectable list Data can be logged in the Leica proprietary MDB
format or in RINEX.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 418
19 User - Work settings
19.1 ID templates
19.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration
Description ID templates are predefined templates for point, line or area numbers. ID templates save
having to type in the ID for each object. They are useful when many points are collected
quickly, for example in post-processed and real-time kinematic operations.
The ID templates that are selected to be used suggest IDs for Point ID, Line ID and Area ID
when points, lines and areas are to be surveyed.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\ID templates.
ID Templates
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed. The
currently active working style is automati-
cally updated, to include the selected ID
template.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 419
Description of fields
Next step
ENTER to open a selectable list and to access ID Template Library.
Field Option Description
GPS
points
Selectable list Sets the ID templates for manually occupied GPS
points.
GPS auto
points
Selectable list Sets the ID templates for GPS auto points. These
points are automatically recorded at a specific rate.
TPS
points
Selectable list Sets the ID templates for manually occupied TPS
points.
TPS auto
points
Selectable list Sets the ID templates for TPS auto points. These
points are automatically recorded at a specific rate.
Auxiliary points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for auxiliary points. These
points are used when trying to find a stakeout point.
Lines Selectable list Sets the ID templates for lines.
Areas Selectable list Sets the ID templates for areas.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 420
ID Template Library
Description of columns
Default ID templates
Some ID templates are implemented by default.
OK
To select the highlighted template.
New..
To create a new ID template.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted ID template.
Delete
To delete the highlighted ID template. It
does not matter if the ID template is being
used in a working style. The ID template will
be rebuilt when that working style becomes
active.
Fn Default
To recall deleted default ID templates.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Template The name of the ID template and the format of the ID object.
Increment The amount by which the point ID is incremented.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 421
Default ID template Description
<Manually enter> The last point ID during a survey will be displayed. This ID is auto-
matically incremented if it contains numerical characters. If this ID
is overwritten, the auto increment starts from the new ID. The
automatic incrementation can be turned off when editing this ID
template.
Area0001 Suggested as ID for areas in default working styles. This ID is auto-
matically incremented.
Aux0001 Suggested as ID for auxiliary points in default working styles. These
points are used when trying to find a stakeout point. This ID is
automatically incremented.
GPS0001 Suggested as ID for GPS measured points in default working styles.
This ID is automatically incremented.
GPS_Auto_0001 Suggested as ID for GPS auto points in default working styles.
These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This ID is
automatically incremented.
Line0001 Suggested as ID for lines in default working styles. This ID is auto-
matically incremented.
TPS0001 Suggested as ID for TPS measured points in default working styles.
This ID is automatically incremented.
TPS_Auto_0001 Suggested as ID for TPS auto points in default working styles. These
points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This ID is auto-
matically incremented.
Time & date The current local time and date is the ID.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 422
19.1.2 Creating/Editing an ID Template
Access In ID Template Library, highlight an ID template. A copy of this ID template is taken for
further configurations. New...
New ID Template/Edit ID
Template
Description of fields
OK
To store the new ID template into the ID
template library.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
ID Editable field The name of the ID template and the format of the
ID object. Any characters including spaces are
allowed. Leading spaces are not accepted.
Increment Selectable list IDs are incremented numerically or alphanumerically.
Increment by Editable field The amount by which the point ID is incremented.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 423
Examples for incremen-
tation
For Increment: Numeric only
The rightmost numeric part is incremented within the point ID.
Cursor position Selectable list The character position at which the cursor is placed
when ENTER is pressed in Point ID, Line ID or Area
ID when surveying points. Last Character means that
the cursor is placed immediately to the right of the
last character.
Field Option Description
ID Increment by Next point ID Notes
Point994 5 Point999
Point1004
...
-
994point 5 999point
1004point
...
-
123point123 -10 123point113 Numbers on the right are
incremented. Negative incre-
ments allowed.
Point11 -6 Point5
Point-1
Point-7
Point-13
...
-
Viva Series, User - Work settings 424
For Increment: Alphanumeric
The rightmost character within the point ID is incremented regardless of whether that char-
acter is numeric or alphanumeric.
Abcdefghijklmn94 5 Abcdefghijklmno99
Point ID increment fail
Incrementation fails if next
increment will result in more
than 16 characters.
Abcdefghijklmno9 -5 Abcdefghijklmnop4
Point ID increment fail
Negative incrementing fails if
next increment requires nega-
tive sign and will result in
more than 16 characters.
ID Increment by Next point ID Notes
Point994 5 Point999
Point99E
Point99J
...
-
994point 5 994poiny
Point ID increment fail
Lower case alpha characters
increment until z is reached.
Then a new point ID must be
entered.
Abcdef -5 Abcdea
AbcdeV
…
AbcdeB
Point ID increment fail
Lower case alpha characters
decrement from lower to
upper case until A is reached.
Then a new point ID must be
entered.
ID Increment by Next point ID Notes
Viva Series, User - Work settings 425
ABCDEB 5 ABCDEB
ABCDEG
...
Abcdez
Point ID increment fail
Upper case alpha characters
increment from upper to
lower case until z is reached.
Then a new point ID must be
entered.
ID Increment by Next point ID Notes
Viva Series, User - Work settings 426
19.2 Coding & linework
Description The settings on this screen define the method of coding. Refer to "20 Coding" for a
complete description of coding.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework.
Coding & linework
settings,
Code & attributes page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use a list box to
view codes Check box If checked, codes stored within the job codelist can
be selected from a selectable list to code points, lines
and areas.
Otherwise, each code must be entered manually.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 427
Next step
Page changes to the Linework page.
Suggested
attributes Determines the attribute values displayed under
certain circumstances. This setting is applicable to
both the storing and displaying of attribute values.
Default values When available, the default attribute values, as
stored in the job, are displayed and stored.
Last used When available, the last used attribute values as
stored in the job are displayed and stored.
Prompt for
mandatory
attributes
Always prompt A screen to enter mandatory attributes will always
appear when codes being stored have one or more
attributes of attribute type mandatory. Attributes of
attribute type mandatory or fixed can only be created
in LGO.
Only if no value A screen to enter mandatory attributes will only
appear when codes being stored have one or more
attributes of attribute type mandatory, without an
attribute value. Attributes of attribute type manda-
tory must always be created in LGO.
Code change only A screen to type in mandatory attributes will only
appear when a new code with a mandatory attribute
was selected.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 428
Coding & linework
settings,
Linework page
The flags for Linework are defined on this screen. A flag
• is stored as a property of a point.
• can be exported with a format file.
• is different to a code.
The flags defined on this screen are linked to the options available for Linework in a survey
screen page of an application. The selection for Linework in a survey screen page deter-
mines the flag stored with a point. The availability of Linework in a survey screen page is
configured in My Survey Screen Settings. Refer to "21 Linework" for information on Line-
work.
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Automatically
create lines &
areas when
coding
Check box If checked, lines and areas can be automatically
created and opened using codes.
Use a stringing
attribute Check box Available if Automatically create lines & areas when
coding is checked.
If checked, surveyed points that have the same code
and attribute value for the Stringing attribute are
strung together on one line.
Attribute Selectable list Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked.
The attribute value used to determine which
surveyed points are strung together on one line.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 429
Next step
Page changes to the Quick coding page.
Begin line Editable field Opens a new line when the next point is stored. Any
lines which are currently open are closed. The point
can be stored with a point code.
3pt curve Editable field Stores the linework flag for a curve through the next
three measured points and continues a line/area.
Re-open last
line Editable field Opens the last used line again.
End line Editable field Closes all open lines.
Cont line/area Editable field Indicates a line/area is open.
Start spline Editable field Stores the linework flag for beginning a spline and
continues any open line/area.
End spline Editable field Stores the linework flag to stop a spline.
Cont spline Editable field Indicates a line/area is open with spline line type.
Begin area Editable field Opens a new area when the next point is stored. Any
areas which are currently open are closed. The point
can be stored with a point code.
Re-open last
area Editable field Opens the last used area again.
Close area Editable field Closes all open areas.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 430
Coding & linework
settings,
Quick coding page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Field Option Description
Quick coding Never Prevents the use of quick coding completely.
On Allows the use of quick coding and activates it.
Off Allows the use of quick coding, but keeps it deacti-
vated.
Digits to use 1, 2 or 3Sets the mostly used number of digits for the quick
code. Quick codes with fewer digits can still be used.
While typing a quick code during a survey, using
ENTER after typing one or two digits of the quick
code indicates the end of the input.
Store free code After pt is stored or
Before pt is stored Determines if a free code measured with a quick code
is stored before or after the point.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 431
19.3 My Survey Screen
Description Display settings define the parameters shown on a page on the survey screen.
Four survey screen pages are definable.
The settings on this screen define the layout of the four survey screen pages.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey Screen.
My Survey Screen
Settings,
TPS and GPS page
Page 1: Always shown on the survey screen.
Page 2: Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen.
Page 3: Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen.
Page 4: Never shown on the survey screen. Reserved for applications.
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Config..
To configure the selected survey screen
page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 432
Description of fields
Next step
Highlight the survey screen page and Config.. to access Configure Page.
Configure Page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Define Page 1, 2, 3 or 4Selected survey screen page.
Use in survey Check box Indicates if the survey screen page is shown or
hidden as a page in Survey.
OK
To accept changes and to return to previous
screen.
Clear
To set all fields to Line space full.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field The name of the page is shown as page name in
Survey.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 433
Show in the
Survey applica-
tion
Check box Shows or hides the page as a page in Survey.
1st line Display only Fixed to Point ID.
2nd line to 16th
line For each line, one of the following options can be
selected.
Angle right Displays the horizontal angle difference between the
backsight point and the current telescope position.
% completed Display only field for the percentage of the time for
which the point has been occupied based on the
setting for Stop criteria in screen Quality Control.
Appears in the page during the point occupation if
Quality Control is checked.
Annotation 1 to
Annotation 4 Editable field for comments to be stored with the
point.
Antenna
height
Input field for antenna height for static observations.
Attrib (free) 01 to
Attrib (free) 20 Display only field for attributes for free codes.
Attrib 01 to Attrib
20 Editable field for attributes for codes.
Automation Unavailable for SmartStation. Select automation
type.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 434
Avg max
#distances
Input field for maximum number of distance meas-
urements in the averaging EDM mode.
Azimuth Display only field for the azimuth.
Backsight pt
ID
Display only field for the point ID of the backsight
point.
Code Editable field for codes.
Code (free) Editable field for free codes.
Code desc (free) Display only field for the description of free codes.
Description Display only field for the description of codes.
Easting Display only field for Easting coordinate of measured
point.
GDOP Display only field for the current GDOP of the
computed position.
HDOP Display only field for the current HDOP of the
computed position.
Elevation Display only field for the height coordinate of the
measured point.
Height
difference
Display only field for the height difference between
station and reflector.
Horiz
distance
Display only field for horizontal distance.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 435
Humidity Editable field for relative humidity to be stored with
point.
Hz angle Display only field for the horizontal angle.
Instrument
height
Display only field for the instrument height.
Line space full Insert full line space.
Line space half Insert half line space.
Linework Selectable list with option for flagging a line/area.
Measure
mode
Select EDM measurement mode.
Measure Select EDM type.
Moving antenna
ht
Input field for antenna height for moving observa-
tions.
Msd PP obs Display only field for the number of static observa-
tions recorded over the period of point occupation.
Appears in the page when recording of static obser-
vations is configured.
Northing Display only field for Northing coordinate of meas-
ured point.
Number of
dists
Display only field for number of averaged distances
measured with EDM mode averaging.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 436
Offset
left/right
Input field for horizontal distance offset for meas-
ured point, perpendicular to the line of sight.
Offset height Input field for height offset for measured point.
Offset in/out Input field for horizontal distance offset, in the direc-
tion of line of sight.
Offset mode Select offset mode.
PDOP Display only field for the current PDOP of the
computed position.
PPM atmos Display only field for atmospheric ppm.
PPM
geometric
Display only field for geometric ppm value.
PPM total Display only field for the total ppm value.
Point ID Editable field for the point ID.
Pressure Editable field for atmospheric pressure.
Prism
constant
Display only field for additive constant of currently
selected reflector.
Quality 1D Display only field for the current height coordinate
quality of computed position.
Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate
quality of computed position.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 437
Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate
quality of computed position.
RTK
positions
Display only field for the number of positions
recorded over the period of point occupation.
Appears in the page of real-time rover configura-
tions.
SD (last
recorded)
Display only field for the last recorded distance.
Slope
distance
Display only field for measured slope distance.
Station ID Display only field for current station ID.
Station
easting
Display only field for current station Easting coordi-
nates.
Station height Display only field for current station height coordi-
nates.
Station
northing
Display only field for current station Northing coordi-
nates.
Std deviation Display only field of standard deviation in millimetres
of averaged distances.
Target Select a prism.
Target height Input field for prism height.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 438
Temp dry Editable field for dry temperature to be stored with
point.
Temp wet Editable field for wet temperature to be stored with
point.
Time at point Display only field for the time from when the point is
occupied until point occupation is stopped. Appears
in the page during the point occupation.
Type Display only field for the type of code, for example
point code, line code or area code.
V angle Display only field for vertical angle.
V angle
display
Select vertical angle display.
VDOP Display only field for the current VDOP of the
computed position.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Work settings 439
19.4 Hot keys & favourites
Description The settings on this screen assign functions, screens or applications to each of the first and
second level of hot keys, and the favourites key.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites.
OR
Hold a hot key down for two seconds. This action is also possible after pressing Fn.
Hot Keys & Favourites,
GPS Hot Keys/TPS Hot
Keys page
To configure the first level of hot keys.
This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys.
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
F7 to F12 Selectable list All functions, screens or applications which can be
assigned to the particular key.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 440
Next step
Page changes to the GPS Fn+hot keys/TPS Fn+hot keys page.
Hot Keys & Favourites,
GPS Fn+hot keys/TPS
Fn+hot keys page
To configure the second level of hot keys.
This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys.
The functionality on this page is identical to the one on the GPS Hot Keys/TPS Hot Keys
page.
Next step
Page changes to the GPS favourites/TPS favourites page.
Hot Keys & Favourites,
GPS favourites/TPS
favourites page
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - Work settings 441
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Field Option Description
1 to 9Selectable list All functions, screens or applications which can be
assigned to the individual lines in the user-defined
menu.
Viva Series, Coding 442
20 Coding
20.1 Overview
Description A code is a description which can be stored by itself or with a point, line, or area.
SmartWorx Viva coding is flexible with what types of codes can be stored and also how they
are entered. Thematical and/or free codes can be stored to the system by;
• selecting codes from a codelist,
• entering a quick code combination,
• directly typing in the code, or
• selecting the code from a SmartCodes screen.
Quick coding and SmartCodes are both quick ways for a code to be selected, a point to be
measured, and both code and point to be stored.
)For coding, points, lines and areas have the same behaviour. In this chapter, the word object
is used as a generic term for points, lines and areas.
Coding methods Coding
method
Characteristic Description
Thematical Use To store a description together with an object inside
an application or in Main Menu:Jobs & Data\View
& edit data.
Viva Series, Coding 443
Selection of the codes • For thematical coding with codelist:
On a configured survey screen page, codes are
selected from the job codelist in a selectable list.
It is also possible to add thematical codes from
the codelist to a SmartCodes screen for quick
selection, or to select thematical codes using the
quick coding method. The job codelist must
contain thematical codes.
• For thematical coding without codelist:
On a configured survey screen page, codes are
manually typed in.
Recording of the
codes
Together with the objects.
Free Use To store a description independent of an object at
any time. A free code can be used to store a descrip-
tion related to an object, or additional descriptions
such as the job name or temperature.
Selection of the codes • For free coding using a codelist:
Pressing the configured hot key opens a
selectable list with the free codes of the job
codelist. It is also possible to select free codes
using the quick coding method. The job codelist
must contain free codes.
Coding
method
Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Coding 444
• For free coding with direct input:
Pressing the configured hot key opens a screen
for alphanumeric input.
Recording of the
codes
Stored as time-related information. A time stamp is
stored with each free code. Free codes selected
using quick coding can be configured to be stored
before or after the object.
Quick Use Quick coding is the storing of an object plus a
thematical or free code using a minimum number of
keystrokes.
Selection of the codes Shortcuts must be assigned to codes in the job
codelist. Quick coding: On must be set in Coding &
linework settings, Quick coding page. Typing the
shortcut searches for the assigned code. Point
measurement begins.
Recording of the
codes
• For thematical codes:
Together with the objects. With Automatically
stop point measurement and Automatically
store point both checked in Quality control, the
points and codes are immediately stored.
•For free codes:
Stored as time-related information before or
after the points. A time stamp is stored with each
free code.
Coding
method
Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Coding 445
Configure coding Refer to "19.2 Coding & linework" for information on configuring coding.
)Quick codes must be created in LGO.
)Characters that can be assigned to quick codes are:
•0 to 9
•A to Z
•a to z
Coding
method
Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Coding 446
20.2 Thematical Coding
20.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist
Requirements • The job codelist contains thematical codes for points, lines and/or areas.
•Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings.
• A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured.
Access Open the selectable list for Code in a survey screen page of an application.
OR
Open the selectable list for a Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The procedure
is similar for lines and areas.
OR
Open the selectable list for Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is similar
for lines and areas.
OR
Open the selectable list for Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured.
Select Code Select Code is shown as an example.
Depending on the setting for Automatically create lines & areas when coding in Coding &
Linework Settings, Linework page, either;
• all point, line and area codes are available for selection, or
• only those point codes from the job codelist, which belong to an active code group,
are available for selection.
Viva Series, Coding 447
Codes marked with * have attributes attached.
OK
To accept changes and to return to the
screen from where this screen was
accessed.
New..
To create a new code.
Attrib
Available unless creating/editing a
point/line/area. To type in attribute values
for the selected code and/or add new
attributes for the selected code.
Last
Available if a code has been previously used
in the working job. To select from a list of
last used codes. The codes are sorted by
time with the most recently used code at the
top of the list.
More
To display information about the code
description, the code group, the code type
and the quick code if codes with quick codes
exist in the job.
Fn Group
To view, create, delete, activate and deacti-
vate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing
Code Groups"
Viva Series, Coding 448
Next step
Highlight the desired code.
• If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point is
stored with the selected code independently of any line/area.
• If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected
code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The meas-
ured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or
another line code is selected.
• If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines.
Attrib to access Enter Attributes.
Enter Attributes If configured for the selected code, editable fields for attribute values are available. Any
preconfigured attribute rules, for example, integer numbers only, a set range, or a selectable
list, control what values can be entered. Type in the attribute values. Attribute values for
attributes of type
• normal can be edited.
• fixed cannot be edited.
Fn Sort
To sort codes by code name, code descrip-
tion, quick code, in the order they were
added to the codelist, or the last used.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coding 449
OK
To return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
+Attrib
To add a new attribute of type normal and of
value type text. Up to twenty attributes can
be added. Attributes of type mandatory or
fixed and of value type real or integer must
be created in LGO.
Name or Value
Available for attributes for which an
attribute name can be typed in. To highlight
the field of the attribute name or the field
for the attribute value. The name of the
attribute can be edited and the attribute
value to be used as the default attribute
value can be typed in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values for
the selected code.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the
selected code.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coding 450
Next step
Press OK. The code and any associated attribute values are stored when the point is stored.
If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute
values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should they not be identical, a
screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected.
Viva Series, Coding 451
20.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist
Requirements •Use a list box to view codes is NOT checked in Coding & Linework Settings.
• A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured.
• A survey screen page with a selectable list for code types must be configured.
Access A thematical code is typed in the field
Code in a survey screen page of an application.
OR Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas.
OR Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas.
OR
in the field Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured.
Survey,
Code page
Type in a code and attribute values. Up to eight attributes can be added. This setting is
configured in the survey screen page.
• If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point is
stored with the selected code independently of any line/area.
• If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected
code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The meas-
ured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or
another line code is selected.
• If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines.
Next step
Press Meas.
Viva Series, Coding 452
20.3 Free Coding
20.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist
Requirements • The job codelist contains free codes.
• A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the favour-
ites menu is configured to display the option Select free code from list.
Access Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to
"1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
For GPS mode, press and select Select free code from list to access the screen
Select Free Code.
For TPS mode, press Fn and select Select free code from list to access the screen
Select Free Code.
Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the key.
Viva Series, Coding 453
Select Free Code All free codes from the job codelist which belong to an active code group, are available for
selection. Free codes marked with * have attributes attached.
Store
To store the free code and any associated
attribute values and to return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new code.
Attrib
To type in attribute values and/or add new
attributes for the selected free code. Refer
to "20.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist".
Last
Available if a free code has been previously
used in the working job. To select from a list
of last used free codes. The free codes are
sorted by time with the most recently used
code at the top of the list.
More
To display information about the code
description, the code group and the quick
code if codes with quick codes exist in the
job.
Fn Group
To view, create, delete, activate and deacti-
vate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing
Code Groups"
Viva Series, Coding 454
Fn Sort
To sort codes by code name, code descrip-
tion, quick code or the last used.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coding 455
20.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input
Requirements A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the favourites
menu is configured to display the option Enter free code.
Access Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to
"1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys.
OR
For GPS mode, press and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter Free
Code & Attributes.
For TPS mode, press Fn and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter Free
Code & Attributes.
Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the key.
Enter Free Code &
Attributes Type in a code and attribute values. As soon as a free code is typed in, a codelist is created
within the job. Up to eight attributes can be added. Refer to "20.3.1 Free Coding Using a
Codelist" for a description of keys.
Next step
Press Store.
Viva Series, Coding 456
20.4 Quick Coding
Requirements • The job codelist contains quick codes for points, lines and/or areas.
• According to the user requirements, set Store free code:Before pt is stored or Store free
code:After pt is stored in Coding & Linework Settings, Quick coding.
Activate quick coding The current setting for Quick coding in the Quick coding page determines how quick
coding is activated. Quick coding can be activated at any time.
•For Quick coding:On, Quick coding is active and can be used.
•For Quick coding:Off, use a hot key, the favourites menu or tap the quick coding
icon.
•For Quick coding:Never, change the setting manually.
Performing Quick
coding
A screen must be active where points can be measured.
Type in the one, two or three digits of the quick code. The current setting for Digits to use
in Coding & Linework Settings, Quick coding page determines by how many keystrokes
quick coding is executed.
Press ENTER to execute quick coding after less than the configured keystrokes. This action
is possible after one keystroke for Digits to use: 2 and one or two keystrokes for Digits to
use: 3.
Press ESC to clear digits from the entry.
Only mandatory attribute values can be entered. For non-mandatory attributes, either the
default or the last used attribute values are stored, depending on the setting for Suggested
attributes in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page.
Viva Series, Coding 457
For point codes:
• The point code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and point
measurement begins.
• The point code and any associated attribute values are stored with the point.
• If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and
attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should they not be
identical, a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected.
For free codes:
• The free code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and point
measurement begins.
• The free code, associated attribute values and time related information are stored.
The setting for Store free code in Coding & Linework Settings, Quick coding page
determines if the free code is stored before or after the point.
For line/area codes:
• The line/area code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist.
• A new line/area is created and immediately stored with that line/area code and
attributes. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates
is used.
Viva Series, Coding 458
20.5 SmartCodes
20.5.1 Overview
Description SmartCodes is a quick way for a code to be selected and a point to be measured. All existing
coding, linework, and point measurement functionality is retained.
Viva Series, Coding 459
20.5.2 Configuring SmartCodes
Access In Survey press Fn Config.. to access Configuration.
Configuration Smart-
Codes page
The settings on this page activate the using of SmartCodes and define the method. All
settings in this screen are stored within the currently active working style.
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use Smart-
Codes Check box If checked, using of SmartCodes is activated.
)All other fields on the screen are active and
can be edited.
Measure point
when box is
tapped
Check box If checked, when one of the code boxes is tapped in
Survey, SmartCodes page, then the code is selected
and the point is measured.
Viva Series, Coding 460
Automatically
move focus to
next box
Method by which subsequent code box is selected
after a point is stored.
Not used Nine code boxes are shown in the Survey, Smart-
Codes page, but no automatic movement of the
focus takes place.
Zig-Zag Each new code rotation through the block is started
at the same end where the previous code rotation
finished.
Same direction Each new code rotation through the block is started
at the same end where the previous code rotation
started.
)Refer to "47 Survey Cross Section" for an explanation
of Zig-Zag and Same direction.
Direction to
move Available for Automatically move focus to next
box:Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to next
box:Same direction. The way of using the code
boxes. This setting controls the order in which the
code boxes will be rotated through automatically.
Forward The code boxes are used in the same way as defined
in Survey, SmartCodes page.
Backward The code boxes are used in the reverse way as
defined in Survey, SmartCodes page.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Coding 461
Number of code
boxes From 1 to 9Available for Automatically move focus to next
box:Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to next
box:Same direction. Number of code boxes shown
in Survey, SmartCodes page.
Show at bottom
of screen Information shown in line 8 of Survey, SmartCodes
page.
Not used No survey screen page element is shown.
Point ID The identifier for manually measured points. The
configured point ID template is used.
3D CQ The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed
position.
2D CQ The current 2D coordinate quality of the computed
position.
1D CQ The current height coordinate quality of the
computed position.
Linework The linework flag to be stored with the point. The
options available depend on whether a line/area is
currently open.
Antenna
height
The height of the antenna that is being used.
Changing the antenna height here does not update
the default antenna height as defined in the active
working style.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Coding 462
Target
height
The height of the reflector that is being used.
Changing the reflector height here does not update
the default reflector height as defined in the active
configuration set.
Hz The current horizontal angle of the measured point.
VThe current vertical angle of the measured point.
Horiz
distance
The current horizontal distance of the measured
point.
Slope
distance
The current slope distance of the measured point.
Height
difference
The current height difference between the station
and the measured point.
Automatically
create lines &
areas when
coding
Check box If checked, lines and areas can be automatically
created and opened using codes.
Use a stringing
attribute Check box Available if Automatically create lines & areas when
coding is checked.
If checked, surveyed points that have the same code
and attribute value for the Stringing attribute are
strung together on one line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Coding 463
Stringing
attribute Selectable list Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked.
The attribute value used to determine which
surveyed points are strung together on one line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Coding 464
20.5.3 Code Block
Requirements •Use SmartCodes ticked in Configuration, SmartCodes page.
Survey,
SmartCodes page
Description of fields
Meas
To start recording positions.
Codes..
To select a code to be assigned to the high-
lighted code block. Available when a code
box is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Field Option Description
Code block Selectable list The code block to be used.
Code box - A measured point is stored with the code assigned to
the highlighted code box.
Viva Series, Coding 465
Next step
Highlight a code block and press Codes.. to access Select Code.
)When Stringing attribute is configured in
Stringing attribute, SmartCodes page, an
attribute value can be typed in below the code
name of the highlighted code box. The
attribute value can also be modified using the
softkeys + and -.
)For Measure point when box is tapped being
checked in Stringing attribute, SmartCodes
page, tapping the code box with the supplied
stylus automatically starts measuring the
point. Selecting the code box by using the
arrow keys will not start measuring the point.
)Lines/areas are automatically opened and
closed using SmartCodes, as configured.
Linework Selectable list Available for Show at bottom of screen: Linework.
Select the linework flag to be stored with the point.
Then move the focus on the line/area code box.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Coding 466
Select Code OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
New..
To create a new code.
Attrib
To type in attribute values for the selected
code and/or add new attributes for the
selected code.
Last
Available if a code has been previously used
in the working job. To select from a list of
last used codes. The codes are sorted by
time with the most recently used code at the
top of the list.
More
To display information about the code
description, the code group, the code type
and the quick code if codes with quick codes
exist in the job.
Fn Group
To view, create, delete, activate and deacti-
vate code groups. Refer to "6.5 Managing
Code Groups"
Fn Sort
To sort codes by code name, code descrip-
tion, quick code, in the order they were
added to the codelist, or the last used.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coding 467
Copying a code block to
a new job step-by-step Step Description
)Code blocks are stored in the job.
1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties.
OR
Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\ Choose working job or Choose control job.
Edit.. to access Job Properties:.
)Codelist: If codes had been copied from the internal memory codelist, the name
of the codelist is displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the name of the job
is displayed.
2. Fn Export to copy codes and code blocks from the job to an existing or new
codelist.
)Copying code blocks to an existing codelist overwrites the code blocks of the
existing codelist.
3. OK and Store to save the current job and return to Main Menu.
4. Create a new job and assign the related codelist to the job.
)SmartCodes from the codelist are now available within the new job.
Viva Series, Coding 468
20.6 Code and Attribute Mismatch
20.6.1 Code Mismatch
Description When storing a point with a code, it can happen that a point with the same point ID already
exists in the job. If the codes of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens
where the code can be corrected. One point cannot have different codes.
Point Code Mismatch This screen opens automatically if the codes of the new and the existing point do not match.
Highlight the code to be stored with the new point.
Description of fields
Store
To store the highlighted code and any asso-
ciated attributes with the point being stored
and to continue with the application or data
management.
More
To display information about the code
description, the code group and any
attributes associated with the highlighted
code.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
New Code Display only The code for the point.
Stored Code Display only The code as stored for the existing point in the job.
Viva Series, Coding 469
20.6.2 Attribute Mismatch
Description If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute
values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should the attributes not be iden-
tical, a screen opens where the attribute mismatch can be corrected. One point cannot have
different attribute information.
)The name of the screen changes with pressing Current or Stored:
Attributes Already
Stored/Attributes Being
Stored
This screen opens automatically if the attribute names and/or values of the new and the
existing point do not match.
Pressing Current:Attributes Being Stored
Pressing Stored:Attributes Already Stored
Store
To store the selected attributes with the
new/created point and to continue with the
application or data management.
Current or Stored
To change between viewing the attribute
names and values of the new/created point
and those values stored for the existing
point in the job.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Coding 470
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point code Display only • For Attributes Already Stored: The code of the
existing point in the job.
•For Attributes Being Stored: The code of the new
point.
Attributes Display only • For Attributes Already Stored: The attributes as
stored for the existing point in the job.
•For Attributes Being Stored: The attributes of the
new point.
Viva Series, Linework 471
21 Linework
21.1 Overview
Description Working with lines can be automated. Two ways of working are available. They are listed in
this table. The two ways of working can be mixed.
)The linework flag can be used without thematical coding by using the linework field in the
Survey screen page configuration.
The code can be linked to linework if it is configured as a point code to start a line/area, or
it is a line or area code.
Quick coding can be used as described in "20.4 Quick Coding".
Linework by Description
Linework
listbox
In all applications and on the Auto page in Survey, a survey screen page can
be configured to show a field Linework with a selectable list.
The selection from the selectable list determines
• the action taken for a line/area, for example opening or closing a line.
• the linework flag stored with a point.
The linework flags
• are configured in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page.
• can be exported with a format file.
Coding Point, line or area codes can be selected in many applications.
Selecting a point, line or area code closes any open line/area and opens a
new line/area.
Refer to "20 Coding" for more information.
Viva Series, Linework 472
21.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field
)The Survey application is used here to explain Linework.
Requirements • A survey screen page with a selectable list for Linework must be configured.
• The linework flags must be defined in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page.
• The rover menu must be used.
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey.
Linework using the
linework field step-by-
step
Step Description
1. Go to the point to be measured.
2. Select the linework flag to be stored with the point.
3. Measure the point.
)Depending on the option selected for Linework, a line/area is opened, closed or
reopened.
4. Repeat steps 1. to 5. until all points for the linework are measured.
5. Fn Quit to exit the Survey application.
6. Use a format file to export the points including the linework flags.
Viva Series, Linework 473
21.3 Performing Linework with Thematical Coding
Description Linework and coding can be combined.
This combination can be useful, because coding, assigning linework flags and
opening/closing lines/areas can all be done with one point observation.
Combining Linework and coding can only be configured if thematical point codes or if
thematical point, line and area codes are available for selection. Thematical coding can be
done with or without codelists.
)Linework and coding can also be combined using SmartCodes. Refer to "20.5 SmartCodes".
Configuration options The configuration for the types of codes available and the configuration for coding
with/without a codelist both have an influence on the following:
• The required configuration of a survey screen page.
• The behaviour of the fields configured for the survey screen page.
• The behaviour of the software.
Viva Series, Linework 474
The possible configurations and their influence on the coding related fields are shown in this
table:
Configuration selected in the Coding
& Linework Settings screen
Behaviour of the coding related fields
depending on the configuration selected.
Code Code type Linework
Use a list box to view codes Selectable list Display only Selectable list
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Use a list box to view codes Selectable list Display only Selectable list
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Use a list box to view codes Editable field Selectable list Selectable list
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Use a list box to view codes Editable field Display only Selectable list
Automatically create lines &
areas when coding
Viva Series, Linework 475
Requirements • A survey screen page must be configured with
• a field for Code.
• a selectable list for Linework.
• a selectable list for Code type when using point, line and area codes without a
codelist (Use a list box to view codes is unchecked).
This field is not required if only point codes are used, or when working with a codelist
(Use a list box to view codes is checked).
•Configure in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page
•Automatically create lines & areas when coding checked or not checked.
•Use a list box to view codes checked or not checked.
•In Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page, define the linework flags.
• The rover menu must be used.
)The Survey application is used here to explain the combination of Linework and Coding.
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey.
Viva Series, Linework 476
Survey,
Survey page
This example is what a survey screen page configured for Linework and coding looks like.
The most important keys are explained.
Meas
To start recording positions. The key
changes to Stop.
Stop
To end recording of positions when enough
data is collected. The key changes to Store.
Store
To store the point information. The key
changes to Meas.
All
To measure and store distances and angles.
Stop
Available if Measure mode:Tracking and
Dist was pressed. Stops the distance meas-
urements. The key changes back to All.
Dist
To measure and display distances. Available
unless Measure mode:Tracking and/or Log
auto points checked, after the tracking or
logging is started.
Viva Series, Linework 477
Linework and Coding
step-by-step
Store
To record data. If Measure mode:Tracking
and/or Log auto points checked, records
measured point and continues tracking.
Step Field Description for thematical coding
Use a list box to view codes
checked
Use a list box to view codes
not checked
1. Code Select a code from the
selectable list. Depending on
the configuration only point
codes, or also line and area
codes are available for selec-
tion.
Type in a code.
)<None> to store a point
without code or to perform
Linework without coding.
----- to store a point without
code or to perform Linework
without coding.
2. Code type Point is displayed. This field is a display only field. It cannot be
changed.
3. Linework Select an option for the linework flag to be stored with the point.
Refer to "21.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field" for
a description of the options.
)Select ----- to store a point without linework flag or to perform
coding without Linework.
4. - Press Meas, Stop and Store.
Press All.
Viva Series, Linework 478
)- • The point is stored with the selected code.
- • The point is stored with the selected linework flag.
- • The choice of linework flags available for Linework is updated.
Step Field Description for thematical coding
Use a list box to view codes
checked
Use a list box to view codes
not checked
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 479
22 User - Working style wizard
22.1 Overview
Description The software has many configurable parameters and functions which can be set by the user
to suit their preferred method of working. These preferred settings can be saved as a
Working Style.
Using the Working Style Wizard, all the settings can be defined at once. Alternatively, all
screens of this wizard can also be accessed individually from User\Work settings and
User\System settings.
Default working style A default working style exists on the instrument. It uses standard settings for most applica-
tions. The default working style can be edited or deleted. It is always possible to restore the
default working style by formatting the internal memory.
User defined working
styles
New working styles can be created. The working style wizard assists in editing working
styles.
Edit outside the
working style wizard
Parameters and functions can be edited without going through the working style wizard.
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 480
22.2 Accessing the Working Style Wizard
Access Select Main Menu: User\Working style wizard.
Working Style Wizard
Next step
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
IF you want to THEN
select a different set
of settings
select New working style, press Next and continue with "22.3
Choosing a Different Working Style".
create a new set of
settings
select Choose a different working style, press Next and continue
with "22.4 Creating a New Working Style".
edit an existing set of
settings
select Edit a working style, press Next and continue with "22.5
Editing a Working Style".
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 481
22.3 Choosing a Different Working Style
Working Style Wizard,
Choose the working style
to use.
Select an existing working style from the selectable list.
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Delete
To delete the highlighted working style.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 482
22.4 Creating a New Working Style
Working Style Wizard,
Enter the working style
details
Type in the name and a description for the new working style.
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 483
22.5 Editing a Working Style
Working Style Wizard,
Choose the working style
to edit.
Select the working style to be edited from the selectable list.
Description of fields
Next
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen within the wizard.
Delete
To delete the working style currently shown
in the selectable list immediately.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Field Option Description
Create a copy Check box Creates a copy of the working style before the
editing process starts.
Viva Series, User - System settings 484
23 User - System settings
23.1 Regional settings
Description The settings on this screen define
• the units for all types of measurement data displayed.
• information related to some types of measurement data.
• the order in which coordinates are displayed.
• the instrument identification number.
• the languages available on the instrument.
Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Regional settings.
Regional Settings,
Distance page
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - System settings 485
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Distance The units shown for all distance and coordinate
related fields.
Metre (m) Metres [m]
International ft (fi) International feet [fi], storage in US feet
Intl ft/inch (fi) International feet [fi], inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00
0/8 fi), storage in US feet
US ft (ft) US feet [ft]
US ft/inch (ft) US feet, inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8 fi) [ft]
US miles (mi) US miles [mi]
Kilometres (km) Kilometres [km]
Distance
decimal From 0 to 4The number of decimal places shown for all distance
and coordinate related fields. This setting is for data
display and does not apply to data export or storage.
The available options depend on the selected
Distance.
Chainage
format Selects display format for all chainage information
fields.
+123456.789 Default chainage display form.
+123+456.789 Separator between hundreds and thousands.
+1234+56.789 Separators between tens and hundreds.
+123.4+56.789 Separator between tens and hundreds with addi-
tional decimal point.
Viva Series, User - System settings 486
Next step
Page changes to the Slope page.
Regional Settings,
Slope page
Description of fields
Area m², Intl acres (Ai),
US acres (A),
Hectares (ha), fi² or
ft²
The units shown for all area-related fields.
Volume m³, fi³, ft³ or yd³ The units shown for all volume-related fields.
Field Option Description
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
All fields The input and output format for grades.
Viva Series, User - System settings 487
Next step
Page changes to the Angle page.
Regional Settings,
Angle page
Description of fields
h:v Horizontal by vertical distance.
v:h Vertical by horizontal distance.
%(v/h x 100) Percentage of vertical by horizontal distance.
Elevation angle Elevation angle.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Angle 400 gon, 360°'",
360° dec or 6400
mil
The units shown for all angular and coordinate
related fields.
Angle decimal The number of decimal places shown for all angular
and coordinate related fields. This setting is for data
display and does not apply to data export or storage.
From 1 to 3Available for Angle: 6400 mil.
From 2 to 4Available for Angle: 400 gon and Angle: 360° dec.
1", 5", 10" or 60" Available for Angle: 360°'".
Viva Series, User - System settings 488
Azimuth ref North azimuth,
South
azimuth,North
anti-clockwise or
Bearing
Sets the reference direction as well as the direction
from where and how azimuths are computed.
For Azimuth ref: Bearing, the azimuth/bearing fields
in other screens are called Bearing. NE, SW, SE and
NW indicate the quadrant of the bearing.
For all other options, the azimuth/bearing fields in
other screens are called Azimuth.
GPS direction
ref True or Magnetic Sets the North direction.
Declination Editable field Available for GPS direction ref: Magnetic.
The value for the magnetic declination. It is consid-
ered when computing or using any azimuth values.
Field Option Description
NNENW
SESW
GS_049
Viva Series, User - System settings 489
Next step
Page changes to the Time page.
V angle display Zenith angle V=0 in zenith.
Elevation angle V = 0 horizontal elevation angle. Vertical angles are
positive above the horizon and negative below it.
Elevation angle % V = 0 horizontal. Vertical angles are expressed in %
and are positive above the horizon and negative
below it.
Hold V angle
after a Dist
measurement
Check box If checked, the vertical angle is fixed after a distance
measurement with Dist, whereas the horizontal
angle is continuously updated with the telescope
movement.
If not checked, the vertical angle is continuously
updated with the telescope movement.
)The active prism height is applied in the calcu-
lation of remote point elevations. The prism
height must be set to zero to display and
record the elevation of the targeted remote
point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - System settings 490
Regional Settings,
Time page
The time zone is read from WinCE.
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Coords page.
Regional Settings,
Coords page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Time format 24 hour or 12 hour
(am/pm) How the time is shown in all time-related fields.
Current time Display only Shows an example of the selected time format.
Date format Day.month.year,
Month/day/year or
Year/month/day
How the date is shown in all date-related fields.
Current date Display only Shows an example of the selected date format.
Field Option Description
Grid format Easting, northing
or Northing,
easting
The order in which grid coordinates are shown in all
screens. The order in survey screen pages depends
on the user settings.
Geodetic
format Latitude, longi-
tude or Longitude,
latitude
The order in which geodetic coordinates are shown in
all screens. The order in survey screen pages depends
on the user settings.
Viva Series, User - System settings 491
Next step
Page changes to the Language page.
Regional Settings,
Language page
Description of columns
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Delete
To delete the highlighted language.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Language The languages available on the instrument. Three languages can be stored
on the instrument at one time - English and two others. English cannot be
deleted.
The selected language is used for the system software. If a language is
not available for the system software, the English language is used
instead.
Applications are available in the languages that were loaded on the instru-
ment when the application was installed.
Viva Series, User - System settings 492
Next step
Page changes to the Others page.
Regional Settings,
Others page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Device ID page.
Field Option Description
Temperature Celsius (°C)) or
Fahrenheit (°F) The units shown for all temperature-related fields.
Pressure mbar, mmHg, Inch
Hg (inHg), hPa or
psi
The units shown for all pressure-related fields.
PSI = pounds per square inch.
Velocity unit Km/h (kmh), Mph
(mph) or Knots
(kn)
The units shown for all velocity-related fields.
Viva Series, User - System settings 493
Regional Settings,
Device ID page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Field Option Description
Device ID Editable field This number is used for the generation of the file
names. Using format files, the instrument ID can be
exported together with data from the instrument. By
doing so, it can be identified which instrument was
used for certain measurements. Sets a four-digit
number as instrument identification number. By
default the last four numbers of the serial number
are used.
Viva Series, User - System settings 494
23.2 SmartWorx options
Description The settings on this screen define the behaviour of the instrument for a general start up.
Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\SmartWorx options.
Welcome to SmartWorx
Viva! If a check box is checked, the corresponding screen is shown during start up.
If all check boxes are unchecked, then, after turning on the instrument, the Main Menu is
accessed immediately.
Welcome to SmartWorx
Viva!, StartUp PIN code
page
If Use PIN: Yes, then, after turning on the instrument, a PIN code must be entered.
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use PIN Yes PIN protection is activated and a PIN code must be
entered at startup.
Viva Series, User - System settings 495
Next step
Page changes to the General page.
Welcome to SmartWorx
Viva!, General page
If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is checked, then menus will
appear as drop down menus.
If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is unchecked, then menus will
appear as graphical menus.
Next step
OK to the save the changes and return to the Main Menu.
No PIN protection is not activated and no PIN code is
required at startup.
New PIN Editable field Available if Use PIN: Yes
The new PIN code that will be required at startup. PIN
codes must be numerical only and 4 to 6 digits in
length.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - System settings 496
23.3 Screen & audio
Description The settings on this screen allow the screen appearance to be configured, turn the notifica-
tion beeps on and off and define the behaviour of the keys. The settings are stored on the
field controller itself. If the field controller is exchanged, the settings stored on the new field
controller apply.
Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Screen & audio.
Screen & Audio Settings,
Screen page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu.
Calib
To calibrate the touch screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Minimize
instrument icon
tool bar
Check box If checked, the icon tool bar on the top of the screen
is minimised to one small icon on the top left. Tap
this icon to make the full icon tool bar visible again.
Viva Series, User - System settings 497
Next step
Page changes to the Audio page.
Screen & Audio Settings,
Audio page
Description of fields
Use the touch
screen Check box If checked, the touch screen is turned on.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Message
sounds Sounds only A sound alert will be given when an information
message appears.
Sounds & voice A sound and voice alert will be given when an infor-
mation message appears.
Warnings
volume Slider from 0% to
100%
Controls the beep for acoustic warning signals.
Key clicks Slider from 0% to
100%
Controls the beep when pressing a key on the field
controller.
Screen taps Slider from 0% to
100%
Controls the beep when touching the touch screen.
Use Hz sector
beeps Check box If checked, the horizontal sector beep is turned on.
The instrument beeps when within 5 gon/4°30’ of
the defined sector, has a long and consistent beep
within 0.5 gon/27’ and no beep within
0.005 gon/16’’.
Viva Series, User - System settings 498
Next step
Page changes to the Text input page.
Screen & Audio Settings,
Text input page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Hz sector angle Editable field Editable field for the sector angle for which a beep
will sound.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Alpha mode Function keys,
Mobile phone style
or Pop-up
keyboard
Alphanumeric input can either be through function or
numeric keys.
For the CS10 model, alphanumeric input can also be
through an on-screen pop-up keyboard to be used
with the stylus.
Alpha input
method Selectable list Sets the set of extra characters available through
Alpha or F1-F6 whenever an entry is made.
The choices available depend on the character sets
loaded on the instrument and the language config-
ured to be used.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 499
24 User - Tools & other utilities
24.1 Transfer user objects
Description This chapter describes the basic procedure for transferring objects between the data
storage device and the internal memory. Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the
Memory Device" for information about file types and locations of files on the data storage
device.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Transfer user objects.
Transfer User Objects
OK
To transfer an object and return to the
screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 500
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Object to
transfer Selectable list Listed are the objects that can be transferred. The
available fields on the screen depend on the option
selected.
From Memory device to transfer object from.
CF card Transfer from CompactFlash card.
SD card Transfer from Secure Digital Memory card.
USB Transfer from USB.
Internal memory Transfer from the field controller.
To Selectable list Memory device to transfer object to. Memory device
not selected in From.
Antenna Selectable list To select the antenna records to be transferred.
Codelist Selectable list To select the codelist to be transferred.
Working style Selectable list To select the configuration set to be transferred.
Coordinate
system Selectable list To select the coordinate system to be transferred.
CSCS field file Selectable list To select the Country Specific Coordinate System to
be transferred.
File Display only The dial-up list or the server list to be transferred as
a binary file.
Format file Selectable list To select the format files to be transferred.
Geoid field file Selectable list To select the Geoid Field File to be transferred.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 501
Choose
working job Selectable list To select the job to be transferred.
Transfer all
objects of the
selected type
Check box Available for some transfer object options. To
transfer all objects.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 502
24.2 Uploading System Files
Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load firmware & Apps.
Load firmware & Apps
Description of fields
OK
To upload an application, firmware or
language and return to the screen from
where this screen was accessed.
Delete
To delete an application or language.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Object to
transfer Apps Application uploads are possible from the data
storage device to the field controller. These files are
stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage
device and use the extension *.a*.
Firmware Firmware uploads are possible from the data storage
device to the field controller. These files are stored in
the \SYSTEM directory of the active memory device
and use the extension *.fw.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 503
)It is not possible to have more than three language files stored on the instrument. English
is always available as the default language and cannot be deleted.
)There is only one version of each application. The application will be installed in English and
in any other language that is already loaded onto the instrument. If a new language is loaded
after an application has been installed, the application will need to be reinstalled to become
available in the new language.
Language Language uploads are possible from the data storage
device to the field controller. These files are stored in
the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device and
use an extension that is individual to each language.
From Selectable list Upload from CompactFlash card, Secure Digital
Memory card or USB stick.
App Selectable list List of application files stored on the card.
Firmware Selectable list List of firmware files stored on the card.
Language Selectable list List of language files stored on the card.
Version Display only Version of the application/firmware/language file
chosen.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 504
24.3 Load licence keys
Description A licence key can be used to activate applications and protected options and can be used to
define the expiry date of the software maintenance. Refer to "24.6 About Leica Viva" to find
out how to check the expiry date of the software maintenance.
A licence key file can be uploaded to the field controller. To upload a licence key file the file
must be located on the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device. Licence key files use
the naming convention L_123456.key, where 123456 is the instrument serial number.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys.
OR
Select an application not yet activated.
Load Licence Keys
OK
To accept changes and return to Main Menu
or continue with the application.
Fn Delete
To delete all licence keys on the field
controller.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 505
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Load key The method used to input the licence key to activate
the application or the protected options or the soft-
ware maintenance.
Upload key from
file The licence key file is uploaded from the data storage
device. The licence key file must be stored in the
\SYSTEM directory on the data storage device.
Enter manually Allows the licence key to be typed in manually.
Key Editable field Available for Load key:Enter manually. The licence
key required to activate an application. Entry is not
case sensitive.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 506
24.4 Format memory devices
Description Allows the data storage device and the internal memory to be formatted. All data will be
erased.
)If the internal memory is formatted, all system data such as almanac, user-defined config-
uration sets, user-defined antennas, codelists, geoid field files and CSCS field files will be
lost.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Format memory devices.
Format Memory Device
OK
To format a memory device and return to
the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Apps
To format the applications memory.
System
To format the internal memory.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 507
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Memory Device CF card, SD card,
USB or Internal
memory
The type of memory to be formatted.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 508
24.5 View contents of ASCII files
Description Allows ASCII files selected for From file in Import ASCII Data to be viewed in WordPad.
Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\View contents of ASCII files. WordPad
opens.
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 509
24.6 About Leica Viva
Access Select Main Menu: User\About Leica Viva.
About Leica Viva,
Controller page
The information relates to the field controller. This screen shows:
• The serial number,
• The equipment number,
• The firmware version of the boot software,
• The firmware version for the Electric Front Interface,
• If a total station radio installed,
• If Wireless LAN is installed,
• If a GSM is installed.
Next step
Page changes to the Total station page.
About Leica Viva,
Total station page
The information relates to the TPS instrument. This screen shows:
• The type of instrument,
• Additional instrument hardware options such as EDM or PowerSearch.
Next step
Page changes to the GPS rover page.
About Leica Viva,
GPS rover page
The information relates to the GPS instrument. This screen shows:
• The currently active system language,
• The serial number of the measurement engine,
Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 510
• The availability of additional instrument hardware options,
• If the protected OWI commands and the ability to track GPS L5, GLONASS, Galileo and
Compass have been activated by a licence key.
Next step
Page changes to the SmartWorx page.
About Leica Viva,
SmartWorx page
The information relates to the SmartWorx Viva instrument. This screen shows the applica-
tions installed on the instrument, and the following information.
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to another page on this screen.
Field Description
Firmware version Firmware version for the onboard software.
Build number Build number for the onboard software.
API version Firmware version for the application interface.
Maintenance end Expiry date of the software maintenance.
Load licence keys The information listed here indicates for which applications the
licence keys are loaded.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 511
25 TPS Functions
25.1 EDM
Description Electronic Distance Measurement EDM is the function used for distance measurements.
There are different modes the instrument can work in. Refer to Measure & Target
Settings.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 512
25.2 Prism Search Methods
25.2.1 Automatic aiming
Description Automatic aiming is the function which recognises and measures the position of a prism
using a CCD array. A laser beam is transmitted and the reflected beam is received by the
built-in CCD array. The position of the reflected spot with respect to the centre of the CCD
is computed. These automatic aiming offsets are used to correct the horizontal and vertical
angles. The automatic aiming offsets are also used to control the motors which turn the
instrument to centre the crosshairs to the prism. In order to minimise the time for meas-
uring, the crosshairs are not moved to the exact centre of the prism. The automatic aiming
offset can be up to 500 cc depending on selected Measure mode. The automatic aiming
function measures the offsets between the crosshairs and prism centre and corrects the
horizontal and vertical angles accordingly. Therefore the horizontal and vertical angles are
measured to the prism-centre, even if the crosshairs are not aimed precisely at the centre
of the prism.
Motorised instruments can be equipped with automatic aiming. For Target aiming: Auto-
matic the instrument can find a static prism and measure a distance once Meas or Dist is
pressed. The instrument does not follow a moving prism.
Field of view The telescope field of view is the region seen when looking through the telescope. The auto-
matic aiming field of view is the region seen by the automatic aiming. Both are identical on
TPS instruments.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 513
Automatic aiming
measurement
Automatic aiming
search
If the prism is in the field of view with Target aiming: Auto-
matic the crosshairs are automatically positioned to the prism
when, for example Meas or Dist is pressed. No automatic
aiming search is started.
)The displayed values are always related to the centre
of the prism after Meas or Dist is pressed. For Meas,
these values are displayed only shortly after the key
press.
The crosshairs of the telescope may not fully coincide
with the centre of the prism when viewed through the
telescope. The remaining automatic aiming offsets for
the horizontal and vertical angles are measured by the
automatic aiming function and applied to the meas-
ured and displayed angles.
TS_004
If the prism is not in the field of view when
Meas or Dist is pressed, an automatic aiming
search is started. For the automatic aiming
search the automatic aiming window is
scanned line by line starting at the current
telescope position. If the
• prism was not found: Retry can be
pressed to search for the prism in an
increased area.
• prism was found: The automatic aiming
measurement is performed to position
the telescope to the centre of the prism.
TS_005
Viva Series, TPS Functions 514
Automatic aiming
window
The automatic aiming window is a relative window based on the current telescope position.
The horizontal and vertical extent can be defined.
Fine search window If no target is found after the prediction time and If no target found after prediction then:
Start fine search is set, then the prism is searched for with automatic aiming using a dynamic
automatic aiming window. This window covers a horizontal region from the position of loss
of lock to the current telescope position, and the same extent on the other side. The vertical
dimension of the dynamic window is one third of the horizontal expansion.
Targeting modes Refer to Measure & Target Settings.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 515
25.2.2 PowerSearch
Description The PowerSearch module allows an automatic prism detection within a short time period.
The PowerSearch function can be started in the Leica TPS Favourites screen and configured
in TPS settings\Prism search settings, PowerSearch window.
Functionality The PowerSearch function consists of a
transmitter (a) and a receiver (b). Both are
installed in the telescope.
When PowerSearch is activated, the instru-
ment starts to rotate around its standing
axis. The transmitter emits a vertical laser
swath. If the laser swath detects a prism, the
rotation of the instrument is stopped. After-
wards an automatic aiming measurement in
the vertical direction is performed.
a) EGL
b) Transmitter
c) Receiver
ab c
TS_006
Viva Series, TPS Functions 516
)If a PS window is defined and active, PowerSearch is executed within the defined limits.
360° search If the search window is not defined and PowerSearch is started, the prism is searched for
with PowerSearch in the 360° window. The default search with PowerSearch consists of a
short swing in anti-clockwise direction followed by a complete 360° turn in clockwise direc-
tion. If a prism is detected the movement is stopped and an automatic aiming search is
performed.
PowerSearch window The PowerSearch window can be defined individually. It is specified by absolute angle values
and does not change its position. The PowerSearch window can be set in the Prism Search
Settings, PowerSearch window page by aiming at two opposite points of the PowerSearch
window. When Use PowerSearch window is checked and a PowerSearch is started, a prism
is searched for within the defined window.
Dynamic PowerSearch
window
When Use PowerSearch window is not checked and the instrument has lost lock, after the
prediction time, the prism is searched for in a dynamic PowerSearch window. This window
covers a region at the position after prediction of horizontal 100 gon by vertical 40 gon.
Direction of search The PowerSearch routine can be activated clockwise or anticlockwise by using hotkeys. This
action will have no influence on the prism search settings.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 517
25.3 Follow Moving Prisms - Lock
Description Lock enables instruments equipped with automatic aiming to follow a moving prism. The
automatic aiming sensor is active when Lock is active. When Target lock on is selected in
Leica TPS Favourites, an automatic aiming search is executed. The instrument locks onto
the prism and follows its movements. Automatic aiming offsets are continuously applied to
the angle measurements. When the instrument loses lock to the prism, a PowerSearch or
fine search (auto aiming search) can be executed depending on the prism search settings.
Lock is unavailable for SmartStation.
)If the speed of the prism is too fast, the target may be lost. Make sure that the speed does
not exceed the figure given in the technical data.
Enable lock Selecting Target lock on in Leica TPS Favourites, will immediately activate an automatic
aiming search to find the prism. Alternatively, as long as Target aiming is set to Lock in
Measure & Target Settings, then pressing Meas, Dist, PowerSearch, OK in Check Point,
Joystick, Turn to Hz/V and Orientation With Compass will start a PowerSearch or automatic
aiming search to find the prism. When the prism is found, the instrument locks onto the
prism. The instrument follows the moving prism and the automatic aiming function remains
active.
Loss of lock When the instrument is locked onto a prism, lock may be lost if the movement of the prism
is too fast for the instrument to follow or the prism is hidden behind an object. After lock is
lost, the prediction, as set in Prism Search Settings is used to find the prism again.
The automatic aiming function is still active.
)Whenever the prism is moved in the field of view during the prediction and any other search
periods, the instrument locks automatically to the prism.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 518
Prediction
As long as the prism is being tracked by the instrument a mathematical filter continuously
calculates the average speed and direction of the prism. If the line of sight between instru-
ment and prism is disturbed, the instrument keeps on moving using these calculated values.
This behaviour is called prediction. The prediction time can be configured. During prediction,
the LOCK icon is displayed and if the prism comes into the instruments field of view again
the automatic aiming will lock to the prism.
Prism search after
prediction
After prediction, the prism is searched for depending on the settings in Prism Search
Settings.
•If no target found after prediction then: Stop searching. If the prism moved in the field
of view, the prism is not searched for until Meas, Dist, Target lock on is pressed.
•If no target found after prediction then: Start fine search: prism is searched for in the
dynamic automatic aiming window with automatic aiming.
•If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch
window is checked: prism is searched for in the PS window with PowerSearch.
•If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch
window is NOT checked: prism is searched for in the dynamic PowerSearch window.
Relock Independent of the setting for If no target found after prediction then the instrument can
relock to the prism. Refer to paragraph "Enable lock".
a) Moving prism locked onto by the instrument
b) Loss of lock
c) Prediction
TS_007
abc
Viva Series, TPS Functions 519
25.4 RCS
Description The instrument can be controlled by the field controller via radio. The automatic aiming func-
tion does not necessarily have to be active when working in RCS mode. The field controller
is used to remote control the instrument. No data can be stored on the field controller. The
screen and content displayed on the field controller are a copy of the remote controlled
instrument.
The communication between the total station and the field controller is established via radio
modems. One radio modem has to be connected to the total station serial port.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 520
25.5 EGL
Description The Emitting Guide Light, EGL, consists of two differently coloured flashing lights in the tele-
scope housing of the TPS. The EGL is used for guidance into the line of sight. If the left light
is seen, the prism must be moved right and vice versa. If both flashing lights can be seen,
the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument.
Functionality The EGL can be used
• to help guide the prism into the telescope
line of sight when the instrument is
controlled remotely and Target aiming:
Lock.
• to stake out points.
The instrument emits two differently
coloured flashing cones of light. At a target
distance of 100 m, the cones have a width of
6 m. Between the two cones of light, a
sector with a width of 30 mm is created
where both guide lights are visible simultane-
ously. In this position, the prism is in the line
of sight of the instrument.
TS_008
6 m
(20 ft)
6 m
(20 ft)
100 m (300 ft)
Viva Series, TPS Functions 521
Using the EGL step-by-
step Step Description
1. Check Use the instrument guide lights (EGL) in the Instrument Lights screen.
OR
Set Target aiming: Lock and press Comps or Turn to Hz/V or J Stick on the
Leica TPS Favourites screen.
2. Align instrument line of sight and prism, where both flashing EGL lights can be
seen simultaneously.
3. OK to lock onto the prism.
4. If the instrument has locked onto the prism the EGL is turned off automatically.
)If the EGL was turned on in Instrument Lights, it has to be turned off by
unchecking the check box.
Viva Series, TPS Functions 522
25.6 Illumination
Description There are several different illumination types built into the instrument that all fulfil different
functions. Some are to support measurements, for example the visible red laser pointer.
Others, such as the screen illumination, are for more convenient work with the instrument.
These different types of illumination are described in this chapter.
Laser plummet The laser plummet allows setting up the instrument over a marked point. The laser beam is
emitted from the bottom of the instrument, pointing to the ground. When the instrument
is levelled and the laser beam points exactly at the ground point, the instrument is set up
correctly.
The laser plummet can be turned on and off. It is turned on automatically when opening the
Instrument\ TPS settings\ Level bubble & compensator screen and turned off when leaving
the screen.
Visible red laser pointer The visible red laser pointer is used to measure to any surface. The visible red laser pointer
is arranged coaxially with the line of sight of the telescope and emitted through the objec-
tive. If the instrument is correctly adjusted, the visible red laser beam coincides with the line
of sight.
)The direction of the beam should be inspected before precise distance measurements are
executed. An excessive deviation of the laser beam from the line of sight can cause inaccu-
rate results.
GUS74 Laser Guide The GUS74 Laser Guide is an option for TPS instruments. It is built into a special telescope
compartment and emits a visible red laser beam to visualise the line of sight over long
ranges. The GUS74 Laser Guide is used for special applications such as tunnelling. Refer to
GUS74 Laser Guide Manual for detailed information.
Viva Series, Calculator 523
26 Calculator
26.1 Accessing the Calculator
Description The calculator can be used to perform the following arithmetic operations such as
• addition, subtraction, multiplication and division
• statistics
• trigonometry, hyperbolic trigonometry and calculations with Pi
• polar, rectangular and angle conversions
• powers, logs, roots and exponential functions.
Operating modes The calculator has two operating modes - RPN mode and Standard mode.
The arithmetic operations available are identical, the difference lies in the way information
is entered, stored and displayed on the screen.
Access Press Calc in any screen when editing an editable field for numeric characters, such as
Azimuth in Traverse Input.
Type Description
RPN Reverse Polish Notation
This operating mode was developed as a way of writing mathematical
expressions without using parenthesis and brackets. Many scientific calcu-
lators, for example Hewlett Packard calculators, are implemented with this
operating mode. Values are entered and kept in a working stack.
Standard This operating mode is based on the principles of conventional pocket
calculators. There is no stacking of values.
Viva Series, Calculator 524
26.2 Configuring the Calculator
Access In RPN Calculator or Standard Calculator press Fn Config.. to access Calculator Configu-
ration.
Calculator Configuration
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Operatng Mode RPN The principle of, for example, Hewlett Packard calcu-
lators.
Standard The principle of conventional pocket calculators.
Angular unit The unit used for trigonometric functions in the
calculator. The selection here is independent from
the angle setting in Regional Settings, Angle.
DEG Degrees
Viva Series, Calculator 525
Next step
OK confirms the selections made and returns to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
RAD Radians
GRAD Gon
Display Dec From 0 to 10 deci-
mals The number of decimal places shown.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Calculator 526
26.3 Using the Calculator
26.3.1 RPN Mode
Requirements Operatng Mode: RPN in Calculator Configuration.
RPN Calculator
Description of fields
The function keys F1 -F6 are allocated
seven times. Refer to Description of
Softkeys.
Using the up and down keys the various
allocations can be accessed.
Field Option Description
First field on the
screen
Display only The unit used for trigonometric functions in the
calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration.
DEG Degrees
RAD Radians
GRAD Gon
OK
Viva Series, Calculator 527
Next step
Fn Quit returns to Main Menu.
ΣYDisplay only The result of the sum or difference of values in Y
using Σ+ and Σ-.
ΣXDisplay only The result of the sum or difference of values in X
using Σ+ and Σ-.
TDisplay only Third stack. After an operation, the value from Z is
written here.
ZDisplay only Second stack. After an operation, the value from Y is
written here.
YDisplay only First stack. After an operation, the value from X is
written here.
XEditable field The value for the next operation.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Calculator 528
26.3.2 Standard Mode
Requirements Operatng Mode: Standard in Calculator Configuration.
Standard Calculator
Description of fields
The function keys F1 -F6 are allocated
seven times. Refer to Description of
Softkeys.
Using the up and down keys the various
allocations can be accessed.
Field Option Description
First field on the
screen
Display only The unit used for trigonometric functions in the
calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration.
DEG Degrees
RAD Radians
GRAD Gon
ΣDisplay only The result of the sum or difference of values in the
last field on the screen using Σ+ and Σ-.
OK
Viva Series, Calculator 529
Next step
Fn Quit returns to Main Menu.
Third to sixth
field on the
screen
Display only Previously entered value
OR
Latest operation including result.
# indicates that the value is cut after the third
decimal.
Last field on the
screen
Editable field The value for next operation or result from latest
operation.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Calculator 530
26.3.3 Description of Softkeys
Overview of softkeys The softkeys shown and described are from Operatng Mode:RPN. Most of the softkeys are
identical and their functionality is similar to the softkeys from Operatng Mode:Standard.
Description of softkeys First level
The function keys F1 -F6 are allocated
seven times.
Using the up and down keys the various
allocations can be accessed.
OK
+
To add X and Y.
Viva Series, Calculator 531
Second level
Third level
-
To subtract X from Y.
*
To multiply X by Y.
*
To divide Y by X.
+/-
To change between positive and negative
algebraic sign for X.
Clr X (F6)
To clear X.
Σ+
To add X to ΣX and Y to ΣY.
Σ-
To subtract X from ΣX and Y from ΣY.
Mean
To calculate the mean ΣX.
SDev
To calculate the standard deviation for ΣX.
SDev
To clear ΣX and T.
Sin
To calculate sine of X.
Viva Series, Calculator 532
Fourth level
Cos
To calculate cosine of X.
Tan
To calculate tangent of X.
Asin
To calculate arcsine of X.
Acos
To calculate arccosine of X.
Atan
To calculate arctangent of X.
°DMS
To convert decimal degrees into dd.mm.ss.
°Dec
To convert dd.mm.ss into decimal degrees.
PI
To insert X: 3.1415926536. The number of
decimals depends on the selection for
Display Dec in Calculator Configuration.
D->R
To convert degrees into radians.
R->D
To convert radians into degrees.
Viva Series, Calculator 533
Fifth level
Sixth level
Polar
Conversion of rectangular coordinates into
polar coordinates. The y coordinate must be
visible in Y and the x coordinate in X when
pressing this key. The angle is displayed in Y
and the distance in X.
Rect
Conversion of polar coordinates into rectan-
gular coordinates. The angle must be visible
in Y and the distance in X when pressing
this key. The y coordinate is displayed in Y,
the x coordinate in X.
Sqrt
To calculate √X.
X^2
To calculate X2.
1/X
To inverse X:.
Y^X
To calculate YX.
Log
To calculate the log10X.
10^X
To calculate 10X.
LN
To calculate the logeX.
Viva Series, Calculator 534
Seventh level
Fn to access the second level of function keys
e^X
To calculate eX.
Y^X
To calculate YX.
Sto
To store X to the memory. Up to ten values
can be stored.
Rcl
To recall a value for X from the memory. Up
to ten values can be recalled.
X<>Y
To swap the values for X and Y.
Last X
To recall the last X before recent calcula-
tion.
Clear
To delete everything.
Fn Config..
To configure the calculator.
Fn Done
To return to Main Menu.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 535
27 NTRIP via Internet
27.1 Configuring Access to the Internet
)It is recommended to configure an Ntrip connection via the RTK Rover Wizard. Select Main
Menu\Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard and follow the on-screen instructions.
The remainder of this chapter describes each of the steps and screens when configuring
without the use of the RTK Rover Wizard.
)One Internet interface is available - the CS Internet.
Two Internet interfaces are available - the CS Internet and the GS Internet.
The CS Internet is used as an example. The explanations are also valid for the GS Internet.
)To access the Internet with a GPS or TPS instrument, General Packed Radio System devices
will normally be used. GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages
using the Internet Protocol (IP).
Select the internet
interface
Select Main Menu:Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connections.
On the CS connections page highlight CS Internet.
Press Edit...
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 536
Configure the Internet
interface
Configure the GSM
Dial-up Connection
1 Select a port (Connect using).
2 Select a device (Devce..).
3 If necessary enter User ID and Password.
Some providers ask for a User ID and a
Password to allow connecting to the
Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a
user ID and password needs to be used.
4OK to return to Connection Settings.
5 In Connection Settings press Cntrl...
Continue with the next paragraph.
1On the Dial-up details page, type in the APN
(Access Point Name of a server from the
network provider). Contact your provider to
get the correct APN.)
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 537
Check the status of the
Internet connection
2On the Sim codes page, type in the PIN
code for the Sim card.
If the PIN is locked for any reason, for
example the wrong PIN was entered, input
the Personal UnblocKing code for access to
the PIN.
3OK twice to return to the Main Menu.
The instrument is now online to the Internet.
The Internet online status icon is displayed.
But because GPRS is being used, no charges
are yet made since no data transfer from the
Internet has yet taken place.
1 Select Main Menu:Instrument\Instrument
status info\Connection status.
2On the CS connections page highlight CS
Internet.
3 Press Intfce.
4 Check the Internet online status.
5OK twice to return to the Main Menu.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 538
27.2 Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover
Select the internet
interface
Select Main Menu:Instrument\Instrument connections\All other connections.
On the GS connections page highlight RTK Rover.
Press Edit...
Settings for the RTK
rover
1On the General page, make sure that an
Internet port is selected for Connect using.
2On the RTK network page, enable Use RTK
network.
3 Press OK to return to Connection Settings,
GS connections page.
4 Press Cntrl.. to access Internet Port Connec-
tion. Continue with the next paragraph.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 539
Select the server to be
accessed in the
Internet
1The Server to use, must be Ntrip enabled. To
create a new server click into the selectable
list.
2 In New Server, General page, type in the IP
address and the port of the server through
which the data is provided. Each server has
several ports for various services.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 540
Select the Ntrip mount-
point
3 In New Server, NTRIP page, activate the use
of Ntrip.
4 Type in the NTRIP user ID and theNTRIP
password. A user ID and the password are
required to receive data from to the Ntrip
Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for
information.
5Store followed by OK to return to Internet
Port Connection.
1 If the selected server is Ntrip enabled, Ntrip
mountpoint is available.
2 Press Source to access NTRIP Source
Table.
Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 541
3 All mountpoints are listed. Mountpoints are
the Ntrip servers sending out real-time data.
This screen consists of two columns. The
first column shows the abbreviations for the
Mountpoints, the second the city where the
Mountpoint is located.
4 Highlight a mountpoint.
5 Press OK twice to return to Connection
Settings, GS connections page.
6Fn Conect and Fn Disco are now available in
all applications to connect to and disconnect
from the Ntrip server.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 542
28 MapView Interactive Display Feature
28.1 Overview
Description MapView is an interactive display feature embedded in the firmware but used by all applica-
tions as well as data management. MapView provides a graphical display of the survey
elements which allows for a better overall understanding of how the data being used and
measured relates to each other.
Depending on the application and where in the application MapView is accessed from,
different functionality is available.
The displayed data in all modes of MapView can be shifted by using both the arrow keys and
the touchscreen.
Displayable data The data displayed in MapView is defined by the application through which it was accessed,
filters set in Sorts & Filters, and the selections made in Map View Configuration.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 543
28.2 Accessing MapView
Description The MapView interactive display feature is provided as a page within all applications and data
management. It is accessed through the application itself. Depending on the application and
from where in the application MapView is accessed, different MapView modes are available.
Access step-by-step Example for data management
Example for an application
Step Description
1. Select Main Menu:Jobs & Data\View & edit data.
2. Page until the Map page is active.
Step Description
1. Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection.
2. COGO Intersection
Choose a method and enter appropriate data.
3. Calc to access the results page.
4. Page until the Plot page is active.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 544
28.3 Configuring MapView
Description Allows options to be set which are used as default options within MapView. These settings
are stored within the working style and apply to all Map and Plot pages, regardless of how
MapView is accessed.
)Any changes made in Map View Configuration affect the appearance of MapView in all appli-
cations, not just the active application.
Access step-by-step Press Fn Config.. on any Map or Plot page.
Map View Configuration,
General page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Display toolbar Check box Determines if the toolbar of touch icons is displayed.
Refer to "28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar".
Show my path Check box Displays the path of the rover as a dashed line.
Centre to Target To centre the map on the target.
For Measure mode:Standard and Measure
mode:Single (fast), the map will centre onto the last
measured point.
For Measure mode:Continuous and Measure
mode:Long range (>4km), the map will centre onto
the current reflector position.
TPS instrument To centre the map on the instrument.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 545
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Datum view WGS 1984 or Local Determines the datum in which the points are
viewed.
)Depending on the configured coordinate
system being used, it is possible that some
data will not be displayed.
Reverse coor-
dinates Check box Available for Datum view:Local. To rotate the map
by 180°. The north arrow is not rotated and still
orientated towards the top of the screen.
Vertical exag-
geration of
alignment
maps
Editable field The exaggeration factor of the map. The value can be
between 0.1 and 50.
)This setting only has an affect in applications
where vertical alignments are displayed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 546
Map View Configuration,
Points page
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to return to
the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Symbol
To view all point symbols and their descrip-
tions.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Field Option Description
Display points Check box Determines if points are displayed in MapView.
Point ID Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if
the ID of a point is displayed.
Point code Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if
the code of a point is displayed.
Height of point Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if
the height of a point is displayed.
Quality of point Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if
the coordinate quality of a point is displayed.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 547
Displayable point information
Next step
Page changes to the Lines & areas page.
Map View Configuration,
Lines & areas page
Description of fields
Show pt info for
a maximum of
200 pts
Check box If checked, the point information as configured is
shown regardless of the number of points being
displayed.
If not checked, point information is not shown when
more than 200 points are displayed.
a) Point ID
b) Point code
c) Height of point
d) Quality of point
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Display lines Check box Determines if lines are displayed in MapView.
Line ID Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the
ID of a line is displayed.
Line code Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the
code of a line is displayed.
Display areas Check box Determines if areas are displayed in MapView.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 548
Displayable line/area information
A line is shown as example.
Next step
OK confirms the selections and returns to the previous screen.
Area ID Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the
ID of an area is displayed.
Area code Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the
code of an area is displayed.
a) Line ID
b) Line code
Field Option Description
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 549
28.4 MapView Components
28.4.1 Screen Area
Standard screen
Scale bar
North arrow
a) North arrow
b) Scale bar
c) Toolbar
SYS13_030
a
b
c
Symbol Description
Scale of the current screen. The minimum is 0.1 m. There is no maximum for
the zoom but the scale cannot display values greater than 99000 m. In this
case the value displayed will be >99000 m.
Symbol Description
North arrow. North is always orientated towards the top of the screen.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 550
Toolbar
Point with focus
Line/area with focus
Symbol Description
Touch icon toolbar. Refer to "28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar" for more
information about the functionality of the touch icons in the toolbar.
Symbol Description
The point that has the focus.
Symbol Description
The line/area that has the focus is bolder than other lines shown in blue for
the full and in orange for Lite version of SmartWorx Viva.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 551
Rover
Prism
Instrument
station
Symbol Description
Available in survey mode. Position of the rover. The rover path is shown as
dotted line.
Symbol Description
Measured position. The reflector path is shown as dotted line.
Symbol Description
Position of the instrument station.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 552
28.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar
Description Standard functionality is provided by softkeys, keys and a toolbar within MapView.
The softkeys are available regardless of the mode in which MapView was accessed and
always perform the same functions.
If Display toolbar is checked in Map View Configuration, General page, touch icons are
available in a toolbar. The toolbar is always located on the right side of the screen. Some of
the functions performed by the touch icons can also be replicated using a softkey or key in
the same mode as when the touch icon appears. The softkey/key equivalent of each touch
icon, if one exists, are indicated in the following table.
Overview of keys,
softkeys and touch
icons
The softkeys described in this table are standard on all MapView screens. For descriptions
of mode-specific softkeys, see appropriate chapters.
Touch icon Key or Softkey Description
- To scroll the MapView toolbar.
1 or Fn Refrsh in
some applications
The fit touch icon fits all displayable data, according
to filters and the map configuration, into the screen
area, using the largest possible scale.
2To zoom into the map.
)Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.
3To zoom out of the map.
)Pressing ESC stops the zooming process.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 553
- The windowing touch icon zooms to a specified area
window. An area window can be drawn by dragging
the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a
rectangular area or by tapping twice on the screen to
define diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular
area. This action causes the screen to zoom to the
selected area.
5To centre the selected point,the GPS rover, the TPS
target or TPS instrument.
-Available in survey mode. This touch icon
displays the current direction as dashed line. A loca-
tion on the Map page can then be tapped and the
instrument turns to this direction.
If Target aiming:Automatic the instrument does an
ATR search. If Target aiming:Lock the instrument
tries to lock on to a prism.
Fn Config.. To configure MapView. Refer to "28.3 Configuring
MapView".
Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and
off. Refer to "4.2 Creating a New Job" for information
on CAD files.
To import CAD files for background only maps. Refer
to "4.2 Creating a New Job".
Touch icon Key or Softkey Description
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 554
To switch the view. Available in some applications,
for example Reference Plane, Road or Rail.
-0To make the MapView do a complete redraw.
-Fn Filter.. To change the filter settings. Refer to "5.6 Point
Sorting and Filters".
Touch icon Key or Softkey Description
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 555
28.4.3 Point Symbols
Description When Display points is checked in Map View Configuration, Points page, points are
displayed, in all modes, according to their class. A list of the point types available, and their
description, is available.
Access Press Symbol in Map View Configuration, Points page.
Symbols
)Points of class None or points of class Ctrl/Meas with a height only component cannot be
displayed in MapView.
Symbol Description
3D control point is a point of class Ctrl with full coordinate triplet.
2D control point is a position only point of class Ctrl.
Adjusted point is a point of class Adj.
Base point is a point of class Ref.
Average point is a point of class Avge.
Measured point is a point of class Meas.
Single Point Position uploaded from LGO.
Navigated point is a point of class Nav.
Estimated point is a point of class Est.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 556
28.5 Selecting Points, Lines and Areas
Selecting a
point/line/area using
the touch screen step-
by-step
The instructions for selecting a point using the softkeys can be applied for lines and areas.
Step Description Display
1. Go to Data:, Map page.
)If no point field is highlighted on the previous page when
the Map page is accessed, then any point that is selected
will be assigned to the first point field on the previous
page, the second point to the second point field, etc.
If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is
accessed then the point selected will be assigned to that
field.
2. Tap on the point to be selected.
)When there are multiple points within the same area and
the precise selection is unclear, tapping on the point will
access Select Point.
3. Have multiple points been selected?
• If yes, continue with step 4.
• If no, continue with step 5.
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 557
Select a point/line/area
without touch screen
Without touch screen or when Use the touch screen is not checked in Screen & Audio
Settings, Screen page, points, lines and areas can only be selected using the selectable lists.
4. Select Point
Point ID The ID of the points within range of the point
selection.
Point code The code of the points within range of the
point selection.
Select the desired point.
)More to display information about the point code, the 3D
coordinate quality and class, the time the point was stored
and the date the point was stored.
5. OK returns to Data:, Map page with the focus on the
selected point.
6. A square is centred on the selected point and the point
parameter text is highlighted.
Step Description Display
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 558
28.6 Viewing Results
Description MapView can be used to view the results of an application. Results are shown in black, all
other information, that is displayable, is shown in grey.
Example of results
displayed in MapView Application Display Description
COGO Intersec-
tion, Double
bearing
Intersecting lines
with known bear-
ings from known
points
COGO line calcu-
lation, Segmen-
tation
Points defining the
line and those
points created on
the line
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 559
COGO Shift,
Rotate & Scale
Original points in
grey, calculated
COGO points in
black
COGO Area Divi-
sion
Points from the
area and the area
division are black,
other points are
grey
Reference Line,
Edit Reference
Line
Reference line or
arc with target
point as offset
from reference line
Application Display Description
Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 560
Reference
Plane, Edit
Reference Plane
A dashed rectangle
indicates the face
view of the plane.
Sets of Angles,
Calculating
Angles
Directions from
station to sets of
angle points
Setup Directions to
resection points.
Application Display Description
Viva Series, Applications - General 561
29 Applications - General
Description Applications are software packages supporting specific tasks. Available for both GPS and TPS
are:
•COGO
•Determine coord system
•Go to Work! TPS hidden point
•Reference plane
•Roads (Alignment Editor, Roads - Stakeout, Roads - As built check, Rail - Stakeout, Rail
- As built check, Tunnel - Stakeout , Tunnel - As built check )
•Setup
•Sets of Angles including monitoring
•Stake a DTM
•Stakeout
•Stake points & DTM
•Measure to ref line /Stake to ref line
•Survey, including auto point and for also hidden points
•Cross Section
•Setup
•Traverse
•Volume calculations
• Customised applications
•Start base over known point
Viva Series, Applications - General 562
•Start base over last setup
•Start base over any point
For an explanation of the applications refer to the relevant chapters.
Loadable and non-load-
able applications
Licence key Some loadable applications are protected. They are activated through a specific licence key,
which can either be typed in Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or
the first time the application is started. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on
how to type in or upload a licence key.
Customised applica-
tions
Customised applications can be developed locally using the GeoC++ development environ-
ment. Information on the GeoC++ development environment is available on request from
the Leica Geosystems representative.
Access to the Go to
Work! drop-down menu
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!.
OR
Press .
)The screens for each COGO.. calculation method can be accessed directly by pressing a
configured hot key or via the key. The currently active configuration set and job are
used.
Loadable applications: • Can be loaded onto the instrument.
• Can be deleted from the instrument.
Non-loadable application: • Are always available on the instrument.
• Survey is a non-loadable application. To get an
update for the application, the system software has
to be reloaded.
Viva Series, COGO 563
30 COGO
30.1 Overview
Description COGO is an application to perform coordinate geometry calculations such as
• coordinates of points.
• bearings between points.
• distances between points.
The calculations can be made from
• existing point data in the job, known distances or known azimuths.
• manually measured points.
• entered coordinates.
In contrast to hidden point measurements within the Survey application, COGO is more of a
calculation program than a measuring program.
)Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in COGO does not result in
the point being recomputed.
COGO calculation
methods
The COGO calculation methods are:
•Inverse
•Traverse
• Intersection
• Line and arc calculations
•Area division
• Shift, rotate & scale
Viva Series, COGO 564
Distances and azimuths
Coding of COGO points • Thematical coding is available in the results screen after the COGO calculation. Thematical
coding of COGO points is identical to coding manually measured points. Refer to "20
Coding" for information on coding.
• For the COGO calculation shift, rotate & scale, the codes from the original points are
taken over for the calculated COGO points.
Properties of COGO
points
The properties stored with COGO points are:
• Class: Either Meas or Ctrl depending on the COGO configuration.
• Sub class: COGO
•Source: Arc base pt, Arc centre pt, Arc offset pt, Arc segment pt, COGO Area Div, COGO
Shift/Rtn, COGO Traverse, Intsct (Brg Brg), Intsct (Brg Dst), Intsct (Dst Dst), Intsct (4
Pts), Line Base Pt, Line Offset Pt or Line Segmt Pt depending on the COGO calculation
method used
• Instrument source: GPS or TPS
Type of distances: The choices are
•Ground
•Grid
• Ellipsoidal
Type of azimuths: The azimuths are grid azimuths relative to the local grid.
Viva Series, COGO 565
30.2 Accessing COGO
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO and select a COGO calculation method.
COGO calculation
methods
Description of the COGO calculation methods
COGO calculation
methods
Description
Inverse To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate
differences between two known points (or one known point and
the current GPS position).
To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate
differences between a known point (or the current GPS position)
and a user-defined line.
To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate
differences between a known point (or the current GPS position)
and a user-defined arc.
For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or
position only points can be used.
Traverse To calculate the position of new points using
• the azimuth/bearing and the distance from a known point.
Offset optional.
• the angle and the distance from a known point. Offset
optional.
For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or
position only points can be used.
Viva Series, COGO 566
Intersection To calculate the position of an intersection point using
• bearings from two known points.
• a bearing and a distance from two known points.
• distances from two known points.
•four points.
• two TPS observation lines.
For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or
position only points can be used.
Line & arc calculations To calculate;
• the centre point of an arc.
• an offset point from a distance along, and offset from, an
arc.
• an offset point from a distance along, and offset from, a line.
• a base point on an arc of a known offset point.
• a base point on a line of a known offset point.
• new points along an arc by segmentation.
• new points along a line by segmentation.
Area division To divide an area by a
• defined line.
•percentage.
COGO calculation
methods
Description
Viva Series, COGO 567
• defined area size.
Shift, rotate & scale To calculate the coordinates of new points using shifts, rotation
and scale.
The values for the shift, rotation and/or scale can either be
entered manually or computed using selected matching points.
For these calculations, points with full coordinate triplets, posi-
tion only points or height only points can be used.
COGO calculation
methods
Description
Viva Series, COGO 568
30.3 Configuring COGO
Access Press Fn Config.. in the Input screen of any COGO calculation method.
Configuration,
General page
This screen consists of the General page, Points & Quality page, TPS specific page, Resid-
uals page and the Report sheet page. The explanations given for the softkeys given are valid
for all pages.
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Distance type The type of distances and offsets to be accepted as
input or displayed in the fields, and used in the calcu-
lation.
Viva Series, COGO 569
Grid Distances are calculated as the trigonometric
distance between the position of two points. The
distance field is Horiz distance.
Ground Distances are horizontal distances between two
points at the mean elevation parallel to the ellipsoid
of the active coordinate system. The distance field is
Horiz dist (ground).
Ellipsoid Distances are reduced to the ellipsoid. They are
calculated as the shortest distance between the two
points on the ellipsoid. A scale factor is applied. The
distance field is Horiz dist (ell).
)In the attached coordinate system, a projec-
tion, an ellipsoid and a transformation have to
be defined to calculate grid, ground and ellip-
soid coordinates.
Use offsets Yes or No Activates the use of offsets in the COGO calculations.
Editable fields for the offsets are available in the
Input screen of any COGO calculation method.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 570
Next step
Page changes to the Points & Quality page.
Configuration,
Points & Quality page
Description of fields
aEllipsoid
Known
P1 First known point
P2 Second known point
Unknown
d1 Ground distance
d2 Ellipsoid distance
d3 Grid distance
P1
a
d1
d2
d3
P2
SYS13_001
Field Option Description
Store
computed
COGO points
with class
Measured (Meas)
or Control (Ctrl) Defines the point class of COGO calculated and
stored points as Measured (Meas) or Control (Ctrl)
triplets.
Position quality
for computed
COGO point
Editable field The estimated value for the position quality assigned
to all calculated COGO points which is used for the
averaging calculation.
Viva Series, COGO 571
Next step
Page changes to the TPS specific page.
Configuration,
TPS specific page
Description of fields
Height quality
for computed
COGO point
Editable field The estimated value for the height quality assigned
to all calculated heights which is used for the aver-
aging calculation.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Measure in two
faces Defines if the instrument measures the second face
automatically after storing the first.
Yes After storing a measurement with Meas or Store
motorised instruments change face automatically,
non-motorised instruments access Telescope Posi-
tioning. The measurements of face I and face II are
averaged on the base of face I. The averaged value is
stored.
No No automatic measurement in two faces.
TPS observa-
tion Compute
height
Defines the height being used within TPS observa-
tions.
Using average Using an average of the two observations.
Use upper height Using the upper height.
Use lower height Using the lower height.
Viva Series, COGO 572
Next step
Page changes to the Residuals page.
Configuration,
Residuals page
This page applies to Shift, Rotate & Scale (Match Pts).
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Easting Editable field The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged as
possible outliers.
Northing Editable field The limit above which Northing residuals will be flagged as
possible outliers.
Elevation Editable field The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged as
possible outliers.
Residual
Distbtn The method by which the residuals of the control points
will be distributed throughout the transformation area.
None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their asso-
ciated points.
1/distance,
1/distance²
or
1/distance³/²
Distributes the residuals according to the distance
between each control point and the newly transformed
point.
Multiquad-
ratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpola-
tion approach.
Viva Series, COGO 573
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Viva Series, COGO 574
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
)Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term should also always be considered to
mean Bearing.
Viva Series, COGO 575
30.4 COGO Calculation - Inverse Method
30.4.1 Selecting the Inverse Method
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Inverse.
COGO Inverse
OK
To select a method and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
Viva Series, COGO 576
Description of the Inverse methods
Inverse methods Description
Point to point The direction, the distance and the coordinate differences
between the two known points can be calculated depending on
the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position
only points and height only points can be used.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of two points.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Point to current pos The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the
current rover position and a known point can be calculated
depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate
triplets, position only points and height only points can be used.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of one point.
The coordinates of the known point
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Viva Series, COGO 577
Current pos to line The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the
current position and a given line can be calculated depending on
the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position
only points and height only points can be used.
Sufficient information must be known to define a line.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Point to line The direction, distance and coordinate differences between a
known point and a given line can be calculated depending on the
data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only
points and height only points can be used.
Sufficient information to define a line and the coordinates of
one point must be known.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Inverse methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 578
Point to arc The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the
current position and a given arc can be calculated depending on
the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position
only points and height only points can be used.
Sufficient information to define an arc and the coordinates of
one point must be known.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Current pos to arc The direction, distance and coordinate differences between a
known point and a given arc can be calculated depending on the
data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only
points and height only points can be used.
Sufficient information must be known to define an arc.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Inverse methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 579
30.4.2 Point to Point and Current Position to Point
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point/current position
P1 Second known point
Unknown
αDirection from P0 to P1
d1 Slope distance between P0 and P1
d2 Horizontal distance between P0 and P1
d3 Height difference between P0 and P1
GS_001 P0
P1
d
Viva Series, COGO 580
Inverse Point to
Point/Inverse Point to
Current Pos,
Inverse page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example Δ height cannot be calculated if a
position only point is used.
Description of fields
Store
To store the result.
Revers
To swap the From and To points around.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available when From or To is
highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
From Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO
calculation.
Current position Available for Inverse method: Point to current pos.
Viva Series, COGO 581
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. The calculated distance between the two known points is
indicated.
To Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO
calculation.
Current position Available for Inverse method: Point to current pos.
Azimuth Display only The direction from the first to the second known
point.
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Display only The horizontal distance between the two known
points.
Δ height Display only The height difference between the two known
points.
Slope distance Display only The slope distance between the two known points.
Grade Display only The grade between the two known points.
Δ easting Display only The difference in Easting between the two known
points.
Δ northing Display only The difference in Northing between the two known
points.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 582
30.4.3 Point to Line and Current Position to Line
Diagram
Known
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Offset point
Unknown
P3 Base point
d1 Offset distance
d2 ΔLine distance
P0
P1
P2
d2
d1
P3
GS_003
Viva Series, COGO 583
Inverse Point to
Line/Inverse Current Pos
to Line,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example Δ height cannot be calculated if a
position only point is used.
Calc
To calculate COGO point.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able if Azimuth or Horiz distance is high-
lighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse
calculations. Available if Azimuth or Horiz
distance is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available if Start point, End
point or Offset point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Avail-
able if Azimuth or Horiz distance is high-
lighted.
Viva Series, COGO 584
Description of fields
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Offset point Selectable list Available for Inverse to: Known Point. The offset
point.
Current position Available for Inverse method: Current pos to line.
Create line
using The method by which the line will be defined.
2 points Uses two known points to define the line.
Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance and
an azimuth of the line.
Start point Selectable list The start point of the line.
End point Selectable list Available for Method: 2 points. The end point of the
line.
Azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The azimuth
of the line.
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Editable field Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The hori-
zontal distance from the start point to the end point
of the line.
Viva Series, COGO 585
Next step
Calc calculates and accesses Inverse Result.
Inverse Result,
Result page
Description of fields
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height.
Field Option Description
Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point or Current position.
Distance along
line Display only Horizontal distance from start point to base point.
Offset Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line.
Bearing to offset
pt Display only Bearing from base point to offset point.
Line length Display only Length of line from start point to end point.
Viva Series, COGO 586
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Line bearing Display only Bearing of line from start point to end point.
Easting and
Northing Display only The calculated coordinates.
Elevation Display only The height of the calculated point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 587
30.4.4 Point to Arc and Current Position to Arc
Diagram
Known
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Offset point
Unknown
P3 Base point
d1 Offset-XX
d2 ΔArcDist-XX
P0
P1
P3
d2
d1
P2
GS_004
Viva Series, COGO 588
Inverse Point to
Arc/Inverse Current Pos
to Arc,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example Δ height cannot be calculated if a
position only point is used.
Calc
To calculate COGO point.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is
highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse
calculations. Available if Radius, Arc length
or Chord length is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available if Start point, Second
point, End point, Offset point or PI point is
highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Viva Series, COGO 589
Description of fields
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Avail-
able if Radius, Arc length or Chord length
is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Offset point Selectable list Available for Point to arc:Point to line. The offset
point.
Current position Available for Inverse method:Current pos to arc.
Create arc
using The method by which the arc will be defined.
3 points Uses three known points to define the arc.
2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a radius
of the arc.
2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius of
the arc.
2 tngnts & arc
lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the length of
the arc.
2 tngnts & crd
lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord of
the arc.
Start point Selectable list The start point of the arc. Available for Method:3
points and Method:2 points & radius.
Viva Series, COGO 590
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Inverse Result.
Second point Selectable list The second point of the arc. Available for Method:3
points.
End point Selectable list The end point of the arc. Available for Method:3
points and Method:2 points & radius.
Point 1 Selectable list A point on the first tangent. Available for Method:2
tngnts & radius, Method:2 tngnts & arc lngth and
Method:2 tngnts & crd lngth.
PI point Selectable list The point of intersection of the two tangents. Avail-
able for Method:2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts
& arc lngth and Method:2 tngnts & crd lngth.
Point 2 Selectable list A point on the second tangent. Available for
Method:2 tngnts & radius, Method:2 tngnts & arc
lngth and Method:2 tngnts & crd lngth.
Radius Editable field The radius of the arc. Available for Method:2 points
& radius and Method:2 tngnts & radius.
Arc length Editable field The length of the arc. Available for Method:2 tngnts
& arc lngth.
Chord length Editable field The length of the chord. Available for Method:2
tngnts & crd lngth.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 591
Inverse Result,
Result page
Description of fields
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height.
Field Option Description
Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point for Inverse to: Known Point
or current position.
Distance along arc Display only Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to
base point.
Offset Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line.
Bearing to offset
pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset
point.
Arc radius Display only Computed radius of arc.
Arc length Display only Computed length of arc.
Viva Series, COGO 592
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Easting and
Northing Display only The calculated coordinates.
Elevation Display only The height of the calculated point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 593
30.5 COGO Calculation - Traverse Method
Description Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of one point.
• the direction from the known point to the COGO point.
• the distance from the known point to the COGO point.
• offsets, if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known point
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
•can be entered.
The direction from the known point to the COGO point can be an azimuth or an angle.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only is
calculated, height can be typed in.
A COGO traverse calculation can be calculated for
•a single point.
• multiple points. Several single points are calculated in one sequence.
•sideshots.
Viva Series, COGO 594
Diagram COGO traverse calculation with offset for a single point
Known
P0 Known point
αDirection from P0 to P1
d1 Distance between P0 and P1
d2 Positive offset to the right
d3 Negative offset to the left
Unknown
P1 COGO point without offset
P2 COGO point with positive offset
P3 COGO point with negative offset
d1
d2
d3
P2
P1
P0
P3
GS_005
Viva Series, COGO 595
COGO traverse calculation without offset for multiple points
Known
P0 Known point
α1 Direction from P0 to P1
α2 Direction from P1 to P2
α3 Direction from P2 to P3
α4 Direction from P2 to P4
d1 Distance between P0 and P1
d2 Distance between P1 and P2
d3 Distance between P2 and P3
d4 Distance between P2 and P4
Unknown
P1 First COGO point
P2 Second COGO point
P3 Third COGO point - sideshot
P4 Fourth COGO point
P0
P1
P2
P4
P3
d1
d2
d4
d3
GS_002
Viva Series, COGO 596
Traverse Input,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset
or Angle right is highlighted.
SShot
To calculate the point as a sideshot.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse
calculations. Available when Azimuth, Horiz
distance, Offset or Angle right is high-
lighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available when From or Back-
sight is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, COGO 597
Description of fields
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values.
Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance,
Offset or Angle right is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Method Azimuth The direction from the known point to the COGO
point is an azimuth.
Angle right The direction from the known point to the COGO
point is an angle.
From Selectable list The point ID of the known point for the COGO calcu-
lation.
Backsight Selectable list The point ID of a point used as backsight. Available
for Angle right.
Angle right Editable field The angle between Backsight and the new COGO
point to be calculated from the point selected as
From: A positive value is for clockwise angles. A
negative value is for anticlockwise angles. Available
for Angle right.
Azimuth Editable field The direction from the known point to the COGO
point.
Viva Series, COGO 598
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Traverse Results.
Traverse Results,
Result page
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Editable field The horizontal distance between the known point
and the COGO point.
Offset Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direc-
tion. A positive offset is to the right, a negative
offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in
Configuration, General page.
Field Option Description
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and
stake out the calculated COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height. Available for local coor-
dinates.
Viva Series, COGO 599
Description of fields
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, an arrow points from the known point to the calculated COGO point.
Store stores the result.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the
ID template. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit
COGO calculations.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for the currently active
instrument type in ID Templates. The point ID can be
changed.
Easting and
Northing Display only The calculated coordinates.
Elevation Editable field The height of the known point used in the COGO
calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored
with the calculated point can be typed in.
Viva Series, COGO 600
30.6 COGO Calculation - Intersection Method
30.6.1 Selecting the Intersection Method
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection.
COGO Intersection
OK
To select a method and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
Viva Series, COGO 601
Description of the Intersection methods
Intersection methods Description
Double bearing Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by
a point and a direction.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of two points.
• the direction from these known points to the COGO point.
• offsets if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can
be used. Position only is calculated, height can be typed in.
Viva Series, COGO 602
Double distance Calculates the intersection point of two circles. The circles are
defined by the known point as the centre point and the distance
from the known point to the COGO point as the radius.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of two points.
• the distance from the known points to the COGO point.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can
be used.
Intersection methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 603
Bearing & distance Calculates the intersection point of a line and a circle. The line is
defined by a point and a direction. The circle is defined by the
centre point and the radius.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of points.
• the direction from one known point to the COGO point.
• the distance from the second known point to the COGO
point.
• offsets if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can
be used.
Intersection methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 604
By points Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by
two points.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of four points.
• offsets of the lines if necessary and configured.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be manually measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can
be used.
Intersection methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 605
TPS observations Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by
a TPS station and a TPS measurement from this station.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of two points.
• azimuths of the lines.
The coordinates of the known points
• must be taken from the working job.
• must be TPS station points.
The azimuths of the lines
• must be TPS measurements from the known points.
Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can
be used.
Intersection methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 606
30.6.2 Intersection with Double Bearing
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
α1 Direction from P0 to P2
α2 Direction from P1 to P2
Unknown
P2 COGO point
P0
P1
P2
GS_006
Viva Series, COGO 607
Intersection Double
Bearing,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse
calculations. Available when Azimuth or
Offset is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd
point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Viva Series, COGO 608
Description of fields
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values.
Available when Azimuth or Offset is high-
lighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO
calculation.
2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO
calculation.
Azimuth Editable field The direction from the first known point to the COGO
point.
Offset Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direc-
tion. A positive offset is to the right, a negative
offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in
Configuration, General page.
Viva Series, COGO 609
Intersection Result,
Result page
Description of fields
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and
stake out the calculated COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height. Available for local coor-
dinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the
ID template. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit
COGO calculations.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for Auxiliary points in
ID Templates. The point ID can be changed.
Easting and
Northing Display only The calculated coordinates.
Viva Series, COGO 610
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, arrows point from the known points to the calculated COGO point.
Store stores the result.
Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calcu-
lation is suggested. A height value to be stored with
the calculated point can be typed in.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 611
30.6.3 Intersection with Double Distance
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
r1 Radius, as defined by the distance from P0
to P2
r2 Radius, as defined by the distance from P1
to P2
Unknown
P2 First COGO point
P3 Second COGO point
r1
r2
P0
P1
P3
P2
GS_008
Viva Series, COGO 612
Intersection Double
Distance,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able when Horiz distance is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse
calculations. Available when Horiz distance
is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd
point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Viva Series, COGO 613
Description of fields
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values.
Available when Horiz distance is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO
calculation.
2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO
calculation.
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Editable field The horizontal distance between the known points
and the COGO point.
Viva Series, COGO 614
Intersection Result,
Result 1/Result 2 page
Description of fields
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Result1 or Result2
To view the first and second result.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and
stake out the calculated COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height. Available for local coor-
dinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the
ID template. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit
COGO calculations.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID
Templates. The point ID can be changed.
Viva Series, COGO 615
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, the calculated COGO points are shown.
Store stores the result.
Easting and
Northing Display only The calculated coordinates.
Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calcu-
lation is suggested. A height value to be stored with
the calculated point can be typed in.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 616
30.6.4 Intersection with Bearing - Distance
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
αDirection from P0 to P2
r Radius, as defined by the distance from P1
to P2
Unknown
P2 First COGO point
P3 Second COGO point
r
P0
P1
P2
P3
GS_007
Viva Series, COGO 617
Intersection Bearing &
Dist,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset
is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse
calculations. Available when Azimuth, Horiz
distance or Offset is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd
point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Viva Series, COGO 618
Description of fields
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values.
Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or
Offset is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO
calculation.
2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO
calculation.
Azimuth Editable field The direction from the first known point to the COGO
point.
Offset Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direc-
tion. A positive offset is to the right, a negative
offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in
Configuration, General page.
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Editable field The horizontal distance between the known point
and the COGO point.
Viva Series, COGO 619
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Intersection Result,
Result 1 page Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Result1 or Result2
To view the first and second result.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and
stake out the calculated COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height. Available for local coor-
dinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the
ID template. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit
COGO calculations.
Viva Series, COGO 620
Description of fields
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, an arrow points from the first known points to the calculated COGO point.
Store stores the result.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID
Templates. The point ID can be changed.
Easting and
Northing Display only The calculated coordinates.
Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calcu-
lation is suggested. A height value to be stored with
the calculated point can be typed in.
Viva Series, COGO 621
30.6.5 Intersection with By Points
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
P2 Third known point
P3 Fourth known point
a Line from P0 to P1
b Line from P2 to P3
Unknown
P4 COGO point
a
b
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
GS_009
Viva Series, COGO 622
Intersection By Points,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
Calc
To calculate the result.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able when Offset is highlighted.
Last..
To recall previous results from COGO inverse
calculations. Available when Offset is high-
lighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available when 1st point, 2nd
point, 3rd point or 4th point is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Viva Series, COGO 623
Description of fields
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
Fn Modif..
To add, subtract, multiply and divide values.
Available when Offset is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
1st point Selectable list The point ID of the known start point of the first line
for the COGO calculation.
2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the known end point of the first line
for the COGO calculation.
3rd point Selectable list The point ID of the known start point of the second
line for the COGO calculation.
4th point Selectable list The point ID of the known end point of the second
line for the COGO calculation.
Offset Editable field The offset of the line in the direction 1st point to 2nd
point or 3rd point to 4th point. A positive offset is to
the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for
Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page.
Viva Series, COGO 624
Intersection Result,
Result page
Description of fields
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and
stake out the calculated COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height. Available for local coor-
dinates.
Fn IndivID
For an individual point ID independent of the
ID template. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Fn Quit
To not store the COGO point and to exit
COGO calculations.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID
Templates. The point ID can be changed.
Easting and
Northing Display only The calculated coordinates.
Viva Series, COGO 625
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, two solid lines are displayed.
Store stores the result.
Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calcu-
lation is suggested. A height value to be stored with
the calculated point can be typed in.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 626
30.6.6 Intersection with TPS Observation - TPS Observation
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point (TPS station)
P1 Second known point (TPS station)
α1 Direction from P0 to P2
α2 Direction from P1 to P2
Unknown
P2 COGO point
TS_001
P1
P2
P0 2
1
Viva Series, COGO 627
Intersection TPS Obs,
Input page
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select
the desired point.
To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new
point.
Description of fields
Calc
To calculate the result.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available when 1st TPS station
or 2nd TPS station is highlighted and the
selected station is the active TPS setup.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
1st TPS station Selectable list The point ID of the first TPS station which is the
known start point of the first line for the COGO calcu-
lation.
Viva Series, COGO 628
Next step
Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result.
TPS intersec-
tion observa-
tions
Selectable list The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the
known end point of the first line for the COGO calcu-
lation.
Azimuth Display only The azimuth related to the known end point of the
first/second line for the COGO calculation.
2nd TPS station Selectable list The point ID of the second TPS station which is the
known start point of the second line for the COGO
calculation.
TPS intersec-
tion observa-
tions
Selectable list The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the
known end point of the second line for the COGO
calculation.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 629
30.7 COGO Calculation - Line/Arc Calculations Method
30.7.1 Selecting the Line/Arc Method
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Line & arc calculations.
COGO Line/Arc Calcula-
tions
OK
To select a method and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
Viva Series, COGO 630
Description of the Line/Arc methods
Line/Arc Methods Description
Calculate arc centre Calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of three points
OR
• coordinates of two points
• radius to the two points
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Viva Series, COGO 631
Calculate arc offset pt Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of arc and
offset values in relation to an arc.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of three points.
• offsets.
OR
• coordinates of two points.
• radius to the two points.
• offsets.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Line/Arc Methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 632
Calculate line offset pt Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of station
and offset values in relation to a line.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of two points.
• offsets.
OR
• coordinates of one point.
• bearing and distance from one point.
• offsets.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Line/Arc Methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 633
Calculate arc base pt Calculates the coordinates of the base point, station and offset
of a point in relation to an arc.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of three points
• coordinates of an offset point
OR
• coordinates of two points
• radius to the two points
• coordinates of an offset point
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Line/Arc Methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 634
Calculate line base pt Calculates the base point, station and offset of a point in rela-
tion to a line.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of two points and an offset point.
OR
• coordinates of one point and an offset point
• bearing and distance from one point
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Segment an arc This method is similar to Segment a line. See the following row.
Line/Arc Methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 635
Segment a line Calculates the coordinates of new points on a line.
Elements that must be known are
• coordinates of the start and the end point of the line
OR
• a bearing and distance from a known point that define the
line
AND EITHER
• the number of segments dividing the line
OR
• a segment length for the line.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
• can be entered.
Line/Arc Methods Description
Viva Series, COGO 636
30.7.2 Arc Calculation
Diagram for arc centre
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Arc centre
d1 Arc radius
d2 Arc length
d1
d2
P0 P2
P1
GS_010
Viva Series, COGO 637
Diagram for arc base
point and offset point
Create Arc,
Input page
The softkeys are similar to line calculation. Refer to "30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and
Calculate Line Base Point" for information on softkeys.
Description of fields
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Offset point
P3 Base point
d1 Offset
d2 Distance along arc
P0
P1
P3
d2
d1
P2
GS_004
Field Option Description
Create arc
using The method by which the arc will be defined.
3 points Uses three known points to define the arc.
2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a radius
of the arc.
Viva Series, COGO 638
2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius of
the arc.
2 tngnts & arc
lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the length of
the arc.
2 tngnts & crd
lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord of
the arc.
Start point Selectable list The start point of the arc. Available for Create arc
using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points &
radius.
Second point Selectable list The second point of the arc. Available for Create arc
using: 3 points.
End point Selectable list The end point of the arc. Available for Create arc
using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points &
radius.
Point 1 Selectable list A point on the first tangent. Available for Create arc
using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2 tngnts
& arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd
lngth.
PI point Selectable list The point of intersection of the two tangents. Avail-
able for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create
arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using:
2 tngnts & crd lngth
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 639
Next step
Point 2 Selectable list A point on the second tangent. Available for Create
arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2
tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts &
crd lngth.
Radius Editable field The radius of the arc. Available for Create arc using:
2 points & radius and Create arc using: 2 tngnts &
radius.
Arc length Editable field The length of the arc. Available for Create arc using:
2 tngnts & arc lngth.
Chord length Editable field The length of the chord. Available for Create arc
using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth.
IF THEN
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc centre Calc accesses Centre of Arc Result.
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc offset
pt
OK accesses Calculations Input.
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc base pt OK accesses Calculations Input.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 640
Calculations Input,
Input page
Description of fields
Next step
Centre of Arc
Result/Line/Arc Calcula-
tion Result,
Result page
The result screens for base point and offset point are similar.
Refer to paragraph " Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page" for information on softkeys.
Field Option Description
Distance along
arc Editable field Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to
base point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate
arc offset pt.
Offset, Offset
(ground) or
Offset (ell)
Editable field Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the arc. Available
for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt.
Offset point Selectable list Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc
method: Calculate arc base pt.
IF THEN
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc offset
pt
Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result.
Line/arc method:
Calculate arc base pt Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result.
Viva Series, COGO 641
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID
Templates.
Elevation or
Local ellipsoid
ht
Editable field The height of the start point of the arc is suggested.
A height value to be stored with the calculated point
can be typed in.
Arc radius Display only Computed radius of arc.
Arc length Display only Computed length of arc.
Bearing to
offset pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset
point. Available for Line/arc method:Calculate arc
offset pt.
Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc
method:Calculate arc base pt.
Distance along
arc, Distance
along arc (grnd)
or Distance
along arc (ell)
Display only Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to
base point. Available for Line/arc method:Calculate
arc offset pt.
Offset, Offset
(ground) or
Offset (ell)
Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line. Available
for Line/arc method:Calculate arc offset pt.
Viva Series, COGO 642
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, the arc and the new point is shown.
Store stores the result
Viva Series, COGO 643
30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point
Diagram
)Line management is not available for COGO line calculations.
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Offset point
P3 Base point
d1 Offset-XX:
d2 ΔLine-XX:
P0
P1
P2
d2
d1
P3
GS_003
Viva Series, COGO 644
Create Line,
Input page
OK
To change to the second layer of editable
fields.
Inv..
To calculate the values for the distance and
the offset from two existing points. Avail-
able if Azimuth or Horiz distance is high-
lighted.
Last..
To select the values for the distance and the
offset from previous COGO inverse calcula-
tions. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance
is highlighted.
Survy..
To measure a point manually for the COGO
calculation. Available if Start point or End
point is highlighted.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Avail-
able if, Azimuth or Horiz distance is high-
lighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Viva Series, COGO 645
Description of fields
Next step
OK accesses Calculations Input.
Field Option Description
Create line
using The method by which the line will be defined.
2 points Uses two known points to define the line.
Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance and
an azimuth of the line.
Start point Selectable list The start point of the line.
End point Selectable list The end point of the line. Available for Create line
using: 2 points.
Azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the line. Available for Create line
using: Pt, bearing & dist.
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Editable field The horizontal distance from the start point to the
end point of the line. Available for Create line using:
Pt, bearing & dist.
Viva Series, COGO 646
Calculations Input,
Input page
Description of fields
Next step
Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result.
Field Option Description
Distance along
line, Distance
along line
(ground) or
Distance along
line (ell)
Editable field Available for Line/arc method:Calculate line offset
pt. Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line.
Offset, Offset
(ground) or
Offset (ell)
Editable field Available for Line/arc method:Calculate line offset
pt. Horizontal distance from start point to base point.
Offset point Selectable list Available for Line/arc method:Calculate line base pt.
The offset point.
Viva Series, COGO 647
Line/Arc Calculation
Result,
Result page
The result screens for base point and offset point are similar. The explanations given for the
softkeys are valid for the Result page.
Description of fields
Store
To store the result.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and
stake out the calculated COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height.
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the
point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID
Templates.
Viva Series, COGO 648
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Plot page, the line and the new point is shown.
Store stores the result.
Elevation or
Local ellipsoid
ht
Editable field The height of the start point of the line is suggested.
A height value to be stored with the calculated point
can be typed in.
Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc
method: Calculate line base pt.
Distance along
line, Distance
along line
(ground) or
Distance along
line (ell)
Display only Horizontal distance from start point to base point.
Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt.
Offset, Offset
(ground) or
Offset (ell)
Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to
the right and negative to the left of the line. Available
for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt.
Line length Display only Length of line from start point to end point.
Line bearing Display only Bearing of line from start point to end point.
Bearing to
offset pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset
point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 649
30.7.4 Segment an Arc
Exceptions to line
calculation segmenta-
tion
The arc segmentation and the functionality of all screens and fields are similar to those for
line segmentation. Refer to "30.7.5 Segment a Line"
New field and option in Define Arc Segmentation
Field Option Description
Method Delta angle To divide the arc by an angular value.
Delta angle Editable field The angular value by which new points will be defined
on the arc.
Viva Series, COGO 650
30.7.5 Segment a Line
Diagram
)For a description of the Create Line, Input page, refer to "30.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point
and Calculate Line Base Point".
Define Line Segmenta-
tion Description of fields
Line divided by Method: No. of segments
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d Equally spaced segments result from
dividing a line by a certain number of
points.
Line divided by Method Segment length
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 Segment length
d2 Remaining segment
dddd
P0 P1
SYS13_002
d1 d1 d1 d2
P0 P1
SYS13_003
Field Option Description
Method Selectable list How the line is to be divided. Depending on the
selection, the following fields are editable or display
only fields.
Line length Display only Calculated line length between the selected Start
point and End point.
Viva Series, COGO 651
Next step
Calc calculates the coordinates of the new points. The heights are computed along the line
assuming a linear slope between Start point and End point.
On the Plot page, the known points defining the line and those points created on the line
are shown.
No. of
segments Editable field or
display only
For Method: No. of segments type in the number of
segments for the line. For Method: Segment length
this field indicates the calculated number of
segments. This method can result in a remaining
segment.
Segment length Editable field or
display only
For Method: No. of segments this field is the calcu-
lated length of each segment. For Method: Segment
length type in the required segment length.
Last segment Display only Available for Method: Segment length. The length of
the remaining segment.
Starting pt ID Editable field The point ID to be assigned to the first new point on
the line. The selected point ID templates from ID
Templates are not applied.
Pt ID increment Editable field Is incremented numerically for the second, third, etc.
point on the line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 652
30.8 COGO Calculation - Area Division
30.8.1 Selecting the Division Method
Description The COGO calculation area division divides an area by a defined line, by percentage or by the
size of a subarea.
Elements that must be known for the calculation depend on the area division method. At
least three points are required to form an area.
The coordinates of the known points
• can be taken from the working job.
• can be measured during the COGO calculation.
•can be entered.
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Area division.
COGO Area Division
OK
To select a method and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
Viva Series, COGO 653
Description of the Area Division methods
Area Division method Description
Parallel line (%) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The
division is calculated using a defined percentage split.
Parallel line (area) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The
division is calculated using a defined area size.
Parallel line (line) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The
division is calculated by defining the position of the dividing
line.
Perpendic line (%) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points.
The division is calculated using a defined percentage split.
Perpendic line (area) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points.
The division is calculated using a defined area size.
Perpendic line (line) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points.
The division is calculated by defining the position of the dividing
line.
Swing line (%) The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by an
azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined percentage
split.
Swing line (area) The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by an
azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined area size.
Viva Series, COGO 654
Elements required
Divide by Using Elements required
Line Parallel line Through a point • Two points defining the line
• One point on the dividing line
By a distance • Two points defining the line
•Distance
Perpendicular line Through a point • Two points defining the line
• One point on the dividing line
By a distance • Two points defining the line
•Distance
Percentage Parallel line - • Percentage size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Perpendicular line - • Percentage size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Swing line Rotation point • Percentage size of new area
• Rotation point of the swing line
Area Parallel line - • Size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Perpendicular line - • Size of new area
• Two points defining the line
Swing line Rotation point • Size of new area
• Rotation point of the swing line
Viva Series, COGO 655
Diagram The diagrams show the area division methods. Some diagrams apply to several area division
methods.
Area division method Using Divide Shift
1. Parallel Line By Defined Line By Distance
2. Parallel Line By Percentage -
3. Parallel Line By Area -
P0 Point A of defined line
P1 Point B of defined line
P2 First new COGO point
P3 Second new COGO point
dHoriz distance
aArea left of line
GS_011
d
a
P1
P2
P0
P3
Viva Series, COGO 656
Area division method Using Divide Shift
1. Perpendic Line By Defined Line By Distance
2. Perpendic Line By Percentage -
3. Perpendic Line By Area -
P0 Point A of defined line
P1 Point B of defined line
P2 First new COGO point
P3 Second new COGO point
dHoriz distance
aArea left of line
GS_012
d
P1
P2
P0
P3
a
Viva Series, COGO 657
Area division method Using Divide Shift
1. Parallel Line By Defined Line Through Point
P0 Point A of defined line
P1 Point B of defined line
P2 Through point; in this case it is a known
point of the existing border
P3 New COGO point
dHoriz distance
GS_013
dP1
P2
P0
P3
Viva Series, COGO 658
Area division method Using Divide Shift
1. Perpendic Line By Defined Line Through Point
P0 Point A of defined line
P1 Point B of defined line
P2 Through point; in this case it is a known
point of the existing border
P3 New COGO point
dHoriz distance
GS_014
d
P1
P2
P0
P3
Viva Series, COGO 659
Area division method Using Divide Shift
1. Swing Line By Percentage -
2. Swing Line By Area -
P0 First new COGO point
P1 Second new COGO point
P2 Rotation point
αAzimuth
aArea left of line
P2
P0
P1
a
SYS13_007
Viva Series, COGO 660
30.8.2 Choosing an Area to be Divided
Choose Area to be
Divided
Description of fields
OK
To accept the changes and access the
subsequent screen.
Field Option Description
Area to use The setting determines the availability of the subse-
quent fields and screen.
Select existing
area To use an area from the working job. The area can be
edited and a new area can be created from points
existing in the job.
Survey new area To survey points that do not exist in the job yet. The
points will be added to a new area.
Create new with
pts To create a new area by selecting points from the job.
Viva Series, COGO 661
Next step
Area ID Selectable list For Area to use: Select existing area. To select the
area to be divided.
Editable field For Area to use: Survey new area and Area to use:
Create new with pts. To enter a name for the new
area.
No. of points Display only Number of points forming the area.
Area Display only The size of the selected area.
Perimeter Display only The perimeter of the area.
IF THEN
Area to use: Select
existing area OK accesses Define How to Divide Area. Refer to "30.8.3 Dividing
an Area".
Area to use: Survey
new area OK accesses Survey Job name. Refer to "44 Survey - General".
Area to use: Create
new with pts OK accesses Edit Area. Refer to "5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 662
30.8.3 Dividing an Area
Define How to Divide
Area,
Input page
After each change of parameters on this screen, the values in the display only fields are
recalculated and updated.
Calc
To perform the area division and to continue
with the subsequent screen. Calculated
COGO points are not yet stored.
Inv..
To calculate the value for the distance from
two existing points. Available if Horiz
distance is highlighted.
Size and %
To display the size and the percentage of
the subarea.
Last..
To select the value for the distance from
previous COGO inverse calculations. Avail-
able if Horiz distance is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available if Point A, Point B,
Rotation point or Through point is high-
lighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Viva Series, COGO 663
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Area left of line Editable field For dividing by percentage or area. The size of the sub
area must be typed either in % or in m2.
When dividing the area using a parallel or perpendicular
line, a reference line is defined by Point A and Point B.
The direction of the new dividing line is always the same
as the direction of the reference line. The direction of a
perpendicular line is the same as the reference line
rotated 90° anticlockwise. The sub area is always to the
left of the new dividing line.
When dividing an area using a swing line, the direction
of the new dividing line is defined by the Rotation point
and the Azimuth. The sub area is always to the left of
the new dividing line.
Display only For dividing by a line. The size of the sub area is calcu-
lated and displayed.
Point A Selectable list The first point of the line which is used as the reference
for a new parallel or perpendicular border.
Point B Selectable list The second point of the line which is used as the refer-
ence for a new parallel or perpendicular border.
Shift Available for dividing by a line.
By distance The new border will run in a certain distance from the
line defined by Point A and Point B.
Viva Series, COGO 664
Next step
Calc performs the area division and accesses Area Division Result.
Through point The new border will run through a point defined in
Through point.
Through point Selectable list Available for Shift: Through point. The point through
which the new border will run.
Rotation point Selectable list Available for using a swing line. The point around which
the new border will rotate by Azimuth.
Azimuth Display only Available for using a swing line. The angle of the new
border from Rotation point to the new COGO point.
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Display only The distance from the line defined by Point A and Point
B to the new border.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 665
30.8.4 Results of the Area Division
Area Division Result,
Result page
Description of fields
Next step
On the Plot page, the points defining the area and the calculated COGO points are shown
in black.
OK
To accept the calculation and to continue
with the subsequent screen. Calculated
COGO points are not yet stored.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Area ratio Display only The ratio of the size of the two sub areas in percent.
Area left of line Display only The size of the first sub area in m2.
Area right of
line Display only The size of the second sub area in m2.
Viva Series, COGO 666
OK accesses Area Divisions Results.
Area Divisions Results,
Result page
The coordinates of the intersection points of the new border with the original area are
displayed.
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
Store
To store the two results and to return to
Choose Area to be Divided once both points
are stored.
Coord
To view other coordinate types.
Result1 or Result2
To view the first and second result.
Stake..
To access the Stakeout application and
stake out the calculated COGO point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev
To change between the ellipsoidal and the
orthometric height.
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Viva Series, COGO 667
On the Plot page, The points defining the area and the points of the new border are shown
in black.
Store stores the results.
Viva Series, COGO 668
30.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale
30.9.1 Selecting the Shift, Rotate & Scale Method and the Points to be Moved
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Shift, rotate & scale.
COGO Shift, Rotate &
Scale
OK
To select a method and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
Viva Series, COGO 669
Description of the Shift, Rotate & Scale methods
Shift, Rotate & Scale
methods
Description
Manually entered Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several
known points. The values for shifts and/or rotation and/or scale
are typed in manually.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated and/or
scaled. They must be stored in the working job.
• the shift values. They can be defined as: the direction of
Easting, Northing and Height, or as an azimuth and a grid
distance, or as shift from one point to another.
• the rotation value. It can be defined by a point as rotation
centre plus a rotation or by an existing and new azimuth.
• the scale. It is only applied to the position, not to the height.
Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and
height only points can be used.
Viva Series, COGO 670
Next step
OK accesses Point Selection which is the same for Method:Manually entered and
Method:Matching points.
Matching points Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several
known points. The shifts and/or rotation and/or scale are calcu-
lated from selected points using a 2D Helmert transformation.
Elements that must be known are
• the coordinates of at least two matching points for the calcu-
lation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale.
• the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated and/or
scaled. They must be stored in the working job.
Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and
height only points can be used.
The number of pairs of points matched determines whether the
shift, rotation and scale values are computed. For only one
point, only shifts are calculated, rotation and scale are not.
Shift, Rotate & Scale
methods
Description
Viva Series, COGO 671
Point Selection Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling.
OK
To perform the shift, rotation and scale
calculation and to continue with the subse-
quent screen. Calculated COGO points are
not yet stored.
+ All..
To add all points from the working job to the
list. Selected sort and filter settings apply.
OK adds all displayed points to the list in
Point Selection and returns to that screen.
+ One..
To add one point from the working job to
the list. Selected sort and filter settings
apply. OK adds the currently highlighted
point to the list in Point Selection and
returns to that screen.
Remov
To remove the highlighted point from the
list. The point itself is not deleted.
More
To display information about the codes if
stored with any point, the time and the date
of when the point was stored and the 3D
coordinate quality and the class.
Fn Rem A
To remove all points from the list. The points
itself are not deleted.
Viva Series, COGO 672
Next step
Fn Range
To define a range of points from the working
job to be added to the list.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
IF AND THEN
all points are to be added - + All...
one point is to be added - + One...
a range of points is to be
added
-Fn Range accesses Select
points by range.
all points are added Method:Manually entered OK accesses Parameters. Refer
to "30.9.2 Manually Entered".
Method:Matching points OK accesses Match Points (%d).
Refer to "30.9.3 Matching
Points".
Viva Series, COGO 673
Select points by range
Description of fields
OK
To add the points within the selected range
to the list in Point Selection. Returns to the
screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Next
To add the points within the selected range
to the list in Point Selection without quitting
this screen. Another range of point IDs can
be selected.
Field Option Description
From pt ID and
To pt ID Editable field • Numeric point IDs in both fields:
Points with numeric point IDs falling within the
range are selected.
Example:
From pt ID: 1, To pt ID: 50
Selected are point IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10….
49, 50 as well as 001, 01, 0000045, ...
Not selected are point IDs 100,200,300, ...
Viva Series, COGO 674
Next step
Select a range of points.
OK returns to Point Selection.
• Alphanumeric point IDs in both fields:
The left most character of both entries is used as
the basis for the range. The standard ASCII
numerical range is used. Points with alphanumeric
point IDs falling within the range are selected.
Example:
From pt ID: a9, To pt ID: c200
Selected are point IDs a, b, c, aa, bb, cc, a1, b2,
c3, c4, c5, a610, ...
Not selected are point IDs d100, e, 200, 300, tzz
...
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 675
Diagram
Shift
aHeight
bEasting
P1 Known point
P1’ Shifted point
P2 Known point
P2’ Shifted point
Rotation
aHeight
bEasting
P0 Rotation point
P1 Known point
P1’ Rotated point
P2 Known point
P2’ Rotated point
a
b
P1
P1’
P2
P2’
SYS13_004
a
b
P0 P1
P2
P1’
P2’
SYS13_005
Viva Series, COGO 676
Scale
aHeight
bEasting
P1 Rotation point, can be held fixed, all other
points are then scaled from here
P2 Known point
P2’ Scaled point
P3 Known point
P3’ Scaled point
P4 Known point
P4’ Scaled point
P5 Known point
P5’ Scaled point
a
b
P1 P3
P4
P5
P2
P5’ P4’
P3’P2’
SYS13_006
Viva Series, COGO 677
30.9.2 Manually Entered
Parameters,
Shift page Calc
To perform the shift, rotation and scale
calculation and to continue with the subse-
quent screen. Calculated COGO points are
not yet stored.
Inv..
To calculate the amount of shift in Easting,
Northing and height from two existing
points. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance,
Δ easting, Δ northing or Δ height is high-
lighted.
Last..
To select the value for the shift from
previous COGO inverse calculations. Avail-
able if Azimuth, Horiz distance, Δ easting, Δ
northing or Δ height is highlighted.
Survy..
To manually measure a point for the COGO
calculation. Available for Method: Use 2
points if From or To is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the COGO application. Refer to
"30.3 Configuring COGO".
Viva Series, COGO 678
Description of fields
Fn Modif..
To mathematically modify the values. Avail-
able if Azimuth, Horiz distance, Δ easting, Δ
northing or Δ height is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Method The method by which the shift in ΔEasting,
ΔNorthing and ΔHeight will be determined.
Δeast, Δnorth, Δht Defines the shift using coordinate differences.
Bearing, dist,
height Defines the shift using an azimuth, a distance and a
height difference.
Use 2 points Computes the shift from the coordinate differences
between two known points.
From Selectable list Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID of
the first known point for calculating the shift.
To Selectable list Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID of
the second known point for calculating the shift.
Azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The
azimuth defines the direction of the shift.
Viva Series, COGO 679
Next step
Page accesses Parameters, Rotate page.
Parameters,
Rotate page
The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page.
Description of fields
Horiz distance,
Horiz dist
(ground) or
Horiz dist (ell)
Editable field Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The
amount of shift from the original point to the calcu-
lated COGO points.
Δ easting Editable field or
display only
The amount of shift in East direction.
Δ northing Editable field or
display only
The amount of shift in North direction.
Δ height Editable field or
display only
The amount of shift in height.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Method The method by which the rotation angle will be deter-
mined.
User entered The rotation can be manually typed in.
Computed The rotation will be calculated as New azimuth minus
Existing azimuth.
Viva Series, COGO 680
Next step
Page accesses Parameters, Scale page.
Parameters,
Scale page
The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page.
Description of fields
Rotation point Selectable list The point around which all points will be rotated.
Existing
azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known direction
before rotating.
New azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known direction
after rotating.
Rotation Editable field or
display only
The amount by which the points will be rotated.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Method The method by which the scale factor will be deter-
mined.
User entered The scale factor can be manually typed in.
Computed The scale factor will be calculated as New distance
divided by Existing distance.
Existing
distance Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known distance
before scaling. This value is used for calculating the
scale factor.
Viva Series, COGO 681
Next step
Calc performs the shift, rotation and scale calculation and accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale
Results.
New distance Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known distance
after scaling. This value is used for calculating the
scale factor.
Scale Editable field or
display only
The scale factor used in the calculation.
Scale from
point No Scaling is performed by multiplying the original coor-
dinates of the points by Scale.
Yes Scale is applied to the coordinate difference of all
points relative to Rotation point selected on the
Rotation page. The coordinates of Rotation point
will not change.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 682
Shift, Rotate & Scale
Results,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To store the results and continue with the
next screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Points selected Display only The number of selected points having been shifted,
rotated and/or scaled.
Store points to
job Selectable list The calculated COGO points will be stored in this job.
The original points are not copied to this job.
Add Identfier Yes or No Activates the use of identifiers for the point IDs of
the calculated COGO points.
Store Point ID
with Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in
front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated
COGO points.
Prefix / suffix Prefix Adds the setting for Store Point ID with in front of
the original point IDs.
Viva Series, COGO 683
Next step
Shift, Rotate & Scale
Results,
Result page
Description of fields
Suffix Adds the setting for Store Point ID with at the end of
the original point IDs.
IF THEN
the used parameters
are to be viewed
Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Summary page.
the calculated COGO
points are to be
viewed graphically
Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Plot page. Original
points are displayed in grey, calculated COGO points are displayed
in black.
the calculated COGO
points are to be
stored
Store accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page. Refer to
paragraph "Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page".
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
No. of new points Display only Number of new points created.
No. of skipped pts Display only Number of points which were skipped either due to
not being able to convert coordinates, or points with
identical point IDs already in the Store points to job.
Viva Series, COGO 684
Next step
OK returns to COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale.
Viva Series, COGO 685
30.9.3 Matching Points
Point Selection Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling.
OK
To perform the shift, rotation and scale
calculation and to continue with the subse-
quent screen. Calculated COGO points are
not yet stored.
+ All..
To add all points from the working job to the
list. Selected sort and filter settings apply.
OK adds all displayed points to the list in
Point Selection and returns to that screen.
+ One..
To add one point from the working job to
the list. Selected sort and filter settings
apply. OK adds the currently highlighted
point to the list in Point Selection and
returns to that screen.
Remov
To remove the highlighted point from the
list. The point itself is not deleted.
More
To display information about the codes if
stored with any point, the time and the date
of when the point was stored and the 3D
coordinate quality and the class.
Viva Series, COGO 686
Next step
Match Points This screen provides a list of points chosen from the working job. The points are used for
the determination of the 2D Helmert transformation. The number of points matched is indi-
Fn Rem A
To remove all points from the list. The points
itself are not deleted.
Fn Range
To define a range of points from the working
job to be added to the list.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
IF AND THEN
all points are to be added - + All...
one point is to be added - + One...
a range of points is to be
added
-Fn Range accesses Select
points by range.
all points are added Method:Manually entered OK accesses Parameters. Refer
to "30.9.2 Manually Entered".
Method:Matching points OK accesses Match Points (%d).
Refer to "30.9.3 Matching
Points".
Viva Series, COGO 687
cated in the title, for example (2). Unless there is no pair of matching points in the list all
softkeys are available.
Calc
To confirm the selections, compute the
transformation and continue with the
subsequent screen.
New..
To match a new pair of points. This pair is
added to the list. A new point can be manu-
ally measured. Refer to paragraph "Choose
Matching Points or Edit Matching Points".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted pair of matched
points.
Delete
To delete the highlighted pair of matched
points from the list.
Match
To change the type of match for a high-
lighted pair of matched points.
Resid
To display a list of the matched points used
in the transformation calculation and their
associated residuals. Refer to paragraph
"Fix Parameters".
Fn Param
To define the parameters to be fixed in the
2D transformation.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Viva Series, COGO 688
Description of columns
Next step
Column Description
Source point The point ID of the points of origin for the calculation of the shifts and/or
rotation and/or scale.
Target point The point ID of the target points for the calculation of the shifts and/or
rotation and/or scale.
Match The type of match to be made between the points. This information is
used in the transformation calculation. Position &Height, Position only,
Height only or None.
None removes matched common points from the transformation calcula-
tion but does not delete them from the list. This option can be used to
help improve residuals.
IF THEN
the transformation is
to be computed
Calc. The calculated shift, rotation and scale values are displayed in
Point Selection. They cannot be edited. The remaining functionality
of the calculation is similar to shift, rotate & scale (manual). Refer
to "30.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale".
a pair of points is to
be matched or edited
New.. or Info. Refer to paragraph "Choose Matching Points or Edit
Matching Points".
Viva Series, COGO 689
Choose Matching Points
or Edit Matching Points
Description of fields
parameters for the
transformation are to
be fixed
Fn Param. Refer to paragraph "Fix Parameters".
IF THEN
OK
To confirm the selections.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Source point Selectable list A point of origin for the calculation of the shifts
and/or rotation and/or scale.
Target point Selectable list A target point for the calculation of the shifts and/or
rotation and/or scale.
Match type The type of match to be made between the points
selected.
Viva Series, COGO 690
Fix Parameters The settings on this screen define the parameters to be used in the transformation.
Description of fields
Pos & height Position and height
Pos only Position only
Height only Height only
None None
Field Option Description
IF the value for a
field is
THEN the value for this parameter will be
----- calculated.
any number fixed to that value.
Field Option Description
Δ easting Editable field Shift in Easting direction.
Δ northing Editable field Shift in Northing direction.
Δ height Editable field Shift in Height direction.
Rotation Editable field Rotation around the X axis.
Scale Editable field Scale factor.
Viva Series, COGO 691
Next step
IF AND THEN
a field displays -
---- the parameter
must be fixed to a
value
highlight the field. Enter the value of the parameter.
Fix.
a field displays
a value
the parameter
must be calculated
highlight the field. Adjst.
all parameters
are configured
-OK to return to Match Points.
Viva Series, COGO 692
30.10 Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations
Description Azimuths, distances and offsets required within the COGO traverse and intersection calcu-
lations can be selected from previously calculated inverse results.
Access In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press Last...
Last Inverse Calculations All previous COGO inverse calculations stored in the working job are displayed, sorted by
time with the most recent at the top. This screen consists of three columns. The information
displayed can vary. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example the Azimuth
cannot be calculated if a height only point is used.
OK
To return to the previous screen.
View
To view all calculated values for the high-
lighted COGO inverse calculation. Includes
the height difference, the slope distance,
the grade and the coordinate differences
between the two known points.
Delete
To delete the highlighted COGO inverse
calculation.
More
To display other information in the third
column.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Viva Series, COGO 693
Description of columns
Next step
Highlight the COGO inverse calculation of which a result is to be taken over.
OK. The relevant result of the highlighted COGO inverse calculation is copied into the field
which was initially highlighted on the Input page.
Column Description
From The point ID of the first known point for the COGO inverse calculation.
To The point ID of the second known point for the COGO inverse calculation.
Azimuth The direction from the first to the second known point.
HDist The horizontal distance between the two known points.
Date and Time When the COGO inverse calculation was stored.
Viva Series, COGO 694
30.11 Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets
Description The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset required within the COGO traverse
and intersection calculation can be mathematically modified.
Access step-by-step In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press Fn Modif...
Modify Value On this screen, numbers can be typed in for the multiplication, division, addition and
subtraction with the original azimuth, distance or offset value. The standard rules of math-
ematical operations apply.
Description of fields
OK
To accept the modified value and to return
to the screen from where this screen was
accessed. The modified value is copied into
the field which was initially highlighted on
the Input page.
Fn Quit
To exit COGO calculation.
Field Option Description
Azimuth, Horiz
distance or
Offset
Display only The name of the field and the value which was high-
lighted before accessing Modify Value.
Viva Series, COGO 695
Multiply Editable field The number to multiply by.
• Minimum: -3000
• Maximum: 3000
• ----- performs a multiplication by 1.
Divide Editable field The number to divide by.
• Minimum: -3000
• Maximum: 3000
• ----- performs a division by 1.
Add Editable field The number to be added.
• For azimuths
Minimum: 0
Maximum: Full circle
• For distances and offsets
Minimum: 0 m
Maximum: 30000000 m
• ----- performs an addition of 0.000.
Subtract Editable field The number to be subtracted.
• For azimuths
Minimum: 0
Maximum: Full circle
Field Option Description
Viva Series, COGO 696
Next step
OK accepts the modified value and returns to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Example: Calculations
for an azimuth
Example: Calculations
for a distance
The behaviour for an offset is identical.
• For distances and offsets
Minimum: 0 m
Maximum: 30000000 m
• ----- performs a subtraction of 0.000.
Azimuth, Horiz
distance or
Offset
Display only The modified value for the field in the first line. This
field is updated with every mathematical operation.
Angles greater than the full circle are reduced accord-
ingly.
Field Option Description
Step Editable field Value as calculated Value as displayed
)Azimuth: 250.0000 g
1. Multiply: 2 500 Azimuth: 100.0000 g
2. Divide: 3 166.667 Azimuth: 166.6670 g
3. Add: 300 466.667 Azimuth: 66.6670 g
4. Subtract: 100 366.667 Azimuth: 366.6670 g
Step Editable field Value as calculated Value as displayed
)Horiz distance: 250.000 m
Viva Series, COGO 697
1. Multiply: 2 500 Horiz distance: 500.000 m
2. Divide: 3 166.667 Horiz distance: 166.667 m
3. Add: 300 466.667 Horiz distance: 466.667 m
4. Subtract: 100 366.667 Horiz distance: 366.667 m
Step Editable field Value as calculated Value as displayed
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 698
31 Determine Coordinate System
31.1 Overview
Description GPS measured points are always stored based on the global geocentric datum known as
WGS 1984. Most surveys require coordinates in a local grid system. For example, based on
a country’s official mapping datum or an arbitrary grid system used in a particular area such
as a construction site. To convert the WGS 1984 coordinates into local coordinates a coor-
dinate system must be created. Part of the coordinate system is the transformation used to
convert coordinates from the WGS 1984 datum to the local datum.
The Determine Coordinate System application allows:
• the parameters of a new transformation to be determined.
• the parameters of an existing transformation to be recomputed.
)With one common control point, it is still possible to calculate a Classic 3D transformation,
as long as the rotations and the scale parameter are fixed. Such a transformation fits
perfectly in the vicinity of the common control point, but is degraded by the distance from
that point. This degradation is because the orientation of the local reference frame or any
scale factor within the local datum cannot be taken into account.
Requirements to deter-
mine a transformation
To determine a transformation it is necessary to have common control points whose posi-
tions are known in both WGS 1984 coordinates and local coordinates. The more points that
are common between datum, the more accurately the transformation parameters can be
calculated. Depending on the type of transformation used, details about the map projection,
the local ellipsoid and a local geoid model can also be needed.
Requirements for
control points
• The control points used for the transformation should surround the area for which the
transformation is to be applied. It is not good practice to survey or convert coordinates
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 699
outside of the area covered by the control points as extrapolation errors can be intro-
duced.
• When a geoid field file, and/or a CSCS field file is used in the determination of a coordi-
nate system, the control points for the calculation must fall within the areas of the field
files.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 700
31.2 Selecting the Transformation Method
Description Determine Coordinate System is the conventional method of determining a coordinate
system. Parameters such as the height mode must be set by the user.
One or more control points for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum are needed.
Depending on the number of control points and available information, a Onestep, Twostep
or Classic 3D transformation can be used.
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Determine coord system.
Determine Coord System Description of fields
Field Option Description
Method The type of transformation to be used when deter-
mining a coordinate system.
Onestep Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to
local grid and vice versa without knowledge about the
local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure:
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a
temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The
central meridian of this projection passes through
the centre of gravity of the common control points.
2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for
the WGS 1984 points.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 701
3 These preliminary grid coordinates are matched with
the local grid control points. The Easting and
Northing shifts, the rotation and the scale factor
between these two sets of points are then
computed. This process is known as a classic 2D
transformation.
4 The height transformation is a single dimension
height approximation.
Refer to "Appendix H Glossary".
Twostep Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the
Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position
and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller
areas. Procedure:
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common control
points are shifted closely to the local datum using a
given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D
transformation is typically a rough transformation
valid for the country of the local datum.
2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary
grid, but this time using the true map projection of
the local points.
3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with the
Onestep transformation.
Refer to "Appendix H Glossary".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 702
Next step
Classic 3D Also known as Helmert transformation.
Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to
local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map
projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordi-
nates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most
rigorous transformation type and keeps the full
geometrical information. Refer to "Appendix H Glos-
sary".
Modify existing To modify an existing determine coordinate system.
Refer to "31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System".
IF the selected method is THEN
Onestep, Twostep or Classic
3D OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to the
following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs.
Modify existing OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "31.3.3 Modi-
fying a Coordinate System".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 703
Choose WGS84 & Local
Jobs
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Config..
To configure the selected coordinate
system determination method.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the coordinate system. The name
can be up to 16 characters in length and can include
spaces. Input is mandatory.
)Entering the name of a coordinate system will
allow that existing system to be updated.
WGS84 points
job Selectable list The job from which the points with WGS 1984 coor-
dinates will be taken.
Local points
job Selectable list The job from which the points with local coordinates
will be taken.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 704
Next step
Press Config.. with Use one point localisation method NOT checked to access Configura-
tion.
Use one point
localisation
method
Check box Number of control points needed: One control point
for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum.
Transformation to use:
• Onestep or Twostep when information about the
necessary rotations and scale factor is known.
• Classic 3D when the rotations are to be set to
zero and the scale factor to one.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 705
31.3 The Normal Method
31.3.1 Configuring the Normal Method
Description The configuration allows options to be set, which are used in the Determine Coordinate
System application. These settings are stored within the active working style.
Access Press Config.. in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method NOT
checked.
Configuration,
Residuals page
The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages, unless otherwise stated.
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Easting Editable field The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged
as possible outliers.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 706
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Configuration,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Northing Editable field The limit above which Northing residuals will be
flagged as possible outliers.
Elevation Editable field The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged
as possible outliers.
Default Default
residual distri-
bution method
The method by which the residuals of the control
points will be distributed throughout the transforma-
tion area.
None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their
associated points.
1/distance,
1/distance² or
1/distance³/²
Distributes the residuals according to the distance
between each control point and the newly trans-
formed point.
Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic inter-
polation approach.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Model Bursa-Wolf or
Molodensky-
Badakus
The transformation model to be used. Refer to
standard surveying literature for details on the
models.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 707
Next step
OK returns to Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs.
Prompt me to
enter fixed
transformation
parameters
Check box To configure Classic 3D transformation parameters
during the process of calculation.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 708
31.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System
Access Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method NOT
checked.
Set Height Mode
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Transforma-
tion name Editable field A unique name for the transformation. The name can
be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces.
If a coordinate system is being updated then its name
is displayed.
Transfrm Type Display only The type of transformation to be used when deter-
mining a coordinate system.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 709
Next step
OK continues to Choose System Components.
)If a coordinate system was chosen to be edited in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs, pressing
OK accesses Matched Points (n). Pressing ESC does not reaccess Choose WGS84 & Local
Jobs but accesses Choose System Components and Set Height Mode.
Height mode The height mode to be used in the determination of
a coordinate system.
Orthometric or
Ellipsoidal Available when determining a new coordinate
system.
Display only Available when updating a coordinate system. The
height mode shown is the same as the mode used in
the existing system.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 710
Choose System Compo-
nents This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine
Coord System.
For Onestep
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model to be used in the transformation.
Pre Transform Selectable list For Twostep: The pre-transformation to use for the
preliminary 3D transformation.
Ellipsoid Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to use in
the transformation.
Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid being used
by a fixed projection when selected in Projection.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 711
Next step
OK continues to Matched Points (n).
Matched Points (n) This screen provides a list of points chosen from WGS84 points job and Local pts. The
number of control points matched between both jobs is indicated in the title. Unless there
is no pair of matching points in the list all softkeys are available. Refer to "31.3.4 Matching
Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points" for information on how to match points.
Projection Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to use in
the transformation.
CSCS model Selectable list For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to use in the transfor-
mation.
Field Option Description
Calc
To confirm the selections, compute the
transformation and continue with the
subsequent screen.
New..
To match a new pair of points. This pair is
added to the list. A new point can be manu-
ally occupied. Refer to " Choose Matching
Points/Edit Matching Points".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted pair of matched
points. Refer to " Choose Matching
Points/Edit Matching Points".
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 712
)If a coordinate system to be updated
contains a point that was deleted from
the working job and a new point was
created in that job with the same point
ID but different coordinates, the coor-
dinates of the old point will still be
used for the calculation. Pressing
Edit.. to edit a highlighted pair of
matched points containing the deleted
point, will overwrite the coordinates
of the old point. The coordinates of
the new point will be used in the calcu-
lation.
Delete
To delete the highlighted pair of matched
points from the list.
Match
To change the type of match for a high-
lighted pair of matched points. Refer to
"31.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a
Pair of Matching Points".
Auto
To scan both jobs for points that have the
same point ID. Points with matching point
IDs are added to the list.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 713
Description of columns
Next step
Calc computes the transformation and continues to Check Residuals or to Classic 3D
Parameters if Prompt me to enter fixed transformation parameters was checked during the
configuration.
Classic 3D Parameters The settings on this page define the parameters to be used in a Classic 3D transformation.
Refer to "Appendix H Glossary" for more information about how many transformation
parameters are computed, based on the number of points common to both datum.
Column Description
WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job.
Local pts The point ID of the points chosen from Local points job.
Match The type of match to be made between the points. This information is
used in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position only,
Height only or None.
• For Onestep or Twostep possible options are P & H, P only, H only or
None.
• For Classic 3D, possible options are P & H or None.
None removes matched common points from the transformation calcula-
tion but does not delete them from the list. This option can be used to
help improve residuals.
IF the value for a
field is
THEN the value for this parameter will be
----- calculated.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 714
Description of fields
Next step
any number fixed to that value.
Field Option Description
Model Bursa-Wolf or
Molodensky-
Badakus
The transformation model to be used. Refer to
standard surveying literature for details on the
models.
Shift dX Editable field Shift in X direction.
Shift dY Editable field Shift in Y direction.
Shift dZ Editable field Shift in Z direction.
Rotation X Editable field Rotation around the X axis.
Rotation Y Editable field Rotation around the Y axis.
Rotation Z Editable field Rotation around the Z axis.
Scale Editable field Scale factor.
IF AND THEN
a field displays -
---- the parameter
must be fixed to a
value
highlight the field. Fix.
Enter the value of the parameter.
IF the value for a
field is
THEN the value for this parameter will be
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 715
Check Residuals Displays a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their asso-
ciated residuals.
Description of columns
a field displays
a value
the parameter
must be calculated
highlight the field. Adjust.
all parameters
are configured
-OK computes the transformation and continues to
Check Residuals.
IF AND THEN
OK
To accept the residuals and to continue with
the subsequent screen.
Result
To view results of the transformation. Refer
to "31.3.5 Transformation Results for
Onestep and Twostep".
More
To display information about height resid-
uals.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job.
East The Easting residual. If positions are not used in the transformation calcu-
lation then ----- will be displayed.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 716
Next step
North The Northing residual. If positions are not used in the transformation
calculation then ----- will be displayed.
Height The Height residual. If heights are not used in the transformation calcula-
tion then ----- will be displayed.
!Indicates residuals that exceed the residual limit defined in Configuration,
Residuals page.
!Indicates the largest residual in East, North and Height.
IF the residuals are THEN
unacceptable ESC returns to Matched Points (n). Matched points can be edited,
deleted or temporarily removed from the list and the transformation
recalculated.
acceptable OK continues to Store Coordinate System.
Column Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 717
Store Coordinate
System,
Summary page
Description of fields
Store
To store the coordinate system to the DBX
and return to Main Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field The name of the coordinate system can be changed.
The name can be up to 16 characters in length and
include spaces.
Transforma-
tion type Display only The type of transformation used
No. of matched
pts Display only Number of matched points.
Easting Display only Largest Easting residual from the transformation
calculation.
Northing Display only Largest Northing residual from the transformation
calculation.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 718
Next step
Page changes to the Coord system page.
Store Coordinate
System,
Coord system page
Description of fields
Elevation Display only Largest Height residual from the transformation
calculation.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Residuals None, 1/distance,
1/distance² or
1/distance³/²
The method by which the residuals of the control
points will be distributed throughout the transforma-
tion area.
Geoid model Display only Name of geoid model used.
Pre Transform Display only For Twostep: Name of the pre-transformation used.
Transformation Display only For Classic 3D: Name of transformation used.
Ellipsoid Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of ellipsoid used.
Projection Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of projection
used.
CSCS model Display only For Classic 3D: Name of CSCS model used.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 719
Next step
Store stores the coordinate system to the DBX and attaches it to the WGS84 points job
selected in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs, replacing any coordinate system attached to this
job. WGS84 points job becomes the working job.
Determine Coord System Description of fields
Field Option Description
Method The type of transformation to be used when deter-
mining a coordinate system.
Onestep Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to
local grid and vice versa without knowledge about the
local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure:
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a
temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The
central meridian of this projection passes through
the centre of gravity of the common control points.
2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for
the WGS 1984 points.
3 These preliminary grid coordinates are matched with
the local grid control points. The Easting and
Northing shifts, the rotation and the scale factor
between these two sets of points are then
computed. This process is known as a classic 2D
transformation.
4 The height transformation is a single dimension
height approximation.
Refer to "H.11 T".
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 720
Twostep Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the
Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position
and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller
areas. Procedure:
1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common control
points are shifted closely to the local datum using a
given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D
transformation is typically a rough transformation
valid for the country of the local datum.
2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary
grid, but this time using the true map projection of
the local points.
3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with the
Onestep transformation.
Refer to "H.11 T".
Classic 3D Also known as Helmert transformation.
Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to
local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map
projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordi-
nates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most
rigorous transformation type and keeps the full
geometrical information. Refer to "H.11 T".
Modify existing To modify an existing determine coordinate system.
Refer to "31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 721
Next step
IF the selected method is THEN
Onestep, Twostep or Classic
3D OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to the
following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs.
Modify existing OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "31.3.3 Modi-
fying a Coordinate System".
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 722
31.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System
Access OK in Determine Coord System when Method:Modify existing.
Coordinate Systems Select an existing coordinate system and press OK.
All the following steps are identical with the determination of a new coordinate system from
the Matched Points (n) screen onwards. Refer to "31.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate
System"
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 723
31.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points
Description Before calculating a transformation, it must be defined which points in WGS84 points job
and Local points job are to be matched. Pairs of matched points are displayed in one line
in Matched Points (n). New pairs of matched points can be created, existing pairs of
matched points can be edited and pairs of matched points can be deleted.
Access Press New.. or Edit.. in Matched Points (n).
Choose Matching
Points/Edit Matching
Points
Description of fields
OK
To return to Matched Points (n) and to
adds a new line of matched points to the
matched points list.
Survy..
To manually occupy a point and store it in
WGS84 points job. Available when WGS84
point is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
WGS84 point Selectable list A WGS 1984 control point.
Local point Selectable list A local control point.
Match in The type of match to be made between the points
selected.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 724
P & H, P only, H
only or None.
Available for Onestep and Twostep.
P & H or None Available for Classic 3D.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 725
31.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep
Access Press Result in Check Residuals.
Transformation Results,
Position page
Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown
for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Position page and
the Height page. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the pages as indi-
cated.
Description of fields
OK
To return to Check Residuals.
Scale.. or Ppm
Available on the Position page. To switch
between displaying the true scale and
displaying the ppm.
Rms or Param..
To switch between the root mean square
values of the parameters and the actual
parameter values. The name of the screen
changes to Transformation Results rms
when displaying rms values.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Shift dX Display only Shift in X direction.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 726
Next step
Page changes to the Height page.
Transformation Results,
Height page
Description of fields
Next step
OK returns to Check Residuals.
Shift dY Display only Shift in Y direction.
Rotation Display only Rotation of transformation.
Scale Display only Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale
or ppm.
Rotation X Display only Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation.
Rotation Y Display only Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Slope in X Display only Tilt of the transformation in the X direction.
Slope in Y Display only Tilt of the transformation in the Y direction.
Height shift Display only Shift in height between WGS 1984 datum and local
datum.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 727
31.3.6 Transformation Results for Classic 3D
Access Press Result in Check Residuals.
Transformation Results,
Parameters page
Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown
for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Parameters page and
the Rotation origin page. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the
pages as indicated.
Description of fields
OK
To return to Check Residuals.
Scale.. or Ppm
Available on the Position page. To switch
between displaying the true scale and
displaying the ppm.
Rms or Param..
To switch between the root mean square
values of the parameters and the actual
parameter values. The name of the screen
changes to Transformation Results rms
when displaying rms values.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Shift dX Display only Shift in X direction.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 728
Next step
Page changes to the Rotation origin page.
Transformation Results,
Rotation origin page
Description of fields
Shift dY Display only Shift in Y direction.
Shift dZ Display only Shift in Z direction.
Rotation X Display only Rotation around the X axis.
Rotation Y Display only Rotation around the Y axis.
Rotation Z Display only Rotation around the Z axis.
Scale Display only Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale or ppm.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Model Display only Classic 3D transformation model used for the transforma-
tion.
Rotation orgn X Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in the
X direction of the origin of rotation.
Rotation orgn Y Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in the
Y direction of the origin of rotation.
Rotation orgn Z Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in the Z
direction of the origin of rotation.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 729
Next step
OK returns to Check Residuals.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 730
31.4 The One Point Localisation Method
31.4.1 Determining a New Coordinate System
Access Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method being
checked.
Set Height Mode
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Transforma-
tion name Editable field A unique name for the transformation. The name can
be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces.
If a coordinate system is being updated then its name
is displayed.
Transfrm Type Display only The type of transformation to be used when deter-
mining a coordinate system.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 731
Next step
OK continues to Choose System Components.
)Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also
Bearing.
Height mode The height mode to be used in the determination of
a coordinate system.
Orthometric or
Ellipsoidal Available when determining a new coordinate
system.
Display only Available when updating a coordinate system. The
height mode shown is the same as the mode used in
the existing system.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 732
Choose System Compo-
nents This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine
Coord System.
For Onestep
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model to be used in the transformation.
Pre Transform Selectable list For Twostep: The pre-transformation to be used for
the preliminary 3D transformation.
Ellipsoid Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to be used
in the transformation.
Display only For Twostep: The ellipsoid being used by a fixed
projection when selected in Projection.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 733
Next step
OK continues to Choose Common Point.
Choose Common Point
Projection Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to be
used in the transformation.
CSCS model Selectable list For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to be used in the
transformation.
Field Option Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Survy..
Available for WGS84 point being high-
lighted. To occupy a point manually and
store it in WGS84 points job.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 734
Description of fields
Next step
For Onestep and Twostep: OK continues to Determine Rotation.
For Classic 3D: OK continues to Store Coordinate System.
Field Option Description
Match in For Onestep and Twostep: How the horizontal and
vertical shifts of the transformation will be
computed.
Position & height Position and height are taken from the same pair of
matching points.
Position only Position is taken from one pair of matching points.
The height can be taken from another pair of
matching points.
WGS84 point Selectable list The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control
point chosen from WGS84 points job.
Local point Selectable list The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control
point chosen from Local points job.
Match height Check box For Onestep and Twostep: Available for Match
in:Position only. Activates the determination of the
vertical shift from a separate pair of matching points.
Local height Use WGS84 point
ht or Use Local
point ht
For Classic 3D: The source of the height information
to use in the transformation.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 735
Determine Rotation For Onestep and Twostep only.
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Inv
Available for Method:Two WGS84 points
and Method:User entered. To compute an
azimuth between two local points. Refer to
"31.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth".
Survy..
To manually occupy a point and store it in
WGS84 points job. Available when Point 1
or Point 2 are highlighted for Method:Two
WGS84 points or when WGS84 point is
highlighted for Method:Convergence
angle.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 736
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Method Use WGS84 north,
User entered,
Convergence
angle or Two
WGS84 points
Method by which the rotation angle for the transfor-
mation is determined.
Rotation Display only • For Method:Use WGS84 north: Transformation
will be rotated to North as defined by the
WGS 1984 datum. North is 0.00000 °.
•For Method:Convergence angle: The rotation of
the transformation calculated as 0.00000 ° minus
the computed convergence angle. The field is
updated as Coord system and WGS84 point are
changed.
•For Method:Two WGS84 points: The rotation of
the transformation calculated as required azimuth
minus azimuth. The field is updated as Point 1,
Point 2 and Required azimuth are changed.
Editable field • For Method:User entered: Allows the orientation
of the transformation to be manually typed in or
calculated in Compute Required Azimuth.
Coord system Selectable list Coordinate system to provide the direction of grid
North in the area where the control point used for
determining the local coordinate system, is located.
Available for Method:Convergence angle.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 737
WGS84 point Selectable list WGS 1984 point of which the convergence angle will
be calculated. Available for Method:Convergence
angle.
Point 1 Selectable list First point to use for computation of Azimuth. Avail-
able for Method:Two WGS84 points.
Point 2 Selectable list Second point to use for computation of Azimuth.
Available for Method:Two WGS84 points.
Azimuth Display only Computed azimuth between Point 1 and Point 2.
Available for Method:Two WGS84 points.
Required
azimuth Editable field The required grid azimuth, computed between two
local points. Refer to "31.4.2 Computing Required
Azimuth". Available for Method:Two WGS84 points.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 738
Diagram for Onestep, Method:Convergence angle
a) WGS 1984 coordinate system
b) Local coordinate system
c) Geodetic North
d) Grid North
e) Point on WGS 1984 datum
f) Meridian
αConvergence angle
a
c
d
b
f
e
SYS13_008
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 739
Diagram for Onestep, Method:Two WGS84 points
Next step
OK continues to Determine Scale.
Determine Scale For Onestep and Twostep only.
The scale is calculated using the formula (r + h)/r where
r is the distance from the centre of the ellipsoid to the WGS 1984 point selected in Choose
Common Point, and
h is the height of this point above the WGS 1984 ellipsoid.
a) WGS 1984 coordinate system
b) Local coordinate system
c) Line between two WGS 1984 points
d) Line between two local points
αAzimuth of two WGS 1984 points
βKnown azimuth or azimuth of two local
points
a
a
c
d
b
b
SYS13_009
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 740
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Grid..
Available Twostep and for
Method:Combined SF. To compute the grid
scale factor. Refer to "31.4.3 Computing the
Grid Scale Factor".
Hgt..
Available Twostep and for
Method:Combined SF. To compute the
height scale factor. Refer to "31.4.4
Computing the Height Scale Factor".
Scale or Ppm
To switch between displaying the true scale
and displaying the ppm.
Survy..
To manually occupy a point and store it in
WGS84 points job. Method:Convergence
angle when WGS84 point is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 741
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Method Known WGS84 pt,
Known WGS84 ht
or User entered
Available for Onestep: Method of determining the
scale factor of the transformation.
User entered or
Combined SF Available for Twostep. The default method for deter-
mining the Combined Scale Factor to be used in the
transformation process.
Scale (Reducing
points to the
ground)
Editable field Available for Onestep. Allows the scale factor to be
typed in manually. Available for Method:User
entered.
Display only Available for Onestep. The calculated scale factor.
Available for Method:Known WGS84 pt and
Method:Known WGS84 ht.
WGS84 point Selectable list Available for Onestep. WGS 1984 point from which
the scale factor will be calculated. The scale factor is
calculated using the height of the known WGS 1984
point.
Available for Method:Known WGS84 pt.
Known height Editable field Available for Onestep. The WGS 1984 height of a
point can be typed in. The scale factor is calculated
using this height. Available for Method:Known
WGS84 ht.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 742
Next step
OK continues to Store Coordinate System.
Grid SF Display only Available for Twostep and Method:Combined SF.
The grid scale factor as computed in Compute Grid
Scale Factor. Refer to "31.4.3 Computing the Grid
Scale Factor".
Height SF Display only Available for Twostep and Method:Combined SF.
The height scale factor as computed in Compute
Height Scale Factor. Refer to "31.4.4 Computing the
Height Scale Factor".
Combined SF Available for Twostep.
The combined scale factor of the transformation.
Editable field Available for Method:User entered. The scale factor
can be typed in.
Display only Available for Method:Combined SF. The product of
the grid scale factor and the height scale factor.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 743
Store Coordinate System
For Onestep
Description of fields
Store
To store the coordinate system to the DB-X,
attach the system to WGS84 points job that
was selected in Choose WGS84 & Local
Jobs and return to Main Menu.
Scale or Ppm
For Onestep and Twostep. To switch
between displaying the true scale and
displaying the ppm.
Coord
For Classic 3D: To view other coordinate
types.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field A unique name for the coordinate system. The name
can be up to 16 characters in length and include
spaces.
Shift dX Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in X direction.
Shift dY Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in Y direction.
Shift dZ Display only For Classic 3D: Shift in Z direction.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 744
Next step
Store stores the coordinate system and returns to Main Menu.
Rotation Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Rotation of transforma-
tion.
Scale Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Scale factor of transfor-
mation.
Rotation orgn X Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the X direction
of the origin of rotation.
Rotation orgn Y Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the Y direction
of the origin of rotation.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 745
31.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth
Description Available for:
• One Point Localisation method with Onestep or Twostep transformation.
•Method: Two WGS84 points and Method: User entered in Determine Rotation.
Allows two local points to be chosen from local job between which the required azimuth will
be computed. This azimuth is then used with an azimuth computed between two WGS 1984
points chosen from the WGS84 job to calculate the rotation of the transformation.
The computed required azimuth appears in the Required azimuth field for Method: Two
WGS84 points and the Rotation field for Method: User entered in Determine Rotation.
Access Press Inv in Determine Rotation.
Compute Required
Azimuth
OK
To calculate the required azimuth and return
to the screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 746
Description of fields
Next step
OK returns to Determine Rotation.
Field Option Description
From Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the azimuth
calculation.
To Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the
azimuth calculation.
Azimuth Display only The calculated azimuth.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 747
31.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor
Description For One Step Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the grid scale
factor. The grid scale factor is the scale factor of the point chosen, relative to the projection
being used.
Access Press Grid.. in Determine Scale.
Compute Grid Scale
Factor
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and return to the
screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Scale or Ppm
To switch between displaying the true scale
and displaying the ppm.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Method Method by which the grid scale factor is to be calcu-
lated.
User entered Grid scale factor can be manually typed in.
Known local pt Grid scale factor is computed using the position of a
known local point.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 748
Next step
OK returns to Determine Scale.
Local point Selectable list Available for Method:Known local pt. The point ID of
the point chosen from the local job from which the
grid scale factor is computed using the projection
selected.
Grid SF The grid scale factor.
Editable field Available for Method:User entered. To type in the
grid scale factor.
Display only Available for Method:Known local pt. The computed
grid scale factor.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 749
31.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor
Description For One Point Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the height scale
factor of the point chosen.
Access Press Hgt.. in Determine Scale.
Compute Height Scale
Factor
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and return to the
screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Scale or Ppm
To switch between displaying the true scale
and displaying the ppm.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Method Method by which the height scale factor is to be
calculated.
User entered Height scale factor can be manually typed in.
Known local pt Height scale factor is computed using the position of
a known local point.
Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 750
Next step
OK returns to Determine Scale.
Known local ht Height scale factor is computed using an entered
height value.
Known Point Selectable list Available for Method:Known local pt. The point ID of
the point chosen from the local job from which the
height scale factor is computed.
Known height Editable field Available for Method:Known local ht. A known local
height.
Height SF The height scale factor.
Editable field Available for Method: User entered. To type in the
height scale factor.
Display only Available for Method:Known local pt and
Method:Known local ht. The computed height scale
factor.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, QuickGrid 751
32 QuickGrid
32.1 Selecting the Transformation Method
)For an overview of determine coordinate systems, refer to "31.1 Overview"
Description QuickGrid is designed to allow for quick coordinate system determination on site. Particularly
for those users who must combine GPS and TPS data. All points must be measured by GPS,
and therefore this method is not available in TPS mode. There are five different methods to
choose from, Single point, Multi point, Single point from base, Orientate to line & Quickshift.
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\QuickGrid.
Choose QuickGrid
Method Description of fields
Field Option Description
Method Single point This method is fast and targeted at the basic
customer who wants to set up a local coordinate
system based on a single point.
The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north.
A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to
“ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height.
Multiple points This method is fast and targeted at the more rigorous
customer who wants to set up a local coordinate
system based on multiple points.
Rotation and scale are as calculated.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 752
Next step
Single point base This method is fast and targeted at the basic
customer who wants to set up a local coordinate
system based on the base station position.
The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north.
A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to
“ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height.
Orientate to line This method is fast and targeted at the more
advanced customer who wants to set up a local coor-
dinate system based on a single point, but set the
orientation of the resulting grid by measuring a
second point.
The rotation is as calculated.
A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to
“ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height.
QuickShift This method is fast and targeted at the more
advanced customer who wants to shift their existing
coordinate system based on a single point.
A 3D transformation is calculated.
IF the selected method is THEN
Single point, Multiple points,
Single point base or Orientate
to line
OK to access Define Local Quickgrid Point. Refer to para-
graph Define Local Quickgrid Point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, QuickGrid 753
Select Coordinate
System This screen is only available for Method: QuickShift.
Description of fields
QuickShift OK to access Select Coordinate System. Refer to para-
graph Select Coordinate System.
IF the selected method is THEN
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Coord system Selectable list Select the coordinate system to be shifted.
Transformation Display only The type of transformation.
Ellipsoid Display only The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid.
Projection Display only The map projection.
Geoid model Display only The geoid model.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 754
Next step
OK accesses Define Local Quickgrid Point.
Define Local Quickgrid
Point
Description of fields
CSCS model Display only The Country Specific Coordinate System model.
Field Option Description
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Local point User entered The local QuickGrid point is entered by the user.
From working job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the
working job.
From control job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the control
job.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 755
Point ID The point ID of the local QuickGrid point.
Editable field For Local point:User entered.
Selectable list For Local point:From working job and Local
point:From control job.
Easting The Easting coordinate of the local QuickGrid point.
Editable field For Local point:User entered.
Display only For Local point:From working job and Local
point:From control job.
Northing The Northing coordinate of the local QuickGrid point.
Editable field For Local point:User entered.
Display only For Local point:From working job and Local
point:From control job.
Elevation The orthometric height of the local QuickGrid point.
Editable field For Local point:User entered.
Display only For Local point:From working job and Local
point:From control job.
Ignore local
height & use
WGS84 height
Check box When this box is checked, no height adjustment is
calculated.
When this box is not checked, a height adjustment is
calculated.
Use geoid Check box Check this box to select a geoid model for the calcu-
lation.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, QuickGrid 756
Next step
OK accesses Measure QuickGrid Point.
Geoid model Selectable list Available when Use geoid is checked. To select a
geoid model.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, QuickGrid 757
32.2 Determining a New Coordinate System
Access Press OK in Define Local Quickgrid Point.
Measure QuickGrid Point This screen is similar to the standard Survey screen. Refer to "44.1.2 Real-Time Rover Oper-
ations".
Next step
•For Method: Multiple points: After measuring and storing a point, Matched Pts & Resid-
uals is accessed.
•For Method: Orientate to line: Measure the points of the line. Then Store Coordinate
System is accessed.
• For all other QuickGrid methods: After measuring and storing a point, Store Coordinate
System is accessed.
Matched Pts & Residuals This screen shows what points have been matched so far. More points can be added,
matched points can be deleted.
OK
To confirm the selections, compute the
transformation and continue with the
subsequent screen.
New..
To survey another point and return to the
Survey screen.
Match
To change the type of match for the high-
lighted point.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 758
Description of columns
Next step
Press New.. to return to Measure QuickGrid Point and to survey another point for the calcu-
lation.
Press OK to continue with Store Coordinate System.
Delete
To delete the highlighted point from the list.
More
To display information about height resid-
uals.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job.
Match The type of match to be made between the QuickGrid point and the
surveyed point. This information is used in the transformation calculation.
Position &Height, Position only, Height only or None.
East, North and
Height The residuals of the matched points.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 759
Store Coordinate
System,
Summary page
The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method.
Description of fields
Store
To store the coordinate system and to exit
the Determine Coordinate System applica-
tion.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field The name of the new coordinate system.
No. of matched
pts Display only Available for Multiple points.
The number of matched points.
Largest resid-
uals
East, North and
Height
Display only Available for Multiple points.
The largest residuals of the transformation.
Rotation from
north Display only Available for Orientate to line.
The rotation is shown in the configured angle units.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 760
Next step
Page changes to the Coord system page.
Store Coordinate
System,
Coord system page
The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method.
Shift dX Display only Available for QuickShift.
Shift in X direction.
Shift dY Display only Available for QuickShift.
Shift in Y direction.
Shift dZ Display only Available for QuickShift.
Shift in Z direction.
Field Option Description
Store
To store the coordinate system and to exit
the Determine Coordinate System applica-
tion.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 761
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Residuals For Multiple points.
The method by which the residuals of the control
points will be distributed throughout the transforma-
tion area.
None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their
associated points.
1/distance,
1/distance² or
1/distance³/²
Distributes the residuals according to the distance
between each control point and the newly trans-
formed point.
Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic inter-
polation approach.
Transformation Display only Available for QuickShift.
The type of transformation.
Ellipsoid Display only Available for QuickShift.
The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid.
Projection Display only Available for QuickShift.
The map projection.
Geoid model Display only Available for Multiple points and QuickShift.
The geoid model used.
CSCS model Display only Available for QuickShift.
The Country Specific Coordinate System model.
Viva Series, QuickGrid 762
Next step
Store safes the new coordinate system.
Viva Series, Reference Line 763
33 Reference Line
33.1 Overview
Description The Reference Line application can be used to set out or measure points relative to a refer-
ence line or a reference arc.
Reference line tasks The Reference Line application can be used for the following tasks:
• Measuring to a line/arc where the coordinates of a target point can be calculated from
its position relative to the defined reference line/arc.
• Staking to a line/arc where the position of a target point is known and instructions to
locate the point are given relative to the reference line/arc.
• Gridstaking a line/arc where a grid can be staked relative to a reference line/arc.
• Staking points relative to an alignment.
Other functionality available includes:
• Offsetting the reference line/arc horizontally or vertically. The radius of the arc changes
with the horizontal offset.
• Shifting the reference line with parallel offsets or rotating to match predefined setting
out instructions.
• Measuring points and staking points on slopes related to a reference line/arc.
Activating the applica-
tion
The Reference Line application must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load
licence keys" for information on how to activate the application.
)Measuring and staking out of points is possible for RTK base and TPS.
Viva Series, Reference Line 764
Point types Reference lines/arcs can be created from points stored as:
• WGS 1984 geodetic
•Local grid
Heights and positions are always taken into account. Points must have full coordinate
triplets.
Properties of measured
points
The properties stored with staked points are:
• Class: Either Meas or for also Nav depending on the position status when the
point was measured.
• Sub class:
•Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed.
•TPS
•Source: RefLine (Grid), RefLine (Meas), RefLine (Stake), RefLine (Seg)
• Instrument source: GPS or TPS
Deleting points A point that is used to define a reference line/arc can be deleted. If one or more points
defining the reference line/arc have been deleted, a reference line/arc can still be used.
Within Edit reference line and Edit reference arc, the deleted point field is shown in grey.
Within MapView, the reference line is still displayed but the deleted point or points is/are
not.
Terms Reference point: Used in this chapter to refer to the point from which the perpendic-
ular offset, from the reference line/arc to the target point, is meas-
ured.
Viva Series, Reference Line 765
Defining a reference
line/arc
A reference line can be defined in the following ways:
•Two known points
• One known point, an azimuth, a distance and a gradient
• One known point, an azimuth, a distance and a difference in height
• Alignments can be imported from a DXF job and selected from a list or on the Map page.
Refer to "33.8.1 Overview".
Target point: The design point.
• For measuring to a reference line, this term refers to the point
with the coordinates of the current position and the designed or
calculated height.
• For staking or grid staking to a reference line, this term refers to
the point to be staked.
Measured point: The current position.
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 Known distance
d2 Difference in height, ΔHt
αAzimuth
βElevation angle between the start point
and the end point
d1 d2
P0
P1
GS_015
Viva Series, Reference Line 766
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
d1 Known distance
d2 Difference in height, ΔHt
αAzimuth
βElevation angle between the start point
and the end point
A reference arc can be defined in the following ways:
• Two known points and a radius
•Three known points
TS_021
d1 d2
P1
P0
P2
Viva Series, Reference Line 767
Defining chainage The chainage of the start point of a reference line/arc can be defined.
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Known point
r Radius of arc
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Known point
r Radius of arc
r
P0
P2
P1
GS_016
TS_022
r
P1
P0
P3
P2
Viva Series, Reference Line 768
)It is possible to define an arc that has an opening angle of more than 180°.
Coordinate systems It is possible to use a valid coordinate system, but have the line or part of it lying outside
the projection or CSCS model being used.
In these cases, the field values relating to the difference in coordinates between the point
being staked and the current position, are shown as -----.
)Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also
Bearing.
Direction of values The following diagram shows the direction of positive and negative values for distance and
height differences between the target point and the reference point for reference lines.
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
GS_017
P0
P1
P2
P2 P3
+
+
-
-
Viva Series, Reference Line 769
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Target point
P4 Reference point
TS_023
P1
P2
P3
P3 P4
+
+
-
-
P0
Viva Series, Reference Line 770
33.2 Accessing Reference Line
Access • For measuring tasks:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Measure to ref line.
• For staking tasks:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake to ref line.
Reference Line Startup
Description of the Reference Line tasks
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Reference line task Description
Measure to line or
Measure to arc Calculates the coordinates of a point from its position relative to
the reference line/arc.
Stake to line or Stake to
arc Allows points to be staked relative to the reference line/arc.
Viva Series, Reference Line 771
Next step
Choose Control Job
Stake grid from line or
Stake grid from arc Allows a grid to be staked out relative to the reference line/arc.
Stake alignment Allows points to be staked relative to an alignment. This option
uses line and area data from CAD as simply as possible.
IF THEN
Reference line task:
Stake alignment OK accesses Stake alignment. Refer to "33.8 Staking to Alignment".
Reference line task is
NOT Stake alignment OK accesses Choose Control Job. Refer to "Choose Control Job".
Reference line task Description
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line 772
Description of fields
Next step
OK and continue with the subchapters for the various Reference Line tasks.
Field Option Description
Height to use Selectable list Depending on the task chosen this parameter
controls the following:
• When measuring to a line/arc, it determines the
delta height value which is displayed when points
are being measured.
• When staking to or gridstaking a line/arc, it deter-
mines the height value to be staked out.
Reference line Heights are computed along the reference line/arc.
Start point Heights are computed relative to the height of the
starting point.
DTM The stakeout height is computed from the DTM being
used.
Choose control
job Selectable list The original points to be staked and the reference
lines/arcs are stored in this job.
Viva Series, Reference Line 773
33.3 Configuring Reference Line
Access Press Fn Config.. in the Reference Line Startup, Choose Control Job or the Choose Align-
ment screen.
Configuration,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Show addi-
tional page
from My Survey
Screen
Check box Shows a selectable list for the survey screen pages.
Page to show Selectable list The user-defined survey screen page to be shown. All
survey screens defined in My Survey Screen Settings
be selected.
Viva Series, Reference Line 774
Next step
For all reference line tasks except for Stake alignment, Page changes to the Quality control
page.
For Reference line task: Stake alignment, page changes to the Key points page.
Configuration,
Key points page
This page is only available for Reference line task: Stake alignment.
On this page, the type of horizontal points to be staked is set. Refer to "33.8 Staking to
Alignment" for a graphic and an explanation of the abbreviations.
Description of fields
Use chainages Check box Activates the use of chainages within the reference
line application.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
PC, PT, AP -
Start/end of a curve
& angle point where
two straights meet
Check box Only these horizontal key points are calculated for
staking, skipping the radius and midpoints of arcs
and the angle bisector point on lines.
RP - Radius point of
a curve Check box Additional to other options checked, the radius
point is calculated for staking.
MP - Mid point of a
curve Check box Additional to other options checked, the mid point is
calculated for staking.
BP - Point where
two offset lines
bisect
Check box Additional to other options checked, the bisected
point is calculated for staking.
Viva Series, Reference Line 775
Configuration,
Alignment options page
This page is only available for Reference line task: Stake alignment.
Description of fields
Vertical key points
(VPI, Low, High) Check box Additional to other options checked, the vertical
point of intersection, and the low and high points of
the vertical alignment are calculated for staking.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
After storing
point automati-
cally select
Sets behaviour of the chainage after a point is
stored.
Current point Does not change the chainage after a point is stored.
Previous point
(Ch-) Proceeds to the next key point down chainage after
each stored staked point.
Next point (Ch+) Proceeds to the next key point up chainage after
each stored staked point.
Tangent to use
in void areas Back tangent or
Forward tangent Defines which tangent is used in those areas of the
alignment which does not have points.
Use a different
chainage incre-
ment on curves
Check box Option to use a different chainage increment along a
curve.
Increment Editable field Available when Use a different chainage increment
on curves is checked. Chainage increment to be used
along the small radius curve.
Viva Series, Reference Line 776
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
Configuration,
Quality control page
This page is only available for staking operations.
Description of fields
For radius
under Editable field Available when Use a different chainage increment
on curves is checked. Defines the threshold value of
a small radius curve. For example, a curve with a
radius smaller than this value, uses the chainage
increment defined in the following field.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Check distance
before storing Check box Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordi-
nate difference between the staked point and the
point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded,
the stakeout can be repeated, skipped or stored.
Limit Editable field Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference
which is accepted in the position check.
Check cut/fill
before storing Check box Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference
between the manually measured staked point and
the point to be staked. If the defined Limit is
exceeded, the stakeout can be repeated, skipped or
stored.
Viva Series, Reference Line 777
Next step
Page changes to the Heights page.
Configuration,
Heights page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Graphics page.
Configuration,
Graphics page
This page is only available for staking operations.
Description of fields
Limit Editable field Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the
height check.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Allow design
height of point
to be edited
Check box The design height is the height of the point to be
staked. The initial value is as configured in the
heights field. The value for the desing height can be
changed.
Field Option Description
Navigate direction The reference direction to be used to stakeout
points. The stakeout elements and the graphical
display shown in the Reference Line application are
based on this selection.
Viva Series, Reference Line 778
From instru-
ment The direction of the orientation is from the
instrument to the point to be staked.
To instrument The direction of the orientation is from the
point to be staked to the instrument.
To north The North direction shown in the graphical
display based on the active coordinate system.
To sun The position of the sun calculated from the
current position, the time and the date.
To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no
points are yet staked, To north is used for the first
point to be staked.
To point (cntrl
job) A point from Control job selected in Choose
Control Job.
To point A point from the working job.
To reference
line The direction of the orientation is parallel to the
reference line or the reference arc.
Following
arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current
position to the point to be staked. The graphical
display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of
the point to be staked.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 779
Point Selectable list Available for Navigate direction: To point (cntrl job)
and Navigate direction: To point. To select the point
to be used for orientation.
Navigate using The method of staking out.
Direction &
distance The direction from the orientation reference, the
horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed.
In/out, left/right The distance forwards/backwards to the point, the
distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is
displayed.
Switch to bulls eye
when 0.5m from
target
Check box When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is
shown in the stakeout graphic when less than half a
metre from the point being staked.
Beep faster when
getting close to
point
Check box The instrument beeps when the horizontal radial
distance from the current position to the point to be
staked, is equal to or less than defined in Start
within.
Distance to use Elevation The distance in height is used as indicator.
Horizontal
distance The distance from Easting and Northing is used as
indicator.
Position &
height The distance from Easting, Northing and Height is
used as indicator.
Start within Editable field The horizontal radial distance from the current posi-
tion to the point to be staked when a beep will be
heard.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 780
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Viva Series, Reference Line 781
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line 782
33.4 Choosing Reference Lines/Arcs
33.4.1 Overview
Description There are two ways by which a reference line/arc can be defined.
Manually Enter
• A reference line/arc can be defined by manually entering known parameters.
• The line is only temporary and is not stored once the Reference Line application has been
exited.
Select from Job
• Reference lines/arcs can be created, edited, stored and deleted in the Choose Control
Job.
• The reference lines/arcs can be recalled for use later.
Viva Series, Reference Line 783
33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc
Access Press OK in Choose Control Job.
Reference Line To Use/
Reference Arc To Use,
Reference page
The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid as indicated.
For all point fields, the MapView interactive display can be used to select the desired point.
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and continue with the
subsequent screen.
Survy..
To manually measure a point. Available
when a point field is highlighted.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Create line
using Select one of the following options to enter a refer-
ence line manually.
2 points For lines. Uses two known points to define the refer-
ence line.
Viva Series, Reference Line 784
Pt, brng, dist,
grade For lines. Defines the reference line using a known
point, a distance, an azimuth and the gradient of the
line.
Pt, brng, dist, Δht For lines. The same as Pt, brng, dist, grade but uses
the difference in height instead of the gradient.
3 points For arcs. Defines the reference arc using three known
points.
2 points/radius For arcs. Defines the reference arc with two known
points and a known radius.
Select existing line
or Select existing
arc
Refer to "33.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from
the Job"
Δ height Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using:Pt, brng,
dist, Δht.
The difference in height from the start point to the
end point of the reference line.
Arc distance Display only Available for arcs. The horizontal grid distance along
the arc between the three points. If the distance
cannot be calculated, ----- is displayed.
Azimuth Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using:Pt, brng,
dist, grade and Create line using:Pt, brng, dist, Δht.
The azimuth of the reference line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 785
Chainage Editable field Available when Use chainages in Configuration,
General page is checked. Defines the chainage of the
start point of the reference line/arc. The input format
depends on the selection for Chainage format in
Regional Settings, Distance page.
End point Selectable list For lines: Available for Create line using:2 points.
For arcs: Available for Create line using:2
points/radius.
The last point forming the reference line/arc.
Grade Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using:Pt, brng,
dist, grade.
The gradient of the line from the start point to the
end point of the reference line.
Horiz distance Editable field For lines: Available for Create line using:Pt, brng,
dist, grade and Create line using:Pt, brng, dist, Δht.
The horizontal grid distance from the start point to
the end point of the reference line.
Line length Display only For lines. The horizontal grid distance between the
two points of the line. If the distance cannot be
calculated, ----- is displayed.
Radius Editable field For arcs: Available for Create line using:2
points/radius.
The radius of the reference arc.
Second Point Selectable list For arcs: Available for Create line using:3 points.
The medium point forming the reference arc.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 786
Next step
Page changes to the Slope page, Line shifts page and the Map page. For information on
the Slope and Line shifts pages, refer to "33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc
Slopes"and"33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts".
Start point Selectable list For lines: Available for Create line using:2 points and
Create line using:Pt, brng, dist, grade.
For arcs: Available for Create line using:2
points/radius and Create line using:3 points.
The first point forming the reference line/arc.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 787
33.4.3 Selecting a Reference Line/Arc from the Job
Access Press OK in Choose Control Job.
Description New reference lines/arcs can be created, existing reference lines/arcs can be edited and
previously entered reference lines/arcs can be selected from the control job.
Reference Line To Use/
Reference Arc To Use,
Reference page
Refer to "33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc" for a description of softkeys.
Description of fields
Next step
For a description of the other pages refer to "33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Slopes"
and "33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts".
Highlight Reference line or Reference arc and press to access Manage Reference
Lines/Manage Reference Arcs.
Field Option Description
Create line
using / Create
arc using
Select existing line
or Select existing
arc
Select these options to enter a reference line/arc
manually. For the other available options refer to
"33.4.2 Manually Entering a Reference Line/Arc".
Reference line Selectable list The reference line to be used. If the desired refer-
ence line must be created, edited or selected, high-
light this field and press .
Reference arc Selectable list The reference arc to be used. Open the list to select
an arc. If the desired reference arc must be created,
edited or selected, highlight this field and press .
Viva Series, Reference Line 788
Manage Reference
Lines/Manage Refer-
ence Arcs
Apart from the screen name the appearance of the screen and the functionality of the
softkeys is the same for reference lines and arcs.
Description of columns
OK
To select the highlighted reference line/arc
and to return to the screen from where this
screen was accessed.
New..
To create a reference line/arc. The fields are
the same as for manually creating a refer-
ence line/arc. Refer to "33.4.2 Manually
Entering a Reference Line/Arc".
Edit..
To edit a reference line/arc. The fields are
the same as for manually creating a refer-
ence line/arc. "33.4.2 Manually Entering a
Reference Line/Arc".
Delete
To delete a reference line/arc.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
Name Names of all the reference lines/arcs available in the control job.
Date Date that the reference line/arc was created.
Viva Series, Reference Line 789
Viva Series, Reference Line 790
33.4.4 Defining Reference Line/Arc Slopes
Description It is possible to measure points and stake points on slopes related to a reference line/arc.
A slope can be defined and cut/fill values can then be displayed to the slope when measuring
along the reference line/arc. The slope is a plane from the reference line/arc and extends
along the length of the reference line/arc.
Slopes can be used when, measuring to a reference line/arc, staking a point relative to a
reference line/arc, or performing a grid stakeout relative to a reference line/arc.
Reference Line To Use/
Reference Arc To Use,
Slope page
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to return to
the previous screen.
Info..
To edit the screen page which will be
displayed for slopes.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit Reference Line application.
Field Option Description
Define & use
slope Check box Check to define a slope.
Slope direction The method how the slope is created.
Viva Series, Reference Line 791
Next step
Info.. to edit the screen page.
Slope Information to
Show Description of all values which can be displayed on the Slope screen page
Left down Creates a downward plane extending to the left of
the defined reference line/arc.
Right down Creates a downward plane extending to the right of
the defined reference line/arc.
Left up Creates an upward plane extending to the left of the
defined reference line/arc.
Right up Creates an upward plane extending to the right of the
defined reference line/arc.
Slope grade Editable field Inclination of the slope.
Horizontal
offset to hinge Editable field Horizontal offset from the line/arc that sets where
the slope starts.
Vertical offset
to hinge Editable field Vertical offset from the line/arc that sets where the
slope starts.
Field Option Description
Field Description
Antenna height To enter the antenna height.
Chainage Displays the current chainage.
Current slope Displays the current slope of the target position to the hinge.
Viva Series, Reference Line 792
Design slope Displays the slope grade as defined by the user.
Easting Displays the Easting coordinate of the current target position.
Elevation Displays the Height value of the current target position.
Line space full Insert full line space.
Line space half Insert half line space.
Northing Displays the Northing coordinate of the current target position.
Point ID To enter the point ID.
Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate quality of
computed position.
Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of
computed position.
RTK positions Display only field for the number of positions recorded over
the period of point measurement. Appears in the survey screen page
of real-time rover configurations.
SD to hinge Displays the slope distance offset from the hinge to measured point.
SD to line Displays the slope distance offset from line/arc to measured point.
Slope cut/fill Displays the value of the difference between the actual target eleva-
tion to the slope elevation at that position. A cut is above the slope.
A fill is below the slope.
Start chainage Displays the starting chainage as defined by the user.
Target height To enter the target height.
Field Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 793
∆ end of line/arc Displays the horizontal distance from the end point of the line/arc to
the base point of the measured point, along the line/arc.
∆ ht hinge Displays the delta height from the current position to the hinge.
∆ ht line Displays the delta height from the current position to the line/arc.
∆ line/arc Displays the horizontal distance from the start point of the line/arc
to the base point of the measured point, along the line/arc.
∆ offset Displays the perpendicular offset from the line/arc to measured
point.
∆ offset hinge Displays the perpendicular offset from the hinge to measured point.
Field Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 794
33.4.5 Defining Reference Line/Arc Shifts
Description A reference line can be offset, shifted and rotated, a reference arc can be offset.
Diagram Reference line shifts
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P0a Start point with Height offset
P1a End point with Height offset
P0b Start point with Shift line left/right
P1b End point with Shift line left/right
P0c Start point with Shift line
forward/back
P1c End point with Shift line
forward/back
P1d End point with Rotate line
d1 Height offset
d2 Shift line left/right
d3 Shift line forward/back
αRotate line
d2
d3
d1
P0
P0b
P0a P0c
P1a
P1 P1b
P1c
P1d
GS_018
Viva Series, Reference Line 795
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P1a Start point with Height offset
P2a End point with Height offset
P1b Start point with Shift line left/right
P2b End point with Shift line left/right
P1c Start point with Shift line
forward/back
P2c End point with Shift line
forward/back
P2d End point with Rotate line
d1 Height offset
d2 Shift line left/right
d3 Shift line forward/back
αRotate line
TS_024
d2
d3
d1
P1
P1b
P1a P1c
P2a
P2
P2b
P2c
P2d
P0
Viva Series, Reference Line 796
Reference arc shifts
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P0a Start point with Height offset
P1a End point with Height offset
P0b Start point with Shift arc left/right
P1b End point with Shift arc left/right
d1 Height offset
d2 Shift arc left/right
r1 Radius before shift
r2 Radius after shift
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P1a Start point with Height offset
P2a End point with Height offset
P1b Start point with Shift arc left/right
P2b End point with Shift arc left/right
d1 Height offset
d2 Shift arc left/right
r1 Radius before shift
r2 Radius after shift
GS_019
d1
P0b
P1a
P1
r2
P0a
d2
P0
P1b
r1
TS_025
d1
P1b
P2a
P2
P2b
r1 r2
P1a
d2
P1
P0
Viva Series, Reference Line 797
Reference Line To Use/
Reference Arc To Use,
Line shifts page
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the selections and to return to
the previous screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Fn Quit
To exit Reference Line application.
Field Option Description
Shift line Check box Check to define an offset.
Shift line
left/right or
Shift arc
left/right
Editable field Distance to offset the reference line/arc horizontally
to the left or right.
)When an offset is applied to an arc the radius
of the arc changes.
Shift line
forward/back Editable field Available for lines unless Height to use:Reference
line in Choose Control Job. Distance to shift the
reference line horizontally forward or back.
Vertical shift Editable field Available for Height to use:Start point and Height to
use:Reference line. The vertical offset of the refer-
ence line/arc.
Viva Series, Reference Line 798
Rotate line Editable field Available for lines unless Height to use:Reference
line in Choose Control Job. Angle by which to rotate
the reference line.
DTM Offset Editable field Available for Height to use:DTM. The vertical offset
of the DTM model.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 799
33.5 Measuring to a Reference Line/Arc
Description The horizontal and vertical position and the chainage of a manually measured point can be
calculated relative to the defined reference line/arc.
Measure to line - hori-
zontal measurements
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Measured point
P3 Reference point
d1 ∆ offset
d2 ∆ line
d3 ∆ end of line
d4 Check Dist 1
d5 Check Dist 2
Viva Series, Reference Line 800
Measure to line -
vertical measurements
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Measured point
P4 Reference point
d1 ∆ offset
d2 ∆ line
d3 ∆ end of line
d4 Check Dist 1
d5 Check Dist 2
TS_026 P1
P2
P3
d2
d3
d1
d5
d4
P4
P0
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Measured point
P3 Reference point
P4 Temporary point
P5 Horizontal base point
d1 ∆ ht line
d2 ∆ perp dist
d3 ∆ spatial dist
d4 ∆ ht start of line
d5 ∆ perp height
P0
P1
d2
d5
d3
P3
P5
P4
d1
d4
P2
GS_021
Viva Series, Reference Line 801
Measure to arc - hori-
zontal measurements
Target point inside arc
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Measured point
P4 Reference point
P5 Temporary point
P6 Horizontal base point
d1 ∆ ht line
d2 ∆ perp dist
d3 ∆ spatial dist
d4 ∆ ht start of line
d5 ∆ perp height
TS_027
P1
P2
d2
d5
d3
P4
P6
P5
d1
d4
P3
P0
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Measured point
P3 Reference point
d1 ∆ offset
d2 ∆ arc
d3 ∆ end of arc
d4 Check Dist 1
d5 Check Dist 2
d2
d3
d5
d1
d4
P3
P0
P2
P1
GS_022
Viva Series, Reference Line 802
Target point outside arc
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Measured point
P4 Reference point
d1 ∆ offset
d2 ∆ arc
d3 ∆ end of arc
d4 Check Dist 1
d5 Check Dist 2
P0 Start point
p1 End point
P2 Measured point
P3 Reference point
d1 ∆ offset
d2 ∆ arc
d3 ∆ end of arc
d4 Check Dist 1
d5 Check Dist 2
TS_028
d2
d3
d5
d1
d4
P4
P1
P3
P2
P0
d2
d3
d5
d1
d4 P3
P0
P2
P1
GS_023
Viva Series, Reference Line 803
Measure to arc -
vertical measurements
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Measured point
P4 Reference point
d1 ∆ offset
d2 ∆ arc
d3 ∆ end of arc
d4 Check Dist 1
d5 Check Dist 2
TS_029
d3
d5
d1
d4 P4
P1
P3
P2
P0
d2
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Measured point
P3 Reference point
d1 ∆ ht start of line
d2 ∆ ht arc
P0
P1
P3
d1
P2
d2
GS_024
Viva Series, Reference Line 804
Measure Points,
Ref Line/Ref Arc page
An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used.
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Measured point
P4 Reference point
d1 ∆ ht start of line
d2 ∆ ht arc
TS_030 P1
P2
P4
d1
d2
P3
P0
Meas
To start measuring the point being
staked. The key changes to Stop. The differ-
ence between the current position and the
point being staked is still displayed.
To measure a distance and store
distance and angles.
Viva Series, Reference Line 805
Stop
To end measuring the point being staked.
When Automatically stop point measure-
ment is checked in Quality Control, General
page recording of positions ends automati-
cally as defined by the stop criteria. The
position mode icon changes to the moving
icon. The key changes to Store.
Store
To store the measured point. When
Automatically store point is checked in
Quality Control, General page, the meas-
ured point is stored automatically. The key
changes to Meas.
To store angles and distance.
Distance must be measured before.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Line..
To define/select a reference line/arc.
Stake..
To define reference line offsets to be
staked out in relation to the reference line.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to
"33.3 Configuring Reference Line".
Viva Series, Reference Line 806
The fields available depend on the options chosen for Height to use in Choose Control Job
and the Reference line task selected in Reference Line Startup. The following fields are
always available:
Fn Conect and Fn Disco
To dial the number of the base station
configured in the active working style and to
hang up immediately after the survey is
completed. Available when Meas or Store is
displayed and for real-time devices of type
digital cellular phone or modem. Available
when Auto connect when measuring is not
checked in RTK Rover Settings, General
page.
Fn Init
To select an initialisation method and to
force a new initialisation. Available when
Meas or Store is displayed and for working
styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer
to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover
Operations".
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line 807
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the point to be measured.
Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height. Changing the
antenna height here does not update the default
antenna height as defined in the active working style.
The changed antenna height is used until the applica-
tion is exited.
Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested. An
individual target height can be typed in.
∆ offset Display only Perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc
measured from the reference point to the measured
point.
For reference arcs, ∆ offset, ∆ arc and ∆ end of arc
values are always calculated to produce the smallest
∆ offset possible. To ensure the smallest ∆ offset
possible, the arc will be extended if necessary. Refer
to paragraph "Measure to arc - horizontal measure-
ments".
Chainage Display only Chainage of the current position along the line/arc.
This value is the chainage of the start of the refer-
ence line/arc plus ∆ line/∆ arc.
Check Dist 1 Display only Horizontal distance from start point to measured
point.
Viva Series, Reference Line 808
For task Measure to line
Description of fields
For task Measure to arc
Description of fields
Check Dist 2 Display only Horizontal distance from end point to measured
point.
Field Option Description
∆ line Display only Horizontal distance along the reference line from the
start point to the reference point.
∆ end of line Display only Horizontal distance along the reference line from the
end point to the reference point.
Field Option Description
∆ arc Display only Horizontal distance along the reference arc from the
start point to the reference point.
∆ end of arc Display only Horizontal distance along the reference arc from the
reference point to the end point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 809
For task Measure to line/Measure to arc, Height to use: Start point and Allow design
height of point to be edited is not checked in the Configuration Heights page.
Description of fields
For task Measure to line, Height to use:Reference line and Allow design height of point
to be edited is not checked in the Configuration Heights page.
Description of fields
Field Option Description
∆ ht start of line Display only Height difference between the start point and the
measured point.
Elevation Display only Height of measured point.
Field Option Description
∆ ht line Display only Height difference between the temporary point on
the reference line and the measured point.
Elevation Display only Height of measured point.
∆ perp dist Display only Slope distance between the reference point and the
measured point, perpendicular to the reference line.
∆ perp height Display only Slope distance between the reference point and the
horizontal base point.
∆ spatial dist Display only Slope distance between the start point and the refer-
ence point.
Viva Series, Reference Line 810
For task Measure to arc, Height to use: Reference line and Allow design height of point
to be edited is not checked in the Configuration Heights page.
Description of fields
For task Measure to line, Height to use: DTM and Allow design height of point to be edited
is not checked in the Configuration Heights page.
Description of fields
For any task and height type and Allow design height of point to be edited is checked
in the Configuration Heights page.
Description of fields
Field Option Description
∆ ht arc Display only Height difference between the reference point on
the arc and the measured point.
Elevation Display only Height of measured point.
Field Option Description
∆ ht DTM Display only Height difference between the measured point and
the DTM.
Elevation Display only Height of measured point.
Field Option Description
Design Ht Editable field The design height of the target point can be entered.
∆ ht design Display only Height difference between the Design Ht: and the
height of the measured point.
Viva Series, Reference Line 811
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is
• the horizontal distance or chainage along the reference line/arc from the start point to
the reference point.
• the perpendicular offset from the reference line/arc measured from the reference point
to the measured point.
Viva Series, Reference Line 812
33.6 Staking to a Reference Line/Arc
Description Allows for the position of a point to be defined relative to a reference line/arc and then
staked.
Stake to line - hori-
zontal measurements
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
d1 Offset
d2 Dist along line
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Target point
P4 Reference point
d1 Offset
d2 Dist along line
P0
P1
P2
d2
d1
P3
GS_003
TS_031 P1
P2
P3
d2 d1
P4
P0
Viva Series, Reference Line 813
Stake to line - vertical
measurements
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
d1 Height offset, for Height to use:Start
point
d2 Vertical shift, for Height to
use:Reference line
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Target point
P4 Reference point
d1 Height offset, for Height to use:Start
point
d2 Vertical shift, for Height to
use:Reference line
GS_025
P0
P1
P3
d2
d1
P2
TS_032
P1
P2
P4
d2
d1
P3
P0
Viva Series, Reference Line 814
Stake to arc - hori-
zontal measurements
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
d1 Offset
d2 Along arc
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Target point
P4 Reference point
d1 Offset
d2 Along arc
P0
P1
P3
d2
d1
P2
GS_004
TS_033
P0
P1
P2
P4
d2
d1
P3
Viva Series, Reference Line 815
Stake to arc - vertical
measurements
P0 Start point
P1 End point
P2 Target point
P3 Reference point
d1 Vertical shift, for Height to use:Start
point
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
P3 Target point
P4 Reference point
d1 Vertical shift, for Height to use:Start
point
P0
P1
P3
d1
P2
d2
GS_024
TS_030
P1
P2
P4
d1
d2
P3
P0
Viva Series, Reference Line 816
Define Point to Stake This screen is for typing in the stakeout values for a point relative to the reference line/arc.
The fields available depend on the options chosen for Height to use in Choose Control Job
and the Reference line task selected in Reference Line Startup. The following fields are
always available:
The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid in all cases.
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Line..
To define/select a reference line/arc.
Survy..
To measure a point relative to the reference
line/arc.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to
"33.3 Configuring Reference Line".
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line 817
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The point ID of the target point to be staked.
Offset Editable field The offset from the reference point to the target
point.
Dist along line Editable field Available for Reference line task:Stake to line. Hori-
zontal distance from the start point to the reference
point along the reference line.
Along arc Editable field Available for Reference line task:Stake to arc. Hori-
zontal distance from the start point to the reference
point along the reference arc.
Chainage Editable field Chainage along the line/arc. This value is the
chainage of the start of the reference line/arc plus
Dist along line/Along arc.
Height offset Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to
be edited is not checked unless Height to use:DTM.
The height offset of the target point.
•For Height to use:Start point
The height of the target point is calculated as the
height of the start point plus Height offset.
•For Height to use:Reference line
The height of the target point is calculated as the
height of the reference point plus Height offset.
Viva Series, Reference Line 818
Next step
OK to accept changes and continue to Stakeout. Refer to "42.4 Staking Out".
Design height Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to
be edited is checked. The design height of the target
point.
•For Height to use:Start point
The suggested height is the height of the start
point.
•For Height to use:Reference line
The suggested height is the height of the refer-
ence point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 819
33.7 Gridstaking to a Reference Line/Arc
Description A grid can be defined relative to a reference line/arc and points staked out in that defined
grid.
Stake grid from line Start at Begin
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
P0
P1
d1
d2
d3
GS_026
Viva Series, Reference Line 820
Current Grid Pt
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
TS_034
P0
P1
P2
d1
d2
d3
P0
P1
d1
d3 d2
GS_027
Viva Series, Reference Line 821
Stake grid from arc Start at Begin
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
TS_035
P1
P2
d1
d3 d2
P0
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
P0
P1
d1
d2
d3
GS_028
Viva Series, Reference Line 822
Current Grid Pt
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
P0 Start point
P1 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
TS_036
P1
P2
d1
d2
d3
P0
d3
P0
P1
d1
d2
GS_029
Viva Series, Reference Line 823
Define Grid to be Staked
P0 Instrument station
P1 Start point
P2 End point
d1 Distance along line to first grid point
d2 Grid spacing along line
d3 Grid spacing across line
TS_037
P1
P2
d1
d2
d3
P0
OK
To confirm the selections and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Line..
To return to the Reference Line To
Use/Reference Arc To Use screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to
"33.3 Configuring Reference Line".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line 824
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Distance along
line to first grid
point
Editable field Distance along the reference line/arc from the start
point to the first target point to be staked.
Chainage Editable field Chainage of the first target point to be staked along
the line/arc. This value is the chainage of the start of
the reference line/arc plus the Distance along line to
first grid point.
Grid spacing
along line Editable field Spacing between points on the grid line.
Grid spacing
across line Editable field Spacing between grid lines.
Stake next grid
line Method by which the grid will be staked out.
In same direction Each new grid line is started at the same end as
where the previous grid line started.
In reverse direc-
tion Each new grid line is started at the same end as
where the previous grid line finished.
Store point
using Determines the format of the point ID for grid points.
Grid reference Point ID is shown as the position of the grid being
staked, where +yyy.yy is the chainage position along
the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset.
Viva Series, Reference Line 825
Next step
OK to accept changes and continue to the stakeout screen.
Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx The title of this screen indicates the position of the grid being staked, where +yyy.yy is the
chainage position along the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset.
The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between the
two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "42.4 Staking Out" for all other key and
field explanations.
Pt ID template The point ID template as defined in the active
working style is used. The point ID template can be
defined in Main Menu:User\Work settings.
Field Option Description
Skip
To skip the currently displayed chainage and
increment to the next chainage. Available
when Meas is displayed.
Line+
To start staking the next grid line. The posi-
tion of the first point on the new line is
determined by the option selected for Stake
next grid line. Available when Meas is
displayed.
Viva Series, Reference Line 826
Description of fields
Field Option Description
First field on the
screen
Editable field The point ID of the grid point to be staked. The point
ID is based on the selection for Store point using in
Define Grid to be Staked. If a different point ID is
typed in, the next point ID will still be shown as the
next automatically computed point ID.
Elevation Display only Available when Allow height of point being staked to
be edited is not checked in the configuration.
The orthometric height of the current position is
displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be
displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it
is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height,
the WGS 1984 height is displayed.
Design Ht Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to
be edited is checked in the configuration.
The design height, which is the orthometric height of
the target point to be staked, is displayed. If the
orthometric height cannot be displayed, the local
ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to
display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984
height is displayed.
If a design height has been entered and Skip or Line+
is used, the true grid height for the next point is
shown as the suggested height.
Viva Series, Reference Line 827
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is
• the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked.
• the height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point
to be staked.
Viva Series, Reference Line 828
33.8 Staking to Alignment
33.8.1 Overview
Description The reference line task Stake alignment allows points to be staked relative to an alignment.
This option uses line and area data from CAD as simply as possible.
Preparing the data Line data can be created by one of the following methods:
Method Description
Data from CAD Selecting the alignments in the drawing that you want to
stake in the field and saving them into a DXF file.
Manually creating lines with
existing points
In some cases, DXF files are not available to create lines
and areas. If so, the lines can be created from uploaded
points using the line management function. Refer to
"5.4.3 Editing a Line/Area".
Measuring lines in the field It is also possible to create the lines to be staked by
measuring points in the field. Lines can be made using
the linework commands in the Survey page. Also, taking
measurements with line objects open as well using the
Data, Lines page or line codes can create lines.
Any line that is listed in the Data, Lines page can be used
for staking in this application.
Using Design to Field Using the Design to Field tool of LEICA Geo Office, the
user is able to bring in lines from multitudes of formats.
For example, XML, DXF, Microstation XML and many
more. Refer to LGO Online Help for information on
Design to Field.
Viva Series, Reference Line 829
Options to convert the
DXF file to a job
To help with the electronic transfer of lines, from the plans to the surveying instrument,
different tools have been created to read DXF format into a SmartWorx Viva job.
)Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for the placements of the
data files on the data storage device.
Using Alignment Editor Using the Alignment Editor application, a simple center-
line alignment can be created and be imported in Stake
alignment.
)Only straight and curve elements are supported.
The alignment created with the Alignment Editor
application has to be converted to a RoadRunner
Job.
Creating Lines in LGO It is possible as well to create the necessary lines in LGO.
Refer to LGO Online Help.
Method Description
DXF Import: Copy the DXF files to the \Data directory on the data storage device of
the Viva Series instrument. Once the card is back in the instrument the
DXF import program can be used to bring the lines into the job.
Design to Field: This module is included in LEICA Geo Office and allows the conversion
of DXF files into a SmartWorx Viva job. This method makes the task of
transferring several lines into a single job quick and efficient.
Viva Series, Reference Line 830
33.8.2 Accessing Staking an Alignment & Choosing an Alignment
Access step-by-step Select the task Stake alignment in Reference Line Startup and press OK.
Choose Alignment
Description of fields
OK
To select the highlighted alignment and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Rprt..
To view an alignment report.
Fn Config..
To configure the Reference Line application.
Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to
"33.3 Configuring Reference Line".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Choose align-
ment Selectable list The alignment to use.
Height to use Reference line Heights are computed along the reference line/arc.
Start point Heights are computed relative to the height of the
starting point.
DTM The stakeout height is computed from the DTM being
used.
Viva Series, Reference Line 831
Next step
Rprt.. to access Alignment Report.
Alignment Report,
Points page
Lines can be either 2D or 3D depending on the input data and are shown as such.
Next step
Page changes to the Map page.
OK
To return to the screen from which this
screen was accessed.
Edit..
To edit details of the highlighted point.
Save..
To save the alignment report.
More
To change the values displayed between
Msd offset, Cut/fill, Msd elevation, Design
elevation, Point ID and Pt code.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line 832
33.8.3 Stake Parameters
Description This screen allows defining operating parameters while the Coords and Map pages allow
validating the points to be staked.
Access OK in Choose Alignment.
Stake,
Parameters page
OK
To accept the parameters and to continue
with the subsequent screen.
Rprt..
To view an alignment report.
Ch-
To decrease the chainage value, down
chainage, by the defined chainage interval
Chainage incremnt.
Ch+
To increase the chainage value, up
chainage, by the defined chainage interval
Chainage incremnt.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn BOP
To return the chainage value to the begin-
ning of the project.
Fn EOP
To send the chainage value to the end of
project.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Reference Line 833
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Coords page. This page allows validation of the coordinate values of
the point to be staked.
Field Option Description
Alignment name Display only The name of the selected alignment.
Start chainage Display only The beginning chainage of the line.
)The start chainage can be edited from Line
Selection, Lines page with Edit...
Length Display only The length of the line.
End chainage Display only The chainage of the end of the line.
Chainage Editable field The chainage to be staked initially. Any chainage can
be entered.
Offset Editable field The distance to stake off the line. Any value
between -2000 m and 2000 m can be entered.
Vertical shift Editable field To shift the line vertically. The best example of the
use of this feature is a situation where all grades of
the line are finish grade, but the stakes are set
referenced to subgrade.
Chainage incremnt Editable field The interval at which chainages will be staked. Incre-
menting begins from Chainage.
Viva Series, Reference Line 834
Page changes to the Map page. This page allows visualisation of the position of the points.
Top line shows the current horizontal geometry as well as any horizontal or vertical key
points.
Viva Series, Reference Line 835
33.8.4 Staking Operation
Description Once in the Stakeout screens, the user is guided to reach design positions.
Basic rules for polyline
stakeout
P1 BOP - Beginning of project
P2 PC - Beginning of curve
P3 RP - Radius point
P4 PT - End of curve
P5 PI - Point of intersection
P6 AP - Angle point
P7 EOP - End of project
P1’ BOP - Beginning of project
P2’ PC - Beginning of curve
P3’ PI - Point of intersection
P4’ PT - End of curve
P5’ AP-B - Angle point, back tangent
P6’ BP - Bisected point
P7’ AP-F - Angle point, forward tangent
P8’ EOP - End of project
a) General terms:
b) Curve - Curve segment
c) Extension - Line extension
d) MCP - Mid curve point
e) Straight - Straight segment
SYS13_010
P3
P4
P5
P2
P2’
P1’
P3’
P4’
P5’
P7’
P6’
P6
P7 P8’
P1
Viva Series, Reference Line 836
Access OK in Stake.
Stakeout,
Stake page
The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between the
two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "42.4 Staking Out" for all other key and
field explanations.
Description of fields
Ch-
To decrease the chainage value, down
chainage, by the defined chainage interval
Chainage incremnt.
Ch+
To increase the chainage value, up
chainage, by the defined chainage interval
Chainage incremnt.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Pt Editable field The point ID of the point to be staked.
hA Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the
active working style is suggested.
Viva Series, Reference Line 837
Next step
Page changes to the Details page.
Stakeout,
Details page
This page shows a live version of more information regarding the staked point.
Description of fields
Hr Editable field The last used target height as defined is
suggested. An individual target height can be typed
in.
Ch Editable field The current chainage to be staked.
Of Editable field Current offset being staked.
ME Display only Measured elevation. The orthometric height of the
current position is displayed.
DE Display only Design elevation. The orthometric height of the point
to be staked is displayed.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Pt Editable field Point ID of the point being staked.
Antenna height Editable field The height of the antenna.
Target height Editable field The height of the target.
Design Chainage Editable field The design chainage to be staked.
Msd chainage Display only The chainage of the current position.
Design offset Editable field The design offset to be staked.
Viva Series, Reference Line 838
Msd offset Display only The offset of the current position from the align-
ment.
Design elevation Editable field The design elevation, which is the orthometric
height of the point to be staked, is displayed.
Msd elevation Display only The height of the current position.
Cut/Fill Display only The height difference from the height of the current
position to the height of the point to be staked.
Fill Display only The positive height difference from the height of the
current position to the height of the point to be
staked. Move up.
Go forward Display only The horizontal distance along the line defined by
station and reflector from the current position to
the point to be staked.
Go back Display only The horizontal distance in reverse direction from the
line defined by station and reflector from the
current position to the point to be staked.
Go right Display only The direction depends on the selection for Navigate
direction in Configuration, General page. The hori-
zontal distance orthogonal to the right of the line
defined by station and reflector from the current
position to the point to be staked.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 839
Next step
Page changes to the Map page.
Go left Display only The direction depends on the selection for Navigate
direction in Configuration, General page. The hori-
zontal distance from the current position to the
point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the line
defined by station and reflector.
Measured slope Display only The slope between the current position and the
alignment.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Line 840
33.8.5 Results of Stakeout
Access This screen opens automatically once a point is measured and stored
Results,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To return to the Stake screen.
Elev..
To add a vertical offset to the design height
and to display the new height.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The point ID of the point staked.
Msd chainage Display only The chainage measured at the staked point.
Msd offset Display only The offset from the alignment measured at the
staked point.
Design elevation Display only The entered design elevation.
Msd elevation Display only The height measured at the staked point.
Viva Series, Reference Line 841
Next step
Page changes to the Coords page. This page displays the design coordinates as well as the
differences between design and measured coordinates.
Page changes to the Code where codes can be selected or typed in.
Page changes to the Map page. This page provides an interactive display of the data.
Cut/Fill Display only The height difference between the Design elevation
and the Msd elevation.
Annot 1 Display only Fixed value recorded for certain software packages.
Annot 2 to Annot 4 Editable field Available for additional notes.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Plane 842
34 Reference Plane
34.1 Overview
Description The Reference Plane application can be used to measure points relative to a reference plane.
A reference plane can also be scanned in a predefined grid.
Reference plane tasks The Reference Plane application can be used for the following tasks:
• Measuring points to calculate and store the perpendicular distance to the plane.
• Viewing and storing the instrument and/or local coordinates of the measured points.
• Viewing and storing the height difference from the measured points to the plane.
• Scanning a defined area.
)Planes can only be computed with grid coordinates.
) Face scan is available for motorised instruments with reflectorless EDM.
Activating the applica-
tion
The Reference Plane application must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load
licence keys" for information on how to activate the application.
Properties of measured
points
The properties stored with measured points are:
• Class: Either Meas or for also Nav depending on the position status when the
point was measured.
• Sub class:
•Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed.
•TPS
•Source:
•Ref Plane (Meas)
Viva Series, Reference Plane 843
• for Scan: Ref Plane (Scan)
• Instrument source: GPS or TPS
Defining a reference
plane
Reference planes are created using a right hand system. For two points defining a plane, a
vertical plane is used. A reference plane is defined with the X axis and the Z axis of the plane.
The Y axis of the plane defines the positive direction of the plane. A reference plane can be
defined in the following ways:
•vertical
•tilted
• horizontal
P1 Point defining reference plane
P2 Point defining reference plane
P3 Point defining reference plane
P4 Point defining reference plane
P5 Point defining reference plane
GS_058
P2
P4
P5
P1 P3
Viva Series, Reference Plane 844
)• : The Reference Plane application is applicable for tilted and horizontal plane defi-
nitions.
• : The Reference Plane application is applicable for tilted, horizontal and vertical
plane definitions.
Tilted plane Any number of points define the plane. The axes of the tilted reference plane are:
P0 Instrument station
P1 Point defining reference plane
P2 Point defining reference plane
P3 Point defining reference plane
P4 Measured point
P5 Measured point
TS_039
P1
P0
P3
P2
P4
P5
X axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane
Z axis: Defined by steepest direction of the plane
Y axis: Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined
)Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis.
For :
Viva Series, Reference Plane 845
For :
GS_059
Z
Y
a
b
X
P1
GS_060
Z
a
b
Y
XP1
TS_041
Z
Y
a
b
X
P1
TS_041a
aZ
b
Y
XP1
Viva Series, Reference Plane 846
Horizontal plane The axes of the horizontal reference plane are:
aHeight
bEasting
NNorthing
P1 Origin of plane
X X axis of plane
YY axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane
X axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane
Z axis: Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined
Y axis: Parallel to the plane
)Offsets are applied in the direction of the Z axis.
For :
GS_114
a
b
P1
Z
Y
X
GS_115
a
b
P1
Z
Y
X
Viva Series, Reference Plane 847
aHeight
bEasting
NNorthing
P1 Origin of plane
X X axis of plane
YY axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane
For :
aHeight
bEasting
NNorthing
P1 Origin of plane
P2 Point of plane
X X axis of plane
Y Y axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane
TS_066
P1
Z
Y
X
P2
a
bTS_066a
Z
a
b
P1
Y
X
P2
Viva Series, Reference Plane 848
Vertical plane The axes of the vertical reference plane are:
X axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane; X axis starts in point defined as origin
point
Z axis: Parallel to the instrument zenith and parallel to the plane
Y axis: Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined
)Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis.
aHeight
bEasting
NNorthing
P1 Origin of plane
P2 Point of plane
X X axis of plane
Y Y axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane
TS_040
P1
Z
Y
X
P2
a
bTS_040a
Z
a
b
P1
Y
X
P2
Viva Series, Reference Plane 849
)With four or more points, a least squares adjustment is calculated resulting in a best fit
plane.
Origin The origin of the reference plane can be defined to be in the plane coordinates or in relation
to the national coordinate system.
Positive direction of
plane
The positive direction of the plane is defined by the direction of the Y axis. The direction of
the Y axis can be redefined by selecting a point on the desired side of the plane.
Offset of the plane
P1 Origin of plane
X X axis of plane
YY axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane
d1 Positive offset
d2 Negative offset
P1 Origin of plane
P2 Point defining offset of plane
P2’ P2 projected on original plane
d1 Offset defined by P2
X X axis of plane
Y Y axis of plane
Z Z axis of plane
TS_038
Y
P1
Z
X
d1
d2
TS_039
Y
Z
X
P2
P2'
P1
d1
Viva Series, Reference Plane 850
34.2 Accessing Reference Plane
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Reference plane.
Choose Task & Plane
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and to continue with the
subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the reference plane. Refer to
"34.5 Configuring Reference Plane".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Task Measure to plane The coordinates of measured points are calculated
relative to the reference plane.
Scan Measures a sequence of points along a
vertical, tilted or horizontal face.
Plane to use Create new plane Defines a new reference plane.
Select from job Reference plane is selected in Ref plane name.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 851
Next step
Ref plane name Selectable list Available for Plane to use:Select from job. The
reference plane to be used. Accesses Manage
Reference Planes.
No. of points Display only Available for Plane to use:Select from job. Number
of points used for plane definition for the plane
shown in Ref plane name.
Std deviation Display only Standard deviation of used points for plane defini-
tion. ----- is displayed for less than four points.
Max ∆dDisplay only Maximum distance between a point and the calcu-
lated plane. ----- is displayed for less than four
points.
Offset Display only The offset method used as defined in New Refer-
ence Plane/Edit Reference Plane, Offset page.
Origin Display only The origin method used as defined in New Refer-
ence Plane/Edit Reference Plane, Offset page.
IF THEN
a new plane is to be
created
OK accesses New Reference Plane, General page. Refer to "34.3
Creating/Editing a Reference Plane".
a new plane is to be
selected
open the selectable list for Ref plane name. Refer to "34.4 Selecting
a Reference Plane from a Job".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Plane 852
points are to be
measured to a plane
OK accesses Measure Points to Plane, Reference page. Refer to
"34.6 Measuring Points to a Reference Plane".
IF THEN
Viva Series, Reference Plane 853
34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference Plane
Access •In Choose Task & Plane, select Plane to use:Create new plane. Press OK.
•In Manage Reference Planes, press New.. or Edit...
New Reference Plane,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To compute and store the reference plane.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Ref plane name Editable field The name of the new reference plane.
No. of points Display only Number of points used for plane definition.
Std deviation Display only Standard deviation of used points for plane defini-
tion. ----- is displayed unless more than four points
are used to define the plane.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 854
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
New Reference Plane,
Points page
•An * is shown to the right of the point for a point which will be used as origin of the plane.
•An ! is shown to the left of the point if the point is outside maximum distance between
a point and the calculated plane as defined on the General page.
•The column Δd displays the perpendicular distance of the point from the definition of
the plane.
Max ∆dDisplay only Maximum distance between measured point and
defined plane. ----- is displayed unless more than four
points are used to define the plane.
Field Option Description
Store
To compute and store the reference plane.
+Point
To add points from the working job to define
the reference plane.
Use
To change between Yes and No in the Use
for the highlighted point.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 855
Next step
Page changes to the Origin page.
New Reference Plane,
Origin page
Delete
To remove the highlighted point from the
list.
Survy..
To measure a point to be used for the plane.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Origin
To use the highlighted point as the origin of
the plane.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Store
To compute and store the reference plane.
Survy..
Available when Point is highlighted. To
measure a point to define the plane direc-
tion.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 856
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Offset page.
Field Option Description
Use as origin Plane coordinates Point results are additionally stored with X, Y, Z coor-
dinates based on the local plane coordinate system.
Instrument coords Points on the plane are transformed into the national
coordinate system.
X coordinate Editable field Available for Use as origin:Plane coordinates. Enter
local X coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as
the projection of the measured point onto the calcu-
lated plane.
Z coordinate Editable field Available for Use as origin:Plane coordinates. Enter
local Z coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as
the projection of the measured point onto the calcu-
lated plane.
Point Selectable list Defines the direction of the Y axis.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 857
New Reference Plane,
Offset page
Description of fields
Store
To compute and store the reference plane.
Survy..
Available when Offset pt ID is highlighted. To
measure a point to define the offset point.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Offset plane Selectable list An offset can be defined by a point or a distance. The
defined plane is shifted along the Y axis by the offset.
Offset pt ID Selectable list Available for Offset plane:Offset to a point. Point ID
of offset point.
Offset Display only Distance by which to offset the plane along the Y
axis.
For Offset plane:Offset by distance, the distance
can be entered.
For Offset plane:Offset to a point, the calculated
distance to the adjusted plane is displayed. ----- if no
values are available.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 858
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
New Reference Plane,
Plot page
Points displayed depend on the settings in Configuration, Parameters page. Points defining
the plane are displayed in black, the other points are displayed in grey.
Select the icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 859
34.4 Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job
Access In Choose Task & Plane, select Plane to use:Select from job. Highlight Ref plane name.
Press ENTER.
Manage Reference
Planes OK
To select the highlighted reference plane.
New..
To create a new reference plane. Refer to
"34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference Plane".
Edit..
To edit the highlighted reference plane.
Refer to "34.3 Creating/Editing a Reference
Plane".
Delete
To delete the highlighted reference plane.
More
To display information about date and time
of when the reference plane was created
and the number of points defining the plane.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 860
34.5 Configuring Reference Plane
Description Allows options to be set which are used within the Reference Plane application. These
settings are stored within the working style.
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Reference plane. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Parameters page
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Config..
To edit the survey screen page currently
being displayed. Available when a list item in
Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "19.3
My Survey Screen"
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 861
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages.
Max +/- ∆d for
Defining plane
Editable field The maximum perpendicular deviation of a point from
the calculated plane.
Face scan Editable field The maximum perpendicular deviation of a
measured point in face scan from defined plane.
Scanned points outside the defined limit are not
stored.
Display This parameter defines the points displayed in the
Plot and Map pages of the Reference Plane applica-
tion in the plan view.
All points Displays all points in the plan view.
Pts within slice Displays points within the defined Slice width in the
plan view.
Slice width Editable field Available for Display:Pts within slice.
This parameter defines the distance from the plane
in which points are displayed. This distance is applied
to both sides of the plane. If lines and areas are
displayed in a Map page, then the parts of lines and
areas that fall within the defined slice are also
displayed.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 862
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 863
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 864
34.6 Measuring Points to a Reference Plane
Access In Choose Task & Plane select Task: Measure to plane. Press OK.
Measure Points to Plane,
Reference page
Meas
To start measuring the point. The key
changes to Stop. The difference between
the current position and the adjusted plane
is displayed.
Stop
To end measuring the point. The key
changes to Store. After ending the measure-
ment, the differences between the meas-
ured point and the adjusted plane are
displayed.
Meas
To measure a distance and store distance
and angles.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Store
To store the point information.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 865
Description of fields
Cmpare
To calculate offsets to previously measured
points.
Plane
To edit the selected reference plane.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The number of the measured point.
Target height Editable field The target height.
Offset perp dist Display only The perpendicular distance between the measured
point and the adjusted plane.
Offset ht Display only The vertical distance between the measured point
and the adjusted plane.
X coordinate, Y
coordinate, Z
coordinate
Display only For Use as origin:Plane coordinates.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 866
Next step
Page changes to the Map page.
Select the icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane.
Easting,
Northing,
Elevation
Display only For Use as origin:Instrument coords.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Plane 867
34.7 Scanning a Plane
Description Face Scan automates the process of measuring a sequence of points along the defined
vertical, tilted or horizontal face. The boundaries of the window of interest and the incre-
ment values are defined by the user. Face scan can be run on motorised instruments with
the option "reflectorless EDM" only.
Diagram
Access In Choose Task & Plane, select Task:Scan. Press OK.
Define Scanning Parame-
ters Description of fields
Known
P1 First corner of plane
P2 Second corner of plane
d1 Horizontal grid spacing
d2 Up slope grid spacing
Unknown
Grid point coordinates
TS_042
d1
d2
P1
P2
Field Option Description
Horizontal Editable field For tilted and vertical planes. Horizontal grid
distance.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 868
Next step
Start to access Scanning Status.
Up slope Editable field Up slope grid distance.
Start pt ID Editable field The point ID to start with.
Pt ID Inc Editable field The incrementation used for Start pt ID. No point ID
template used
•For Start pt ID: RMS and Pt ID Inc: 10 the points
are RMS, RMS10, RMS20, ..., RMS100, ...
•For Start pt ID: 100 and Pt ID Inc: 10 the points
are 100, 110, ..., 200, 210, ...
•For Start pt ID: abcdefghijklmn89 and Pt ID Inc:
10 the points are abcdefghijklmn99, point ID
incrementing fails.
Scanning area Display only Size of the area to be scanned.
Estimated
points Display only Estimated number of points to be scanned.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Reference Plane 869
Scanning Status,
Scanning page
Description of fields
Stop
To stop the scanning of points.
Pause
To pause the scanning of points.
Scan
To continue scanning.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Points scanned Display only Number of points being scanned.
Points
remaining Display only Number of points remaining to be scanned.
Points rejected Display only Number of skipped points.
% completed Display only Percentage of points scanned.
Time left Display only Estimated time remaining until scan is finished.
Point ID Display only Point ID of last stored point.
Viva Series, Reference Plane 870
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page. Points currently scanned are displayed in black, previously
measured points, lines and areas are displayed in grey.
Select the icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane.
Viva Series, Roads - General 871
35 Roads - General
35.1 Overview
)Please be aware that the terminology or workflow used on different construction sites can
vary from the one used in this manual. However, basic principles remain the same.
Description Roads is an umbrella term for four subapplications.
Name of subapplication Description
Alignment Editor • Alignment Editor is an "add-on" component to the Roads
application. It is only intended for quick and easy modifica-
tion of existing alignments, or creation of new ones. Align-
ment Editor is not an onboard road planning and design
application.
• This application supports the following alignment types:
• Horizontal alignments
• Vertical alignments
• Cross section templates
• Cross section assignments
• Chainage equations
• This application is a free application provided by Leica
Geosystems AG. If the application does not appear on your
menu or you are otherwise unable to access it, please
contact your Leica Geosystems AG representative.
Roads • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of
roads and other alignments.
• It can be used with GPS and with total stations.
Viva Series, Roads - General 872
• It consists of two main functions:
•Roads - As built check for checking or measuring
existing stringlines, cross slopes, slopes or surfaces and
comparing the measurements against design data.
•Roads - Stakeout for setting or staking out and
adjusting road elements during construction using
design data.
• The data can be typed in manually by using the Alignment
Editor or data created in a design package can be
converted. The Design to Field component of LEICA Geo
Office offers converters from several road design and CAD
packages.
Rail • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of
railways and other alignments.
• It can be used with GPS and with total stations.
• It consists of two main functions:
•Rail - As built check for checking or measuring an
existing track and comparing the measurements against
design data.
•Rail - Stakeout for setting or staking out and adjusting
track features during construction using design data.
Name of subapplication Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 873
• Single track or multiple track designs can be imported for
use with this application.
• For horizontal and vertical alignments, the data can be
typed in manually by using the Alignment Editor applica-
tion or data created in a design package can be
converted.
• For multiple track designs, it is possible to define one
centreline which is common to all tracks.
• A superelevation table can be created for each track using
the Rail Editor computer application. This application is part
of the Design to Field component in LEICA Geo Office.
Tunnel • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of
tunnels.
• It is for use with total stations only.
• It consists of two main functions:
•Tunnel - As built check for checking a built or excavated
tunnel with a tunnel design.
•Tunnel - Stakeout for setting out tunnel features during
construction.
• The centreline of the tunnel can be imported for use
onboard the instrument using the industry standard
LandXML data format. Alternatively the centreline can be
imported in formats exported from many other tunnel
design packages using the Design to Field component of
the LEICA Geo Office.
Name of subapplication Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 874
)Roads, Rail and Tunnel subapplications are licence protected. They can be activated through
a licence key which is specific to the instrument. This licence key can be entered either
through Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or alternatively, the first
time the program is started.
• Tunnel design profiles can be created using the Tunnel
Profile Editor computer application. This application is inte-
grated into the Design to Field component in LEICA Geo
Office.
Name of subapplication Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 875
35.2 Accessing Roads Applications
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Roads.
Then select the subapplication required to access Job Selection.
)For the Alignment Editor, refer to "36.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor".
Job Selection When the application is resumed, the last active selections are remembered and can be
accessed again. This ability means the settings do not need to be reselected every time after
turning off the instrument.
Every job selection field displays only the jobs that are valid.
OK
To continue with the next screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - General 876
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Working job Selectable list The working job is where information generated in
the field is recorded. All measurements, points and
other values stored in the field are added to this job.
This job determines the coordinate system.
Road alignment
file Selectable list Available for Road. Contain all the information about
the road design. For example, the geometry of the
line, the formation layer of the road or the informa-
tion related to the construction of cuttings and
embankments. The files are stored in the \DBX folder
or a subfolder of \DBX.
The data is either typed in manually in the Alignment
Editor application or converted from a road design
package.
For tunnel projects, all road design information for
road data outside of the tunnel must be stored in the
road job.
The road job is a read-only source of information and
cannot be selected as a working or control job.
Rail job Selectable list Available for Rail. Contains all the information about
the rail design including the geometry of the
centreline and the rail definition (superelevation).
The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder
of \DBX.
Viva Series, Roads - General 877
The rail job is a read-only source of information and
cannot be selected as a working or control job.
Tunnel job Selectable list Available for Tunnel. Contains all the information
about the tunnel design including the geometry of
the centreline and the tunnel profile. The files are
stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX.
The tunnel job is a read-only source of information.
Use a control
job Check box When this box is checked, a control job can be
selected. Individual points of a control job can be
staked out and set in relation to the alignment by
using the Tools menu.
Control job Selectable list The control job is the one control points are stored
in. The control job holds all control point information
needed in the field. For example, control points,
points with known coordinates used for a TPS setup.
)The same job can be used as a working and
control job.
Use a DTM Check box Available for Roads and Rail. When this box is
checked, a DTM job can be selected. A DTM job holds
DTM (Digital Terrain Model) or TIN (Triangular Irreg-
ular Network) data. The files are stored in the \DBX
folder or a subfolder of \DBX.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 878
Next step
DTM Selectable list Available for Roads and Rail. Holds DTM (Digital
Terrain Model) data or TIN (Triangular Irregular
Network) data. The DTM job to be used must be
stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory
device.
The DTM job is a read-only source of information and
cannot be selected as a working or control job.
)If only a DTM job is selected, then only check
measurements relative to the selected DTM
layer can be done.
IF you want to
continue with
THEN refer to
job management "35.4 Jobs & Design Data".
configuration "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
Roads "37 Roads - Road".
Rail "38 Roads - Rail".
Tunnel "39 Roads - Tunnel".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 879
35.3 Configuring Roads Applications
35.3.1 Configuration Settings
Access In Job Selection press OK and then, depending on the subapplication Config.. or Fn
Config...
Configuration,
Graphics page
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the changes and move to the
previous screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Navigation
direction The reference direction used to stakeout points. The
stakeout elements and the graphics displayed are
based on this selection.
To alignment The stake out is relative to the alignment.
To north The North direction shown in the graphical display
based on the active coordinate system.
Viva Series, Roads - General 880
To sun The position of the sun calculated from the
current position, the time and the date.
To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points are
yet staked, Navigation direction:To north is used for
the first point to be staked.
To point (cntrl job) A point from the control job is selected.
Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current
position to the point to be staked. The graphical
display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of
the point to be staked.
From station The reference direction is from the station to
the current position.
To station The reference direction is from the current
position to the station.
Point ID Selectable list Available for Navigation direction:To point (cntrl
job). To select the point or line to be used for orien-
tation.
Navigate using The method of staking out.
Direction &
distance The direction from the orientation reference, the
horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed.
In/out, left/right The distance forwards to/backwards from the point,
the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is
displayed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 881
Next step
Page changes to the Design page.
Switch to bulls
eye when 0.5m
from target
Check box When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown
in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre
from the point being staked.
Beep faster
when getting
close to point
Check box The instrument beeps when the distance from the
current position to the point to be staked is equal to
or less than defined in Start within.
The closer the instrument is to the point to be staked
the faster the beeps will be.
Distance to use Height, Horizontal
distance or Posi-
tion & height
Available when Beep faster when getting close to
point is checked. The type of distance to use for the
stake beep.
Start within Editable field Available when Beep faster when getting close to
point is checked. The horizontal radial distance, from
the current position to the point to be staked, when
a beep is to be heard.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 882
Configuration,
Design page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Working
corridor Editable field Valid offset range defined by the working corridor
left and right of the centreline. If a measured point is
further away from the working corridor distance, an
error message is displayed.
Refer to "35.7 Understanding Terms and Expres-
sions" for more information on the working corridor.
Show tangent
points Check box When this box is checked, a message box is shown
when a tangent point has been detected within the
chainage increment range. This tangent point can be
selected for stakeout. Refer to "37.3.1 The
Stake/Check Screen" for further details.
When this box is not checked, no tangent points are
indicated.
Type Available when Show tangent points is checked.
Horizontal Indicates tangent points of the horizontal alignment
only.
Vertical Indicates tangent points of the vertical alignment
only.
Horizontal &
vertical Indicates all tangent points.
Slope signs Available for Road only. Selects sign definition
method for slopes and cross slopes.
Viva Series, Roads - General 883
Mathematical All slopes sign defines from left to right, independent
of whether left or right of the centreline.
Relative to CL Slope signs defined relative to the centreline.
Relative from CL Slope signs defined relative from the centreline.
Extend slopes Available for Road only. To configure the warning
handling for slope stakeout. This configuration allows
the workflow of slope stakeout to be optimised.
Yes (with warning) The slope is expanded beyond and above or below
the hinge point. A warning is shown as soon as
leaving the defined slope.
Yes The slope is expanded beyond and above or below
the hinge point. No warning is when leaving the
defined slope.
No The slope is not expanded beyond and above or
below the hinge point.
Field Option Description
+
+
+
Road_054c
++
++
Road_054a
++
+
Road_054b
Viva Series, Roads - General 884
Extend lines Check box Extend each stringline at its beginning and end with
a tangent. The extension is used for projecting a
point to the stringline and for intersecting the strin-
gline.
Checked )Intersection points on extended stringlines are
not shown in cross-sections and cannot be
staked out.
a) Centreline
b) Extended centreline
c) Projected point on extended centreline
Field Option Description
bc
a
Road_094
Viva Series, Roads - General 885
Next step
Not checked )This option is recommended when working
with closed alignments (for example rounda-
bout, slip road, motorway exit).
a) Centreline
b) Projected point on centreline
IF you work with THEN Page changes to the
Road Quality control page.
Rail Rail design page.
Tunnel Tunnel design page.
Field Option Description
b
a
Road_095
Viva Series, Roads - General 886
Configuration,
Rail design page
Available for Rail only.
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Nominal gauge Editable field Nominal distance between the active (internal) faces
of the left and right rails.
a) Superelevation base
b) Nominal gauge
Superelevatn
base Editable field Distance over which the superelevation is to be
applied. This distance normally corresponds to the
distance between the rail axes.
Superelevation Design To use the superelevation values from the design. If
these values don’t exist in the design, then all
superelevation values are ignored.
Manual To ignore all superelevation values from the design
and to enter them manually.
None All superelevation values are ignored.
a
b
Rail_014
Viva Series, Roads - General 887
CL height CL geometry The centreline height is taken from the alignment
centreline.
Rail interpolated The centreline height is interpolated between the left
rail height and right rail height.
Lower rail The height of the lower rail is used as centreline
height.
Calculate
chainage
directly onto
chainage
centerline
Check box Chainage calculation method when checking points
of multiple tracks with respect to a chainage
centreline.
The direct measurement method is when the
chainage is calculated by projecting the measured
point directly onto the chainage centreline.
The indirect measurement method is when the
chainage is calculated by first projecting the meas-
ured point onto the track centreline, and then
projecting the point onto the chainage centreline.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 888
Checked Project measured point directly onto the chainage
centreline.
a) Chainage centreline
b) Track centreline
c) Left rail
d) Right rail
e) Measured point
f) Direct chainage
Field Option Description
Rail_010
a
c
e
f
b
d
Viva Series, Roads - General 889
Not checked Project measured point onto track centreline and
then make a second projection onto the chainage
centreline.
a) Chainage centreline
b) Track centreline
c) Left rail
d) Right rail
e) Measured point
f) Indirect chainage
g) Measured point projected onto track centreline
Disable
chainage
centerline
Check box Only affecting multiple track designs. The defined
chainage centreline is disabled and the track
centreline is used for chainage calculations.
Field Option Description
Rail_011
a
c
e
g
f
b
d
Viva Series, Roads - General 890
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
Configuration,
Tunnel design page
Available for Tunnel only.
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
Field Option Description
Theoretical
profile direc-
tion
Defines the direction in which the design profile is
considered. The setting has an influence on the
profile offset sign.
Clockwise The design profile is defined in a clockwise direction.
In underbreak areas the profile offset values are
negative where as in overbreak areas they are posi-
tive.
Counter-clockwise The design profile is defined in a counter-clockwise
direction. In underbreak areas the profile offset
values are positive where as in overbreak areas they
are negative.
Profile defini-
tion Vertical Profiles are always defined as vertical.
Tilted Profiles are always defined perpendicular to the
vertical alignment of the tunnel axis.
Viva Series, Roads - General 891
Configuration,
Quality control page
Description
Especially when checking points in an as-built control or when staking out it is useful to
enable the Quality control criteria available. For every point stored the chosen parameters
are checked and if the check limits are exceeded a warning is shown. This function guaran-
tees a higher productivity as it is no longer necessary to check the values for every shot
taken. When checking layers of a road, a too thick layer results in higher costs as more mate-
rial is used. Alternatively, a too thin layer can lead to problems and could cause serious
damage. Therefore different check limits for above and below the design can be defined.
Graphic
Height limits below the design surface are entered as negative values (for example, the
Height limit ↓ with -10 mm in the previous diagram). By using the signs of the height limits,
it is also possible to cover situations like the one shown in the following diagram, with a valid
range between -10 to -50 mm below the design surface.
a) Layer is too thick
b) Design surface
c) Layer is too thin
d) Height limit ↑
e) Height limit ↓
a) Design surface
b) Height limit ↑
c) Height limit ↓
b
a
c
d
e
Road_087
a
c
b
Road_088
Viva Series, Roads - General 892
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Check deltas to
point before
storing
Check box When this box is checked, a position check is done
when storing a staked or checked point. When the
defined tolerance is exceeded, the stake out/check
can be repeated, skipped or stored.
When this box is not checked, no quality check is
done during stake out/check of points.
Delta values )Depending on this selection the following
lines are enabled/disabled.
Ch, offset &
height Check for chainage, horizontal offset and height.
Ch & offset Check for chainage and horizontal offset.
Position &
height Check for 2D position and height.
Position Check for 2D position.
Height Check for height.
Profile Available for Tunnel. Check for distance from design
profile.
Chainage limit From 0.001 to
100
Maximum difference in chainage.
Offset limit From 0.001 to
100
Maximum horizontal offset from defined position.
Position tolerance From 0.001 to
100
Maximum radial horizontal distance.
Viva Series, Roads - General 893
Next step
Page changes to the Info page.
Configuration,
Info page
Two things can be configured on this page:
1) The required information for each stakeout and check method to be displayed on the
Info page. Depending on the working method used on the construction site, different
information is written on the stakes. The information to be written on the stake is
displayed on the Info page.
2) If and which additional user-defined survey screen page is displayed.
Height limit ↑From -100 to
+100
Maximum height difference.
Height limit ↓From -100 to
+100
Maximum height difference.
Profile tolerance From 0.001 to
100
Available for Tunnel. Permitted distance from
design profile.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 894
Description of fields
OK
To confirm the changes and continue.
Clear
To clear all parameters from all lines.
Default
To set the default value for all lines.
Fn About
To display information about the application
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Show additional
page from My
Survey Screen
Check box The user-defined survey screen page to be shown
in the stake or check screen.
Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages.
Viva Series, Roads - General 895
Method Display only The method is based on the selected subapplica-
tion and, if available, the setting for Method to use.
The settings in the following lines can only be
changed for the current method.
The method defines the parameters available to
view on the Info page of the application. Different
combinations of the parameters to view can be
stored
1st line to 16th line Selectable list To modify the selection on any particular line, place
the cursor on the line to modify using the arrow
keys and press the ENTER key.Use the arrow keys
to select the required parameter and press the
ENTER key to confirm the choice.
Define which parameters are viewed on each line.
Up to 16 lines of parameters can be defined.
The available parameters depending on the Method
selected are explained separately:
•For Road Stringline, refer to "35.3.2 Road Strin-
gline - Info Page".
•For Road Individual stringline, refer to "35.3.3
Road Individual Stringline - Info Page".
•For Road Cross slope, refer to "35.3.4 Road
Cross Slope - Info Page".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 896
Next step
Page changes to the TPS page.
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
•For Road Manual slope and Slope, refer to
"35.3.5 Road Manual Slope and Slope - Info
Page".
•For Road Crown, refer to "35.3.6 Road Crown -
Info Page".
•For Road Layer, refer to "35.3.7 Road Layer -
Info Page".
•For Road DTM, refer to "35.3.8 Road DTM - Info
Page".
• For Rail refer to "35.3.9 Rail - Info Page".
• For Tunnel refer to "35.3.10 Tunnel - Info
Page".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 897
Configuration,
TPS page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Only update
stakeout values
when distance is
measured
Check box When this box is checked, angles and stakeout
values are updated after a distance measurement.
All values are then frozen until the next distance is
taken. When Target aiming:Lock is selected and
the instrument is locked onto a target the angular
values do not change.
When this box is not checked, angles are updated
with telescope movement after a distance was
measured.
Turn to point Check box Available for Road and Rail.
To make stake out of points even more efficient, a
motorised instrument offers you the possibility to
aim automatically at the stakeout position.
Turn to Available for Road and Rail and when Turn to point
is checked.
Position only The instrument positions horizontally in the direc-
tion of the point to stake out.
Viva Series, Roads - General 898
Position &
height The instrument positions horizontally and vertically
to the point to stake out.
The instrument only points to the correct position
on the ground if the point to stake out has the
same height as the natural surface. If the natural
surface is higher than the point to stake out, the
measured point would be closer than the stakeout
point. If the natural surface is lower than the point,
the measured point would be further away.
With Position & measure, the possibility of itera-
tive positioning using the auto position, this
problem can be avoided.
a) Point to stake out, defined with 3D coordinates
b) Position if natural surface is higher than point to
stake out
c) Position if natural surface is lower than point to
stake out
Position &
measure Allows the instrument to aim at a 2D position. As
the natural surface height is unknown the correct
position is calculated via iterations.
Field Option Description
a
b
c
Road_071
Viva Series, Roads - General 899
)Depending on the settings chosen for Red
laser pointer the instrument will turn on the
red laser as soon as the position is found.
The first position (b) the instrument points to is
defined by the 2D coordinates (a) of the point to
stake out ( = horizontal direction) and the current
vertical angle. Therefore, aim the instrument at the
approximate position of the point to stake out.The
measured 2D position is compared with the
stakeout position to determine a new position (c)
to aim at. As no information about the natural
surface is available, a point at the same height as
the measured position is calculated. The new posi-
tion (d) is measured and compared again with the
point to stake out (a).This iteration process runs
until the tolerances defined for the stakeout are
reached.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 900
a) 2D position to stake out
b) First position measured defined by 2D coordinates
and current vertical angle
c) New position calculated based on height of b
d) Second position measured
e) New position calculated base on height of d. The
measured position for this point is within the
defined tolerance, the correct position is found.
Field Option Description
a
b
de
c
a
b
de
f
c
Road_064
Viva Series, Roads - General 901
Prompt before
turn The method how the instrument turns is not fixed
but is selected when pressing Positn. Additionally
to the three methods listed above, an option
allowing the instrument to find the height on the
peg is avail-
able:
a) Peg placed at the correct position
b) First height, manually chosen direction
c) Required height on the peg
Position limit From 0.001 to
10
Maximum permitted radial horizontal distance.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to:Position & measure or Turn to:Prompt before
turn.
Height limit From 0.001 to
10
Maximum height difference. Available for Road and
Rail.
Chainage limit From 0.001 to
10
Chainage tolerance of the position to stake out.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to:Position & measure or Turn to:Prompt before
turn.
Field Option Description
a
b
c
Road_072
Viva Series, Roads - General 902
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Offset limit From 0.001 to
10
Maximum horizontal offset from defined position.
Available for Road and Rail.
Red laser pointer Defines when the visible red laser beam is turned
on during the automatic search of the position.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to:Position & measure or Turn to:Prompt before
turn.
Always off Visible red laser is turned off.
On at point only Visible red laser is turned on as soon as the point is
found.
Always on Visible red laser is turned on during the whole
search.
)The laser can also be permanently turned on
by using the instrument settings. Refer to
"10.6 Lights" for more information.
Max iterations From 2 to 10 Maximum number of iterations for the distance
measurement before stopping.
Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn
to:Position & measure or Turn to:Prompt before
turn.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 903
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Viva Series, Roads - General 904
35.3.2 Road Stringline - Info Page
Description This info page is used for staking and checking Road stringlines.
Available fields
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
a) Stringline to stake out
b) Centreline
c) Strgl offset
d) Strgl ht diff
e) CL offset
f) CL ht diff
Field Description
Strgl task Name defined for the stringline task.
∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current
position.
∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on
the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.
a
f
bd
e
c
Road_043
Viva Series, Roads - General 905
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen
settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in
Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage Chainage to stake out.
Strgl offset Horizontal offset from the stringline.
Strgl ht diff Height difference from the defined stringline.
Strgl name Name of the stringline to stake out or the stake out is rela-
tive to.
Additional line The name of an additional line.
Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line.
Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including
the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the
Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the
defined stake/check height difference of the additional line
of Offsets page.
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type Element type of the centreline.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 906
CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field
is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direc-
tion and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page.
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Offset angle The current angle to alignment.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this
field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables
and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to
the vertical component of the selected line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 907
a) Vertical chainage
b) Chainage
c) Centreline
d) Centreline height difference
e) Vertical square offset
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the selected line).
Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the selected line).
Field Description
b
a
c
d
e
Road_089
Viva Series, Roads - General 908
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Actual height Height of the current position.
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 909
35.3.3 Road Individual Stringline - Info Page
Available fields
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Stake out of roundabout
a) Position to stake out
b) Stringline to stake out
c) Centreline
d) Chainage
e) ∆ chainage
f) ∆ offset
g) ∆ height
Field Description
Strgl task Name defined for the individual stringline task.
Additional line The name of an additional line.
Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line.
fg
e
a
b
d
c
Road_085
Viva Series, Roads - General 910
Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including
the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the
Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the
defined stake/check height difference of the additional line
of Offsets page.
∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current
position.
∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on
the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen
settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in
Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage Chainage to stake out.
Strgl offset Horizontal offset from the stringline.
Strgl ht diff Height difference from the defined stringline.
Strgl name Name of the stringline to stake out or the stake out is rela-
tive to.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 911
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type Element type of the centreline.
CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field
is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direc-
tion and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page.
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Offset angle The current angle to alignment.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to " Stake screen, Stake page" for details on this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables
and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to
the vertical component of the selected line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 912
a) Vertical chainage
b) Chainage
c) Centreline
d) Centreline height difference
e) Vertical square offset
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Actual height Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the stringline).
Field Description
b
a
c
d
e
Road_089
Viva Series, Roads - General 913
Working with pipelines Description
When staking/checking pipes, a common task is to use height differences at the start/end
of the pipe. The two Info page items for individual stringlines enable the height difference
to be added to the end of the vertical alignments ∆ ht end of v align and Ht end vert align.
Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the stringline).
Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the stringline).
Ht end vert align Height at the endpoint of the vertical alignment of the strin-
gline.
∆ ht end of v align Height difference to the endpoint of the vertical alignment of
the stringline.
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 914
35.3.4 Road Cross Slope - Info Page
Available fields
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
a) Cross slope to stake out
b) Right stringline of the cross
slope Right name
c) Left stringline of the cross
slope Left name
d) Centreline
e) CL offset
f) CL ht diff
g) Cross slope offset
h) Cross slope ht diff
i) Left offset
j) Left ht diff
k) Right offset
l) Right ht diff
m) Cross slope ratio
n) Width
o) Square offset
Field Description
Cross slope task Name defined for the cross slope task.
Additional line The name of an additional line.
ab
m
c
d
g
i
e
klh
o
f
j
n
Road_044
Viva Series, Roads - General 915
Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line.
Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including
the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the
Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the
defined stake/check height difference of the additional line
of Offsets page.
∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current
position.
∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on
the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen
settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in
Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage Chainage to stake out.
Cross slope offset Horizontal offset from the cross slope.
Cross slope ht diff Height difference to the cross slope. If no stake height
difference is used Cross slope ht diff =∆ height.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 916
Left name Name of the left stringline defining the cross slope.
Left offset Horizontal offset from the left point of the cross slope.
Left ht diff Height difference from the left point of the cross slope.
Right name Name of the right stringline defining the cross slope.
Right offset Horizontal offset from the right point of the cross slope.
Right ht diff Height difference from the right point of the cross slope.
Ref line Indicates which side of the cross slope the stake out is rela-
tive to.
Ref offset Horizontal offset from the stringline of the cross slope used
as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to Right
offset or Left offset.
Ref ht diff Height difference from the stringline of the cross slope used
as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to Right ht
diff or Left ht diff.
Cross slope ratio Slope ratio of the cross slope.
Square offset Offset from the cross slope, perpendicular to the cross
slope.
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
CL ht diff Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type Element type of the centreline.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 917
CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field
is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direc-
tion and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page.
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Width Horizontal width of the cross slope.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this
field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables
and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to
the vertical component of the selected line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 918
a) Vertical chainage
b) Chainage
c) Centreline
d) Centreline height difference
e) Vertical square offset
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Actual height Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the cross slope = Actual easting).
Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point
on the cross slope = Actual easting).
Field Description
b
a
c
d
e
Road_089
Viva Series, Roads - General 919
Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the cross slope).
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 920
35.3.5 Road Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page
Available fields
a) Slope to stake out/check
b) Hinge point Hinge name,
reference line
c) Second stringline of slope
Additnl line name
d) Real catch point
e) Centreline
f) Natural surface
g) CL offset
h) CL ht diff
i) Slope offset
j) Slope height diff
k) Hinge offset
l) Hinge ht diff
m) Slope dist hinge
n) Slope ratio
o) Square offset
p) Current ratio
q) Additnl line offset
r) Additnl line ht diff
f
a
p
m
c
d
k
l
i
n
o
h
qj
r
b
eg
Road_045
Viva Series, Roads - General 921
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field Description
Slope task Name defined for the slope task.
∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current
position.
∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on
the Stake page.
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen
settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in
Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage Chainage to stake out.
Slope offset Horizontal offset from the slope.
Slope height diff Height difference from the slope. If no stake height differ-
ence is used Slope height diff =∆ height.
Ht diff rail Height difference from the batter rail to mark the slope (for
Type:Batter rail in Slope Stakeout Settings).
Hinge name Name of the stringline defining the hinge of the slope.
Hinge offset Horizontal offset from the hinge point of the slope.
Viva Series, Roads - General 922
Hinge ht diff Height difference from the hinge point of the slope.
Additnl line name Name of the second stringline defining the slope.
Additnl line offset Horizontal offset from the second stringline of the slope.
Additnl line ht diff Height difference from the second stringline of the slope.
Slope ratio Ratio of the slope.
)The display format is defined as system setting in
Regional Settings, Slope page.
Slope dist hinge Slope distance to the hinge point.
)All defined settings for a batter rail or reference point
are already taken into account. This value is the infor-
mation to write on the stake.
Slope ratio gon Slope ratio in gon.
Slope ratio degree Slope ratio in decimal degrees.
Slope ratio % Slope ratio in percent.
Current ratio Ratio of the slope from the current position to the hinge.
)For the catch point the Current ratio is identical to the
Slope ratio.
Square offset Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope.
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type Element type of the centreline.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 923
CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field
is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direc-
tion and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page.
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Offset angle Available for manual slope. The defined value for the angle to
alignment.
Traveler height Height of the traveller in use.
Refer to "37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings" for information
on the different methods of slope staking.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this
field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables
and in the construction segment.
Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to
the vertical component of the selected line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 924
a) Vertical chainage
b) Chainage
c) Centreline
d) Centreline height difference
e) Vertical square offset
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Actual height Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the slope = Act Easting).
Field Description
b
a
c
d
e
Road_089
Viva Series, Roads - General 925
Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point
on the slope = Act Northing).
Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the slope).
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 926
35.3.6 Road Crown - Info Page
Available fields
a) Left cross slope of road
crown
b) Right cross slope of road
crown
c) Centreline
d) CL offset
e) CL ht diff
f) Left most stringline of the
crown Left name
g) Middle stringline of the
crown Mid name
h) Right most stringline of the
crown Right name
i) L cross slope ht diff
j) R cross slope ht diff
k) Left offset
l) Left ht diff
m) Mid offset
n) Mid ht diff
o) Right offset
p) Right ht diff
q) L cross slope ratio
r) Rt cross slope ratio
s) Left width
t) Right width
a
st
u
m
b
o
h
p
r
q
k
j
l
v
i
f
e
g
c
d
n
Road_056
Viva Series, Roads - General 927
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field Description
Crown task Name defined for the road crown task.
Additional line The name of an additional line.
Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line.
Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including
the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the
Offsets page.
Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the
defined stake/check height difference of the additional line
of Offsets page.
∆ offset Horizontal offset to the stringline of the crown defined as
the reference line.
If working in the toggle offset left/right mode, the correct
stringline is automatically selected as the reference
depending on whether the measured point is to the left or
right of the middle stringline. Refer to "37.3.7 Measuring
Road Crowns" for more information on the toggle offset
left/right mode.
∆ ht left Vertical offset to the left/right cross slope defining the road
crown.
∆ ht right Vertical offset to the left/right cross slope defining the road
crown.
Viva Series, Roads - General 928
∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on
the Stake page.
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen
settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in
Configuration, Graphics page.
Stake chainage Chainage to stake out.
L cross slope ht diff Height difference from the road crowns left cross slope.
R cross slope ht diff Height difference from the road crowns right cross slope.
Ht diff crown Height difference from Active cross slope of the crown.
Active cross slope Indicates if you are on the left or right cross slope of the road
crown.
Actv cross slp ratio Slope ratio of Active cross slope. This value is equal to L
cross slope ratio or Rt cross slope ratio depending on the
value of Active cross slope.
Left name Name of the left most stringline defining the road crown.
Left offset Horizontal offset from the left stringline of the road crown.
Left ht diff Height difference from the left stringline of the road crown.
Right name Name of the left most stringline defining the road crown.
Right offset Horizontal offset from the right stringline of the road crown.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 929
Right ht diff Height difference from the right stringline of the road crown.
Mid name Name of the mid stringline defining the road crown.
Mid offset Horizontal offset from the mid stringline of the road crown.
Mid ht diff Height difference from the mid stringline of the road crown.
L cross slope ratio Slope ratio of the road crowns left cross slope.
Rt cross slope ratio Slope ratio of the road crowns right cross slope.
Left width Horizontal width of the road crowns left cross slope.
Right width Horizontal width of the road crowns right cross slope.
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type Curve type of the centreline.
CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field
is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direc-
tion and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page.
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this
field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 930
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Actual height Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the crown = Actual easting).
Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point
on the crown = Actual northing).
Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the crown).
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 931
35.3.7 Road Layer - Info Page
Available fields
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
a) Relevant part of the layer
b) Centreline
c) CL offset
d) CL ht diff
e) Slope offset
f) Layer ht diff
g) Right name
h) Right offset
i) Right ht diff
j) Left name
k) Left offset
l) Left ht diff
m) Width
n) Slope ratio or Cross slope
ratio
o) Square offset
Field Description
Layer task Name defined for the layer task.
Layer name Name of the layer to check.
Chainage Chainage of the current measured position.
a
m
g
b
h
k
n
j
c
l
id
e
o
f
Road_047
Viva Series, Roads - General 932
∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on
the Stake page.
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Stake chainage Chainage to stake out.
Layer offset Horizontal offset from the layer. Surface between Left line
and Right line.
Layer ht diff Height difference of the measured position to the layer
∆ height Height difference to the layer, including the stake or check
height difference.
Left name Name of the stringline next to the current position on the
left side.
Left offset Horizontal offset from the left stringline Left name.
Layer ht diff Height difference to the left stringline Left name.
Right name Name of the stringline next to the current position on the
right side.
Right offset Horizontal offset from the right stringline Right name.
Right ht diff Height difference to the right stringline Right name.
Slope ratio Ratio of the slope between the left stringline Left name and
the right stringline Right name.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 933
)The display format is defined as system setting in
Regional Settings, Slope page.
Cross slope ratio Ratio of the cross slope between the left stringline Left name
and the right stringline Right name.
)The display format of the Cross slope ratio depends
on the type chosen for Cross slope on Regional
Settings, Slope page.
Square offset Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope.
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type Curve type of the centreline.
CL offset Horizontal offset from the centreline at the current
chainage.
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Traveler height The height of the traveller.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this
field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables
and in the construction segment.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 934
Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to
the vertical component of the selected line.
a) Vertical chainage
b) Chainage
c) Centreline
d) Centreline height difference
e) Vertical square offset
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Actual height Height of the current position.
Field Description
b
a
c
d
e
Road_089
Viva Series, Roads - General 935
Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the crown = Actual easting).
Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point
on the crown = Actual northing).
Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
on the crown).
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 936
35.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page
)An Info page for Road DTM is only available for Roads - As built check.
Available fields
The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
a) Relevant triangle of the DTM
b) Projected point on DTM
c) Easting
d) Northing
e) DTM height diff
f) Flow direction
g) Flow ratio
Field Description
DTM task Name defined for the DTM task.
DTM height diff Vertical height difference to the DTM.
∆ height Height difference to the layer including the stake or check
height difference.
DTM height Height of the DTM at the current measured position.
ae
g
f
c
b
d
Road_046
Viva Series, Roads - General 937
Flow direction Direction of maximum slope ratio on the current DTM
triangle. This direction is the direction water would flow
toward from the projected point.
Flow ratio Slope ratio of the DTM. This ratio is the maximum slope ratio
of the triangle.
DTM name Name of the DTM surface.
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Actual height Height of the current position.
Current dsgn east Easting of the DTM for the current position (= Actual
easting).
Current dsgn north Northing of the DTM for the current position (= Actual
northing).
Current dsgn ht Height of the DTM for the current position.
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 938
35.3.9 Rail - Info Page
Available fields The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field Description
∆ offset Distance from the measured point to the point to set out in
a direction perpendicular to the horizontal alignment.
∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current
position.
∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the
General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on
the Stake page.
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen
settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in
Configuration, Graphics page.
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the horizontal alignment at the chainage of the
measured point.
CL type Element type of the centreline.
CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field
is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direc-
tion and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page.
Viva Series, Roads - General 939
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to " Stake screen, Stake page" for details on this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting Easting of the current position.
Actual northing Northing of the current position.
Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the selected line).
Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the selected line).
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Ht diff lower rail Height difference between the measured point and the
lower rail.
Ht lower rail Height of the lower rail at current chainage.
Current design cant Design cant at the current position.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 940
Ref offset Horizontal distance between the measured point and the rail
or centreline being used as a reference.
Ref ht diff Height difference between the measured point and the rail
or centreline being used as a reference.
Offset (using cant) Offset calculated regarding the cant.
Ht diff (using cant) Height difference calculated regarding the cant.
Rail task Name of the current task.
Rail name Name of the centreline or rail being used as a reference.
Defined desgn cant Design cant at the defined chainage.
Pendular length The pendulum length as distance value: The difference in
elevation of the pendulum centre on the original track and
above the axis point.
Def pendulum displacement The defined horizontal displacement for the track.
Def pendulum angle The pendulum angle is defined by the pendulum displace-
ment and the superelevation (cant).
Actl pendulum displacement The current horizontal displacement for the track.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
Current cant Available for Check. Superelevation of the current position.
This value is calculated by using the ’Second Point of Cant’
option, which is located in the Tools menu.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 941
35.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page
Available fields The following parameters are available. All fields are display only.
Field Description
Strgl task Name of the current task.
∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the
current position.
∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current
position.
∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on
the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown
on the Stake page.
)If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆
chainage:-----.
Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen
settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in
Configuration, Graphics page.
Strgl offset Horizontal offset from the stringline.
Strgl ht diff Height difference from the defined stringline.
Strgl name Name of the stringline to stake out or the stake out is rela-
tive to.
CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline.
Viva Series, Roads - General 942
Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the
selected line.
This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables
and in the construction segment.
CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage.
CL type Element type of the centreline.
CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field
is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direc-
tion and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page.
CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage.
Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to " Stake screen, Stake page" for details on this field.
Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design.
CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position.
Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out.
Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out.
Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out.
Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out.
Defined height Height of the point to stake out.
Actual easting Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the selected line).
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 943
Actual northing Northing of the design for the current position (relevant
point at the selected line).
Actual height Height of the design for the current position (relevant point
at the selected line).
Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement.
Line space half and Line
space full Empty line.
∆Prof Distance from the design profile to the measured point.
Profile element no. Element number of the closest design profile element to the
measured point.
Profile element(%) Distance in percentage terms of the measured point along
the design profile element.
Dist along profile Distance of the measured point along the design profile
starting at the origin of the profile.
Top distance Distance of the measured point along the design profile
starting at the top of the profile.
Field Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 944
35.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht)
Step-by-step In this example, the height of the cross slope is marked on a peg by using the auto position
function.
a) Peg placed at the correct position
b) First height, manually chosen direction
c) Required height on the peg
Step Description
1. In the Configuration,TPS page, select Turn to:Prompt before turn.
)Make sure that the instrument uses the reflectorless EDM mode.
2. After staking out the peg at the correct position with Stake Cross Slope, aim the
instrument at the peg.
3. Press Fn Positn to open the Configuration screen.
4. Configuration
Highlight Height (aim to stake ht).
5. Press OK.
)The instrument searches for the point on the peg at the required height without
changing the horizontal direction.
)As soon as the defined Height limit ↑/Height limit ↓ from Configuration,Quality
control is reached, the instrument stops.
a
b
c
Road_072
Viva Series, Roads - General 945
)Depending on the settings chosen, the instrument turns on the red laser to mark
the height.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 946
35.4 Jobs & Design Data
35.4.1 Choosing a Job
Access Start the Roads subapplication required.
In Job Selection open the selectable list for Road alignment file, Rail job or Tunnel job.
Road Jobs/Rail
jobs/Tunnel jobs This screen is similar to the system job selection. Refer to "4.4 Choosing a Job"for a descrip-
tion of the screen.
Viva Series, Roads - General 947
35.4.2 Working with a DTM Job
Access Start the Roads or Rail subapplication.
In Job Selection check Use a DTM.
Open the selectable list for DTM.
DTM OK
To select the highlighted DTM job and
continue.
Layrs..
To view the DTM layers and the number of
triangles of the highlighted DTM job.
A DTM job can consist of multiple DTM layers
or surfaces. These DTM layers can cover
different locations, be on top of each other
or intersect each other.
Delete
To delete the highlighted DTM job.
CF card, SD card, USB or Intrnl
To change between viewing jobs stored on
another data storage device or internal
memory.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - General 948
35.4.3 Design Data
Design data for Road 2D and 3D lines
Depending on the method to be used, the design in all road jobs must consist of either 2D
or 3D lines.
2D lines are required at least when working with stringlines, individual stringlines, manual
slope or layer. If the design consists of 2D lines, heights can be considered manually.
3D lines are required when working with slope, cross slope or crown. 3D lines can also be
used when working with stringlines, individual stringlines, manual slope or layer.
Description
Depending on the complexity of the road job, the design data can vary from a single hori-
zontal alignment to a design containing profiles with dozens of defined vertices. Design
elements can be grouped logically for faster access.
Stringlines
When manually typing in a road job, alignments and cross sections are used. Alignments are
defined by geometric elements, for example straights and arcs, and the cross sections by
vertices. Furthermore, at which chainage a certain cross section is used is also defined. By
defining these elements the vertices are connected to create a series of lines representing
the three-dimensional design of the road.
Viva Series, Roads - General 949
In Roads, such lines defining the design are called stringlines. Stringlines are the base
elements used for stakeout and check activities. Stringlines have a project unique name by
which they are identified and selected. Whenever a new road design is typed in or imported
from a design package these stringlines are generated automatically in the background.
)A cross section can be derived from the stringline model by slicing the group of strin-
glines with a vertical plane orthogonal to the centreline.
Stringline representation of a road
design.
Vertical cut of a stringline
group defines a cross
section.
Road_029
Road_030
Viva Series, Roads - General 950
)Stringlines are referenced by layers and can be used in more than one layer.
)Every layer is relative to a centreline. This centreline does not have to be a part of the
layer. In the previous example, layer one - general fill - uses the centreline for calcu-
lation even though the centreline is not part of the layer surface. Whereas the
centreline is part of layer three - final surface.
Design data for Rail Horizontal and vertical alignments
All rail jobs must consist of at least one horizontal alignment. Each horizontal alignment can
either be typed in manually using the Alignment Editor application, or converted from a rail
design package using the Design To Field component within the LEICA Geo Office program.
Horizontal alignments can consist of straights, circular curves, clothoides, parabolic curves
and bloss curves.
Vertical alignments can consist of straights, circular curves and parabolic curves.
If a design comprises of multiple tracks, one horizontal alignment can be defined as the
chainage centreline. From the chainage centreline all chainages will be calculated and addi-
tional horizontal and vertical alignments can be used to define each track.
Rail definition
Rails can be defined by:
• entering the design data manually in the field
•by using the Alignment Editor
• by converting data from a rail design package using the Design To Field component
and if required the Rail Editor (for defining the superelevation) component within the
LEICA Geo Office program
Rails are stored as stringlines (continuous 2D or 3D lines) within the rail job.
Viva Series, Roads - General 951
Tracks
Tracks are used to group related stringlines (centreline and rails) together.
In the case of a single track, the track centreline and the two rails are grouped together in
one track.
In the case of multiple tracks where one chainage centreline is used for all tracks, each track
consists of four stringlines: the track centreline, the chainage centreline and the left and
right rails.
In the case of multiple tracks where chainage is calculated relative to the track centreline,
each track is stored as a single track as described previously.
Design data for Tunnel Horizontal and vertical alignments
All tunnel jobs must consist of at least a horizontal and a vertical alignment. This data can
be converted from a road design package using the Design To Field component within the
LEICA Geo Office application.
Profiles
Depending on the complexity of the tunnel job, the design data can vary from a single hori-
zontal and vertical alignment to a design containing many different design profiles with
dozens of defined vertices.
Design profiles can be defined and edited using the Design To Field component within the
LEICA Geo Office application.
Viva Series, Roads - General 952
Layers
Tunnels generally consist of layers made of different materials, for example a shotcrete
surface or a lining. At different times throughout a project, it may be required to work with
different layers of the tunnel.
The Tunnel Profile Editor allows the possibility of creating such layers by grouping together
design profiles that will be used at the same chainage.
Design Profile Layers can be assigned to chainages along the centreline using the Tunnel
Profile Editor within the Design To Field component.
The layer of the tunnel to set out or check can be defined when creating a task.
a) The vertices A1-A7 could be grouped
together in a layer (a) and represent the
final lining of the tunnel.
b) The vertices B1-B7 could be grouped
together in a layer (b) and represent the
inner shotcrete layer of the tunnel.
a
A1 A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
b
Tunnel_023
Viva Series, Roads - General 953
35.4.4 Viewing and Editing the Design Data
Access Start the Roads subapplication required.
In Job Selection highlight Road Jobs, Rail job or Tunnel job. Open the selectable list
In Road Jobs/Rail jobs/Tunnel jobs highlight a job and press Data.
View & Edit Data The design data stored within the road/rail/tunnel job contains all information about the
road/rail/tunnel design. This information includes the stringlines and layers, for example, the
geometry of the centreline or the layers of the different materials/surfaces which form the
road/tunnel. The design data can be viewed and partially edited on this screen.
OK
To return to the job selection.
Edit..
To edit the general job details and the start
chainage of the centreline of the selected
layer.
For Road additionally to select another
centreline and include/exclude stringlines
from the selected layer.
View
To view geometry details of the stringlines
and to view cross-section plots.
For Road and Rail additionally to view the list
of all stringlines in the layer.
Fn Config..
To access the configuration settings. Refer
to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - General 954
Description of fields
Next step
Field Option Description
Job name Display only The name of the active road/rail/tunnel job, as
selected in Job Selection.
Layer Display only To select a layer from the active road/rail/tunnel job.
All layers within the active road/rail/tunnel job can be
selected.
No. of string-
lines Display only Available for Road and Rail. The number of stringlines
from the selected layer.
Number of
profiles Display only Available for Tunnel. The number of profiles from the
selected layer.
Centreline Display only The name of the layer centreline.
)Every layer must have a centreline.
Chainage Editable field To enter chainage to use when viewing the data. The
default value is the start chainage of the layer
centreline.
Ch increment Editable field To enter a chainage increment to use when stepping
through the data.
IF you want to THEN press
edit data Edit.. to access the screen Edit:. Refer to "Edit:, Layer page".
view data View to access the screen View at. Refer to "View at, Line Info
page".
Viva Series, Roads - General 955
Edit:,
Layer page
Only available for Road.
Description of columns
Next step
Page changes to the Centreline page.
Store
To store data and return to the previous
screen.
Centre
To set the highlighted line as centreline.
Use
To set Yes or No in the Use column for
excluding/including the highlighted line of
selected layer.
Page
To change to the next page.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Column Description
Line name Displays the name of all the lines in the layer.
CL Shows CL for the line selected as centreline.
Use For Yes: The selected line is used for stake/check.
For No: The selected line is not used for stake/check.
Viva Series, Roads - General 956
Edit:,
Centreline/Chainage
stringline page
Description of fields
Next step
Store to store the changes.
View to access the screen View at.
Store
To store changes and return to the previous
screen.
Reset
To clear all changes made and to reset to the
original start chainage. The original start
chainage is always remembered.
Page
To change to the next page.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Centreline/Chai
nage stringline Display only The name of the centreline.
Set start
chainage Editable field To enter a start chainage for the layer centreline.
End chainage Display only The end chainage of the layer centreline. By using the
centreline length, the end chainage is automatically
calculated.
Viva Series, Roads - General 957
View at,
Line Info page
If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----.
Description of fields
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Ch-
To decrease the chainage by the chainage
increment, as defined in the View & Edit
Data screen.
Ch+
To increase the chainage by the chainage
increment, as defined in the View & Edit
Data screen.
Segmnt
To access Segment Info - Start Point.
Hz or Vt
To change between the vertical alignment
data and the horizontal alignment data.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Line name Selectable list All stringlines available at the defined chainage are
displayed and can be selected.
Viva Series, Roads - General 958
Next step
Page to change to the Lines page.
Easting,
Northing and
Height
Display only The East/North coordinate and height of the string-
line at defined chainage.
Hz tangent Display only The tangent direction of the stringline at defined
chainage.
Grade Display only The grade of the stringline at defined chainage.
Hz radius Display only The horizontal radius of the stringline segment at
defined chainage.
Vertical radius Display only The vertical radius of the stringline segment at
defined chainage.
Hz type Display only The horizontal segment type at defined chainage.
Vertical type Display only The vertical segment type at defined chainage.
Hz offset Display only The horizontal offset to the layer centreline at
defined chainage.
Vertical offset Display only The vertical offset to the layer centreline at defined
chainage.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 959
View at,
Lines page
Unavailable for Tunnel.
Description of columns
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Ch-
To decrease the chainage by the chainage
increment, as defined in the View & Edit
Data screen.
Ch+
To increase the chainage by the chainage
increment, as defined in the View & Edit
Data screen.
Segmnt
To access Segment Info - Start Point.
More
To change between the height differences
or absolute heights at the selected
chainage.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Column Description
Line name The name of the stringlines available at defined chainage in the
selected layer.
Viva Series, Roads - General 960
Next step
Page to change to the Plot page.
The Plot page shows a cross section, profile and planar view of the design data at the
selected chainage.
Segmnt to access Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point.
Segment Info - Start
Point/Segment Info - End
Point,
Hz alignment page
If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----.
CL offset The horizontal offset of the stringline from the layer centreline.
Ht diff The height difference of the stringline to the layer centreline.
Height The absolute height of the stringline.
Column Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Seg-
To move to the previous segment.
Seg+
To move to the next segment.
End Pt or Start Pt
To change between the start point and the
end point of the segment.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - General 961
Description of fields
Next step
Page to change to the Vertical alignment page.
Segment Info - Start
Point/Segment Info - End
Point,
Vertical alignment page
Refer to "Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point, Hz alignment page" for a
description of keys.
If a value has not been defined, the field is shown as -----.
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Line name Display only The name of the selected stringline.
Chainage Display only The chainage of start/end point of the segment.
Easting Northin
g and Height Display only The East/North coordinate and height of the
start/end point of the segment.
Hz tangent Display only The tangent direction at the start/end point of the
segment.
Hz radius Display only The radius at the start/end point of the segment.
Hz type Display only The current segment type.
Field Option Description
Line name Display only The name of the selected stringline.
Chainage Display only The chainage of start/end point of the segment.
Northing,
Northing and
Height
Display only The East/North coordinate and height of the
start/end point of the segment.
Viva Series, Roads - General 962
Next step
OK returns to the previous screen.
Grade Display only The grade at the start/end point of the segment.
Vertical radius Display only The radius at the start/end point of the segment.
Vertical type Display only The current segment type.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 963
35.5 Working with Shifts
Description When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For example,
an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may be 15 cm higher
than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this difference has to be
distributed over the remaining 100m of paving. To handle these situations, shifts can be
added to the existing design data. A shift is applied when selecting the element to stake
out/check.
Horizontal and vertical shifts can be applied to the selected element. By using these shifts
the design can be lifted/lowered and moved horizontally.
A shift is always an overlay of the existing design and is stored with the task. For a horizontal
alignment, the shift is applied perpendicular to the centreline. For the vertical part of the
alignment, shifts are applied following the plumb line.
)Shifts are applied temporarily to the design data. The original design data is not modified
when a shift is applied.
Access Press Shifts.. in the Define screen.
Shift settings,
Horizontal shift/Vertical
shift/Tunnel shifts/Apply
tunnel shift page
The parameters required for applying the shift are identical for all entities.
Viva Series, Roads - General 964
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Apply hori-
zontal
shift/Apply
vertical shift
Check box When this box is checked, shifts can be defined.
Horizontal shifts are always rectangular to the
centreline of the element being worked with.
Whereas vertical shifts are defined along the plumb
line.
a) Horizontal alignment with constant shift
b) Vertical alignment with constant shift
Shift type
a) Constant shift
b) Linear shift
c) Parabolic shift and reverse curve
ba
Road_013
a b c
Road_014
Viva Series, Roads - General 965
Linear The difference between the shift at the begin
chainage and the shift defined at the end chainage is
distributed in a linear fashion. The difference
between the shift at the begin chainage and the shift
defined at the end chainage is distributed in a linear
fashion.
Constant A constant shift is applied from the begin chainage of
the shift to the end chainage of the shift. The shift
stays the same from its start chainage or station to
the end chainage or station.
Parabolic Available for Road and Rail. The difference between
the shift at the begin chainage and the shift defined
at the end chainage is distributed using a cubic
parabola. Parabolic shifts allow a smooth transition
between the existing curve and the shifted part.
Reverse curve Available for Road and Rail. Two arcs with the same
radius are used to distribute the shift. As for para-
bolic shifts, reverse curves guarantee a smooth tran-
sition between the existing curve and the shifted
part.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 966
a) Chainage
b) Shift
c) Start shift at chainage (e)
d) End shift at chainage (f)
e) Start chainage of the shift
f) End chainage of the shift
g) Radius of the two arcs used as transition curve
h) Random chainage between (e) and (f)
i) Shift applied at chainage (h)
Begin chainage Editable field Chainage from which the shift is applied.
Begin shift Editable field Magnitude of the shift to apply at the begin
chainage.
Shift value Editable field Available for Shift type:Constant. The magnitude of
shift.
End chainage Editable field Chainage at which the shift ends.
End shift Editable field Magnitude of the shift to apply at the end chainage.
Field Option Description
b
c
d
h
i
e
g
g
f
a
Road_077
Viva Series, Roads - General 967
Plot page with shifts The application offers for all stakeout and check methods a page showing a graphical repre-
sentation of the measured position in relation to the design. If shifts are applied to the
design the plot shows the original unshifted cross section view of the design as well as the
shifted element. The current element is shown in blue.
Before / after Available for Road and Rail. Defines the object
outside of the defined shift range.
a) None
b) Step
c) Parallel
None The object only exists within the defined shift range.
Parallel The begin shift and the end shift are continued
parallel. The start shift is used from the start of the
alignment until the start chainage. The end shift is
used from the end chainage until the end of the
alignment.
Step Before/after the defined shift range, no shift is
added. Outside of the defined shift area the original
design is used. This option means a "step" will appear
at the start and/or end of the shifted area.
Field Option Description
abc
Road_057
Viva Series, Roads - General 968
Sign convention for
shifts
The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the convention used for stake offset and
height difference.
)Horizontal stake offsets are always defined perpendicular to the centreline of the layer the
stringline/s belongs to.
a) Centreline
b) Stringline on left side
c) Negative horizontal shift
d) Negative vertical shift
e) Stringline on right side
f) Positive horizontal shift
g) Positive vertical shift
a
g
b
c
d
e
f
++
Road_053
a) Stringline the horizontal shift is applied to
b) User defined horizontal shift for the stringline
c) Centreline
d) Shifted stringline
a
b
d
c
Road_010
Viva Series, Roads - General 969
Shifts for stringlines,
slopes, layers and
DTMs
The shifts applied to stringlines, slopes, road crowns layers and DTMs are identical with one
exception: Given that DTMs are not defined relative to a centreline and hold no orientation
information, no horizontal shift is possible for a DTM.
Shift for cross slopes
and road crowns
Description
To allow widening and narrowing of cross slopes and road crowns, only one of the two strin-
glines defining the cross slope or crown, is shifted when adding a horizontal shift. This
behaviour is useful for small changes to the original design, for example to bus stops or
emergency bays.
a) Slope to shift
b) Centreline
c) Value for horizontal shift
d) Value for vertical shift
e) Shifted slope
ad
e
b
c
Road_016
a) Centreline
b) Original stringline of the design
c) Stringline with horizontal parabolic shift
a
b
c
Road_017
Viva Series, Roads - General 970
Horizontal shift
For cross slopes and crowns, the horizontal shift is added to the stringline that is defined
as the reference line. To maintain the original cross slope/crown ratio the stringline is
shifted along the cross slope/crown.
Vertical shift
The vertical component of the shift for a cross slope or crown is applied to all stringlines.
a) Cross slope to shift
b) Reference stringline of the cross slope
c) Second stringline of the cross slope
d) Positive horizontal shift
e) Position of the shifted reference stringline
a) Cross slope to shift
b) Right stringline of the cross slope
c) Left stringline of the cross slope
d) Negative vertical shift
e) Shifted cross slope
ae
b
d
c
+
Road_018
a
e
b
d
c
Road_019
Viva Series, Roads - General 971
Horizontal alignment
with constant hori-
zontal shift
Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centreline.
Plan view
a) Reference line
b) Point to stake
c) Stake height difference
d) Stake offset
Rail_013
a
b
d
c
Viva Series, Roads - General 972
35.6 Tasks
Description When staking out or checking a road/rail/tunnel, often it is not possible to finish a particular
task in one go. The element to be staked out or checked can be stored together with all
defined settings as a work task.
Stored in a task are:
• Selected layer
• Working chainage
• Selected line(s) or element
•Shifts
Tasks are stored within the selected Road/Rail/Tunnel job. They can be created at any time
when working in the field or during preparation in the office.
Deleting a task does not delete the referenced jobs.
Deleting a Road/Rail/Tunnel job deletes all referencing tasks.
Tasks are method-specific.
Creating a task Step Description
1. Start the Roads/Rail/Tunnel application.
2. In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs and press OK.
3. Select a method, if required, and press OK.
4. In the Define screen press Save...
5. Type in a name for the task and press OK.
Viva Series, Roads - General 973
Loading a task Access
Press Load.. in the Define screen.
Load a Defined Task
OK
To select the highlighted task and continue.
Delete
To delete the selected task.
More
To display information about Date, Time,
Creator and Description.
Fn Name or Time
To sort task list by name or time.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - General 974
35.7 Understanding Terms and Expressions
35.7.1 Road - Basic Terms
Terms and expressions a) Cut situation
b) Fill situation
c) Centreline
d) Natural surface
e) Hinge point
f) Catch point
g) Carriage way
h) Shoulder
i) Slope
j) Top
k) Toe
Term / expression Description
Carriage way The part of the road on which users drive once the road is
finished.
Shoulder or Verge Often located next to the carriage way, usually with a slightly
higher slope ratio than the carriage way.
Slope Located next to the verge and can be thought of as linking the
road level with the natural surface. The ratio of the slope is
greater than the ratio of the verge. A slope starts at the hinge
point.
Natural surface or orig-
inal ground
The undisturbed surface before project construction.
c
ab
e
e
k
c
d
h
g
i
i
hg
j
f
Road_001
Viva Series, Roads - General 975
Finished road level Describes the final road surface.
Catch point or daylight
point
Indicates the point of intersection between the slope and the
natural surface. Both the hinge point and the catch point lie
on the slope. For a cut slope, the catch point forms part of the
top of a bank. For a fill slope, the catch point forms part of the
bottom of a bank.
Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but
not always starting at zero.
Term / expression Description
Viva Series, Roads - General 976
35.7.2 Road - Horizontal and Vertical Geometry Elements
Horizontal alignment The application supports the following elements in the horizontal component of alignments:
• Straights
•Arcs
• Clothoids, entry and exit as well as partial
• Cubic parabolas, entry and exit as well as partial
• Bloss curves, entry and exit as well as partial; only available for Rail
• Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types are
represented by discrete points along the curve. For example, a line parallel to a clot-
hoid.
Vertical alignment The application supports the following elements in the vertical component of alignments:
• Straights
•Arcs
•Quadratic parabolas
• Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types are
represented by discrete points along the curve.
Viva Series, Roads - General 977
35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements
Description In general, there are four different basic stakeout and check elements:
• Cross slopes, for example, the final carriage way
• Stringlines, for example, a centreline
• Slopes, for example, the end-slopes of a cross section
• Surfaces, for example, a DTM surface
Every stakeout or check is based on one or more of these four base elements. For example,
a road crown consists of two cross slopes with one common stringline.
Stringlines The stake out of a stringline is used in different situations:
• Centre line of a road
• Edges of a road or any other change in slope
• Gutters
• Pipelines, cables and any other alignment-related design feature
a) Stringlines
b) Cross slopes
c) Slopes
a
a
a
bb
c
a
b
b
c
Road_002
Viva Series, Roads - General 978
Cross slopes Cross slopes are defined by two stringlines. The two stringlines define the right and left edge
of the cross slope. One of the two stringlines is used as the reference line.
Slopes Slopes, like cross slopes, are defined by two stringlines. Different to cross slopes, only one
edge of the slope, the hinge point, is known. The second edge, catch point or daylight point,
is defined by the intersection of the slope and the natural surface. As the natural surface is
unknown this edge can only be staked out in the field. Finding and staking out the catch
point is the most important task when working with slopes.
a) Stringline to stake out or check, in this case the
centreline
b) Stringline offset
c) Stringline height difference
a
cb
Road_003
a) Cross slope to stake out or check
b) Reference line
c) Horizontal offset to reference line
d) Height difference to reference line
e) Height difference to expanded cross slope
a
d
b
c
e
Road_004
Viva Series, Roads - General 979
Surfaces There are two types of surfaces supported that represent a three-dimensional design:
• DTM / TIN (Digital Terrain Model; Triangular Irregular Network)
•Layer
A DTM consists of several 3D triangles. DTMs do not include information relating the DTM to
a centreline. Positions are defined by easting, nothing and height values.
a) Centreline
b) Slope
c) Hinge Point
d) Second stringline defining the slope
e) Catch point
f) Natural surface
g) Δ Offset from the slope
h) Height difference from the slope
b
a
fg
e
h
c
d
Road_005
a) Height difference from the triangle of the DTM
found in the same vertical line as the measured
point
b) Easting of coordinate system
c) Northing of the coordinate system
Road_006
b
ca
Viva Series, Roads - General 980
A layer is a combination of stringlines that form a 3D surface relative to a centreline. Thus
it is possible to define points by chainage or station, offset and height. Refer to "35.4.3
Design Data" for more information.
a) Chainage or station
b) Layer Offset
c) Layer height difference
a
Road_007
b
c
Viva Series, Roads - General 981
35.7.4 Road - Stake Offset and Stake Height Difference
Description When conducting a stake out, the aim is usually to mark the position of geometric elements
defined by the design. For example, in the graphic below, the catch point of a slope. A point
can be staked either directly or indirectly. For a directly staked point, the peg ends up at
exactly the position of the point to be staked. Staking the same point indirectly, the peg will
be placed with a certain offset to the point.
)Horizontal stake offsets are, like shifts, defined perpendicular to the centreline of the layer
the stringline(s) belongs to, if no offset angle on Offsets page has been defined. For cross
slopes and road crowns, the stake offset is applied following the same rules as stated for
horizontal shifts. Refer to "35.5 Working with Shifts" for more information.
Stake offset For each stakeout method, a horizontal and/or vertical offset can be defined. The stake
offset and stake height difference are defined on the Offsets page of the stake screen.
One reason to stake out a point indirectly
is that the peg would not last long at the
position of the actual point. In this
example, the peg staked directly would
be removed as soon as the excavation
work starts.
Road_009
ab
c
d
Viva Series, Roads - General 982
Sign convention for
stake offset and height
difference
The sign convention for stake offsets and height differences is identical to the convention
used for design shifts.
Plot page with stake
offset and stake height
difference
The application offers for all stake out methods a page showing a graphical representation
of the measured position in relation to the design. If stake offset and/or stake height differ-
ence are used, the plot shows the original cross section view of the design as well as the
position to stake out. The position to stake out is marked by a yellow/black peg.
a) Centreline
b) Stringline on left side
c) Negative stake offset
d) Negative stake height difference
e) Stringline on right side
f) Positive stake offset
g) Positive stake height difference
a
g
b
c
d
e
f
++
Road_011
Viva Series, Roads - General 983
35.7.5 Road - Chainage or Station Equations
Description Chainage or station equations are used to adjust the alignment chainage or station. The
most common reason for doing so is the insertion or removal of curves during the design
process. Inserting or removing a curve would require recalculating the chainage or station of
an entire alignment. Using chainage or station equations eliminates this need. Chainage or
station equations can create either a gap or an overlap as shown in the following diagrams.
Gap chainage or station
equation. Chainage or
station back 10 = chainage
or station ahead 15.
a) Old
b) New
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
910
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12 13 14 15
345678910
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ba
Road_062
Viva Series, Roads - General 984
Multiple chainage or
station
In the case of the overlap shown in the example, the chainages or stations between seven
and thirteen appear twice. When a duplicate chainage or station is entered, a message asks
which one is to be used.
Example As more than one chainage or station equation is possible, a chainage or station can appear
more than twice on a design. In this example, the chainages or stations 11 to 13 appear
three times.
In this example, when chainage or station 12 is entered in Road - Multiple Chainage, the
following screen shows how the option to select the right chainage or station is displayed:
Overlap chainage or station
equation. Chainage or
station back 13 = chainage
or station ahead 7.
a) New
b) Old
12
22
3
3
3
4
4
45
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
7 8 9 10 11 12
a b
Road_063
Overlap chainage or station
equation. Chainage back
13 = chainage ahead 7 and
chainage back 15 =
chainage ahead 11.
0.. ..5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
7 8 9 101112131415
11 12 13 14 15 16.. ..24
Road_069
Viva Series, Roads - General 985
Description of columns
OK
To select the highlighted chainage or station
equation and return to the stake out screen.
More
To switch the value displayed in the last
column to show the end chainage or station
of the chainage or station equation.
Column Description
End Shows the end chainage or station for the chainage or station equation.
In this example, the field shows 13.000 for Nr. 1, 15.000 for Nr. 2 and
24.000 for Nr. 3. End shows to which chainage or station, the current
chainage or station equation is valid. As for the first part of the alignment,
no chainage or station equation exists, Ahead stays empty for the first
row.
Viva Series, Roads - General 986
35.7.6 Road - Working Corridor
Description A working corridor defines the valid offset range left and right of the centreline. When
working with irregular alignments such as traffic islands and parking lots, working corridors
are useful to avoid displaying results from the wrong centreline element.
The following example shows the result if working without a defined working corridor. For
the measured position (b), the application finds the centreline point (c) with the minimum
perpendicular offset (f).
With a defined working corridor (e), the application would display a message advising that
the measured position is outside of the defined centreline.
a) Centreline
b) Measured position
c) Projected point on the centreline
d) Defined offset range for the working corridor
e) Working corridor
f) Offset from the centreline, if no working corridor is
used
a
b
e
e
f
cd
d
Road_081
Viva Series, Roads - General 987
The working corridor is defined in Configuration, Design page. Refer to "35.3 Configuring
Roads Applications" for more information.
Viva Series, Roads - General 988
35.7.7 Road - Extension of the Centreline
Description Whenever centrelines must be extended, for example, at the start and end area of an align-
ment or slope. The projection of the measured position to the centreline is made using the
tangent of the start/end point of the centreline.
In this case a warning appears informing that the original design is exceeded. The application
will advise as soon as a measured position is within the design area once again.
Concept When expanding the centreline the geometry will be continued using the tangent of the
start/end point of the centreline.
Method Description
When staking out in the region of the start/end area of the design centreline, situations
occur where an expansion of the centreline is useful. As soon as measurements are outside
the defined centreline, the application will prompt if, and with which method, the centreline
should be expanded.
)The extension of a centreline is made following its start/end tangent. Outside of the original
design area correct results cannot be guaranteed.
a) Centreline
b) Extended centreline
b
a
Road_090
Viva Series, Roads - General 989
35.7.8 Road/Rail - Working with Heights
Description Normally, heights stored with the design data are used. The Rail application offers the possi-
bility to switch to either:
• a height which is entered manually by the user,
This option enables the manual definition of a height, which can be applied for staking
out or checking. This height is entered in the General page.
• a height which is retrieved from an existing Height Layer, as defined in the DTM job asso-
ciated with the project. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference
for the staking out or checking of alignments. 2D and 3D are possible.
This option is configured in the Tools menu.
Understanding priori-
ties of various heights Type of height Overrules Stake Height Diff
Manually entered All other heights Considered
Of individual point All other heights Considered
From height layer of DTM Design height Considered
From design No other heights Considered
Viva Series, Roads - General 990
35.7.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track
Terms and expressions Term / expression Description
Track A track comprises two separate rails.
Single track A single track is defined as one track with one centreline and
two rails. All chainages are calculated from the centreline.
Track centreline Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which all
design elements of the project are referenced. It could be that
the vertical component of the alignment does not coincide
with the plan component. In this case the vertical part of the
alignment will generally coincide with the lowest rail.
Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but
not always starting at zero.
Left/right rail Planimetric position of the left/right rail of a track.
The sense of the left/right rail is given by the direction of
increasing chainage.
When a section of the track is viewed in the direction of
increasing chainage, the left rail is to the left of the centre of
the track.
Nominal gauge The nominal distance between the active (internal) faces of
the left and right rails.
Superelevation base The distance over which the superelevation is applied. This
distance is normally the distance between the centre of the
left and right rail.
Viva Series, Roads - General 991
Diagram - Plan
Diagram - Section Two generic methods can be used to define the section of the track.
Left/right superelevation
Left/right cant
The superelevation or height difference of each rail with
respect to the track centreline. Usually expressed in millime-
tres.
If one of the rails is used to rotate the track section, or the
height of the vertical alignment coincides with the lowest rail,
the superelevation of the rotation point or lowest rail will be
zero.
Superelevation is also known by the term cant. These two
words can be interchanged.
Term / expression Description
a) Track centreline
b) Left rail
c) Right rail
d) Nominal gauge
a
b
c
d
Rail_001
Viva Series, Roads - General 992
Method 1 - A definition using rotation around a known point
This method involves rotating the section around a known point, normally the lowest rail.
Method 2 - A definition using relative height distances
This method uses height differences relative to the vertical alignment to define the height
of the left and right rail.
a) Left rail
b) Right rail
c) Rotation point
d) Nominal gauge
e) Superelevation base
f) Superelevation (cant)
a) Track centreline
b) Left rail
c) Right rail
d) Nominal gauge
e) Superelevation base
f) Left superelevation (left cant)
g) Right superelevation (right
cant)
e
a
b
f
d
c
Rail_002
Rail_003
a
b
c
e
g
d
f
Viva Series, Roads - General 993
Viva Series, Roads - General 994
35.7.10 Rail - Working with Multiple Tracks
Description Multiple tracks are used when more than one track share a common centreline, from which
all chainages are calculated.
When there are multiple tracks with independent centrelines for each track, each track is
then considered as a single track. Refer to "35.7.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track" for
details on single tracks.
Diagram - Plan
Diagram - Section
a) Chainage centreline
b) Left track centre ine
c) Left track left rail
d) Left track right rail
e) Right track centreline
f) Right track left rail
g) Right track right rail
b
afeg
c
d
Rail_004
Rail_005
b
a
c
d
f
e
g
j
h
i
k
Viva Series, Roads - General 995
Calculations For multiple tracks, the chainage centreline is used only to calculate the chainage. The
superelevation of each track is calculated with respect to the corresponding (left / right)
vertical alignment. The chainage centreline can consist of a plan and a vertical component.
Although the vertical component of the chainage centreline is not used for any calculation.
a) Chainage centreline
b) Left track centreline
c) Left track left rail
d) Left track right rail
e) Left track left rail superelevation
f) Left track right rail superelevation
g) Right track centreline
h) Right track left rail
i) Right track right rail
j) Right track left rail superelevation
k) Right track right rail superelevation
Viva Series, Roads - General 996
35.7.11 Rail - Check Elements and Stakeout Elements
Description Points can be staked with respect to three basic elements of the track:
• Track centreline
•Left rail
• Right rail
Centreline stakeout Description
The line to stake out can be a track centreline or, in the case of multiple tracks, the left or
right track centerline. In both cases, a horizontal offset with respect to the centreline can
be applied. Additionally, if a vertical alignment is available for a track centreline, a vertical
offset can be applied.
Diagram - Single track elements
a) Track centreline
b) Left rail
c) Right rail
d) Point to stake
e) Horizontal offset from track
centreline
f) Vertical offset from track
centreline
a
Rail_006
a
b
c
d
e
f
Viva Series, Roads - General 997
Left/right rail stakeout Description
The left or right rail of a track can be staked out:
•directly,
• horizontal and/or vertical offsets can be used to stake any point relative to either rail.
Diagram - Staking out a point relative to the right rail
)The position from which the horizontal and rail offsets will be applied depends on how
the left and right rails were defined in the imported design data. Using standard prac-
tice, the horizontal offset would be defined from the active face of the rail, and the
height offset would be defined from the highest part of the rail, as shown in the
diagram.
a) Track centreline
b) Left rail
c) Right rail
d) Point to stake
e) Horizontal offset from right
rail
f) Vertical offset from right rail
Rail_007
a
b
c
d
e
f
Viva Series, Roads - General 998
35.7.12 Rail - Working with Offsets
Sign convention for
offsets
The sign convention for offsets is:
a) Centreline
b) Positive horizontal offset
c) Positive vertical offset
d) Negative horizontal offset
e) Negative vertical offset
Rail_008
ad+
-b
c+
e-
Viva Series, Roads - General 999
35.7.13 Tunnel - Basic Terms
Terms and expressions Term / expression Description
Centreline Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which all
design elements of the project are referenced.
Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but
not always starting at zero.
Design Profile Geometric description of the designed shape of the cross-
section of the tunnel. The design profile can contain straight or
curve elements.
Excavated Profile Shape of the cross-section of the tunnel that has been exca-
vated.
Underbreak When the excavated profile is inside the design profile, the
underbreak is the perpendicular distance between the design
profile and the excavated profile.
Overbreak When the excavated profile is outside of the design profile, the
overbreak is the perpendicular distance between the design
profile and the excavated profile.
Tunnel Portal The open end of a tunnel.
Tunnel Face The point where the excavated tunnel meets existing terrain.
Superelevation (Rota-
tion)
Angle of rotation of a design profile. Used to take into account
the velocity of a moving vehicle through a curve.
Rotation Point The point about which the design profile is rotated. This point
may or may not coincide with the centreline.
Viva Series, Roads - General 1000
General terms
3D View
a) Centreline
b) Centreline offset
c) Point on design profile
d) Centreline height offset
e) Design profile
f) Excavated profile
g) Underbreak
h) Overbreak
g
h
f
e
d
c
b
a
Tunnel_001
a) Centreline or axis
b) Tunnel portal
c) Tunnel face
ba c
Tunnel_002
Viva Series, Roads - General 1001
Superelevation
a) Centreline or axis
b) Rotation point
c) Centreline offset
d) Centreline height offset
e) Superelevation (Rotation)
ac
d
be
Tunnel_003
Viva Series, Roads - General 1002
35.7.14 Tunnel - Elements for Stake Out and Check Measurements
Tunnel face Staking tunnel faces
It is usually required to stake out the tunnel face to indicate the position to excavate when
certain tunnelling methods are used. For example, Drill and Blast or excavation using a road-
header.
The points to stake on the tunnel face can be defined in various ways:
Horizontal and vertical offsets
By horizontal and vertical offsets with respect to the centreline:
a) Centreline
b) Point on tunnel face to stake
c) Centreline offset
d) Centreline height offset
d
c
b
a
Tunnel_004
Viva Series, Roads - General 1003
Distance along profile
By the distance from the start of the design profile and an offset from the design profile.
Distance along a particular element
By the distance along a particular element of the design profile and an offset from the
element.
a) Centreline
b) Point on tunnel face to stake
c) Point defining start of design profile
d) Distance from start of design profile
e) Offset perpendicular to design profile
a) Centreline
b) Point on tunnel face to stake
c) Element of design profile to stake
d) Distance from start of design profile element
e) Offset perpendicular to design profile
d
e
c
b
a
Tunnel_005
de
c
b
a
Tunnel_006
Viva Series, Roads - General 1004
Tunnel profiles Staking tunnel profiles
Tunnel profiles are normally staked after excavation to indicate the position of tunnel design
elements or services such as lighting or ventilation.
Basic terms
Usually a tunnel under construction is designed and built in various stages such that a given
chainage can have various design profiles. For example shotcrete or final lining. Each design
profile is called a layer.
Measuring tunnel profiles
Tunnel profiles are normally measured after excavation to compare the excavated profile
with the design profile. This check can occur during the excavation phase of the project or
for quality control checks of the built tunnel.
a) Centreline or axis
b) Final lining
c) Shotcrete
b
a
c
Tunnel_007
Viva Series, Roads - General 1005
When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to scan various profile from one instrument
position. The profiles to scan are defined with respect to a defined chainage. Profiles can
be scanned at a given forward and back interval within a given forward and back distance
from the defined profile.
Measuring tunnel profiles - Plan view
a) Centreline
b) Instrument position
c) Tunnel face
d) Defined profile to scan
e) Instrument profile
f) Back distance
g) Forward distance
h) Back interval
i) Forward interval
c
d
hi
fg
a
b
e
Tunnel_009
Viva Series, Roads - General 1006
Profile view
Tunnel profiles can be measured vertically, horizontally or perpendicular to the tunnel
centreline.
a) Centreline
b) Tunnel face
c) Horizontal profile
d) Profile perpendicular to centreline
e) Vertical profile
a
ce
d
b
Tunnel_010
Viva Series, Roads - General 1007
35.7.15 Tunnel - Shifts
Description When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For example,
an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may be 15 cm higher
than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this difference has to be
distributed over the remaining 100 m of paving. To handle these situations, the application
allows the possibility of adding shifts to the existing design data. A shift is applied when
selecting the element to stake out/check.
)Shifts do not change the stored design. They are applied temporarily for stake out purposes.
Centreline shifts Horizontal and vertical shifts
Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centre ine whereas vertical shifts are
applied along the plumb line.
Constant and linear shifts are supported
For both horizontal and vertical shifts, two different types can be applied:
a) Horizontal alignment with
constant shift (plan view)
b) Vertical alignment with
constant shift (profile view)
Constant: The shift remains the same from its start chainage or station to the end
chainage or station.
Linear: The shift is linearly interpolated along the chainage or station.
ba
Road_013
Viva Series, Roads - General 1008
Sign convention
The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the conventions used for centreline
offset and height shifts difference.
Design profile shift A shift can be applied to the design profile. The shift is applied perpendicularly to the design
profile at any point along the design profile.
a) Constant shift
b) Linear shift
a) Centreline
b) Positive horizontal shift
c) Positive vertical shift
d) Negative horizontal shift
e) Negative vertical shift
a b c
Tunnel_025
ad (-) b (+) c (+)
e (-)
Tunnel_011
Viva Series, Roads - General 1009
A positive shift will increase the size of the profile, a negative shift will decrease the size of
the profile.
a) Design profile with negative shift
b) Original design profile
c) Design profile with positive shift
d) Negative shift
e) Positive shift
a (-) b c (+)
d (-)
e (+)
Tunnel_012
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1010
36 Roads - Alignment Editor
36.1 Basic Terms
Description A road surface can be thought of three different types of design elements:
• the horizontal alignment
• the vertical alignment
• the cross section
Basic concepts
Any point A in a project has ENH coordinates in a determined coordinate system. Each point
has three different positions:
• A’ - Point on real surface
• A’’ - Point on horizontal alignment
• A’’’- Point on vertical alignment
a - Natural surface.
b - The vertical alignment.
c - The horizontal alignment.
A’’/B’’ - Points on horizontal alignment
A’/B’ - Points on real surface
A’’’/B’’’ - Points on vertical alignment
TS_051
A’
A’’’
B’
B’’
abc
A’’
B’’’
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1011
By adding a second point B to the project an alignment is defined. The alignment can be
thought in three ways:
• Horizontal alignment (A’’-B’’)
• Projection of the horizontal alignment onto the real surface (A’-B’)
• Vertical alignment (A’’’-B’’’)
The angle between the horizontal and the vertical alignment is the grade (α).
Geometric elements A road design is fitted to a base plan or map using the three basic geometric elements:
•Straight
•Curve
•Spiral
)Refer to "Appendix H Glossary" for a definition of the terms.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1012
36.2 Starting Alignment Editor
36.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor.
Alignment Editor Startup
Next step
Select an option and press OK.
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application.
Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment
Editor".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1013
36.2.2 Creating a New Alignment
Access Select Create new alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK.
New Alignment
Description of fields
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application.
Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment
Editor".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field The name of the new Alignment editor raw alignment.
Description Editable field Optional description of the new raw alignment.
Creator Editable field Optional description of the creator of this alignment.
Alignment type Selectable list Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road or
Rail applications.
Device Selectable list The device on which the new Alignment editor raw
alignment will be stored. Depending on the inserted
memory devices, this field may be a display only field.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1014
Next step
Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu".
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1015
36.2.3 Modifying an Existing Alignment
Access Select Edit existing alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK.
Select Alignment Description of fields
Next step
Highlight the Alignment name field and press ENTER.
Alignments
Field Option Description
Alignment
name Selectable list All existing Alignment editor raw alignments currently
stored in the \Data\XML folder with the file extension
*.xml.
Alignment type Selectable list Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road or
Rail applications.
OK
To select the highlighted raw alignment and
continue.
New..
To create a new raw alignment. Refer to
"36.2.2 Creating a New Alignment".
Edit..
To edit the name and description of an
existing raw alignment.
Delete
To delete an existing raw alignment.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1016
Next step
Press OK to select the highlighted raw alignment and return to the Select Alignment screen.
Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu".
More
To switch the last column between Date,
Time and Size.
CF card, SD card or Intrnl
To change between viewing jobs stored on
another data storage device or internal
memory.
Fn Backup
To restore a raw alignment file with the
extension *.xmb currently stored in the
\Data\XML folder.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1017
36.2.4 Importing Alignment Data
Access 1) Select Import alignment from file in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK.
2) Create a new alignment in the New Alignment screen. Refer to "36.2.2 Creating a New
Alignment".
3) Press OK.
Import Line
Description of fields
OK
To import the selected alignment data to
active raw alignment.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application.
Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment
Editor".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Data source The file type of the data source.
Survey job To import lines or areas from the selected control
job.
Road job To import lines from an existing Road job.
Road+ (GSI format) To import GSI alignment data.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1018
Next step
OK imports the selected alignment data and accesses the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to
"36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu".
From job Selectable list All jobs are available for selection. Available for
Survey job and Road job.
Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the
selected Survey job or Road job.
Line Selectable list Line or area element from the selected job. Available
for Survey job.
Alignment Selectable list Stringline from the selected Road job. The stringline
must be stored in the \dbx folder of the memory
device to be selectable. Available for Road job.
Alignment
(.aln) file Selectable list Horizontal alignment file in GSI format. The GSI align-
ment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of the
memory device to be selectable. Available for Road+
(GSI format).
Vertical (.prf)
file Selectable list Vertical alignment file in GSI format. The GSI align-
ment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of the
memory device to be selectable. Available for Road+
(GSI format).
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1019
36.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu
Access This screen is always accessed after successfully creating, editing or importing an alignment
file from the Alignment Editor Startup screen.
Alignment Editor Menu Description of options
To be able to convert alignments to a Roadrunner job, at least a horizontal alignment must
exist.
Option Description
Edit horizontal alignment To create, edit and delete elements of a horizontal align-
ment. Refer to "36.4 Edit Horizontal Alignments".
Edit vertical alignment To create, edit and delete elements of a vertical alignment.
Refer to "36.5 Edit Vertical Alignments".
Edit cross section templates To create, edit and delete cross section templates. Refer to
"36.6 Edit Cross Section Templates". Only available for road
jobs.
Edit cross section assign-
ments To create, edit and delete cross section assignments. Refer
to "36.7 Edit Cross Section Assignments". Only available for
road jobs.
Edit chainage equation To create, edit and delete chainage equations. Refer to
"36.8 Edit Chainage Equation".
Convert to RoadRunner job To convert existing LandXML alignments to a RoadRunner
job. Refer to "36.9 Convert to RoadRunner Job".
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1020
36.3 Configuring Alignment Editor
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Quality control page
Description of fields
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Check hori-
zontal deflec-
tion
Check box Possibility to do a deflection check for the horizontal
alignment.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1021
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Configuration,
Advanced page
Description of fields
Horiz limit Editable field The deflection tolerance for horizontal alignments.
The tolerance value used for determining deflection
errors. A deflection error occurs when the beginning
curve tangent of an element does not match the
ending tangent of the previous element. If the actual
error in deflection is greater than this value, the error
will be reported.
Check vertical
deflection Check box Possibility to do a deflection check for the vertical
alignment.
Vert limit Editable field The deflection tolerance for vertical alignments.
Confirm end
coordinates of
segment before
storing
Check box If this box is checked, then each time a new align-
ment element has been entered, a confirmation
message displays the end coordinates for confirma-
tion.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Vertical
parabola defini-
tion
Parameter defining the parabola.
Parameter p
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1022
K factor K factor = Parameter p/100.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1023
36.4 Edit Horizontal Alignments
36.4.1 Overview
Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements:
•Start Point
• Straight (Tangent)
•Curve
•Clothoid
•Cubic Parabola
• Partial Bloss
as well as checking the horizontal alignment.
Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit horizontal alignment. Press OK.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1024
Horizontal Alignment OK
To accept the screen entries and return to
the Alignment Editor Menu.
Add
To add a new horizontal element after the
highlighted element.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted element of the hori-
zontal alignment.
Delete
To delete the highlighted element of the
horizontal alignment. Either all following
elements or only the next element can be
adjusted.
Check
To check the horizontal alignment.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1025
36.4.2 Editing the Start Point
Access In Horizontal Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit...
Horizontal Start Point
Description of fields
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Get Pt
To apply coordinates or heights from an
existing point in the working job.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point.
Fn Config..
To configure the Alignment editor application.
Refer to "36.3 Configuring Alignment
Editor".
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Start chainage Editable field Start chainage of the horizontal alignment.
Easting Editable field Easting of the start point of the horizontal alignment.
Northing Editable field Northing of the start point of the horizontal align-
ment.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1026
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1027
36.4.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Horizontal Alignment
Access In Horizontal Alignment, highlight the start point, or an element if one exists, and press Add
or Edit...
)Elements can be added after the start point and either before or after other
elements.
)Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only the
creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
Add Horizontal Element Description of fields
The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected.
For Element type: Straight
Field Option Description
Element type Straight To insert/edit a straight to/in a horizontal alignment.
Curve To insert/edit a curve to/in a horizontal alignment.
Clothoid To insert/edit a clothoid to/in a horizontal alignment.
Cubic parabola To insert/edit a cubic parabola to/in a horizontal
alignment.
Bloss To insert/edit a bloss curve to/in a horizontal align-
ment. Only available for rail jobs.
Field Option Description
Method Azimuth & length Using the azimuth and the length of the straight.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1028
For Element type: Curve
For Element type: Clothoid
Azi & end chainage Using the azimuth and the end chainage of the
straight.
End coords Using the end coordinates of the straight.
Field Option Description
Method Radius & length Using the radius of the curve and its length.
Radius & delta Using the radius and the delta angle of the curve.
Radius & end
chain Using the radius of the curve and the end chainage.
Radius & end
coords Using the radius and the end coordinates of the
curve.
Center & end
coords Using the coordinates of the centre point and the
end point of the curve.
3 points Using three points.
Field Option Description
Method Radius & length Using the radius of the clothoid and its length.
Radius & end
chain Using the radius of the clothoid and the end
chainage.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1029
For Element type: Cubic parabola
For Element type: Bloss
Param & length Using the parameter A and the length of the
connecting curve.
Param & end chain Using the parameter A and the end chainage of the
spiral.
Radius & param-
eter Using the parameter A and the radius.
Field Option Description
Method Radius & length Using the radius of the cubic parabola and its length.
Radius & end
chain Using the radius of the cubic parabola and the end
chainage.
Field Option Description
Method Radius & length Using the radius of the connecting curve and its
length.
Radius & end
chain Using the radius of the connecting curve and its end
chainage.
Rad,lngth,end
coord Using the radius, length and end coordinates of the
bloss curve.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1030
Next step
OK to access the next screen.
Horizontal Straight/Hori-
zontal Curve/Horizontal
Clothoid/Horizontal
Cubic Parabola/Hori-
zontal Bloss,
Input page
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Inv..
To calculate the distance and angle between
two points from the working job.
Last..
To select values from the last inverse calcu-
lations.
Get Pt
To apply coordinates or heights from an
existing point in the working job. Available
when coordinates must be typed in.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point. Avail-
able when coordinates must be typed in.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access the Alignment Editor configura-
tion.
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1031
Description of fields
The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type selected in
Add Horizontal Element.
For Element type: Straight
Field Option Description
Start chainage Display only The end chainage of the start point / previous
element is automatically used and cannot be edited.
Field Option Description
Azimuth Editable field The azimuth displayed is from the previous element.
Another value can be entered manually. Available for
Method:Azimuth & length or Method:Azi & end
chainage.
End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method:Azi & end chainage.
End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for
Method:End coords.
End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for
Method:End coords.
Length Editable field Length of the straight element. Available for
Method:Azimuth & length.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1032
For Element type: Curve
Field Option Description
Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The value
can be edited. Available for Method:Radius &
length, Method:Radius & delta or Method:Radius &
end chain.
CP easting Editable field Easting of the centre point of the curve. Available for
Method:Center & end coords.
CP northing Editable field Northing of the centre point of the curve. Available
for Method:Center & end coords.
Curve direction Right or Left The direction of the curve when looking in the direc-
tion of increasing chainage. Available for
Method:Radius & length, Method:Radius & delta,
Method:Radius & end chain or Method:Radius &
end coords.
Radius Editable field Radius of the curve. The signs are set by the system
depending on the curve direction defined in Curve
direction. Available for Method:Radius & length,
Method:Radius & delta, Method:Radius & end
chain or Method:Radius & end coords.
Delta Editable field The deflection angle. Available for Method:Radius &
delta.
Length Editable field Length from the start to the end point of the curve.
Available for Method:Radius & length.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1033
For Element type: Clothoid
End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the curve element can be typed
in. Available for Method:Radius & end chain.
Int easting Editable field Easting of the intermediate point of the 3-pt-arc.
Available for Method:3 points.
Int northing Editable field Northing of the intermediate point of the 3-pt-arc.
Available for Method:3 points.
End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for
Method:Radius & end coords, Method:Center &
end coords and Method:3 points.
End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for
Method:Radius & end coords, Method:Center &
end coords and Method:3 points.
Field Option Description
Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The value
can be edited.
Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the clothoid looking in the direction
of increasing chainage.
Spiral in/out Spiral in For transition from tangent to curve.
Spiral out For transition from curve to tangent.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1034
Radius Editable field Radius of the clothoid. Available for Method:Radius
& length, Method:Radius & end chain and
Method:Radius & parameter.
Parameter A Editable field The parameter A defining the clothoids. Available for
Method:Param & end chain, Method:Param &
length and Method:Radius & parameter.
Length Editable field Length of the clothoid element. Available for
Method:Param & length and Method:Radius &
length.
Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the
system depending on the spiral direction defined in
Spiral direction. Available for Method:Radius &
length and Method:Radius & end chain when Use
partial spiral is checked.
End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the
system depending on the spiral direction defined in
Spiral direction. Available for Method:Radius &
length and Method:Radius & end chain when Use
partial spiral is checked.
End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the clothoid can be typed in.
Available for Method:Radius & end chain and
Method:Param & end chain.
Use partial
spiral Check box To create partial clothoids. Available for
Method:Radius & length and Method:Radius & end
chain.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1035
For Element type: Cubic parabola
Field Option Description
Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The value
can be edited.
Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the cubic parabola looking in the
direction of increasing chainage.
Spiral in/out Spiral in For a transition from tangent to curve.
Spiral out For a transition from curve to tangent.
Radius Editable field Radius of the cubic parabola.
Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the
system depending on the spiral direction defined in
Spiral direction. Available when Use partial spiral is
checked.
End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the
system depending on the spiral direction defined in
Spiral direction. Available when Use partial spiral is
checked.
Length Editable field Length of the cubic parabola element. Available for
Method:Radius & length.
End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the cubic parabola element can
be typed in. Available for Method:Radius & end
chain.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1036
For Element type: Bloss
Use partial
spiral Check box To create partial cubic parabolas.
Field Option Description
Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This
azimuth is used from the previous element. The value
can be edited.
Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the bloss looking in the direction of
increasing chainage.
Spiral in/out Spiral in For a transition from tangent to curve.
Spiral out For a transition from curve to tangent.
Radius Editable field Radius of the bloss.
Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the
system depending on the spiral direction defined in
Spiral direction. Available for Method:Rad,lngth,end
coord.
End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the
system depending on the spiral direction defined in
Spiral direction.
Available for Method:Rad,lngth,end coord.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1037
Next step
Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed.
Length Editable field Length of the bloss curve element. Available for
Method:Radius & length and
Method:Rad,lngth,end coord.
End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the bloss curve element can be
typed in. Available for Method:Radius & end chain.
End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for
Method:Rad,lngth,end coord.
End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for
Method:Rad,lngth,end coord.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1038
36.5 Edit Vertical Alignments
36.5.1 Overview
Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements:
•Start Point
• Straight (Tangent)
• Parabola
•Curve
as well as checking the vertical alignment.
Throughout the whole component height and elevation is used for local orthometric height.
If no local orthometric height is available, the local ellipsoidal height is used instead.
Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit vertical alignment. Press OK.
Vertical Alignment The available keys are identical to the keys in Horizontal Alignment. Refer to the paragraph
"Horizontal Alignment".
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1039
36.5.2 Editing the Start Point
Access In Vertical Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit...
Vertical Start Point
Description of fields
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Get Pt
To apply heights from an existing point in
the working job.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point.
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Start chainage Editable field Start chainage of the vertical alignment.
Elevation Editable field Elevation at the start chainage of the vertical align-
ment.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1040
36.5.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Vertical Alignment
Access In Vertical Alignment, highlight the start point and press Add or Edit...
)Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only the
creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
)For grade units, the system settings are applied. Refer to "23.1 Regional settings" to change
the system setting.
Add Vertical Element Description of fields
The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected.
For Element type: Straight
Field Option Description
Element type Straight To insert/edit a straight to/in a vertical alignment.
Parabola To insert/edit a parabola to/in a vertical alignment.
Curve To insert/edit a curve to/in a vertical alignment.
Field Option Description
Method Length & end elev Using the length and the end elevation of the
straight.
End chain & elev Using the end chainage and the elevation of the
straight
Length & grade Using the length and the grade of the straight.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1041
For Element type: Parabola
For Element type: Curve
End chain & grade Using the end chainage and the grade of the straight.
Field Option Description
Method Length & grades Using the length and the grades of the parabola.
End chain &
grades Using the end chainage and the grades of the
parabola.
Param & end elev Using the parameter and the end elevation of the
parabola.
3 elevations Using three elevations at defined chainages of the
parabola.
Field Option Description
Method Radius & length Using the radius of the curve and its length.
Radius & end
chain Using the radius and the end chainage of the curve.
Radius & grades Using the radius and the grades of the curve.
Length & grades Using the length and the grades of the curve.
End chain &
grades Using start, intermediate and end elevation and
chainage of the curve.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1042
Next step
OK to access the next screen.
Vertical Straight/Vertical
Parabola/Vertical Curve,
Input page
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Inv..
To calculate the distance and angle between
two points from the working job.
Last..
To select values from the last inverse calcu-
lations.
Get Pt
To apply coordinates or heights from an
existing point in the working job. Available
when coordinates must be typed in.
Survy..
To go to Survey and measure a point. Avail-
able when elevation must be typed in.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access the Alignment Editor configura-
tion.
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn %/V:H/H:V
To switch between h:v, v:h and % for the
grade unit.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1043
Description of fields
The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type selected in
Add Vertical Element.
For Element type: Straight
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Start chainage Display only The end chainage of the previous element is auto-
matically used and cannot be edited.
Start elevation Display only The end height of the previous element is automati-
cally used and cannot be edited.
Field Option Description
Length Editable field Length of the straight element as slope distance.
Available for Method:Length & end elev and
Method:Length & grade.
End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method:End chain & elev and Method:End chain &
grade.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1044
For Element type: Parabola
End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually
or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on
this line to select the height from an existing point in
the working job. Available for Method:Length & end
elev and Method:End chain & elev.
Grade Editable field The grade of the straight element. Positive inclines
have positive values, negative inclines have negative
values. Available for Method:Length & grade and
Method:End chain & grade.
Field Option Description
Curve type Crest The curve type is convex. Available for
Method:Param & end elev.
Sag The curve type is concave. Available for
Method:Param & end elev.
Parameter p or
K factor Editable field Parameter of the parabola. Available for
Method:Param & end elev.
The field name depends on the value chosen for the
Vertical parabola definition in the Configuration,
Advanced page.
Length Editable field Length of the parabola as horizontal distance. Avail-
able for Method:Length & grades and
Method:Param & end elev.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1045
Int chainage Editable field Chainage of the second elevation. Available for
Method:3 elevations.
Int elevation Editable field Second elevation. Type in manually or press Get Pt
when the focus is on this line to select the height
from an existing point in the working job. Available
for Method:3 elevations.
End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method:End chain & grades and Method:3 eleva-
tions.
End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually
or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on
this line to select the height from an existing point in
the working job. Available for Method:Param & end
elev and Method:3 elevations.
Grade in Editable field The grade at the beginning of the parabola. Positive
inclines have positive values, negative inclines have
negative values. Available for parabolas with
Method:Length & grades and Method:End chain &
grades.
Grade out Editable field The grade at the end of the parabola. Positive
inclines have positive values, negative inclines have
negative values. Available for Method:Length &
grades and Method:End chain & grades.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1046
For Element type: Curve
Field Option Description
Curve type Crest The curve type is convex.
Sag The curve type is concave.
Radius Editable field Radius of the curve. Available for Method:Radius &
length, Method:Radius & end chain and
Method:Radius & grades.
Length Editable field Length of the curve along the segment. Available for
Method:Radius & length and Method:Length &
grades.
End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for
Method:End chain & grades and Method:Radius &
end chain.
End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually
or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on
this line to select the height from an existing point in
the working job. Available for Method:Radius &
length and Method:Radius & end chain.
Grade in Editable field The grade at the beginning of the parabola. Positive
inclines have positive values, negative inclines have
negative values. Available for Method:Radius &
grades, Method:Length & grades and Method:End
chain & grades.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1047
Next step
Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed.
Grade out Editable field The grade at the end of the parabola. Positive
inclines have positive values, negative inclines have
negative values. Available for Method:Radius &
grades, Method:Length & grades and Method:End
chain & grades.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1048
36.6 Edit Cross Section Templates
36.6.1 Overview
Description Allows creating, editing, deleting and duplicating of cross section templates.
Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit cross section templates. Press OK.
Templates
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
New..
To create a new cross section template.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted cross section
template.
Delete
To delete the highlighted cross section
template.
Duplct
To duplicate the highlighted template.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1049
36.6.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template
Access In Templates
press New.. to create a new cross section template
OR
highlight an existing template and press Edit...
)Creating and editing a cross section template are similar processes. For simplicity, only the
creation of a cross section template is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
New Template,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access the Alignment Editor configura-
tion.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Template name Editable field Name of the cross section template to be
created/edited.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1050
Next step
Page changes to the Layers page where the layers of the template are listed.
Allow absolute
heights for
cross section
definition
Check box If this box is checked, in addition to relative to line
input methods, absolute heights can also be entered
to define cross section segments.
Center height Editable field To be able to create segments using absolute
heights, a centre height must be defined. Available if
Allow absolute heights for cross section definition
is checked.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1051
36.6.3 Add/Edit a Layer
Access In New Template/Edit Template, Layers page, press New.. or Edit...
)Creating and editing a layer of a cross section template are similar processes. For simplicity,
only the creation of a layer is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
New Layer,
Segments
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Add
To create and add a new segment.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted segment.
Delete
To delete the highlighted segment.
More
To switch between CL horizontal offset,
Slope distance, Horiz distance in the
second column and between CL vertical
offset, Slope ratio, Vertical distance in the
third column.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Mirror
To mirror the entered segments to the other
side of the cross section.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1052
Description of columns
Next step
Add to add a segment.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Column Description
Name List of segments of the selected layer.
CL horizontal offset Horizontal offset to the centre line of the segment.
CL vertical offset Vertical offset to the centre line of the segment.
Slope distance Slope distance to the neighbouring vertex.
Slope ratio Slope ratio of the segment.
Horiz distance Horizontal distance to the neighbouring vertex.
Vertical distance Vertical distance to the neighbouring vertex.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1053
Add Segment,
Input page
Description of fields
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
Inv..
To calculate the distance and angle between
two points from the working job.
Last..
To select values from the last inverse calcu-
lations.
%/V:H/H:V
To switch between h:v, v:h and % for the
slope ratio.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access the Alignment Editor configura-
tion.
Fn Reset
To reset all screen entries.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Template name Display only Name of the cross section template to be edited.
Layer name Display only Name of the cross section template to be edited.
Method Method to be used for defining the segment.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1054
Horiz dist & slope Using a horizontal distance and slope ratio to define
the segment.
Horiz dist & vert
dist Using a horizontal distance and a vertical distance to
define the segment.
CL offsets Using a horizontal and vertical offset in relation to
the centre line.
Slope dist & ratio Using a slope distance and slope ratio to define the
segment.
Horiz dist & height Using a horizontal and absolute height to define the
segment. Only available for templates with Allow
absolute heights for cross section definition
enabled.
CL offset & height Using a horizontal offset in relation to the centre line
and absolute height. Only available for templates
with Allow absolute heights for cross section defini-
tion enabled.
Horiz distance Editable field Horizontal distance of the segment. Available for
Method: Horiz dist & slope and Method: Horiz dist &
vert dist.
Vertical
distance Editable field Vertical distance of the segment. Available for
Method: Horiz dist & vert dist.
CL horizontal
offset Editable field Horizontal centre line offset of the segment. Only
available for Method: CL offsets.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1055
Next step
Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed.
CL vertical
offset Editable field Vertical centre line offset of the segment. Only avail-
able for Method: CL offsets.
Slope distance Editable field Slope distance of the segment. Only available for
Method: Slope dist & ratio.
Slope ratio Editable field Slope ratio of the segment. Available for Method:
Horiz dist & slope and Method: Slope dist & ratio.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1056
36.7 Edit Cross Section Assignments
36.7.1 Overview
Description Allows the creation, editing and deleting of cross section assignments as well as checking
the cross section assignments.
A cross section assignment defines from which chainage on a cross section template is to
be used.
Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit cross section assignment. Press OK.
Cross Section Assign-
ments
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
New..
To create a new cross section assignment.
Edit..
To edit a cross section assignment.
Delete
To delete a cross section assignment.
Check
To check the cross section assignments.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1057
36.7.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Assignment
Access In Cross Section Assignments press New.. or Edit...
)Creating and editing a cross section assignment are similar processes. For simplicity, only
the creation of a cross section assignment is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
)Assigned cross section templates must contain the same number of vertices.
New Cross Section
Assgnmnt
Description of fields
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
StartCh
To take the start chainage of the vertical
alignment for Chainage.
End Ch
To take the end chainage of the vertical
alignment for Chainage.
Fn Config..
To access Alignment Editor configuration.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Chainage Editable field The chainage to which the cross section template is
assigned to.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1058
Type in or edit the value for Chainage. Alternatively
press StartCh or End Ch to apply the start or end
chainage of the vertical alignment.
Template name Selectable list The cross section template to be assigned to. All
existing cross section templates currently stored to
the alignment can be selected.
Select an existing template from the list or create a
new one to be assigned to the Chainage.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1059
36.8 Edit Chainage Equation
36.8.1 Overview
Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of:
•Gaps
•Overlaps
Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit chainage equation. Press OK.
Chainage Equation
OK
To accept the screen entries and continue.
New..
To create a new chainage equation.
Edit..
To edit a chainage equation.
Delete
To delete a chainage equation.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1060
36.8.2 Creating/editing a Chainage Equation
Access In Chainage Equation press New.. or Edit...
)Creating and editing a Chainage equation are similar processes. For simplicity, only the crea-
tion of a Chainage equation is explained and differences are clearly outlined.
New Chainage Equation Description of fields
Next step
OK to create the chainage equation or to store the edited chainage equation.
Field Option Description
Chainage back Editable field Chainage back. Type in or edit the value.
Chainage
ahead Editable field Chainage ahead. Type in or edit the value.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1061
36.9 Convert to RoadRunner Job
Description Allows the onboard conversion of existing LandXML alignments including horizontal align-
ment, vertical alignment, cross sections and chainage equations to a RoadRunner job.
Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Convert to RoadRunner job. Press OK.
Convert to Road Job/
Convert to Rail Job Description of fields
Field Option Description
From alignment Display only Displays the modified or newly created alignment to
be converted.
To road job Selectable list The Road job to which the alignment will be
converted. Create a new job. Available if the Align-
ment type is set to Road in Select Alignment.
)If a new job with the same name as an existing
job must be created, then the existing job must
be deleted first.
To rail job Selectable list The Rail job to which the alignment will be converted.
Create a new job. Available if the Alignment type is
set to Rail in Select Alignment.
)If a new job with the same name as an existing
job must be created, then the existing job must
be deleted first.
Conversion
mode Defines the mode to be used for the conversion
process.
Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 1062
Next step
Press OK to start the conversion.
Alignment Editor creates a report sheet during the conversion. The file LandXml2Dbx.log can
be found in the \Data\XML folder on the data storage device.
After the successful conversion, press OK to return to the Main Menu on the instrument.
Horiz & vert Only horizontal and vertical alignment will be
converted.
Horizontal only Only horizontal alignment will be converted.
Hz,vert,cross
section Horizontal alignment, vertical alignment and cross
sections will be converted. Only available for road
jobs.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1063
37 Roads - Road
37.1 Creating a New Road Job
Description There are two ways of creating road/rail jobs:
Typing them in manually by using the Alignment Editor application.
OR
Converting data created in a design package.
Manually entered data Data can be typed in and edited with Alignment Editor. Refer to "36 Roads - Alignment
Editor" for information on how to enter data manually.
Converted data The Design to Field component of LEICA Geo Office offers converters from several road/rail
design and CAD packages. Several design packages also include a built-in converter to
Roads/Rail. As different design packages follow different philosophies in representation,
creation and storage of data the conversion process differs slightly.
LEICA Geo Office can be found on the LEICA Geo Office DVD.
LEICA Geo Office
Road_065
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1064
The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of:
• myWorld@Leica Geosystems
https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com
• of the Leica Geosystems website:
http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1065
37.2 Defining the Work
37.2.1 Defining the Method and the Task
Access 1) Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Roads\Roads - Stakeout or Roads - As built check.
2) In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs. Refer to "35.4.1 Choosing a Job".
3) Press OK
Define the Work to be
Done
Description of the methods
OK
To continue to the next screen.
Fn Config..
To access the configuration settings. Refer
to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
Method
To define what is shown in the selectable
list for Method to use.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Method Description
Stringline To stake/check any type of line, for example a centreline or kerb.
Chainage information is related to the centreline.
Individual stringline Like the previous method when staking/checking any line of a
layer. The stake/check is always in relation to the chainage of
the line itself and not the centreline of the layer.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1066
Next step
OK accesses the Define Task screen.
Cross slope To stake/check a cross slope defined by the road design. Two
stringlines define the cross slope (a lane or running surface).
Manual slope To stake/check a manually defined slope relative to an existing
centreline. The slope is defined by one stringline (hinge point)
and the slope direction with ratio.
Slope To stake/check a slope defined by two stringlines of the 3D road
design.
Crown To stake/check a road crown defined by two cross slopes and
one common stringline. The information for both cross slopes is
displayed at the same time.
Layer To stake/check a layer surface defined by the road design rela-
tive to the layer centreline.
DTM To checks a DTM surface. Available for Roads - As built check
only.
Method Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1067
Define Task screen
The fields available depend on the selection for Method to use in Define the Work to be
Done.
OK
To continue to the next screen.
Slope
Available for Method to use:Manual slope
and Method to use:Slope. To define the
slope parameters. Refer to "37.2.3
Advanced Slope Settings".
Shifts..
To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the
selected element. Refer to "35.5 Working
with Shifts".
Load..
To load a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks".
Save..
To save the settings as a task. Refer to
"35.6 Tasks".
Page
Available for Method to use:Manual slope.
To change to Hinge offset page.
Fn Config..
To access the configuration settings. Refer
to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1068
Description of fields
Common to all methods
For Method to use:Stringline
Field Option Description
Layer Display only or
selectable list
The selected layer in the working job.
Field Option Description
Working
chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The
chainage can range between the start chainage and
the end chainage.
Line Selectable list To select a stringline. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a
Line".
Toggle offsets
left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be
staked/checked on the left/right side of the
centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle
Offsets Right/Left".
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1069
Refer to an
additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be
selected.
Allows chainage, offset and height difference infor-
mation to be obtained from any other string of the
layer, independent from those strings currently
selected for the chosen method. For example:
Staking a cross slope where the height information
comes from the cross slope, but the chainage infor-
mation comes from a string which is not the
centreline of the current layer.
For the additional line, an offset and a height differ-
ence can be defined on the Offsets page.
Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines. Refer
to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1070
For Method to use:Individual stringline
For Method to use:Cross slope
Field Option Description
Line Selectable list To select a stringline. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a
Line".
Toggle offsets
left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be
staked/checked on the left/right side of the
centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle
Offsets Right/Left".
Refer to an
additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be
selected.
Allows chainage, offset and height difference infor-
mation to be obtained from any other string of the
layer independent from those strings currently used.
For example: Staking a cross slope where the height
information comes from the cross slope but the
chainage information comes from a string which is
not the centreline of the current layer.
Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines. Refer
to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line".
Field Option Description
Working
chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The
chainage can range between the start chainage and
the end chainage.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1071
Left stringline Selectable list The name of the left stringline defining the cross
slope. Refer to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line".
Right stringline Display only The name of the right stringline defining the cross
slope.
Reference line Left stringline or
Right stringline To select one of the stringlines to be used as the
reference line.
Toggle offsets
left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be
staked/checked on the left/right side of the
centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle
Offsets Right/Left".
Refer to an
additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be
selected.
Allows chainage, offset and height difference infor-
mation to be obtained from any other string of the
layer independent from those strings currently used.
For example: Staking a cross slope where the height
information comes from the cross slope but the
chainage information comes from a string which is
not the centreline of the current layer.
Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines. Refer
to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1072
For Method to use:Manual slope
Field Option Description
On the Slope page:
Working
chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The
chainage can range between the start chainage and
the end chainage.
Hinge line Selectable list To select the hinge point of the slope. Refer to
"37.2.2 Selecting a Line".
Slope type Cut right, Cut left,
Fill right or Fill left Differentiates if the defined slope is a cut/fill and
left/right.
a) Hinge Point
b) Cut left
c) Cut right
d) Fill left
e) Fill right
Slope ratio Editable field Defines the ratio of the slope.
)The slope ratio format is defined as system
setting in Regional Settings, Slope page.
a
bc
de
Road_079
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1073
For Method to use:Slope
On the Hinge offset page:
Apply hinge
offsets Check box When this box is check, a horizontal and vertical
offset of the hinge point can be defined.
Offset type The vertical offset type for the hinge point.
Absolute The only option available for 2D lines.
Relative to line or
Relative to DTM Available for 3D lines.
Offset Editable field The horizontal offset of the hinge point from the
centreline/reference line.
Elevation Editable field The elevation of the hinge point (absolute height).
Available for Offset type:Absolute.
Height differ-
ence Editable field For Offset type:Relative to line: A vertical offset for
the hinge point using a height difference can be
defined.
For Offset type:Relative to DTM: A height difference
to the DTM height can be applied.
Field Option Description
Working
chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The
chainage can range between the start chainage and
the end chainage.
Left stringline Selectable list The name of the left stringline defining the slope.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1074
For Method to use:Crown
Right stringline Display only The name of the right stringline defining the slope.
Reference line Left stringline or
Right stringline To select one of the stringlines to be used as the
reference line (= hinge line).
Field Option Description
Working
chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The
chainage can range between the start chainage and
the end chainage.
Crown line Selectable list Stringline defining the middle line of the crown. Refer
to "37.2.2 Selecting a Line".
Left stringline Display only The name of the stringline defining left line of the
crown.
Right stringline Display only The name of the stringline defining right line of the
crown.
Reference line Left stringline or
Right stringline To select one of the stringlines to be used as the
reference line.
Toggle offsets
left/right Check box When this box is checked, points can be
staked/checked on the left/right side of the
centreline in one process. Refer to "37.2.4 Toggle
Offsets Right/Left".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1075
For Method to use:Layer
For Method to use:DTM, available for Roads - As built check
Refer to an
additional line Check box When this box is checked, a second stringline can be
selected.
Allows chainage, offset and height difference infor-
mation to be obtained from any other string of the
layer independent from those strings currently used.
For example: Staking a cross slope where the height
information comes from the cross slope but the
chainage information comes from a string which is
not the centreline of the current layer.
Line Selectable list The stringlines available as second stringlines.
Field Option Description
Layer Selectable list A list of all available layers of the selected Road job.
Centreline Display only Active centreline of the selected layer.
Extend end
slopes Check box When this box is checked, the left most and right
most end slopes of the design are extended.
Field Option Description
DTM layer Display only A list of all DTM surfaces available in the selected
DTM job.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1076
Next step
OK to access the Stake or Check screen.
Number of
triangles Display only Number of triangles the selected DTM consists of.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1077
37.2.2 Selecting a Line
Access In the Define screen, open a selectable list for a line, for example for Line or Left stringline.
)The selection of stringlines depends on:
• Availability of horizontal alignments
• Availability of vertical alignment information
• View (plan or cross section view)
• Working chainage defined or not
• Selected method
Lines If no working chainage has been entered, the list shows all stringlines of the current layer.
If a working chainage is available, all stringlines existing at that chainage are listed only.
OK
To return to the previous screen.
More
To display information about the absolute
height or the height difference. Unavailable
for individual stringlines.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1078
Description of columns
)In addition to the list selection the required lines and slopes can also be selected on Plot
page.
Lines can be selected in a graphical way by using the
• cross section view. The cross section view is available if a working chainage has been
defined.
• planar view which is always available. The defined working chainage is displayed as a
grey line. The size corresponds to the working corridor settings.
Column Description
Line name The name of the line.
CL offset The offset from the centreline. The format is defined as system
setting in Regional Settings.
Height The absolute height of the line.
Ht diff The height difference to the centreline.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1079
<--
To select the previous line.
-->
To select the next line.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1080
37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings
Access Press Slope in the Define screen.
General slope stakeout Description
This method involves a generic approach to slope stakeout for direct stakeout of the catch
point. No special batter rails or reference point parameters are defined.
Workflow
As the natural surface is unknown the catch point can only be staked out iteratively. If
staking out on a horizontal natural surface, the values shown for ∆ offset indicates how far
the catch point is away. If the natural surface is not horizontal, more iterations could be
needed.
Slope Stakeout Settings Description of fields
Common to all types
a) Slope to stake out
b) Natural surface
c) Catch point
a
c
b
Road_055
Field Option Description
Use advanced
slope stakeout Check box When this box is checked, slope stakeout settings are
available.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1081
For Use advanced slope stakeout:Reference Point
For Use advanced slope stakeout:Batter rail
Type Reference Point Stakeout of a reference peg with a defined offset
from the catch point. Refer to "Slope staking using
Reference Point".
Batter rail Stakeout of batter rails with defined peg heights.
Refer to "Slope staking using Batter rail".
Reference batter Stakeout of batter rails with a defined offset from
the catch point.
Refer to "Slope staking using Reference batter".
Ref point surface Stakeout of a reference peg in the slope surface with
a defined height difference to the hinge point. Slope
values for the reference point cannot be entered.
Refer to "Slope staking using Ref point surface".
Field Option Description
Ref offset Editable field The defined offset of the reference point from the
catch point.
Field Option Description
Batter type Cut or Fill Defines the cut or fill rail.
Rail over batter Editable field The vertical height of the rail top above the batter.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1082
For Use advanced slope stakeout:Reference batter
For Use advanced slope stakeout:Ref point surface
The only available fields are Use advanced slope stakeout and Type.
Next step
OK returns to the Define screen.
Rail over
ground Editable field The vertical height of the rail over the ground.
Field Option Description
Ref offset Editable field The defined offset of the inner peg from the catch
point.
Traveler height Editable field The vertical height of the rail above the batter.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1083
Slope staking using
Reference Point Description
When staking out slopes using the reference point method, the catch point of the slope is
marked with a reference peg using a defined offset. The grade of the slope is marked and
controlled by "grade checkers".
The reference point offset guarantees that all pegs are placed with the same horizontal
offset to the catch point.
Workflow
a) Slope to stake out
b) Natural surface
c) Catch point of the slope
d) Defined reference point offset
e) Reference peg
a) Slope to stake out
b) Natural surface
c) Real catch point
d) Projected catch point
e) Approximate staked out catch
point after three iterations
f) Defined reference point
offset
g) Reference peg
a
c
bde
Road_022
a
c
bd
e
g
c
d
f
1 2
Road_023
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1084
The closer the real catch point and the approximated stakeout catch point are, the closer
the projected catch point gets to the real catch point.
Step Description
1. The first step when staking out is to find the catch point of the slope. As the
natural surface is unknown, this process has to be done iteratively. As soon as the
measured position (e) is close enough to the real catch point (c), it can be used
as the approximate catch point. Based on this approximate catch point, the
projected catch point (d) on the slope is calculated.
No reference point offset and no traveller height are taken into account for this
step. The projected catch point (d) is then used as a starting point for the
stakeout of the reference peg (g).
2. The second step is to stake out the reference point relative to the projected catch
point. Select Place reference peg from the Tools menu. Values in Stake Slope
Reference Point,Stake page will guide the user to the position to place the peg.
The defined reference point offset (f) is already taken into account.
The catch point is marked indirectly via the reference peg. Values to be marked on
the reference peg can be found on Stake Slope Reference Point,Info page.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1085
Slope staking using
Batter rail Description
When staking out slopes with the Batter rail method,the grade of the slope is marked with
a board. Using this method it is not necessary to stake out the catch point first.
The defined rail over ground should guarantee that the rails are positioned as high as
possible, to make them easier to use.
1 Batter rail for a cut
2 Batter rail for a fill
a) Slope to stake out
b) Natural surface
c) Catch point of the slope
d) Rail over ground
e) Rail over batter
Step Description
1. The first peg to stake out is always the peg closest to the hinge point.
Stake out the position of the first peg of the batter by using ∆ offset on the Stake
page of the Stake/Check screen. The height of the rail over ground Rail over
ground is taken into account for ∆ offset. This action means that when ∆ offset is
equal to zero the first peg is in the correct position.
2. Place the pole on top of the first peg. The value for ∆ height indicates how far
below the top of the batter has to be placed.
3. Stake out the second peg of the batter rail by using ∆ chainage and place the peg.
RR12_024
ac
bd
ea
c
b
d
e
1 2
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1086
Slope staking using
Reference batter Description
This method is used if batter rails with a constant distance from the inner peg to the catch
point are required.
Workflow
4. Place the pole on the position of the batter rail to be used as a reference for the
slope values to mark on the batter rail. ∆ height should now read zero.
)All values shown under the Info page are relative to the original slope.
Step Description
a) Slope to stake out
b) Natural surface
c) Catch point of the slope
d) Defined reference point offset
e) Height of the "traveller"
Step Description
)The first step is to stake out the catch point of the slope. The reference point
offset and traveller height are not taken in account in this step. Based on this
approximate catch point the projected catch point on the slope is calculated.
The projected catch point is used as a starting point for the stakeout of the refer-
ence peg.
ac
b
de
Road_025
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1087
1. Stake out the position of the catch point by using ∆ offset and/or ∆ height on the
Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. When ∆ offset and ∆ height are equal to
zero, the catch point has been located.
2. Fn Tools.. to access the Tools screen. The measured position is used as the catch
point for the stake out of the reference point.
3. Select Place reference peg to access the stakeout screen for the reference peg.
4. Stake out the reference point using ∆ offset. When ∆ offset is equal to zero the
reference peg position has been found.
5. Place the pole on top of the reference peg. The value for ∆ height indicates how
far below the top of the peg the batter has to be placed.
6. Place the pole on the position of the batter rail to be used as a reference for the
slope values to mark on the batter rail. ∆ height should now read zero. All values
shown under the Info page are relative to the original slope.
7. to return to Stake Slope. Stake out the next catch point from this screen.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1088
Slope staking using Ref
point surface Description
When staking out slopes using the reference point surface method, the reference peg is
staked out with a defined height difference to the hinge point.
Workflow
a) Slope to stake out
b) Natural surface
c) Catch point of the slope
d) Reference peg
e) Defined hinge height difference
f) Hinge point
a) Slope to stake out
b) Natural surface
c) Real catch point
d) Projected catch point
e) Approximate staked out catch
point after three iterations
f) Hinge point
g) Reference peg
h) Defined hinge height differ-
ence
a
c
bd
e
f
Road_096
a
c
bd
e
g
c
f
1 2
h
Road_097
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1089
Step Description
)The first step when staking out is to find the catch point of the slope. As the
natural surface is unknown, this process has to be done iteratively. As soon as the
measured position (e) is close enough to the real catch point (c), it can be used
as the approximate catch point. Based on this approximate catch point, the
projected catch point (d) on the slope is calculated.
The projected catch point (d) is then used as a starting point for the stakeout of
the surface reference peg (g).
1. Stake out the position of the catch point by using ∆ offset and/or ∆ height on the
Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. When ∆ offset and ∆ height are equal to
zero, the catch point has been located.
2. Define the hinge height difference.
Fn Tools.. to access the Tools screen.
3. Select Place surface reference peg to access the define screen for the reference
peg field. The measured position from step 1. is used as the catch point for the
stake out of the reference point.
The Actual hinge height difference field displays the Hinge ht diff value from the
Stake page of the Stake/Check screen.
Type in the appropriate value for Defined hinge ht diff.
4. Stake out the surface reference point relative to the projected catch point. Values
in Stake Slope Ref Point Surface,Stake page guide you to the position to place
the peg. The defined hinge height difference (h) is already taken into account.
Values to be marked on the reference peg can be found on Stake Slope Ref Point
Surface,Info page.
5. to return to Stake Slope. Stake out the next catch point from this screen.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1090
The closer the real catch point and the approximated stakeout catch point are, the closer
the projected catch point gets to the real catch point.
Extending design
slopes
When using slopes generated by a design package, the quality of the change from cut to fill
or where slopes start and end, depends on the terrain model used for the project. Occasion-
ally a cut is required where the design still shows a fill, or one of the lines defining the slope
ends before intersecting with the natural surface.
The application can handle these different situations with various slope extras. A message
appears prompting if the slope should be extended, as soon as a measurement is taken
outside of the defined design slope. The extension of a line is always based on the end-
tangent of the stringline. When moving back into the defined design a notification appears.
Slopes left and right of design changing from cut to fill.
Road_083
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1091
37.2.4 Toggle Offsets Right/Left
Description If staking out a street that is defined as a centreline with offsets of 2.5 m left and right, this
functionality allows to toggle between the two lines to stake out.
This functionality is available for the following stake out/check methods:
a) Centreline
b) Defined Stake offset
c) Parallel right stringline
d) Parallel left stringline
Type Description
Stringline Toggle between parallel stringline left and right.
Cross slope Toggle between left and right stringline of the cross slope.
Crown Toggle between left and right cross slope
a
b
b
d
c
Road_073
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1092
The application automatically detects which side of the centreline is being used and selects
the appropriate stringline as a reference.
Auto position When pressing auto position Fn Positn a message box comes up prompting if either the left
or right side should be staked out/checked.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1093
37.3 Staking/Checking the Road
37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen
Stake/Check screen,
General page
The Stake Stringline is shown as example.
Meas
To start measuring the point being
staked. The key changes to Stop.
To measure a distance and store
distance and angles.
Stop
To end measuring the point being staked.
When Automatically stop point measure-
ment is checked in Quality Control,General
page recording of positions ends automati-
cally as defined by the stop criteria. The key
changes to Store. After ending the meas-
urements, the differences between the
measured point and the point to be staked
are displayed.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1094
Store
To store the measured point. When
Automatically store point is checked in
Quality Control,General page, the meas-
ured point is stored automatically. The key
changes to Meas.
To store angles and distance. Distance
must be measured before.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Ch-
Available for Roads - Stakeout. To decrease
the chainage as defined by Chainge incre-
ment.
Ch+
Available for Roads - Stakeout. To increase
the chainage as defined by Chainge incre-
ment.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access configuration settings.
Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applica-
tions".
Fn Positn
To position the total station to the defined
stakeout point, including defined offsets.
This depends on the settings for Turn to
point in Configuration, TPS page. Refer to
" Configuration, TPS page".
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1095
Description of fields
Fn Tools..
To access the method-specific Tools Menu.
Refer to "37.4 The Tools Menu".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
)The following fields are always shown in all Stake and Check methods.
Point ID Editable field Name of the next point to be stored. The ID is incre-
mented/decremented whenever a point gets stored.
Antenna
height
Editable field Height of the antenna.
Target
height
Editable field Height of the prism.
)The following fields are always shown in all Stake methods, except for method Layer.
Stake chainage Editable field Nominal chainage of the point to be staked out.
Chainge incre-
ment Editable field Chainage increment. Value by which the nominal
chainage increases/decreases when pressing Ch-
/Ch+.
)The following field is shown in the Stake and Check methods except for Slope
andManual slope.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1096
Next step
Page changes to the Offsets page.
Stake/Check screen,
Offsets page
Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys.
Description of fields
Use manual
height instead
of design
heights
Check box When this box is checked, a height value typed in
manually is used instead of design height or DTM
height. When this box is not checked, the height from
design is used.
Manual height Editable field The height to be used.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, the defined stake/check
offsets are applied.
Stake offset Editable field Available for Stake. Horizontal offset from the refer-
ence stringline (as defined by the chosen method) of
the point to stake.
Stake height
diff Editable field Available for Stake. Vertical offset from the reference
stringline or surface (as defined by the chosen
method) of the point to stake.
Check offset Editable field Available for Check. Horizontal offset from the refer-
ence stringline, as defined by the chosen method, of
the point to stake.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1097
Next step
Page changes to the Stake page.
Check height
diff Editable field Available for Check. Vertical offset from the refer-
ence stringline or surface, as defined by the chosen
method, of the point to stake.
)The following field is shown for the Stake methods Stringline, Individual stringline
and Manual slope.
Work with non-
perpendicular
offset
Check box When this box is not checked the measured point is
projected in an right angle to the selected stringline.
When this box is checked, any projection angle can be
defined.
Offset angle Editable field Manually defined projection angle.
)The following fields are shown in the Stringline, Individual stringline, Cross slope
and Crown methods when Refer to an additional line is checked in the Define
screen.
Apply offsets to
aditional line Check box When this box is checked, an offset to the additional
line can be defined.
Offset Editable field Horizontal stake/check offset to the additional line.
Height differ-
ence Editable field Vertical stake/check height difference to the addi-
tional line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1098
Understanding priori-
ties of various heights
Stake screen,
Stake page )This page is available for Roads - Stakeout only.
This page displays the differences between the measured points and stakeout points (delta
values). If these values are zero, the measured point coincides with the stakeout point.
Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys.
Refer to "42.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display.
Description of fields
Type of height Overrules Stake height diff
Manually entered
OR
Obtained from individual point
All other heights Considered
Use DTM height for stakeout (Tools
menu: Use heights from DTM)
Design height Considered
From design No other heights Considered
Show DTM height difference on Info
page (Tools menu: Use heights from
DTM)
No influence on priorities
For additional info only
-
Field Option Description
Chainage Display only The current chainage.
CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset to the centreline.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1099
∆ chainage Display only Difference between the defined Stake chainage and
the current chainage Chainage of the measured
position.
If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field shows -
----.
NrTP Display only The chainage difference between the measured
point and the nearest tangent point (start/end point
of a road segment) of the design is displayed.
a) Vertical alignment
b) Horizontal alignment
Only tangent points (start/end point of a road
segment) are detected.
∆ O Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and
the current position. The Stake offset defined on the
Offsets page is taken into account.
Field Option Description
ab
Road_099
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1100
Next step
Page changes to the Info page.
Stake/Check screen,
Info page
A user definable Info page exists for each of the stake methods and check methods. Refer
to the chapters from "35.3.2 Road Stringline - Info Page"to "35.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page".
Refer to "Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page
and how to select them.
Stake/Check screen,
Plot page
The Plot page for Stake shows information about the measured point relative to the design.
The design is defined by the selected layer and stringline, and the values entered on the
General page.
The Plot page for Check and Stake are similar. The only difference is that the current
chainage is always shown instead of ∆ chainage.
For Check and when only a DTM job is used, the Plot page shows the DTM and the lines of
selected Road layer - always in plan view. At the top of the page, DTM height and delta
height are shown.
∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position. The Stake height diff defined on the
Offsets page is taken into account.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1101
The following information is shown:
1) Chainage difference between the measured point and the defined chainage. When
working with random chainages, for instance if no defined chainage has been entered
on the General page, ∆Ch changes to Ch. Ch is the current chainage as shown on the
Stake page.
2) Horizontal offset (left/right arrow) to the design
3) Height difference (up/down arrow) to the design
4) The measured point
5) The element to stake is shown in bold and blue. The position to stake is marked with a
yellow-black peg.
6) The plot can be shown as a cross plot or plan view by using the eye icon on second
level of MapView toolbar.
Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General
page" for a description of keys.
Fn Layrs..
To turn layers of background maps (CAD
files) on and off. Refer to "4.2 Creating a
New Job"for information on CAD files and
CAD background maps.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1102
37.3.2 Measuring Points by Chainage and Offset
Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check
a) Position to stake out, defined by
chainage, stake offset and, optionally,
stake height difference
b) Centreline/stringline the position is
defined relative to
c) Stake offset
d) Stake height diff
e) Chainage
f) CL offset/Ref offset
g) ∆ chainage
h) ∆ offset
i) ∆ height
a) Position to check, defined by check offset
and, optionally, check height difference
b) Centreline/stringline the position is
defined relative to
c) Check offset
d) Check height diff
e) Chainage
f) CL offset/Ref offset
g) ∆ offset
h) ∆ height
a
ei
h
dg
b
c
f
Road_034 a
eh
g
d
b
c
f
Road_080
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1103
Description • When staking points, the points are defined by the stake chainage and, if enabled, by
the stake offset and the stake height difference relative to an existing 2D or 3D
centreline or stringline.
• When checking points, the points are defined by the check offset and the check height
difference relative to an existing 2D or 3D centreline or stringline.
Required elements • For 2D, a horizontal centreline is required.
• For 3D, a 3D centreline is required.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1104
37.3.3 Measuring Stringlines Relative to a Centreline
Graphical overview
Description • Stringlines define various elements, including:
• Centreline of the design
• Change in slope ratio, for example, the edge of a carriage way
Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check
a) Position to stake out
b) Stringline to stake out
c) Centreline
d) Stake chainage
e) Chainage
f) CL offset
g) ∆ chainage
h) ∆ offset
i) ∆ height
a) Stringline to check
b) Projected point on stringline
c) Centreline
d) Chainage
e) CL offset
f) CL ht diff
g) ∆ offset
h) ∆ height
a=b
i
h
f
c
a
e
hi
g
db
c
f
Road_035
a=b
c=d g
h
e
f
a
e
h
g
b
d
c
f
Road_066
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1105
• Gutter, cable, pipeline or any other type of alignment element
• Refer to "35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements" for informa-
tion on the usage of stringlines.
Required elements • For 2D, at least a 2D stringline and a 2D centreline are required.
• For 3D, a 3D stringline and a 2D or 3D centreline are required.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1106
37.3.4 Measuring Individual Stringlines without Centrelines
Graphical overview
Description This process is different to stringlines, where the stake/check is always relative to the
centreline defined for the layer. Individual stringlines no longer have a relationship to an
overall centreline. Individual stringlines are used to check roundabouts, parking bays, subdi-
vision works and any other type of lines. The different stringlines to stake/check can be
Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check
Stakeout of Roundabout
a) Position to stake out
b) Stringline to stake out
c) Centreline of the layer- is not used for the
individual stringline
d) Chainage
e) ∆ chainage
f) ∆ offset
g) ∆ height
Checking a Roundabout
a) Stringline to check
b) Chainage
c) Centreline of the layer- is not used for the
individual stringline
d) ∆ offset
e) ∆ height
fg
e
a
b
d
c
Road_085
de
a
b
c
Road_084
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1107
stored within one layer, which does not require a defined centreline. This ability is different
to the stake/check of any other type which always require a centreline.
Required elements A 2D or 3D design of the line to stake/check is required.
Indefinite triangle Description
In almost all situations, a measured position is shown relative to the individual stringline by
the stringline chainage and a square offset to the stringline. However, situations can arise
where a road design has extreme changes in the deflection angle of tangent points. In these
cases, it is not always possible to show a measured position by the nominal chainage and
offset. An indefinite triangle is a region in which these situations arise. Points measured
within an indefinite triangle are shown relative to the tangent point.
Graphic
aa
AB
b
bbb‘
b“
Road_091
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1108
Screen
Points measured within an indefinite triangle are always shown relative to the tangent point.
Road Design A
a) Individual stringline
b) Measured position (displayed relative to the stringline by chainage and square offset)
Road Design B
a) Individual stringline with extreme changes in the deflection angle of tangent points
b) Measured position within indefinite triangle
This position cannot be shown in the usual manner and is displayed relative to the tangent
point
b") Measured position within indefinite triangle
This position can be shown in the usual manner and is displayed by chainage and square
offset
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1109
37.3.5 Measuring Cross Slopes
Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check
a) Position to stake out
b) Cross slope to stake out
c) Left stringline
d) Right stringline
e) Centreline
f) Working chainage
g) Chainage
h) CL offset
i) ∆ chainage
j) ∆ offset
k) ∆ height
a) Cross slope to check
b) Left stringline
c) Right stringline
d) Centreline
e) Chainage
f) ∆ offset
g) ∆ height
h) Cross slope offset
i) Cross slope ht diff
a=d
k
k
j
j
h
b
b
f
e
e
g
a
i
d
c
c
h
Road_036
c
g
i
i
g
k
h
h
f
f
a
a
b
e
d
dc
b
Road_067
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1110
Description • Surfaces such as the final carriage way, are often staked/checked using cross slopes. A
cross slope consists of a combination of two stringlines.
• Refer to "35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements" for informa-
tion on the usage of cross slopes.
Required elements A 3D design of the road is required.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1111
37.3.6 Measuring Manual Slopes and Design Slopes
Graphical overview
Description • Surfaces, such as the end slopes of a cut or fill, are staked/checked using slope methods.
• Slopes are defined by two stringlines. Refer to "35.7.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake
and Check Measurements".
Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check
a) Catch point
b) Centreline
c) Slope to stake out
d) Hinge point = left stringline
e) Second / right stringline
f) Natural surface
g) CL offset
h) ∆ offset
i) ∆ height
a) Catch point
b) Centreline
c) Slope to check
d) Hinge point
e) Second stringline of the slope
f) Natural surface
g) CL offset
h) Slope offset
i) Slope height diff
aei
h
f
b
d
g
c
Road_037
aei
h
f
b
d
g
c
Road_037
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1112
• When staking slopes, the point of interest is the intersection of the defined slope with
the natural surface (= catch point). Refer to "37.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings" for infor-
mation on the slope staking methods supported.
• When checking slopes, the slope check is independent of the slope method selected.
Description of manual
slopes
The slope is defined manually relative to a selected 3D stringline, slope direction and slope
ratio or relative to a 2D stringline using a manual height, slope direction and slope ratio.
Description of design
slopes
For this method, a 3D representation of the slope, defined by two stringlines, is required.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1113
37.3.7 Measuring Road Crowns
Graphical overview
Description • Staking road crowns allows the stake out of two cross slopes at the same time. If Toggle
offsets left/right is checked, the reference for ∆ offset is automatically switched between
the right and left cross slope depending on whether the measured position is to the right
or left of the middle stringline.
• When checking road crowns, it allows the check of two cross slopes at the same time.
The information for both cross slopes is shown at the same time.
Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check
a) Position to stake out, in this case the left
stringline of the crown
b) Middle stringline of the crown, in this case
also the centreline
c) Left cross slope to stake out
d) Right cross slope to stake out
e) CL offset
f) ∆ offset
g) ∆ ht left
h) ∆ ht right
a) Left stringline of the crown
b) Middle stringline of the crown, common
for both cross slopes
c) Left cross slope to check
d) Right cross slope to check
e) CL offset
f) ∆ offset
g) ∆ ht left
h) ∆ ht right
a
b
g
hf
e
cd
Road_040
a
b
g
hf
e
cd
Road_076
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1114
Required elements A 3D design of the road, defining a crown consisting of three stringlines, is required.
Specific fields The following fields vary from the description used in "37.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen":
Field Option Description
∆ ht left/ ∆ ht right
or ∆HtL/∆HtR Display only Vertical offset to the left/right cross slope defining
the road crown.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1115
37.3.8 Measuring Road Layers
Graphical overview
Description All stringlines are grouped in layers. Such a layer describes a surface of the road. When
staking/checking out a layer, it is automatically detected the stringline left and right of the
measured position.
Required elements A 3D design of the road is required.
Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check
a) Relevant part of the layer for the current
position
b) Left stringline Left name
c) Right stringline Right name
d) ∆ offset
e) ∆ height
a) Relevant part of the layer for the current
position
b) Left stringline Left name
c) Right stringline Right name
d) Slope offset
e) Layer ht diff
Road_068 c
ae
d
b
Road_068 c
ae
d
b
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1116
37.3.9 Measuring Digital Terrain Models (DTM)
Graphical overview
Description A DTM check returns the height difference between the current height and the height the
DTM at the measured position.
Required elements A DTM job is required.
Roads - As built check
a) Relevant triangle of the DTM
b) Projected point on DTM
c) Easting
d) Northing
e) DTM height diff
f) Flow direction
g) Flow ratio
ae
g
f
c
b
d
Road_046
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1117
37.4 The Tools Menu
37.4.1 Overview
Access Press Fn Tools.. on any page of the Stake/Check screen.
Description The Tools menu contains additional functionality for each of the stake and check methods.
This functionality is additional to those already existing functions which are available via the
function keys.
The functionality differs between the stake and check methods. Refer to these subchapters
for a detailed description of the functionalities:
• "37.4.2 Use heights from DTM"
• "37.4.3 Apply current chainage"
• "37.4.4 Get current angle to alignment"
• "37.4.5 Individual point"
• "37.4.6 Additional layer information"
• "37.4.7 Box / base definition"
• "37.4.8 Get current slope"
• "37.4.9 Reset slope to design"
• "37.4.10 Shift reference line"
• "37.4.11 Re-initialise search"
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1118
37.4.2 Use heights from DTM
Availability This menu function is available for the following stake/check methods: Stringline, individual
stringline, cross slope, crown, layer.
Description The application offers the possibility to
• switch to a height which is retrieved from an existing height layer, as defined in the
selected DTM job. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference
for the staking out or checking of alignments.
• retrieve heights from an existing layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the
project. The DTM used is not considered for the stake values. Three new information
lines are added to the Info page: DTM 2 Ht Diff, DTM 2 Height and DTM 2 Name.
• show the DTM triangles in the planar view and in the cross section view on the Plot
page.
Once defined, each layer remains active until it is turned off. DTM heights can be used for
both 2D and 3D alignments.
Use heights from DTM
OK
To confirm the settings and return to the
Stake/Check screen.
Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1119
Description of fields
Field Option Description
DTM Display only DTM from the selected DTM job.
Use DTM height
for stake out Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM is used
as a height reference.
When this box is not checked, no DTM heights are
applied for stakeout or check.
DTM layer Selectable list Available when Use DTM height for stake out is
checked. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant
triangle of the DTM is shown on the Plot page.
Show DTM
height differ-
ence on Info
page
Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM to be
used as a height reference on the Info page.
When this box is not checked, no additional height
information relative to the DTM is shown on the Info
page.
DTM layer Selectable list Available when Show DTM height difference on Info
page is checked. Layer of the DTM to be used as a
height reference. When selecting a DTM layer the
relevant triangle of the DTM is shown in cross section
view on the Plot page.
Show DTM on
map Check box When this box is checked, the DTM triangles are
displayed in planar view on the Plot page.
DTM layer Selectable list All available layers are selectable.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1120
37.4.3 Apply current chainage
Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer.
Description To set Stake chainage on the General page of the stakeout to the current chainage.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1121
37.4.4 Get current angle to alignment
Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of stringlines and individual stringlines.
Description To project a measured point to the alignment considering the entered Stake chainage. This
functionality is only available when Work with non-perpendicular offset is checked in the
Stake screen on the Offsets page.
Graphic
Workflow
a) Alignment
b) Defined chainage
c) Current position
αAngle to alignment
a
b
c
Road_098
Step Description
1. Measure a point:
Dist
Meas and Stop
2. Press Fn Tools.. to access the Tools menu.
3. Select Get current angle to alignment.
4. At the defined chainage, the angle between the tangent direction and the direction
to the current position is calculated. This angel is set as Offset angle for Work with
non-perpendicular offset on the Offsets page.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1122
5. Continue with staking out using the calculated Stake chainage and Offset angle
values. These values are valid until new values are defined manually or by using Get
current angle to alignment.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1123
37.4.5 Individual point
Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of stringlines and individual stringlines.
Description To select the point to stake from the selected Working job.
If a control job has been selected on the Job Selection screen, a point from the control job
can be selected. When staking out/checking an individual point, the selected point is set in
relation to the alignment and all line relevant values are calculated and displayed.
To access Data:, Points page, which allows staking out points with known Easting, Northing
and Height. Points can either be selected from the Working job or manually typed in.
The Stake chainage and Stake offset of the Stake screen are calculated based on the coor-
dinates of the selected point.
The height for the stakeout can be set as Manual height.
)If the chosen point has no height the design height will be used. If the point has a
height it is possible to use that one or continue working with the design height.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1124
37.4.6 Additional layer information
Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer.
Description This function allows additional road data to be obtained during a check or stake survey of a
road element.
Road elements include centrelines, kerb and gutters and slopes.
The map shows cross section view only and allows setting the vertical exaggeration.
Additional layer informa-
tion
OK
To store the selected element, which is then
automatically recalled.
<-- or -->
To select the relevant element in the plot.
The information displayed shows the current
slope ratio and the height difference of the
element. Also displayed are the offset and
height differences from the left and right
vertices of the element.
Reset
To move back to the originally selected
element.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1125
37.4.7 Box / base definition
Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of stringlines and individual stringlines.
Description This function allows a box or similar structure to be set out during a check or stake survey
of a road element. The box is set out relative to a stringline chainage and parallel offset. A
base point of the box, user-defined dimensions of the box (a base distance and a base
offset) are required.
Diagram
a) Centreline
b) Defined chainage
c) Stake offset
d) Base point
e) Base offset
f) Base distance
g) Box to stake out
a
b
c
de
f
g
Road_092
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1126
Box / base definition
Description of fields
OK
To store the selected element, which is then
automatically recalled.
Define
To overwrite the values before pressing
Base If a different base had been defined
before.
Base or Clear
To freeze or unfreeze the values of the base
point.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Base chainage Display only The position defined by Stake chainage.
Base offset Display only The position defined by Stake offset.
Distance box Editable field The distance in the direction of increasing chainage
of base point is positive.
Offset box Editable field The offset to the right of base point is positive.
Base easting, Base
northing and Base
height
Editable field The coordinates of the base point, either from the
Working job or from a surveyed point.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1127
Example The following steps describe the stakeout of two reference pegs from a centreline chainage
and offset.
Base direction Editable field The orientation of the local coordinate system
(azimuth).
Field Option Description
a) Centreline
b) Defined chainage
c) Stake offset
d) Base point
e) Base distance, positive (e+), nega-
tive (e-)
f) Peg to stake out
Step Description
1. Define the base point for the box/base stakeout using Stake offset and Stake
height diff from the Offsets page.
2. Press Fn Tools.. to access the Tools menu.
3. Select Box / base definition.
Press OK to continue to the next screen.
a
b
c
de-
e+
f
f
Road_093
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1128
4. The position defined by Stake chainage and Stake offset is used as Base chainage
and Base offset when accessing Box / base definition for the first time within a
stakeout session.
5. Similar to the stakeout of individual points in the Tools menu. The Box/Base func-
tionality calculates the new point to stake out and changes the according values of
Stake chainage and Stake offset. The Box/Base functionality also activates the
Manual height functionality.
6. To avoid these values being used as the next base point when accessing the
box/base menu, press Base in the Box/Base Definition screen. Pressing this key
freezes the values of the base point. Base is now replaced by Clear. If a different
base had been defined before, use Define to overwrite the values before pressing
Base.
7. Define the Distance box and Offset box. Both follow the same rules as used for
the definition of offsets and chainages in general. That is; offset to the right =
positive; distance in direction of increasing chainage = positive.
8. Press OK to continue to the next screen.
9. The values of Stake chainage, Stake offset and the Manual height are adjusted
accordingly.
10. The fields ∆ chainage, ∆ offset and ∆ height on the Stake page guide you to the
new position to stake out.
Press Fn Tools.. to access Tools menu.
11. Select Box / base definition.
Press OK to continue to the next screen.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1129
12. The next point of the box to stake out can now be defined.
To change back to the original chainage and offset defined for the base point defi-
nition use Clear.
13. Start with step 1. to define a new box/base.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1130
37.4.8 Get current slope
Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of slopes and manual slopes.
Description To access Slope Definition. The slope ratio Current ratio of the last measured position is
used as the defined Slope ratio. All others values in Slope Definition are filled in with the
last measured position. The defined manual slope is used for all points to stake out or check.
)The manual slope is active until it is turned of with Reset slope to design from the
Tools menu.
Graphic Slopes are defined relative to the centreline.
a) Centreline
b) Hinge point
c) New slope
d) Defined hinge offset Offset
e) Defined hinge height difference Height difference
f) Slope ratio
f
a
b
d
c
e
Road_038
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1131
Slope Definition
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and move to the next
screen depending on the settings for slope
staking.
Config..
To access the configuration settings. Refer
to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Hinge line Display only The stringline the slope is defined relative to.
Hinge offset The vertical offset type for the hinge point.
Relative to line Define the hinge point by the height difference
relative to the selected Reference line.
a)Hinge point
b)Slope
a
b
Road_039a
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1132
Absolute Define the hinge point using its absolute height.
a)Hinge point
b)Slope
Hold hinge The hinge point of the slope stays fixed at the
defined stringline.
Offset Editable field The horizontal offset of the hinge point from the
centreline/reference line.
Height difference Editable field The height difference of the hinge point from the
centreline/reference line.
Available for Hinge offset:Relative to line.
Elevation Editable field The absolute height of the hinge point.
Available for Hinge offset:Absolute.
Field Option Description
a
b
Road_039b
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1133
Slope type Selectable list Differentiates if the defined slope is a cut/fill and
left/right.
a) Hinge point
b) Left cut
c) Right cut
d) Left fill
e) Right fill
Slope ratio Editable field Defines the ratio of the slope. The measured slope
ratio is the default value. This value can be edited
manually.
)The display format is defined as system
setting in Regional Settings, Slope page.
Field Option Description
a
bc
de
Road_079
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1134
37.4.9 Reset slope to design
Availability This menu function is available for the following stake/check methods: Stringline, individual
stringline, cross slope, crown, layer.
Description This option is only available if a slope has been defined by using Get current slope. The
manually defined slope is deactivated and reset to the design slope.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1135
37.4.10 Shift reference line
Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of slopes and cross slopes.
The Shift reference line item of the Tools menu stays disabled until the first measured posi-
tion is available. The current chainage is used for the cross section shown to pick the refer-
ence line.
Description When staking out or checking different layers of the road strata, such as the subgrade,
gravel or asphalt, it is often found that not all these layers are available in the design. For
such cases, the application offers the possibility to apply either a negative or positive height
shift to the design values.
Example
A gravel layer with a thickness of 10 cm is to be staked out. A negative vertical shift to the
final design surface is applied. This shift is applied:
• by pressing Shifts.. in the Define screen and
• by applying a vertical shift of -10 cm.
As shown, the selected cross slope is shifted by 10 cm.
a) Reference surface
b) Shifted reference point
c) Original cross slope
d) Shifted cross slope
c
a
d
10 cm
15 cm b
Road_086
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1136
Reference Shift
When staking out the newly shifted cross
slope, the original left edge of the shifted
cross slope is of little interest. It is the inter-
section with the left end slope that is of
greater interest.
OK
To confirm the settings and return to the
Stake/Check screen.
Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1137
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Shift slope refer-
ence line Check box When this box is checked, the settings for the shift
can be set.
Left line Display only Shows the name of the left stringline from the
surface.
Right line Display only Shows the name of the right stringline from the
surface.
Shift mode The vertical shift applied to the surface selected.
Plumbline The shift defined under Shift value gets applied
following the plumb line.
Perpendicular The shift defined under Shift value gets applied
perpendicular to the selected surface.
Shift value Editable field Value the selected surface gets shifted following
the chosen Shift mode.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1138
The graphical selection.
The expanded element and the shifted
reference line, marked with a cross, are
shown in the Plot page in the Stake/Check
screen.
On the Stake page, the ∆ offset and ∆ height
guide you to the new shifted position.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1139
37.4.11 Re-initialise search
Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer.
Description When staking or checking complex road designs it can happen that the current position is
not projected to the desired segment of the alignment. The Re-initialise search forces a re-
projection of the current position.
Example
Before initialisation
This screen shows the projection of the
current position to the left segment,
although the distance to the right segment
is shorter.
Viva Series, Roads - Road 1140
After initialisation
This screen shows the projection after the
reinitialisation.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1141
38 Roads - Rail
38.1 Creating a New Rail Job
38.1.1 Overview
Description There are two ways of creating road/rail jobs:
Typing them in manually by using the Alignment Editor application.
OR
Converting data created in a design package.
Manually entered data Data can be typed in and edited with Alignment Editor. Refer to "36 Roads - Alignment
Editor" for information on how to enter data manually.
Converted data The Design to Field component of LEICA Geo Office offers converters from several road/rail
design and CAD packages. Several design packages also include a built-in converter to
Roads/Rail. As different design packages follow different philosophies in representation,
creation and storage of data the conversion process differs slightly.
LEICA Geo Office
Road_065
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1142
LEICA Geo Office can be found on the LEICA Geo Office DVD.
The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of:
• myWorld@Leica Geosystems
https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com
• of the Leica Geosystems website:
http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1143
38.1.2 Installing all necessary Software
Install LEICA Geo Office LGO runs under WindowsXP or Windows Vista and can only be installed successfully if the
user is logged in as the Administrator. To install LGO, run the setup file from the DVD and
follow the instructions on the screen.
Install Design To Field To prepare the track design for use on the instrument successfully, the data must first be
converted from its original format to an onboard job. This conversion is achieved using
Design to Field, a component of LGO which is automatically installed with LGO.
Install Importers The field importers are used by Design to Field to read in the track design. These importers
are installed separately and have the file extension *.rri.
The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of:
• myWorld@Leica Geosystems:
https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com
• of the Leica Geosystems website:
http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291
Install Rail Editor Rail Editor is a computer program for defining the height of the rails relative to the horizontal
and vertical alignments (superelevation). Rail Editor is automatically installed into LGO from
the Field Importers install package, which can be found in the downloads section of the Leica
Geosystems website. Rail Editor can be run either externally or within Design To Field.
Install Roads and Rail Roads and Rail are the onboard programs which are loaded onto the instrument:
• via a data storage device (under the System folder), which is inserted into the instru-
ment,
• via a serial cable and LGO.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1144
38.1.3 Importing the Track Design with LEICA Geo Office
Importing the design Step Description
1. Starting the Design to Field program
To import a track centreline select Design to Field from the Tools menu in LGO.
2. Selecting an Import Type
To prepare track design for onboard use successfully, it has to be converted from
its original data format to an onboard job which will run on the instrument.
Select Importer Type: Rail Data
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1145
3. Selecting a Field Importer
Importers are used to convert the data. Additional importer formats can be added
to the selectable list by clicking Manage.
Select the importer related to the track design from the selectable list of available
importers.
4. Importing
Click Import to start the file selection wizard.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1146
5. Selecting the job type
• For single tracks, select Rail Design-Single Track.
A single track design can consist of a horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment
and superelevation.
• For double tracks, select Rail Design-Double Track.
A double track design can consist of a horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment
and superelevation for each track. Alternatively, a third horizontal alignment
can also be defined and used for calculating the chainage of both tracks
(chainage centreline).
Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1147
6. Selecting the horizontal and vertical alignment files
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1148
• For a single track, select the horizontal and vertical alignments using the
browse button.
• For a double track, three screens are used to define the design data. The
arrows at the bottom of the screens can be used to move between the
different screens.
First screen - Centreline: The first screen defines the horizontal and vertical
alignment of the chainage centreline. If the chainage for each track is to be
calculated relative to each track centreline, then it is not mandatory to select
a chainage centreline. The horizontal and vertical alignment on the first screen
can be left blank.
Second screen - Left track: The second screen defines the horizontal and
vertical alignments and the rail definition (superelevation) of the left track.
Third screen - Right track: The third screen defines the horizontal and vertical
alignments and the rail definition (superelevation) of the right track.
Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard.
7. Superelevation (rail definition)
• Design data which is compulsory:
A track design must contain a horizontal alignment.
• Design data which is optional:
A track design can include a vertical alignment and a rail definition (superele-
vation). Superelevation is only possible when the track design includes a
vertical alignment.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1149
A superelevation file can be obtained in the following ways:
• by selecting an existing superelevation file.
• by selecting an existing superelevation file and modifying it with Rail Editor.
• by creating a new superelevation file with Rail Editor.
Creating a superelevation (rail definition)
To create a rail definition (superelevation) for any track, click the Edit
button next to the Superelevation file name. This action starts the Rail Editor
program.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1150
The Rail Editor program is used to define the height of the rails at a given
chainage. The height of the rails can be defined by a rotation point and a cant or
by a left and right cant.
Describing the screen elements - Entering Track Information
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1151
Superelevation left and
right
To define the height of the rails using one superel-
evation value for the left rail and another superele-
vation value for the right rail.
Superelevation by curve To define the rails using a rotation point and a
superelevation value.
)Once the method by which the superelevation
values are defined has been selected, it cannot be
changed
Co-Planar (for multiple
tracks)
To define the height of the rails of the second track
by extending the plane which runs through the rails
of the first track.
Nominal Gauge The default nominal distance between the active
(internal) faces of the left and right rails. This value
can be changed if necessary for part any rail defini-
tion (superelevation).
Superelevation Base The distance over which the superlevation is
applied. This distance is normally the distance
between the centre of the left and right rail. This
value can be changed if necessary for any rail defi-
nition (superelevation).
Default Rotation Axis If a rotation point is used, this selection will be used
as the default for all new rail definitions. This value
can be changed if necessary for any rail definition
(superelevation).
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1152
Superelevation Format The format in which the superelevation values are
entered.
Once all superelevation data has been entered, press the button to add the
data to the chainage assignment screen.
To delete an element, select the element and press the button.
To modify an existing element, select the element, modify the data and
press the button.
Once all values have been entered for the entire alignment, the file can be saved
in an XML format using Save from the File menu.
To return to the Design To Field converter, select Exit from the File menu.
To modify an existing rail definition (superelevation) file, for example XML files,
use Load option from the File menu.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1153
8. Entering the alignment tolerances
Enter the appropriate horizontal and vertical tolerances to be used during the
checking of the alignments.
Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1154
9. Checking the track design
When the track design has been imported, information is displayed to show the
success or failure of the import.
• When the import is successful: Click Next to move to the next page of the
wizard.
• When the import is unsuccessful: Click Back to step back through the wizard.
• If a problem is encountered a red symbol appears. Double click on the red
symbol and a window containing a description of the problem appears.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1155
10. Entering the range of chainages to be used
Enter the range of chainages to be exported.
Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1156
11. Checking the summary report
• When the report is correct: Click Finish to complete the wizard.
• When the report is incorrect: Click Back to step back through the wizard.
12. Viewing the track design
The track design can be viewed graphically.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1157
Click Export to create the files for onboard use.
13. Creating the files for onboard use
The track design can now be prepared.
Click OK to create the files for onboard use. The database files are created and
are located in the same folder as the source alignment files.
Step Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1158
)Refer to the Design to Field User Manual for details on importing various types of data with
various field importers. This manual is included in the Design to Field Converters install appli-
cation RR_Design_to_Field.exe, which can be downloaded.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1159
38.1.4 Loading the Track Design onto the Instrument
Loading the design Once the track design has been converted, copy all the database files to the \DBX folder of
the data storage device of the instrument. Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the
Memory Device".
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1160
38.2 Defining the Work
Access 1) Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Roads\Rail - Stakeout or Rail - As built check.
2) In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs. Refer to "35.4.1 Choosing a Job".
3) Press OK.
Define
OK
To continue to the next screen.
Shifts..
To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the
selected element. Refer to "35.5 Working
with Shifts".
Load..
To load a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks".
Save..
To save the settings as a task. Refer to
"35.6 Tasks".
Fn Config..
To access the Rail configuration settings.
Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applica-
tions".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1161
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Layer Display only or
selectable list
Layers contained in the active rail job can be
selected, for example layer of left or right track
design.
Chainage strin-
gline Display only Shows the name of the chainage stringline, at the
selected layer.
Working
chainage Editable field To enter a chainage (ranging between the start
chainage and end chainage) of the chainage
centreline. Only those elements which appear at this
chainage can then be selected from Line.
Line The measured point values can be compared with the
left rail, the right rail or the track centreline. The
selectable list allows the selection of the stringline
with which measured values are then compared.
Centre line The track centreline.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1162
Left rail or Right
rail • For design data including the rails:
When working with design data including the rails,
the horizontal and vertical alignment of the
design is used. Depending on the rail design
configuration setting, the superelevation of the
design or the manually defined superelevation can
be used.
• For design data without rails (only track
centreline):
If the design data does not contain the rail design,
then the position of the left rail is calculated. The
nominal gauge entered in the program configura-
tion is used for the calculation.
• When working with horizontal alignments only:
The height of the rails is calculated by using the
values for Manual cant definition defined on
Stake Track/Check Track, General page.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1163
38.3 Staking/Checking the Track
38.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen
Staking points It is possible to stakeout points using a rail job with and without a stored rail design.
When the position of the rails is not stored in the rail job, it is possible to stake out:
• The horizontal and vertical alignment of the track centreline
• Points with a known horizontal and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical
alignment of track centreline
• The rails of the track by entering the track superelevation, superelevation base and
nominal gauge
• Points with know horizontal and vertical offsets from the manually defined rails.
When the position of the rails is stored in the rail job, it is possible to stake out:
• The horizontal and vertical alignment of track centreline
• Points with a known horizontal and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical
alignment of track centreline
• The rails of the track
• Points with known horizontal and vertical offsets from the defined rails.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1164
Stake Track/Check
Track,
General page
Information regarding the measured point can be entered. This screen allows any point of
the track to be checked against design values.
Meas
To start measuring the point being
staked. The key changes to Stop.
To measure a distance and store
distance and angles.
Stop
To end measuring the point being staked.
When Automatically stop point measure-
ment is checked in GPS Settings Quality
Control,General page recording of posi-
tions ends automatically as defined by the
stop criteria. The key changes to Store.
After ending the measurements, the differ-
ences between the measured point and the
point to be staked are displayed.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1165
Store
To store the measured point. When
Automatically store point is checked in GPS
Settings Quality Control,General page, the
measured point is stored automatically. The
key changes to Meas.
To store angles and distance. Distance
must be measured before.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Ch-
Available for Rail - Stakeout. To decrease
the chainage as defined by Chainge incre-
ment.
Ch+
Available for Rail - Stakeout. To increase the
chainage as defined by Chainge increment.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access Rail configuration settings.
Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applica-
tions".
Fn Positn
To position the total station to the defined
stakeout point, including defined offsets.
This depends on the settings for Turn to
point in Configuration, TPS page. Refer to
" Configuration, TPS page".
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1166
Description of fields
Fn Tools..
To access the Tools Menu.
Refer to "38.4 The Tools Menu".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field Name of the next point to be stored. The ID is incre-
mented/decremented whenever a point gets stored.
Antenna
height
Editable field Height of the antenna.
Target
height
Editable field Height of the prism.
Stake chainage Editable field The defined chainage of the point to be staked out.
For multiple tracks that have a defined chainage
centreline, the chainage to be staked out always
refers to the chainage of the chainage centreline, not
to the chainage of the track centreline.
Chainge incre-
ment Editable field Value by which the nominal chainage
increases/decreases when pressing Ch-/Ch+.
If a point is to be staked at more than one chainage,
a chainage increment can be defined.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1167
Use manual
height instead
of design
heights
Check box When this box is checked, a height value typed in
manually is used instead of design height or DTM
height.
When this box is not checked, the height from design
is used.
Manual height Editable field Available when Use manual height instead of design
heights is checked. The height to be used.
Manual cant
definition Display only This field and the following fields are available for
Superelevation:Manual in Configuration, Rail
design page.
Ht lower rail Editable field Defines the absolute height of the lowest rail at the
defined chainage.
Cant left Editable field Defines the superelevation at the left rail.
• When working with horizontal alignments only: If
the superelevation is rotated around the left rail,
the superelevation would be zero.
• When working with horizontal and vertical align-
ments: If the track is rotated around the left rail,
the vertical alignment would coincide with the left
rail and the superelevation would thus be zero.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1168
Next step
Page changes to the Offsets page.
Stake Track/Check
Track,
Offsets page
Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys.
Cant right Editable field Defines the superelevation at the right rail.
• When working with horizontal alignments only: If
the track is rotated around the right rail, the
superelevation would be zero. The total superele-
vation (left + right) is applied across the distance
defined as the superelevation base in the config-
uration.
• When working with horizontal and vertical align-
ments: If the track is rotated around the right rail,
the vertical alignment would coincide with the
right rail and the superelevation would thus be
zero. The total superelevation (left + right) is
applied across the distance defined as the
superelevation base in the configuration.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1169
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, offsets can be typed in.
Often it is necessary to set out points with a fixed
plan offset and fixed height offset from a known
reference line (track centreline or rail).
Offsets are applied in the same way, irrespective of
how the rail design has been entered, whether the
offsets are manually entered or if library offsets are
used. The sign of the offsets conforms to the offset
sign convention described in "35.7 Understanding
Terms and Expressions".
a) Reference line (right rail)
b) Point to stake
c) Stake height diff
d) Stake offset
Rail_013
a
b
d
c
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1170
Offsets Manual Offsets can be entered in Stake offset/Check offset
or Stake height diff/Check height diff.
From library The offset is stored as part of the rail job and recalled
whenever required.
Offsets Selectable list Available for Offsets:From library. The point ID of
the stored stake offsets. To select a different stored
offset or to create a new point, highlight this field
and open the selectable list. Refer to "38.3.2 Offset
Library".
Stake offset Editable field Available for Stake. Horizontal offset applied to the
position of the reference line as defined by the
design data or as calculated from manually entered
data using the nominal gauge.
Stake height
diff Editable field Available for Stake. Vertical offset applied to the
height of the reference line as defined by the design
data or as calculated from manually entered data
using the superelevation and superelevation base.
Check offset Editable field Available for Check. Horizontal offset applied to the
position of the reference line as defined by the
design data or as calculated using manually entered
data using the nominal gauge.
Check height
diff Editable field Available for Check. Vertical offset applied to the
height of the reference line as defined by the design
data or as calculated from manually entered data
using the superelevation and superelevation base.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1171
Work with
pendular
displacement
Check box This functionality is used in railway tunnels.
The functionality is available for Rail - Stakeout and
Rail - As built check.
Some rail projects require additional pendular
displacement calculation for the design axis.
The track is rotated based on a line with a defined
height offset (pendulum length) from the track
centreline. This action defines a horizontal displace-
ment for the track. The vertical alignment is inde-
pendent from the pendular displacement and does
not change.
)The pendular displacement calculation only
influences the horizontal position of the
design axis. It does not change the height of
the track.
When this box is checked, a pendulum length can be
entered. From the original track definition, a
pendulum centre is defined exactly above the axis
point. The difference in elevation of the pendulum
centre is the pendulum length. With the help of the
superelevation, a displacement is calculated. The
effect of the pendular displacement is displayed on
the Info page.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1172
a) Pendulum length: The difference in elevation of the
pendulum centre on the original track and above the
axis point
b) Resulting pendular displacement
c) Displaced design axis based on pendular displace-
ment calculation
d) Design axis defined in horizontal alignment
α Pendulum angle
Field Option Description
Rail_016
b
a
c
cd
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1173
Next step
Stake Stringline,
Stake page )This page is available for Rail - Stakeout only.
This page displays the differences between the measured point and the defined point. The
position of the point to stake is reached when all difference values are close to zero.
The chainage can be de-/incremented by pressing left/right arrow key. The defined value for
chainage increment is applied.
Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys.
Refer to "42.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display.
Description of fields
Pendular
length Editable field Available when Work with pendular displacement is
checked. The pendulum length as distance value.
Positive values (0 - 9999.9999) point upwards. Nega-
tive values are not allowed.
IF you work with THEN Page changes to the
Rail - Stakeout Stake page.
Rail - As built check Info page.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Chainage Display only The current track chainage.
CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1174
∆ chainage Display only Difference between the defined Stake chainage and
the current chainage Chainage of the measured
position.
If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field shows -
----.
NrTP Display only The chainage difference between the measured
point and the nearest tangent point (start/end point
of a road segment) of the design is displayed.
a) Vertical alignment
b) Horizontal alignment
Only tangent points (start/end point of a road
segment) are detected.
∆ O Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and
the current position. The Stake offset defined on the
Offsets page is taken into account.
Field Option Description
ab
Road_099
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1175
Next step
Page changes to the Info page.
Stake Track/Check
Track,
Info page
The Info page displays the differences between the measured and design data.
The fields viewed on this page can be configured in Rail Configuration, Info page.
Refer to "Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page
and how to select them.
Stake Track/Check
Track,
Plot page
The Plot page displays a plot of the measured point with respect to the track design. The
design is defined by the selected rail or track centreline, and the values entered on the
General page.
The Plot page for Check and Stake are similar. The only difference is that the current
chainage is always shown, as shown on the Info page.
∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position. The Stake height diff defined on the
Offsets page is taken into account.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1176
The following information is shown:
1) Chainage difference between the measured point and the defined chainage. When
working with random chainages, for instance if no defined chainage has been entered
on the General page, ∆Ch changes to Ch. Ch is the current chainage as shown on the
Stake page.
2) Horizontal offset (left/right arrow) to the design
3) Height difference (up/down arrow) to the design
4) The measured point
5) The element to stake is shown in bold and blue. The position to stake is marked with a
yellow-black peg.
6) The plot can be shown as a cross plot or plan view by using the eye icon on second
level of MapView toolbar.
Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General
page" for a description of keys.
Fn Layrs..
To turn layers of background maps (CAD
files) on and off. Refer to "4.2 Creating a
New Job"for information on CAD files and
CAD background maps.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1177
38.3.2 Offset Library
Description To select a different stored offset or to create a new point.
Access 1) In Stake Track/Check track, Offsets page, select Offsets:From library.
2) Highlight Offsets and open the selectable list.
Rail job: Job name This screen allows offsets relative to a reference line to be defined and stored in the rail job.
These points can be recalled at any time.
Next step
Press Add or Edit...
Rail job: Job name,
Offsets This screen allows the values of the stake/check offsets to be entered/edited. In addition to
the horizontal and vertical offsets, an offset name (point ID) can be entered for each item.
OK
To select a defined offset and to continue.
Add
To enter an offset.
Edit..
To edit an existing offset.
Delete
To delete an existing offset.
More
To display information about the reference
rail or the Offset and the height difference.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1178
Next step
Press OK twice to return to Stake Track/Check track.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1179
38.3.3 Working with Pendular Displacements
Requirements In Stake Track/Check Track, Offsets page, check Work with pendular displacement and
type in a value for Pendular length.
Specific values on the
Info page Value Description
Pendular length The defined pendulum length as entered on Offsets page.
Def pendulum displacement Resulting horizontal displacement at defined chainage.
Actl pendulum displace-
ment Resulting horizontal displacement at current chainage.
Def pendulum angle Resulting pendulum angle at defined chainage.
Actl pendulum angle Resulting pendulum angle at current chainage.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1180
38.4 The Tools Menu
38.4.1 Overview
Access Press Fn Tools.. on any page of the Stake/Check screen.
Description Additional functions for staking/checking the track can be accessed through the Tools menu.
This functionality is additional to those already existing functions which are available via the
function keys.
The functionality differs between the stake and check methods. Refer to these subchapters
for a detailed description of the functionalities:
• "38.4.2 Use heights from DTM"
• "38.4.3 Apply current chainage"
• "38.4.4 Individual point"
• "38.4.5 Second point of cant"
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1181
38.4.2 Use heights from DTM
Availability This menu function is available for stake and check.
Description The application offers the possibility to
• switch to a height which is retrieved from an existing height layer, as defined in the
selected DTM job. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference
for the staking out or checking of alignments.
• retrieve heights from an existing layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the
project. The DTM used is not considered for the stake values. Three new information
lines are added to the Info page: DTM 2 Ht Diff, DTM 2 Height and DTM 2 Name.
• show the DTM triangles in the planar view and in the cross section view on the Plot
page.
Once defined, each layer remains active until it is turned off. DTM heights can be used for
both 2D and 3D alignments.
Use heights from DTM
OK
To confirm the settings and return to the
Stake/Check screen.
Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1182
Description of fields
Field Option Description
DTM Display only DTM from the selected DTM job.
Use DTM height
for stake out Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM is used
as a height reference.
When this box is not checked, no DTM heights are
applied for stakeout or check.
DTM layer Selectable list Available when Use DTM height for stake out is
checked. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant
triangle of the DTM is shown on the Plot page.
Show DTM
height differ-
ence on Info
page
Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM to be
used as a height reference on the Info page.
When this box is not checked, no additional height
information relative to the DTM is shown on the Info
page.
DTM layer Selectable list Available when Show DTM height difference on Info
page is checked. Layer of the DTM to be used as a
height reference. When selecting a DTM layer the
relevant triangle of the DTM is shown in cross section
view on the Plot page.
Show DTM on
map Check box When this box is checked, the DTM triangles are
displayed in planar view on the Plot page.
DTM layer Selectable list All available layers are selectable.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1183
38.4.3 Apply current chainage
Availability This menu function is available for stake.
Description To set Stake chainage on the General page of the stakeout to the current chainage.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1184
38.4.4 Individual point
Availability This menu function is available for stake.
Description To select the point to stake from the selected Working job.
If a control job has been selected on the Job Selection screen, a point from the control job
can be selected. When staking out/checking an individual point, the selected point is set in
relation to the alignment and all line relevant values are calculated and displayed.
To access Data:, Points page, which allows staking out points with known Easting, Northing
and Height. Points can either be selected from the Working job or manually typed in.
The Stake chainage and Stake offset of the Stake screen are calculated based on the coor-
dinates of the selected point.
The height for the stakeout can be set as Manual height.
)If the chosen point has no height the design height will be used. If the point has a
height it is possible to use that one or continue working with the design height.
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1185
38.4.5 Second point of cant
Availability This menu function is only available for check.
Description To determine the current cant of two rails.
In order to calculate the current cant, it is necessary to measure two points, one on each
rail. A mechanical device can be used to measure these points if necessary.
Additionally, the current cant can be calculated by first measuring any two points (example,
the track centreline and lower rail) and then using the superelevation base. The calculation
is dependent upon the superelevation base.
Diagram
Procedure Measuring the first point
The first point can be measured directly from the Check Track screen.
a) Left rail
b) Right rail
c) first point
d) Second point of cant
e) Current cant
e
a
b
d
c
Rail_015
Viva Series, Roads - Rail 1186
Measuring the second point
The second point is measured after accessing the Second point of cant in the Tools menu.
Once the second point has been measured, the value Current cant is displayed on the Info
page.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1187
39 Roads - Tunnel
39.1 Creating a New Tunnel Job
39.1.1 Preparing Design Data
Downloads section The tunnel design data is imported for use onboard the instrument using
• the industry standard LandXML data format
• formats exported from some other design packages using the Design to Field compo-
nent of the LEICA Geo Office computer application.
Converters are available for more than 15 different design packages.
)The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of:
• myWorld@Leica Geosystems
https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com
• the Leica Geosystems website:
http://www.leica-geosystems.com/en/page_catalog.htm?cid=3291
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1188
39.1.2 Tunnel Centreline
Basics The tunnel centreline is defined in two or three dimensions. If design profiles are to be used,
a three-dimensional centreline is required.
Design to field
)For general information about Design to Field, please refer to the LEICA Geo Office manual
or Online Help.
Step Description
1. To import a centreline using the Design to Field component select the
Tools/Design to Field option of the LEICA Geo Office computer application.
2.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1189
39.1.3 Design Profiles
Tunnel design profiles If tunnel design profiles are available, they are created using the Tunnel Profile Editor
computer application. This application is integrated in the Design to Field viewer. It allows
users to import or create tunnel data like profiles, layers and rotations. Refer to the Tunnel
Profile Editor online help for more information.
Tunnel Profile Editor,
Profile details view
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1190
Tunnel Profile Editor,
Layer details view
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1191
Vertical or perpendic-
ular profiles
The Tunnel Profile Editor allows users to define tunnel profiles vertically or perpendicular to
the vertical alignment of the tunnel axis. This results in different tunnel sizes for equal
profile definitions as shown in the graphic.
A Perpendicular (tilted) profile
B Vertical profile
a) Vertical alignment of tunnel
axis
b) Horizontal alignment of
tunnel axis
c) Chainage for perpendicular
profile definition
d) Chainage for vertical profile
definition
aa
bb
d
c
Tunnel_027
BA
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1192
39.1.4 Data Transfer to Instrument
Getting data onboard Once the design data have been converted, copy the database files to the DBX folder of the
data storage device that is used on the instrument. The file names are jobname.x**.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1193
39.2 Defining the Work
Access 1) Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Roads\Tunnel - Stakeout or Tunnel - As built check.
2) In the screen Job Selection, select the required jobs. Refer to "35.4.1 Choosing a Job".
3) Press OK.
Define the Work to be
Done
Description of the methods
OK
To continue to the next screen.
Config..
To access the configuration settings. Refer
to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Method Description
Stake face Stakeout points at the tunnel face. Points are defined relative to the
tunnel axis or the tunnel profile.
Stake profile Stakeout points at defined chainages. Points are defined relative to
the tunnel axis or the tunnel profile.
Check profile Measure deviations of the built tunnel to the original design.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1194
Next step
OK accesses the Define screen.
Define The screen is an example valid for Method to use:Stake face.
Scan profile Automatically scan profiles in a defined section of the tunnel
Method Description
OK
To continue to the next screen.
Shifts..
To apply horizontal, vertical and profile
shifts to the selected element. Refer to
"35.5 Working with Shifts".
Load..
To load a task. Refer to "35.6 Tasks".
Save..
To save the settings as task. Refer to "35.6
Tasks".
Fn Config..
To access the configuration settings. Refer
to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applications".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1195
Description of fields
Common to all methods
For Method to use:Stake face
Field Option Description
Layer Display only or
selectable list
Layers contained in the active tunnel job can be
selected.
Centreline Display only The name of the layer centreline.
Field Option Description
Drilling rig
orientation Check box Available for Method to use:Stake face.
This functionality helps to orientate the drilling rig
when drilling holes parallel to the tunnel axis direc-
tion. The entry point at the tunnel face is marked and
delta angles to align the drilling rig are provided.
Drilling
distance Editable field The bore hole length. Available when Drilling rig
orientation is checked.
Boom length Editable field The length of the drilling rig. Available when Drilling
rig orientation is checked.
Tolerance Editable field Defines how accurate the drilling rig must be posi-
tioned to calculate the delta angles (max 10% of
boom length). Available when Drilling rig orientation
is checked.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1196
For Method to use:Check profile
Field Option Description
Apply target
radius Check box Available for Method to use:Check profile. When
using a prism to check a design profile, it is important
to take the prism radius into account.
The measured point is projected by a distance equiv-
alent to the radius of the prism in a direction perpen-
dicular to the tangent of the design profile.
When this box is not checked, the design profile is
compared to the coordinates of the centre of the
prism at the measured position.
b
ad
c
~2m
>4m
Tunnel_013
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1197
For Method to use:Scan profile
a) Tangent to design profile
b) Prism radius
c) Prism
d) Design profile
If reflectorless measurements are used or no design
profile has been defined, the prism radius parameter
will not be used in the calculation.
In Check Profile, Plot page a plot of the measured
point regarding the design profile is displayed.
Target radius Editable field Available for Method to use:Check profile and when
Apply target radius is checked. The radius of the
prism.
Field Option Description
Scan area
defnd by Chainage or
Distance Available for Method to use:Scan profile.
When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to scan
various profiles from one instrument position.
Profiles are scanned at a given forward and back
interval within a given forward and back distance or
chainage from the defined profile.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1198
Plan view
a) Centreline
b) Instrument position
c) Tunnel face
d) Defined profile to scan
e) Instrument profile
f) Back distance
g) Forward distance
h) Back interval
i) Forward interval
Field Option Description
c
d
hi
fg
a
b
e
Tunnel_009
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1199
39.3 Staking/Checking the Tunnel
39.3.1 Overview
Stake face/Stake
profile/Check profile,
General page
This screen is an example valid for Method to use:Stake profile.
Meas
To measure a distance and store distance
and angles.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Store
To store angles and distance. Distance must
be measured before.
Ch-
Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To decrease
the chainage as defined by Chainge incre-
ment.
Dist+
To increase the distance along the profile.
Available for Input method:Profile, dist &
offset and Input method:Dist from
top&offset.
Ch+
Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To increase
the chainage as defined by Chainge incre-
ment.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1200
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To access configuration settings.
Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applica-
tions".
Fn Positn
Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To stake
the point automatically. The instrument
aims toward the point at the given chainage
and offsets and measures a distance. If this
distance is not within the required tolerance
an iterative process is started until:
- the number of iterations set as the config-
uration parameter Max iterations is
reached, or
- the difference between the measured
point and the design point is less than the
value set as the configuration parameter
Position limit.
Fn Tools..
Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To access
the tools menu.
Refer to "37.4 The Tools Menu".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1201
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Offsets page.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The point identifier of the point to be staked.
Stake chainage Editable field Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. The defined or
approximate chainage of the point to be staked out.
Chainge incre-
ment Editable field Available for Method to use:Stake profile.Chainage
increment. Value by which the nominal chainage
increases/decreases when pressing Ch+/Ch-.
If a point is to be staked at more than one chainage,
a chainage increment can be defined.
Target height Editable field Available for Method to use:Check profile. The
height of the prism. If a prism is used, type in the
vertical difference between the point to be measured
and the point of the prism pole.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1202
Scan profile,
General page
Start
Available for automatic scanning. To start
the scanning process. Refer to "Making a
scan".
Stop
Available for automatic scanning. To stop
the scanning process.
Pause
To pause the scan. Refer to "Making a scan".
GetBck
Available for automatic scanning. To
measure a distance from the instrument
position and to calculate the difference in
chainage between the measured point and
the chainage of the instrument position.
The calculated difference is then set as
Back distance.
The measured point for a back distance
must always be at a chainage less than the
chainage of the instrument position. If this
condition is not met, an error message is
displayed and it is necessary to redefine the
distance.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1203
GetFwd
Available for automatic scanning. To
measure a distance from the instrument
position and to calculate the difference in
chainage between the measured point and
the chainage of the instrument position.
The calculated difference is then set as
Forward distance.
The measured point for a forward distance
must always be at a chainage greater than
the chainage of the instrument position. If
this condition is not met, an error message
is displayed and it is necessary to redefine
the distance.
Meas
Available for manual scanning. To measure a
distance and store distance and angles.
Dist
Available for manual scanning. To measure a
distance.
Store
Available for manual scanning. To store
angles and distance. Distance must be
measured before.
Manual or Auto
To switch between manual and automatic
scanning. Refer to "Defining discrete points
to measure".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1204
Description of fields
Fn Config..
To access configuration settings.
Refer to "35.3 Configuring Roads Applica-
tions".
Fn Limit
To define the scan limits. Refer to "Making a
scan".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The point identifier of the point to be staked.
Stake chainage Editable field The defined or approximate chainage of the point to
be staked out.
Back interval
and Forward
interval
Editable field Profiles are scanned at a given forward/back interval
within a given forward/back distance/chainage from
the defined profile.
)The scan area can be defined by distances from the instrument setup point or as
chainage range.
Back distance
and Forward
distance
Editable field The limit for the profile measurements is entered
manually or is measured using the GetBck/GetFwd.
Available for Scan area defnd by:Distance.
Back chainage
and Forward
chainage
Editable field Available for Scan area defnd by:Chainage.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1205
Next step
Page changes to the Offsets page.
Stake face/Stake
profile/Check
profile/Scan profile,
Offsets page
Refer to "Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page" for a description of keys.
Description of fields
Common for all methods
For Tunnel - Stakeout
Field Option Description
Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, horizontal and vertical
offsets can be applied.
Field Option Description
Input method To define the position of the point to be staked out.
Offset & height The point is staked out with a known perpendicular
and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical
alignments respectively.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1206
a) Centreline
b) Centreline height difference
c) Centreline offset
From job The offsets of the point are stored as coordinates in
the Working job. The Stake offset is stored as the X
coordinate and the Stake height diffis stored as the
Y coordinate.
Profile, dist &
offset The point is defined by the distance from the start of
the profile and an offset perpendicular to the design
profile.
Field Option Description
c
b
a
Tunnel_018
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1207
a) Centreline
b) Profile offset
c) Distance from start of design profile
Dist from
top&offset The point is defined by the distance from the top of
the tunnel and an offset perpendicular to the design
profile.
Field Option Description
ca
b
Tunnel_019
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1208
a) Centreline
b) Top of profile
c) Offset perpendicular to the profile segment
d) Distance from the top of the profile
Element & offset The point to stake out is defined by:
1) The number of the element on which the point
lies
2) The percentage of the distance along the
element of the point to stake out
3) The offset perpendicular to the design profile.
Field Option Description
a
c
b
+-
d
Tunnel_028
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1209
a) Centreline
b) Point defining start of design profile
c) Offset perpendicular to profile segment
d) Distance from start of start point of segment in %
e) Start point of segment
Stake offset Editable field Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the
centreline. Available for Input method:Offset &
height.
Stake height
diff Editable field Applies a vertical offset to the centreline. Available
for Input method:Offset & height.
Point ID Selectable list Available for Input method:From job.
Profile distance Editable field The distance from start of design profile. Available
for Input method:Profile, dist & offset.
Top distance Editable field The distance from the top of the tunnel. Available for
Input method:Dist from top&offset.
Field Option Description
de
a
b
c
Tunnel_020
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1210
For Tunnel - As built check
Profile offset Editable field The offset from the design profile. Available for Input
method:Profile, dist & offset, Input method:Dist
from top&offset and Input method:Element & offset.
Increment Editable field To increment the distance for offset definitions as
distance and offset. Available for Input
method:Profile, dist & offset and Input method:Dist
from top&offset.
Element no. Editable field Element number 1 is the first element of the design
profile.
% Element Editable field Distance in percentage terms of the measured point
along the design profile element.
Check offset Editable field Available for Method to use:Check profile. Applies a
horizontal offset perpendicular to the centreline
used for comparing to the measured point.
Check height
diff Editable field Available for Method to use:Check profile. Applies a
vertical offset to the centreline used for comparing
to the measured point.
Field Option Description
Check offset Editable field Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the
centreline used for comparing to the measured point.
Check height
diff Editable field Applies a vertical offset to the centreline used for
comparing to the measured point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1211
Next step
Stake face/Stake profile,
Stake page )This page is available for Tunnel - Stakeout only.
This page displays the differences between the measured point and the defined point. The
position of the point to stake is reached when all difference values are close to zero.
Refer to "Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page" for a description of keys.
Refer to "42.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display.
Description of fields
IF you work with THEN Page changes to the
Tunnel - Stakeout Stake page.
Tunnel - As built
check Info page.
Field Option Description
Chainage Display only The current chainage.
CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline.
∆ chainage Display only Difference between the Stake chainage and the
current chainage.
If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking
out random chainages or checking, this field shows -
----.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1212
Next step
Page changes to the Info page.
Stake face/Stake
profile/Check
profile/Scan profile,
Info page
The Info page displays the differences between the measured and design data.
The fields viewed on this page are be configurable.
Refer to " Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page
and how to select them.
∆ O Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and
the current position. The offset defined on the
Offsets page is taken into account.
∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the
current position. The height difference defined on
the Offsets page is taken into account.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1213
Stake face/Stake
profile/Check
profile/Scan profile,
Plot page
The Plot page displays a plot of the measured point regarding the tunnel design.
This screen is an example valid for Method to use:Stake profile.
Ch-
Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To decrease
the chainage as defined by Chainge incre-
ment.
Ch+
Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To increase
the chainage as defined by Chainge incre-
ment.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1214
39.3.2 Stake face
Stake face Overview
When excavating a tunnel, it is required to stake out the tunnel portal before excavation can
begin. In addition, for excavation methods other than those involving tunnel boring
machines (TBMs), it is then required to stake out the tunnel face at given intervals during
the excavation.
The tunnel face can be staked out at any time within the Tunnel application using Stake face.
This function allows the setting out of a series of points perpendicular to the horizontal
alignment. The horizontal alignment indicates the position of the design profile at the
chainage of the tunnel face.
Cross section view
a) Points to stake out
a
Tunnel_015
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1215
Given that it is likely that a degree of rock debris is present at the tunnel face or that inexact
excavation techniques such as blasting are used, it cannot be assumed that the tunnel face
at any stage of the excavation is perpendicular to the horizontal alignment.
This situation in turn implies that we cannot stake out a point on the tunnel face at a given
chainage as the chainage of the tunnel face at any particular point is unknown. Iterative
techniques are necessary to enable any defined point on the tunnel face to be staked out
accurately.
The Stake face function involves setting out a point on the tunnel face at this unknown
chainage. First of all the point to stake out on the tunnel face is stake out at an approximate
chainage (e).
The point is defined by offsets regarding the centreline or by its position along the design
profile and its offset from the profile. Given that the excavated tunnel face does not inter-
sect the defined chainage, another point (e') is measured.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1216
First iteration
The true chainage of the measured point of the first iteration (e') is then calculated. The
defined point (e) is staked out at the calculated chainage (d).
a) Centreline
b) Instrument position
c) Tunnel face
d) Approximate chainage to stake out
e) Point to stake out at approximate chainage
e') Point to stake out on tunnel face
d
c
e
e
e'
e'
a
a
b
Tunnel_016
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1217
Second iteration
This process is repeated until the differences between staked point and the defined point
are within a tolerance set by the user.
Drilling rig orientation Description
This functionality helps to orientate the drilling rig when drilling holes parallel to the tunnel
axis direction. The entry point at the tunnel face will be marked and delta angles to align the
drilling rig are provided.
a) Centreline
b) Instrument position
c) Tunnel face
d) Calculated chainage from first iteration
e) Point to stake out at calculated chainage
d
e
e
a
a
b
c
Tunnel_017
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1218
Drilling rig orientation step-by-step
Step Description
1. Make sure that Tunnel - Stakeout and Method to use:Stake face is selected.
2. In the Define screen check Drilling rig orientation and type in the values.
3. In Stake Face, General page, define the entry position relative to the axis or to
the profile.
)Fn Positn to stake out that point.
4. Roughly position the drilling bit and target to its end.
5. Fn Tools... Select Check Jumbo position to get the delta angles for the final rig
orientation.
αHorizontal angle
βVertical angle
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1219
39.3.3 Stake profile and Check profile
Stake/Check point on
surface
If it is not possible to stake out the defined point between successive iterations, the instru-
ment will maintain the chainage and height difference from the vertical alignment fixed. The
horizontal offset from the centreline to calculate the new position of the point are modified.
The point that will be staked out will thus maintain the defined chainage and height differ-
ence but will have a modified offset value from the centreline.
a) Centreline
b) Design point to stake out
c) Excavated profile
d) Design profile
e) Centreline offset
f) Centreline height difference
e
f
b
cd
a
Tunnel_021
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1220
a) Centreline
b) Point to stake out on excavated profile
c) Excavated profile
d) Design profile
e) Centreline offset
f) Centreline height difference
e
f
b
cd
a
Tunnel_022
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1221
39.3.4 Scan profile
)The instrument measure always the profile in the chainage where the instrument is
stationed before measuring additional profiles.
Scan limits Inclusive and exclusive sections
Once the chainages of the profiles to scan have been defined, and before starting the meas-
urement, it is necessary to define the limits of the scan.
The scan limits are used to define the angular limits to be scanned in a plane perpendicular
to the centreline. These limits normally define the starting point and end point of the profile
to scan as well as any zone that is excluded from measuring.
Limits are defined regarding the instrument axis. In the following example, a limit is defined.
This limit includes the entire area to be scanned and an overlapping area that is not scanned
because a ventilation shaft is obstructing a clear view of the tunnel surface.
Any number of limits is definable. In addition each limit must be defined as an include limit,
that is measure within the defined zone, or an exclude limit, that is do not measure within
the defined zone. If overlapping zones are defined, an exclude limit has priority over an
include limit.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1222
Access
Press Fn Limit in Scan Profile.
a) Instrument axis
b) Ventilation shaft
c) Include limit
d) Exclude limit
a
d
c
b
Tunnel_014
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1223
Angular Limits
Description of columns
OK
To return to Scan Profile after defining the
angular limits,
New..
To create a new angular limit.
Edit..
To edit a defined limit.
Delete
To delete a defined limit.
Fn Default
To use the angular limits by default.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Column Description
Limit The name of the limit.
Measure Yes indicates an include limit within which points are measured.
No indicates an exclude limit which is not measured.
Increment The approximate distance between the points to be measured.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1224
Next step
New.. to access New Angular Limits.
New Angular Limits
Description of fields
OK
To store the defined limit and return to
Angular Limits,
Dist
To measure the distance to points at the
starting angle and the end angle of a limit.
Available when Angle start or Angle end is
highlighted.
Positn
To review the position of the limit once it
has been defined. The instrument turns to
the corresponding angle. Available when
Angle start or Angle end is highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Hz Display only Current horizontal angle of the instrument.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1225
Defining a limit step-by-step
VDisplay only Current vertical angle of the instrument.
Slope distance Display only The slope distance measured by pressing Dist.
Limit name Editable field The name of the limit.
Measured
status Check box When this box is checked, it can be defined whether
points are measured within the limit.
Increment Editable field The approximate distance between points to be
measured.
Full scan Yes The whole measurement area is scanned. The area
around the tripod cannot be scanned.
No The limit is defined manually.
Angle start Display only The angle measured to the point at the beginning of
the limit.
Angle end Display only The angle measured to the point at the end of the
limit.
Step Description
1. Type in the Limit name.
2. Highlight Angle start.
3. Turn the instrument to point at the starting angle of the limit.
4. Press the Dist to measure the distance.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1226
Defining discrete
points to measure
Measure additional points
In addition to defining the chainage and the angular limits of the profiles to scan, it is also
possible to define discrete points in the profile. Discrete points are to be measured at each
chainage.
These points could represent a breakpoint in the section, for example, or a point that is
required for positioning services such as electricity cables.
Defining a manual point step-by-step
5. Highlight Angle end.
6. Turn the instrument to point at the end angle of the limit.
7. Press the Dist to measure the distance.
8. Enter the approximate distance between points to be measured on the line Incre-
ment.
Step Description
Step Description
1. In Scan Profile press Manual.
2. Aim at the point to measure.
3. Use Meas, Dist and Store to measure the point in the usual manner.
4. Repeat the process for all the manual points that are required to be added to the
profile.
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1227
Making a scan Starting the scan
Once all manual points have been defined, the scanning of the profiles is started by pressing
Auto. If no manual points are required, scanning of the profiles is started by pressing Start.
Once scanning has started, the values of the measured point are viewed in Scan Profile,
Info page. The values shown on this screen can be configured in the configuration. Refer to
"35.3 Configuring Roads Applications" for more information.
It is possible to end the scan once started using Stop. To pause the scan, for example to
allow passing site traffic through, use Pause.
Pause and options before continuing
Once the scan has been paused, several options are available before continuing:
•Stop: To end the scan.
•Resum: To continue the scan at the next position. Turn the instrument to skip a
section of the profile if needed.
•Prof+: To skip the remaining points in the profile being measured and to move on to
the next profile.
•Manual: To add a point measured manually to the measured profile. If this key has
been pressed, the automatic scan is resumed by pressing Auto.
Invalid measurements
This process is repeated until the measured point is within the chainage limit or the
maximum number of iterations has been reached.
Invalid measurement situations could occur, for example:
Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 1228
• in irregular tunnel surfaces, where the horizontal alignment is formed by a curve with
a small radius.
• if the back distance or forward distance defined in Scan Profile, General page were
too large.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1229
40 Sets of Angles
40.1 Overview
Description Sets of Angles:
• This application is used to measure multiple sets of directions and distances (optional)
to pre-defined target points in one or two faces. The application can include Monitoring
as an option.
• The mean direction and mean distance (optional) to each target point, within a set is
calculated. The residual for each direction and distance (optional) within a set is also
calculated.
• The reduced average direction and average distance (optional) to each target point, for
all active sets is calculated.
Monitoring:
• This module can be integrated within the Sets of Angles program.
• With this module, it is possible to use a timer to enable repeated and automated angle
and distances measurements to pre-defined target points at defined intervals.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1230
Diagram
Known:
P1 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional)
P2 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional)
P3 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional)
P4 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional)
P5 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional)
Unknown:
a) Mean direction and mean distance (optional) to each target point, within a set
b) Residual for each direction and distance (optional ), within a set
c) Reduced average direction and average distance (optional) to each target point, for all active
sets
Measure at least:
a) Two target points
b) Two sets
TS_048
P1
P0
P2 P3 P4 P5
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1231
Automatic aiming Automatic aiming (search and measurements) can be performed to a prism. After
completing the first measurements to each target point, the measurements to the target
points in subsequent sets are automated.
Station setup and
station orientation
If oriented grid coordinates are to be recorded, a station set up and station orientation is
required before starting the Sets of Angles application.
Point properties The properties stored with Sets of Angles points are:
• Class: Meas or None
• Sub class: TPS
•Source: Sets of Angles
• Instrument source: TPS
Point averaging An average is never calculated for Sets of Angles points, even if a measured point of class
Meas already exists with the same point ID.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1232
40.2 Sets of Angles
40.2.1 Accessing Sets of Angles
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of Angles.
Choose Control Job
Description of fields
Next step
OK accepts the changes and accesses Sets of Angles Menu.
OK
To accept changes and access the next
screen. The chosen settings become active.
Fn Config..
To configure the Sets of Angles application.
Refer to "40.2.2 Configuring Sets of
Angles".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Control job Selectable list The job where the target points to be observed can
be selected and a points list created.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1233
Sets of Angles Menu
Description of Sets of Angles Menu options
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the next screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Sets of Angles application.
Refer to "40.2.2 Configuring Sets of
Angles".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Options Description
Manage points list To create, edit and manage a points list of the target points
for the survey. Refer to "40.2.3 Managing the Points List".
Measure new points To define the target points and to measure the first set.
Refer to "40.2.4 Measuring the New Points".
Measure sets To measure the second set and any further sets. Refer to
"Measure Sets".
Calculate angles To calculate horizontal/vertical angles and their residuals.
Refer to "40.2.6 Calculations - Calculating Angles and
Distances in Two Faces".
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1234
Calculate distances To calculate distances and their residuals. Refer to "40.2.7
Calculations - Viewing Angle and Distance Results in Two
Faces".
End Sets of Angles To end the Sets of Angles program.
Options Description
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1235
40.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of Angles. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Tolerances page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Use tolerances Check box If checked, the entered horizontal, vertical and
distance tolerances are checked during the measure-
ments to verify accurate pointing and measurements.
Hz tolerance Editable field Tolerance for horizontal directions.
V tolerance Editable field Tolerance for vertical directions
Distance tolerance Editable field Tolerance for distances.
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1236
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1237
40.2.3 Managing the Points List
Description A points list of the target points for the survey can be created, edited and managed. New
points are always added from the fixpoint job, as defined in the Sets of Angles Begin screen.
Access Highlight Manage points list in Sets of Angles Menu and OK.
Point list name
Next step
New to access New Points List.
OK
To return to the Sets of Angles Menu.
New
To create a new points list.
Edit
To edit an existing points list.
Delete
To delete an existing points list.
More
To display additional information.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1238
New Points List,
General page
Description of fields
Store
To store the new points list.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Point list name Editable field The name of the points list.
Automatically
survey this point Check box Check this box to survey the target points automati-
cally. The instrument will automatically turn and
measure the target point. For instruments with auto-
matic aiming.
Auto sort points Check box Check this box to sort the target points automati-
cally. The instrument will work in a clockwise direc-
tion and find the shortest path to move between the
target points.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1239
New Points List,
Points page
Store
To store the points to the list.
+ All
To add points from the fixpoint job to the
list.
+ 1
To add one point from the fixpoint job to
the list.
Remov
To remove the highlighted point from the
list. The point itself is not deleted.
More
To display additional information.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Rmv all
To remove all points from the list.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1240
40.2.4 Measuring the New Points
Description The points to be used for Sets of Angles can be selected and the first set measured. The
measurement settings of the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets.
Access Highlight Measure new points in Sets of Angles Menu and OK.
Define Points for Set
OK
To measure the entered point and to access
Select Points - Survey.
Done
To finish selection of points and access Sets
of Angles Menu for further steps.
Fn Get Pt
To select points stored in the database.
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1241
Description of fields
Next step
Field Option Description
Automatically
survey this point Check box Available for instruments with automatic aiming and
Target aiming:Automatic. If checked, search and
measurements are done to specified targets in addi-
tional sets.
IF THEN
new or selected
points are to be
measured
OK to access Select Points - Survey.
existing points are to
be selected
Fn Get Pt to select a point from Data, Points page.
all desired points
have been selected
and measured
Done to return to the Sets of Angles Menu.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1242
Select Points - Survey,
Sets page
Description of fields
Meas
To measure and store the angles and
distance, and to return to Define Points for
Set.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Store
To store data and to return to Define Points
for Set.
Positn
To position the instrument to the selected
target point. Available if the target point has
been selected using Fn Get Pt in the Define
Points for Set screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Δ Hz Display only Difference between the current horizontal angle and
the horizontal angle to this target when selected.
Δ V Display only Difference between the current vertical angle and
the vertical angle to this target when selected.
Δ slope Display only Difference between the current slope distance to
the target and the slope distance to this target when
selected.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1243
Next step
Meas to measure and store the angles and distance, and to return to Define Points for Set.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1244
40.2.5 Measuring the Sets
Description The selected points from Measure new points are used for measuring further sets. The
settings of measurements are taken from the first measurement to each target.
Access Highlight Measure Sets in Sets of Angles Menu and OK.
Measure Sets
Description of fields
OK
Opens a screen to measure the points.
When auto survey is activated, measure-
ments are done automatically.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
No. of sets Editable field The number of sets to measure with the target
points. There is a maximum of 99 sets allowed.
No. of points Display only The number of target points.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1245
Next step
OK to measure further sets of the defined points.
Set n of n, Pt n of n,
Sets page
Meas
To measure and store the angles and
distances, and to increment to the next
point.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Store
To store data and to increment to the next
point.
Skip
To skip measuring the displayed point and
continue with the next point.
Done
To end the sets of angles measurements
and to return to Sets of Angles Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Positn
To position the instrument to the selected
target point.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1246
Description of fields
Next step
Meas to measure further sets of the selected points.
)• Motorised instruments point automatically in the direction of the targets.
• Instruments with automatic aiming and auto survey activated, measure the targets auto-
matically.
)For the calculation, two entire sets must be measured. Horizontal and vertical angles and
distances can be calculated individually.
Field Option Description
Δ Hz Display only Difference between the current horizontal angle and
the horizontal angle to this target when selected.
Δ V Display only Difference between the current vertical angle and
the vertical angle to this target when selected.
Δ slope Display only Difference between the current slope distance to
the target and the slope distance to this target when
selected.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1247
40.2.6 Calculations - Calculating Angles and Distances in Two Faces
Description For two or more sets, measured with angles and distances in two faces calculations can be
done for angles and distances. For sets measured in one face, the results can be viewed but
no calculations are done. Refer to "40.2.8 Calculations - Viewing Results in One Face" for
more information.
Access Highlight Calculate Angles or Calculate Distances in Sets of Angles Menu and OK.
Calculate Angles/Calcu-
late Distances,
Hz Set/V Set/Distance
set page
The softkeys are the same for vertical angles, horizontal angles and distances.
Description of fields
OK
To access Sets of Angles Menu.
More
To view results of calculation. Refer to
"40.2.7 Calculations - Viewing Angle and
Distance Results in Two Faces".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Points active Display only Number of active points which are set to Yes in the
Use column and used for calculation.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1248
Next step
Page accesses the Plot page. The functionality and softkeys available are described in the
MapView chapter. Refer to "28.4.1 Screen Area" for information functionality.
Sets active Display only Number of active sets which are set to Yes in the
Use column and used for calculation.
SD single direction Display only Standard deviation of a single horizontal or vertical
direction.
SD single distance Display only Standard deviation of a single distance.
SD avg direction Display only Standard deviation of the average horizontal or
vertical direction.
SD avg distance Display only Standard deviation of the average distance.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1249
40.2.7 Calculations - Viewing Angle and Distance Results in Two Faces
Access Press More in Calculate Angles or Calculate Distances.
Angle Results/Distance
Results
Description of columns
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Edit..
To access View Residuals in Set n.
Use
To set Yes or No in the Use column for the
highlighted set.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Column Description
Set Displays the numbers of all sets measured.
Use For Yes: The selected set is used for calculations.
For No: The selected set is not used for calculations.
Hz ΣrShows the calculated sum of residuals in Hz of the selected set. The
sum of residuals is the sum of the difference between the reduced
average direction and each sets directions. For sets not used in the
calculation, ----- is shown.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1250
Next step
Edit.. to access View Residuals in Set n.
View Residuals in Set n
V ΣvShows the calculated sum of residuals in V of the selected set. The
sum of residuals is the sum of the difference between the average
vertical angles and each sets vertical angles. For sets not used in the
calculation, ----- is shown.
Column Description
OK
To return to the previous screen.
Use
To set Yes or No in the Use column for the
highlighted point.
More
To view additional information.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1251
Description of columns when calculating angles
Description of columns when calculating distances
Column Description
Point ID This column is always visible.
Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and
measured in Measure new points.
Use For Yes: The selected point is used for calculations in all sets.
For No: The selected point is not used for calculations in any set.
sd Residual in the angle of the selected point within the single set.
sd Residual in the Hz value of the selected point within the single set.
Resdl V Residual in the V value of the selected point within the single set.
Avg Hz Reduced Average Hz value of the point in all active sets.
Avg V Average V value of the point in all active sets.
Mean Hz Mean Hz value of the point within the single set.
Mean V Mean V value of the point within the single set.
Column Description
Point ID This column is always visible.
Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and
measured in Measure new points.
Use For Yes: The selected point is used for calculations in all sets.
For No: The selected point is not used for calculations in all sets.
Resdl SD Residual in the distance value of the point within the single set.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1252
Avg SD Average distance value of the point in all active sets.
Mean SD Mean distance value of the point within the single set.
Column Description
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1253
40.2.8 Calculations - Viewing Results in One Face
Access Highlight Calculate Angles or Calculate Distances in Sets of Angles Menu and press OK.
Single Face Results
Description of columns
OK
To return to the previous screen.
More
To view additional columns.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Column Description
Point ID Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and
measured in Measure new points.
SD Hz Standard deviation of all Hz readings to the point.
Avg Hz Average value of all Hz readings to the current point.
SD V Standard deviation of all V readings to the current point.
Avg V Average value of all V readings to the current point.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1254
SD distance Standard deviation of all distance measurements to the current
point.
Avg SD Average value of all distance measurements to the current point.
Column Description
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1255
40.3 Monitoring
Description Monitoring is a module integrated within the Sets of Angles application.
Monitoring uses a timer to enable repeated and automated angle and distances measure-
ments to pre-defined target points at defined intervals. The ability to configure the handling
of message screens during measurement sets is also enabled.
Important aspects For monitoring, instruments must be motorised.
)Monitoring is licence protected and is only activated through a licence key. The licence key
can be entered manually or loaded from the data storage device.
Monitoring preparation This step-by-step description is an example on preparing a set for monitoring.
Step Description
1. Set station coordinates and station orientation.
2. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of Angles.
3. In Choose Control Job, select the control job and press OK.
4. In Sets of Angles Menu press Fn Config.. to configure Sets of Angles for moni-
toring.
For the Parameters page set:
•Measure method: A'B'A"B" (for example purposes only).
•Page to show: None (for example purposes only).
•Stop measuring for: All messages (for example purposes only).
•Time out: 10 secs (for example purposes only).
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1256
•Define time when sets should be measured (timer monitoring) (this option
must be selected for monitoring). This setting will enable access to the Define
Monitoring Timer screen.
5. Press OK to access the Sets of Angles Menu screen.
6. Select Measure new points.
7. Press OK to access the Define Points for Set screen.
8. Enter details of the target point as required.
For each target point, ensure that auto survey is activated. This setting will enable
the automated measurement and recording of the target point in the other face.
The setting also enables the automated measurement and recording of all target
points during monitoring.
9. Press OK to access the Select Points - Survey screen.
10. Measure and record the measurement to the target point as required.
11. Continue with steps 8. to 10. until all target points for the first measurement set
have been measured and recorded.
12. Press Done to complete the selection of the target points for the first measure-
ment set in one face. This action then begins the measurement of the target
points in the other face. On completion, the Sets of Angles Menu screen will be
accessed.
13. Select Measure Sets.
14. Press OK to access the Define Monitoring Timer screen.
Step Description
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1257
Define Monitoring Timer Description of fields
Next step
When all required information is entered press OK to begin the monitoring process.
Field Option Description
Begin date Editable field Start date for monitoring.
Begin time Editable field Start time for monitoring.
End date Editable field End date for monitoring.
End time Editable field End time for monitoring.
Interval Editable field The time between the start of each scheduled
measurement set.
Stop measuring for Selectable list To define what action is taken when a message
screen appears during a measurement set.
The setting for this editable field has already
been defined in the configuration. It can be
changed in this screen if desired, before starting
the monitoring process.
Time out Selectable list To define the time delay for the automatic
closing of message screens during a measure-
ment set. This selectable list is not available for
Stop measuring for:Never stop.
The setting for this editable field has already
been defined in the configuration. Here, it can be
changed if desired, before starting the moni-
toring process.
Viva Series, Sets of Angles 1258
A screen displays a notice that monitoring is in progress. If necessary, press Abort to stop
the monitoring process and return to Sets of Angles Menu.
Refer to "40.2 Sets of Angles" for information about calculations and the viewing of results.
Monitoring interval Description
The dates and times entered define the timeframe for when the monitoring will take place.
The time interval defines the time between the start of each measurement set during the
monitoring period. The interval time begins at the start of a measurement set and ends at
the start of the next measurement set.
Example
Data;
Results;
• The time taken to measure 4 sets of 3 target points in both faces is 10 minutes.
• The measurements will start at 14:00:00 on 03.11.2010.
• At 14:10:00, the first measurement set is complete.
• The instrument will wait until 14:30:00 for the next scheduled measurement set.
• 3 target points • 4 measure sets
• Begin Date: 03.11.2010 • Begin Time: 14:00:00
• End Date: 06.11.2010 • End Time: 14:00:00
• Interval: 30 min
Viva Series, Setup 1259
41 Setup
41.1 Overview
Description The Setup application is only available for use with TPS instruments. Setup determines the
station coordinates and the instrument orientation using TPS measurements and/or GPS
measurements.
Setup methods
Setup with GPS using SmartPole Setup with GPS using SmartStation
SmartPole allows target points to be deter-
mined using GPS measurements. The new
points are then used as control points for
the TPS setup.
SmartStation allows TPS station coordinates
(position and height) to be determined from
GPS measurements.
Setup Method
"Standard"
setup type
"On-the-Fly"
setup type
Methods for
TPS
Methods for
SmartPole
Methods for
SmartStation
Set orientation 9-9-9
Known backsight 9-999
Multiple backsights 99999
Transfer height 9-99-
Resection 99 9 9 -
Orientate to line 9-9-9
Viva Series, Setup 1260
•Each setup method requires different input data and a different number of target points.
• All setup methods are described in "41.7 Setup Methods".
Setup types
Incomplete setups • For a "Standard" setup, the user must always measure all setup points consecutively to
complete the setup. This type of setup is always regarded as a complete setup.
• For "On-the-Fly" setups, the setup points can be measured together with the survey
points. It is not necessary to complete the setup before measuring survey points. Until
the user selects Set in Station Results, this type of setup is regarded as incomplete.
An incomplete setup, or a setup where more targets can be added, can be accessed
in the following ways:
"Standard" setup "On-the-Fly" setup
This type of setup is the traditional type. The
user must always measure all setup points
consecutively to complete the setup. The TPS
station coordinates and TPS orientation
must be set before measuring survey points.
This setup type allows the user to move
between setup and survey before completing
the setup (working "on the fly"). When
leaving setup the TPS station coordinates
and orientation do not have to be final, they
can be set at anytime during the survey.
This setup can only be used when measuring
survey points. When staking out points, the
TPS station coordinates and TPS orientation
must be set first.
1. In the Survey application, Setup can be accessed by selecting the Setup
softkey.
2. When entering any panel where it is possible to do a measurement, a message is
displayed to notify that the setup is incomplete. It is then possible to:
a) continue with the existing application, or OK
Viva Series, Setup 1261
Properties of setup
points
TPS points
The properties stored with a TPS point are:
GPS points (only applicable when using SmartPole or SmartStation)
The properties stored with a GPS point are:
b) start Setup and create a new station setup, or New..
c) start Setup and continue to measure additional fixpoints. Setup
3. Assigning the function TPS - Continue open setup to the favourites or a hot key.
Type Station Target
Class Ref Meas or None
Sub class TPS TPS
Source Setup(setup method) Setup(setup method)
Instrument source TPS TPS
Type Station Station
Class Meas Nav
Sub class GNSS Fixed GNSS Code Only
Source Setup(setup method) Setup(setup method)
Instrument source GPS GPS
Viva Series, Setup 1262
41.2 Accessing Setup
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Setup.
Total Station Setup An illustration and a description is shown for each Setup method.
OK
To accept changes and access the subse-
quent screen. The chosen settings become
active. Refer to "41.4 Set Station Point" or
"41.5 Enter Station Information".
Fn Config..
To configure the Setup application. Refer to
"41.3 Configuring Setup".
Fn Quit
To exit the wizard.
Viva Series, Setup 1263
41.3 Configuring Setup
Access Press Fn Config.. in Total Station Setup.
Configuration,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the application
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Remind me of last
setup before meas-
uring
Check box Current instrument setup details can be displayed to
remind the user to either keep the current instru-
ment setup, check the backsight, or create a new
setup.
Refer to "41.6 Setup Reminder" for details.
Use two face meas-
urements in setup Check box Defines if the instrument measures the second face
automatically after storing the first.
Viva Series, Setup 1264
Next step
Page changes to the Known backsight page.
When this box is checked, after storing a measure-
ment with All or Store motorised instruments change
face automatically, non-motorised instruments
access Telescope Positioning. The measurements of
face I and face II are averaged. The averaged value is
stored.
When this box is not checked, no automatic measure-
ment in two faces.
Use graphics to help
choose setup
method
Check box When this box is checked, the setup methods are
displayed in a screen accompanied by a graphic and
text describing each setup method.
When this box is not checked, the setup methods are
selected from the drop-down menu in Go to Work!.
Show message
when setup is
complete
Check box When this box is checked, a message informs when
the setup is finished.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1265
Configuration,
Known backsight page
For Setup method: Known backsight, the settings on this page apply.
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Advanced page.
Field Option Description
Check backsight
position Check box Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordi-
nate difference between the existing and the meas-
ured known backsight point. If the defined Position
limit is exceeded, the setup can be repeated, skipped
or stored.
Position limit Editable field Available when Check backsight position is checked.
Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference
accepted in the position check.
Check backsight
height Check box Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference
between the existing and the measured known back-
sight point. If the Height limit is exceeded, the stake
out can be repeated, skipped or stored.
Height limit Editable field Available when Check backsight height is checked.
Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the
height check.
Viva Series, Setup 1266
Configuration,
Advanced page
For Setup method:Resection and Setup method:Multiple backsights, the settings on this
page apply.
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Auto position to
setup targets Check box When this box is checked, the instrument positions
horizontally and vertically to the point.
Calculate scale from
target observations Check box Only if available if the job properties do not have
Compute scale using set to Stn & coord system.
If checked, a station scale will be calculated from the
target observations. The user will have the option to
apply this new scale (calculated ppm + current ppm =
new ppm) to all survey observations, including the
setup observations, from that setup.
If not checked, then the calculated ppm will not be
displayed and therefore not applied to any survey
observations.
Use Helmert method
for resection Check box Helmert calculation is used.
Height weighting 1/distance or
1/distance² Available when Use Helmert method for resection is
checked. To change the distance weighting that is
used in the calculation of the station height in the
resection.
Edit default station
quality checks Check box Check to type in values for standard deviation, posi-
tion and height accuracy. If the limits are exceeded, a
message will be shown when Calc is selected.
Viva Series, Setup 1267
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Orientation limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is
checked. Define a limit for the standard deviation of
the orientation.
Position limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is
checked. Define a position accuracy of the target
point.
Height limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is
checked. Define a height accuracy of the target
point.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Viva Series, Setup 1268
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1269
41.4 Set Station Point
Access A station point must be selected for Setup method:Set orientation, Setup method:Known
backsight, Setup method:Multiple backsights and Setup method:Transfer height. Set
Station Point is then accessed automatically from Setup.
Set Station Point
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Scale..
To type in values for the scale corrections.
Refer to "New Job, Scale page".
Atmos..
To type in values for the atmospheric correc-
tions. Refer to "Atmospheric Corrections,
Atmospheric ppm page".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Instrument height Editable field The height of the instrument.
Station point from The selection made here determines the availability
of the other fields on this screen.
Viva Series, Setup 1270
Job A station point can be selected from a job on a data
storage device.
Enter new
point Pressing OK opens a screen where a new point can
be typed in. After pressing Store there, the Setup
application continues.
GPS - Smart-
Station Available when TPS and GPS are used. Pressing OK
opens the GPS Survey application. After measuring a
point with Meas, Stop, Store there, the Setup appli-
cation continues. Refer to "44.4 Initialisation for
Real-Time Rover Operations".
)In order to use GPS, a coordinate system for
the setup is required and must be attached to
the working job. If not, then a coordinate
system must be selected, or local coordinates
for the station must be typed in, during the
setup process.
)To obtain the correct elevation of the setup
point, measure the instrument height as usual
and ensure the antenna type is set to the rele-
vant SmartStation antenna.
)If SmartPole is used in the setup or later in
Survey, remember to update the antenna type
after finishing the SmartStation measurement.
Last used
station The station used last in the Setup application is
displayed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1271
)Refer to "12 Antenna Heights" for further information regarding height values used in a
SmartStation.
Job Selectable list The job from which the station is to be selected.
Refer to "4.4 Choosing a Job".
Point ID Display only The point ID of the station point.
Easting, Northing
and Elevation Display only The coordinates of the station point.
Current scale Display only The scale according to the scale settings for the
selected station.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1272
41.5 Enter Station Information
Access Station information must be typed in for Setup method:Resection and Setup method:
Orientate to line. Enter Station Information is accessed after selecting OK in Total Station
Setup with one of these setup methods selected.
Enter Station Information For a description of keys refer to "41.4 Set Station Point".
Description of fields
)Refer to "12 Antenna Heights" for further information regarding height values used in a
SmartStation.
Field Option Description
Station ID Editable field Type in an ID for the station point.
Point code Selectable list Select a point code for the station point if desired.
Instrument height Editable field The height of the instrument.
Use control job for
the target points Check box Target points can be selected from the control job.
Job Selectable list The control job from which the target points can be
selected. Refer to "4.4 Choosing a Job".
Current scale Display only The scale according to the scale settings for the
selected station.
Viva Series, Setup 1273
41.6 Setup Reminder
Description When activated, the setup reminder appears whenever the user enters a measurement
screen. The reminder allows the user to check the current station setup details before
proceeding with the survey. When this reminder appears, three options are available to the
user:
1) To keep the current station setup and proceed with the survey.
2) To check the backsight point.
3) To create a new station setup.
Current Setup Details
Description of fields
OK
To accept the selection.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Description
Continue with current
setup The last setup is used and recorded in the working job.
Viva Series, Setup 1274
Check the backsight To open the Check Point screen. The point suggested is the point
which Setup uses as the reference orientation. For the setup
methods Set orientation and Known backsight, the orientation
target point is suggested. For the setup methods Multiple back-
sights, Transfer height, Resection and Orientate to line, the first
target is suggested.
Make a new setup To start the Setup application and create a new station setup.
Field Description
Viva Series, Setup 1275
41.7 Setup Methods
41.7.1 Set orientation and Known backsight
Requirements The position coordinates of the station point are required.
For Set orientation: The instrument is set up and oriented to either a known or unknown
target point, to which a true or assumed azimuth is set.
For Known backsight: The instrument is set up and oriented to a known backsight target.
For SmartStation, the position coordinates of the station are unknown and are determined
with GPS. The instrument is set and oriented to either a known or unknown target point, to
which a true or assumed azimuth is set.
Updating Hz measure-
ments
A station setup using the Set orientation method, is always automatically flagged with an
’update later’ attribute. If the backsight point is measured again, for example from another
station, and found to have different coordinates, then a message will appear. The user can
then select whether to update the original setup or not. The update will use the backsight
point coordinates to recalculate the orientation and subsequently update all measured
points connected to the setup.
Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method:Set orientation or Known backsight. Press OK.
In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK.
Viva Series, Setup 1276
Set Station Orientation,
Orientation page
Set
To set the station and orientation and exit
the Setup application.
Dist
To measure a distance to the point being
used to set the azimuth. For Set orientation:
A distance measurement is NOT required
when setting the Station and the Orienta-
tion with Set.
GPS
For Known backsight applicable when using
SmartPole. To enter the GPS Survey screen
and measure a point with GPS. The antenna
height is automatically converted from the
target height.
Store
To store the measurement with or without a
distance. Only available when Use two face
measurements in setup is selected in the
Setup configuration.
More
To change between the slope and the hori-
zontal distance.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Setup 1277
Description of fields
Fn Run / IndivID
Available for Setup method:Set orientation
only. Run automatically chooses the next
available point ID from the list of points
already stored. IndivID allows the user to
type in any value for Backsight ID.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Backsight ID Point ID of the backsight point.
Editable field For Set orientation.
Selectable list For Known backsight. Select a point from the points
stored in the control job.
Target height Editable field Height of the target above or below the backsight point.
The last setup target height is always remembered.
Direction Editable field Available for Set orientation. The direction is set to 0 by
default. This value can be edited. The value is not set to
the system until Set is pressed.
Slope distance Display only Available for Set orientation. The slope distance meas-
ured between the station point and the backsight point.
Horiz distance Display only Available for Set orientation. Press Dist to measure a
distance to the target point being used to set the
azimuth.
Viva Series, Setup 1278
Height difference Display only Available for Set orientation. The vertical distance
between the station point and the backsight point.
Computed direc-
tion Display only Available for Known backsight. Displays the calculated
azimuth from the selected station to the backsight
point.
Computed hz dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displays the calculated
horizontal distance between the selected station and
backsight point.
Computed slp
dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displayed after More
was pressed. The calculated slope distance to the back-
sight point.
Δ hz dist Display only Available for Known backsight. The difference between
the calculated horizontal distance from station to back-
sight point and the measured horizontal distance.
?slope dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displayed after More
was pressed. The difference between the calculated
slope distance from station to backsight point and the
measured slope distance.
?height Display only Available for Known backsight. The difference between
the control height of the backsight point and the meas-
ured height of the backsight point. If the backsight point
is a 2D point, this field shows -----.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1279
Next step
Page changes to the Backsight page.
Set Station Orientation,
Backsight page
Set
To set the station and orientation and exit
the Setup application.
+Attrib
To create additional attributes for this point
code.
Name or Value
Available for attributes for which an
attribute name can be typed in. To highlight
the field of the attribute name or the field
for the attribute value. The name of the
attribute can be edited and an attribute
value can be typed in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values for
the selected code.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the
selected code.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Setup 1280
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Station page.
Set Station Orientation,
Station page
Field Option Description
Backsight ID Editable field
or display only
Point ID of the backsight point.
Point code Selectable list The code for the backsight point.
Description Display only A short description of the code.
Set
To set the station and orientation and exit
the Setup application.
Dist
To measure a distance to the point being
used to set the azimuth. A distance meas-
urement is NOT required when setting the
Station and the Orientation with Set.
SF / Ppm
To switch between displaying the current
scale as a scale factor or ppm value.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Setup 1281
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Station ID Display only Station ID as selected in Set Station Point.
Instrument height Editable field The instrument height.
Point code Selectable list The code for the backsight point.
Current PPM /
Current scale Display only The current job scale. Refer to " New Job, Scale page"
for more information on scale corrections.
Viva Series, Setup 1282
41.7.2 Multiple backsights
Requirements The position coordinates of the station point are required. The instrument is set up and
oriented to one or more known backsight targets.
For SmartStation, the position coordinates of the station are unknown and are determined
with GPS. The instrument is set up and oriented to one or more known backsight targets.
For TPS and SmartStation, the orientation is determined by sighting to one or more known
target points (maximum of ten target points). Only angles or both angles and distances can
be measured. The height of the station point can also be derived from the target points.
Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method:Multiple backsights. Press OK.
In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK.
Measure Target Unless otherwise stated the following screen and description applies to the setup methods:
Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection, and Orientate to line.
Meas
To measure and store the distances and
angles made to the control points. After
storing the measurement data, the next
point ID in the job is displayed. The instru-
ment positions to the point if enough data is
available.
Dist
To measure and display distances.
Viva Series, Setup 1283
Store
Records displayed values temporarily. The
target measurements will not be stored to
the current job until the station is set. A
distance measurement is not necessary
before pressing Store. After recording the
measurement data, the next point ID in the
job is displayed. The instrument positions to
the point if enough data is available and the
instrument is robotic.
GPS
Applicable when using SmartPole. To enter
the GPS Survey screen and measure a point
with GPS. The antenna height is automati-
cally converted from the target height.
Done
For Resection only. To temporarily exit the
Setup application. The station setup will be
incomplete but can be continued and
completed at a later time. This softkey is
replaced by Calc when sufficient data is
available.
Viva Series, Setup 1284
Description of fields
Calc
For Multiple backsights: Available after the
first measurement. Allows the user to see
the calculated station orientation and other
results.
For Resection: Available after measuring
two target points or as soon as a preliminary
station and orientation can be calculated.
The calculated station coordinates and
overall “quality” of the results are displayed.
Fn Find
Stakeout values are provided to guide the
prism holder to the selected target point.
For Resection: Available once sufficient data
is available for calculation.
Refer to "41.9 Finding a Target Point".
Fn Positn
To position the instrument to the selected
target point.
For Resection: Available once sufficient data
is available for calculation.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the target point to be measured.
Viva Series, Setup 1285
)A maximum of ten target points can be measured and used for the calculation. When the
maximum number of points is exceeded, a message will appear. The user can remove
previous points or finish the setup. Points can be removed from the Station Results, Targets
page.
Target height Editable field The height of the target above or below the back-
sight point. The last setup target height is always
remembered.
Hz angle Display only The current horizontal angle.
V angle Display only The current vertical angle.
Slope distance Display only The measured slope distance after Dist was pressed.
Δ azimuth Display only Displays the difference between the calculated
azimuth and the current horizontal angle.
If Setup method:Resection, displays ----- until suffi-
cient data for calculation is available.
Δ hz dist Display only The difference between the calculated and the meas-
ured horizontal distance.
Δ height Display only The difference between the given and the measured
height of the target point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1286
41.7.3 Transfer height
Requirements This method is used to compute a station height to apply to the selected station. Only the
height is updated, the orientation is not updated.
The position coordinates of the station point are required.
Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method:Transfer height. Press OK.
In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK.
)For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "41.7.2 Multiple backsights".
Viva Series, Setup 1287
41.7.4 Resection
Requirements The coordinates of the station point are unknown. The coordinates and orientation are
determined by sighting to at least two or more known target points (maximum of ten target
points). Only angles or both angles and distances can be measured. For a resection, least
squares or robust calculations are used. The resection calculations can be done using the
Helmert method, robust method or least squares method, after three measurements to
known backsights have been completed.
Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method:Resection. Press OK.
In Enter Station Information, type in the required information. Press OK.
)For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "41.7.2 Multiple backsights".
Viva Series, Setup 1288
41.7.5 Orientate to line
Description This method can be used to calculate the 2D or 3D local coordinates for the instrument
station and the orientation of the horizontal circle. The calculation is done using the
distance and angle measurements to two target points.
The first target point always defines the origin of the local coordinate system. The second
target point, in conjunction with the first target point, always defines the local direction of
North or East (depending on the working style).
Requirements Important features:
• All coordinates calculated are local coordinates.
• The first target point always defines the origin of the local coordinate system (North=0,
East=0, Height=0 (optional))
• The second target point, in conjunction with the first target point, always defines the
local direction of North or East.
Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method:Orientate to line. Press OK.
In Enter Station Information type in the required information. Press OK.
Viva Series, Setup 1289
Define Station Ht & Axis
Description of fields
OK
To accept all settings and continue. The
chosen settings are activated and the next
screen, Measure Target, is displayed.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Use station height User entered The height value of the station will be entered by the
user and used to calculate the height of the meas-
ured points.
Transfer from
trgt 1 The height of the station will be calculated relative to
the first measured point.
Station height Editable field Available for Use station height: User entered. The
elevation of the instrument station.
Target 1 height Editable field Available for Use station height: User entered. The
height of the first measured point.
Axis defined
between target 1 & 2 To define the positive North or positive East axis.
Viva Series, Setup 1290
)For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "41.7.2 Multiple backsights".
North axis The second point measured defines the direction of
the positive North axis.
East axis The second point measured defines the direction of
the positive East axis.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1291
41.8 Setup Results
Description The results screen is displayed after pressing Calc in the Measure Target screen. The results
screen is part of the Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection and Orientate to line
setup methods.
Excluding Orientate to line, after three measurements to known targets, the calculations can
be done using the robust method or the least squares method. For Resection, the calcula-
tions can also be done using the Helmert method. After the station is set, all following meas-
urements will be related to this new station and orientation.
Station Results,
Results page Set
To set the orientation, to store all setup
data and exit the application.
For Transfer height: To store all setup data
and exit the application.
Done
To exit the setup without setting it, the
setup is incomplete.
Robust or LSqrs
To display the results for the robust or the
least squares calculation method.
Trgt+
To access Measure Target and to measure
more target points.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Setup 1292
Description of fields
Fn 3 par or Fn 4 par
Switches between a 3 parameter and 4
parameter calculation. For 3 parameter, the
current scale is not applied to setup obser-
vations for a new station calculation. For 4
parameter, the current scale is applied. The
station coordinates will be automatically
updated according to the setting used.
Defaults to 4 parameter.
SF or ppm
To display the scale results by scale factor or
as a ppm value.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
New orientation Display only New oriented azimuth with running angle as tele-
scope moves. Not available for setup method
Transfer height.
?height Display only The difference between the new calculated height
and the old height.
Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and
Transfer height.
Viva Series, Setup 1293
Use the new height Check box For setup method Multiple backsights: When this
box is checked, both orientation and height are
updated. If not checked, only the orientation is
updated.
For setup method Transfer height: When this box is
checked, the station height is updated. If not
checked, the station height does not change.
Not available for any other setup methods.
New height Display only The calculated height is displayed.
Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and
Transfer height.
Old height Display only The original height is displayed.
Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and
Transfer height.
σ height Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station height.
Available for setup methods Transfer height.
Easting Display only The calculated Easting is displayed.
Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate
to line.
Northing Display only The calculated Northing is displayed.
Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate
to line.
Elevation Display only The calculated Height is displayed.
Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate
to line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Setup 1294
Next step
Page changes to the Station page.
Station Results,
Station page
Apply the computed
elevation for this
station
Check box When this box is checked, then the height from the
solution is set as the station height. When this box is
not checked, then the scale is not updated.
Available for setup method Resection.
Field Option Description
Set
To set the orientation, to store all setup
data and exit the application.
For Transfer height: To store all setup data
and exit the application.
Done
To exit the setup without setting it, the
setup is incomplete.
Scale..
To type in values for the scale corrections.
Refer to "New Job, Scale page".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Setup 1295
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Quality page.
Station Results,
Quality page
For a description of the softkeys refer to "Station Results, Station page".
This page is not available for setup methods Transfer height or Orientate to line.
Fn 3 par or Fn 4 par
Switches between a 3 parameter and 4
parameter calculation. For 3 parameter, the
current scale is not applied to setup obser-
vations for a new station calculation. For 4
parameter, the current scale is applied. The
station coordinates will be automatically
updated according to the setting used.
Defaults to 4 parameter.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Station ID Display only Station ID of the current station set up.
Instrument height Editable field The current instrument height.
Point code Selectable list Select a point code for the station point if desired.
Current PPM /
Current scale Display only The current job scale. Refer to " New Job, Scale page"
for more information on scale corrections.
Viva Series, Setup 1296
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Targets page.
Field Option Description
New orientation Display only New oriented azimuth with running angle as tele-
scope moves.
Available for setup method Multiple backsights.
σ new orientation Display only Standard deviation of the calculated orientation.
?height Display only Delta height, the difference between original and
calculated height.
Available for setup method Multiple backsights.
σ height Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station height.
σ easting Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station Easting.
Available for setup method Resection.
σ northing Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station
Northing.
Available for setup method Resection.
Viva Series, Setup 1297
Station Results,
Targets page
This screen displays information about the accuracy of the measured target points and
allows exclusion of measurements that are not to be used in the calculation.
Additional measurements can be made and measurements can be deleted.
This page is not available for setup method Orientate to line.
Set
To recalculate the station data and update
all values after target points have been
deleted or excluded from the calculation.
Use
To change between using the selected point
as 3D, 2D, 1D or not at all, in the calculation.
The change automatically updates any new
coordinate or orientation values.
Remov
To delete a point from the list of measured
target points and exclude it from the Setup
calculation.
More
To change the value displayed in the fourth
column.
For Resection: To change between ?Hz, Δ
hz dist, Δ height, Δ easting and Δ northing.
For Multiple backsights: To change between
?Hz and Δ height.
For Transfer height: Only Δ height available.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Setup 1298
Description of columns
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Column Description
!The ! indicates that the delta value of either measured horizontal
angle, distance or height exceeds the calculation limit.
Point ID The point ID of the measured target points.
Use Indicates if and how a target point is used in the station calculation.
Choices are 3D, 2D, 1D and No.
?Hz Can be displayed by pressing More.
Difference between calculated and measured horizontal angle for the
target points. If a target point does not have coordinates, ----- are
displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by
a!.
Δ hz dist Can be displayed by pressing More.
Difference between calculated and measured distance from the
station to the target points. If a target point does not have coordi-
nates, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are
indicated by a !.
Δ height Can be displayed by pressing More.
Difference between the known control point height and the meas-
ured height of the target point. If a target point does not have a
height coordinate, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the
defined limit are indicated by a !.
Viva Series, Setup 1299
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Δ easting Can be displayed by pressing More.
Difference between control point and measured point, calculated
from new station coordinates.
Δ northing Can be displayed by pressing More.
Difference between control point and measured point, calculated
from new station coordinates.
Column Description
Viva Series, Setup 1300
41.9 Finding a Target Point
Description The Find Target screen can be accessed, to guide the prism to the selected target point.
The screen is only available if the Stakeout application is available on the instrument.
The functionality of this screen is similar to a stake out routine and is intended to help find
hidden survey bench marks or base points.
Access Press Fn Find in Measure Target once enough data is available to calculate roughly the new
orientation.
Find Target This screen is similar to the Stakeout, Stake page and is configured through the Stakeout
configuration settings. Refer to "Stakeout, Stake page" for a detailed description of this
screen.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1301
42 Stakeout
42.1 Overview
Description The Stakeout application is used to place marks in the field at predetermined points. These
predetermined points are the points to be staked. The points to be staked can
• be uploaded to a job on the instrument using LGO.
• already exist in a job on the instrument.
• be uploaded from an ASCII file to a job on the instrument using Main Menu:Jobs &
Data\Import data\Import ASCII data.
Diagram
P0 Current position
P1 Point to be staked
d1 Stake out distance
d2 Height difference between current posi-
tion and point to be staked
αStake out direction
d1
P1
P0
d2
GS_057
Viva Series, Stakeout 1302
Stakeout modes Points can be staked using different modes:
•Polar mode.
• Orthogonal mode.
)Staking out is possible for RTK rover and TPS.
)The points to be staked must exist in a job on the active memory device or can be typed in.
Coordinate system If staking local grid points with GNSS, always ensure that the correct coordinate system is
being used. For example, if the points to be staked are stored in WGS 1984, the active coor-
dinate system must also be WGS 1984.
P0 Station
P1 Current position
P2 Point to be staked
d1 Stake out element
d2 Stake out element
d3 Stake out element
TS_009
P1
P0
P2
d1
d2 d3
Viva Series, Stakeout 1303
Point types It is possible to stake:
• Position only points.
•Height only points.
• Points with full sets of coordinates.
Height types
Height source Heights can be taken into account from
• the vertical component of a coordinate triplet.
•a Digital Terrain Model.
The DTM licence key must be loaded. Refer to "24.3 Load licence keys" for information on
how to enter the licence key.
If loaded, the height of the points to be staked can be edited in the field.
Coding of staked points Codes can be attached to staked points, lines and areas. The behaviour of the coding func-
tionality depends on the definition of a survey screen page with editable fields for coding
and attributes.
Properties of staked
points
The properties stored with staked points are:
• Class: Meas or for also Nav depending on the position status when the staked
point was measured.
• Sub class:
Height type of the point to be staked: Orthometric OR ellipsoidal
Height type computed for current position: Orthometric OR ellipsoidal depending on the
• configured transformation,
• availability of a geoid model,
• height type of the point to be staked.
If possible, the height type of the point to be
staked is computed for the current position.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1304
•Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed.
•Stakeout
•Source: Stakeout
• Instrument source: GPS or TPS
Averaging of staked
points
The principles for averaging are identical to the averaging principles of the Survey applica-
tion.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1305
42.2 Accessing Stakeout
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout.
Choose Control Job
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and access the subse-
quent screen. The chosen settings become
active.
Fn Config..
To configure Stakeout application. Refer to
"42.3 Configuring Stakeout".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Control job Selectable list The job containing the points to be staked.
)Points which are measured during staking out
are stored in the working job.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1306
Next step
IF the Stakeout
application
THEN
is to be accessed OK accepts the changes and accesses Stakeout application. Refer to
"42.4 Staking Out".
is to be configured Config... Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout".
Viva Series, Stakeout 1307
42.3 Configuring Stakeout
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
General page
This screen consists of five pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for
all pages, unless otherwise stated.
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn About
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1308
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Automatically
select next
closest point
Check box The order of the points suggested for staking out.
When this box is checked, then the next point
suggested for staking out is the point closest to the
point which was staked. If there are many points in
the job, the search can take a few seconds.
When this box is not checked, the next point
suggested for staking out is the subsequent one in
the job.
Show addi-
tional page
from My Survey
Screen
Check box The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in
the Stakeout screen.
Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages.
Store point ID
with Stake point ID The staked points are stored with the same point IDs
as the points to be staked.
Prefix Adds the setting for Prefix / suffix in front of the
original point IDs.
Suffix Adds the setting for Prefix / suffix at the end of the
original point IDs.
Prefix / suffix Editable field Available for Store point ID with:Prefix and Store
point ID with:Suffix. The identifier with up to four
characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID
of the staked point.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1309
Only update
stakeout values
when distance
is measured
Check box When this box is checked, angles and stakeout
values are updated after a distance was measured.
Then all values are frozen until the next distance is
taken.
Automatically
turn to point Check box When this box is checked, the instrument
positions automatically to the point to be staked.
Turn to Available when Automatically turn to point is
checked.
Position only Instrument positions horizontally to the point
to be staked.
Position & height Instrument positions horizontally and verti-
cally to the point to be staked.
Show direction
message to
next point
For each point which is selected for staking,
angle and distance information is momentarily
displayed in the message line.
Instrument The delta horizontal angle that the instrument must
turn to the point, and the distance from the instru-
ment to the point, is displayed in the message line.
Last point The delta horizontal angle that the instrument must
turn to the point, and the distance from the last
staked point, is displayed in the message line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1310
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
Configuration,
Quality control page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Heights page.
Field Option Description
Check distance
before storing Check box Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordi-
nate difference between the staked point and the
point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded,
the stake out can be repeated, skipped or stored.
Limit Editable field Available when Check distance before storing is
checked. Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate
difference accepted in the position check.
Check cut/fill
before storing Check box Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference
between the staked point and the point to be staked.
If the defined Limit is exceeded, the stake out can be
repeated, skipped or stored.
Limit Editable field Available when Check cut/fill before storing is
checked. Sets the maximum vertical difference
accepted in the height check.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1311
Configuration,
Heights page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Graphics page.
Configuration,
Graphics page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Allow height of
point being
staked to be
edited
Check box When this box is checked, the field Design height is
displayed in Stakeout, Stake page. The design height
is the height of the point to be staked. The value for
Design height can be changed.
When this box is not checked, the field Current
height for the height of the current position is
displayed in Stakeout, Stake page. The value for
Current height cannot be changed.
Offset height of
all points being
staked
Check box Allows a constant height offset to be applied to the
height of the points being staked.
Height offset Editable field The height offset that is applied.
Field Option Description
Navigate direc-
tion The reference direction to be used to stakeout
points. The stakeout elements and the graphical
display shown in the Stakeout application are based
on this selection.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1312
From instrument The direction of the orientation is from the
instrument to the point to be staked.
To instrument The direction of the orientation is from the
point to be staked to the instrument.
To north The North direction shown in the graphical display
based on the active coordinate system.
From north The direction of the orientation is from the
North direction to the point to be staked.
To sun The position of the sun calculated from the
current position, the time and the date.
To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points are
yet staked, Navigate direction:To north is used for
the first point to be staked.
To point A point from the working job.
To point (cntrl job) A point from the Control job selected in Choose
Control Job.
To line (cntrl job) The direction of the orientation is parallel to a refer-
ence line from the Control job. Open the listbox to
create, edit or delete a reference line.
To line The direction of the orientation is parallel to a refer-
ence line from the working job. Open the listbox to
create, edit or delete a reference line.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1313
Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current
position to the point to be staked. The graphical
display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of
the point to be staked.
Point ID or Line Selectable list Available for Navigate direction:To point (cntrl job),
Navigate direction:To point, Navigate direction:To
line (cntrl job) and Navigate direction:To line. To
select the point or line to be used for orientation.
Navigate using The method of staking out.
Direction &
distance The direction from the orientation reference, the
horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed.
In/out, left/right The distance forwards to/backwards from the point,
the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is
displayed.
Switch to bulls
eye when 0.5m
from target
Check box When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown
in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre
from the point being staked.
Beep faster
when getting
close to point
Check box The instrument beeps when the distance from the
current position to the point to be staked is equal to
or less than defined in Start within.
The closer the instrument is to the point to be staked
the faster the beeps will be.
Distance to use Height, Horizontal
distance or Posi-
tion & height
The type of distance to use for staking.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1314
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Start within Editable field Available when Beep faster when getting close to
point is checked. The horizontal radial distance, from
the current position to the point to be staked, when
a beep is to be heard.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1315
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1316
42.4 Staking Out
Diagram This diagram shows an example for Navigate using:In/out, left/right with Navigate
using:To north.
P0 Current position
P1 Point to be staked
d1 Forwards or backwards
d2 Right or left
d3 Fill or cut
P0
P1
d3
d2
d1
GS_054
Viva Series, Stakeout 1317
This diagram shows an example Navigate using:Direction & distance with Navigate
using:To north.
P0 Station
P1 Current position
P2 Point to be staked
d1 Forward or backwards
d2 Right or left
d3 Cut or fill
P0 Current position
P1 Point to be staked
d1 Distance
d2 Cut or fill
αDirection
TS_011
P0
P1
P2
d2+ d3+
d1-
P0
GS_055
P1
d2
d1
Viva Series, Stakeout 1318
Stakeout,
Stake page
The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a
user-defined survey screen page is used.
P0 Station
P1 Current position
P2 Point to be staked
aDistance
bHorizontal angle
cCut or fill
TS_010
P1
P2
P0
a
c
b
Meas
To start measuring the point being
staked. The key changes to Stop. The differ-
ence between the current position and the
point being staked is still displayed.
To measure a distance and store
distance and angles.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1319
Stop
To end measuring the point being staked.
When Automatically stop point measure-
ment is checked in Quality Control, General
page recording of positions ends automati-
cally as defined by the stop criteria. The key
changes to Store. After ending the measure-
ments, the differences between the meas-
ured point and the point to be staked are
displayed.
Store
To store the measured point. When
Automatically store point is checked in
Quality Control, General page, the meas-
ured point is stored automatically. The key
changes to Meas.
To store angles and distance. Distance
must be measured before.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Near
To search the Control job for the point
nearest to the current position when the key
is pressed. The point is selected as the point
to be staked and is displayed in the first field
on the screen. After staking and storing the
nearest point, the next point suggested for
staking out is the one which was suggested
before the key was pressed.
Available when Meas is displayed.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1320
Revers
To reverse the graphical display top to
bottom. A reversed graphical display can be
used when the point to be staked lies behind
the current position.
Survy..
To survey additional points which may be
needed during staking out. To return to
Stakeout application, press Fn Quit or ESC.
Available when Meas is displayed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Stakeout application. Refer
to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout".
Fn Conect and Fn Disco
To dial the number of the base station
configured in the active working style and to
hang up immediately after the survey is
completed. Available when Meas or Store is
displayed and for real-time devices of type
digital cellular phone or modem. Available
for Auto connect when measuring
unchecked in RTK Rover Settings, General
page.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1321
Description of the elements of the graphical display
The graphical display provides a guide to find the point to be staked out.
Fn Init
To select an initialisation method and to
force a new initialisation. Available when
Meas or Store is displayed and for working
styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer
to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover
Operations".
Fn 2D Pos
To position the telescope (X,Y) onto the
point to be staked.
Fn 3D Pos
To position the telescope (X,Y,Z) onto the
point to be staked.
Fn Mnual..
To enter angle and distance values to stake
out a point.
Fn Quit
To exit Stakeout application.
Element Description
Point to be staked / known point
North
Viva Series, Stakeout 1322
Sun
Defined line
From instrument
Follow arrow
Forward arrow, distance to point
Side arrow, distance to point
Polar arrow, direction to point
Element Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1323
Description of fields
Height
The current position and/or height is within the configured stake out limit
for position and/or height.
Field Option Description
Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the point to be staked.
Antenna ht Editable field The default antenna height. Changing the
antenna height here does not update the default
antenna height as defined in the active working style.
The changed antenna height is used until the applica-
tion is exited.
Target height Editable field The default prism height.
Current height Display only Available when Allow height of point being staked to
be edited is not checked in Configuration, Heights
page.
Element Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1324
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for infor-
mation on the functionality and softkeys available.
The orthometric height of the current position is
displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be
displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it
is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height,
the WGS 1984 height is displayed. The value for
Height offset configured in Configuration, Heights
page is taken into account.
Design height Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to
be edited is checked in Configuration, Heights.
The design height, which is the orthometric height of
the point to be staked, is displayed. If the ortho-
metric height cannot be displayed, the local ellip-
soidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to
display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984
height is displayed. The value for Height offset
configured in Configuration, Heights page is not
taken into account.
Changing the value for Design height changes the
values displayed for cut and fill.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1325
42.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded
Description If configured a check is made on the horizontal and/or vertical coordinate distance from the
staked point to the point to be staked. Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout" for information
on configuring the check and the limits.
Access If either of the configured difference limits are exceeded, the following screen is accessed
automatically when the point is stored.
Stakeout Limit Exceeded The availability of the fields depends on the configuration for Navigate using.
The limits that have been exceeded are shown in bold and indicated by a !.
Back
To return to the Stakeout screen without
storing the point. Staking out of the same
point continues.
Store
To accept the coordinate differences, store
the point information and return to the
Stakeout screen.
Skip
To return to the Stakeout screen without
storing the point. According to filter and sort
settings the next point is suggested for
staking out.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1326
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point ID Display only The point ID of the point to be staked.
Store point ID Editable field The unique number which is used to store the staked
point. Allows a different point ID to be typed in, if
needed.
Cut Display only The negative height difference from the height of the
staked point to the height of the point to be staked.
To move down.
Fill Display only The positive height difference from the height of the
staked point to the height of the point to be staked.
To move up.
2D distance Display only Displays the horizontal difference from the staked
point to the point to be staked.
3D distance Display only Displays the spatial difference from the staked point
to the point to be staked.
∆Hz Display only The bearing from the staked point to the point to be
staked.
∆Dist Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the
point to be staked.
Forward Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to
the point to be staked in the direction of the orien-
tation.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1327
Back Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to
the point to be staked in the reverse direction of the
orientation.
Right Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the
point to be staked orthogonal to the right of the
orientation direction.
Left Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the
point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the
orientation direction.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Stakeout 1328
42.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM
Description A Digital Terrain Model can be staked alone or together with points. The heights of the
current positions are compared against the heights of a selected DTM job. The height differ-
ences are calculated and displayed.
Staking a DTM can be used for
• staking out where the DTM represents the surface to be staked.
• quality control purposes where the DTM represents the final project surface.
DTM jobs are created in LGO. DTM jobs are stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory
device.
Diagram
P1 Point to be staked
d1 Antenna height
d2 Cut or fill
GS_056
d2
d1
P1
Viva Series, Stakeout 1329
Access Both applications are activated via a single Stakeout DTM licence key.
To stake out DTM heights only:
Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake a DTM.
To stake out positions of points and DTM heights:
Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake points & DTM.
Choose Control Job Description of fields
P1 Point to be staked
d1 Cut or fill
d2 Reflector height
TS_012
d2
d1
P1
Field Option Description
Control job Selectable list The positions of points in the job selected here are
staked out. Heights to be staked out are taken from
the DTM job.
)Points which are measured during staking out
are stored in the working job.
DTM Selectable list The DTM job to be used must be stored in the \DBX
directory on the active memory device.
Heights without positions are staked out relative to
the selected DTM job.
Viva Series, Stakeout 1330
)The stake out procedure is identical as for the normal Stakeout application but the heights
to be staked are taken from the selected DTM job. The negative or positive height differ-
ences from the current position to the equivalent point in the selected DTM job is calculated
and displayed. Height offsets apply.
Refer to "42.3 Configuring Stakeout", "42.4 Staking Out" and "42.5 Stakeout Difference
Limit Exceeded".
Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1331
43 Base Menu - Start base
43.1 Start base over known point
Description In this option, a known point stored in the working job is used to set up the RTK base.
Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over known point.
Set antenna height &
type Type in the antenna height and select the antenna being used.
Description of fields
Next
To accept changes and access the subse-
quent screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Antenna height Editable field The height of the antenna that is being used.
Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1332
Next step
Next to access Select known point.
RTK base
antenna Selectable list Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as default
and can be selected from the list. Default antennas
contain an elevation-dependent correction model.
New antenna correction models can be set up and
transferred to the instrument using LGO. Open the
list to define or edit additional antennas. Refer to
Antennas for information on antennas.
Vertical offset Display only The vertical offset of the measurement reference
point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1333
Select known point Select the point to be used as base station.
)A point could already be stored in the control job either by manual entry, by meas-
uring or by transfer from LGO.
)If a new point is to be created, open the selectable list for Point ID and press Point ID.
)If an existing point is to be edited, open the selectable list for Point ID and press
Edit...
Next step
Next to access Base setup complete. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Next
To accept changes and access the subse-
quent screen.
Coord
To view other coordinate types. Local coor-
dinates are available when a local coordinate
system is active.
Back
To return to the previous screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1334
43.2 Start base over last setup
Description To use the same coordinates as when the instrument was last used as a base. Available
when the instrument has previously been used as a base and no point in the control job has
the same point ID as the one last used.
After turning off, the base coordinates are stored in the System RAM. They can be used
again the next time the instrument is used as a base. This functionality means that even if
the data storage device that previously contained the base coordinates is formatted, the
last used coordinates can still be used.
Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over last setup.
Set antenna height &
type This screen is identical with the one in Start base over known point. Refer to Start base
over any point.
Next step
Next to access Last used RTK base point.
Last used RTK base
point The point ID and coordinates of the last used base are displayed in grid. When no local coor-
dinate system is active, WGS 1984 coordinates are displayed. Refer to Start base over any
point for information on the keys.
Next step
Next to access Base setup complete. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 1335
43.3 Start base over any point
Description To use the coordinates of the current navigation position as base coordinates.
Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over any point.
Set antenna height &
type This screen is identical with the one in Start base over known point. Refer to Start base
over any point.
Next step
Next to access Measure new point.
Measure new point Type in a point ID for this new point. Refer to Start base over any point for information
on the keys.
Code information or annotations can be added in the rover menu in View & edit data.
The properties stored with the point are:
Class: Nav
Sub class: GNSS Code Only
Source: Survey (Static)
Instrument source: GPS
Next step
Next to access Base setup complete. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1336
44 Survey - General
44.1 Surveying Points
44.1.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations
Requirements • A typical working style for a static or post-processed kinematic operation is used. Ensure
that the working style has Log data for post-processing selected in the Raw Data
Logging Settings screen.
Access For RTK rover:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey.
)If configured for post-processed kinematic operations, the logging of moving obser-
vations begins.
Survey,
Survey page
The fields shown are from a typical working style for static or post-processed kinematic
operations. The screen described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys
given here are valid for the Survey page, the Code page and the Annot page. Refer to "28
MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page.
The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applica-
tions where individual point measurements are needed.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1337
Meas
To start logging of static observations. The
key changes to Stop.
Stop
To end recording of positions when enough
data is collected. When Automatically stop
point measurement is checked in Quality
Control, General, recording of positions
ends automatically as defined by the stop
criteria. The key changes to Store.
Store
To store the point information. When Auto-
matically store point is checked in Quality
Control, General, the measured point is
stored automatically. The key changes to
Meas.
Near
To compare the user’s current position with
the coordinates of all points already stored
in the job and find the nearest point. This
point ID is then suggested as the next point
ID to be used.
HdnPt..
To measure a hidden point. Refer to "48
Survey - Hidden Points".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1338
Description of fields
Fn Config..
To configure SmartCodes, auto points and
hidden point measurements. Refer to "20.5
SmartCodes", "46 Survey - Auto Points" and
"48 Survey - Hidden Points".
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The
configured point ID template is used. The ID can be
changed in the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of point IDs type over
the point ID.
• For an individual point ID independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1339
Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active
working style is suggested. Changing the antenna
height here does not update the default antenna
height as defined in the active working style. The
changed antenna height is used until the application
is exited.
3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed
position.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - General 1340
44.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations
Requirements • A typical working style for real-time rover operations is used.
• The appropriate real-time device is attached and working properly.
Access For RTK rover:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey.
Survey,
Survey page
The fields shown are from a typical working style for real-time rover operations. The screen
described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for
the Survey page, the Code page and the Annot page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive
Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page.
The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applica-
tions where individual point measurements are needed.
Meas
To start logging of static observations. The
key changes to Stop.
Stop
To end recording of positions when enough
data is collected. When Automatically stop
point measurement is checked in Quality
Control, General, recording of positions
ends automatically as defined by the stop
criteria. The key changes to Store.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1341
Store
To store the point information. When Auto-
matically store point is checked in Quality
Control, General, the measured point is
stored automatically. The key changes to
Meas.
It may happen that a point with the same
point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or
attribute values of the new and the existing
point do not match, a screen opens where
they can be corrected. Refer to "20.6 Code
and Attribute Mismatch".
Near
To compare the user’s current position with
the coordinates of all points already stored
in the job and find the nearest point. This
point ID is then suggested as the next point
ID to be used.
HdnPt..
To measure a hidden point. Refer to "48
Survey - Hidden Points".
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure SmartCodes, auto points and
hidden point measurements. Refer to "20.5
SmartCodes", "46 Survey - Auto Points" and
"48 Survey - Hidden Points".
Viva Series, Survey - General 1342
Fn Avg
To check the residuals for the averaged posi-
tion. Available for Mode: Average in Job
Properties:, Averaging page and for more
than one measured coordinate triplet
recorded for the same point. Refer to "5.3.3
Mean Page".
Fn Abs
To check the absolute difference between
measurements. Available for Mode: Average
in Job Properties:, Absolute differences
page and for more than one measured coor-
dinate triplet recorded for the same point.
Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page".
Fn Conect and Fn Disco
To dial the number of the base station
configured in the active working style and to
hang up immediately after the survey is
completed. Available for real-time devices of
type digital cellular phone or modem. Avail-
able for Auto connect when measuring
unchecked in RTK Rover Settings, General
page.
Fn Init..
To select an initialisation method and to
force a new initialisation. Available for
working styles allowing phase fixed solu-
tions. Refer to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-
Time Rover Operations".
Viva Series, Survey - General 1343
Description of fields
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The
configured point ID template is used. The ID can be
changed in the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of point IDs type over
the point ID.
• For an individual point ID independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active
working style is suggested. Changing the antenna
height here does not update the default antenna
height as defined in the active working style. The
changed antenna height is used until the application
is exited.
3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed
position.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1344
44.2 Adding Annotations
Description Annotations can be used to add either field notes or comments to points being surveyed.
Access For RTK rover:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Go to the Annot page.
)If it is not already displayed, the Annot page can be configured to appear in the Survey
application through the My Survey Screen Settings screen. Refer to "19.3 My Survey
Screen"for more information.
Survey,
Annot page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Annot 1 to
Annot 4 Editable field Type in the annotation. The annotation can be up to
16 characters long and include spaces.
)When the ASCII input interface is configured to
be used and an annotation is reserved for the
incoming ASCII string, then no other informa-
tion can be typed in for the particular annota-
tion.
)CE to clear the entry.
)Last to recall all annotations entered for the
previously surveyed point. Any annotations
just entered are overwritten.
)ENTER. The next line is highlighted.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1345
Next step
Step Description
1. Meas to start the point measurement.
2. Stop to end the point measurement.
3. Store to store the point information including the annotations.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1346
44.3 Timed Measurements
Description Surveying regulations in some countries require that several instruments in a session start
the point measurement simultaneously at a predefined time. Timed measurements are
possible for all types of GPS operations, except for real-time base operations.
Requirements •Automatically start measuring point on entering survey: Timed is configured in Quality
Control, Advanced page. Refer to "11.4 Quality control".
•Time at point is configured for one of the lines in one of the survey screen pages. Refer
to "19.3 My Survey Screen".
Access For RTK rover:
Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey.
Survey,
Survey page
Refer to "44.1 Surveying Points" for a
description of keys.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1347
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Start time Editable field The current local time with the seconds rounded to
00, for example for the current local time 07:37:12 it
is 07:38:00.
Type in the start time in hours, minutes and seconds
for when the point measurement will begin.
Press Meas. The point measurement does not start
yet. The name of the field changes to Time to go.
Time to go Display only The countdown time in hours, minutes and seconds
before the point measurement starts automatically.
The point measurement starts when it is 00:00:00.
Then, data is logged as configured in the working
style. Any measurement counter defined to be used
in survey screen page is displayed and starts incre-
menting. The name of the field changes to Time at
point.
Time at point Display only The time in hours, minutes and seconds from when
the point is measured until point measurement is
stopped.
Press Stop and Store when enough data is collected.
The name of the field changes to Start time.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1348
44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations
44.4.1 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations
Requirements • The active working style is a real-time rover configuration.
Access For RTK rover:
•Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Press Init...
• Access is possible from other screens where individual point measurements are
needed, for example from Inverse Pt - Pt with Survy...
Re-initialise the RTK Initialisation method Description Refer to
chapter
Initialise while moving The rover antenna can be moved during the inilialisa-
tion process.
"44.4.2
Initialise
while
Moving"
Initialise while static )The antenna setup must be static on a pillar, a
tripod or on a pole with a quickstand.
"44.4.3
Initialise
while
Static"
Initialise on a known
point )The antenna setup must be static on a pillar, a
tripod or on a pole with a quickstand.
)The coordinates of the point must be stored
in, or able to be converted to, the WGS 1984.
They must be stored in the working job either
by manual entry or by measuring.
"44.4.4
Initialise on
Known
Point"
Viva Series, Survey - General 1349
44.4.2 Initialise while Moving
Initialise while moving
step-by-step Step Description
1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution?
• If yes, continue with step 3.
• If no, continue with the next row.
)The initialisation starts automatically.
2. Continue with the row after step 3.
3. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded.
)Meas is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained.
4. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved.
5. Continue with the surveying operation.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1350
44.4.3 Initialise while Static
Initialise while static
step-by-step Step Description
1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution?
• If yes, continue with step 3.
• If no, continue with the next row.
)The initialisation starts automatically.
2. Continue with step 6.
3. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded.
)Stop is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained.
)The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved.
4. Any configurations for Automatically stop point measurement in Quality Control,
General page are ignored. Stop when enough data is collected.
5. When Automatically stop point measurement is not checked in Quality Control,
General page, Store to store the point information.
6. Continue with the surveying operation.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1351
44.4.4 Initialise on Known Point
Initialise on known
point step-by-step Step Description
1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution?
• If yes, continue with step 3.
• If no, continue with step 4.
2. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded.
3. In Data:, Points page, highlight the known point for the initialisation.
4. OK starts the initialisation.
)Survey screen
Point ID: The ID of the selected known point is displayed.
Antenna height: The default antenna height as defined in the active working style
is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default
antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna
height is used until the application is exited.
Enter the correct antenna height.
)If desired, add a code.
)If desired, add an annotation.
)Stop is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained.
)The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved.
5. Any configurations for Automatically stop point measurement in Quality Control,
General page are ignored. Stop when enough data is collected.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1352
6. When Automatically stop point measurement is not checked in Quality Control,
General page, Store to store the point information.
)An average is automatically calculated with the known coordinates.
7. Continue with the surveying operation.
Step Description
Viva Series, Survey - General 1353
45 Survey - General
Description The Survey application is used for point measurement. Angles and distances for points can
be measured and the calculated coordinates stored using Meas, Dist and Store.
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey.
Survey,
Survey page
The fields shown are from a typical working style. The screen described consists of four
pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the Survey page, the Offset
page, and the Code page. Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information
on the keys on the Map page.
The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applica-
tions where individual point measurements are needed.
Meas
To measure and store distances and angles.
Stop
Available if Measure mode: Continuous and
Dist was pressed. Stops the distance meas-
urements. The key changes back to Meas.
Dist
To measure and display distances.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1354
Store
To record data.
If Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log
auto points is checked, records measured
point and continues tracking.
RmtHt.
To access Survey Remote Point. Available if
Measure remote pts is checked in Configu-
ration, Remote pt page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure SmartCodes, auto points and
remote point measurements. When Fn Avg
or Fn Abs are active, this key is not avail-
able. Refer to "20.5 SmartCodes", "46
Survey - Auto Points" and to "50 Survey -
Remote Point" for information on the fields
and keys.
Fn Avg
To check the residuals for the averaged
point. Available for Mode: Average in Job
Properties:, Averaging page and for more
than one measured coordinate triplet
recorded for the same point. Refer to "5.3.3
Mean Page".
Viva Series, Survey - General 1355
Fn Abs
To check the absolute difference between
the measurements. Available for Mode:
Average in Job Properties:, Absolute differ-
ences and for more than one measured
coordinate triplet recorded for the same
point. Refer to "5.3.3 Mean Page".
Fn 2 Face
Available for Measure mode: Single and
Measure mode: Single (fast). To take a
measurement in Face I and Face II. The point
stored is an average of the two measure-
ments. When using instruments fitted with
auto aiming, the point is automatically
measured in both faces. The resulting point
is stored and the instrument is returned to
the first face.
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates"User
Work settings ID templates.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Survey - General 1356
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for measured points. The configured
point ID template is used. The ID can be changed:
• To start a new sequence of point IDs overtype the
point ID.
• For an individual number independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested when
accessing the Survey application. An individual target
height can be typed in.
Hz Display only The current horizontal angle.
VDisplay only The current vertical angle.
Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance after Dist was pressed. No
distance is displayed when accessing the screen and
after Store or Meas.
Height difference Display only The height difference between station and measured
point after Dist. Displays ----- when accessing the
screen and after Store or Meas.
Easting Display only Easting coordinate of the measured point.
Northing Display only Northing coordinate of the measured point.
Elevation Display only Elevation of the measured point.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1357
46 Survey - Auto Points
46.1 Overview
Description Auto points are used to automatically log points at a specified rate. Additionally, individual
auto points can be stored outside the defined rate.
Auto points can be collected in the Survey application. An Auto page is visible when logging
of auto points is active.
Auto points are used in moving applications to document a track which was walked or driven
along. Auto points that are logged between starting and stopping logging of auto points
form one chain. A new chain is formed each time logging of auto points is started.
Up to two offset points related to one auto point can be logged. The offset points can be
both to the left or right and they can be coded independently of each other and of the auto
points.
)Logging of auto points is possible for TPS and in the GPS rover menu.
Coding of auto points Coding of auto points is similar to coding manually occupied points. Refer to "20 Coding" for
information on coding.
The differences are:
• Thematical coding: Available for Store points:To DBX (pts&codes) in Config-
uration, Log auto points page.
Always available.
• Free coding: Always available.
• Quick coding: Not available.
• Codes of auto points overwrite the codes of points with the same point ID but a different
code, existing in the working job.
• Codes of auto points can be changed when no auto points are being logged.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1358
Properties of auto
points
The properties stored with auto points are:
• Class: Either Meas or, for also Nav
• Sub class:
•Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed.
•TPS
•Source: Survey (Auto) or Srvy Auto Offset
• Instrument source: GPS or TPS
Averaging of auto
points
An average is never calculated for auto points even if a manually occupied point of class
Meas already exists with the same point ID.
• Up to three attributes can be stored with a code.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1359
46.2 Configuring Auto Points
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Log auto points page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Config..
To configure what is viewed in the Auto
page in the Survey application. Available for
Log auto points checked.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Log auto points Check box Activates the logging of auto points.
)All other fields on the screen are active and
can be edited.
Store points by Time Auto points are logged according to a time interval.
The time interval is independent from the update
interval for the position on the screen.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1360
Distance The difference in distance from the last stored auto
point, which must be reached before the next auto
point is logged. The auto point is logged with the
next available computed position.
Height difference The height difference from the last stored auto
point, which must be reached before the next auto
point is logged. The auto point is logged with the
next available computed position.
Distance or height Before the next auto point is logged, either the
difference in distance or the difference in height
must be reached. The auto point is logged with the
next available computed position.
Stop & Go An auto point is stored when the position of the
antenna/prism does not move more than the
distance configured in Minimum distance between
points within the Stop time.
Once a point has been stored, the position must
change more than the distance configured in
Minimum distance between points before the
routine starts again.
User decides An auto point is stored upon pressing Meas ()/
Store ( ) in Survey, Auto page. In the begin-
ning, the chain to which the auto points will be
assigned must be started with Start. In the end, the
chain must be closed with Stop.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1361
Log every Available unless Store points by:Distance or height.
Editable field For Store points by:Distance and Store points
by:Height difference. The difference in distance or
height before the next auto point is logged.
From 0.05s to 60.0s For Store points by:Time. The time interval before
the next auto point is logged.
Max distance Editable field Available for Store points by: Distance or height. The
value for the difference in distance before the next
auto point is logged.
Max height Editable field Available for Store points by:Distance or height. The
value for the height difference before the next auto
point is logged.
Minimum
distance
between points
Editable field Available for Store points by:Stop & Go. The
distance within which the position is considered
stationary.
Stop time Editable field Available for Store points by:Stop & Go. The time
while the position must be stationary until an auto
point is stored.
Store
points )Changing this setting while auto points are
being logged stops the logging. It must then be
restarted.
To MDB (pts only) Logs auto point to a job file. Point logging at up to
20 Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is not
possible. Points cannot be displayed in MapView or
output via format files.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1362
To DBX
(pts&codes) Logs auto points to the DBX. Point logging at up to
1 Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is possible.
Points can be displayed in MapView or output via
format files.
Logging
starts
Automatically Logging of auto points starts immediately when the
Configuration screen is accessed.
Controlled Logging of auto points starts upon pressing Start on
the Auto page in Survey.
Don't store
auto log point if
CQ exceeds
limit
Check box If checked, monitoring of the coordinate quality is
activated. Auto points are stored when the coordi-
nate quality is within the defined limit. For example,
only phase fixed solutions can be logged by defining
a CQ limit.
3D CQ
limit
Editable field Available if Don't store auto log point if CQ exceeds
limit is checked.
Limit for the coordinate quality above which an auto
point is no longer automatically stored. When the CQ
of the auto point falls again below the defined value
then the storing of auto points begins again.
Beep when
auto logged
point is
stored
Logging Instrument beeps when storing an auto point.
Never Instrument never beeps.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1363
Next step
Configure Page
Description of fields
IF the survey screen mask THEN
is not to be configured OK closes the screen and returns to the previous
screen.
is to be configured Config...
OK
To accept changes and to return to previous
screen.
Clear
To set all fields to Line space full.
Default
To recall the default settings.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Name Editable field The name of the page is shown as page name in
Survey.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1364
Show in the
Survey applica-
tion
Check box Shows or hides the page as a page in Survey.
1st line Display only Fixed to Point ID.
2nd line to 16th
line For each line, one of the following options can be
selected.
Angle right Displays the horizontal angle difference between the
backsight point and the current telescope position.
% completed Display only field for the percentage of the time for
which the point has been occupied based on the
setting for Stop criteria in screen Quality Control.
Appears in the page during the point occupation if
Quality Control is checked.
Annotation 1 to
Annotation 4 Editable field for comments to be stored with the
point.
Antenna
height
Input field for antenna height for static observations.
Attrib (free) 01 to
Attrib (free) 20 Display only field for attributes for free codes.
Attrib 01 to Attrib
20 Editable field for attributes for codes.
Automation Unavailable for SmartStation. Select automation
type.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1365
Avg max
#distances
Input field for maximum number of distance meas-
urements in the averaging EDM mode.
Azimuth Display only field for the azimuth.
Backsight pt
ID
Display only field for the point ID of the backsight
point.
Code Editable field for codes.
Code (free) Editable field for free codes.
Code desc (free) Display only field for the description of free codes.
Description Display only field for the description of codes.
Easting Display only field for Easting coordinate of measured
point.
GDOP Display only field for the current GDOP of the
computed position.
HDOP Display only field for the current HDOP of the
computed position.
Elevation Display only field for the height coordinate of the
measured point.
Height
difference
Display only field for the height difference between
station and reflector.
Horiz
distance
Display only field for horizontal distance.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1366
Humidity Editable field for relative humidity to be stored with
point.
Hz angle Display only field for the horizontal angle.
Instrument
height
Display only field for the instrument height.
Line space full Insert full line space.
Line space half Insert half line space.
Linework Selectable list with option for flagging a line/area.
Measure
mode
Select EDM measurement mode.
Measure Select EDM type.
Moving antenna
ht
Input field for antenna height for moving observa-
tions.
Msd PP obs Display only field for the number of static observa-
tions recorded over the period of point occupation.
Appears in the page when recording of static obser-
vations is configured.
Northing Display only field for Northing coordinate of meas-
ured point.
Number of
dists
Display only field for number of averaged distances
measured with EDM mode averaging.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1367
Offset
left/right
Input field for horizontal distance offset for meas-
ured point, perpendicular to the line of sight.
Offset height Input field for height offset for measured point.
Offset in/out Input field for horizontal distance offset, in the direc-
tion of line of sight.
Offset mode Select offset mode.
PDOP Display only field for the current PDOP of the
computed position.
PPM atmos Display only field for atmospheric ppm.
PPM
geometric
Display only field for geometric ppm value.
PPM total Display only field for the total ppm value.
Point ID Editable field for the point ID.
Pressure Editable field for atmospheric pressure.
Prism
constant
Display only field for additive constant of currently
selected reflector.
Quality 1D Display only field for the current height coordinate
quality of computed position.
Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate
quality of computed position.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1368
Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate
quality of computed position.
RTK
positions
Display only field for the number of positions
recorded over the period of point occupation.
Appears in the page of real-time rover configura-
tions.
SD (last
recorded)
Display only field for the last recorded distance.
Slope
distance
Display only field for measured slope distance.
Station ID Display only field for current station ID.
Station
easting
Display only field for current station Easting coordi-
nates.
Station height Display only field for current station height coordi-
nates.
Station
northing
Display only field for current station Northing coordi-
nates.
Std deviation Display only field of standard deviation in millimetres
of averaged distances.
Target Select a prism.
Target height Input field for prism height.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1369
Temp dry Editable field for dry temperature to be stored with
point.
Temp wet Editable field for wet temperature to be stored with
point.
Time at point Display only field for the time from when the point is
occupied until point occupation is stopped. Appears
in the page during the point occupation.
Type Display only field for the type of code, for example
point code, line code or area code.
V angle Display only field for vertical angle.
V angle
display
Select vertical angle display.
VDOP Display only field for the current VDOP of the
computed position.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1370
46.3 Measuring Auto Points
Requirements •Log auto points in Configuration, Log auto points page.
• The rover menu must be used.
Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Go to the Auto page.
Survey,
Auto page
Before logging of auto points has started, the page appears as shown:
Start
For Logging starts:Automatically in
Configuration, Log auto points page,
logging of auto points starts immediately
when the survey screen is accessed and
Start need not be pressed.
To start logging of auto points and offset
points if configured or, for Store points
by:User decides, to start the chain to which
the auto points will be assigned. The first
auto point is stored.
Measure mode:Continuous
becomes active. For Measure:Prism instru-
ment locks onto prism. For Measure mode-
Long range (>4km), Measure:Prism is set
and instrument locks onto the prism.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1371
Stop
To end recording of auto points and offset
points if configured or, for Store points
by:User decides, to end the chain to which
the auto points are assigned.
Meas
Available for Stop. To store an auto point at
any time.
Store
Available for Stop. To store an auto point at
any time.
Offst1..
To configure recording of the first type of
offset points. Refer to "46.4.2 Configuring
Offset Points".
Available for Store points:To DBX
(pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto
points page.
Offst2..
To configure recording of a second type of
offset points. Refer to "46.4.2 Configuring
Offset Points".
Available for Store points:To DBX
(pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto
points page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1372
Description of fields
Fn Config..
To configure auto points. Refer to "46.2
Configuring Auto Points".
Quit
To exit the Survey application. Point infor-
mation logged until pressing Fn Quit is saved
in the database.
Field Option Description
Auto point ID Editable field Available unless GPS auto points:Time & date/TPS auto
points:Time & date in ID Templates. The identifier for
auto points. The configured ID template for auto points is
used. The ID can be changed. To start a new sequence of
point IDs, type over the point ID.
Time & date Available for GPS auto points:Time & date/TPS auto
points:Time & date in ID Templates. The current local
time and date is used as identifier for auto points.
Moving
antenna
ht
Editable field The default antenna height for auto points as defined in
the active working style is suggested.
Target
height
Editable field The default reflector height as defined in the active
configuration set is suggested.
Code (auto) The thematical code for the auto point.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1373
• If a point code is selected then any open line/area is
closed. The occupied point is stored with the selected
code independently of any line/area.
• If a line code is selected then any open line is closed
and a new line with the selected code is created. The
line ID is defined by the configured line ID template.
The occupied point is assigned to that line. The line
stays open until it is closed manually or another line
code is selected.
• If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for
lines.
Selectable list Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. The
attributes are shown as display only, editable field or
selectable list fields depending on their definition.
Editable field Available if Use a list box to view codes is not checked.
Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A
check is performed to see if a code of this name already
exists in the job. If so, the according attributes are shown.
Configure a survey screen mask with a selectable list for
code types to define if a point, line or area code is typed
in.
Description Display only The description of the code.
Msd auto
points Display only Available after pressing Start. The number of auto points
logged since Start has been pressed.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1374
Next step
3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed posi-
tion.
Slope distance Display only The measured slope distance.
When Start is pressed, Measure mode:Continuous is set
and the slope distance is constantly updated.
Hz Display only The current horizontal angle.
VDisplay only The current vertical angle.
IF THEN
auto points are to be
logged
Start. Then, for Store points by:User decides, Meas whenever an
auto point is to be logged.
offset points are to
be configured
Offst1.. or Offst2... Refer to "46.4 Offset Points of Auto Points".
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1375
46.4 Offset Points of Auto Points
46.4.1 Overview
Description Offset points
• can be created with auto points when auto points are stored to the DBX.
• can be to the left or to the right of auto points.
• are automatically computed with the logging of auto points, if configured.
• form a chain relative to the chain of auto points to which they are related. Subsequent
computed chains are independent from each other.
• can be coded independently of auto points.
• have the same time of when they were stored as the auto points to which they are
related.
• have the same coding functionality, properties and averaging functionality as auto
points.
Up to two offset points can be related to one auto point.
The screens for the configuration of offset points are identical except for the title Auto
Points - Offset 1 and Auto Points - Offset 2. For simplicity, the title Auto Points - Offset 1 is
used in the following description.
Computation of offset
points
The computation of offset points depends on the number of auto points in one chain.
One auto point
No offset points are computed or stored.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1376
Two auto points
The configured offsets are applied perpendicular to the line between two auto points.
P0 First auto point
P1 Second auto point
P2 First offset point for P0
P3 Second offset point for P0
P4 First offset point for P1
P5 Second offset point for P1
d1 Horizontal offset to the left
d2 Horizontal offset to the right
P1 First auto point
P2 Second auto point
P4 First offset point for P1
P3 Second offset point for P1
P5 First offset point for P2
P6 Second offset point for P2
d1 Horizontal offset to the left
d2 Horizontal offset to the right
GS_061
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
d2
d1
TS_044
P1
P2
P3
P4
d2
d1
P5
P6
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1377
Three or more auto points
The first offset points are computed perpendicular to the line between the first and the
second auto point.
The last offset point is computed perpendicular to the line between the last auto point and
the one before.
All other offset points are computed on a bearing. The bearing is half of the angle between
the last and the next measured auto point.
P0 First auto point
P1 Second auto point
P2 First offset point for P0
P3 Second offset point for P0
P4 Third auto point
P5 First offset point for P1
P6 Second offset point for P1
P7 Fourth auto point
P8 First offset point for P4
P9 Second offset point for P4
d1 Horizontal offset to the left
d2 Horizontal offset to the right
α1 Angle between P0 and P4
α2 Angle between P1 and P7
GS_062
P0
P1
P4
P7
P6
P9
P8
P5
P2
P3
d2
d1
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1378
P1 First auto point
P2 Second auto point
P3 First offset point for P1
P4 Second offset point for P1
P5 Third auto point
P6 First offset point for P2
P7 Second offset point for P2
P8 Fourth auto point
P9 First offset point for P5
P10 Second offset point for P5
d1 Horizontal offset to the left
d2 Horizontal offset to the right
α1 Angle between P1 and P5
α2 Angle between P2 and P8
TS_045
P1
P2
P5
P7
P10
P8
P9
P6
P3
P4
d2
d1
1
2
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1379
46.4.2 Configuring Offset Points
Requirements Available for Store points: To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points
page.
Access Press Offst1.. or Offst2.. in Survey, Auto page.
Auto Points - Offset 1,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Offst2.. and Offst1..
To switch between configuring offset point
type one and two.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Store offset 1
points and
Store offset 2
points
Check box Activates logging of offset points.
)All other fields on the screen are active and
can be edited with this setting.
Horiz distance Editable field The horizontal offset between -1000 m and 1000 m
at which the offset point is collected.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1380
Next step
Page changes to the Code page.
Height offset Editable field The height offset between -100 m and 100 m from
the related auto point.
Identifier Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in
front of or at the end of the ID of the auto point. This
ID is then used as the point ID for the related offset
point. This functionality could support an automatic
workflow into CAD packages including setting
symbols and stringing lines.
Prefix/suffix Prefix Adds the setting for Identifier in front of the auto
point ID.
Suffix Adds the setting for Identifier at the end of the auto
point ID.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1381
Auto Points - Offset 1,
Code page
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
+Attrib
To create additional attributes for the
selected code. Available if Use a list box to
view codes is checked.
Name or Value
To highlight the attribute field or the field
for the attribute value. The name of the
attribute can be edited and an attribute
value can be typed in. Available if Use a list
box to view codes is checked. Available for
attributes for which an attribute name can
be typed in.
Last
To recall the last used attribute values for
the selected code. Available if Use a list box
to view codes is checked.
Default
To recall the default attribute values for the
selected code. Available if Use a list box to
view codes is checked.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1382
Description of fields
Next step
Field Option Description
Point code Selectable list The thematical code for the offset point.
Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked.
The attributes are shown as display only, editable
field or selectable list fields depending on their defi-
nition.
Code Editable field The thematical code for the offset point.
Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked.
Codes can be typed in but not selected from a
codelist. A check is performed to see if a point code
of this name already exists in the job. If so, the
according attributes are shown.
Description Display only Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked.
The description of the code.
Attributes Editable field Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked.
Up to three attribute values can be stored.
IF THEN
offset point configu-
ration is finished
OK to return to the survey screen.
a second offset point
is to be configured
Page and then Offst2.. or Offst1.. to change to configuration screen
for the second point.
Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 1383
Example for offset
point IDs
The offset point ID is a combination of the auto point ID and an identifier as a prefix or
suffix.
The right most part of the auto point ID is incremented within the point ID. If the length of
the auto point ID plus identifier is greater than 16 characters, then the auto point ID is trun-
cated from the left.
)Refer to "19.1 ID templates" for more information on point IDs.
Auto point ID Identifier Prefix/Suffix Offset point ID
Auto1234
Auto1235
OS1 Prefix OS1Auto1234
OS1Auto1235
…
Auto1234
Auto1235
OS1 Suffix Auto1234OS1
Auto1235OS1
…
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1384
47 Survey Cross Section
47.1 Overview
Description The Survey Cross Section application allows for the automatic changing of codes during a
survey. This function is useful when surveying multiple cross sections. Examples could
include surveys of railway lines, roads, small waterways, driveways and paths.
The codes for the elements in the cross section to be surveyed are all stored and pre-
defined in a template. The codes are then automatically changed after each point observa-
tion.
Diagram
Template Templates are used to pre-define the order of the codes for the survey.
A template pre-defines
• the coding sequence of a cross section.
• the type of coding.
a) Cross section element
GS_075
a
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1385
Cross section methods
and directions
Templates can be applied
• to the ZigZag method or the Same Direction method.
• in either a forward direction or in a backward direction.
)Survey Cross Section is possible for RTK base and TPS.
Coding of cross section
elements
Codes can be attached to cross section elements. Refer to "20 Coding" for information on
coding.
ZigZag Same Direction
GS_076 GS_077
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1386
• Thematical coding: Available
• Free coding: Available
• Quick coding: Not available
Properties of cross
section points
The properties stored with cross section points are:
• Class: Either Meas or for also Nav depending on the position status when the
point was measured.
• Sub class:
•Code only, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Code Only or GNSS Fixed.
•TPS
•Source: Cross Section
• Instrument source: GPS or TPS
Averaging of cross
section elements
The principles for averaging are identical to the principles use in the Survey application. Refer
to "5.3.3 Mean Page" for information on averaging.
Exporting data The points and lines are recorded as for all other applications. The data can be exported as
normal.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1387
47.2 Accessing Survey Cross Section
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Survey cross section.
Description Cross section templates
• pre-define the sequence of codes for a cross section.
• consist of elements.
Elements can be defined such that the surveyed points of a cross section are
• stored with a point code.
• stored with a free code.
During the process of surveying a cross section, the code for the next element to be meas-
ured is then selected and suggested automatically.
Templates All cross section templates stored in the working job are listed in alphabetical order,
including the number of elements in each cross section template.
OK
To select the highlighted cross section
template and to start surveying a cross
section.
New..
To create a cross section template.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted cross section
template.
Delete
To delete the highlighted cross section
template.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1388
Copy..
To create a cross section template based on
the one currently highlighted.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1389
47.3 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template
Access In Templates, press New.., Copy.. or Edit...
New Template/Edit
Template/Copy
Template,
General page
Type in a name for the new cross section template.
Next step
Page changes to the Elements page.
New Template/Edit
Template/Copy
Template,
Elements page
Store
To store the cross section template and to
return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Add
To add one or more elements to the end of
the current list.
Edit..
To edit the highlighted element.
Delete
To delete the highlighted element from the
list.
Insert
To insert one element before the currently
highlighted element of the list.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1390
Description of columns
Next step
Add, Edit.. or Insert accesses Add Element/Edit Element/Insert Element.
Add Element/Edit
Element/Insert Element The functionality of the screens adding, editing and inserting an element are similar. Differ-
ences are outlined.
Field Description
No. The number of the element.
Code The code assigned to the element.
If no code is assigned to the element, ----- is displayed.
Code type The type of the code assigned to the element.
OK
To add the element at the end of the cross
section template or to store the changes. To
return to the screen from where this screen
was accessed.
Next
In Add Element: To add the element to the
end of the Elements list and stay in the Add
Element screen to add further elements.
In Edit Element: To update the element in
the Elements list and stay in the Edit
Element screen to edit details of the next
element in the list.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1391
Description of fields
Prev
Available in Edit Element. To update the
element in the Elements list and stay in the
Edit Element screen to edit details of the
previous element in the list.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Element
number Display only For Add Element and Insert Element: The number of
the element to be added.
For Edit Element: Displayed as x/y.
x Number of the element to be edited.
y Total number of elements on the active template.
Code type The type of code to be used with the element.
Free codes To store a code independent of the element as time-
related information.
Thematic codes To store a code together with the element.
Store free code After pt is stored or
Before pt is stored Determines if a free code is stored before or after
the point. Available for Code type:Free codes.
Code (free) Selectable list The code which will be stored before or after the
point/line. Available for Code type:Free codes.
Code Selectable list The code which will be stored with the next
point/line. Available for Code type:Thematic codes.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1392
Next step
OK adds the element or stores the changes.
Description Display only A line for a detailed description of the code.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1393
47.4 Surveying Cross Sections
Description The fields on this screen indicate which cross section element is to be surveyed next.
Access Press OK in Templates.
Survey,
General page
The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a
user-defined survey screen page is used.
Meas
Available if a template has been opened with
Start.
To start measuring the next point of
the cross section. The key changes to Stop.
To measure a distance and store
distance and angles.
Stop
To end measuring the point. The key
changes to Store.
Store
To store the measured point. The key
changes to Meas.
To store angles and distance.
Distance must be measured before.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1394
Start and End
To open and close the selected cross section
template. While the template is open, the
elements of the cross section can be
surveyed.
Survy..
To manually measure a point that is not part
of the cross section. The point is not treated
as an element of the cross section. The open
template remains open.
Available if a template has been opened with
Start.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Cross Section Survey appli-
cation. Refer to "47.5 Configuring Survey
Cross Section".
Fn Prev
To select the previous element of the cross
section template. The currently measured
element will not be stored.
Available when End is displayed.
Fn Next
To select the next element of the cross
section template. The currently measured
element will not be stored.
Available when End is displayed.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1395
Description of fields
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The
configured point ID template is used. The ID can be
changed in the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of point IDs type over
the point ID.
• For an individual point ID independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Antenna ht Editable field The default antenna height. Changing the
antenna height here does not update the default
antenna height as defined in the active working style.
The changed antenna height is used until the applica-
tion is exited.
Target height Editable field The default prism height.
Template The active template for the cross section.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1396
Selectable list The cross section template is closed.
Opening the selectable list accesses Templates
where a new template can be created and an existing
template can be selected or deleted. Refer to "47.3
Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template".
Display only The cross section template is open.
Element Display only Displayed as x/y.
x The number of the next element on active
template. The number increases/decreases as
moving across the cross section depending on the
selection for Method in Configuration.
y Total number of elements on active template.
Code Display only The name of the code.
Point codes will be stored with the measured point.
Free codes will be stored, depending on the configu-
ration, before or after the measured point.
Distance to last Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to
the last surveyed element position in the previous
cross section. ----- is displayed for unavailable infor-
mation.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1397
Next step
IF THEN
a cross section template is to be
opened
select the desired template and press Start.
an element of a cross section is
to be surveyed Meas, Stop and then Store.
Meas, or Dist and then Store.
)Once the end of a cross section is surveyed then
the next cross section will be measured.
Depending on the Method selected in Configura-
tion, General page, the measurement is either in
the same direction or in the reverse direction.
a cross section template is to be
closed
select the desired template and press End.
data is to be viewed graphically Page. An element of a cross section template can also be
surveyed from the Map page.
Refer to "28 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for
information on the functionality and softkeys available.
the application is to be exited Fn Quit.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1398
47.5 Configuring Survey Cross Section
Access In the survey screen of the cross section application, press Config...
Configuration,
General page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Config..
To edit the survey screen page currently
being displayed. Available when a list item in
Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "19.3
My Survey Screen"
Fn About
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Method Method by which subsequent cross sections will be
surveyed. Refer to "47.1 Overview" for a diagram.
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1399
Zig-zag Each new cross section is started at the same end as
where the previous cross section finished.
Same direction Each new cross section is started at the same end as
where the previous cross section started.
Direction The way of surveying the cross section. This influ-
ences in which order the elements of a template will
be applied. Refer to "47.1 Overview" for a diagram.
Forward The cross sections will be surveyed in the same way
as the elements are defined in the selected template.
Backward The cross sections will be surveyed in the reverse way
as the elements are defined in the selected template.
Show distance
to last msd
section
Check box Activates a display only field in the survey screen. The
horizontal distance from the current position to the
last surveyed element position in the previous cross
section will be displayed.
Show code
attribute Checkbox When this box is checked, some attribute fields are
displayed in the survey screen. Useful if the surveyor
is stringing, to see that the correct string attribute
value is being used.
Attribute to
show From 1 to 20 The number of attribute fields which is displayed in
the survey screen. Available when Show code
attribute is checked.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 1400
Next step
OK returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed.
Show addi-
tional page
from My Survey
Screen
Check box When this box is checked, a user-defined survey
screen page is shown in the survey screen.
Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages.
Available when Show additional page from My
Survey Screen is checked.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1401
48 Survey - Hidden Points
48.1 Overview
Description Hidden points are points which cannot be measured directly by GPS, because, either they
cannot be physically reached, or because satellites are obstructed, for example by trees or
tall buildings.
• A hidden point can be calculated by measuring distances and/or azimuths to the hidden
point using a hidden point measurement device. Or for distances a tape can be used.
• Additional auxiliary points can be manually measured.
• Bearings can be computed from previously measured points.
In contrast to the COGO application, hidden point measurements is more of a measuring
application than a calculation application.
Example
Application: Completing a survey of telegraph poles for a telecom-
munication company.
Aim: The telegraph poles must be surveyed to 0.3 m accu-
racy in plan but height is not of concern.
Use of hidden point measurements: For poles surrounded by heavy undergrowth, where it
is not possible to measure the pole directly without
taking time to cut a path through the undergrowth.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1402
)Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in hidden point measure-
ments does not result in the hidden point being recomputed.
Hidden point measure-
ment methods
A hidden point can be measured by
)A hidden point measurement device can be attached to the instrument such that the meas-
urements are automatically transferred to the instrument.
Heights If configured, heights are taken into account. Refer to "48.7 Hidden Point Measurement
Including Heights" for information on configuring height offsets.
Device height and Target height configured in Hidden Point Device Offsets are applied
when the hidden points are computed. Δ height in Hidden Point Connection is the value
directly from the hidden point measuring device.
Coding of hidden
points
Properties of hidden
points
The properties stored with hidden points are:
• Class: Meas
• Sub class: Hidden Point
• Bearing and distance • Chainage and offset
• Two bearings • Backwards bearing and distance
• Two distances
• Thematical coding: Available in Hidden Point Result after the calculation of a hidden
point. Thematical coding of hidden points is identical to coding
of manually measured points.
• Free coding: Can be started while in Hidden Point Connection. Free coding of
hidden points is identical to coding of manually measured points.
• Quick coding: Not available.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1403
•Source: Bearing-Distance, 2 bearings, 2 distances, Chainage % offset or Backward brg-
dst depending on the hidden point measurement method used
• Instrument source: GPS
Averaging of hidden
points
An average is calculated for hidden points if a point of class Meas already exists with the
same point ID.
)Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also
Bearing.
Auxiliary points Auxiliary points are used to compute azimuths required for the calculation of hidden point
coordinates. Auxiliary points can be points existing in the job or they can be manually meas-
ured. The point ID template configured for Auxiliary points in ID Templates is applied.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1404
48.2 Hidden Point Methods
48.2.1 Bearing & Distance
Description One point must be known. It
• can already exist in the job.
• can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements.
• can be manually typed in.
The distance and the bearing from the known point to the hidden point are to be deter-
mined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. The auxiliary
point can be determined in the direction from the known point to the hidden point.
Diagram
Known
P0 Known point
To be measured
d Distance from P0 to P2
αBearing from P0 to P2
P1 Auxiliary point, optional
Unknown
P2 Hidden point
GS_063 P0
P1
P2
d
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1405
48.2.2 Using 2 Bearings
Description Two points must be known. They
• can already exist in the job.
• can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements.
• can be manually typed in.
The bearings from the known points to the hidden point are to be determined. Auxiliary
points help compute the bearings which might not be known. Auxiliary points can be meas-
ured in the direction from the known points to the hidden point.
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point
P3 Second known point
To be measured
α1Bearing from P0 to P2
α2Bearing from P3 to P2
P1 First auxiliary point, optional
P4 Second auxiliary point, optional
Unknown
P2 Hidden point
GS_064
P0
P1
P4
P3
P2
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1406
48.2.3 Using 2 Distances
Description Two points must be known. They
• can already exist in the job.
• can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements.
• can be manually typed in.
The distances from the known points to the hidden points are to be determined. The loca-
tion of the hidden point relative to the line between the two known points is to be defined.
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point
P2 Second known point
d3 Line from P0 to P2
a Right of d3
b Left of d3
To be measured
d1 Distance from P0 to P1
d2 Distance from P2 to P1
Unknown
P1 Hidden point
GS_065
P2
P1
d3
d2
d1
P0
b
a
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1407
48.2.4 Chainage & Offset
Description Two points must be known. They
• can already exist in the job.
• can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements.
• can be manually typed in.
The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points must be
determined. The offset of the hidden point to the line between the two known points must
be determined.
Diagram
Known
P0 First known point
P1 Second known point
To be measured
d1 Chainage
d2 Offset
Unknown
P2 Hidden point
GS_067 P0
P1
d1
d2 P2
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1408
48.2.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance
Description In order to compute the hidden point, the measurements are taken from the hidden point.
One point must be known. It
• can already exist in the job.
• can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements.
• can be manually typed in.
The distance and the bearing from the hidden point to the known point are to be deter-
mined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. An auxiliary
point can be measured in the direction from the hidden point to the known point.
Diagram
Known
P0 Known point
To be measured
αBearing from P2 to P0
d Distance from P2 to P0
P1 Auxiliary point, optional
Unknown
P2 Hidden point
GS_068 P0
P1
P2
d
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1409
48.3 Hidden Point Measurements
)Hidden point measurements are possible from the Survey application and when the Survey
application screen is called from another application, for example from Stakeout.
Access Press HdnPt.. in the survey screen.
Hidden Point Connection The setting for Method on this screen determines the availability of the subsequent fields
and softkeys.
Calc
To calculate the hidden point and to display
the results.
EAO
Available for Angle offset:New for each
point or Angle offset:Permanent in Hidden
Point Device Offsets. To change or enter an
External Angle Offset.
Hts..
To type in the device and target heights to
be considered.
Sun
Available when Azimuth is highlighted. The
azimuth from the direction of the sun to the
known point is computed.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1410
Azmth
Available when Azimuth is highlighted. To
select or manually measure an auxiliary point
and to compute the azimuth.
Posn ?
To determine chainage and offset of the
current position relative to the line between
the two known points. The values are
displayed in Chainage and Offset. The point
from where the chainage has been meas-
ured is selected in Chainage from.
Slope
Available when Horiz distance or Chainage
is highlighted. To measure a slope distance
and an elevation angle or percentage grade.
The values are used to compute the hori-
zontal distance.
Survy..
Available when a point field is highlighted.
To measure the known point manually for
the calculation of the hidden point.
Fn Config..
To configure hidden point measurements.
Refer to "14 Instrument connections - All
other connections".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1411
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Method Selectable list The method for measuring hidden points. Refer to
"48.2 Hidden Point Methods" for a description of the
methods.
Point Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the
known point for the calculation of the hidden point.
)To type in coordinates manually for the known
point open the selectable list and create a new
point.
Point A Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the
first known point for the calculation of the hidden
point.
)To type in coordinates manually for the known
point open the selectable list and create a new
point.
Point B Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the
second known point for the calculation of the hidden
point.
)To type in coordinates manually for the known
point open the selectable list and create a new
point.
Azimuth Editable field The azimuth from the known point to the hidden
point. Type in an azimuth. When a hidden point
measurement device is attached to the instrument to
measure the azimuth, the value is automatically
transferred.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1412
Next step
Calc calculates the hidden point and displays the results in Hidden Point Result.
Horiz distance Editable field The horizontal distance from the known point to the
hidden point. Type in a distance. When a hidden
point measurement device is attached to the instru-
ment to measure the distance, the value is automat-
ically transferred.
Location Selectable list Available for Method:Using 2 distances. The loca-
tion of the hidden point relative to the line from
Point A to Point B.
Chainage from Selectable list Available for Method:Chainage % offset. The
chainage from one known point along the line
between the two known points. Looking from the
point selected in Chainage from, a positive chainage
is towards the second known point. A negative
chainage is into the opposite direction of the second
known point.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1413
48.4 Hidden Point Results
Computed distances on
Hidden Point Result
Hidden Point Result
P0 First known point
P1 Hidden point
P2 Second known point
d1 Distance from P0 to P1
d2 Distance from P2 to P1
d3 Check chainage A
d4 Check chainage B
d5 Check offset
d6 Check distance AB
GS_066
d1
d2
d5
d3
d4
d6
P0
P1
P2
Store
To store the result.
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template.
Next
To store the hidden point and to return to
Hidden Point Connection. Another hidden
point can be measured.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1414
Description of fields
Fn Quit
To not store the hidden point and to exit the
screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for the hidden point. The configured
point ID template is used. The ID can be changed.
Type in a point ID.
Check distance
AB Display only Available for Method:Using 2 bearings and
Method:Using 2 distances. The computed hori-
zontal distance between Point A and Point B.
Check bearing
AB Display only Available for Method:Using 2 bearings and
Method:Chainage % offset. The computed bearing
from Point A to Point B.
Check distance
ADisplay only Available for Method:Using 2 bearings and
Method:Chainage % offset. The computed hori-
zontal distance between Point A and the hidden
point.
Check distance
BDisplay only Available for Method:Using 2 bearings and
Method:Chainage % offset. The computed hori-
zontal distance between Point B and the hidden
point.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1415
Next step
On the Code page, type in a code if desired.
On the Map page, measured distances are indicated by solid arrows, bearings are indicated
by half solid and half dashed arrows.
Store stores the hidden point.
Check
chainage A Display only Available for Method:Using 2 distances. The
computed distance on the line from Point A to Point
B from Point A to the point of intersection with
Check offset.
Check
chainage B Display only Available for Method:Using 2 distances. The
computed distance on the line from Point B to Point
A from Point B to the point of intersection with
Check offset.
Check offset Display only Available for Method:Using 2 distances. The
computed perpendicular distance from the hidden
point to the line from Point A to Point B.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1416
48.5 Computing an Azimuth
48.5.1 Using the Sun
Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a known point and the
sun. The known point can be manually measured. The location of the hidden point can be
away from the sun or in the direction towards the sun. Ensure that the shadow of the pole
falls in the direction of the point.
Diagram
Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for
Method.
P0 Known point
P1 Hidden point
αBearing from P0 to P1
P0 Known point
P1 Hidden point
αBearing from P0 to P1
GS_069
P1
P0
GS_070
P0
P1
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1417
Access In Hidden Point Connection highlight Azimuth. Press Sun.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1418
48.5.2 Using Auxiliary Point
Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using an auxiliary point. The
auxiliary point
• can already exist in the job.
• can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements.
• can be manually typed in.
The location of the auxiliary point can be in the direction towards the hidden point or away
from the hidden point.
Diagram
P0 Known point
P1 Auxiliary point, Azimuth Pt
P2 Hidden point
αBearing from P2 to P0
P0 Known point
P1 Auxiliary point, Azimuth Pt
P2 Hidden point
αBearing from P0 to P2
GS_071 P0
P2
P1
GS_072 P1
P2
P0
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1419
Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for
Method.
Access In Hidden Point Connection highlight Azimuth. Press Azmth.
Choose Azimuth Point
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed. The
azimuth is computed and displayed in
Azimuth in Hidden Point Connection.
Survy..
Available for Azimuth Pt being highlighted.
To measure the auxiliary point manually for
the calculation of the azimuth.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Azimuth Pt Selectable list The auxiliary point for the calculation of the azimuth.
Direction Selectable list The location of the auxiliary point relative to the
hidden point.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1420
Next step
OK closes the screen.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1421
48.6 Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances
Description The horizontal distance for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a slope
distance, and an elevation angle or percentage grade. The slope distance and the elevation
angle can either be typed in or measured with a hidden point measurement device.
Diagram
Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for
Method.
Access In Hidden Point Connection highlight Horiz distance. Press Slope.
P0 Known point
P1 Hidden point
d1 Slope distance
d2 Horizontal distance
αElevation angle
GS_073
d1
P1
P0
d2
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1422
Slope distance
Description of fields
OK
To take over the result.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Slope distance Editable field Type in a distance from the known point to the
hidden point. When a hidden point measurement
device is attached to the instrument to measure the
distance, the value is automatically transferred.
Elevation angle Editable field Type in the elevation angle from the known point to
the hidden point. When a hidden point measurement
device is attached to the instrument to measure the
elevation angle, the value is automatically trans-
ferred.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1423
Next step
OK returns to Hidden Point Connection. The horizontal distance is displayed in Horiz
distance.
Grade (%) Editable field The grade from the known point to the hidden point
is automatically computed from the slope distance
and the elevation angle.
)The value for Grade (%) can be typed in
instead of the value for Elevation angle. Then
Elevation angle is computed automatically.
Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance from the known point to the
hidden point is automatically computed from the
slope distance and the elevation angle.
Δ height Display only Available if using heights is configured. The height
difference between the known point and the hidden
point is automatically computed from the slope
distance and the elevation angle.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1424
48.7 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights
Diagram
Configuration step-by-
step
P0 Known point
P1 Target point
P2 Hidden point
aHeight of P0
b Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3
d1 Device height: Height of hidden point
measurement device above P0
d2 Slope distance
d3 Target height: Height of P1 above P2
d4 Height difference between hidden point
measurement device and P1
d5 Horizontal distance
GS_074
a
d1
d2
d5
d3
b
P1
P2
P0
d4
Step Description
1. Compute height for hidden points is checked in Configuration.
2. Height offset:Device & target ht in Hidden Point Device Offsets.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1425
Hidden Point Connection Description of fields
Next step
Press Hts...
Device & Target Height Description of fields
Field Option Description
Δ height Selectable list The positive or negative height difference between
the centre of the hidden point measurement device
and the target point. Type in the value. When a
hidden point measurement device is attached to the
instrument to measure the height difference, the
value is automatically transferred.
)For hidden point measurement methods using
two known points, Δ height must be deter-
mined from each known point.
Refer to "48.3 Hidden Point Measurements" for a
description of all other fields on the screen.
Field Option Description
Device ht at pt
AEditable field The height of the hidden point measurement device
above Point A.
Target height Editable field The height of the target point above the hidden point
when measured from Point A.
Device ht at pt
BEditable field Available for hidden point measurement methods
using two known points. The height of the hidden
point measurement device above Point B.
Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 1426
Next step
OK closes the screen and returns to Hidden Point Connection.
There, Δ height still displays the positive or negative height difference between the centre
of the hidden point measurement device and the target point. The heights of the hidden
point measurement device above the ground, and the target point above the hidden point,
are applied when the hidden point is computed. For hidden point measurement methods
using two known points, this computation is done for each known point. In this case, the
height of the hidden point is the average.
Target height Editable field Available for hidden point measurement methods
using two known points. The height of the target
point above the hidden point when measured from
Point B.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1427
49 Hidden Point
49.1 Overview
Description Hidden points cannot be measured directly by a TPS instrument, because they are not
directly visible.
A hidden point can be calculated from measurements to prisms mounted on a hidden point
rod. The spacing and length of the hidden point rod are known. The hidden point rod can
be held at any angle, as long as it is stationary for all measurements.
Measurements for the hidden point are calculated as if the hidden point was observed
directly. These calculated measurements can also be recorded.
The hidden point rod can have either two or three prisms. If three prisms are used the
average will be calculated.
Hidden point rod The prisms on the hidden point rod are also called auxiliary points after they have been
measured.
1Prism 1
2Prism 2
3Prism 3
d1 Rod length
d2 Distance from prism 1 to prism 2
d3 Distance from prism 1 to prism 3
TS_046
d1
d2
d3
1
3
2
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1428
Properties of hidden
points
The properties stored with the hidden point and auxiliary points are:
• Class: Meas
• Sub class: Hidden Point
•Source: COGO
• Instrument source: TPS
Hidden point tasks The Hidden Point application can be used for the following tasks:
• The hidden point application can be used to obtain accurate three-dimensional coordi-
nates for a point that is blocked from direct measurement by an obstruction.
• Determination of flow line locations and elevations in manholes, without measuring from
the manhole rim to the flow line, and then estimating corrections for nonverticality of
the measuring tape and eccentricity from the rim measurement to the flow line.
• Determination of recesses in building corners for detailed surveys, without estimating
right angle offsets, with or without taping of the dimensions.
• Measurements behind overhangs, buttresses and columns for quantity determinations in
underground construction or mining, without estimating right angle offsets, with or
without taping of the dimensions.
• Measurements of industrial process piping or other equipment in close quarters.
• Detailed architectural surveys for remodelling or cultural preservation or restoration work
• Any place where accurate measurements would require many more instrument setups in
order to achieve line of sight from the instrument to the points being measured.
)The TPS Hidden Point application does not generate a report sheet.
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1429
49.2 Accessing Hidden Point and Measuring
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\TPS hidden point.
Diagram
Measure Reflector 1,
Hidden pt page
d1 Rod length
d2 Distance from prism 1 to prism 2
d3 Distance from prism 1 to prism 3
TS_047
P1
P0
d1
d2
d3
1
3
2
Meas
To measure and store the prism, and access
the next screen.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Store
To store data.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1430
Description of fields
Fn Config..
To configure the TPS hidden point applica-
tion. Refer to "49.3 Configuring Hidden
Point".
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Aux point ID Editable field The point ID of the auxiliary point, the prism on the
hidden point rod. The Auxiliary Points ID template is
used.
Hz Display only The horizontal angle to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is
displayed.
VDisplay only The vertical angle to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is
displayed.
Slope distance Display only The slope distance to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is
displayed.
Height difference Display only The height difference to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is
displayed.
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1431
Next step
Take the measurements to prism 2 and, if desired, to prism 3. After the last prism of the
hidden point rod is measured, Hidden Point Result, Result page is accessed.
Hidden Point Result,
Result page
Rod length Editable field The length of the rod can be adjusted before the
hidden point result is displayed. The rod length always
keeps the distances R1-R2 for two prisms and R1-R3
for three prisms into account.
Field Option Description
Store
To measure the prism and exit the applica-
tion.
Next
To store the hidden point and to access
Measure Reflector 1 to take more hidden
point measurements.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1432
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Code page. Type in a code if desired. Page changes to the Plot page.
Measured distances are indicated by solid arrows.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The name of the hidden point. The configured point ID
template is used.
Hz Display only The calculated horizontal angle to the computed
hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable informa-
tion.
VDisplay only The calculated vertical angle to the computed hidden
point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information.
Slope distance Display only The calculated slope distance to the computed hidden
point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information.
Height difference Display only The calculated height difference from instrument to
computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavail-
able information.
Easting, Northing
and Height Display only The calculated coordinates of the computed hidden
point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information.
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1433
49.3 Configuring Hidden Point
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\TPS hidden point. Press Fn Config...
Configuration
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Config..
To configure the selected survey screen
page. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen"
Fn About
To display information about the program
name, the version number, the date of the
version, the copyright and the article
number.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1434
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Page to show Selectable list The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in
Measure Reflector 1, Measure Reflector 2 and
Measure Reflector 3.
Measure tolerance Editable field Limit of the difference between input and measured
spacing of the prisms.
)For three prisms being used, limit for
maximum deviation of the three measure-
ments.
Delete aux points Yes or No The auxiliary points are deleted when the hidden
point is stored.
The auxiliary points are prism 1, prism 2 and prism 3
of the hidden point rod.
The Auxiliary Points ID template is used for the auxil-
iary points. The Survey Points ID template is used for
the computed hidden point.
No. of reflectors 2 or 3Two or three prisms are used on the rod.
Auto position Yes or No Available for No. of reflectors: 3. The third prism is
aimed at automatically.
Rod length Editable field Total length of hidden point rod.
Distance R1-R2 Editable field Spacing between the centres of prism 1 and prism 2.
Distance R1-R3 Editable field Available for No. of reflectors: 3. Spacing between
the centres of prism 1 and prism 3. Prism 3 is situ-
ated between prism 1 and prism 2.
Viva Series, Hidden Point 1435
Next step
OK returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed from.
Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1436
50 Survey - Remote Point
50.1 Overview
Description Remote point is used to determine the 3D coordinates of inaccessible points, for example
on bridges. The horizontal distance to a base point directly underneath or above the remote
point is measured. Then the instrument is aimed at the remote point. The coordinates of
the remote point are calculated with the distance measured to the base point and the angles
measured to the remote point.
Diagram
)To ensure correct results, the remote point and the prism must be lined up vertically. If it is
not possible to maintain an exactly vertical line, the acceptable Hz dist tolerance must be
chosen. The horizontal distance to the remote point and to the base point should coincide.
P0 Instrument station
P1 Base point
P2 Remote point
d1 Horizontal distance to the base point
αVertical angle between base point and
remote point
a Vertical axis from P1 to P2
TS_043
a
P1
P0
P2
d1
Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1437
Properties of remote
points
The properties stored with auto points are:
• Class: Meas
• Sub class: TPS
•Source: Survey (Rem Pt)
• Instrument source: TPS
Averaging of remote
points
An average can be calculated for remote points if a measured point of class Meas already
exists with the same point ID. The average flag for the point is Auto.
Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1438
50.2 Accessing Remote Point
Description Remote point measurements are possible from the Survey application when Measure
remote pts is checked in the Configuration, Remote pt page and a valid distance measure-
ment is available.
Access Press RmtHt. in Survey, Survey page after one point is measured with Dist.
Survey Remote Point,
Remote pt page Store
Stores the remote point. Stays in this
screen.
Base pt
Returns to the Survey screen. The distance
measurement is cleared.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
The page available depends on the Page to
show selected in the Configuration, Remote
pt screen. Refer to "50.3 Configuring
Remote Point".
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1439
Description of fields
Next step
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field Displays the point ID for the remote point. The point
ID in Survey Remote Point is always identical to the
point ID in Survey.
Δ Ht BaseRem Display only The elevation difference between the base point and
the remote point.
Hz Display only The current horizontal angle.
VDisplay only The current vertical angle.
Slope distance Display only The current slope distance to the remote point calcu-
lated from the horizontal distance to the base point
and the current vertical angle.
Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance measured to the base point.
Easting Display only Calculated Easting coordinate for the remote point.
Northing Display only Calculated Northing coordinate for the remote point.
Elevation Display only Calculated height for the remote point.
IF THEN
if a remote point is
to be stored
Store.
a new base point is
to be measured
Base pt to return to the Survey screen.
Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1440
50.3 Configuring Remote Point
Access In Survey press Fn Config.. to access Configuration.
Configuration,
Remote pt page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and return to the screen
from where this screen was accessed.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Config..
To configure the selected survey screen
page. Available when Page to show is high-
lighted. Refer to "19.3 My Survey Screen".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Measure remote pts Check box If checked, the remote point function is active.
RmtHt. is added to the function keys in Survey after
Dist is pressed.
Hz dist tolerance Editable field The horizontal distance to the remote point is equal
to the horizontal distance of the base point. The
value for Hz dist tolerance is the maximum tolerated
length of the chord between the base point and the
remote point.
Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 1441
Page to show Selectable list All survey screen pages from Main Menu: User\Work
settings\My Survey Screen can be selected.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1442
51 Traverse
51.1 Overview
Description The Traverse application is used to fulfil one of the most common operations done by
surveyors; to establish a control point base system to be used as a skeleton for other survey
operations. For example, topographic survey, point stakeout, line stakeout or road stakeout.
Types of traverse • External reference & closed loop
• Internal reference & position check
• Open end & position check
• Closed end traverse
Properties of Traverse
points
The properties stored with the Traverse points are:
• Class: Meas
• Sub class: TPS
P1 Traverse point
P2 Backsight point
P3 Traverse point
P4 Sideshot point
P5 Traverse point
P6 Sideshot point
P7 Sideshot point
P8 Closing point
P9 Sideshot point
P10 Closing angle point
TS_049
P1
P2 P10
P3
P5 P8
P4 P7 P9
P6
Viva Series, Traverse 1443
•Source: Traverse
• Instrument: TPS
Averaging of Traverse
points
An average point of class Meas is calculated by the Traverse application.
Viva Series, Traverse 1444
51.2 Accessing Traverse
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Traverse.
Traverse
Next step
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Traverse application. Refer
to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
IF THEN
a traverse is to be
created or selected
highlight the relevant option and press OK.
Traverse is to be
configured
Fn Config... Refer to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Viva Series, Traverse 1445
51.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse
Access •In Traverse, select Create a new traverse. Press OK.
•In Manage Traverses, press New.. or Edit...
New Traverse/Edit
Traverse
Description of fields
OK
To store the settings.
Fn Config..
To configure the Traverse application. Refer
to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Traverse ID Editable field The ID of the traverse.
Description Editable field A line for a detailed description of the traverse, for
example, work to be performed. Optional.
Operator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the traverse.
Optional.
Viva Series, Traverse 1446
Date Display only The date of when the traverse was created. Available
in the Edit Traverse screen.
Time Display only The time of when the traverse was created. Available
in the Edit Traverse screen.
Status Open The traverse is not closed in position. Available in the
Edit Traverse screen.
Position
closed The traverse has been closed in position on a control
point. Available in the Edit Traverse screen.
Posn & angle
closed The traverse has been closed both in position and
angularly. Available in the Edit Traverse screen.
Adjusted The traverse data is the result from an adjustment.
Available in the Edit Traverse screen.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1447
51.4 Selecting an Existing Traverse
Access In Traverse, select Existing Traverse. Press OK.
Existing Traverse
Description of fields
The fields are identical with those fields in the Edit Traverse screen. Refer to "51.3
Creating/Editing a Traverse".
Next step
ENTER when Traverse ID is highlighted. Accesses Manage Traverses.
OK
To accept the settings.
Data..
To display traverse data. Refer to "51.5
Traverse Data". Not available for adjusted
traverses.
Fn Config..
To configure the Traverse application. Refer
to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Traverse 1448
Manage Traverses All traverses of the working job are displayed.
OK
To confirm selection of highlighted traverse
and return to Select an existing traverse.
New..
To create a new traverse. Refer to "51.3
Creating/Editing a Traverse".
Edit..
To edit the traverse ID and description of
the highlighted traverse. Refer to "51.3
Creating/Editing a Traverse".
Data..
To display traverse data. Refer to "51.5
Traverse Data" for more information.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Traverse 1449
51.5 Traverse Data
Description This screen allows the review and editing of traverse stations inside of a traverse and allows
the user to access Point Results for editing.
Access Data.. in Manage Traverses.
OR Data.. in a Confirmation window of the Point Results screen.
Traverse Data
Description of columns
OK
To return to where this screen was accessed
from.
Edit..
To access the Point Results screen. Refer to
"51.8 Traverse Point Results".
Delete
To permanently delete the LAST traverse
station.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Column Description
Station ID Point ID of the station.
Viva Series, Traverse 1450
Backsight ID The backsight point measured from the current station ID.
No. sets Number of measured sets.
No. FS Number of measured foresight points.
Column Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1451
51.6 Configuring Traverse
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Traverse. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Parameters page
Description of fields
OK
To accept changes and to return to the
screen from where this screen was
accessed.
Config..
To edit the survey screen page currently
being displayed. Available when a list item in
Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "19.3
My Survey Screen". Available on the Param-
eters page.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Measure sequence B'F'...F''B'' All points are measured in face I, then measured in
face II in reverse sequential order.
B'F'...B''F'' All points are measured in face I, then measured in
face II.
Viva Series, Traverse 1452
Next step
Page changes to the Quality control page.
B'B''F'F''... Backsight point is measured in face I immediately
followed by face II. Other points are measured in
face I, face II order.
B'B''F''F'... Backsight point is measured in face I immediately
followed by face II. Other points are measured in
alternating face order.
B'F'... All points are measured in face I only.
Foresight Check box Option to define if only one foresight point or
multiple points are used during the sets.
When using auto-
matic target aiming,
automatically
measure the targets
Check box For instruments with automatic aiming and this
option checked, automatic aiming search and auto-
matic aiming measurements are done to specified
targets and subsequent sets.
Show additional
page from My
Survey Screen
Check box The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in
the Traverse screen.
Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1453
Configuration,
Quality control page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Report sheet page.
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Check for errors
before storing Check box The entered horizontal, vertical and distance toler-
ances are checked during the measurements to verify
accurate pointing and measurements.
Hz tolerance Editable field Tolerance for horizontal directions.
V tolerance Editable field Tolerance for vertical directions.
Distance tolerance Editable field Tolerance for distance.
Check for backsight
height Check box The entered height tolerance for the backsight point
is checked during the measurements to verify accu-
rate pointing and measurements.
Height limit Editable field Tolerance for the backsight height.
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Viva Series, Traverse 1454
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1455
51.7 Traverse Methods
51.7.1 Starting Traverse
Start traverse step-by-
step
The quickest setup method is described.
Step Description
1. Start the Traverse application.
2. Traverse
Select Create a new traverse.
3. OK to access New Traverse.
4. New Traverse
Type in the name of the new traverse.
5. OK to access Configuration.
Check the settings.
6. OK to access Total Station Setup.
Any standard setup method can be used.
7. Set to set the station and orientation.
8. A confirmation window is displayed.
FS Pt..
9. Foresight, Set:
Foresight ID The name of the foresight point.
Target height The target height of the foresight point.
Number of sets The number of sets to be measured.
Viva Series, Traverse 1456
10. Meas to measure and record. The measurement settings for the first measure-
ment to each point are used for all further sets.
11. Point Results
OK to move to the next station, to return to the Point Results screen (and set a
point as a closing point), to survey a sideshot, to view traverse data or to end the
traverse.
12. Move to move to the next station.
)After pressing Move, Traverse is exited. To continue with the traverse from the
next station refer to "51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse".
Step Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1457
51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse
Measure traverse step-
by-step Step Description
1. Start the Traverse application.
2. Traverse
Select Select an existing traverse.
3. OK to access Existing Traverse.
4. Existing Traverse
Traverse ID The name of the traverse. ENTER to select a different existing
traverse.
)Data.. to view data of the active traverse.
)Fn Config.. to change the working style settings.
5. OK to access Backsight, Set:.
Enter Instrument height.
Hz, V and Horiz distance The measured values are displayed.
Calc azimuth The calculated azimuth from the current station point to the back-
sight point.
Δ hz dist and Δ height The difference between the computed and measured
values.
)More to change between the displayed values.
6. Meas to measure and record the backsight point.
7. FS Pt.. to measure a foresight point.
8. Foresight, Set:
Viva Series, Traverse 1458
Foresight ID The name of the foresight point.
Target height The target height of the foresight point.
Number of sets The number of sets to be measured.
)Survy.. to measure sideshot points.
9. Meas to measure and record the foresight points. The measurement settings for
the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets.
10. Point Results
OK
11. A confirmation window is displayed.
Move to move to the next station.
12. Repeat steps 1. to 11. until traverse is ready to be closed.
Step Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1459
51.7.3 Closing Traverse
Close traverse step-by-
step Step Description
1. Refer to paragraph "51.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse" to measure a
traverse. Measure a backsight on a new station.
2. The confirmation window in Foresight, Set: is displayed.
Close.. to begin the process for closing the traverse.
3. The confirmation window to select a known point is displayed.
OK
4. The Data: screen for the control job is displayed.
Highlight the closing point.
5. OK to select the highlighted point.
6. Foresight, Set:
Meas to measure and record the closing point.
7. Point Results
OK to view traverse results.
8. Traverse Results
OK to display the confirmation window.
9. C Ang.. to close the traverse with angular closure.
)Optionally the traverse can be adjusted.
10. Move to the closure point and start Traverse application.
11. Traverse
Select Select an existing traverse.
Viva Series, Traverse 1460
Close traverse on
internal reference
This option is used for determining the closure of a closed loop traverse, consisting of a
single control point with an arbitrary backsight azimuth. This function allows completion of
a traverse without having to reoccupy the initial station setup to measure a closing angle.
The positional closure is calculated by comparing the control position of the initial station
12. OK to access Existing Traverse.
13. Existing Traverse
Traverse ID The name of the traverse to be closed is displayed.
14. OK to access Close Angle.
15. Close Angle
Closing method To measure onto a known point or a known azimuth.
Foresight ID The point ID of the foresight point.
Known azimuth Available for Closing method :By known azimuth. Known
azimuth for foresight point.
16. OK to access Backsight, Set:.
17. Meas to measure all sets.
18. Point Results
OK to view traverse results.
19. Traverse Results
OK to exit viewing traverse results.
20. Quit to quit the Traverse application.
)Optionally the traverse can be adjusted.
Step Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1461
setup to the measured position of the final foresight. The angular closure is calculated by
comparing the set azimuth of the initial backsight to the azimuth of the final measured leg.
The first station setup is on P1, and an
assumed direction to backsight P6. Upon
closing this traverse, with the last setup
over P6, the closing point is P1. In this
case the only point that is considered as
a control is P1.
Step Description
1. The first station setup is on P1 in the diagram shown. Begin the traverse, moving
in the direction P1, P2...P6.
2. When on the last setup point (P6 in the diagram shown), measure a backsight.
3. Close
4. Data:
Select the closing point from the available list (P1 in the diagram shown).
OK
5. Measure all the sets to the closing point as per a standard traverse.
TS_050
P1
P6 P5
P4
P3
P2
Viva Series, Traverse 1462
6. Point Results
OK when the review of the results is completed.
7. Yes to confirm the automatic calculation.
8. Traverse Results
The traverse closure is shown with positional and angular values.
Step Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1463
51.7.4 Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth
Description If a traverse is to be established on existing control points, two control points must be
defined to start the traverse. If the traverse absolute position is arbitrary, it can be conven-
ient to define the control in the field with arbitrary values. This functionality is an option to
turn the averaged position value into a control point when a backsight by azimuth is
collected.
Access At the beginning of a traverse, when all the measurements are completed to the back-
sight: On the Point Results screen, select Page to reach the Backsight page. Fn Ctrl.
OR
Anytime during the traverse: On the Traverse Data screen, highlight the first station
setup then Edit... On the Point Results screen, select Page to reach the Backsight page.
Fn Ctrl.
Point Results Confirma-
tion
No
To close the confirmation window without
further action.
Yes
To store the point as control point.
Viva Series, Traverse 1464
51.8 Traverse Point Results
Description Point observation results are displayed on this screen.
Access Is displayed automatically after measuring all sets from the current station.
OR
In Traverse Data press Edit...
Point Results,
Foresight page and
Backsight page
The softkeys are explained, except for the softkeys on the Map page.
OK
While measuring a traverse: Displays a
confirmation window with traverse meas-
urement options. Otherwise: To return to
Traverse Data.
+Sets..
To add more sets while still at the setup. It
could be necessary on particular legs of a
traverse that more than the designated
number of sets is required. Possibly some of
the sets from the first run exceeded the
tolerance limit and must be disabled.
Sets..
To include or exclude measured sets in the
calculation of a foresight point. In the Sets,
Point screen press Use to include or
exclude a set and Spread/Resid to review
the effect of using the set.
Viva Series, Traverse 1465
Close..
To set a point as a closing point if not
selected before measurement. Or to revert
a closing point to a normal foresight.
More
To display additional information.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Traverse application. Refer
to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Fn Edit..
To edit point code and annotations.
Fn Check..
Available on the Foresight page. To check
inverse distances and closure between the
selected point and a point from the fixpoint
job.
Fn Ctrl
Available on the Backsight page of the
initial station. Refer to "51.7.4 Creating a
Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Traverse 1466
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Point ID Selectable list
or display only
Selected point ID.
Target height Selectable list
or display only
The target height of the target point.
Point type Foresight,
Closing point
or Closing
angle
The current point type. Available on the Foresight
page.
No. of used sets Display only The number of sets out of all measured sets used for
the calculation. Available on the Foresight page.
Number of sets Display only The number of sets the point was measured in. Avail-
able on the Backsight page.
Hz arc average Display only Average horizontal angle.
V average Display only Average vertical angle.
Dist average Display only Average distance.
Hz arc std dev Display only Standard deviation of horizontal angle.
V std dev Display only Standard deviation of vertical angle.
Dist std dev Display only Standard deviation of distance.
Hz spread Display only Spread of horizontal angle.
V spread Display only Spread of vertical angle.
Dist spread Display only Spread of distance.
Viva Series, Traverse 1467
Next step
Page changes to the Stn info page.
Point Results,
Stn info page
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Map page which provides an interactive display of the data.
Field Option Description
Station ID Display only The station ID of the instrument station.
Instrument height Editable field Current instrument height. Editable.
Easting Display only Easting value of the station position.
Northing Display only Northing value of the station position.
Elevation Display only Orthometric height of the station position.
Scale Display only Scale factor used in the calculation.
Temperature Display only Temperature set on the instrument.
Pressure Display only Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument.
IF accessed THEN
after sets measure-
ment
OK opens a confirmation window with options that are dependent
on traverse status:
• For an open traverse:
Move to next station, return to Point Results, to survey a side-
shot, to view traverse data or to quit the traverse application.
Viva Series, Traverse 1468
• For a closed traverse:
Move to close angle, return to Point Results, to survey a sideshot,
to adjust the traverse or to quit the traverse application.
from Traverse Data OK returns to Traverse Data.
IF accessed THEN
Viva Series, Traverse 1469
51.9 Traverse Results
Description Traverse closure results are displayed on this screen.
Access Is displayed automatically after the traverse closing point is measured or selected.
OR Reslt.. in Traverse Data when a traverse is closed.
Traverse Results,
Position page OK
To move to close angle, to return to
Traverse Results, to survey a sideshot, to
adjust the traverse or to quit the Traverse
application.
N & E or L & D
To view the misclosure error in north/east or
length/direction.
Adjust..
To adjust the traverse.
Data..
To display traverse data.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Traverse application. Refer
to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Traverse 1470
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Angle page.
Traverse Results,
Angle page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Starting point Display only The point ID of the traverse start point.
Closing point Display only The point ID of the traverse closing point.
Length of error Display only The length of the misclosure error.
Direction of error Display only The direction of the misclosure error.
Δ north Display only Error in north.
Δ east Display only Error in east.
Δ elevation Display only Error in height.
Total distance Display only Total length of the traverse.
2D accuracy Display only Position ratio of misclosure.
1D accuracy Display only Height ratio of misclosure.
Field Option Description
Foresight ID Display only Point ID of the closing angle point. Displays ----- if no
values are available.
Known azimuth Display only Defined azimuth of closing line. Displays ----- if no
values are available.
Viva Series, Traverse 1471
Next step
OK to move to close angle, to return to Traverse Results, to survey a sideshot, to adjust
the traverse or to quit the Traverse application.
Azimuth average Display only Mean value of the measured azimuth closing line.
Displays ----- if no values are available.
Angular misclosure Display only Angular misclosure of traverse. Displays ----- if no
values are available.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1472
51.10 Traverse Adjustment
51.10.1 Accessing Traverse Adjustment
Description • A traverse adjustment can be performed on three components: 2D positions, angles and
elevations.
• Various adjustment methods are available for selection. Once the adjustment is
performed, the results can be reviewed. Adjusted points are stored into a new job, and
a report can be generated.
• This option is protected and is only activated by the entry of a licence key.
)Survey points have to be measured while Traverse is running to be part of the adjustment
calculations.
Access The traverse adjustment option can be reached in different ways based on specific condi-
tions.
Upon completing the observations onto the closing point, Adjust.. to access Traverse
Adjustment.
OR
After the measurements are done on the closing line for angular closure, Adjust.. to
access Traverse Adjustment.
OR
When the traverse is closed: Reslt.. in Traverse Data, then Adjust.. in Traverse Results
to access Traverse Adjustment.
Viva Series, Traverse 1473
Traverse Adjustment,
Method page
Description of fields
OK
To calculate the result.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Traverse application. Refer
to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Field Option Description
Traverse ID Display only The ID of the traverse.
Horiz adjustment Compass rule Suitable for surveys, where angles and distances
were measured with equal precision.
Transit rule Suitable for surveys, where angles were measured
with a higher precision than the distances.
No distribution No distribution is made.
Angle balance Equally The angle misclosure is distributed equally.
No distribution No distribution is made.
Vert adjustment Equally The height error is distributed equally.
By distance The height error is distributed by distance.
Viva Series, Traverse 1474
Next step
OK starts the adjustment calculation.
No distribution No distribution is made.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1475
51.10.2 Adjustment Results
Description The results of the adjustment calculations can be reviewed by accessing the different pages.
Access OK in Traverse Adjustment.
Adjustment Results,
Position page
OK
To access the next screen.
N & E or L & D
To view the misclosure error in north/east or
length/direction.
More
To display the values for the unadjusted, the
balanced and the adjusted solution.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Traverse application. Refer
to "51.6 Configuring Traverse".
Fn Quit
To exit the application.
Viva Series, Traverse 1476
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Angle page.
Adjustment Results,
Angle page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Closure data type Adjusted,
Unadjusted or
Balanced
More to change between the options and display the
values accordingly.
Starting point Display only The point ID of the traverse start point.
Closing point Display only The point ID of the traverse close point.
Length of error Display only The length of the misclosure error.
Direction of error Display only The direction of the misclosure error.
Δ north Display only Error in north.
Δ east Display only Error in east.
Δ elevation Display only Error in height.
Total distance Display only Total length of the traverse.
2D accuracy Display only Position ratio of misclosure.
1D accuracy Display only Height ratio of misclosure.
Field Option Description
Closure data type Display only More to change between the options.
Viva Series, Traverse 1477
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Adjustment Results,
Points page
The adjusted points are listed. The Point type column shows the function for each point.
View.. shows the coordinate values of the highlighted point.
Next step
Page changes to the Method page.
Adjustment Results,
Method page
The adjustment methods previously selected in Traverse Adjustment and used for the
adjustment are displayed.
Next step
Page changes to the Map page. The Map page provides an interactive display of the data.
OK accesses Adjustment Store.
Known azimuth Display only Defined azimuth of closing line. Displays ----- if no
values are available.
Azimuth average Display only Mean value of the measured azimuth closing line.
Displays ----- if no values are available.
Angular misclosure Display only Angular misclosure of traverse. Displays ----- if no
values are available.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Traverse 1478
Adjustment Store Description of fields
Next step
Store.. stores the results.
Field Option Description
Traverse ID Display only The ID of the traverse.
Store adjusted job
to Selectable list The location to save the adjusted job. The job can be
saved to the CF card, SD card, USB or Internal
memory.
New job Editable field The new job name. Once adjustment results have
been reviewed and accepted, the adjusted position
of the points are stored in a separate job.
Include survey
points Check box Survey points can be included or not. Adjusted points
are stored in the new job as a triplet of class ADJ
(adjusted).
Store point ID with Same point ID Adjusted points are stored in the new job with the
original point IDs.
Prefix Adjusted points are stored in the new job with a
prefix in front of the original point IDs.
Suffix Adjusted points are stored in the new job with a
suffix at the end of the original point IDs.
Prefix / suffix Editable field Available when Prefix or Suffix is selected in Store
point ID with. The value that is added to the front or
end of the original point ID.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1479
52 Volume Calculations
52.1 Overview
Description The Volume Calculations application allows surfaces to be measured and volumes (and other
information) to be computed from these surfaces.
Volume calculations
tasks
The Volume calculations application can be used for the following tasks:
• Measuring points (surface points and boundary points) defining a new surface or
extending existing surfaces from the working job.
• Calculating the triangulation of the measured surface points to establish the surface.
• Calculating volumes from a base (3D point, entered elevation) or by a stockpile method.
The surface calculation can be made from:
• existing point data in the job.
• manually occupied points.
• entered coordinates.
Activating the applica-
tion
The Volume Calculations application must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "24.3 Load
licence keys" for information on how to activate the application.
)Volume Calculations are possible for RTK rover and TPS.
Point types Surfaces can be created from points stored as:
•Local grid
• Height mode can be ellipsoidal or orthometric.
Heights and positions are always taken into account. Points must have full coordinate
triplets.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1480
Properties of measured
points
The properties stored with measured points are:
• Class: Either Meas or for also Nav depending on the position status when the
point was occupied.
• Sub class:
•GPS float, GPS code only, GPS fixed, GNSS Float, GNSS Code Only or GNSS
Fixed.
•TPS
•Source: Survey
• Instrument source: GPS or TPS
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1481
52.2 Accessing Volumes Calculations
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Volume calculations.
Volume Calculations
Next step
OK
To select the highlighted option and to
continue with the subsequent screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Volume Calculations appli-
cation. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume
Calculations".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
IF THEN
a Volume Calculations
method is to be started
highlight the relevant option and press OK.
Volume Calculations is to
be configured
Fn Config... Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations".
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1482
52.3 Configuring Volume Calculations
Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Volume calculations. Press Fn Config...
Configuration,
Report sheet page
Description of fields
Field Option Description
Create report
sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited.
A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is
written to. It is generated using the selected format file.
Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of
the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is
stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device.
The data is always appended to the file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets
screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can
be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or
deleted.
Format file to
use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file
defines which and how data is written to a report sheet.
Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first
be transferred from the data storage device to the internal
memory before it can be selected. Refer to "24.1 Transfer
user objects" for information on how to transfer a format
file.
Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files
screen where an existing format file can be selected or
deleted.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1483
Next step
Page changes to the first page on this screen.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1484
52.4 Calculating Volumes
52.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points
Access Select Create a new surface by measuring new points in Volume Calculations.
Create a new surface by
measuring new points Description of fields
Next step
OK to access Survey points to surface or Surface status.
Field Option Description
Surface ID Editable ID The name/number of the new surface.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1485
Survey points to surface,
Survey page
The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a
user-defined survey screen page is used.
Meas
To start measuring the surface point.
The key changes to Stop.
To measure a distance and store
distance and angles.
Stop
To end measuring the surface point. When
Automatically stop point measurement is
checked in Quality Control, General page
recording of positions ends automatically as
defined by the stop criteria. The position
mode icon changes to the moving icon. The
key changes to Store.
Dist
To measure a distance.
Store
To store the measured surface point. When
Automatically store point is checked in
Quality control, General, the measured
point is stored automatically. The key
changes to Meas.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1486
Near
To search the working job for the point
nearest to the current position when the key
is pressed. The point is selected as the point
to be measured and is displayed in the first
field on the screen. After measuring and
storing the nearest point, the next point
suggested is the one which was suggested
before the key was pressed.
Available when Meas is displayed.
»Bndry / »Surf
To change the type of point to be measured
between surface point and boundary point.
Done
To finish measuring.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Conect and Fn Disco
To dial the number of the base station
configured in the active working style and to
hang up immediately after the survey is
completed. Available when Meas or Store is
displayed and for real-time devices of type
digital cellular phone or modem. Available
for Auto connect when measuring
unchecked in RTK Rover Settings, General
page.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1487
Description of fields
Fn Init..
To select an initialisation method and to
force a new initialisation. Available when
Meas or Store is displayed and for working
styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer
to "44.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover
Operations".
Fn IndivID and Fn Run
To change between entering an individual
point ID different to the defined ID template
and the running point ID according to the ID
template. Refer to "19.1 ID templates".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually occupied points. The
configured point ID template is used. The ID can be
changed in the following ways:
• To start a new sequence of point IDs type over
the point ID.
• For an individual point ID independent of the ID
template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the
next ID from the configured ID template.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1488
Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the
active working style is suggested. Changing the
antenna height here does not update the default
antenna height as defined in the active working style.
The changed antenna height is used until the applica-
tion is exited.
3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed
position.
Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested when
accessing this screen. An individual target height can
be typed in.
Hz Display only The current horizontal angle.
VDisplay only The current vertical angle.
Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance after Dist was
pressed. No distance is displayed when accessing the
screen and after Store or Meas.
Height differ-
ence Display only The height difference between station and
measured point after Dist. Displays ----- when
accessing the screen and after Store or Meas.
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1489
Next step
Measure all points. Then press Done. Continue with "52.4.2 Create a New Surface from
Previously Stored Points".
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1490
52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points
Access Select Create a new surface from previously stored points in Volume Calculations.
)When accessing the Edit Surface screen after selecting Create a new surface from
previously stored points the Points page is active. Any other time this screen is
accessed the General page is active.
Create a new surface by
measuring new points Description of fields
Next step
OK to access Survey points to surface or Surface status.
Edit Surface,
General page
Field Option Description
Surface ID Editable ID The name/number of the new surface.
OK
To accept all settings and continue with the
next screen.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Volume Calculations appli-
cation. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume
Calculations".
Fn Del Srf
To delete the surface.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1491
Description of fields
Next step
Page changes to the Points page.
Field Option Description
Surface ID Selectable list Name of the surface to be triangulated.
No. of surface
pts Display only Number of points inside the surface.
No. of
boundary pts Display only Number of boundary points of the surface.
ID of last stored
pt Display only ID of the last measured point of the chosen surface.
Date Display only Date of the last measured point of the chosen
surface.
Time Display only Time of the last measured point of the chosen
surface.
Surface status Triangulation done The surface has been triangulated and not been
modified since the last triangulation.
Triangulation
needed The surface has been modified since the last triangu-
lation or no triangulation exists.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1492
Surface status,
Points page
Next step
OK continues to Surface Task Selection. Refer to "52.4.4 Selecting the Surface Task".
OK
To accept all settings and continue with the
next screen.
+All..
To add all points from the working job to the
surface.
+One..
To add one point from the working job to
the surface.
Bndry
To use this point for the boundary.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn -One
To remove the marked point from the
surface.
Fn -All
To remove all points from the surface.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1493
52.4.3 Choosing an Existing Surface
Access Select Select an existing surface in Volume Calculations.
Existing Surface The fields available are identical with the fields in Surface status, General page. Refer to
"52.4.2 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points".
Next step
Select the desired surface ID then press OK. OK continues to Surface Task Selection. Refer
to Selecting the Surface Task.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1494
52.4.4 Selecting the Surface Task
Surface Task Selection Description of the options
Next step
Select the task to do next. OK selects an option.
Options Description
Measure more points to the
surface To measure points defining a new surface or extending
existing surfaces and boundaries by surveying. Refer to
"52.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New
Points".
Review & edit the surface To view the surface summary and add/remove points
from the surface. Refer to "52.4.2 Create a New Surface
from Previously Stored Points".
Edit the boundary & triangulate
surface To define/redefine the boundary using manual point
selection, or one of the existing automatic methods, and
then create a triangulation. A DXF model can then be
exported if desired. Refer to "52.4.5 Boundary Defini-
tion".
Calculate the volume To compute the volume of a surface by a reference (3D
point, entered elevation) or by the stockpile method.
Refer to "52.4.6 Compute Volumes". Available when a
valid triangulation of the surface exists.
End the application To end the application and return to the screen from
where Volume Calculations was accessed.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1495
52.4.5 Boundary Definition
Edit Boundary,
Points page
Next step
OK
To start calculating the triangulation.
+One..
To add points from the working job to the
surface.
↑
To move the focused point one step up
within the boundary definition.
↓
To move the focused point one step down
within the boundary definition.
Fn Tools
To access to the Boundary Tools Menu.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn -One
To remove the marked point from the
surface.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
IF you want to THEN
check the triangula-
tion reults
OK to access Triangulation Results.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1496
Triangulation Results The Summary page and the Details page contain only display only fields. Information such
as the number of triangles/surface points/boundary points, the minimum/maximum eleva-
tion or the 3D area is shown.
The Map page contains a plot of the triangles of the surfaces triangulation and also its
boundary.
Boundary Tools Menu Description of fields
access the Tools
menu
Tools accesses Boundary Tools Menu.
IF you want to THEN
OK
To return to Surface Task Selection.
DXF
To go to a screen where the triangulation
can be saved as a DXF.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the report sheet.
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Description
Add many points Lists all points in the working job.
Remove all points Method to remove all points that are indicated in Edit Boundary,
Points page.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1497
Next step
Select the task to do next. OK selects an option and returns to Edit Boundary.
Sort points by time Method to sort all points in Edit Boundary, Points page by the time
they were stored.
Sort points by prox-
imity Method to sort all points Edit Boundary, Points page by the closest
proximity.
Compute rubber band
bndry Method to define a new boundary as if a rubber band was placed
around the points. The current list of boundary points will be
ignored.
Field Description
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1498
52.4.6 Compute Volumes
Volume Calculation
Description of fields
OK
To compute the volume.
Fn Config..
To configure the Volume Calculations appli-
cation. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume
Calculations".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Surface ID Selectable list Surface chosen from the triangulated surfaces
currently stored to the working job.
No. of triangles Display only Number of triangles from the triangulation of the
surface.
Calculate using To calculate the volume of the triangulated surface.
Stockpile Volume between the triangulated surface and the
plane defined by the boundary points of the surface.
Surface to
elevation Volume between the triangulated surface and the
height entered by the user.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1499
Next step
OK calculates the volume and continues to Volume Calculation Results.
Volume Calculation
Results,
Summary page
Description of fields
Surface to
point Volume between the triangulated surface and the
height of a selected point.
Field Option Description
OK
To close the triangulation of the surface.
DXF
To export the triangulation results to a DXF
file on the data or root directory of the CF
Card.
Page
To change to another page on this screen.
Fn Config..
To configure the Volume Calculations appli-
cation. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Volume
Calculations".
Fn Quit
To exit the screen.
Field Option Description
Surface ID Display only Name of the surface used for the calculation. Avail-
able for Calculate using:Surface to elevation and
Calculate using:Surface to point.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1500
Next step
Page changes to the Details page.
Volume Calculation
Results,
Details page
Description of fields
Point ID Display only The point to which the volume is calculated. Available
for Calculate using:Surface to point.
Elevation Display only The elevation of the point to which the volume is
calculated. Available for Calculate using:Surface to
elevation and Calculate using:Surface to point.
Area Display only Area of the base plane.
Net volume Display only Volume of the surface.
Volume cut Display only Volume of the base plane. Available for Calculate
using:Surface to elevation and Calculate
using:Surface to point.
Volume fill Display only Volume of the base plane. Available for Calculate
using:Surface to elevation and Calculate
using:Surface to point.
Field Option Description
Field Option Description
Minimum elevation Display only Minimal elevation of the triangulated surface.
Maximum elevation Display only Maximal elevation of the triangulated surface.
Average thickness Display only Average thickness of the calculated volume.
Viva Series, Volume Calculations 1501
Next step
Page changes to the Plot page.
Perimeter Display only Perimeter of the measured surface area (intersection
of the measured surface to the reference datum).
Field Option Description
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1502
Appendix A Menu Tree
Menu tree for GNSS
RTK rover and TPS
|—— Go to Work!
| |
| |—— Setup
| |
| |—— Survey
| |
| |—— Stakeout
| |
| |—— Survey+
| | |
| | |—— Measure to ref line
| | |
| | |—— Reference plane
| | |
| | |—— Volume calculations
| | |
| | |—— TPS hidden point
| | |
| | |—— Sets of angles
| | |
| | |—— Determine coord system
| | |
| | |—— QuickGrid
| | |
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1503
| | |—— Traverse
| | |
| | |—— Survey cross section
| |
| |—— Stakeout+
| | |
| | |—— Stake to ref line
| | |
| | |—— Stake a DTM
| | |
| | |—— Stake points & DTM
| |
| |—— COGO..
| | |
| | |—— Inverse
| | |
| | |—— Traverse
| | |
| | |—— Intersection
| | |
| | |—— Line & arc calculations
| | |
| | |—— Area division
| | |
| | |—— Shift, rotate & scale
| |
| |—— Roads..
| | |
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1504
| | |—— Alignment Editor
| | |
| | |—— Roads - Stakeout
| | |
| | |—— Roads - As built check
| | |
| | |—— Rail - Stakeout
| | |
| | |—— Rail - As built check
| | |
| | |—— Tunnel - Stakeout
| | |
| | |—— Tunnel - As built check
| |
| |—— Switch to Base menu
|
|—— Jobs & Data
| |
| |—— New job
| |
| |—— View & edit data
| |
| |—— Job properties
| |
| |—— Choose working job
| |
| |—— Choose control job
| |
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1505
| |—— Import data
| | |
| | |—— Import ASCII data
| | |
| | |—— Import DXF data
| |
| |—— Export & copy data
| |
| |—— Export ASCII data
| |
| |—— Export DXF Data
| |
| |—— Export LandXML Data
| |
| |—— Export FBK/RW5/RAW data
| |
| |—— Copy data between jobs
|
|—— Instrument
| |
| |—— TPS settings
| | |
| | |—— Measure mode & target
| | |
| | |—— Prism search settings
| | |
| | |—— Atmospheric corrections
| | |
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1506
| | |—— Level bubble & compensator
| | |
| | |—— Quality control & offsets
| | |
| | |—— Lights
| |
| |—— GPS settings
| | |
| | |—— RTK rover wizard
| | |
| | |—— Satellite tracking
| | |
| | |—— Antenna heights
| | |
| | |—— Quality control
| | |
| | |—— Raw data logging
| |
| |—— Instrument connections
| | |
| | |—— TPS connection wizard
| | |
| | |—— GPS connection
| | |
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1507
| | |—— All other connections
| |
| |—— Instrument status info
| |
| |—— Battery & memory
| |
| |—— Satellite tracking
| |
| |—— RTK data link status
| |
| |—— Current GPS position
| |
| |—— Raw data logging
| |
| |—— Connection status
| |
| |—— TPS current station info
|
|—— User
|
|—— Work settings
| |
| |—— ID templates
| |
| |—— Coding & linework
| |
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1508
| |—— My Survey Screen
| |
| |—— Hot keys & favourites
|
|—— Working style wizard
|
|—— System settings
| |
| |—— Regional settings
| |
| |—— SmartWorx options
| |
| |—— Screen & audio
|
|—— Tools & other utilities
| |
| |—— Transfer user objects
| |
| |—— Load firmware & Apps
| |
| |—— Load licence keys
| |
| |—— Field to office
| |
| |—— Format memory devices
| |
| |—— View contents of ASCII files
|
|—— About Leica Viva
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1509
Menu tree for GPS RTK
base
|—— Go to Work!
| |
| |—— Start base over known point
| |
| |—— Start base over last setup
| |
| |—— Start base over any point
| |
| |—— Go to rover menu
|
|—— Instrument
|
|—— Base settings
| |
| |—— Satellite tracking
| |
| |—— Base raw data logging
|
|—— Base connections
| |
| |—— Connect to base sensor
| |
| |—— All other connections
|
|—— Base status info
|
|—— Battery & memory
|
Viva Series, Menu Tree 1510
|—— Satellite tracking
|
|—— Current position
|
|—— Raw data logging
|
|—— Connection status
Viva Series, Internal Memory 1511
Appendix B Internal Memory
Available memory > 500 MB.
Data stored to the
internal memory
The following are examples of the data types that can be stored to the internal memory.
• Applications
• Codelists
• Coordinate systems
•Format files
• Geoid and CSCS files
•Jobs & Data
•System languages
•Working styles
Viva Series, Directory Structure of the Memory Device 1512
Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device
Description On the memory device, files are stored in certain directories. The following diagram of the
directory structure refers to the data storage devices and the internal memory.
All files are fully compatible with Leica System 1200 and vice versa, with the exception of
the following listed files which are not compatible between the systems:
• Working styles and configuration sets
• System.ram and VivaSystem.zip
•Licence files
• Language files, and
• Application files.
Directory structure |—— CODE
|
• Codelists, various files
|—— CONFIG
|
• Working style files (*.xfg)
|—— CONVERT
|
• Format files (*.frt)
|—— DATA
| |
| |
| |
• ASCII, DXF, LandXML files for import/export to/from job (*.*)
• Report sheets created from applications
| |—— GPS
| |
| |—— CSCS
| |
• CSCS field files (*.csc)
Viva Series, Directory Structure of the Memory Device 1513
| |—— GEOID
| |
• Geoid field files (*.gem)
| |—— RINEX
|
• RINEX files
|—— DBX
| |
• DTM jobs, various files
• Coordinate system file (Trfset.dat)
| |—— JOB
|
• Job files, various files. Jobs are stored in a folder per job.
|—— DOWNLOAD
|
• Various files, downloaded by Field to office application (*.*)
|—— GPS
|
|
|
• Antenna file (List.ant)
• GSM/Modem station list (*.fil)
• Server list (*.fil)
|—— GSI
|
|
• GSI files (*.gsi)
• ASCII files for export from job (*.*)
|—— SYSTEM • Application files (*.axx)
• Firmware files (*.fw)
• Language files (*.s*)
• Licence file (*.key)
• System files (VivaSystem.zip)
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1514
Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets
D.1 GS10
Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS10 ports. In this
chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS10 are explained.
Ports at the instrument
front panel
Pin assignments for
port P1
a) Port P3: Power out, data in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO
b) Port PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO
c) Port ANT: GNSS antenna in
d) Port P1: CS field controller in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO
e) Port P2: Power out, data in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO
GS_093
a
b
c
d
e
17
6
8
5
4
3
2
PIN_001
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out
2 USB_D- USB data line In or out
3GND Signal ground -
4 RxD RS232, receive data In
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1515
Pin assignments for
port P2, and port P3
Pin assignments for
port PWR
5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out
6 ID Identification pin In or out
7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In
8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general-purpose signal In or out
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
17
6
8
5
4
3
2
PIN_003
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out
2 CTS RS232, clear to send In
3GND Signal ground -
4 RxD RS232, receive data In
5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out
6 ID Identification pin In
7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out
8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out
1
5
43
2
PIN_004
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1 PWR1 Power input, 11 V-28 V In
2 ID1 Identification pin In
3GND Signal ground -
4 PWR2 Power input, 11 V-28 V In
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1516
Sockets
5 ID2 Identification pin In
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
Port P1 LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN
Port P2 and port P3: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP
Port PWR: LEMO-1, 5 pin, LEMO HMG.1B.305.CLNP
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1517
D.2 GS15
Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS15 ports.
In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS15 are explained.
Ports at the instrument
underside
Pin assignments for
port P1
a) Port 1 (USB and serial)
b) QN-connector
c) Port 2
d) Port 3
GS_094
a
b
c
17
6
8
5
4
3
2
PIN_001
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out
2 USB_D- USB data line In or out
3GND Signal ground -
4 RxD RS232, receive data In
5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out
6 ID Identification pin In or out
7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In
8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general-purpose signal In or out
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1518
Pin assignments for
port P2
Pin assignments for
port P3
17
6
8
5
4
3
2
PIN_003
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out
2 CTS RS232, clear to send In
3GND Signal ground -
4 RxD RS232, receive data In
5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out
6 ID Identification pin In
7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out
8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out
PIN_005
1
A1 A2
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
234567
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1 PWR 4 V power supply in In
2 Tx Transmit data In
3 Rx Receive data Out
4 GPO/DCD General-purpose out, carrier detect out Out
5 RTS Request to send In
6 CTS Clear to send Out
7 GPI/CFG General-purpose in, config mode in In
8 PWR 6 V power supply in In
9 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out
10 GND Signal and chassis ground -
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1519
Sockets
11 USB+ USB data line (+) In or out
12 USB- USB data line (-) In or out
13 GND Signal and chassis ground -
14 ID Identification pin In or out
15 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out
A1 NC Not used -
A2 RF1 Antenna port, radio to antenna -
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
Port 1: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN
Port 2: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP
Port 3: 15 pin RS232:RS232, 15 pin, DE15
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1520
D.3 CS10/CS15
Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the CS10/CS15 ports.
In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the CS10/CS15 are
explained.
Ports at the instrument
bottom panel - DSUB9
connector
Ports at the instrument
bottom panel - Lemo
connector
Pin assignments for
RS232 serial port
a) DSUB9 port
b) USB Mini port
c) USB A Host port
CS_022 a b c
a) Lemo port (USB and serial)
b) USB A Host port
CS_021
a b
PIN_002
1
6789
2345
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1NC Not connected -
2 RxD RS232, receive data In
3 TxD RS232, transmit data Out
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1521
Pin assignments for
8pin LEMO-1
Sockets
4NC Not connected -
5GND Signal Ground -
6NC Not connected -
7 RTS RS232, request to send Out
8 CTS RS232, clear to send In
9NC Not connected -
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
17
6
8
5
4
3
2
PIN_001
Pin Signal Name Function Direction
1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out
2 USB_D- USB data line In or out
3GND Signal ground -
4 RxD RS232, receive data In
5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out
6 ID Identification pin In or out
7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In
8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general purpose signal In or out
9 pin RS232: RS232, 9 pin, DE9
8 pin LEMO-1: LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN
Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 1522
D.4 TPS1200+
Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the instrument port.
In this chapter, the pin assignments and socket for the port 1 of the TPS1200+ instrument
are explained.
Ports at the TPS instru-
ment
Pin assignments for
port P1
Sockets
a) Port 1
TS_002
a
54
3
2
1
1
5
43
2
PIN_006
Pin Name Description Direction
1 PWR_IN Power input, + 12 V nominal (11 - 16 V). In
2- Not used. -
3 GND Single ground. -
4 RX- RS232, receive In
5 TX- RS232, transmit Out
Port 1: For TPS1200+: LEMO-0, 5 pin, LEMO ENA.OB.305.CLN
Viva Series, Cables 1523
Appendix E Cables
E.1 GPS Cables
Power cables Name Description
GEV97 • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered
• LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30°
•1.8m
GEV71 • Allows powering of any device from car battery.
• Crocodile clips / LEMO-1, 5 pin , 30° (female)
•4.0m
GEV172 • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered from two external
batteries
• LEMO-1, 5 pin / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30°
•2.8m
GEV219 • Allows CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to be externally
powered via the LEMO port
• Allows GS10/GS15 (port 1) to be externally powered
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30°
•1.8m
GEV235 • Allows CS10/CS15 (with either connector modules) to be externally
powered via the power jack
• Wall adapter / 3 mm barrel connector
•1.5m
Viva Series, Cables 1524
Y cables
Radio programming
cables
Name Description
GEV172 • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered from two external
batteries
• LEMO-1, 5 pin / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30°
•2.8m
GEV205 • Allows connections between GS10/GS15 (port 1), an external radio in
GFU1200 housing and the GEB71, with GS10/GS15 and a radio being exter-
nally powered
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° (female) / LEMO-1, 5 pin
•1.8m
GEV215 • Allows connections between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector
module), the GS10/GS15 (port 1) and the GEB71, with the GS10/GS15
being powered from the GEB71.
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30°
•2.0m
Name Description
GEV231 • Allows an “SLR” radio device to be externally powered and programmed by
a computer
• 15 pin (GS15 slot-in port) (female) / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin
•1.8m
GEV171 • Allows a radio within a GFU1200 device to be externally powered and
programmed by a computer
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° (female) / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin
•1.8m
Viva Series, Cables 1525
Radio cables
Serial data transfer
cables
Name Description
GEV67 • Allows System 500 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3),
or GS15 (port 2)
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30°
•0.5m
GEV125 • Allows a Satel modem (not inside housing) to be connected to a GS10 (port
2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2)
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / 15 pin, RS232 serial
•1.8m
GEV232 • Allows System 1200 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and
3), or GS15 (port 2)
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° (female)
•2.8m
GEV233 • Allows System 1200 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and
3), or GS15 (port 2)
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° (female)
•0.8m
Name Description
GEV160 • Allows serial connection between GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) to
a computer to stream NMEA or RTK data
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial
•2.8m
Viva Series, Cables 1526
USB to serial converter
cables
GEV162 • Allows serial connection between GS10/GS15 (port 1) to a computer to
stream NMEA or RTK data
• Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector
module) and, for example, a hidden point device, ASCII input device, or
computer.
• Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02
connector module) and GS10/GS15 (port 1). This connection is useful when
using third-party software such as Carlson SurvCE on the CS10/CS15 and a
cable connection is required to the GS10/GS15.
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / 9 pin, RS232 serial
•2.8m
GEV163 • Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector
module) and GS10/GS15 port 1. This connection is useful when using third-
party software such as Carlson SurvCE on the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01
connector module) and a cable connection is required to the GS10/GS15.
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135°
•1.8m
Name Description
Name Description
GEV195 • Allows GS10 (port 2 and 3) or GS15 (port 2) to be connected to a computer
where a serial connection is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically
exists on the computer. This cable allows a serial connection through the
USB port of the computer to the CS10/CS15 or GS10/GS15 hardware.
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / USB type A
•2.0m
Viva Series, Cables 1527
USB data transfer
cables
GEV218 • Allows CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and GS10/GS15
(port 1) to be connected to a computer where a serial connection is
required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This
cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to
the CS10/CS15 or GS10/GS15 hardware.
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A
•2.0m
Name Description
Name Description
GEV223 • Allows USB data transfer between CS10/CS15 (both connector modules)
and a computer.
• USB Type A / Mini USB Type B
•1.8m
GEV234 • Allows a CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) to connect
to a GS10/GS15 (port 1). This cable is for when a cable connection is
needed between CS10/CS15 and GS10/GS15 when the CS10/CS15 is using
the CBC02 connector module.
• Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the
GS10/GS15 (port 1)
• Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the
CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module)
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A
•1.65m
Viva Series, Cables 1528
Antenna cables
GEV237 • Allows a CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to connect to a
GS10/GS15 (port 1). This cable is for when a cable connection is needed
between CS10/CS15 and GS10/GS15 when the CS10/CS15 is using the
CBC01 connector module.
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135°
•1.65m
Name Description
Name Description
GEV108 • TNC connector / TNC connector
•30m
GEV119 • TNC connector / TNC connector
•10m
GEV120 • TNC connector / TNC connector
•2.8m
GEV134 • TNC connector / TNC connector
•50m
GEV141 • TNC connector / TNC connector
•1.2m
GEV142 • TNC connector / TNC connector (male)
•1.6m
- • TNC connector / TNC connector
•70m
Viva Series, Cables 1529
E.2 TPS Cables
Power cables
Radio / Y cables
Serial data transfer
cables
Name Description
GEV52 • Allows TPS1200+ to be externally powered
• LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin
•1.8m
Name Description
GEV186 • Allows connections between TPS1200+, an external battery and
TCPS27/TCPS28
• LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-0, 8 pin,30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin
•1.8m
Name Description
GEV102 • Allows serial connection between TPS1200+ and a computer
• Allows serial connection between TPS1200+ and CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin
serial CBC02 connector module)
• LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial
•2.0m
GEV162 • Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02
connector module) and a computer
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / 9 pin, RS232 serial
•2.8m
Viva Series, Cables 1530
USB to serial converter
cables
USB data transfer
cables
GEV187 • Allows connections between TPS1200+, an external battery and a computer
• LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30°
•2.0m
GEV217 • Allows serial connection between TPS1200+ and CS10/CS15 (with LEMO
CBC01 connector module)
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-0, 5 pin,30°
•1.8m
Name Description
Name Description
GEV189 • Allows TPS1200+ to be connected to a computer where a serial connection
is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This
cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to
the TPS1200+ or DNA hardware
• LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / USB type A
•2.0m
Name Description
GEV234 • Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the
CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module)
• LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A
•1.65m
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1531
Appendix F NMEA Message Formats
F.1 Overview
Description National Marine Electronics Association is a standard for interfacing marine electronic
devices. This chapter describes all NMEA-0183 messages which can be output by the instru-
ment.
Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument\All other connections\NMEA 1 or NMEA 2. Press
Mesgs.
)A Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA message.
The Talker ID can be user defined or standard (based on the NMEA 3.0). The standard is
normally GP for GPS but can be changed in NMEA Output 1 or NMEA Output 2.
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1532
F.2 Symbols Used for Describing the NMEA Formats
Description NMEA messages consist of various fields. The fields are:
•Header
• Special format fields
• Numeric value fields
• Information fields
• Null fields
Certain symbols are used as identifier for the field types.
These symbols are described in this section.
Header Symbol Field Description Example
$ - Start of sentence $
--ccc Address • -- = alphanumeric characters identifying
the talker
GPGGA
Options:
GP = GPS only
GL = GLONASS only
GN = Global Navigation Satellite System
• ccc = alphanumeric characters identi-
fying the data type and string format of
the successive fields. Usually the name
of the message.
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1533
Special format fields Symbol Field Description Example
A Status • A = Yes, Data Valid, Warning Flag Clear V
• V = No, Data Invalid, Warning Flag Set
llll.ll Latitude • Degreesminutes.decimal 4724.538950
• Two fixed digits of degrees, two fixed
digits of minutes and a variable number
of digits for decimal fraction of minutes.
• Leading zeros are always included for
degrees and minutes to maintain fixed
length.
yyyyy.yy Longitude • Degreesminutes.decimal 00937.04678
5
• Three fixed digits of degrees, two fixed
digits of minutes and a variable number
of digits for decimal fraction of minutes.
• Leading zeros are always included for
degrees and minutes to maintain fixed
length.
eeeeee.eee Grid Easting At the most six fixed digits for metres and
three fixed digits for decimal fractions of
metres.
195233.507
nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing At the most six fixed digits for metres and
three fixed digits for decimal fractions of
metres.
127223.793
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1534
hhmmss.ss Time • hoursminutesseconds.decimal 115744.00
• Two fixed digits of hours, two fixed
digits of minutes, two fixed digits of
seconds and a variable number of digits
for decimal fraction of seconds.
• Leading zeros are always included for
hours, minutes and seconds to maintain
fixed length.
mmddyy Date • Monthdayyear - two fixed digits of
month, two fixed digits of day, two fixed
digits of year.
093003
• Leading zeros always included for
month, day and year to maintain fixed
length.
No specific
symbol
Defined field • Some fields are specified to contain
predefined constants, most often alpha
characters.
M
• Such a field is indicated by the presence
of one or more valid characters.
Excluded from the list of valid characters
are the following that are used to indi-
cate other field types: A, a, c, x, hh,
hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, yyyyy.yy.
Symbol Field Description Example
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1535
Numeric value fields
Information fields
Null fields
)Fields are always separated by a comma. Before the Checksum field there is never a comma.
)When information for a field is not available, the position in the data string is empty.
Symbol Field Description Example
x.x Variable
numbers
• Integer or floating numeric field 73.10 = 73.1
= 073.1 = 73
• Optional leading and trailing zeros.
Decimal point and associated decimal-
fraction are optional if full resolution is
not required.
hh_ Fixed HEX field Fixed length HEX numbers 3F
Symbol Field Description Example
c--c Variable text Variable length valid character field A
aa_ Fixed alpha field Fixed length field of upper case or lower
case alpha characters
N
xx_ Fixed number
field
Fixed length field of numeric characters 1
Symbol Field Description Example
No symbol Information
unavailable for
output
Null fields do not contain any information. ,,
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1536
F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data
Syntax $--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--GGA Header including Talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984)
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984)
aEast or West
x Position quality indicator
0 = Fix not available or invalid
1 = No real-time position, navigation fix
2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
3 = Valid fix for GNSSPrecise Positioning Service mode, for example WAAS
4 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26.
x.x HDOP
x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no
orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If
the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal
height will be exported.
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1537
Examples User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNGGA,113805.50,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,4,13,0.7,1171.281,M,-703.398,
M,0.26,0000*42
M Units of altitude as fixed text M
x.x Geoidal separation in metres. The Geoidal separation is the difference
between the WGS 1984 earth ellipsoid surface and mean sea level.
M Units of geoidal separation as fixed text M
x.x Age of differential GNSS data, empty when DGPS not used
xxxx Differential base station ID, 0000 to 1023
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1538
F.4 GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP
Syntax $--GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--GGK Header including Talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
mmddyy UTC date
llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984)
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984)
aEast or West
x Position quality indicator
0 = Fix not available or invalid
1 = No real-time position, navigation fix
2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26.
x.x GDOP
EHT Ellipsoidal height
x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal
height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported.
M Units of altitude as fixed text M
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1539
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNGGK,113616.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,12,1.7,EHT1171.742,M
*6D
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNGGK,113806.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,13,1.4,EHT1171.746,M
*66
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1540
F.5 GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary
Syntax $PTNL,GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$PTNL $ = Start of sentence delimiter, talker ID fixed with PTNL
GGK GGK sentence formatter
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
mmddyy UTC date
llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984)
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984)
aEast or West
x Position quality indicator
0 = Fix not available or invalid
1 = No real-time position, navigation fix
2 = Not existing
3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed
4 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26.
x.x PDOP
EHT Ellipsoidal height
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1541
Examples Standard Talker ID
$PTNL,GGK,113616.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,12,1.5,EHT1171.742
,M*4C
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$PTNL,GGK,113806.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,13,1.2,EHT1171.746
,M*43
x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal
height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported.
M Units of altitude as fixed text M
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1542
F.6 GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ
Syntax $--GGQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--GGQ Header including talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
mmddyy UTC date
llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984)
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984)
aEast or West
x Position quality indicator
0 = Fix not available or invalid
1 = No real-time position, navigation fix
2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26.
x.x Coordinate quality in metres
x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no
orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If
the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal
height will be exported.
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1543
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNGGQ,113615.50,041006,4724.5248556,N,00937.1063059,E,3,12,0.009,1171.281,M
*22
$GPGGQ,113615.50,041006,,,,08,,*67
$GLGGQ,113615.50,041006,,,,04,,*77
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNGGQ,113805.50,041006,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,3,13,0.010,1171.281,M
*2E
M Units of altitude as fixed text M
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1544
F.7 GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude
Syntax $--GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--GLL Header including talker ID
llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984)
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984)
aEast or West
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
A Status
A = Data valid
V = Data not valid
aMode indicator
A = Autonomous mode
D = Differential mode
N = Data not valid
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1545
)The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field is set to A for the
Mode indicators A and D. The Status field is set to V for the Mode indicator N.
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNGLL,4724.5248556,N,00937.1063059,E,113615.50,A,D*7B
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNGLL,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,113805.50,A,D*7E
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1546
F.8 GNS - GNSS Fix Data
Syntax $--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--GNS Header including talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984)
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984)
aEast or West
c--c Mode indicator
N = Satellite system not used in position fix or fix not valid
A = Autonomous; navigation fix, no real-time fix
D = Differential; real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
R = Real-time kinematic; ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 99
x.x HDOP
x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no
orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If
the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal
height will be exported.
x.x Geoidal separation in metres
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1547
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNGNS,113616.00,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,RR,12,0.9,1171.279,-
703.398,0.76,0000*6C
$GPGNS,113616.00,,,,,,08,,,,,*69
$GLGNS,113616.00,,,,,,04,,,,,*79
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNGNS,113806.00,4724.5248547,N,00937.1063032,E,R,13,0.7,1171.283,-
703.398,0.76,0000*39
x.x Age of differential data
xxxx Differential base station ID, 0000 to 1023
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1548
F.9 GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites
Syntax $--GSA,a,x,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--GSA Header including talker ID
aMode
M = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D mode
A = Automatic, allowed to change automatically between 2D and 3D
xMode
1 = Fix not available
2 = 2D
3 = 3D
xx Numbers of the satellites used in the solution. This field is repeated 12
times.
1 to 32 = PRN numbers of GPS satellites
33 to 64 = Numbers of WAAS and WAAS like satellites
65 to 96 = Slot numbers of GLONASS satellites
x.x PDOP
x.x HDOP
x.x VDOP
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1549
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNGSA,A,3,01,11,14,17,19,20,24,28,,,,,1.5,0.9,1.2*26
$GNGSA,A,3,65,66,67,81,,,,,,,,,1.5,0.9,1.2*29
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNGSA,A,3,01,11,14,17,19,20,23,24,28,,,,65,66,67,81,,,,,,,,,1.2,0.7,1.0*27
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1550
F.10 GSV - GNSS Satellites in View
Syntax $--GSV,x,x,xx,xx,xx,xxx,xx,.....*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields
)Satellite information can require the transmission of multiple messages, specified by the
total number of messages and the message number.
)The fields for the PRN / Slot number, Elevation, Azimuth and SNR form one set. A variable
number of these sets are allowed up to a maximum of four sets per message.
Field Description
$--GSV Header including talker ID
x Total number of messages, 1 to 4
x Message number, 1 to 4
xx Number of theoretically visible satellites according to the current almanac.
xx PRN (GPS) / Slot (GLONASS) number of satellite
xx Elevation in degrees, 90 maximum, empty when not tracking
xxx Azimuth in degrees true north, 000 to 359, empty when not tracking
xx Signal to Noise Ration C/No in dB, 00 to 99 of L1 signal, null field when not
tracking.
... Repeat set PRN / Slot number, elevation, azimuth and SNR up to four times
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1551
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GPGSV,3,1,11,01,55,102,51,11,85,270,50,14,31,049,47,17,21,316,46*7A
$GPGSV,3,2,11,19,31,172,48,20,51,249,50,22,00,061,,23,11,190,42*7E
$GPGSV,3,3,11,24,11,292,43,25,08,114,,28,14,275,44,,,,*45
$GLGSV,2,1,06,65,16,055,42,66,64,025,48,67,46,262,42,68,01,245,*64
$GLGSV,2,2,06,81,52,197,47,83,07,335,,,,,,,,,*68
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNGSV,3,1,10,01,55,100,51,11,86,263,50,14,31,049,47,17,22,316,46*65
$GNGSV,3,2,10,19,30,172,48,20,52,249,51,23,12,190,42,24,12,292,42*6C
$GNGSV,3,3,10,25,09,114,,28,14,274,44,,,,,,,,*62
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1552
F.11 LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP
Syntax $--LLK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--LLK Header including talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
mmddyy UTC date
eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres
M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M
nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres
M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M
x Position quality
0 = Fix not available or invalid
1 = No real-time position, navigation fix
2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites used in computation
x.x GDOP
x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no
orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported.
M Units of altitude as fixed text M
*hh Checksum
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1553
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNLLK,113616.00,041006,764413.024,M,252946.774,M,3,12,1.7,1171.279,M*0F
$GPLLK,113616.00,041006,,,,,,08,,,*57
$GLLLK,113616.00,041006,,,,,,04,,,*47
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNLLK,113806.00,041006,764413.021,M,252946.772,M,3,13,1.4,1171.283,M*04
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1554
F.12 LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality
Syntax $--LLQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--LLQ Header including talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position
mmddyy UTC date
eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres
M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M
nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres
M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M
x Position quality
0 = Fix not available or invalid
1 = No real-time position, navigation fix
2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed
3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed
xx Number of satellites used in computation
x.x Coordinate quality in metres
x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no
orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported.
M Units of altitude as fixed text M
*hh Checksum
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1555
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNLLQ,113616.00,041006,764413.024,M,252946.774,M,3,12,0.010,1171.279,M*12
$GPLLQ,113616.00,041006,,,,,,08,,,*4D
$GLLLQ,113616.00,041006,,,,,,04,,,*5D
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNLLQ,113806.00,041006,764413.021,M,252946.772,M,3,13,0.010,1171.283,M*1A
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1556
F.13 RMC - Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data
Syntax $--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--RMC Header including talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time of position fix
A Status
A = Data valid
V = Navigation instrument warning
llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984)
a Hemisphere, North or South
yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984)
aEast or West
x.x Speed over ground in knots
x.x Course over ground in degrees
xxxxxx Date: ddmmyy
x.x Magnetic variation in degrees
aEast or West
a*hh Mode Indicator
A = Autonomous mode
D = Differential mode
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1557
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNRMC,113616.00,A,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,0.01,11.43,100406,11.43,E,D*
1C
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNRMC,113806.00,A,4724.5248547,N,00937.1063032,E,0.00,287.73,100406,287.73,E,
D*10
N = Data not valid
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Field Description
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1558
F.14 VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
Syntax $--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields Field Description
$--VTG Header including talker ID
x.x Course over ground in degrees true north, 0.0 to 359.9
T Fixed text T for true north
x.x Course over ground in degrees magnetic North, 0.0 to 359.9
M Fixed text M for magnetic North
x.x Speed over ground in knots
N Fixed text N for knots
x.x Speed over ground in km/h
K Fixed text K for km/h
a Mode Indicator
A = Autonomous mode
D = Differential mode
N = Data not valid
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1559
)The Magnetic declination is set in the instrument in Regional Settings, Angle page.
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GNVTG,11.4285,T,11.4285,M,0.007,N,0.013,K,D*3D
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNVTG,287.7273,T,287.7273,M,0.002,N,0.004,K,D*3E
Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 1560
F.15 ZDA - Time and Date
Syntax $--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
Description of fields
)This message is given high priority and is output as soon as it is created. Latency is therefore
reduced to a minimum.
Examples Standard Talker ID
$GPZDA,091039.00,01,10,2003,-02,00*4B
User-defined Talker ID = GN
$GNZDA,113806.00,10,04,2006,02,00*76
Field Description
$--ZDA Header including talker ID
hhmmss.ss UTC time
xx UTC day, 01 to 31
xx UTC month, 01 to 12
xxxx UTC year
xx Local zone description in hours, 00 to ±13
xx Local zone description in minutes, 00 to +59
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed
Viva Series, AT Commands 1561
Appendix G AT Commands
AT commands Hayes Microcomputer Products is a leading manufacturer of modems that has developed a
language called the AT command set for controlling digital cellular phones and modems. This
AT command set has become the de facto standard.
List of selected AT
commands
The characters in this table are the most commonly used AT commands when configuring a
digital cellular phone or modem. Refer to the manual of the used digital cellular phone or
modem for information on which AT commands to use.
AT command Description
~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second.
^# Inserts the phone number as defined in digital cellular phone connection.
^^ Inserts character ^.
^C Bearer Service: Connection Element.
^M Inserts a carriage return and send command.
^S Bearer Service: Speed including Protocol and NetDataRate.
AT Starts a command line to be sent to phone.
AT&F[<value>] Sets the configuration parameters to default values specified by manufac-
turer of phone.
<value>:
• 0 = Factory default configuration profile
ATD<number> Starts a call to the phone number given as parameter. If “;” is present, a
voice call to the given number is performed.
Viva Series, AT Commands 1562
AT+CBST=
[<speed>
[,<name>
[,<ce>]]]
Sets the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the connec-
tion element <ce> . Refer to the manual of the used digital cellular phone
or modem for a list of supported name, speed and connection element
values.
AT+CREG=
[<mode>]
Enables/disables network registration reports depending on the param-
eter <mode>.
AT+CREG? Reports the <mode> and registration status <stat> of phone.
<mode>:
• 0 = Disable network registration unsolicited result code
• 1 = Enable network registration unsolicited result code
<stat>:
• 0 = Not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to
register to
• 1 = Registered, home network
• 2 = Not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to
register to
• 3 = Registration denied
•4 = Unknown
• 5 = Registered, roaming
AT command Description
Viva Series, AT Commands 1563
AT+COPS=
[<mode>
[,<format>
[,<oper>>[,
< AcT>]]]]
Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM\UMTS network operator.
<mode>:
• 0 = Automatic choice
• 1 = Manual choice
<format>:
• 0 = Alphanumeric long form
• 1 = Short format alphanumeric
•2 = Numeric, 5 digits
<oper>:
• Network operator in format defined by <format>
<AcT>:
Access technology selected:
•0 = GSM
•2 = UTRAN
AT+COPS? Returns the currently registered network operator.
AT+COPS=? Returns a list of all available network operators in form of:
<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>, short alphanumeric <oper>, numeric
<oper>,<AcT>:
<stat>:
Operator availability:
•0 = Unknown
• 1 = Available
• 2 = Current
•3 = Forbidden
AT command Description
Viva Series, AT Commands 1564
<AcT>:
Access technology selected:
•0 = GSM
• 1 = GSM Compact
•2 = UTRAN
AT+CPIN=<pin>
[,<newpin>]
Sends the PIN to the phone.
AT+CPIN? Returns the status of the PIN request:
•READY = Phone can be used
• SIM PIN = PIN is not set, phone not ready for use.
• SIM PUK = PUK is required to use the device
• ERROR = No SIM card inserted
AT+CSQ Reports received signal quality indicators in form of:
<signal strength><bit error rate>
AT+CSQ=? Returns the supported ranges.
AT+FLO=<type> Selects the flow control behaviour of the serial port in both directions.
•0 = Flow control None
• 1 = Flow control Software (XON-XOFF)
• 2 = Flow control Hardware (CTS-RTS)
AT command Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1565
Appendix H Glossary
H.1 A
A (parameter) For horizontal alignments:
A2 = R * L
R = Radius of the connecting circular curve.
L = Length of the spiral.
Arc Refer to "Curve".
Attribute Description
The use of attributes allows additional information to be stored with the code. Up to twenty
attributes can be related to one code. Attributes are not compulsory.
Viva Series, Glossary 1566
Structure of attributes
Viva Series, Glossary 1567
Example
Attribute types The attribute type defines the input requirements for the attribute.
Attribute value regions The attribute value region defines if the attribute values must be selected from a predefined
list.
Code Attributes Attribute value
type
Attribute value
region
Example for the
attribute value region
Birch Height Real Range 0.5-3.0
Condition Text Selectable list Good, Dead, Damaged
Remark Text None -
Normal: An input for the attribute is optional. The attribute value can be typed
in the field. New attributes with this attribute type can be created in
LGO or on the instrument.
Mandatory: An input for the attribute is compulsory. The attribute value must be
typed in the field. New attributes with this attribute type can be created
in LGO.
Fixed: The attribute value is a predefined default which is displayed but cannot
be changed in the field. This attribute value is automatically attached to
the code. New attributes with this attribute type can be created in LGO.
None: An input for the attribute must be typed in. New attributes with this
attribute value region can be created in LGO or on the instrument.
Range: An input for the attribute must fall within a predefined range. New
attributes with this attribute value region can be created in LGO.
Selectable list: An input for the attribute is selected from a predefined list. New
attributes with this attribute value region can be created in LGO.
Viva Series, Glossary 1568
Attribute value types The attribute value type defines which values are accepted as input.
Averaging mode Averaging Mode
The averaging mode defines the checks which are performed when more than one set of
measured coordinates are recorded for the same point. The selected averaging mode also
affects the behaviour of the instrument when editing a point and calculating averages.
Text: Any input for the attribute is interpreted as text. New attributes with
this attribute value type can be created in LGO or on the instrument.
Real: An input for the attribute must be a real number, for example 1.23. New
attributes with this attribute value type can be created in LGO.
Integer: An input for the attribute must be an integer number, for example 5.
New attributes with this attribute value type can be created in LGO.
Viva Series, Glossary 1569
H.2 C
Chainage equation Chainage equations define adjustments for the chainage values in the horizontal alignment.
These adjustments can be necessary when a horizontal alignment is modified, by inserting
or removing an element, and the chainage values in the horizontal alignment are not recom-
puted. This situation can occur when editing manually or editing with a program that does
not automatically recompute. Chainage equations define leaving a gap or allowing an overlap
at certain chainages.
The elements involved in the equations are:
•chainage back
• chainage ahead.
Class The class describes the type of coordinate triplet.
Description of classes
The following table shows the classes in descending hierarchical order.
Class Characteristic Description
Ctrl Type Control points. Automatically assigned to entered
points or manually assigned to calculated points
from COGO.
Instrument source GPS, TPS or LGO
Number of triplets One
Adj Type Adjusted points using the adjustment program.
Instrument source LGO
Number of triplets One
Ref Type • Reference point received by a real-time rover
Viva Series, Glossary 1570
• Station point set by Setup application.
Instrument source GPS, TPS or LGO
Number of triplets One
Avge Type Averaged point calculated when more than one
coordinate triplet of class MEAS exist for the same
point ID unless Averaging Mode: Off.
Instrument source GPS or TPS
Number of triplets One
Meas Type • Measured points differentially corrected using
real-time phase, real-time code or post-
processing.
• Measured points with angles and distances.
• Calculated from some applications.
Instrument source GPS, TPS or LGO
Number of triplets Multiple. With more than one measured coordinate
triplet, the average for the position and the height
can be computed.
Nav Type Navigated points using uncorrected code solutions
of a single epoch or SPP positions.
Instrument source GPS
Number of triplets Multiple
Est Type Estimated points from LGO.
Class Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1571
Code Description
A code is a description which can be stored with an object or alone.
Instrument source LGO.
Possible number of
triplets
One
None Type Measured points with angles.
Instrument source TPS
Possible number of
triplets
Unlimited
Class Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1572
Structure of codes
Viva Series, Glossary 1573
Code group A code group allows codes belonging to the same theme to be grouped. Individual groups
can be activated or deactivated. The codes belonging to a deactivated code group cannot
be selected from the selectable list for code selection.
Code types The code type defines how and for which objects a code can be used. It is possible to create
a code of the same name but of different code types both on the instrument and in LGO.
Example: The code Oak can exist with code type point code and with code type line code.
Coordinate system -
elements
The five elements which define a coordinate system are:
• a transformation
• a projection
•an ellipsoid
• a geoid model
•a Country Specific Coordinate System model
Point code: To record a code directly with a point. Thematical point coding.
Line code: To record a code directly with a line. Thematical line coding.
Area code: To record a code directly with an area. Thematical area coding.
Free code: To record a code based on time in between objects.
Quick code: To start a point occupation and store the code by typing in one, two or
three predefined digits.
Viva Series, Glossary 1574
All these elements can be specified when creating a coordinate system.
a) WGS 1984 cartesian: X, Y, Z
b) WGS 1984 ellipsoid
c) WGS 1984 geodetic: Latitude, longitude,
ellipsoidal height
d) 7 parameter transformation: dX, dY, dZ, rx,
ry, rz, scale
e) Local cartesian: X, Y, Z
f) Local ellipsoid
g) Local geodetic: Latitude, longitude, ellip-
soidal height
h) Local projection
i) Local grid: Easting, Northing, orthometric
height
GS_042
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Z
e
d
f
g
h
i
a
b
c
Viva Series, Glossary 1575
Coordinate triplet A measured point consists of three coordinate components - two horizontal components
and one vertical component. The generic term for the three coordinate components is coor-
dinate triplet.
Depending on the class, a point ID can contain more than one coordinate triplet of the same
and/or of different classes.
CSCS field file CSCS field files can be used in the field to convert coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to
local grid without the need of transformation parameters.
CSCS model Description
Country Specific Coordinate System models
• are tables of correction values to convert coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local
grid without the need of transformation parameters.
• take the distortions of the mapping system into account.
• are an addition to an already defined coordinate system.
Types of CSCS models
The correction values of a CSCS model can be applied at different stages in the coordinate
conversion process. Depending on this stage, a CSCS model works differently. Three types
of CSCS models are supported. Their conversion process is as explained in the following
table. Any suitable geoid model can be combined with a geodetic CSCS model.
Creation: In LGO with export onto a data storage device or the internal memory of the
instrument.
Extension: *.csc
Type Description
Grid 1 Determination of preliminary grid coordinates by applying the specified
transformation, ellipsoid and map projection.
Viva Series, Glossary 1576
Coordinate quality for
GPS
Description
The Coordinate Quality is
• computed on the rover for code solutions and phase fixed solutions.
• an indicator for the quality of the observations.
• an indicator for the current satellite constellation.
• an indicator for different environmental conditions.
• derived such that there is at least a two third probability that the computed position
deviates from the true position by less than the CQ value.
• different from the standard deviation.
2 Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying a shift in Easting
and Northing interpolated in the grid file of the CSCS model.
Cartesian 1 Performing the specified transformation.
2 Determination of local cartesian coordinates by applying a 3D shift interpo-
lated in the grid file of the CSCS model.
3 Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying the specified
local ellipsoid and map projection.
Geodetic 1 Determination of local geodetic coordinates by applying a correction in lati-
tude and longitude interpolated from the file of the CSCS model.
2 Determination of the final local grid coordinates by applying the local map
projection.
)Using a geodetic CSCS model excludes the use of a transformation in
a coordinate system.
Type Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1577
CQ versus standard deviation
The standard deviation as CQ would often be too optimistic, therefore the computation of
the CQ is not based on the basic standard deviation algorithms. There is a 39.3% statistical
probability in 2D, that the computed position deviates from the true position, by less than
the standard deviation. This probability is not enough for a reliable quality indicator.
This unreliability is particularly true for low redundancy situations such as a constellation of
four satellites. In such a case, the RMS converges to zero and the standard deviation would
show an unrealistically small value.
Viva Series, Glossary 1578
Computation
Range
For a phase fixed solution: Centimetre level
Viva Series, Glossary 1579
Position CQ versus height CQ
All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the posi-
tion determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height determination,
satellites can appear in two quadrants. Fewer quadrants weakens the height position
compared to the plan position.
Coordinate quality for
TPS
Description
The Coordinate Quality is an indicator for the estimated quality of the point coordinates.
The coordinate quality of the measurements is used in point averaging.
For a code solution: From 0.4 m to 5 m.
Position determination with satellites
appearing in all four quadrants.
Height determination with satellites
appearing in two quadrants.
GS12_041
N
H
N
E
Viva Series, Glossary 1580
Vertical angles are always assuming zenith angles and not elevation angles. Standard devi-
ations of circle readings relate to one face measurements.
Column Description
Est 3D CQ Estimated 3D coordinate quality of computed position.
Est 2D CQ Estimated plan coordinate quality of computed position.
Est 1D CQ Estimated height coordinate quality of computed position.
Standard deviation of circle reading
σHz,V Standard deviation of circle reading if
σHz = σV.
σHz: Standard deviation of horizontal
circle reading.
σV: Standard deviation of vertical circle
reading.
Standard deviation of distance measurement
σD Standard deviation of distance measure-
ment.
cD Constant part of EDM accuracy.
ppm ppm part of EDM accuracy.
DSlope Distance.
ρ = 200
π
σ Hz, V σHz, V
ρ
rad gon
=
σ
D
= c
D
+ ppm * D
Viva Series, Glossary 1581
Working Example 1
1D CQ = 0.00207 m 2.1 mm
2D CQ = 0.00303 m 3.0 mm
3D CQ = 0.00367 m 3.7 mm
1D estimated coordinate quality
1D CQ Estimated coordinate quality of the
height.
V Zenith angle.
2D estimated coordinate quality
2D CQ Estimated horizontal coordinate quality.
3D estimated coordinate quality
3D CQ Estimated spatial coordinate quality.
Instrument: TXA1200
Angular accuracy: 2" = 6.1728*10-4 gon => σHz,V = 2"*
EDM accuracy: 2 mm + 2 ppm for an IR measurement
Slope distance: 150 m
Hz: 210 gon
V: 83 gon
1D CQ =
σ
2D
* cos
2
V + σ
2Hz, V
* D
2
* sin
2
V
2D CQ = σ2D * sin2 V + σ2Hz, V * D2
3D CQ = σ2D + σ2Hz, V * D2 * (1 + sin2 V)
Viva Series, Glossary 1582
Working Example 2
1D CQ = 0.0927 m
2D CQ = 0.0972 m
3D CQ = 0.1343 m
1D CQ = 0.00054 m 0.5 mm
2D CQ = 0.00120 m 1.2 mm
3D CQ = 0.00132 m 1.3 mm
Cross section assign-
ments
One cross section is valid until a new one is defined at a chainage ahead. Cross section defi-
nition can be at any chainage. The chainages need not necessarily correspond to chainages
where a design element starts or ends.
Cross section template A Cross section gives a profile view. It requires vertical alignment or actual elevation on each
chainage.
The elements involved are straight elements. The points are called vertices. You can option-
ally define slopes at the vertices most left and most right.
Points are defined by:
•DH and DV
• DH and slope in percentage
• DH and slope in ratio
Instrument: TXA1200
Angular accuracy: 2" = 6.1728*10-4 gon => σHz,V = 2"*
EDM accuracy: 2 mm + 2 ppm for an IR measurement
Slope distance: 7000 m
Hz: 210 gon
V: 83 gon
Viva Series, Glossary 1583
Curve For horizontal alignments: Circular curve with constant radius.
For vertical alignments: Circular vertical curve with constant radius.
Viva Series, Glossary 1584
H.3 D
Data Data is a generic term for points, lines and areas.
Device The hardware which is connected to the chosen port.
Devices are used to transmit and receive real-time data and to communicate with the
instrument, for example to download raw observations from a remote location.
Devices are used to transmit and receive measurement data.
Viva Series, Glossary 1585
H.4 G
Geoid model Description
GPS operates on the WGS 1984 ellipsoid and all heights obtained by measuring baselines
are ellipsoidal heights. Existing heights are usually orthometric heights, also called height
above the geoid, height above mean sea level or levelled height. The mean sea level corre-
sponds to a surface known as the geoid. The relation between ellipsoidal height and ortho-
metric height is
Orthometric Height = Ellipsoidal Height - Geoid Separation N
N value and geoid model
The geoid separation (N value) is the distance between the geoid and the reference ellip-
soid. It can refer to the WGS 1984 or to the local ellipsoid. It is not a constant except over
a WGS 1984 ellipsoid
bGeoid
P0 Measured point
d1 Ellipsoidal height
d2 Geoid separation N, is negative when the
geoid is below the ellipsoid
GS_043
P0
d1
d2
a
b
Viva Series, Glossary 1586
maybe small flat areas such as 5 km x 5 km. Therefore it is necessary to model the N value
to obtain accurate orthometric heights. The modelled N values form a geoid model for an
area. With a geoid model attached to a coordinate system, N values for the measured points
can be determined. Ellipsoidal heights can be converted to orthometric heights and back.
Geoid models are an approximation of the N value. In terms of accuracy, they can vary
considerably and global models in particular should be used with caution. If the accuracy of
the geoid model is not known, it can be safer to use local control points with orthometric
heights and apply a transformation to approximate the local geoid.
Geoid field file The geoid separations in a geoid field file can be used in the field to change between ellip-
soidal and orthometric heights.
GPS mode Current active instrument is GPS.
GPS points The coordinates of GPS points are always stored in the WGS 1984 coordinates system. WGS
1984 is a three-dimensional Cartesian coordinate system with the origin at the centre of the
Earth. WGS 1984 coordinates are given as X,Y,Z Cartesian coordinates, or latitude, longitude
and height (above the WGS 1984 ellipsoid).
GPS points are stored as class Meas or class Nav:
Creation: In LGO with export onto a data storage device or the internal memory of the
instrument.
Extension: *.gem
Viva Series, Glossary 1587
• Class Meas: If there are 5 or more satellites, and the distance to the reference is not
too great for the prevailing ionospheric conditions, SmartStation will compute a GPS
real-time position. The CQ indicator for this type of point is about 0.01 m to 0.05 m.
• Class Nav: If the reference stops working, or if the communication link between the
reference and SmartStation fails, SmartStation will only compute a navigation posi-
tion. The CQ indicator for this type of point is about 3 m to 20 m.
GPS surveying tech-
niques
Depending on the surveying task and the instruments being used, certain GPS surveying
techniques are possible. The three existing types of GPS surveying techniques are:
GPS surveying
technique
Characteristic Description
Static Way of working • Base set up over a point with accurately known
coordinates.
• Rover set up over a point with known or
unknown coordinates.
• Data recorded at both instruments simultane-
ously at the same data rate, typically 15 s, 30 s
or 60 s.
• Post-processing is compulsory.
Use For long baselines, geodetic networks, tectonic
plate studies.
Accuracy High over long and very long baselines.
Working speed Slow
Viva Series, Glossary 1588
Post-proc-
essed kine-
matic
Way of working • Base set up as static over a point with accurately
known coordinates.
• Rover moves from one point to another. The
instrument remains turned on while moving.
• Static and moving raw observations are collected.
• Post-processing is compulsory.
Use For detail surveys and measuring many points in
quick succession.
Accuracy High for baselines up to 30 km.
Working speed Efficient for surveying many points that are close
together.
GPS surveying
technique
Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1589
Refer to standard surveying literature for more details on GNSS surveying techniques.
Real-time,
base and rover
Way of working • Base set up as static over a point with accurately
known coordinates in WGS 1984.
• Rover equipment is set up on a pole and moves
from one unknown point to another.
• A data link, for example a radio or digital cellular
phone, transmits satellite data from the base to
the rover.
• Data coming from the base and GNSS signals
received on the rover are processed together on
the rover as the survey is carried out in real-time.
• Ambiguities are solved, coordinates of the
surveyed points are calculated and displayed.
• applications as on conventional instruments like
stakeout or COGO can be performed.
• Post-processing is optional.
Use For surveying detail with many points in one area.
Accuracy High for baselines up to 30 km.
Working speed Efficient as the results are generated in the field.
GPS surveying
technique
Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1590
H.5 H
Horizontal Alignment The horizontal alignment defines the road axis of a project. Horizontal alignments are
comprised of the elements:
• straights (tangents)
• curves (arcs)
• spirals (clothoid or cubic parabola)
• bloss curves (element type used for railway track design)
Each element involved is defined by individual horizontal design elements such as chainage,
Easting, Northing, radius and parameter A.
Viva Series, Glossary 1591
H.6 I
Initialisation For cm positioning with GNSS, the ambiguities must be fixed. The process of fixing ambigu-
ities is called initialisation. In order to carry out an initialisation, the active working style must
be a real-time rover configuration allowing for phase fixed solutions. A minimum of five
satellites on L1 and L2 is required.
The three existing types of initialisation methods are:
Initialisa-
tion method
Characteristic Description
Moving Principle The rover instrument is moved from the beginning of
the GNSS operation on, recording data. The trajec-
tory of the moving rover is recorded. Ambiguities are
fixed while moving. A new initialisation starts auto-
matically when, after losing the minimum number of
required satellites, enough satellites are tracked
again.
Antenna setup On a pole.
Beginning of initialisa-
tion
Immediately.
Use For fast initialisations over distances up to 30 km.
Static Principle The rover instrument is kept stationary at the begin-
ning of the GNSS operation.
Antenna setup On a pole with a quickstand.
Beginning of initialisa-
tion
Immediately.
Viva Series, Glossary 1592
Instrument source The instrument source describes where the coordinate triplet was measured or entered. The
options are GPS, TPS, LGO or Level.
Interface The procedures, codes and protocols that enable two entities to interact for an exchange
of data. Each interface is given a meaningful display name which enables easy distinction
between interfaces.
Use If it is proving difficult to initialise while moving and
no known point is available.
Known point Principle The rover instrument is kept stationary over a point
with known coordinates at the beginning of the
GNSS operation.
Antenna setup On a pole with a quickstand.
Beginning of initialisa-
tion
After selecting the known point.
Use If it is proving difficult to initialise while moving and
to speed up an initialisation while static.
Initialisa-
tion method
Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1593
H.7 N
Ntrip Networked Transport of RTCM via Internet Protocol
• is a protocol streaming real-time corrections over the Internet.
• is a generic protocol based on the Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP/1.1.
• is used to send differential correction data or other kinds of streaming data to stationary
or mobile users over the Internet. This process allows simultaneous computer, laptop,
PDA, or instrument connections to a broadcasting host.
• supports wireless Internet access through mobile IP networks like digital cellular phones
or modems.
The Ntrip Server could be the GPS instrument itself. This setup means the GPS instrument is
both the Ntrip Source generating the real-time data and also the NTRIP Server transferring
this data to the Ntrip Caster.
Ntrip Caster The Ntrip Caster
Ntrip and its role in the Internet
NTRiPCaster
InternetServer
GS_044
NTRiPClient
NTRiPServer
Viva Series, Glossary 1594
• is an Internet server handling various data streams to and from the Ntrip Servers and
Ntrip Clients.
• checks the requests from Ntrip Clients and Ntrip Servers to see if they are registered to
receive or provide real-time corrections.
• decides whether there is streaming data to be sent or to be received.
Ntrip Client The Ntrip Client receives data streams. This setup could be, for example a real-time rover
receiving real-time corrections.
In order to receive real-time corrections, the Ntrip Client must first send
•a user ID
• a password
• an identification name, the so-called Mountpoint, from which real-time corrections are
to be received
to the Ntrip Caster.
Ntrip Server The Ntrip Server transfers data streams.
In order to send real-time corrections, the Ntrip Server must first send
• a password
• an identification name, the so-called Mountpoint, where the real-time corrections come
from
to the Ntrip Caster.
Before sending real-time corrections to the Ntrip Caster for the first time, a registration
form must be completed. This form is available from the Ntrip Caster administration centre.
Refer to the Internet.
Ntrip Source The Ntrip Source generates data streams. This setup could be base sending out real-time
corrections.
Ntrip system compo-
nents
Ntrip consists of three system components:
Viva Series, Glossary 1595
• Ntrip Clients • Ntrip Servers • Ntrip Caster
Viva Series, Glossary 1596
H.8 O
Objects Objects
• are points, lines and areas.
• have a unique identification ID. This ID is the point ID, the line ID and the area ID.
• can have a code attached. This code is either a point code, a line code or an area code
depending on the type of object.
Viva Series, Glossary 1597
H.9 P
Parabola Parabolic vertical curve with constant rate of grade change.
Parameter A Refer to "A (parameter)".
Port A connection through which a separate device can communicate with the instrument.
Viva Series, Glossary 1598
H.10 S
Source The source describes the application or functionality that generated a coordinate triplet and
the method with which it was created.
Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument
source
ASCII file Convert Data, Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job GPS or TPS
Arc base pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Base Point GPS or TPS
Arc centre pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Centre Point GPS or TPS
Arc offset pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Offset Point GPS or TPS
Arc segment pt COGO, Arc Calculation - Segmentation GPS or TPS
Backward brg-dst Hidden point measurements, Backward Bearing
and Distance
GPS
Bearing-Distance Hidden point measurements, Bearing and
Distance
GPS
Chainage % offset Hidden point measurements, Chainage and Offset GPS
COGO Area Div COGO Area Division GPS or TPS
COGO Shift/Rtn COGO, Shift, Rotate & Scale (Manual)
COGO, Shift, Rotate & Scale (Match Pts)
GPS or TPS
COGO Traverse COGO, Traverse GPS or TPS
Copied Point Convert Data, Copy points between jobs GPS or TPS
Cross Section Survey Cross Section GPS or TPS
Using 2 bearings Hidden point measurements, Double Bearing GPS
Viva Series, Glossary 1599
Using 2 distances Hidden point measurements, Double Distance GPS
GSI file Convert Data, Import ASCII/GSI Data to Job GPS or TPS
Hidden Point Hidden Point, auxiliary points TPS
Intsct (Brg Brg) COGO, Intersection - Bearing - Bearing GPS or TPS
Intsct (Brg Dst) COGO, Intersection - Bearing - Distance GPS or TPS
Intsct (Dst Dst) COGO, Intersection - Distance - Distance GPS or TPS
Intsct (4 Pts) COGO, Intersection - By points GPS or TPS
LandXML Design to Field in LGO converting data from
LandXML software to be used in the field
LGO
Line Base Pt COGO, Line Calculation - Base Point GPS or TPS
Line Offset Pt COGO, Line Calculation - Offset Point GPS or TPS
Line Segmt Pt COGO, Line Calculation - Segmentation GPS or TPS
None No information on the source is available GPS or TPS
RefLine (Grid) Reference Line, staked out in a defined grid GPS or TPS
RefLine (Meas) Reference Line, measured GPS or TPS
RefLine (Seg) Reference Line, segmented GPS or TPS
RefLine (Stake) Reference Line, staked out GPS or TPS
Ref Plane (Meas) Reference Plane, measured GPS or TPS
Ref Plane (Scan) Reference Plane, scan TPS
RoadRunner Road Runner GPS or TPS
Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument
source
Viva Series, Glossary 1600
Sets of Angles Sets of Angles TPS
Setup (Known BS) Setup, Known Backsight Point TPS
Setup (LocCoord) Setup, Local Coordinates TPS
Setup (Loc Rsct) Setup, Local Resection TPS
Setup (Ori&Ht) Setup, Orientation and Height Transfer TPS
Setup (Resect) Setup, Resection TPS
Setup (Resect H) Setup, Resection Helmert TPS
Setup (Set Az) Setup, Set Azimuth TPS
Srvy Auto Offset Survey Auto Points, automatically recorded with
offsets
GPS or TPS
Stakeout Stakeout GPS or TPS
Survey Survey, measured TPS
Survey (Auto) Survey Auto Points, automatically recorded TPS
Survey (Event) Survey, Event input GPS
Survey (Instant) Survey, measured with Pt Occupation: Instanta-
neous in CONFIGURE Point Occupation
Settings
GPS
Survey (Rem Pt) Survey, Remote Point TPS
Survey (Static) Survey, measured with Pt Occupation: Normal in
CONFIGURE Point Occupation Settings
GPS
Traverse Traverse TPS
Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument
source
Viva Series, Glossary 1601
Spiral For horizontal alignments:
Spirals are used to connect straights and curves. A full spiral has an infinite radius at its start
or end point whereas a partial has a finite radius at its start and end point.
In. Radius at the start point is bigger than at the end point.
Out. Radius at the start point is smaller than at the end point.
Straight Straight line between two points. Its end point is identical with the beginning of a curve or
spiral. The tangent is perpendicular to the radius of the curve.
Sub class The sub class describes certain classes in detail. It indicates the status of the position when
a coordinate triplet was measured and how the coordinates were determined.
Unknown -GPS or TPS
User Application Customised applications GPS or TPS
User entered Manually entered point GPS or TPS
Source Originated from application/functionality Instrument
source
Sub class Description Instrument
source
COGO Indirect coordinate determination with application
COGO.
GPS or TPS
None Direction is available but no coordinates. TPS
Height is available but no position coordinates. Level
TPS Measured with distances and angles. TPS
Fixed (Height) Manually entered and fixed in height. GPS or TPS
Viva Series, Glossary 1602
Fixed (Position) Manually entered and fixed in position. GPS or TPS
Fixed (Pos & Ht) Manually entered and fixed in position and height. GPS or TPS
GNSS Code Only Direct coordinate determination with code solu-
tion.
GPS
GNSS Fixed Direct coordinate determination with phase fixed
solution.
GPS
GNSS Float Direct coordinate determination with autonomous
solution coming from LGO.
GPS
Hidden Point Indirect coordinate determination with hidden
point measurements.
GPS or TPS
Sub class Description Instrument
source
Viva Series, Glossary 1603
H.11 T
Tangent Refer to straight.
TPS mode Current active instrument is TPS.
Transformations A transformation is the process of converting coordinates from one geodetic datum to
another.
Requirements
• Transformation parameters.
• In some cases a local ellipsoid.
• In some cases a map projection.
• In some cases a geoid model.
Transformation parameters
A transformation consists of shifts, rotations and scale factors, depending on the type of
transformation used. Not all these parameters are always required. These parameters can
already be known, or can be computed.
Description of transformations
• Classic 3D, also called Helmert transformation
•Onestep
•Twostep
Viva Series, Glossary 1604
Transformation Characteristic Description
Classic 3D Principle Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian
to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map
projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordi-
nates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most
rigorous transformation type and keeps the full
geometrical information.
Positions and
heights
Positions and heights are linked. The accuracy is fully
maintained and does not distort the measurements.
Use When measurements are to be kept homogenous.
Requirements • The positions and heights are known in
WGS 1984 and in the local system for at least
three points. Four points or more are recom-
mended to obtain higher redundancy.
• Parameters of the local ellipsoid.
• Parameters of the local map projection, to
convert between grid coordinates and geodetic
coordinates.
• Parameters of the local geoid model, to convert
between orthometric and ellipsoidal heights. This
information is not compulsory.
Area Especially wide networks with large height differ-
ences. Local grid coordinates must be accurate.
Advantage • Accuracy of the measurements is maintained.
Viva Series, Glossary 1605
• It can be used over any area as long as the local
coordinates, including heights, are accurate.
Disadvantage • The local ellipsoid and map projection must be
known for the local grid coordinates.
• In order to obtain accurate ellipsoidal heights,
the geoid separation at the measured points
must be known. This information can be deter-
mined from a geoid model.
Onestep Principle Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to
local grid and vice versa without knowledge about
the local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure:
1) The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a
temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The
central meridian of this projection passes
through the centre of gravity of the common
control points.
2) The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates
for the WGS 1984 points.
3) These preliminary grid coordinates are matched
with the local grid control points. The Easting and
Northing shifts, the rotation and scale factor
between these two sets of points can then be
computed. This process is known as a classic 2D
transformation.
4) The height transformation is a single dimension
height approximation.
Transformation Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1606
Positions and
heights
The position and height transformations are sepa-
rated.
Use When measurements are to be forced to tie in with
local existing control. For example:
A site where the coordinates of the control points
are based on a purely local grid. The coordinate
values within this grid are arbitrary and are in no way
connected with any ellipsoid or map projection.
Obviously a Classic 3D transformation cannot be
used here, as cartesian coordinates cannot be calcu-
lated from such a grid.
Requirements • The position is known in WGS 1984 and in the
local system for at least one point. Three or more
points are recommended to obtain redundancy.
• Additional height information for one point
enables the transformation of heights.
• Parameters of the local geoid model. This infor-
mation is not compulsory.
• No parameters of the local ellipsoid.
• No parameters of the local map projection.
Area • Limited to about 10 x 10 km as no projection
scale factor is applied and a standard Transverse
Mercator Projection is used to compute the
preliminary WGS 1984 grid coordinates.
Transformation Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1607
• For areas without large height differences.
Points and trans-
formation param-
eters
The transformation parameters determined depend
on the number of available points with position
information.
• One point: Classic 2D with shift in X and Y.
• Two points: Classic 2D with shift in X and Y, rota-
tion about Z and scale.
• More than two points: Classic 2D with shift in X
and Y, rotation about Z, scale and residuals.
Points and height
transformation
The type of height transformation performed
depends on the number of available points with
height information.
• No point: No height transformation.
• One point: Heights are shifted to fit to the height
control point.
• Two points: Average height shift between the
two height control points.
• Three points: Tilted plane through the three
height control points to approximate the local
heights.
• More than three points: Best fitting average
plane.
Transformation Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1608
Advantage • Errors in height do not propagate into errors in
position since the height and position transfor-
mations are separated.
• If local heights have low accuracy or do not exist,
a transformation of position can still be calcu-
lated and vice versa.
• The height points and position points do not
have to be the same points.
• No parameters of the local ellipsoid and map
projection is required.
• Parameters can be computed with a minimum of
points. Care must be taken when computing
parameters using just one or two local points, as
the parameters calculated are valid in the vicinity
of the points used for the transformation.
Disadvantage • Restriction in the area over which the transfor-
mation can be applied. This restriction is because
there is no provision for scale factor in the
projection.
• The accuracy in height depends on the undula-
tion of the geoid. The bigger the geoid variations
the less accurate the results are.
Transformation Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1609
Twostep Principle Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the
Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position
and height separately, but is not restricted to
smaller areas. Procedure:
1) The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common
control points are shifted closely to the local
datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transforma-
tion. This Classic 3D pre-transformation is typi-
cally a rough transformation valid for the country
of the local datum.
2) The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary
grid, but this time using the true map projection
of the local points.
3) A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with
the Onestep transformation.
Positions and
heights
The position and height transformations are sepa-
rated.
Use When measurements are to be forced to tie in with
local existing control in areas larger than
10 x 10 km.
Requirements • The position is known in WGS 1984 and in the
local system for at least one point. Four points or
more are recommended to obtain higher redun-
dancy.
• Parameters of the local ellipsoid.
Transformation Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1610
• Parameters of the local map projection.
• Parameters of a pre-transformation.
Area Virtually any area as long as the local coordinates are
accurate.
Points and trans-
formation param-
eters
Identical with the Onestep transformation.
Points and height
transformation
Identical with the Onestep transformation.
Advantage • Errors in height do not propagate into errors in
position since the height and position transfor-
mations are separated.
• If local heights have low accuracy or do not exist,
a transformation of position can still be calcu-
lated and vice versa.
• The height points and position points do not
have to be the same points.
• Fits much better over larger areas than a
Onestep transformation. Reason:
Transformation Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1611
The first step of a Twostep transformation avoids
any distortions because the preliminary grid
coordinates are built on a different ellipsoid than
the local points. The second step ensures that
the influence of the map projection scale factor
is taken into account before the final 2D trans-
formation is computed.
Disadvantage • The local ellipsoid must be known.
• The map projection must be known.
• A pre-transformation must be known. A null
transformation can be used.
• In order to obtain accurate ellipsoidal heights,
the geoid separation at the measured points
must be known. This information can be deter-
mined from a geoid model.
Transformation Characteristic Description
Viva Series, Glossary 1612
H.12 V
Vertical alignment The vertical alignment gives information about the pattern of heights of the road axis as it
is defined in the horizontal alignment.
A vertical alignment is comprised of the elements:
• tangents (straight segments)
•curves
• parabolas.
Each element involved is defined by individual vertical design elements such as chainage,
Easting, Northing, radius and chainage P.
Viva Series, Glossary 1613
H.13 W
WGS 1984 WGS 1984 is the global geocentric datum to which all GPS positioning information is referred
to.
Viva Series, Index 1614
Index
3
3D transformation .................................................. 1604
A
Absolute coordinate difference
Display ................................................................... 88
Limit exceeded ....................................................... 88
Absolute difference between two points .................... 87
Access
Find target point ................................................ 1300
Joystick .................................................................. 40
Known backsight ................................................ 1275
Multiple backsights ............................................. 1282
Orientate to line ................................................ 1288
Orientate with compass ......................................... 44
Positioning Hz/V ..................................................... 42
Remote point ..................................................... 1438
Resection ........................................................... 1287
Set orientation ................................................... 1275
Sets of angles .................................................... 1232
Setup application ............................................... 1262
Survey ................................................................ 1353
TPS settings ........................................................... 34
Transfer height .................................................. 1286
Access Point Name .................................................... 366
Activate
Code filter ............................................................ 111
Code group ..........................................................111
Adapter, screw-to-stub .............................................235
Add point to line .......................................................100
Adj, class .................................................................1569
Adjustment results ..................................................1475
Alignment
Backup ..............................................................1016
Horizontal .........................................................1010
Vertical ..............................................................1010
Preparing data ......................................................828
Staking .................................................................828
Alignment Editor
Configuration ....................................................1020
Menu .................................................................1019
Angle, display format ................................................487
Annotations
Add ....................................................................1344
Configuration .......................................................262
Recall .................................................................1344
Antenna
Calibration ............................................................230
Create ..................................................................214
Edit ......................................................................214
Recall deleted default ...........................................213
Antenna file, directory .............................................1513
Antenna height .........................................................229
Determine ............................................................233
Viva Series, Index 1615
Antenna management, access ................................... 213
Antennas .................................................................. 213
Default ................................................................ 211
APN .......................................................................... 366
Application
COGO ................................................................... 563
Customised .......................................................... 562
Delete .................................................................. 502
Description .......................................................... 561
Determine coordinate system
Traditional ....................................................... 698
Loadable and non-loadable .................................. 562
Reference Line ..................................................... 763
Reference plane ................................................... 842
Sets of angles .................................................... 1229
Setup ................................................................. 1259
Stakeout ............................................................ 1301
Survey
Auto points ................................................... 1357
Hidden points ............................................... 1401
Survey Cross Section .......................................... 1384
Survey GPS
General ......................................................... 1336
Survey TPS
General ......................................................... 1353
Remote point ................................................ 1436
TPS hidden point ................................................ 1427
Traverse ............................................................. 1442
Upload ................................................................. 502
Application program file, directory ...........................1513
Applications memory, formatting ...............................506
Applications, general information ..............................561
Arc Calculations,COGO calculation method .................629
Arc, reference ...........................................................763
Area
Code ..................................................................1573
Create ....................................................................93
Delete ....................................................................75
Edit ........................................................................98
Area management .......................................................92
Areas,sorting and filter ..............................................104
Arrow, orientate to
Reference Line .....................................................778
As built check, definition ...........................................872
ASCII
Export format .......................................................158
Import format ......................................................148
ASCII input
Connection ...........................................................260
Status ..................................................................403
AT Msg ......................................................................371
Atmospheric ppm ......................................................189
ATR
Measurement .......................................................513
Search ..................................................................513
Window ................................................................514
Viva Series, Index 1616
Attribute
Add for
Free code ........................................................ 453
Thematical code ...................................... 447, 466
Description ........................................................ 1565
Type in new ......................................................... 119
Attribute mismatch ................................................... 469
Attribute type ......................................................... 1567
Attribute value region ............................................. 1567
Attribute value type ................................................ 1568
Auto points
Averaging ........................................................... 1358
Coding ............................................................... 1357
Configure ........................................................... 1359
Properties .......................................................... 1358
Store ................................................................. 1361
Auto position, Roads ................................................. 897
Automatic aiming ...................................................... 512
Automatic Prism Search ............................................ 185
Automatic targeting mode ........................................ 179
Auxiliary points
Azimuth computation ......................................... 1418
Hidden point measurements .............................. 1403
Averaging .................................................................... 86
Auto points ........................................................ 1358
Configure ............................................................... 57
Cross section elements ...................................... 1386
Hidden points .................................................... 1403
Include/exclude coordinate triplet .......................... 88
Limit, exceeded ......................................................91
Offset points ......................................................1375
Sets of angles ....................................................1231
Staked points .....................................................1304
Traverse points ...................................................1443
Averaging mode ......................................................1568
Define ....................................................................86
Avge, class ..............................................................1570
Azimuth, compute
Determine coordinate system ...............................745
Hidden point measurements ...............................1416
Azimuth/bearing fields ...............................................488
Azmth .....................................................................1419
B
Backsight point, check .................................................37
Backward in Survey Cross Section ............................1399
Backwards Bearing & Distance
Hidden point measurements ...............................1408
Backwards compatible .............................................1512
Base pt ...................................................................1438
Basic terms .............................................................1010
Batter rail ................................................................1085
Battery, status ..........................................................378
Bearing ......................................................................488
Bearing & Distance
Hidden point measurements ...............................1404
Bearing/azimuth fields ...............................................488
Beep .........................................................................496
Auto points ........................................................1362
Viva Series, Index 1617
Hz-Sector ............................................................. 497
Screen ................................................................. 497
C
Cables ..................................................................... 1523
Calculate sets of angles .......................................... 1247
Calculator .................................................................. 523
Operating mode ................................................... 523
Calibrate touch screen .............................................. 496
Calibration, antennas ................................................ 230
Cant Left/Right
Description for Rail Check .................................. 1167
Carriage way ............................................................. 974
Carrier ....................................................................... 235
Cassini projection ...................................................... 140
Catch point ............................................................... 975
CDMA ........................................................................ 324
Connection, configure .......................................... 329
Centreline ................................................................. 999
Chainage .............................................................. 994
Extension ............................................................. 988
Chainage ................................................................... 975
Ahead ...................................................... 1569, 1582
Back ................................................................... 1569
Centreline ............................................................ 994
Equation .............................................................. 983
Format ................................................................. 485
Gap ...................................................................... 983
Overlap ................................................................ 983
Reference Line ............................................. 767, 774
Chainage & Offset
Hidden point measurements ...............................1407
Chainage equation ..................................................1569
Edit ...................................................................1019
Chainage, definition ..................................................990
Change
Radio channel, requirements ................................336
Change face ................................................................35
Channel changing, requirements ................................336
Check
Backsight point .......................................................37
Recorded point .......................................................37
Check tunnel .............................................................873
Class .......................................................................1569
Classic 3D transformation ........................................1604
Results .................................................................727
Classification of points, hierarchy ............................1569
Clear To Send ............................................................372
Clockwise, Tunnel ....................................................1210
Cmnd.. ......................................................................261
CMR/CMR+, data format ............................................277
Cntrl..
Configure station to dial ...............................348, 352
Code
Area ...................................................................1573
Create ..................................................................119
Description .........................................................1571
Edit ......................................................................119
Free ...................................................................1573
Viva Series, Index 1618
Line ................................................................... 1573
Point .................................................................. 1573
Quick ................................................................. 1573
Code filter for lines and areas ................................... 111
Code group ............................................................. 1573
Activate/deactivate .............................................. 111
Manage ................................................................ 122
Code mismatch ......................................................... 468
Code type ....................................................... 120, 1573
Codelist, directory ................................................... 1512
Codelists ................................................................... 114
Codes
Manage
Job codes .......................................................... 68
Point, line, area codes ..................................... 117
Sort
Codelist management ...................................... 118
Data management .......................................... 112
Coding
Auto points ........................................................ 1357
COGO points ........................................................ 564
Configure settings ................................................ 426
Cross section elements ...................................... 1385
Hidden points .................................................... 1402
Offset points ..................................................... 1375
Staked points ..................................................... 1303
Thematical
With codelist ................................................... 446
Without codelist .............................................. 451
COGO ........................................................................563
Arc Calculations ....................................................566
Area Division ........................................................566
Configure .............................................................568
Distance input/output ..........................................568
Intersections ........................................................566
Inverse .................................................................565
Line Calculations ...................................................566
Modify values .......................................................694
Shift, Rotate & Scale ............................................567
Traverse ...............................................................565
COGO points
Coding ..................................................................564
Properties ............................................................564
Combined Scale Factor ..............................................741
Command, send to device .........................................264
Compass, orientate with ..............................................44
Compatible with Leica System1200 .........................1512
Compensator .............................................................192
Configuration .......................................................192
Comps .........................................................................35
Computation, offset point .......................................1375
Configuration
Hidden point .....................................................1433
Compensator ........................................................192
Offsets .................................................................197
Remote point .....................................................1440
Sets of angles ....................................................1235
Setup .................................................................1263
Viva Series, Index 1619
Traverse ............................................................. 1451
Configure
SBAS .................................................................... 287
Connection
Configure ............................................................. 251
Connections, status .................................................. 401
Constant ................................................................. 1007
Control points ........................................................... 698
Convert to RoadRunner ................................. 1019, 1061
Converters, Tunnel .................................................. 1187
Coordinate geometry calculations ............................. 563
Coordinate Quality
GPS .................................................................... 1576
TPS .................................................................... 1579
Coordinate system .................................................... 124
Active .................................................................. 125
Create .................................................................. 128
Default ................................................................ 125
Determine ............................................ 708, 730, 757
Edit ...................................................................... 128
Recall deleted default .......................................... 127
Turn into user defined default .............................. 127
Update ................................................................. 722
Coordinate system file, directory ............................. 1513
Coordinate system management, access ................... 126
Coordinate triplet .................................................... 1575
Copy data ................................................................. 158
Copy points/data between jobs ................................. 175
Counterclockwise, Tunnel ........................................ 1210
Country Specific Coordinate System models ............1575
CQ
GPS ....................................................................1576
TPS .....................................................................1579
Create
Area .......................................................................93
Code ....................................................................119
Codelist ................................................................116
Coordinate system ...............................................128
CSCS models .........................................................147
Ellipsoid ................................................................137
Geoid model .........................................................146
ID template ..........................................................422
Line ........................................................................93
Point ......................................................................77
Prism ....................................................................183
Projection .............................................................141
Reference arc .......................................................782
Reference line ......................................................782
Transformation .....................................................133
Traverse .............................................................1445
Cross section assignment ........................................1582
Check ................................................................1056
Create ...............................................................1057
Delete .....................................................1056, 1059
Edit .........................................................1019, 1057
Cross section element
Average ..............................................................1386
Coding ................................................................1385
Viva Series, Index 1620
Properties .......................................................... 1386
Cross Section Survey, configure .............................. 1398
Cross section template ............................................ 1582
Add a layer ........................................................ 1051
Create ............................................................... 1049
Delete ............................................................... 1048
Duplicate .......................................................... 1048
Edit ......................................................... 1019, 1049
Cross slope ............................................................... 978
Stake out ........................................................... 1109
Cross slope Road, Info page ...................................... 914
Crown Road
Info page ............................................................. 926
Crown, Stakeout ..................................................... 1113
csc file .................................................................... 1575
CSCS field file .......................................................... 1575
Directory ............................................................ 1512
CSCS model ............................................................... 147
Create from data storage device .......................... 147
Description ........................................................ 1575
Types ................................................................. 1575
CSF ........................................................................... 741
Ctrl
CDMA ................................................................... 329
Class .................................................................. 1569
GPS Real-Time ...................................................... 337
GSM ..................................................................... 325
Internet/Ethernet ................................................. 343
Modem ................................................................ 333
Radios for remote control ....................................340
RS232 ..................................................................342
CTS ............................................................................372
Current key ...............................................................469
Current position, status .............................................394
Curve .......................................................................1038
Customised application ..............................................562
Cut-off angle .....................................................208, 411
D
Data ........................................................................1584
Copy between jobs ...............................................175
Preparing for staking alignment ............................828
Data export ...............................................................158
Directory ......................................................161, 162
Data format, real-time ......................................277, 277
Data management .......................................................72
Access ....................................................................73
Data storage device ................................................1192
Daylight point ............................................................975
DBX .........................................................................1192
Deactivate
Code filter ............................................................111
Code group ..........................................................111
Default prisms ...........................................................181
Default targets ..........................................................181
Default, recall
Antenna ...............................................................213
Coordinate system ...............................................127
Devices ................................................................369
Viva Series, Index 1621
Ellipsoid ............................................................... 136
Projection ............................................................ 139
Survey screen settings ............................... 432, 1363
Target .................................................................. 182
Deflection error ...................................................... 1021
Delete
Antenna ............................................................... 213
Application ........................................................... 502
Code .................................................................... 118
Codelist ................................................................ 115
Coordinate system ............................................... 126
Coordinate triplet ................................................... 88
Cross section template ....................................... 1387
Element in alignment ......................................... 1024
Element in cross section template ...................... 1389
Ellipsoid ............................................................... 135
Format file ....573, 780, 862, 903, 1236, 1268, 1315,
1454, 1482
From Data Log ..................................................... 103
Geoid model ........................................................ 145
ID template .......................................................... 420
Inverse COGO calculation ...................................... 692
Job ......................................................................... 67
Language ............................................................. 491
Line/area ............................................................... 75
Matched points ............................................ 687, 712
Point ...................................................................... 73
Point from line ..................................................... 100
Projection ............................................................ 138
Report sheet .573, 780, 862, 903, 1236, 1268, 1314,
1454, 1482
RTK Profile ...................................................204, 205
Surface ...............................................................1490
Target ..................................................................182
Transformation .....................................................131
Working style .......................................................481
Descr ........................................................................403
Design element .......................................................1011
Bloss curve ........................................................1590
Parabola ..................................................1583, 1597
Spiral .................................................................1601
Straight (tangent) ...................................1601, 1603
Design height ..................................................989, 1098
Design to Field
Description .........................................................1143
Installing ............................................................1143
Devce.. ..............................................................315, 368
Device
Configure .............................................................371
Create ..................................................................371
Description .........................................................1584
Edit ......................................................................371
Device height
Hidden point measurements ...............................1424
Devices
Configuration .......................................................356
Configure .............................................................368
Control .................................................................324
Viva Series, Index 1622
For Internet, configure ......................................... 368
Overview .............................................................. 356
Recall deleted default .......................................... 369
Difference limit exceeded in Stakeout ..................... 1325
Digital cellular phone
Control ................................................................. 324
Version ................................................................ 388
Digital cellular phones ............................................... 357
Requirements for using ........................................ 357
Supported ............................................................ 358
Dimensions, carrier and adapter ................................ 235
Display ...................................................................... 496
Settings ............................................................... 431
Distance input/output in COGO ................................. 568
Distribution
Residuals COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale .................. 572
Residuals throughout transformation area ........... 706
Documentation ............................................................. 3
Double Stereographic projection ............................... 140
Downloads, Tunnel ................................................. 1187
Drilling rig orientation ............................................. 1217
DTM height ..................................................... 989, 1098
DTM job, directory ................................................... 1513
DTM layer, select ..................................................... 1329
DXF ........................................................................... 149
Data export ......................................................... 162
Data import ........................................................ 156
Export format ....................................................... 158
Dynamic ATR window ................................................ 186
Dynamic PS window ..................................................186
E
EAO
Configure .............................................................270
Hidden point measurements ...............................1409
Edit
Area .......................................................................98
Code ....................................................................119
Codelist ................................................................116
Coordinate system ...............................................128
Ellipsoid ................................................................137
Job .........................................................................63
Line ........................................................................98
Measured coordinate triplet ...................................88
Point ......................................................................82
Projection .............................................................141
Transformation .....................................................133
Traverse .............................................................1445
EDM ..........................................................178, 511, 511
EGL ...........................................................................520
EGNOS, real-time data format ...................................281
Electronic Distance Measurement ..............................511
Electronic serial number ............................................331
Elevation .................................................................1582
local ellipsoidal height .......................................1038
local orthometric height ....................................1038
Elevation mask ..................................................208, 411
Ellipsoid
Create ..................................................................137
Viva Series, Index 1623
Delete .................................................................. 135
Edit ...................................................................... 137
Recall deleted default .......................................... 136
Ellipsoid distance in COGO ......................................... 569
Ellipsoid management, access ................................... 135
Ellipsoidal height ..................................................... 1585
Ellipsoids ................................................................... 135
Emitting Guide Light EGL ........................................... 520
End date, line/area ...................................................... 98
End time, line/area ...................................................... 98
ESN number .............................................................. 331
Est, class ................................................................. 1570
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay System ............................................ 281, 287
Exceeded limit
Absolute coordinate difference .............................. 88
Average ................................................................. 91
Coordinate quality ................................................ 217
Difference in Stakeout ....................................... 1325
Height
Reference Line ................................................ 776
Stakeout ....................................................... 1310
Position
Reference Line ................................................ 776
Stakeout ....................................................... 1310
Exclude coordinate triplet from averaging ................... 88
Expiry date, software maintenance ........................... 510
Export ......................................................................... 64
Export & copy data ................................................... 158
Export data ...............................................................158
Export format ............................................................158
Export Job, connection ..............................................273
Export key .................................................................467
Exporting cross section elements ............................1386
F
Favourites, configuration ...........................................439
FBK ...........................................................................170
Field controller, control key beep ..............................497
Field file
CSCS ...................................................................1575
Geoid .................................................................1586
Field of view ..............................................................512
Filter
Activate/deactivate for codes ...............................111
Height smoothing .................................................286
Point, line and area codes ....................................111
Points, lines and areas ..........................................104
Filter setting, define ....................................................74
Filter symbol .............................................................104
Filter.. .........................................................................74
Areas .....................................................................75
Export ..........................................................160, 168
Lines ......................................................................75
Finding a target point ..............................................1300
Fine search ........................................................514, 516
Finished road level ....................................................975
Firmware file, directory ............................................1513
Firmware, current version ..........................................510
Viva Series, Index 1624
Firmware, upload ...................................................... 502
Firmware, version ..................................................... 510
FKP, Flächenkorrekturparameter ............................... 286
Following arrow, orientate to
Stakeout ............................................................ 1313
Format
Data storage device ............................................. 506
Export .................................................................. 158
Import .................................................................. 148
NMEA message .................................................. 1531
Format file, export ASCII ............................................ 158
Format files, directory ............................................. 1512
Forward in Survey Cross Section .............................. 1399
Free code ................................................................ 1573
Delete .................................................................. 103
Free coding ............................................................... 443
Frequency, change for radio ...................................... 336
Functions .................................................................. 511
Functions, main menu ................................................. 46
G
GAGAN .............................................................. 281, 288
gem file .................................................................. 1586
GeoC++ ..................................................................... 562
Geoid field file ........................................................ 1586
Directory ............................................................ 1513
Geoid model ............................................................. 143
Create from
Data storage device / internal memory ............ 146
Delete .................................................................. 145
Description .........................................................1585
Management, access ............................................144
View .....................................................................145
Geoid separation .....................................................1585
Geoid, height above ................................................1585
Geometric elements ................................................1011
Geometric ppm ............................................................58
GetPt .......................................................................1240
GGA .................................................................293, 1536
GGK .........................................................................1538
GGK(PT) ..................................................................1540
GGQ ........................................................................1542
GLL ..........................................................................1544
GNS .........................................................................1546
Go to Work! .................................................................46
Go To Work! Menu
Description .............................................................48
GPRS .........................................................................366
GPRS device
Requirements for using ........................................366
Supported ............................................................367
GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation ..........281, 288
GPS used for TPS Setup ...........................................1270
Grade
In ............................................................1045, 1046
Out .........................................................1045, 1047
Graph, showing satellites ..........................................382
Grid distance in COGO ...............................................569
Ground distance in COGO ..........................................569
Viva Series, Index 1625
Group
Codes .................................................................. 118
Coding
Thematical ...................................... 447, 453, 466
Job codes ............................................................... 69
GSA ......................................................................... 1548
GSI
Data ..................................................................... 315
Format ................................................................. 315
Output ................................................................. 315
Word information ................................................. 319
GSI file, directory .................................................... 1513
GSI16 ........................................................................ 149
GSI8 .......................................................................... 149
GSM .......................................................................... 324
GSM connection, configure ....................................... 325
GSV ......................................................................... 1550
GUS74 Laser Guide .................................................... 522
H
HdnPt.. ................................................................... 1409
Height
Design ....................................................... 989, 1098
Ellipsoidal ........................................................... 1585
Entered manually ................................................. 989
Entered manually, Roads .................................... 1098
Geoid ................................................................. 1585
Height layer of DTM ................................... 989, 1098
Hidden point measurement ................................ 1424
Individual point .................................. 989, 989, 1098
Info layer of DTM ................................................1098
Levelled ..............................................................1585
Mean sea level ....................................................1585
Orthometric ........................................................1585
Pole ......................................................................241
Priorities .............................................................1098
Road and Rail .......................................................989
Second height ....................................................1098
Height (aim to stake ht) ............................................944
Height filter ...............................................................286
Height mode .............................................................134
Height offset, stakeout ...........................................1311
Height smoothing ......................................................289
Height type
Current position .................................................1303
Point to be staked ..............................................1303
Hidden point measurement devices ...........................364
Supported ............................................................365
Hidden point measurement, heights ........................1424
Hidden point, connection ..........................................265
Hidden points ..........................................................1401
Averaging ...........................................................1403
Coding ................................................................1402
Method ..............................................................1404
Properties ..........................................................1402
Hinge point ...............................................................974
Hlth.. .................................................................207, 411
Horizontal alignment .......................................976, 1590
Create a bloss curve ..........................................1030
Viva Series, Index 1626
Create a curve ................................................... 1030
Create a straight ............................................... 1030
Edit ................................................................... 1019
Edit a bloss curve .............................................. 1030
Edit a curve ....................................................... 1030
Edit a straight ................................................... 1030
Delete element .................................................. 1024
Hot keys
Configure ............................................................. 439
Description ............................................................ 30
Hts.. ......................................................................... 151
I
ID ............................................................................ 1596
ID template ............................................................... 418
Create .................................................................. 422
Identification number ................................................ 493
Illumination ............................................................... 522
Import ......................................................................... 64
Format ................................................................. 148
Importers
Description ........................................................ 1143
Installing ............................................................ 1143
Include coordinate triplet in averaging ......................... 88
Increase point ID ....................................................... 422
Increasing NE, SE, SW, NW ........................................ 488
Incrementation ......................................................... 423
Point ID’s ............................................................. 422
Indefinite triangle ................................................... 1107
IndivID ............................1240, 1338, 1343, 1355, 1438
Individual stringline
Stakeout ............................................................1106
Individual stringlineInfo page .....................................909
Info page ..................................................................893
Initialisation ..................................................1342, 1591
Access ................................................................1348
Methods .............................................................1591
Moving ...............................................................1349
On known point .................................................1351
Static .................................................................1350
Instrument ..................................................................46
Instrument source ...................................................1592
Instrument, orientate to
Reference Line .....................................................778
Stakeout ............................................................1312
Interface, description ..............................................1592
Interference ..............................................................336
Internal memory ......................................................1511
Internet
Connection ...........................................................253
Control .................................................................343
Status ..................................................................402
Internet device
Requirements for using ........................................366
Supported ............................................................367
Intersection, COGO calculation method ......................600
Intfce
Status
Internet ...................................................402, 402
Viva Series, Index 1627
Remote ........................................................... 405
Rover .............................................................. 404
Inv.. .......................................... 596, 607, 612, 617, 622
Inverse, COGO calculation method ............................. 575
J
Job
Control job, Roads ................................................ 877
Create .................................................................... 54
Default .................................................................. 53
Digital Terrain Model (DTM) job, Roads ................. 878
Edit ........................................................................ 63
Management .......................................................... 53
Management, (Road, Rail, Tunnel) ........................ 946
Rail job, Roads ..................................................... 876
Tunnel job, Roads ................................................ 877
Working ................................................................. 53
Working job, Roads .............................................. 876
Job file, directory ..................................................... 1513
Jobs & Data ................................................................ 46
Joystick, move by ........................................................ 40
K
Keys, configure ........................................................... 30
Known backsight ..................................................... 1275
Known point, initialisation method .......................... 1592
L
Lambert 1 Parallel projection ..................................... 140
Lambert 2 Parallel projection ..................................... 140
LandXML
Data export .........................................................167
Export format .......................................................159
Language
Delete ..................................................................491
Select ...................................................................491
Upload .................................................................503
Language file, directory ...........................................1513
Laser plummet ..........................................................522
Last point, orientate to
Reference Line .....................................................778
Stakeout ............................................................1312
Layer
Select DTM, Stakeout ........................................1329
Road, Info page ....................................................931
Stakeout ............................................................1115
Layers .......................................................................952
Left rail .....................................................................990
Leica 4G, data format ................................................277
Leica Geosystems TPS prism system ..........................184
Leica SmartWorx Viva software, exit ............................46
Leica, data format .....................................................277
Length ........................................................................99
Levelled height ........................................................1585
LGO
Creation
Antenna records ..............................................230
Attributes ......................................................1567
Codes ............................................................1573
Viva Series, Index 1628
CSCS field files .............................................. 1575
DTM jobs ....................................................... 1328
Geoid field files ............................................. 1586
Quick codes .................................................... 445
Download
Coordinate systems ......................................... 124
Jobs .................................................................. 53
Upload
Coordinate systems ......................................... 124
Jobs .................................................................. 53
Licence file, directory .............................................. 1513
Licence key ............................................................... 562
Limit, exceeded
Absolute coordinate difference .............................. 88
Average ................................................................. 91
Limits, Tunnel ......................................................... 1221
Line
Create .................................................................... 93
Delete .................................................................... 75
Edit ........................................................................ 98
Orientate to
Reference line ................................................. 778
Stakeout ............................................. 1312, 1312
Reference ............................................................ 763
Line calculations, COGO calculation method .............. 629
Line code ................................................................ 1573
Filter .................................................................... 111
Line management ....................................................... 92
Line style
Coding ..................................................................121
For line/area code ..................................................71
New line .................................................................94
Linear ......................................................................1007
Lines, sorting and filter .............................................104
Linework ...........................................................120, 471
Using the linework field ........................................472
with thematical coding .........................................473
List reference stations ...............................................339
LLK ..........................................................................1552
LLQ .........................................................................1554
Loadable application ..................................................562
Lock ..........................................................................517
Log of messages .......................................................310
Log raw observations ................................194, 226, 415
Logging status ...........................................................397
Loss of Lock ..............................................................517
M
Main menu ..................................................................46
Management
Antennas ..............................................................213
Area .......................................................................92
Codelists ..............................................................114
Coordinate systems ..............................................124
Data .......................................................................72
Jobs ........................................................................53
Jobs (Road, Rail, Tunnel) .......................................946
Line ........................................................................92
Viva Series, Index 1629
Points .................................................................... 77
Prisms .................................................................. 181
Manual slope Road, Info page ................................... 920
Manual, validity ............................................................. 3
Manually entered height ................................. 989, 1098
MapView ................................................................... 542
Access ................................................................. 543
Area with focus, symbol ....................................... 550
Configure ............................................................. 544
Example of results in plot mode ........................... 558
Keys ..................................................................... 552
Line with focus, symbol ........................................ 550
North arrow ......................................................... 549
Point symbols ...................................................... 555
Point with focus, symbol ...................................... 550
Scale bar .............................................................. 549
Screen area .......................................................... 549
Select Lines and Areas ......................................... 556
Select Points, Lines and Areas .............................. 556
Softkeys .............................................................. 552
Symbol
Instrument station .......................................... 551
Reflectors ....................................................... 551
Rover .............................................................. 551
Toolbar
Description ..................................................... 552
Symbol ............................................................ 550
View results ......................................................... 558
Master-Auxiliary Correction ............................... 285, 285
Match points .....................................................687, 712
Matching points
Choose .................................................................723
Edit ......................................................................723
MAX ..........................................................................285
Mean page ..................................................................86
Access ....................................................................87
Mean sea level, height .............................................1585
Meas, class ..............................................................1570
Measure
Antenna height ....................................................229
Sets, sets of angles ............................................1244
Setup points .......................................................1282
Measure & target settings .........................................177
Measure mode
Fast ......................................................................178
Long range ...........................................................179
Standard ..............................................................178
Tracking ...............................................................179
Measure to ................................................................178
Measured points, properties
Reference line ......................................................764
Reference plane ...................................................842
Mechanical Reference Plane ......................................231
Memory
Device to be formatted ........................................507
Status ..................................................................378
Menu
Go To Work! ...........................................................48
Viva Series, Index 1630
My Favourites ......................................................... 32
Mercator projection ................................................... 140
Message log .............................................................. 310
Mismatch
Attribute .............................................................. 469
Code .................................................................... 468
Mode
Targeting ............................................................. 514
Mode, Calculator ....................................................... 523
Modem ..................................................................... 359
Control ................................................................. 333
Requirements for using ........................................ 359
Supported ............................................................ 359
Modify values in COGO .............................................. 694
Molodensky-Badekas ................................................ 134
Mountpoint ....................................................... 345, 540
Move by joystick ......................................................... 40
Moving initialisation method ................................... 1591
MRP .......................................................................... 231
MSAS ........................................................................ 281
MTSAT
Satellite-based Augmentation System .......... 281, 288
Multiple backsights .................................................. 1282
Multiple chainage ...................................................... 984
N
National Marine Electronics Association .................. 1531
Natural surface ......................................................... 974
Nav, class ................................................................ 1570
Negative offset, COGO .............................................. 594
Next available point ID
Real-time rover operations .................................1343
Static operations ................................................1338
NMEA ......................................................................1531
NMEA, connection .....................................................302
Nominal gauge ..........................................................990
None, class .............................................................1571
Non-loadable application ...........................................562
North, orientate to
Reference Line .....................................................778
Stakeout ..................................................1312, 1312
NTRIP ......................................................................1593
Number of satellites, used in solution 385, 386, 386, 386
O
Object
Delete ..................................................................103
Description .........................................................1596
Oblique Mercator projection ......................................139
Offset
Antenna
Input ...............................................................214
Vertical ....................................................229, 238
External angle .......................................................270
Hidden point measurements .................................268
Reference line ......................................................794
Reference plane ...................................................849
Stakeout, height .................................................1311
Toggel, Roads .....................................................1091
Viva Series, Index 1631
Offset point
Computation ...................................................... 1375
Configure ........................................................... 1379
Description ........................................................ 1357
ID ....................................................................... 1383
ID, Examples ...................................................... 1383
Offsets ........................................................... 194, 1002
Defining, Rail check ............................................ 1177
Sign convention ................................................... 998
Using offsets with Rail ....................................... 1168
Onestep transformation .......................................... 1605
Results ................................................................. 725
Orientate
Reference Line ..................................................... 777
Stakeout ............................................................ 1311
Orientate with compass .............................................. 44
Origin, reference plane ............................................. 849
Original ground ......................................................... 974
Orthometric height ................................................. 1585
Overbreak ................................................................. 999
Overlapping zones, Tunnel ...................................... 1221
Overwrite, code for auto points .............................. 1357
P
Parabola ................................................................. 1038
Parameters, set for transformation ........................... 713
Partial Bloss Curve ................................................... 1023
Pendular displacement ............................................ 1172
Pendulum length ........................................... 1171, 1172
Perpendicular .......................................................... 1007
Phase center variations, vertical ................................230
Pillar setup ................................................................233
Pin assignment ........................................................1514
Plumb line ...............................................................1007
Point
Add to line ...........................................................100
Auto .........................................................1357, 1357
Auxiliary .............................................................1403
Azimuth computation .........................................1418
COGO ...................................................................564
Create ....................................................................77
Delete ....................................................................73
Delete from line ...................................................100
Edit ........................................................................82
Height ................................................................1098
Hidden ...............................................................1401
Measured
Reference line .................................................764
Reference plane ..............................................842
Orientate to, Reference Line ................................778
Orientate to, Stakeout .......................................1312
Staked, Stakeout ................................................1303
Point code ...............................................................1573
Filter ....................................................................111
Point ID
Incrementation .....................................................422
Next available
Real-time rover operations ............................1343
Static operations ...........................................1338
Viva Series, Index 1632
Point management ...................................................... 77
Point symbols, MapView ............................................ 555
Points
Copy between jobs ............................................... 175
Sorting and filter .................................................. 104
Polar Stereographic projection .................................. 140
Pole
Height .......................................................... 241, 241
Setup ................................................................... 240
Port, description ..................................................... 1597
Portal ........................................................................ 999
Positioning Hz/V .......................................................... 42
Positive offset, COGO ................................................ 594
Post-processed kinematic ....................................... 1588
Power down .............................................................. 494
PowerSearch ............................................................. 515
ppm
Atmospheric ......................................................... 189
Geometric .............................................................. 58
Transformation results ................................. 725, 727
Prediction ......................................................... 185, 518
Advantages ......................................................... 288
Description .......................................................... 288
Recommended settings ........................................ 289
Priority of heights ..................................................... 989
Prism
Create .................................................................. 183
Default ................................................................ 181
Prism search ............................................................. 512
After prediction ....................................................518
Prism system
Leica Geosystems TPS ..........................................184
True zero ..............................................................184
Prisms
Management ........................................................181
PRN ...........................................................................381
Profile .....................................................................1582
Projection
Cassini ..................................................................140
Create ..................................................................141
Delete ..................................................................138
Double Stereographic ...........................................140
Edit ......................................................................141
Lambert 1 Parallel .................................................140
Lambert 2 Parallel .................................................140
Mercator ..............................................................140
Oblique Mercator ..................................................139
Polar Stereographic ..............................................140
Recall deleted default ...........................................139
RSO ......................................................................140
Transverse Mercator .............................................139
UTM .....................................................................139
Projection distortion ....................................................58
Projection management, access .................................138
Projections ................................................................138
Properties
Auto points ........................................................1358
COGO points .........................................................564
Viva Series, Index 1633
Cross section element ........................................ 1386
Hidden points .................................................... 1402
Measured points
Reference line ................................................. 764
Reference plane .............................................. 842
Offset points ..................................................... 1375
Sets of angles .................................................... 1231
Setup points ...................................................... 1261
Staked points ..................................................... 1303
Traverse points .................................................. 1442
PS ............................................................................. 515
360° search ......................................................... 516
Window ............................................................... 516
Pseudorandom Noise ................................................ 381
Q
Quadrant .................................................................. 488
Quick access to screens, configure ............................ 439
Quick code .............................................................. 1573
Quick coding ............................................................. 444
Quick Settings ............................................................. 34
R
Radio
Change channels .................................................. 336
Default ................................................................ 362
For GPS ................................................................ 360
For TPS ................................................................ 362
Interference ......................................................... 336
Supported .................................................... 360, 362
User defined .........................................................362
Version .................................................................389
Radio Link Protocol ....................................................328
Rail Check
Check height of lower rail ...................................1167
Checking a track .......................................1163, 1163
Rail Editor
Description .........................................................1143
Installing ............................................................1143
Rail, Info page ...........................................................938
RAW ..........................................................................170
Raw data logging .......................................................397
Raw observations, log ...............................194, 226, 415
RCS ...........................................................................519
Ready To Send ..........................................................372
Real-time ..................................................................275
Base ...................................................................1589
Rover .................................................................1589
Status ..................................................................385
Recall
Annotations .......................................................1344
Default
Attribute values ...........................................79, 95
Survey screen settings ...........................432, 1363
Deleted default
Antenna ..........................................................213
Coordinate system ..........................................127
Devices ............................................................369
Ellipsoid ...........................................................136
Viva Series, Index 1634
Projection ....................................................... 139
Target ............................................................. 182
Last used attribute values ................................ 79, 95
Previous result, COGO .......... 596, 607, 612, 617, 622
Receive data from third party device ......................... 260
Recorded point, check ................................................. 37
Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic projection ................ 140
Red laser ................................................................... 199
Visible .................................................................. 522
Ref, class ................................................................ 1569
Reference arc
Chosse ................................................................. 782
Define .................................................................. 783
Define offsets ...................................................... 794
Delete .................................................................. 788
Enter manually ..................................................... 783
Measure to .......................................................... 799
Select from job .................................................... 787
Stake to ............................................................... 812
Reference datum ........................................................ 59
Reference line
Choose ................................................................ 782
Configure ............................................................. 773
Define .................................................................. 783
Define offsets ...................................................... 794
Delete .................................................................. 788
Enter manually ..................................................... 783
Measure to .......................................................... 799
Select from job .................................................... 787
Stake to ...............................................................812
Reference plane
Application ...........................................................842
Tilted ....................................................................844
Reference point ..............................................764, 1083
Reference point surface ..........................................1088
Refraction
Coefficient ...........................................................191
Correction ............................................................191
Relock .......................................................................518
Remote connection, configuration .............................310
Remote point ..........................................................1436
Access ................................................................1438
Configuration .....................................................1440
Use ....................................................................1440
Report sheet
Directory ............................................................1512
Report sheet, create name .....573, 780, 862, 903, 1236,
1268, 1314, 1454, 1482
Resection ................................................................1287
Residual
Distribution COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale ...............572
Distribution throughout transformation area ........706
Results ....................................................................1469
Sets of angles
One face .......................................................1253
Two faces ......................................................1249
Traverse .............................................................1464
Traverse adjustment ...........................................1475
Viva Series, Index 1635
Resurvey staked point ............................................. 1325
Reticule ..................................................................... 200
Reticule illumination .................................................. 200
Retry ......................................................................... 513
Right rail ................................................................... 990
RINEX file, directory ................................................ 1513
RLP ........................................................................... 328
RmtHt ..................................................................... 1354
Road alignment file ................................................... 876
Road job, new ......................................................... 1063
Robotic targeting mode ............................................ 179
Rotate, MapView ....................................................... 545
Rotation Point ........................................................... 999
Rotations, set for transformation ............................. 714
RPN mode ................................................................. 523
RS232 ....................................................................... 363
RSLT1 ............................................................... 614, 619
RSLT2 ............................................................... 614, 619
RSO projection .......................................................... 140
RTCM
Data format ......................................................... 277
V3 ........................................................................ 277
RTK Profile
Create new .......................................................... 202
Delete .......................................................... 204, 205
Edit ...................................................................... 202
Select another ..................................................... 202
RTS ........................................................................... 372
Run ...........................................1240, 1338, 1343, 1355
RW5 ..........................................................................170
S
S/N ............................................................................381
Same Direction, Survey Cross Section ......................1385
Satellite status ..........................................................380
Satellite tracking, settings .................................206, 409
Satellites
Health ..........................................................208, 411
Number used in solution ..............385, 386, 386, 386
SBAS, description ......................................................287
Scale
Set for transformation .........................................714
Transformation results .................................725, 727
Scale factor, combined ..............................................741
Scan ........................................................................1005
Scan, Tunnel ............................................................1198
Search Windows ........................................................185
Segment
Slope distance ...................................................1052
Slope ratio ........................................................1052
Select DTM layer ......................................................1329
Select points, sets of angles ....................................1240
Serial number ............................................................509
Set orientation ........................................................1275
Set-D
Coordinate system ...............................................127
Ellipsoid ................................................................136
Projection .............................................................139
Transformation .....................................................132
Viva Series, Index 1636
Sets of angles ......................................................... 1229
Access ............................................................... 1232
Configuration ..................................................... 1235
Measure sets ..................................................... 1244
Menu ................................................................. 1233
Results
One face ....................................................... 1253
Two faces ..................................................... 1249
Select points ...................................................... 1240
Setup
Access ............................................................... 1262
Application ......................................................... 1259
Configuration ..................................................... 1263
Known backsight ................................................ 1275
Measure target points ........................................ 1282
Methods ............................................................ 1275
Properties of points ........................................... 1261
Resection ........................................................... 1287
Set orientation ................................................... 1275
Setup on TPS using GPS .......................................... 1270
Setup reminder ....................................................... 1273
Shift
Constant .............................................................. 965
Cross slope .......................................................... 969
Linear .................................................................. 965
Parabolic .............................................................. 965
Reverse ................................................................ 965
Sign convention ................................................... 968
Shift, Rotate & Scale, COGO ...................................... 668
Shifts ......................................................................1007
For Roads .............................................................963
Set for transformation .........................................714
Shoulder ....................................................................974
Sign convention .......................................................1008
Signal to noise ratio ..................................................381
Single Point Position ..................................................555
Skip point
Sets of Angles ....................................................1245
Stakeout ............................................................1325
Skyplot ......................................................................382
Slope .........................................................................978
Distance
Hidden point measurements ..........................1421
Slope Road
Info page ..............................................................920
Slope, key ...............................................................1421
SmartAntenna firmware, upload ................................502
SmartCodes ...............................................................458
Assigning codes ............................................464, 466
Code Block ...........................................................464
Configuration .......................................................459
Copying code block ...............................................467
Smoothing heights ....................................................286
Socket .....................................................................1514
Sockets ...................................................................1522
Soldner Cassini projection ..........................................140
Sort
Codes
Viva Series, Index 1637
Codelist management ...................................... 118
Data management .......................................... 112
Points, lines and areas ......................................... 104
Sort settings, define ................................................... 74
Source .................................................................... 1598
Space-Based Augmentation System .......................... 287
Spiral
In ...................................................................... 1601
Out ................................................................... 1601
Spiral parameter A .................................................. 1565
SPP ........................................................................... 555
Stake
Alignment ............................................................ 828
Height difference ..................................... 1096, 1170
Offset ...................................................... 1096, 1170
To alignment ........................................................ 830
Stake mode, Roads ................................................... 880
Stake offset .............................................................. 981
Sign convention ................................................... 982
Stake out
Chainage and offset ........................................... 1102
Cross slope ........................................................ 1109
Direct ................................................................... 981
Indirect ................................................................ 981
Stringline ........................................................... 1104
Stake tunnel ............................................................. 873
Staked points
Average ............................................................. 1304
Coding ............................................................... 1303
Properties, Stakeout ...........................................1303
Stakeout
Configure ...........................................................1307
Crown ................................................................1113
Definition .....................................................872, 872
Difference limit exceeded ...................................1325
Individual stringline .............................................1106
Layer, Roads ......................................................1115
To centre line .......................................................996
To rail ...................................................................997
Standard deviation ..................................................1580
GPS ....................................................................1577
Standard mode ..........................................................523
Start up .....................................................................494
Static ......................................................................1587
Initialisation method ...........................................1591
Station ......................................................................975
Equation ...............................................................983
Station setup, delete in Traverse .............................1449
Station to dial
Configure .............................................................348
Create ..................................................................350
Edit ......................................................................350
Station, definition .....................................................990
Status .......................................................................375
Connections .........................................................401
Store, auto points ...................................................1361
Stored key .................................................................469
Straight ...................................................................1038
Viva Series, Index 1638
Stringline .......................................................... 948, 977
Stake out ........................................................... 1104
Stringline Road, Info page ......................................... 904
Sub class ................................................................. 1601
Sun ......................................................................... 1417
Azimuth computation ......................................... 1416
Orientate to
Reference Line ................................................ 778
Stakeout ....................................................... 1312
Superelevation .................................................. 991, 999
Superelevation base .................................................. 990
Surface ..................................................................... 979
DTM ..................................................................... 979
Layer ................................................................... 980
Surface, delete ........................................................ 1490
Survey
Access ................................. 1336, 1340, 1346, 1353
Auto points ........................................................ 1357
Default screen ................................................... 1353
Hidden points .................................................... 1401
Post-processed kinematic operations ................. 1336
Real-time rover operations ................................. 1340
Static operations ................................................ 1336
Status TPS ............................................................ 376
Survey Cross Section
Direction ............................................................ 1399
Methods ............................................................ 1385
Survey GPS
Application general ............................................ 1336
Points .................................................................1336
Survey remote point, TPS ........................................1438
Survey screen page ...................................................431
Survey TPS
Application general .............................................1353
Points .................................................................1353
Remote point .....................................................1436
Symbols, for points in MapView .................................555
System ......................................................................506
System file, directory ..............................................1513
System information, status .......................................509
System1200, backwards compatible ........................1512
T
Talker ID ..................................................................1531
Tangent ...................................................................1038
Target
Default .................................................................181
Recall deleted default ...........................................182
Target height, hidden point measurements .............1424
Target point ..............................................................765
Find ....................................................................1300
Task, Roads ...............................................................972
Template, Survey Cross Section .....................1384, 1387
Text ...........................................................................496
Thematical coding .....................................................442
Time slicing ...............................................................300
Time stamp ...............................................................444
Timed measurement ................................................1346
Toe ...........................................................................974
Viva Series, Index 1639
Toggle offset .......................................................... 1091
Tolerances, Traverse ............................................... 1453
Tools Menu
For Rail .............................................................. 1180
Top ........................................................................... 974
Touch screen on, off ................................................. 497
TPS Corrections ......................................................... 189
TPS Settings ................................................................ 34
Track ......................................................................... 990
Centre line ........................................................... 990
Definition of a single track ................................... 990
Definition of multiple tracks ................................. 994
Transfer objects ........................................................ 499
Transformation
Create .................................................................. 133
Delete .................................................................. 131
Description ........................................................ 1603
Edit ...................................................................... 133
Requirements ............................................. 698, 1603
Set parameters .................................................... 713
Transformation management, access ........................ 131
Transformation model ............................................... 134
Transformation parameters ..................................... 1603
Transformations ........................................................ 131
Transverse Mercator projection ................................. 139
Traveller .................................................................. 1086
Traverse
Application ......................................................... 1442
Backsight screen; Backsight, traverse ................. 1457
Close traverse ....................................................1459
Configuration .....................................................1451
Continuing an existing traverse ...........................1457
Create ................................................................1445
Delete station setup ...........................................1449
Edit ....................................................................1445
Point results .......................................................1464
Start traverse .....................................................1455
Traverse point, averaging ........................................1443
Traverse, COGO calculation method ...........................593
Triplet .....................................................................1575
Tripod setup ..............................................................238
True zero prism system .............................................184
Tunnel centreline .....................................................1188
Tunnel Profile Editor ................................................1189
Layer details view ...............................................1190
Profile details view .............................................1189
Two real-time devices ........................................358, 361
Twostep transformation ..........................................1609
Results .................................................................725
Type in new attribute ................................................119
U
Underbreak ...............................................................999
Universal Transverse Mercator projection ...................139
Update coordinate system .........................................703
Upload
Application ...........................................................502
Firmware ..............................................................502
Language .............................................................503
Viva Series, Index 1640
User ............................................................................ 47
Using 2 Bearings, hidden point measurements ........ 1405
Using 2 Distances, hidden point measurements ...... 1406
UTM projection .......................................................... 139
V
Verge ........................................................................ 974
Versions of system firmware ..................................... 510
Vertical alignment ..................................................... 976
Create a curve ................................................... 1042
Create a parabola .............................................. 1042
Create a straight ............................................... 1042
Delete an element ............................................ 1024
Edit ................................................................... 1019
Edit a curve ....................................................... 1042
Edit a parabola .................................................. 1042
Edit a straight ................................................... 1042
Vertical offset, antenna .................................... 229, 238
Vertical plane ............................................................ 848
View
File ....................................................................... 508
Geoid model ........................................................ 145
Points, lines, areas, free code stored in job ............ 73
Virtual Reference Station .......................................... 286
Volume Calculations, end application ....................... 1494
VRS ........................................................................... 286
VTG ......................................................................... 1558
W
WAAS ........................................................ 280, 281, 287
WGS84 ....................................................................1613
Wide Area Augmentation System .......................280, 287
Wildcard ....................................................................107
Wizard for RTK Rover settings ...................................201
Work Settings... .........................................................418
Working style
Default .................................................................479
Description ...........................................................479
User defined .........................................................479
Wizard ..................................................................479
Working style file, directory .....................................1512
Z
ZDA .........................................................................1560
ZigZag, Survey Cross Section ....................................1385
Zoom ........................................................................552
Window ................................................................553
Total Quality Management: Our commitment to total customer satisfaction.
Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland, has been certi-
fied as being equipped with a quality system which meets the
International Standards of Quality Management and Quality
Systems (ISO standard 9001) and Environmental Management
Systems (ISO standard 14001).
Ask your local Leica Geosystems dealer for more information about our TQM
program.
Leica Geosystems AG
Heinrich-Wild-Strasse
CH-9435 Heerbrugg
Switzerland
Phone +41 71 727 31 31
www.leica-geosystems.com
772940-1.0.0en
Original text
Printed in Switzerland
© 2009Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland

Navigation menu